WO2016051528A1 - Bookbinding device, paper conveyance device, and cutting device - Google Patents

Bookbinding device, paper conveyance device, and cutting device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016051528A1
WO2016051528A1 PCT/JP2014/076160 JP2014076160W WO2016051528A1 WO 2016051528 A1 WO2016051528 A1 WO 2016051528A1 JP 2014076160 W JP2014076160 W JP 2014076160W WO 2016051528 A1 WO2016051528 A1 WO 2016051528A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
paper
sheet
plate
cover
transport
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2014/076160
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
志真子 中井
雅士 加藤
和馬 宝上
弘 ▲高▼見
山本 稔
山口 晃志郎
Original Assignee
ブラザー工業株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by ブラザー工業株式会社 filed Critical ブラザー工業株式会社
Priority to PCT/JP2014/076160 priority Critical patent/WO2016051528A1/en
Publication of WO2016051528A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016051528A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B26HAND CUTTING TOOLS; CUTTING; SEVERING
    • B26DCUTTING; DETAILS COMMON TO MACHINES FOR PERFORATING, PUNCHING, CUTTING-OUT, STAMPING-OUT OR SEVERING
    • B26D1/00Cutting through work characterised by the nature or movement of the cutting member or particular materials not otherwise provided for; Apparatus or machines therefor; Cutting members therefor
    • B26D1/01Cutting through work characterised by the nature or movement of the cutting member or particular materials not otherwise provided for; Apparatus or machines therefor; Cutting members therefor involving a cutting member which does not travel with the work
    • B26D1/04Cutting through work characterised by the nature or movement of the cutting member or particular materials not otherwise provided for; Apparatus or machines therefor; Cutting members therefor involving a cutting member which does not travel with the work having a linearly-movable cutting member
    • B26D1/06Cutting through work characterised by the nature or movement of the cutting member or particular materials not otherwise provided for; Apparatus or machines therefor; Cutting members therefor involving a cutting member which does not travel with the work having a linearly-movable cutting member wherein the cutting member reciprocates
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B42BOOKBINDING; ALBUMS; FILES; SPECIAL PRINTED MATTER
    • B42CBOOKBINDING
    • B42C11/00Casing-in
    • B42C11/04Machines or equipment for casing-in or applying covers to books
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B42BOOKBINDING; ALBUMS; FILES; SPECIAL PRINTED MATTER
    • B42CBOOKBINDING
    • B42C19/00Multi-step processes for making books
    • B42C19/02Multi-step processes for making books starting with single sheets
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B42BOOKBINDING; ALBUMS; FILES; SPECIAL PRINTED MATTER
    • B42CBOOKBINDING
    • B42C9/00Applying glue or adhesive peculiar to bookbinding
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H29/00Delivering or advancing articles from machines; Advancing articles to or into piles
    • B65H29/20Delivering or advancing articles from machines; Advancing articles to or into piles by contact with rotating friction members, e.g. rollers, brushes, or cylinders
    • B65H29/22Delivering or advancing articles from machines; Advancing articles to or into piles by contact with rotating friction members, e.g. rollers, brushes, or cylinders and introducing into a pile
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65HHANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL, e.g. SHEETS, WEBS, CABLES
    • B65H37/00Article or web delivery apparatus incorporating devices for performing specified auxiliary operations
    • B65H37/02Article or web delivery apparatus incorporating devices for performing specified auxiliary operations for applying adhesive

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a bookbinding apparatus, a sheet conveying apparatus, and a cutting apparatus.
  • a bookbinding device Conventionally, a bookbinding device, a paper transport device, and a cutting device are known.
  • the bookbinding apparatus disclosed in Patent Document 1 the intermediate sheets stacked by the stacking mechanism are transported in the horizontal direction toward the vertical transport path.
  • Two covers are supplied from the cover supply mechanism to the vertical conveyance path.
  • One end side of the supplied two cover sheets is attached to the end side of the middle paper with a binding tape.
  • a cover that covers the two covers is supplied from the cover supply mechanism to the vertical conveyance path.
  • the inner paper with the two cover sheets attached is wrapped in the cover by being conveyed in the horizontal direction toward the supplied cover.
  • the three edges the so-called top side, ground side, and fore edge side
  • the booklet are cut on the rotary table.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a bookbinding apparatus, a sheet conveying apparatus, and a cutting apparatus that can suppress at least one of complicated and large-sized apparatus structure.
  • the bookbinding apparatus is movable in the first direction and the second direction, and can stack a plurality of sheets substantially in parallel with the third direction in a predetermined position,
  • the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions
  • the third direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction
  • the stacking means is in the predetermined position.
  • the adhesive portion can be formed on a specific end surface of the sheet bundle, the sheet bundle is the plurality of sheets stacked by the stacking unit, and the specific end surface is an end surface of the sheet bundle on the first direction side.
  • the cover When the cover is capable of holding the adhesive portion forming means and the cover, and the stacking means is moved in the first direction from the predetermined position, the cover is formed via the adhesive portion formed on the specific end surface.
  • a cover remover that can be attached to the paper bundle.
  • the second direction side edge of the booklet that is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached when the stacking means is moved in the second direction from the predetermined position, and the fourth direction side.
  • the fourth direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction, and
  • the fifth direction includes cutting means that is opposite to the fourth direction.
  • a sheet conveying apparatus includes a sheet stacking unit having a placement surface that is a plane on which supplied sheets are stacked, and transports the sheet substantially horizontally toward the sheet stacking unit.
  • a conveying means capable of discharging the sheet above the placement surface, and a sheet provided above the placement surface and discharged toward the placement surface by the conveyance means.
  • a member that comes into contact with the first end portion from below, and the first end portion is a contact member that is an end portion in a first direction that is orthogonal to the transport direction of the paper and that is substantially horizontal; Restricting movement of the sheet in the second direction from the first restriction position by contacting the second end of the sheet that extends in a substantially vertical direction along the position and falls toward the placement surface.
  • the second direction is opposite to the first direction.
  • the second end portion is an end portion of the second direction, the first stop position and a first stop member is a proper position of said predetermined second end.
  • the paper transport device after forming an image on the first surface of the paper, transports the paper by a first transport amount, discharges the paper from a discharge port, and further discharges the paper.
  • Image formation including a mechanism that takes in from an outlet, forms an image on a second surface of the sheet opposite to the first surface, and then conveys the sheet by a second conveyance amount and discharges the sheet from the discharge port.
  • the first transport amount is a transport amount of the paper that discharges only a part of the paper from the discharge port
  • the second transport amount is the paper that discharges the entire paper from the discharge port.
  • a sheet conveying device for conveying the sheet discharged from the discharge port of the image forming apparatus, and a plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of the discharge port.
  • the surface on which the discharged paper can be placed, and the discharge A conveying plate having a guide surface that is a surface extending in a guide direction, which is a direction away from the mouth, and the guide surface downstream of the guide position in the guide direction and upstream of the second position in the guide direction.
  • a rotating body that is rotatable along a direction in which the sheet is conveyed downstream in the guiding direction, and the first position of the sheet conveyed in the first conveying amount is in the guiding direction.
  • the downstream end is a position on the guide surface on which the sheet is placed, and the second position is the guide on which the downstream end in the guide direction of the sheet transported by the second transport amount is placed.
  • a first conveying roller that is a position on the surface.
  • a paper transport device is a plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of a discharge port of an image forming apparatus capable of printing an image on a paper, and places the paper discharged from the discharge port
  • a conveyance plate having a guide surface that is a surface that extends in a guide direction that is a possible surface and a direction away from the discharge port; and the sheet that is provided along the guide surface is transported downstream in the guide direction.
  • a first conveying roller that is a rotating body that is rotatable in a direction, and the first conveying roller is rotatably supported, and at least one of the upstream side and the downstream side in the guiding direction along the guiding surface, And a support member that is a member capable of changing the position of the first transport roller.
  • a bookbinding apparatus includes a holding unit capable of holding a plurality of supplied sheets stacked in a first direction, and a sheet bundle that is the plurality of sheets held by the holding unit.
  • a paper aligning means capable of aligning a sheet bundle end surface, which is an end surface in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction, substantially flush along the first direction, and the first direction and the third direction.
  • a peripheral surface that can be rotated about an axis that intersects the direction and is orthogonal to the second direction, and to which an adhesive can be attached; the third direction is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction
  • An application roller that is in a direction to be fed, a supply unit that is capable of supplying the adhesive to the peripheral surface, and the paper aligning unit that aligns the end face of the sheet bundle substantially flush with the holding unit and the application roller.
  • the bookbinding apparatus is capable of holding a sheet bundle that is a plurality of sheets stacked in the first direction, wherein the first direction is opposite to the second direction and the third direction.
  • a sheet holding means including a first portion which is provided on a fourth direction side of the sheet holding means and is a part of a cover sheet supplied to a predetermined position with a first holding force from the fourth direction and the fifth direction.
  • the fourth direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction
  • the fifth direction is a direction opposite to the fourth direction
  • the first holding force is determined by the first portion in the first direction.
  • a first clamping means that is a force that hinders the movement to move to the first clamping means, and a second portion of the cover sheet that is disposed to face the first clamping means in the third direction and is supplied to the predetermined position.
  • the second portion is a part of the cover located on the third direction side with respect to the first portion, and the second holding force is a second clamping force that prevents the movement of the second portion in the first direction.
  • the first sandwiching means can be transported substantially parallel to the second direction from the predetermined position to the target position, and the target position is sandwiched by the first sandwiching means and the second sandwiching means.
  • the target end surface is a first driving means that is an end face in the fourth direction of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means, and the first clamping
  • the first portion is clamped with the first holding force of the first value in the means
  • the second portion is clamped with the second holding force of the second value in the second clamping means.
  • the drive means conveys the first clamping means with the first conveyance force, and the front
  • the first control means in which the first holding force of the first value is larger than the second holding force of the second value, and the first transport force is larger than the second holding force of the second value.
  • cover attachment means capable of attaching the cover.
  • the cutting device is a blade that extends in a substantially horizontal first direction and cuts a sheet bundle in a substantially vertical direction, and the sheet bundle is stacked in a substantially vertical direction.
  • a first cutter that is paper a blade that extends in parallel with the first cutter and is opposed to the first cutter from a second direction, and is a blade for cutting the paper bundle in a substantially vertical direction,
  • the second direction has a second cutter which is a direction orthogonal to the first direction, and a first alignment surface which is a surface extending substantially in the vertical direction and the first direction, and the first alignment surface is a first alignment position.
  • first alignment position is a position separated in the third direction from the reference center position by a distance approximately half of the paper size, and the third alignment position.
  • the direction is opposite to the second direction, and the paper size is the size of the paper.
  • the length in the second direction or the third direction, the reference center position is a center position between the first cutter and the second cutter, and the first standby position is from the first alignment position.
  • the first aligning means that are spaced apart in the third direction.
  • any one of a bookbinding apparatus, a sheet conveying apparatus, and a cutting apparatus that can suppress at least one of complicated and large-sized apparatus structure.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a bookbinding apparatus 1.
  • FIG. 1 is a front view of a bookbinding apparatus 1.
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a paper alignment mechanism 100, a bundle operation mechanism 200, a bundle operation mechanism 200, and a glue application mechanism 300 in an initial state.
  • FIG. 3 is a left side view of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in a paper stacking process. It is a right side view of the table 110, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in the booklet transport process.
  • 2 is a front view of a first printer 3 and a paper supply unit 5.
  • FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the paper supply unit 5 with a path plate 51A in a restriction position.
  • FIG. 4 is a left side view of the roller driving unit 80.
  • FIG. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the sheet supply unit 5 in which the mounting position of the roller driving unit 80 is changed.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the sheet supply unit 5 in which a path plate 51A is rotated.
  • FIG. 6 is a left side view of the paper alignment mechanism 100 and the bundle operation mechanism 200 in the paper stacking process.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a paper alignment mechanism 100 in a paper stacking process. It is a right side view of the paper alignment mechanism 100 in the initial state.
  • FIG. 3 is a front view of a paper supply unit 5 and a paper alignment mechanism 100.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a right paper alignment unit 104.
  • FIG. It is a perspective view of the movable part 301.
  • FIG. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the movable part 301.
  • FIG. It is a cross-sectional view of the paste application part 340.
  • 4 is a rear view of the glue application mechanism 300, the table 110, and the sheet bundle 8.
  • FIG. 6 is a left side view of the second printer 4, the cover sheet supply unit 6, and the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 in an initial state.
  • 3 is a plan view of a movable unit 401.
  • FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged plan view of an upper clamp 430.
  • FIG. It is a top view of the cutting mechanism 500 and the table 110 in a booklet conveyance process.
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a cutting mechanism 500.
  • FIG. 3 is a front view of a cutting mechanism 500.
  • FIG. 6 is a right side view of the booklet transport mechanism 600.
  • FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a hand unit 640.
  • FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a process in which a sheet of paper 8A is supplied to the table 110.
  • FIG. 6 is a right side view of the paper alignment mechanism 100 in a paper stacking process. It is a left view of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in a paste application
  • FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a mode in which a glue application roller 350 applies glue 7 to a sheet bundle 8.
  • FIG. 6 is a left side view of the second printer 4, the cover sheet supply unit 6, and the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 in the cover sheet transport process. It is a flowchart of a 1st cover conveyance process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of operation
  • FIG. FIG. 38 is a left side view of the second printer 4, the cover sheet supply unit 6, and the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 in the cover sheet transport process following FIG. 37.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a cover holding mechanism 400 that holds a cover 9.
  • FIG. 6 is a left side view of the table 110 and a cover holding mechanism 400 in a cover sheet transport process. It is a flowchart of a 2nd cover conveyance process.
  • FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a cover holding mechanism 400 that holds a cover 9. It is a left view of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in a cover sheet sticking process.
  • FIG. 46 is a left side view of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in the cover sticking step following FIG. 45. It is a flowchart of a booklet operation process.
  • FIG. 47 is a left side view of the bookbinding device 1 in the cover sticking step following FIG. 46.
  • FIG. 49 is a left side view of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in the cover sticking step following FIG. 48.
  • FIG. 50 is a left side view of the bookbinding device 1 in the cover sticking step following FIG. 49.
  • FIG. 6 is a right side view of the table 110, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in the booklet transport process following FIG.
  • FIG. 52 is a right side view of the table 110, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in the booklet transport process following FIG.
  • FIG. 53 is a right side view of the table 110, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in the booklet transport process following FIG.
  • FIG. 54 is a plan view of the cutting mechanism 500 and the table 110 in the booklet transport process and the cutting process following FIG. 53.
  • FIG. 55 is a plan view of the cutting mechanism 500 and the table 110 in the cutting process following FIG.
  • FIG. 56 is a plan view of the cutting mechanism 500 and the table 110 in the cutting process following FIG. It is a front view of the cutting mechanism 500 in a cutting process. It is a flowchart of a position adjustment process. It is a perspective view of glue application mechanism 1300 in a modification.
  • FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a mode in which a glue application roller 350 applies glue 7 to a sheet bundle 8 in a modified example.
  • the lower left side, the upper right side, the upper left side, the lower right side, the upper side, and the lower side in FIG. 1 are defined as the front side, the rear side, the left side, the right side, the upper side, and the lower side of the bookbinding apparatus 1, respectively.
  • the vertical direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1 is substantially parallel to the vertical direction.
  • the front / rear and left / right directions of the bookbinding apparatus 1 are substantially parallel to the horizontal direction orthogonal to the vertical direction.
  • the front-rear direction and the left-right direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1 are directions substantially orthogonal to each other.
  • FIG. 4 shows an operation process of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in a left side view with some components omitted from the bookbinding apparatus 1 (the same applies to FIGS. 31, 45, 46, and 48 to 50 described later).
  • FIG. 5 shows a positional relationship among the table 110, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in the right side view, and the right cutting unit 520 and the transport unit 602 are omitted (described later with reference to FIGS. The same applies to FIG. 53).
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 includes a main body frame 2, a first printer 3, a second printer 4, a paper supply unit 5, a cover supply unit 6, a paper alignment mechanism 100, a bundle operation mechanism 200, a glue application mechanism 300, a cover holding mechanism 400, a cutting A mechanism 500 and a control unit 900 are included.
  • the main body frame 2 has a rectangular parallelepiped frame structure.
  • the installation base 25 is a plate-like body extending leftward from the lower left frame of the main body frame 2.
  • the first printer 3 is placed on the installation table 25. That is, the first printer 3 is arranged on the left side of the main body frame 2.
  • the top plate 21 is a plate-like body that covers the upper surface of the main body frame 2.
  • the second printer 4 is placed on the top plate 21. That is, the second printer 4 is disposed above the main body frame 2.
  • the first printer 3 is a printer that prints images on a plurality of sheets 8A (see FIG. 6) constituting the contents (or text) of the booklet created by the bookbinding apparatus 1.
  • the first printer 3 has a paper discharge port 3A that is an opening through which printed paper is discharged.
  • the first printer 3 is a laser printer capable of printing an image at high speed on thin and standard size paper suitable for the contents of the booklet (for example, A4 size plain paper).
  • the paper discharge port 3A is provided on the upper surface of the first printer 3, and discharges the printed paper 8A in the upper right direction.
  • the second printer 4 is a printer that prints an image on a cover 9 (see FIG. 37) of a booklet created by the bookbinding apparatus 1.
  • the cover sheet 9 has a size and a shape that can cover a sheet bundle 8 (see FIG. 4) described later.
  • the second printer 4 has a cover discharge port 4A which is an opening through which a printed cover 9 is discharged.
  • the second printer 4 is an inkjet printer capable of printing an image with high image quality on a thick and large size paper suitable for a cover (for example, A3 size special paper).
  • the cover discharge port 4A is provided on the front surface of the second printer 4 and discharges the printed cover 9 in the forward direction.
  • the paper supply unit 5 conveys the paper 8A discharged from the paper discharge port 3A to the paper alignment mechanism 100 from the left side of the main body frame 2.
  • the front cover supply port 22 is provided at the front edge of the top plate 21.
  • the cover sheet supply port 22 is a rectangular opening that penetrates the top plate 21 in the vertical direction and extends in the horizontal direction.
  • the cover sheet supply port 22 is located in front of the second printer 4.
  • the cover sheet supply unit 6 is provided on the top plate 21 and is located between the cover sheet supply port 22 and the second printer 4.
  • the cover sheet supply unit 6 includes a pair of guide plates 62 and 63 disposed to face each other in the vertical direction.
  • the printed cover sheet 9 discharged from the cover sheet discharge port 4 ⁇ / b> A is inserted between the pair of guide plates 62 and 63.
  • the pair of guide plates 62 and 63 guide the printed cover 9 toward the cover supply port 22.
  • the paper alignment mechanism 100, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the glue application mechanism 300, the cover holding mechanism 400, the cutting mechanism 500, and the control unit 900 are arranged inside the main body frame 2. Schematically, each mechanism has the following positional relationship with the paper alignment mechanism 100 as a reference.
  • the bundle operation mechanism 200 is on the upper side of the paper alignment mechanism 100 (see FIGS. 3 to 5).
  • the cover holding mechanism 400 is on the front side of the paper alignment mechanism 100 (see FIGS. 1 and 4).
  • the cutting mechanism 500 is on the rear side of the paper alignment mechanism 100 (see FIGS. 1 and 5).
  • the glue application mechanism 300 is located between a table 110 at a first transport position, which will be described later, and a cover holding mechanism 400 (see FIGS. 1 and 3). However, a part of the cutting mechanism 500 protrudes to the rear side of the main body frame 2.
  • a part of the cover holding mechanism 400 can advance to the upper side of the main body frame 2 through the cover supply port 22 as described later.
  • the paper alignment mechanism 100 is a mechanism for holding the paper bundle 8 and performing paper alignment.
  • the sheet bundle 8 is a plurality of sheets 8A stacked in a predetermined stacking direction (in the present embodiment, the up-down direction).
  • the alignment of the sheet bundle 8 is an operation of aligning the end face of the sheet bundle substantially flush along the stacking direction.
  • the sheet bundle end surface is an end surface of the sheet bundle 8 in a direction orthogonal to the stacking direction (in the present embodiment, the front-rear direction and the left-right direction).
  • the bundle operation mechanism 200 is a mechanism that performs various operations (for example, presser, conveyance, etc.) on the sheet bundle 8 held by the paper alignment mechanism 100.
  • the glue application mechanism 300 is a mechanism that forms an adhesive portion on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 to which the cover sheet 9 can be attached.
  • the front end face of the sheet bundle 8 is the front sheet bundle end face.
  • the cover holding mechanism 400 is a mechanism for holding the cover 9 supplied from the cover supply unit 6 and sticking the held cover 9 to the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8.
  • the cutting mechanism 500 is a mechanism for cutting a booklet 10 (see FIG. 5), which is a sheet bundle 8 to which a cover 9 is attached, according to a specified size.
  • the control unit 900 is a controller including a CPU, ROM, RAM, and the like not shown.
  • the CPU controls the bookbinding operation of the bookbinding apparatus 1 based on a program stored in the ROM.
  • the control unit 900 may be a computer (for example, a personal computer, a microcomputer, or an ASIC) that can execute control according to the present disclosure.
  • the first printer 3, the second printer 4, the sheet supply unit 5, the cover sheet supply unit 6, the sheet alignment mechanism 100, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the glue application mechanism 300, the cover sheet holding mechanism 400, the cutting mechanism 500, and the control All the parts 900 are supported by the main body frame 2.
  • the user can move the bookbinding apparatus 1 integrally through a plurality of casters 29 provided at the four corners of the lower surface of the main body frame 2.
  • FIG. 6 schematically shows the internal structure of the first printer 3.
  • a pair of guide portions 59 and a pair of connecting plates 57A to 57C described later are omitted.
  • the first printer 3 includes a paper feed cassette 31, a paper feed roller 32, a process unit 35, and a paper discharge roller 37.
  • the paper feed cassette 31 accommodates the paper 8A before printing.
  • the process unit 35 forms a toner image by a known electrophotographic method.
  • the paper feed roller 32 conveys the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A stored in the paper feed cassette 31 to the process unit 35.
  • the paper discharge roller 37 discharges the printed paper 8A from the paper discharge port 3A in the upper right direction.
  • a paper discharge tray 3B that receives the paper 8A discharged from the paper discharge port 3A is provided on the upper surface of the first printer 3 and on the right side of the paper discharge port 3A.
  • the path 33 is a path for printing the image of the paper 8A.
  • the path 33 extends from the paper feed cassette 31 to the paper discharge port 3A through the paper supply roller 32, the process unit 35, and the paper discharge roller 37 in this order.
  • the path 34 is a path for inverting the printed paper 8 ⁇ / b> A and re-transporting it to the process unit 35.
  • An upstream end of the path 34 branches from the path 33 at a branch point 36 provided between the process unit 35 and the paper discharge roller 37.
  • the downstream end of the path 34 joins the path 33 between the paper feed roller 32 and the process unit 35.
  • the paper 8A accommodated in the paper feed cassette 31 is conveyed on the path 33 as follows.
  • the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A is conveyed from the paper feed cassette 31 to the process unit 35 by the paper feed roller 32.
  • the toner image formed by the process unit 35 is transferred to the first surface of the paper 8A.
  • the sheet 8A to which the toner image has been transferred is conveyed to a fixing device in the process unit 35, and the toner image is thermally fixed on the first surface of the sheet 8A. Thereafter, the entire sheet 8A is discharged from the sheet discharge port 3A by the sheet discharge roller 37.
  • the paper 8A When double-sided printing is performed by the first printer 3, first, the paper 8A is transported on the path 33 and an image is printed on the first surface of the paper 8A as in the case of single-sided printing.
  • the rotation of the paper discharge roller 37 is stopped. At this time, the conveyance of the paper 8A is temporarily stopped in a state where a part of the paper 8A is discharged from the paper discharge port 3A.
  • the rotation direction of the paper discharge roller 37 is switched, and the rotation of the paper discharge roller 37 is resumed.
  • the conveyance direction of the sheet 8A is reversed, and the sheet 8A enters the path 34 from the branch point 36.
  • the sheet 8A returns to the path 33 between the sheet feed roller 32 and the process unit 35.
  • the paper 8A is reversed and an image is printed on the second surface of the paper 8A by the process unit 35.
  • the second surface is a surface opposite to the first surface.
  • the entire sheet 8A is discharged from the sheet discharge port 3A by the sheet discharge roller 37.
  • the paper 8A discharge mechanism provided in the first printer 3 forms an image on the first surface of the paper 8A, then transports the paper 8A by the first transport amount, discharges it from the paper discharge port 3A, and further discharges the paper.
  • 8A is taken in from the paper discharge port 3A, an image is formed on the second surface of the paper 8A, and then the paper 8A is transported by the second transport amount and discharged from the paper discharge port 3A.
  • the first transport amount is the transport amount of the paper 8A that discharges only a part of the paper 8A from the paper discharge port 3A. In other words, the first transport amount is smaller than the length in the transport direction of the paper 8A.
  • the second transport amount is the transport amount of the paper 8A that discharges the entire paper 8A from the paper discharge port 3A. In other words, the second transport amount is larger than the length in the transport direction of the paper 8A.
  • the transport direction length is the length from the downstream end in the transport direction to the upstream end of the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A transported by the paper discharge roller 37.
  • the paper supply unit 5 includes a path plate 51 (see FIG. 2), a plurality of transport rollers 56A, a plurality of transport rollers 56B, a fixed plate 58, a pair of guide portions 59, and a roller drive. Parts 80 and 90.
  • the path plate 51 is a plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of the paper discharge port 3A of the first printer 3, and includes three path plates 51A, 51B, and 51C that are substantially continuous in the left-right direction.
  • the route plates 51A to 51C are rectangular plate-like members that extend in the front-rear direction and the substantially left-right direction, respectively.
  • the length in the front-rear direction of the path plates 51A to 51C is larger than the length in the front-rear direction of the paper 8A.
  • the right end portion of the path plate 51C is fixed to the fixed plate 58.
  • the fixed plate 58 is a plate-like member that connects the paper supply unit 5 to the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 1).
  • the route plate 51B extends in the lower left direction from the left end portion of the route plate 51C.
  • the route plate 51A extends in the lower left direction from the left end portion of the route plate 51B.
  • the upper surfaces of the route plates 51A to 51C form the guide surface of the route plate 51.
  • the route plate 51 is disposed on the upper side of the first printer 3.
  • the lower end portion of the path plate 51A is disposed in the paper discharge tray 3B, and the path plate 51A is disposed at a position facing the paper discharge port 3A.
  • the path plate 51 extends from the paper discharge tray 3B to the inside of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 2).
  • the guide surface of the path plate 51 is a surface on which the paper 8A discharged from the paper discharge port 3A is placed and extends in the guide direction.
  • the guide direction is a direction away from the paper discharge port 3A, and in this embodiment, is a direction extending rightward from the paper discharge port 3A.
  • Guide covers 52A to 52C are provided on the upper surfaces of the route plates 51A to 51C, respectively.
  • the guide covers 52A to 52C are plate-like members that cover the upper surfaces of the path plates 51A to 51C, respectively, in the front-rear direction.
  • a gap is formed between the path plate 51A and the guide cover 52A so that the paper 8A can pass in the guide direction.
  • a gap is formed between the path plate 51B and the guide cover 52B and between the path plate 51C and the guide cover 52C so that the paper 8A can pass in the guide direction.
  • the roller driving units 80 and 90 are mechanisms for conveying the paper 8A placed on the guide surface of the path plate 51 to the downstream side in the guide direction.
  • the roller driving unit 80 is provided at the right end of the path plate 51B.
  • the roller driving unit 90 is provided at the right end of the path plate 51C. That is, the roller driving unit 90 is located downstream of the roller driving unit 80 in the guide direction.
  • the pair of guide portions 59 are columnar members arranged side by side in the front-rear direction above the guide covers 52B and 52C.
  • the pair of guide portions 59 extends in the left-right direction between the upper end surface of the fixed plate 58 and the upper side of the guide cover 52B.
  • Screw grooves 59A extending in the front-rear direction are formed on the opposing surfaces of the pair of guide portions 59, respectively.
  • the screw groove 59A is a groove portion into which a screw for fixing connection plates 57A to 57C described later can be screwed.
  • the right end portions of the pair of guide portions 59 are fixed to the upper end surface of the fixing plate 58 by a pair of connecting plates 57C that are respectively screwed into the screw grooves 59A.
  • the roller driving unit 80 includes a plurality of conveying rollers 56A, a driving motor 81, a support unit 82, a first shaft 83, a second shaft 84, and a plurality of driven rollers 85.
  • the support portion 82 is a frame-like member that extends in the front-rear direction than the path plate 51B and opens in the left-right direction.
  • the support portion 82 is fixed to the lower side of the pair of guide portions 59 by a pair of connecting plates 57A screwed to the screw grooves 59A.
  • the path plate 51 ⁇ / b> B extends in the left-right direction through the inside of the support portion 82 fixed to the pair of guide portions 59.
  • the first shaft 83 is a shaft provided inside the support portion 82 and extending in the front-rear direction.
  • the drive motor 81 is provided at the front end portion of the support portion 82 and rotates the first shaft 83 around the axis.
  • the plurality of transport rollers 56 ⁇ / b> A are rotating bodies that are provided on the first shaft 83 and arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction.
  • the second shaft 84 is an shaft that extends in the front-rear direction and is provided inside the support portion 82 and directly below the first shaft 83.
  • the plurality of driven rollers 85 are rotating bodies that are arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction and are rotatable about the second shaft 84.
  • the plurality of transport rollers 56 ⁇ / b> A and the plurality of driven rollers 85 are opposed to each other in the vertical direction and are in contact with each other on the guide surface of the path plate 51.
  • the guide cover 52B has a plurality of slits 55A.
  • the plurality of slits 55 ⁇ / b> A are portions that are provided side by side in the front-rear direction and are notched leftward from the right end portion of the guide cover 52 ⁇ / b> B.
  • the first shaft 83 is disposed on the upper side of the guide cover 52B. Lower portions of the plurality of transport rollers 56A are disposed in the corresponding slits 55A.
  • the path plate 51B has a plurality of openings that penetrate the path plate 51B in the vertical direction. The plurality of openings have substantially the same shape and size as the plurality of slits 55A, and face the plurality of slits 55A in the vertical direction.
  • the second shaft 84 is disposed below the path plate 51B.
  • the upper portions of the plurality of driven rollers 85 are disposed in the openings of the corresponding path plates 51B.
  • the roller driving unit 90 has the same structure as the roller driving unit 80.
  • the roller drive unit 90 includes a plurality of transport rollers 56B, a drive motor 91, a support unit 92, a first shaft and a second shaft (not shown), and a plurality of driven rollers 95 (see FIG. 10).
  • the support portion 92 is fixed to the lower side of the pair of guide portions 59 by a pair of connecting plates 57B screwed to the screw grooves 59A.
  • the path plate 51 ⁇ / b> C extends in the left-right direction through the inside of the support portion 92 fixed to the pair of guide portions 59.
  • the drive motor 91 rotates the first shaft provided with the plurality of transport rollers 56B around the axis.
  • the plurality of driven rollers 95 can rotate around the second shaft of the roller driving unit 90.
  • the plurality of transport rollers 56 ⁇ / b> B and the plurality of driven rollers 95 oppose each other in the vertical direction and contact with each other on the guide surface of the path plate 51.
  • Lower portions of the plurality of transport rollers 56B are disposed in the slits 55B of the corresponding guide covers 52C.
  • the upper portions of the plurality of driven rollers 95 are disposed in openings (not shown) of the corresponding path plates 51C.
  • the roller drive unit 80 is slidable in the left-right direction within a predetermined range.
  • the predetermined range is a range in which the plurality of transport rollers 56A can move in the left-right direction in the corresponding slits 55A, and the range in which the plurality of driven rollers 85 can move in the left-right direction in the openings of the corresponding path plates 51B.
  • 7 and 9 show a state where the roller driving unit 80 has moved to the right end position and the left end position within a predetermined range, respectively.
  • the user slides the roller drive unit 80 within a predetermined range, and then fixes the pair of connecting plates 57A to the screw grooves 59A, thereby causing the left and right positions of the roller drive unit 80 (that is, the guide direction of the plurality of transport rollers 56A). Position) can be adjusted.
  • the roller driving unit 80 is installed downstream of the first position F1 in the guiding direction and upstream of the second position F2 in the guiding direction.
  • the first position F1 is a path plate 51 on which a downstream end portion in the guide direction of the paper 8A conveyed by the first conveyance amount from the first printer 3 (in this embodiment, the right end portion of the paper 8A) is placed.
  • the second position F2 is a position on the guide surface of the path plate 51 on which the downstream end portion in the guide direction of the paper 8A transported by the second transport amount from the first printer 3 is placed.
  • the first position F1 is a position away from the paper discharge roller 37 in the discharge direction by the first transport amount.
  • the second position F2 is a position away from the paper discharge roller 37 in the discharge direction by the second transport amount.
  • the discharge direction is a direction in which the paper 8A is discharged from the paper discharge port 3A, and is the upper right direction in the present embodiment.
  • the roller driving unit 90 is installed at a position where the distance in the guiding direction between the roller driving units 80 and 90 is smaller than the length of the paper 8A in the guiding direction.
  • the transport amount of the paper discharged from the replaced image forming apparatus may be different from the transport amount of the paper 8A discharged from the first printer 3. .
  • the transport amount of the paper 8A discharged from the first printer 3 may change. Therefore, the paper supply unit 5 can appropriately convey the printed paper by the user adjusting the position of the roller driving units 80 and 90 according to the image forming apparatus or the paper size. Note that the user may adjust the positions of the roller driving units 80 and 90 by changing the position of the paper supply unit 5.
  • the user can change the left-right direction position of the roller drive unit 80 to any of a plurality of predetermined reference positions.
  • the plurality of reference positions correspond to different sizes of the paper 8A.
  • at least one of the pair of guide portions 59 is marked with a scale (not shown) indicating a plurality of reference positions along the screw groove 59A.
  • the user fixes the roller driving unit 80 with a pair of connecting plates 57A. Accordingly, the paper supply unit 5 can appropriately convey the paper 8A having different sizes by the paper supply unit 5 by adjusting the position of the roller driving unit 80.
  • the first printer 3 prints paper 8A having different sizes, the user does not need to change the overall position of the paper supply unit 5.
  • the path plate 51B has a pair of shaft pins 98 and a plurality of support pieces 99.
  • the pair of shaft pins 98 are small-diameter shafts that protrude from the left end of the path plate 51B to both the front and rear sides.
  • the pair of shaft pins 98 rotatably supports the path plate 51A while being inserted into holes provided at the right front end and the right rear end of the path plate 51A.
  • the plurality of support pieces 99 are a plurality of plate-like pieces protruding from the lower left end portion of the path plate 51B.
  • the route plate 51A and the guide cover 52A are rotatable around a pair of shaft pins 98 extending in the front-rear direction.
  • the specified position is a rotational position of the route plate 51A where the upper surfaces of the route plates 51A and 51B are substantially flush.
  • the user can change the rotational position of the route plate 51A relative to the route plate 51B, the efficiency of various operations is improved. For example, the user can easily install the route plate 51A in the paper discharge tray 3B of the first printer 3 and take out the route plate 51A from the paper discharge tray 3B. Further, the user can easily arrange the path plate 51A so as to face the discharge port according to the position and shape of the discharge port of the image forming apparatus.
  • the guide direction may be either the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, or the direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction as long as it is a direction away from the paper discharge port 3A.
  • the support part 82 is not limited to a mode in which the user manually adjusts the position of the roller driving part 80.
  • the support unit 82 is a drive unit (for example, a motor) that moves to the upstream side and the downstream side in the guide direction of the roller drive unit 80 according to the reference position or paper size specified by the user. Adjustments may be made.
  • FIG. 11 shows the positional relationship between the paper alignment mechanism 100 and the bundle operation mechanism 200 in the left side view, and the left paper alignment unit 103, the right paper alignment unit 104, the contact member 106, and the like are omitted.
  • 12 and 13 omit the conveyance unit 102, the left paper alignment unit 103, the right paper alignment unit 104, the support base 111, the movable unit 153, the conveyance unit 154, and the like (the same applies to FIG. 30 described later).
  • FIG. 13 schematically illustrates the contact member 106.
  • FIG. 14 schematically illustrates the paper supply unit 5 and the paper alignment mechanism 100.
  • the paper alignment mechanism 100 includes a movable unit 101, a conveyance unit 102, a left side paper alignment unit 103, a right side paper alignment unit 104, a front side paper alignment unit 105, and a contact member 106.
  • the movable part 101 is movable in the front-rear direction inside the main body frame 2.
  • the conveyance unit 102 moves the movable unit 101 in the front-rear direction.
  • the left side paper aligning unit 103 performs paper alignment on the left end surface of the sheet bundle 8.
  • the left end face of the sheet bundle 8 is the left sheet bundle end face.
  • the right side paper aligning unit 104 performs paper alignment on the right end surface of the sheet bundle 8.
  • the right end face of the sheet bundle 8 is the right sheet bundle end face.
  • the front-side paper aligning unit 105 performs paper alignment on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8.
  • the contact member 106 guides the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A conveyed to the inside of the main body frame 2 by the
  • the transport unit 102 includes a transport motor 121, a screw shaft 122, and guide rails 123 and 124.
  • the screw shaft 122 extends in the front-rear direction inside the main body frame 2.
  • the conveyance motor 121 can rotate the screw shaft 122 around the axis.
  • the guide rails 123 and 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the screw shaft 122, respectively, and extend in the front-rear direction along with the screw shaft 122.
  • the movable part 101 includes a table 110, a support base 111, a nut 114, a rotation mechanism 116, a tapping motor 170, and a vibration motor 180.
  • the table 110 is a substantially rectangular plate-like body provided in the upper end portion of the support base 111 in plan view.
  • the table 110 has a placement surface 110 ⁇ / b> A that is a plane on which the sheets 8 ⁇ / b> A conveyed inside the main body frame 2 are stacked.
  • the placement surface 110 ⁇ / b> A is slightly smaller than the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A printed by the first printer 3.
  • the mounting surface 110A includes a first mounting surface 1111 and a second mounting surface 1121 described later. A space extending upward from the mounting surface 110A is referred to as an upper region. At least a part of a contact member 106 to be described later is included in the upper region.
  • the support base 111 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a space formed therein.
  • the support base 111 is movable along the guide rails 123 and 124.
  • the nut 114 is provided on the support base 111, and the screw shaft 122 is inserted therein.
  • the nut 114 and the screw shaft 122 are known ball screws (the same applies to other nuts and screw shafts described later).
  • the movable range of the table 110 includes the first transport position.
  • the movable range of the table 110 is an area through which the table 110 moving in the front-rear direction can pass.
  • the first transport position (see FIGS. 3, 4, 11, and 13) is a front-rear direction position of the table 110 from which the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A supplied by the paper supply unit 5 is discharged onto the placement surface 110 ⁇ / b> A.
  • the long side and the short side of the paper 8A supplied to the inside of the main body frame 2 are parallel to the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, respectively.
  • the left end portion 16 (see FIG.
  • the right end 17 (see FIG. 29) of the sheet 8A conveyed into the main body frame 2 is a downstream end in the conveyance direction of the sheet 8A.
  • the table 110 includes a first table 1110 and a second table 1120.
  • the first table 1110 is a plate-like body that extends in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction.
  • the upper surface of the first table 1110 includes a first placement surface 1111 and a support surface 1112.
  • the first placement surface 1111 is a rectangular plane extending in the left-right direction along the front edge of the first table 1110.
  • the first placement surface 1111 is a substantially horizontal surface on which the front portion of the paper 8A supplied to the table 110 can be placed.
  • the support surface 1112 is a plane on the rear side of the first placement surface 1111 provided slightly below the first placement surface 1111.
  • the fixed shaft 160 is provided on the first table 1110.
  • the fixed shaft 160 is a shaft that is provided slightly below the front end portion of the support surface 1112 and projects rightward from the right surface of the first table 1110.
  • the fixed shaft 160 rotatably supports a lever 161 described later.
  • the second table 1120 is a substantially rectangular plate-like body that is long in the left-right direction in plan view.
  • the upper surface of the second table 1120 includes a second placement surface 1121.
  • the second placement surface 1121 is a plane on which a portion of the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A supplied to the table 110 can be placed on the rear side of the portion placed on the first placement surface 1111.
  • the second placement surface 1121 is aligned with the first placement surface 1111 in the front-rear direction.
  • the length of the second placement surface 1121 in the left-right direction is substantially equal to the length of the first placement surface 1111 in the left-right direction.
  • the end portion on the first placement surface 1111 side (front side) of the second placement surface 1121 is referred to as a proximity portion 1122.
  • An end of the second placement surface 1121 opposite to the first placement surface 1111 (rear side) is referred to as a separation portion 1123.
  • the lever 161 is an inverted L-shaped plate in the left side view.
  • the lever 161 includes a first plate portion 161A, a second plate portion 161B, and a through hole 161C.
  • the first plate portion 161 ⁇ / b> A is a plate-like body that is fixed to the right front end portion on the lower surface of the second table 1120 and is supported from below by the fixed shaft 160.
  • the second plate portion 161B is a plate-like body that extends downward from the front end portion of the first plate portion 161A via the front side of the fixed shaft 160.
  • the through hole 161C is a hole that penetrates the lower end portion of the second plate portion 161B in the left-right direction.
  • the second table 1120 can rotate around the fixed shaft 160 via the lever 161.
  • the second table 1120 is rotatable between the first rotation position and the second rotation position.
  • the first rotation position (see FIG. 12) is the rotation position of the second table 1120 where the second table 1120 is separated upward from the support surface 1112.
  • the separation portion 1123 is above the proximity portion 1122.
  • the mounting surface 110A is bent between the first mounting surface 1111 and the second mounting surface 1121.
  • the second rotation position (see FIG. 13) is the rotation position of the second table 1120 on which the second table 1120 is placed on the support surface 1112.
  • the separation portion 1123 is in the vertical position substantially equal to the proximity portion 1122. Since the first mounting surface 1111 and the second mounting surface 1121 are substantially flush with each other, the mounting surface 110A has one substantially horizontal plane as a whole.
  • the rotation mechanism 116 is a mechanism that rotates the second table 1120.
  • the rotation mechanism 116 includes a fixed shaft 160, a lever 161, a drive motor 162, a rotation shaft 164, and a wire 166.
  • the drive motor 162 is provided below the rear end portion of the second table 1120.
  • a drive gear (not shown) of the drive motor 162 is fixed to an output shaft (not shown) of the drive motor 162.
  • the rotary shaft 164 extends in the left-right direction on the rear side of the output shaft of the drive motor 162 and on the lower side of the rear end portion of the second table 1120.
  • a gear 165 provided on the rotation shaft 164 meshes with a drive gear of the drive motor 162.
  • the rotational motion of the drive motor 162 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 164.
  • the cylindrical winding member 167 is fixed to the right end portion of the rotation shaft 164.
  • One end of the wire 166 is wound around the circumferential surface of the winding member 167.
  • the other end portion of the wire 166 is fixed to the second plate portion 161B while being inserted through the through hole 161C. That is, the wire 166 connects the rotating shaft 164 and the lever 161.
  • the tapping motor 170 is fixed to the lower surface of the first table 1110.
  • the tapping motor 170 includes an output shaft 171 extending in the left-right direction.
  • the cam member 172 is provided at the distal end portion of the output shaft 171.
  • the cam member 172 is a substantially rhombic plate-like body when viewed from the right side, and is below the wire 166.
  • the peripheral surface of the cam member 172 includes a first peripheral surface 173, a second peripheral surface 174, a third peripheral surface 175, and a fourth peripheral surface 176.
  • the first peripheral surface 173 to the fourth peripheral surface 176 each protrude in a direction away from the substantially central portion of the cam member 172 and are curved in an arc shape when viewed from the right side.
  • the first peripheral surface 173 is at a position closest to the output shaft 171 in the peripheral surface of the cam member 172.
  • the third peripheral surface 175 is at a position farthest from the output shaft 171 in the peripheral surface of the cam member 172.
  • the third peripheral surface 175 is on the opposite side of the first peripheral surface 173 across the output shaft 171.
  • the second peripheral surface 174 is located at a position rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the first peripheral surface 173 about the output shaft 171 as viewed from the right side of the peripheral surface of the cam member 172.
  • the fourth circumferential surface 176 is located at a position rotated about 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the first circumferential surface 173 around the output shaft 171 as viewed from the right side of the circumferential surface of the cam member 172.
  • the distance from the output shaft 171 to the second peripheral surface 174 and the distance from the output shaft 171 to the fourth peripheral surface 176 are substantially equal to each other.
  • the initial rotation position is the rotation position of the cam member 172 where the first peripheral surface 173 is the uppermost of the peripheral surfaces of the cam member 172.
  • the vibration motor 180 is fixed at a substantially horizontal center on the lower surface of the second table 1120 and behind the fixed shaft 160.
  • the vibration motor 180 includes an output shaft 181 (see FIG. 30) extending forward.
  • the eccentric cam 182 is fixed to the output shaft 181.
  • the output shaft 181 passes through a position different from the position of the center of gravity of the eccentric cam 182.
  • a portion of the eccentric cam 182 that is most distant from the output shaft 181 in the radial direction is referred to as a tip portion 183 (see FIG. 30).
  • the position of the center of gravity of the eccentric cam 182 is between the output shaft 181 and the tip 183.
  • the tip 183 reciprocates between a first position (see FIG. 30) and a second position (not shown).
  • the tip 183 at the first position is disposed on the opposite side of the second table 1120 with the output shaft 181 interposed therebetween.
  • the tip portion 183 in the second position is disposed between the output shaft 181 and the second table 1120.
  • the contact member 106 is a rail member that is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the left side and extends substantially parallel to the conveyance direction of the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A above the second table 1120. .
  • the contact member 106 is fixed to the lower right side of the position where the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A is discharged from the paper supply unit 5 and above the second placement surface 1121.
  • the contact member 106 includes a support wall portion 106A and two guide wall portions 106B.
  • the support wall 106A is a plate-like body that is long in the left-right direction in plan view. That is, the support wall portion 106A extends substantially parallel to the conveyance direction of the paper 8A.
  • the length in the left-right direction of the support wall 106A is at least half of the length in the left-right direction of the paper 8A. That is, the conveyance direction length of the contact member 106 is at least half of the conveyance direction length of the paper 8A.
  • the front end portion of the support wall portion 106 ⁇ / b> A is in front of the rear end portion of the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A discharged from the paper supply unit 5.
  • the two guide wall portions 106B are plate-like bodies that extend upward from the rear end portion of the support wall portion 106A and are long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. That is, the two guide wall portions 106B both extend substantially parallel to the transport direction and extend in the substantially vertical direction. The two guide wall portions 106B are provided side by side in the left-right direction.
  • the front paper aligning unit 105 includes a front aligning plate 150, a support unit 151, movable units 152 and 153, and a transport unit 154.
  • the support portion 151 is a columnar body that extends in the vertical direction below the movable region of the table 110.
  • the movable part 152 is connected to the front side of the support part 151 by a known ball screw.
  • the support unit 151 can move the movable unit 152 in the vertical direction in accordance with driving of a motor (not shown).
  • the movable portion 153 is an L-shaped plate-like body fixed to the rear surface of the support portion 151 as viewed from the right side.
  • the movable part 153 is connected to the transport part 154 by a known ball screw.
  • the transport unit 154 is a drive mechanism that extends in the front-rear direction below the movable region of the table 110.
  • the transport unit 154 can move the movable unit 153 in the front-rear direction in accordance with driving of a motor (not shown).
  • the front alignment plate 150 is a substantially rectangular plate-like body that is provided at the upper end of the movable portion 152 and extends in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.
  • the front aligning plate 150 is movable between an ascending position (see FIG. 12) and a descending position (see FIG. 13) as the movable portion 152 moves up and down.
  • the front aligning plate 150 is movable between a forward position (see FIGS. 12 and 13) and a reverse position (not shown) as the movable portion 153 moves back and forth.
  • the front alignment plate 150 when the front alignment plate 150 is in the raised position and the forward movement position, the front alignment plate 150 is in the first facing position.
  • the first facing position is a position where the front aligning plate 150 is disposed in the movable region of the table 110 and the front aligning plate 150 faces the table 110 from the front.
  • the front-rear direction distance between the front alignment plate 150 and the two guide wall portions 106B is the length in the front-rear direction of the placement surface 110A. Shorter than that.
  • the front alignment plate 150 in the first facing position can contact the front end portion 15 (see FIG. 29) of the paper 8A falling toward the placement surface 110A from the front side, and the front end portion 15 can be positioned at the first restriction position. is there.
  • the first restricting position is a predetermined appropriate position of the front end portion 15 of the paper 8A accumulated on the table 110.
  • the first restriction position is a position on an imaginary straight line extending in the left-right direction in plan view. That is, the rear surface of the front alignment plate 150 at the first facing position extends in the substantially vertical direction along the first restriction position.
  • the first restricting position is included in a glue application region described later.
  • the first separation position is a position where the front aligning plate 150 is disposed on the lower side of the movable area of the table 110 and on the rear side of the front end portion of the table 110.
  • the front alignment plate 150 at the first separation position is disposed inside the support base 111.
  • the right side paper alignment unit 104 includes a drive motor 141, a cam member 141 ⁇ / b> A, an arm member 142, and a right alignment plate 140.
  • the drive motor 141 is provided on the lower right side of the movable area of the table 110.
  • the drive motor 141 can rotate an output shaft (not shown) extending in the vertical direction.
  • the cam member 141 ⁇ / b> A is provided on the output shaft of the drive motor 141.
  • the pin 145 protrudes upward from the cam member 141A and rotatably supports the right end portion of the arm member 142.
  • the left end portion of the arm member 142 is connected to the right surface of the right alignment plate 140.
  • the pin 146 is provided on the right side of the right alignment plate 140 and extends in the vertical direction. The pin 146 rotatably supports the left end portion of the arm member 142.
  • the right alignment plate 140 is a rectangular plate-like body that is provided on the right side of the table 110 at the first transport position and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction.
  • the right alignment plate 140 faces the right end surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A from the right side when the table 110 is in the first transport position.
  • the left paper alignment unit 103 is substantially bilaterally symmetric with the right paper alignment unit 104.
  • the left paper alignment unit 103 has the same structure as the right paper alignment unit 104 and includes a drive motor 131, a cam member 131A, an arm member 132, and a left alignment plate 130.
  • the left alignment plate 130 is a rectangular plate-like body that is provided on the left side of the table 110 at the first transport position and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction.
  • the left aligning plate 130 faces the left end surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A from the left side when the table 110 is in the first transport position.
  • the left alignment plate 130 is movable in the left-right direction between the second facing position and the second separation position as the drive motor 131 is driven.
  • the second facing position is a position where the left alignment plate 130 approaches from the left side with respect to the table 110 at the first transport position.
  • the second separation position is a position where the left alignment plate 130 is separated to the left of the second opposing position with respect to the table 110 at the first transport position.
  • the left alignment plate 130 at the second separation position is illustrated by a solid line
  • the left alignment plate 130 at the second facing position is illustrated by a virtual line.
  • the left alignment plate 130 in the second facing position is the left end of the paper 8A that falls toward the placement surface 110A when the table 110 is in the first transport position and the paper 8A is discharged by the paper supply unit 5.
  • the left end portion 16 can be positioned at the second restriction position by contacting the portion 16 (see FIG. 29) from the left side.
  • the second restricting position is a predetermined appropriate position of the left end portion 16 (upstream end portion in the transport direction) of the paper 8A stacked on the table 110.
  • the second restriction position is a position on a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction on the left side of the table 110 in plan view. That is, the right surface of the left alignment plate 130 at the second facing position extends in a substantially vertical direction along the second restriction position.
  • the right alignment plate 140 is movable in the left-right direction between the third facing position and the third separation position as the drive motor 141 is driven.
  • the third facing position is a position where the right alignment plate 140 is close to the table 110 at the first transport position from the right side.
  • the third separation position is a position where the right alignment plate 140 is separated to the right side of the third facing position with respect to the table 110 at the first transport position.
  • the right alignment plate 140 at the third separation position is illustrated by a solid line
  • the right alignment plate 140 at the third facing position is illustrated by a virtual line.
  • the right alignment plate 140 at the third facing position is the right edge of the paper 8A that falls toward the placement surface 110A when the table 110 is at the first transport position and the paper 8A is discharged by the paper supply unit 5.
  • the portion 17 (see FIG. 29) can be contacted from the right side, and the right end portion 17 can be positioned at the third restriction position.
  • the third restriction position is a predetermined appropriate position of the right end portion 17 (downstream end portion in the transport direction) of the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A stacked on the table 110.
  • the third restriction position is a position on a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction on the right side of the table 110 in plan view. That is, the left surface of the right alignment plate 140 at the third facing position extends in a substantially vertical direction along the third restriction position.
  • FIG. 11 is an enlarged view of the paper aligning mechanism 100 and the bundle operating mechanism 200 in the bookbinding apparatus 1 shown in FIG.
  • the bundle operation mechanism 200 includes a movable unit 201 and a transport unit 202.
  • the movable portion 201 is movable in the front-rear direction inside the main body frame 2 and above the paper alignment mechanism 100.
  • the conveyance unit 202 moves the movable unit 201 in the front-rear direction.
  • the movable unit 201 includes a support plate 211, a movable body 212, a connecting plate 213, a screw shaft (not shown), a pair of guide rails 215, a belt 216, pulleys 217 and 218, a lifting motor 219, and a bundle operation unit 230.
  • the movable body 212 is a columnar member extending in the left-right direction, and is connected to the transport unit 202 by a known ball screw.
  • the transport unit 202 is a drive mechanism that extends in the front-rear direction above the movable region of the table 110. The transport unit 202 can move the movable body 212 in the front-rear direction as the transport motor 221 is driven.
  • the support plate 211 is a plate-like body supported on the lower side of the movable body 212.
  • the connection plate 213 is a plate-like body that extends downward from the support plate 211.
  • the elevating motor 219 is provided on the rear side of the connecting plate 213.
  • the pulley 218 is provided on a shaft extending upward from the lifting motor 219.
  • a screw shaft (not shown) provided on the front surface of the connecting plate 213 extends in the vertical direction.
  • the pulley 217 is provided at the upper end of the screw shaft of the connecting plate 213.
  • the belt 216 is stretched around pulleys 217 and 218.
  • the bundle operation unit 230 is provided on the front side of the connecting plate 213.
  • the bundle operation unit 230 includes a connecting plate 231 and a presser plate 232.
  • the connecting plate 231 is a rectangular plate-like body that extends in the up-down direction and the left-right direction, and has a nut (not shown) through which the screw shaft of the connecting plate 213 is inserted.
  • the presser plate 232 is a plate-like body that extends downward from the lower end of the connecting plate 231 to the front side. The front end portion of the pressing plate 232 can contact the upper surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A in the left-right direction.
  • the bundle operation unit 230 moves in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the paper alignment mechanism 100 as the movable body 212 moves.
  • the lifting motor 219 is driven, the screw shaft of the connecting plate 213 rotates via the belt 216 and the pulleys 217 and 218. As a result, the bundle operation unit 230 moves in the vertical direction along the pair of guide rails 215.
  • FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cross section passing through the approximate center in the left-right direction of the movable portion 301 as viewed from the left side.
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the cross section passing through the approximate vertical center of the glue application unit 340 as viewed from above, and schematically shows the main body 349, the glue 7, and the sheet bundle 8.
  • FIG. 19 shows the positional relationship between the glue application mechanism 300 and the table 110 at the first transport position in the rear view.
  • the glue application mechanism 300 is arranged in front of the table 110 at the first transport position.
  • the glue application mechanism 300 includes a movable part 301 and a transport part 302.
  • the movable portion 301 is movable in the left-right direction inside the main body frame 2 and on the front side of the table 110 at the first transport position.
  • the conveyance unit 302 moves the movable unit 301 in the left-right direction.
  • the conveyance unit 302 includes a conveyance motor 321 and a screw shaft 322.
  • the screw shaft 322 extends in the left-right direction on the upper side of the screw shaft 122.
  • the conveyance motor 321 can rotate the screw shaft 322 around the axis.
  • the movable portion 301 includes a support portion 311, a nut (not shown), an adhesive receiving installation portion 313, a heat insulating plate 314, a chain 316, pulleys 317 and 318, a drive motor 319, and an adhesive application portion 340.
  • the support portion 311 is a rectangular plate-like body that extends in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.
  • the nut of the movable portion 301 is provided at the lower front end portion of the support portion 311 and the screw shaft 322 is inserted therethrough.
  • the drive motor 319 is provided on the front surface of the support portion 311 and above the nut of the movable portion 301.
  • the pulley 318 is provided on a shaft 319 ⁇ / b> A that extends upward from the drive motor 319.
  • the heat insulating plate 314 is provided on the rear surface of the support portion 311.
  • the glue application unit 340 is provided on the rear surface of the heat insulating plate 314.
  • the glue application unit 340 is a movable body that applies the glue 7 within the range of the glue application area described later while moving in the left-right direction over at least the length of the sheet bundle 8 in the left-right direction.
  • the glue 7 of this embodiment is a thermoplastic adhesive.
  • the glue application unit 340 includes a main body part 349 and a glue application roller 350.
  • the glue application roller 350 has a substantially cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction, and can apply the liquid glue 7 to an object.
  • the glue application roller 350 is a cylindrical body that has a peripheral surface 351A to which the glue 7 can be attached and is rotatable around a shaft 353 extending in the vertical direction.
  • the main body 349 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-like body whose vertical direction is the longitudinal direction, and can accommodate the paste application roller 350 and the paste 7 therein.
  • the main body 349 includes an adhesive supply port 341, an adhesive storage unit 342, a roller installation unit 343, bearing units 344 and 345, an adhesive application port 346, and a heater 347.
  • the glue supply port 341 is an opening provided on the upper surface of the main body 349 for supplying glue pieces (not shown).
  • the paste piece is a solidified paste and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape in the present embodiment.
  • the glue storage part 342 is a substantially bottomed box-like space provided inside the main body part 349 and extending downward from the glue supply port 341.
  • the glue storage unit 342 can store glue pieces supplied via the glue supply port 341.
  • the front side of the glue storage part 342 is surrounded by the front wall part 349 ⁇ / b> A of the main body part 349.
  • the front wall portion 349 ⁇ / b> A is an inclined surface that inclines downward from the front end portion of the glue supply port 341.
  • the roller installation part 343 is a space provided inside the main body part 349 and is formed on the rear side of the glue storage part 342 and on the front side of the glue application port 346.
  • the roller installation part 343 communicates with the glue storage part 342 and the glue application port 346 in the front-rear direction.
  • the bearing portion 344 is a concave portion extending downward from the center of the lower end portion of the roller installation portion 343.
  • the bearing portion 345 is an opening that is provided on the upper surface of the main body portion 349 and on the rear side of the glue supply port 341 and communicates with the roller installation portion 343 in the vertical direction.
  • the glue application roller 350 is disposed on the roller installation portion 343 in a state where both ends of the shaft 353 are accommodated in the bearing portions 344 and 345. That is, the glue application roller 350 is held by the bearing portions 344 and 345 so as to be rotatable about the shaft 353.
  • the rotation center of the glue application roller 350 is referred to as the axis of the glue application roller 350.
  • the glue application port 346 is an opening cut out from the rear surface of the main body 349 to the front.
  • the glue application port 346 exposes a part of the peripheral surface 351A of the glue application roller 350 in the roller installation part 343 from the inside of the main body part 349 in the backward direction.
  • a portion of the peripheral surface 351 ⁇ / b> A that is exposed from the glue application port 346 is referred to as a glue application surface of the glue application roller 350.
  • the glue application surface is at a position in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the first restriction position described above.
  • the glue application surface extends in the vertical direction from the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A.
  • the glue application roller 350 substantially closes the roller installation portion 343 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. More than half of the peripheral surface 351 ⁇ / b> A is accommodated in the roller installation portion 343. Therefore, the area of the glue application surface is less than half the area of the peripheral surface 351A.
  • a plurality of crests and troughs extending linearly along the up-down direction are alternately and continuously formed along the circumferential direction on the circumferential surface 351A.
  • the plurality of valley portions are a plurality of groove portions 351C in which a part of the peripheral surface 351A is recessed toward the axis.
  • the plurality of groove portions 351C extend in the vertical direction in parallel with the axis of the glue application roller 350, respectively.
  • the plurality of groove portions 351 ⁇ / b> C may extend along the axis of the glue application roller 350, and may be inclined with respect to the axis of the glue application roller 350, for example.
  • the plurality of groove portions 351C are formed in a spiral shape on the peripheral surface 351A.
  • the peripheral surface 351A may be provided with a plurality of concave portions having various shapes (for example, a substantially circular shape, a substantially semicircular shape, a polygonal shape, etc.) instead of the plurality of groove portions 351C, and is curved in a wave shape continuous in the circumferential direction. It may be a smooth circumferential surface.
  • the heater 347 is a heating element provided on the front surface of the front wall portion 349A.
  • the plurality of paste pieces stored in the paste storage unit 342 are dissolved by the heat generated by the heater 347 and changed into liquid paste 7.
  • the glue 7 stored in the glue storage part 342 can adhere to the peripheral surface 351A. Since the paste 7 enters the plurality of groove portions 351C, the peripheral surface 351A can hold more paste 7.
  • the heater 347 may be provided on the rear surface of the front wall portion 349A, or may be provided on the right wall portion, the left wall portion, the upper wall portion, or the lower wall portion of the main body portion 349.
  • the portion recessed downward from the lower left end of the glue application port 346 is a glue guide 346A.
  • the glue guide portion 346A guides the glue 7 that hangs down from the peripheral surface 351A toward the glue receiving member 360 described later.
  • the pulley 317 is provided at the upper end of the shaft 353.
  • the chain 316 is bridged over pulleys 317 and 318 through a through hole 311A formed in the support portion 311.
  • the glue receiving installation portion 313 is connected and fixed to the lower side of the main body portion 349 by the connecting plate 361.
  • the glue receiving installation portion 313 can place a glue receiving member 360 capable of storing liquid.
  • the glue receiving member 360 is a cup that opens upward so that liquid can be stored. Since the connecting plate 361 has a heat insulating property, the heat generated by the heater 347 is difficult to be transmitted to the glue receiving portion 313.
  • the lid member 348 is a plate-like body provided on the upper surface of the main body 349.
  • the lid member 348 is rotatable around a pin 348A that protrudes upward from the right rear corner of the upper surface of the main body 349.
  • the lid member 348 can move between an open position where the glue supply port 341 is opened and a closed position where the glue supply port 341 is closed.
  • the lid member 348 when the user supplies glue pieces to the glue supply port 341, the user moves the lid member 348 to the open position.
  • the user moves the lid member 348 to the closed position after supplying the paste pieces to the paste storage unit 342.
  • the lid member 348 in the closed position suppresses the smell of the glue 7 from leaking to the outside of the main body 349 even when the glue 7 stored in the glue storage part 342 generates a smell.
  • a valve member capable of blocking communication between the paste supply port 341 and the paste storage unit 342 may be provided in the paste supply path 341A. In this case, the lid member 348 may not be provided.
  • the movable portion 301 of this embodiment is arranged in such a posture that the axis of the glue application roller 350 is inclined from the vertical direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1.
  • the axis of the glue application roller 350 intersects the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and is orthogonal to the front-rear direction.
  • the vertical direction of the movable portion 301 is slightly inclined to the right with respect to the vertical direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1.
  • the front-rear direction of the movable unit 301 substantially coincides with the front-rear direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1.
  • the movable unit 301 can be moved in the left-right direction by the transport unit 302 while maintaining an inclined posture.
  • the transport motor 321 rotates the screw shaft 322, the support portion 311 moves in the left-right direction.
  • the glue application unit 340 supported on the rear side of the support unit 311 moves in the left-right direction on the front side of the table 110 at the first transport position.
  • the conveyance motor 321 can adjust the moving speed of the glue application unit 340.
  • the right end portion and the left end portion of the movable range of the glue application unit 340 are a first retracted position and a second retracted position, respectively.
  • the glue application unit 340 is in the first retracted position, the glue application unit 340 is separated from the movable range of the table 110 in the right direction.
  • the glue application part 340 is in the second retracted position, the glue application part 340 is separated from the movable range of the table 110 in the left direction. That is, the glue application unit 340 can move in the left-right direction within the movable range of the table 110.
  • a locus along which the glue application surface of the glue application roller 350 moves in accordance with the movement of the glue application unit 340 is referred to as a glue application region of the glue application unit 340.
  • the glue application area extends in the left-right direction across the movable range of the table 110.
  • the glue application roller 350 rotates around the shaft 353 via the chain 316 and the pulleys 317 and 318.
  • the glue 7 supplied to the peripheral surface 351 ⁇ / b> A moves to the glue application port 346, whereby the glue 7 is applied to an object in contact with or close to the glue application surface.
  • the glue 7 that is not applied to the object and hangs down on the peripheral surface 351A is discharged downward through the glue guide portion 346A, and is dropped and stored in the glue receiving member 360.
  • the drive motor 319 can adjust the rotation speed of the glue application roller 350, and can adjust the rotation of the glue application roller 350 to normal rotation and reverse rotation.
  • Normal rotation is the clockwise rotation of the glue application roller 350 about the shaft 353 in plan view.
  • the reverse rotation is the rotation of the glue application roller 350 in the direction opposite to the normal rotation.
  • FIG. 20 shows the positional relationship among the second printer 4, the cover sheet supply unit 6, and the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 in the left side view (the same applies to FIG. 37 described later).
  • FIG. 21 an urging portion 461 and a pair of mark sensors 499, which will be described later, are omitted.
  • FIG. 22 the lifting motor 490, the lifting motor 450, the urging unit 461, and the like are omitted.
  • FIG. 23 enlarges the range surrounded by the phantom line in FIG. 41 and 44, the right mark sensor 499 is omitted.
  • the cover holding mechanism 400 is disposed on the front side of the table 110 and the glue application mechanism 300.
  • the cover holding mechanism 400 includes a movable part 401 and a conveying part 402.
  • the movable portion 401 is movable in the vertical direction inside the main body frame 2 and in front of the glue applying portion 340.
  • the transport unit 402 moves the movable unit 401 in the vertical direction.
  • the movable portion 401 is disposed on the front side of the glue application mechanism 300 and within the range of the cover sheet supply port 22 (see FIG. 1) in a plan view.
  • the movable portion 401 includes a support plate 411, support frames 413 and 414, rear rails 415 and 416, and front rails 417 and 418.
  • the support plate 411 is a substantially square plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is connected to the transport unit 402 by a known ball screw.
  • the transport unit 402 is a drive mechanism that extends in the vertical direction on the front side of the movable unit 401. The transport unit 402 can move the movable unit 401 in the vertical direction along the pair of guide rails 423 as the transport motor 422 is driven.
  • the movable part 401 When the movable part 401 is at the lower end of the movable range, the entire movable part 401 is accommodated inside the main body frame 2 (see FIGS. 4 and 20).
  • the movable part 401 is movable upward to a position where the movable part 401 protrudes above the main body frame 2 through the cover sheet supply port 22 (see FIG. 37).
  • the movable range of the movable part 401 includes the reference position for pasting.
  • the sticking reference position is a vertical direction position of the movable portion 401 where a butting plate 460 described later covers the entire sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A in front view.
  • the support frames 413 and 414 are provided at the left end and the right end on the rear surface of the support plate 411, respectively.
  • the support frames 413 and 414 are columnar bodies that are arranged side by side in the left-right direction and extend in the up-down direction.
  • the rear rails 415 and 416 are provided on the rear surfaces of the support frames 413 and 414, respectively, and extend in parallel in the vertical direction through contact positions described later.
  • the lengths of the rear rails 415 and 416 in the vertical direction are each equal to or longer than the length of the cover sheet 9 in the vertical direction.
  • the front rails 417 and 418 are provided between the support frames 413 and 414 on the rear surface of the support plate 411.
  • the front rails 417 and 418 are disposed on the right side of the support frame 413 and the left side of the support frame 414, respectively, and extend in parallel in the vertical direction.
  • the movable portion 401 includes a first clamp 403 that can clamp the cover 9 supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400 from the front-rear direction.
  • the first clamp 403 includes an upper clamp 430 and a lower clamp 440.
  • the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and selectively hold and release the cover sheet 9 at different vertical positions.
  • the upper clamp 430 is movable along the rear rails 415 and 416, and includes a rear plate 431, a front plate 432, and a pair of solenoids 433 and 435.
  • the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 are rectangular plate-like bodies that are opposed to each other in the front-rear direction and extend in the up-down direction and the left-right direction.
  • a gap between the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 facing each other in the front-rear direction is an operation region 430A.
  • the pair of solenoids 433 and 435 move the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 in directions toward or away from each other via the opening and closing links 434 and 436, respectively.
  • the lower clamp 440 has the same structure as the upper clamp 430.
  • the lower clamp 440 is movable along the rear rails 415 and 416, and includes a rear plate 441, a front plate 442, and a pair of solenoids 443 and 445.
  • a gap between the rear plate 441 and the front plate 442 facing each other in the front-rear direction is an operation region 440A.
  • the pair of solenoids 443 and 445 move the rear plate 441 and the front plate 442 in directions toward or away from each other via the opening and closing links 444 and 446, respectively.
  • the operation areas 430A and 440A are spaces extending in the left-right direction through which the cover 9 supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400 can pass.
  • the operation areas 430A and 440A oppose each other in the vertical direction and have the same shape in plan view.
  • the left and right lengths of the operation areas 430A and 440A are larger than the left and right length of the cover 9.
  • the center positions in the left-right direction of the operation areas 430A and 440A substantially coincide with the center position in the left-right direction of the cover 9 supplied from the cover sheet supply unit 6, and substantially coincide with the center position in the left-right direction of the table 110.
  • the movable portion 401 includes an elevating motor 450, pulleys 451 and 452, a belt 453, a connecting portion 454, and a positioning plate 455.
  • the elevating motor 450 is provided on the right side of the upper end portion of the support frame 413.
  • a pulley 451 is provided on a shaft (not shown) extending from the elevating motor 450 through the support frame 413 to the left.
  • the pulley 452 is provided on the left side of the lower end portion of the support frame 413.
  • the belt 453 is stretched over pulleys 451 and 452.
  • the connecting portion 454 is a member that connects the left end portion of the rear plate 441 and the belt 453.
  • the positioning plate 455 is a plate-like body that is provided on the right side surface of the support frame 414 and extends in the front-rear direction.
  • the positioning plate 455 can support a positioning protrusion 456 (see FIG. 39) provided on the front surface of the rear plate 431 from below.
  • the positioning protrusion 456 is a plate-like body that protrudes forward from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface of the rear plate 431 through the right side of the front plate 432.
  • the movable part 401 includes a butting plate 460, a lifting motor 490, a screw shaft 491, and a second clamp 404.
  • the screw shaft 491 extends between the front rails 417 and 418 in the vertical direction.
  • the elevating motor 490 can rotate the screw shaft 491 about the axis.
  • the abutting plate 460 is a rectangular plate-like body that is provided on the rear surface side of the support plate 411 and extends in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.
  • the abutting plate 460 is provided on the front side of the front rails 417 and 418 and on the rear side of the front rails 417 and 418 and the screw shaft 491.
  • the vertical length of the abutting plate 460 is larger than the vertical length of the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A.
  • the second clamp 404 can hold the booklet 10 before cutting from above and below (see FIG. 46).
  • the second clamp 404 includes an upper clamp 470 and a lower clamp 480.
  • the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 are arranged on both upper and lower sides with the abutting plate 460 interposed therebetween, and selectively hold and release the booklet 10 by each raising and lowering.
  • the upper clamp 470 includes a movable body 471 and a clamp body 472.
  • the movable body 471 is a member that extends in the left-right direction from the rear side of the front rail 417 to the rear side of the front rail 418 and is movable along the front rails 417 and 418.
  • the movable body 471 has a nut (not shown) through which the screw shaft 491 is inserted.
  • the clamp body 472 is a plate-like body that is provided on the rear surface of the movable body 471 and protrudes below the movable body 471.
  • the clamp body 472 is a rectangular plate-like body extending in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.
  • the lower clamp 480 has the same structure as the upper clamp 470 and is substantially vertically symmetrical with the upper clamp 470.
  • the lower clamp 480 includes a movable body 481 and a clamp body 482.
  • the nut of the movable body 471 converts the linear motion direction in which the rotational motion of the screw shaft 491 is converted
  • the nut of the movable body 481 converts the rotational motion of the screw shaft 491.
  • the direction of linear motion is opposite to each other.
  • the clamp body 482 is a plate-like body that is provided on the rear surface of the movable body 481 and protrudes above the movable body 481.
  • the abutting plate 460 and the clamp bodies 472 and 482 extend in the left-right direction over a range including the cover 9 supplied from the cover-sheet supply unit 6 in the left-right direction.
  • movement of the 1st clamp 403 is demonstrated.
  • the connecting portion 454 moves along the rear rails 415 and 416 via the pulleys 451 and 452 and the belt 453. That is, the lower clamp 440 connected to the connecting portion 454 moves in the vertical direction.
  • the upper clamp 430 is held at the upper reference position.
  • the upper reference position (see FIGS. 20 and 21) is the vertical position of the upper clamp 430 where the positioning protrusion 456 is supported by the positioning plate 455. That is, the positioning plate 455 is provided above the contact position described later, and restricts the downward movement of the upper clamp 430.
  • the lower clamp 440 that moves upward contacts the upper clamp 430 at the upper reference position from below, and moves upward while supporting the upper clamp 430. That is, the upper clamp 430 can move upward from the upper reference position by being pressed by the lower clamp 440 that moves upward.
  • the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 move to the upper end of each movable range in a state where they are aligned in the vertical direction.
  • the lower reference position (see FIGS. 20 and 21) is the vertical position of the lower clamp 440 that is symmetrical with the upper reference position in the vertical direction with the abutting plate 460 interposed therebetween. That is, the distance from the butting plate 460 to the upper reference position and the distance from the butting plate 460 to the lower reference position are substantially the same.
  • the distance from the upper reference position to the lower reference position is slightly smaller than the vertical length of the cover 9 supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400.
  • the operation region 430A When the pair of solenoids 433 and 435 move the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 in directions close to each other, the operation region 430A is closed. When the pair of solenoids 433 and 435 move the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 away from each other via the opening and closing links 434 and 436, respectively, the operation region 430A is opened. Similarly, the operation region 440A can be changed to an open state or a closed state by a pair of solenoids 443 and 445.
  • movement of the 2nd clamp 404 is demonstrated.
  • the elevating motor 490 rotates the screw shaft 491
  • the movable body 471 provided with the nut moves along the front rails 417 and 418.
  • the movable body 481 provided with the nut moves in the direction opposite to the movable body 471 along the front rails 417 and 418.
  • the clamp bodies 472 and 482 move vertically and symmetrically with respect to the abutting plate 460 so as to approach or separate from each other.
  • the movable body 471 can move downward to a position where it comes into contact with the upper end of the abutting plate 460.
  • the movable body 481 can move upward to a position where it comes into contact with the lower end portion of the abutting plate 460.
  • the upper clamp 430 includes sliding portions 437 and 438, and a pair of the above-described rear plate 431, front plate 432, solenoids 433 and 435, and opening and closing links 434 and 436.
  • a connecting shaft 439 is included.
  • the sliding portions 437 and 438 are provided at the left end portion and the right end portion on the front surface of the rear plate 431, respectively.
  • the sliding part 437 guides the upper clamp 430 in the vertical direction by moving along the rear rail 415.
  • the sliding portion 438 guides the lower clamp 440 in the vertical direction by moving along the rear rail 416.
  • the rear plate 431 has a through hole 431A formed on the right side of the sliding portion 437 and a through hole 431B formed on the left side of the sliding portion 438.
  • the through holes 431A and 431B penetrate the rear plate 431 in the front-rear direction.
  • the solenoid 433 is provided on the rear surface of the rear plate 431 and on the right side of the through hole 431A.
  • the solenoid 435 is provided on the rear surface of the rear plate 431 and on the left side of the through hole 431B.
  • the open / close links 434 and 436 are substantially L-shaped plate-like bodies arranged in the through holes 431A and 431B, respectively, in plan view.
  • the left end and the right end of the front plate 432 face the through holes 431A and 431B in the front-rear direction, respectively.
  • the pair of connecting shafts 439 are shafts that are arranged on the right side of the through hole 431A and the left side of the through hole 431B, respectively, and project forward from the front surface of the rear plate 431.
  • the pair of connecting shafts 439 penetrates the front plate 432 in the front-rear direction and supports the front plate 432 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.
  • the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 have guide surfaces 430B and 430C, respectively.
  • the guide surface 430B is a surface that is inclined downward from the upper surface of the rear plate 431 to the front side over a range in the left-right direction facing the operation region 430A.
  • the guide surface 430C is a surface that inclines from the upper surface of the front plate 432 downward to the rear side over a range in the left-right direction that faces the operation region 430A. That is, the upper end of the operation area 430A where the guide surfaces 430B and 430C are formed has the largest opening width in the front-rear direction in the operation area 430A.
  • the solenoid 435 has a shaft 435A extending in the right direction.
  • the shaft 435A retracts, and when it is OFF, the shaft 435A advances.
  • the open / close link 436 is supported in the through hole 431B (see FIG. 21) via a shaft 436A extending in the vertical direction.
  • the open / close link 436 can swing around the shaft 436A inside the through hole 431B.
  • the columnar connecting shaft 436D extends upward from the rear end 436B of the opening / closing link 436.
  • the connecting shaft 436D is connected to the shaft 435A.
  • a front end 436 ⁇ / b> C of the opening / closing link 436 is in contact with the right end of the rear surface of the front plate 432.
  • Each connecting shaft 439 has a winding spring 439A that urges the front plate 432 backward.
  • the solenoid 433 has a shaft extending in the left direction, like the solenoid 435. Similarly to the opening / closing link 436, the opening / closing link 434 is swingably supported inside the through hole 431A. The rear end of the opening / closing link 434 is connected to the shaft of the solenoid 433. The front end portion of the opening / closing link 434 is in contact with the left end portion of the rear surface of the front plate 432.
  • the lower clamp 440 has the same structure as the upper clamp 430.
  • the lower clamp 440 includes a pair of sliding portions (not shown) and a pair of connecting shafts (not shown) in addition to the above-described rear plate 441, front plate 442, solenoids 443 and 445, and opening / closing links 444 and 446.
  • the opening / closing links 444 and 446 are disposed in through holes 441A and 441B formed in the rear plate 441, respectively.
  • the rear plate 441 and the front plate 442 have guide surfaces similar to the guide surfaces 430B and 430C, respectively.
  • the opening / closing link 444 is connected to the shaft of the solenoid 443 and is in contact with the left end portion of the rear surface of the front plate 442.
  • the open / close link 446 is connected to the shaft of the solenoid 445 and is in contact with the right end portion of the rear surface of the front plate 442.
  • the clamping operation of the lower clamp 440 is the same as the clamping operation of the upper clamp 430.
  • the operation area 440A is opened.
  • both the solenoids 443 and 445 are OFF, the operation area 440A is closed.
  • the plurality of regulating pins 463, 464, 465 will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the upper clamp 430 has a pair of restriction pins 463.
  • the pair of regulating pins 463 are members that regulate the position in the left-right direction of the cover sheet 9 supplied to the upper clamp 430.
  • the pair of restriction pins 463 are provided symmetrically with respect to the approximate center of the operation region 430A in the left-right direction.
  • the pair of restriction pins 463 are shafts that protrude forward from the rear plate 431 and penetrate the front plate 432, similarly to the pair of connecting shafts 439.
  • the distance in the left-right direction between the pair of regulating pins 463 is slightly larger than the length in the left-right direction of the cover 9.
  • the lower clamp 440 has a pair of restriction pins 464 and a pair of restriction pins 465.
  • the pair of regulating pins 464 are members that regulate the position in the left-right direction of the cover sheet 9 supplied to the lower clamp 440.
  • the pair of restriction pins 464 are provided symmetrically with respect to the approximate center of the operation region 440A in the left-right direction.
  • the pair of regulating pins 464 are shafts that protrude forward from the rear plate 441 and penetrate the front plate 442.
  • the pair of restriction pins 463 and the pair of restriction pins 464 are at substantially the same left-right position. That is, the distance in the left-right direction between the pair of restricting pins 464 is slightly larger than the length in the left-right direction of the cover 9.
  • the pair of regulation pins 465 are members that regulate the lower end position of the cover 9 supplied to the lower clamp 440.
  • the pair of restriction pins 465 are, like the pair of restriction pins 464, shafts that are provided symmetrically with respect to the approximate center in the left-right direction of the operation region 440A and project forward from the rear plate 441 and penetrate the front plate 442. is there.
  • the pair of restriction pins 465 are provided below the pair of restriction pins 464 and are arranged at a narrower interval than the pair of restriction pins 464. The distance in the left-right direction between the pair of restriction pins 465 is smaller than the length in the left-right direction of the cover 9.
  • the pair of restriction pins 463 includes a reference pin and an opposite pin.
  • the reference pin is a restriction pin 463 that serves as a reference when restricting the position of the cover sheet 9 in the left-right direction.
  • the direction from the reference pin toward the opposite pin is referred to as the regulation direction.
  • the left-right position of the reference end face serving as a reference when specifying the cutting position of the booklet 10 is referred to as a cutting reference position P1 (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • restriction position P2 The position in the left-right direction of the end portion of the reference pin in the restriction direction is referred to as restriction position P2 (see FIG. 23).
  • the restriction position P2 is provided at a left-right position that is shifted in the restriction direction from the cutting reference position P1. It is desirable that the distance between the regulation position P2 and the cutting reference position P1 is smaller.
  • the pair of restriction pins 464 also have the same positional relationship as the pair of restriction pins 463.
  • the cutting reference position P1 substantially coincides with the above-described third restriction position (see FIG. 56). That is, the right end surface of the booklet 10 is the reference end surface (see FIG. 56).
  • the right restriction pins 463 and 464 are reference pins, and the left restriction pins 463 and 464 are opposite pins.
  • the right restriction pins 463 and 464 (more specifically, the left end portions of the right restriction pins 463 and 464) are provided at left and right positions shifted from the cutting reference position P1 in the left direction.
  • the movable portion 401 includes an urging portion 461 and a pair of mark sensors 499.
  • the urging portion 461 is provided at the left end portion of the abutting plate 460, and includes a drive motor 461A, a shaft portion 461B, and a pair of arm portions 461C.
  • the shaft portion 461B is provided on the left side of the left regulation pins 463 and 464, and extends in the vertical direction on the front side of the abutting plate 460.
  • the pair of arm portions 461C are columnar bodies extending in parallel from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the shaft portion 461B, respectively.
  • the pair of arm portions 461 ⁇ / b> C extend rearward from the abutting plate 460 from both the upper and lower sides of the abutting plate 460.
  • the protruding ends of the pair of arm portions 461C are behind the operation areas 430A and 440A.
  • the drive motor 461A can rotate the shaft portion 461B around the axis.
  • the pair of arm portions 461C swings in the left-right direction around the shaft portion 461B.
  • the drive motor 461A swings the pair of arm portions 461C between a standby position and an urging position.
  • the pair of arm portions 461C When the pair of arm portions 461C are in the standby position, the pair of arm portions 461C extend rearward from the shaft portion 461B, and the protruding ends of the arm portions 461C are slightly on the left side of the left regulation pins 463 and 464.
  • the pair of arm portions 461C When the pair of arm portions 461C are in the urging position, the pair of arm portions 461C extend rightward and rearward from the shaft portion 461B, and the protruding ends of the arm portions 461C are slightly on the right side of the left regulation pins 463 and 464. . That is, the pair of arm portions 461C can swing in the left-right direction across the position of the opposite pin in the left-right direction.
  • the pair of mark sensors 499 are provided on the right side of the support frame 413 and the left side of the support frame 414 in the movable portion 401, respectively.
  • the pair of mark sensors 499 are slightly below the upper clamp 430 at the upper reference position and slightly forward from the operation areas 430A and 440A.
  • the pair of mark sensors 499 are reflective sensors for optically detecting the pair of marks 9B (see FIG. 44) facing the front surface of the cover 9 held by the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440.
  • FIG. 24 shows the positional relationship of the paper alignment mechanism 100, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in plan view (the same applies to FIGS. 54 to 56 described later).
  • FIG. 26 the post-cutting unit 530 is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 57 described later).
  • the cutting mechanism 500 includes a left cutting unit 510, a right cutting unit 520, a rear cutting unit 530, a driving unit 540, and a support rail 590.
  • the left cutting unit 510 can cut the left edge of the booklet 10.
  • the right cutting unit 520 can cut the right edge of the booklet 10.
  • the post-cutting unit 530 can cut the trailing edge of the booklet 10.
  • Cutting the edge of the booklet 10 means cutting the edge of the booklet 10 from the booklet 10.
  • the drive unit 540 moves the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520 symmetrically.
  • the support rail 590 supports the booklet 10 conveyed to the cutting mechanism 500 from below.
  • the drive unit 540 includes a base 541, a transport motor 542, a pair of rails 543 and 545, and a screw shaft 544.
  • the base 541 is a substantially square plate-like body arranged in the rear part of the main body frame 2 when viewed from the front.
  • the rail 543 is provided at the front edge portion on the upper surface of the base portion 541 and extends in the left-right direction.
  • the rail 545 is provided at the rear edge portion on the upper surface of the base portion 541 and extends in the left-right direction.
  • the screw shaft 544 is provided between the rails 543 and 545 on the upper surface of the base portion 541 and extends in the left-right direction through a support rail 590 described later.
  • the conveyance motor 542 can rotate the screw shaft 544 around the axis.
  • the left cutting unit 510 includes a drive motor 511, a power conversion unit 512, a cutting member 513, a support unit 516, and a matching unit 517 described later.
  • the support portion 516 is a member that integrally holds the members included in the left cutting portion 510 and is movable along the pair of rails 543 and 545.
  • the support portion 516 has a nut (not shown) through which the screw shaft 544 is inserted.
  • a shaft extending from the drive motor 511 is connected to the power conversion unit 512.
  • the shaft extending from the power conversion unit 512 is connected to the cutting member 513.
  • the cutting member 513 is supported on the upper side of the mounting surface 516 ⁇ / b> A that is a plane of the support portion 516.
  • the cutting member 513 includes a pressing member 514 and a cutting blade 515.
  • the cutting blade 515 is a blade extending in the front-rear direction capable of cutting the booklet 10 in the vertical direction.
  • the lower end portion of the cutting blade 515 is a blade edge 515A (see FIG. 26) extending in the front-rear direction.
  • the pressing member 514 is a member that urges the booklet 10 along the cutting blade 515 from above.
  • the longitudinal lengths of the pressing member 514 and the cutting blade 515 are larger than the longitudinal lengths of the booklet 10. In a state where the presser member 514 is not biasing the booklet 10, the lower end portion of the presser member 514 is positioned below the blade edge 515 ⁇ / b> A.
  • the right cutting part 520 has the same structure as the left cutting part 510 and is substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the left cutting part 510.
  • the right cutting unit 520 includes a drive motor 521, a power conversion unit 522, a cutting member 523, a support unit 526, and a matching unit 527 described later.
  • the cutting member 523 is supported on the upper side of the mounting surface 526A which is a flat surface of the support portion 526.
  • the cutting member 523 includes a pressing member 524 and a cutting blade 525.
  • the lower end portion of the cutting blade 525 is a blade edge 525A (see FIG. 26) extending in the front-rear direction. In a state where the pressing member 524 does not urge the booklet 10, the lower end portion of the pressing member 524 is positioned below the blade edge 525 ⁇ / b> A.
  • the support portion 526 is a member that integrally holds the members included in the right cutting portion 520 and is movable along the pair of rails 543 and 545.
  • the support portion 526 has a nut (not shown) through which the screw shaft 544 is inserted.
  • the screw shaft 544 rotates in one direction
  • the nut of the support portion 516 converts the linear motion direction that converts the rotational motion of the screw shaft 544
  • the nut of the support portion 526 converts the rotational motion of the screw shaft 544.
  • the direction of linear motion is opposite to each other.
  • the post-cutting part 530 includes a drive motor 531, a power conversion part 532, a cutting member 533, and a support part 536.
  • the support portion 536 is a member that integrally holds the members included in the post-cutting portion 530.
  • a shaft extending from the drive motor 531 is connected to the power converter 532.
  • the shaft extending from the power conversion unit 532 is connected to the cutting member 533.
  • the cutting member 533 is supported on the upper side of the placement surface 536A which is a plane of the support portion 536.
  • the cutting member 533 includes a pressing member 534 and a cutting blade 535.
  • the cutting blade 535 is a blade extending in the left-right direction that can cut the booklet 10 in the vertical direction.
  • the lower end portion of the cutting blade 535 is a blade edge 535A (see FIG. 5) extending in the left-right direction.
  • the pressing member 534 is a member that urges the booklet 10 along the cutting blade 535 from above.
  • the lateral lengths of the pressing member 534 and the cutting blade 535 are larger than the lateral length of the booklet 10. In a state where the presser member 534 is not urging the booklet 10, the lower end portion of the presser member 534 is positioned below the blade edge 535 ⁇ / b> A.
  • a cutting board (not shown) that receives the blade edge 515A when the booklet 10 is cut is provided immediately below the blade edge 515A on the placement surface 516A.
  • a cutting board (not shown) that receives the blade edge 525A when the booklet 10 is cut is provided immediately below the blade edge 525A on the placement surface 526A.
  • a cutting board (not shown) that receives the cutting edge 535A when the booklet 10 is cut is provided immediately below the cutting edge 535A on the placement surface 536A.
  • the support rail 590 is provided substantially at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the base 541 and extends over the entire front-rear direction of the base 541.
  • the support rail 590 includes a support base 591, a bottom plate 592, and a pair of side plates 593.
  • the support base 591 supports the bottom plate 592 from below.
  • the bottom plate 592 is a rectangular plate extending in the front-rear direction along the upper surface of the support base 591.
  • the pair of side plates 593 are rectangular plates that extend upward along the left and right sides of the bottom plate 592, respectively.
  • the vertical positions of the upper sides of the pair of side plates 593 are substantially equal to the vertical positions of mounting surfaces 516A, 526A, and 536A described later.
  • the support rail 590 has an opening region 590 ⁇ / b> A that is surrounded by a bottom plate 592 and a pair of side plates 593 and opens upward.
  • the opening region 590A is a space in which a below-described lower plate 642 can move in the front-rear direction.
  • the support portion 516 moves along the pair of rails 543 and 545.
  • the support portion 526 moves in the opposite direction to the support portion 516 along the pair of rails 543 and 545. That is, the left cutting part 510 and the right cutting part 520 move in the direction of approaching or separating from each other symmetrically with respect to the support rail 590.
  • the left-right distance between the left cutting portion 510 and the right cutting portion 520 is the largest (see FIG. 24 to FIG. 26). At this time, the left-right direction distance between the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520 is larger than the left-right direction length of the booklet 10.
  • the rotational motion of the drive motor 511 centering on the front-rear direction is converted into the rotational motion centered on the left-right direction by the power conversion unit 512.
  • the power conversion unit 512 moves the cutting member 513 in the vertical direction by supplying the converted rotational motion to the cutting member 513.
  • the cutting member 523 is moved in the vertical direction by the rotational motion of the drive motor 521 supplied via the power converter 522.
  • the cutting member 533 is moved in the vertical direction by the rotational movement of the drive motor 531 supplied via the power converter 532.
  • the vertical distance between the lower end of the pressing member 514 and the placement surface 516A is larger than the vertical length of the booklet 10 (see FIGS. 25 and 26).
  • the vertical distance between the lower end of the pressing member 524 and the placement surface 526A is larger than the vertical length of the booklet 10 (see FIGS. 25 and 26).
  • the vertical distance between the lower end of the pressing member 534 and the placement surface 536A is larger than the vertical length of the booklet 10 (see FIG. 25).
  • the alignment units 517 and 527 are mechanisms for positioning the booklet 10 disposed in the cutting mechanism 500 in the left-right direction.
  • the alignment unit 517 includes an alignment plate 518 and a drive motor 519.
  • the alignment plate 518 is a rectangular plate-like body provided on the left side of the cutting edge 515A.
  • the right surface of the alignment plate 518 extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and faces the gap between the placement surface 516A and the blade edge 515A from the left side.
  • the drive motor 519 is disposed on the left side of the alignment plate 518.
  • a shaft extending rightward from the drive motor 519 is connected to the alignment plate 518.
  • the drive motor 519 moves the alignment plate 518 in the left-right direction along the placement surface 516A by moving the shaft back and forth (see FIG. 57).
  • the alignment unit 527 includes an alignment plate 528 and a drive motor 529.
  • the alignment plate 528 is a rectangular plate-like body provided on the right side of the blade edge 525A.
  • the left surface of the alignment plate 528 extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and faces the gap between the placement surface 526A and the blade edge 525A from the right side. That is, the right surface of the alignment plate 518 and the left surface of the alignment plate 528 are surfaces that extend in parallel to each other and face in the left-right direction.
  • the drive motor 529 is disposed on the right side of the alignment plate 528. The drive motor 529 moves the alignment plate 528 in the left-right direction along the placement surface 526A by moving the shaft back and forth (see FIG. 57).
  • the booklet transport mechanism 600 includes a movable part 601 and a transport part 602.
  • the movable part 601 is movable in the front-rear direction above the base part 541.
  • the conveyance unit 602 moves the movable unit 601 in the front-rear direction.
  • the conveyance unit 602 includes a conveyance motor 621, pulleys 622 and 623, a screw shaft 624, a guide rail 625, and a belt 626.
  • the screw shaft 624 extends in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the base portion 541.
  • the guide rail 625 is provided above the screw shaft 624 and extends in the front-rear direction along with the screw shaft 624.
  • the pulley 623 is provided at the rear end portion of the screw shaft 624.
  • the pulley 622 is disposed on the upper side of the pulley 623 and is provided on a shaft extending rearward from the transport motor 621.
  • the belt 626 is stretched over pulleys 622 and 623.
  • the movable part 601 includes a support part 610, a nut 611, a sliding part 612, a lifting motor 630, a pinion 631, a rack 632, a guide rail 633, and a hand part 640.
  • the support part 610 supports each member provided in the movable part 601.
  • the nut 611 is provided in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the support portion 610, and the screw shaft 624 is inserted therethrough.
  • the sliding portion 612 is provided at the upper end portion of the support portion 610 and is connected to the guide rail 625.
  • the elevating motor 630 is provided in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the support portion 610.
  • the pinion 631 is provided on a shaft extending in the right direction from the lifting motor 630.
  • the rack 632 extends in the up-down direction while meshing with the pinion 631.
  • the guide rail 633 extends downward from the lower end portion of the support portion 610 and faces the rack 632 from the left side.
  • the hand portion 640 includes an upper plate 641, a lower plate 642, a pair of reference plates 643, a support portion 644, a clamp motor 650, gears 651A and 651B, screw shafts 652A and 652B, and nuts 653A and 653B.
  • the support portion 644 is a plate-like body that supports each member provided in the movable portion 601, and is disposed between the rack 632 and the guide rail 633.
  • the lower end portion of the rack 632 is fixed to the right surface side of the support portion 644.
  • a groove portion into which a part of the circumferential surface of the guide rail 633 is fitted is formed on the left surface side of the support portion 644.
  • the clamp motor 650 is provided on the upper surface of the support portion 644.
  • the screw shaft 652A is rotatably supported on the front side of the support portion 644 and extends in the vertical direction.
  • the screw shaft 652B is rotatably supported on the rear side of the support portion 644 and extends in the vertical direction.
  • a shaft (not shown) extending downward from the clamp motor 650 meshes with gears 651A and 651B arranged side by side in the front-rear direction.
  • the front gear 651A is provided at the upper end of the screw shaft 652A.
  • the rear gear 651B is provided at the upper end of the screw shaft 652B.
  • the lower plate 642 is a rectangular plate-like body provided in the lower end portion of the support portion 644 and extending in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction.
  • the upper plate 641 is a rectangular plate-like body extending in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, supported by the support portion 644 on the upper side of the lower plate 642.
  • the lower plate 642 and the upper plate 641 have substantially the same shape and size with the longitudinal direction as the longitudinal direction, and face each other in the vertical direction.
  • the screw shafts 652A and 652B are inserted through nuts 653A and 653B provided on the upper plate 641, respectively.
  • the lower ends of the screw shafts 652A and 652B are connected to the lower plate 642, respectively.
  • the front end portion of the upper plate 641 and the front end portion of the lower plate 642 are clamp portions 660A.
  • the rear end portion of the upper plate 641 and the rear end portion of the lower plate 642 are the clamp portions 660B.
  • the pair of reference plates 643 are plate-like members that are provided slightly in front of the rear end portion of the lower plate 642 and project upward from the lower plate 642.
  • the pair of reference plates 643 are provided at the left end and the right end of the lower plate 642, respectively.
  • the surfaces of the pair of reference plates 643 facing the clamp portion 660B that is, the rear surfaces of the pair of reference plates 643) extend in the vertical direction at the same longitudinal position.
  • the screw shaft 624 rotates via the pulleys 622 and 623 and the belt 626, and the support portion 610 including the nut 611 moves along the guide rail 625. That is, the hand unit 640 supported below the support unit 610 moves in the front-rear direction above the support rail 590.
  • the elevating motor 630 is driven, the rack 632 moves via the pinion 631, and the support portion 644 moves along the guide rail 633. That is, the hand unit 640 moves in the vertical direction above the support rail 590.
  • the screw shafts 652A and 652B are rotated via the gears 651A and 651B, and the upper plate 641 provided with the nuts 653A and 653B is moved in the vertical direction.
  • the opening widths of the clamp portions 660A and 660B are increased.
  • the opening widths of the clamp portions 660A and 660B are both larger than the vertical length of the booklet 10.
  • the opening widths of the clamp portions 660A and 660B become smaller.
  • the control unit 900 executes an initialization process for returning the bookbinding apparatus 1 to an initial state.
  • the paper alignment mechanism 100, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the glue application mechanism 300, the cover holding mechanism 400, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 are each controlled to the initial state.
  • the table 110 is in the first transport position.
  • the left alignment plate 130 and the right alignment plate 140 are in the second separation position and the third separation position, respectively.
  • the front alignment plate 150 is in the first facing position.
  • the second table 1120 is in the first rotation position.
  • the cam member 172 is in the initial rotation position.
  • the eccentric cam 182 is in a rotational position where the tip 183 (see FIG. 30) is disposed at the first position.
  • the bundle operation unit 230 when the bundle operation mechanism 200 is controlled to the initial state, the bundle operation unit 230 is in the initial position. Specifically, the bundle operation unit 230 is slightly on the front side of the table 110 at the first transport position and slightly above the front alignment plate 150 at the first opposing position. As shown in FIG. 3, when the glue application mechanism 300 is controlled to the initial state, the glue application part 340 is in the first retracted position, and the rotation of the glue application roller 350 stops.
  • the movable portion 401 is at the lower end of the movable range.
  • the upper clamp 430 is at the upper reference position and the lower clamp 440 is at the lower reference position.
  • the operation areas 430A and 440A are both in a closed state.
  • the upper clamp 470 is at the upper end of the movable range, and the lower clamp 480 is at the lower end of the movable range.
  • the left cutting portion 510 is at the left end of the movable range
  • the right cutting portion 520 is the right end of the movable range.
  • the cutting members 513, 523, 533 are at the upper end of each movable range.
  • the alignment plates 518 and 528 are in their initial positions. The initial position of the alignment plate 518 is the left end of the movable range. The initial position of the alignment plate 528 is at the right end of the movable range.
  • the hand unit 640 when the booklet transport mechanism 600 is controlled to the initial state, the hand unit 640 is in the initial position.
  • the hand portion 640 is in the vicinity of the front end portion of the support rail 590.
  • the clamp portion 660A is on the front side of the opening region 590A (see FIG. 26).
  • the vertical position of the upper surface of the lower plate 642 is substantially equal to the vertical position of the first placement surface 1111 (see FIG. 13).
  • the upper plate 641 is at the upper end of the movable range.
  • the first printer 3 After the initialization process is executed, the first printer 3 (see FIG. 1) sequentially prints the images shown in the booklet on the plurality of sheets 8A in accordance with a print instruction from the control unit 900 or a print instruction by the user.
  • the controller 900 executes a paper stacking process in parallel with the printing operation of the first printer 3.
  • the paper transporting process is a process of transporting the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A printed by the first printer 3 into the main body frame 2 by the paper supply unit 5.
  • the controller 900 drives the drive motor 81 to rotate the plurality of transport rollers 56A counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Accordingly, the plurality of driven rollers 85 that come into contact with the plurality of transport rollers 56A rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Similarly, the controller 900 drives the drive motor 91 to rotate the plurality of transport rollers 56B and the plurality of driven rollers 95.
  • the paper 8A is transported by the first transport amount, and a part of the paper 8A is discharged from the paper discharge port 3A.
  • the discharged paper 8A moves to the first position F1 along the guide surface of the path plate 51. Since the paper 8A does not reach the roller driving unit 80, the paper 8A is taken into the first printer 3 from the paper discharge port 3A without being transported by the plurality of transport rollers 56A.
  • the paper 8A is transported by the second transport amount, and the entire paper 8A is discharged from the paper discharge port 3A.
  • the discharged paper 8A moves to the second position F2 along the guide surface of the path plate 51.
  • the paper 8A since the paper 8A reaches the roller driving unit 80, the paper 8A is sandwiched between the plurality of transport rollers 56A and the plurality of driven rollers 85 and transported downstream in the guide direction. Further, the paper 8A that has reached the roller driving unit 90 is sandwiched between the plurality of transport rollers 56B and the plurality of driven rollers 95, and is transported downstream in the guide direction.
  • the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A is conveyed into the main body frame 2 via the fixed plate 58 and is discharged toward the paper aligning mechanism 100.
  • the control unit 900 ends the paper conveyance process after the conveyance of all the paper 8A printed by the first printer 3 is completed. Specifically, the control unit 900 stops driving the drive motors 81 and 91.
  • the control unit 900 executes a paper stacking process in parallel with the paper transporting process.
  • the paper stacking process is a process of stacking the paper 8A transported into the main body frame 2 by the paper aligning mechanism 100.
  • the paper stacking process will be described with reference to FIGS. 4, 11 to 15, 29, and 30.
  • FIG. FIG. 29 shows the table 110, the contact member 106, the right alignment plate 140, and the front alignment plate 150 in the paper alignment mechanism 100.
  • the control unit 900 drives the tapping motor 170 and the vibration motor 180 to vibrate the table 110 as will be described later.
  • the controller 900 drives the drive motor 131 to reciprocate the left alignment plate 130 between the second separation position and the second facing position.
  • the controller 900 drives the drive motor 141 to move the right alignment plate 140 to the third facing position.
  • the sheets 8A are stacked on the table 110 as follows.
  • the sheet 8 ⁇ / b> A conveyed in the sheet conveying step is placed on the placement surface 110 ⁇ / b> A via the rear side of the bundle operation unit 230 and the front side of the contact member 106 at the initial position. It is discharged to the upper area of. At this time, as shown in FIG. 29, the right end portion 17 of the sheet 8A is on the downstream side in the discharge direction (right direction) of the sheet 8A.
  • the discharged paper 8A falls by its own weight toward the mounting surface 110A while moving rightward in the upper area by inertia.
  • the trailing end 18 of the falling paper 8A contacts the support wall 106A of the contact member 106 and is supported from below by the support wall 106A.
  • the pair of guide wall portions 106B regulates the rearward movement of the rear end portion 18 and guides the rear end portion 18 in the right direction.
  • the front end portion 15 of the discharged paper 8A falls to a position lower than the rear end portion 18 on the support wall portion 106A.
  • the paper 8A with the rear end portion 18 supported from below falls while moving in the right front direction by the rightward inertial force acting on the paper 8A and the downward gravity.
  • the rear end portion 18 is separated from the support wall portion 106A to the front side.
  • the separated rear end portion 18 falls by its own weight toward the placement surface 110A on the lower side of the support wall portion 106A.
  • the paper 8A discharged to the upper area of the placement surface 110A falls on the placement surface 110A in a posture inclined downward in the front side. That is, the contact member 106 can supply the paper 8A to the placement surface 110A so that the paper 8A is urged forward. Therefore, the front end portion 15 of the paper 8A falling on the placement surface 110A is reliably in contact with the front alignment plate 150 at the first facing position and positioned at the first restriction position.
  • the first sheet 8A is discharged to the upper area and falls directly onto the placement surface 110A.
  • the second and subsequent sheets 8A overlap on the sheet 8A previously placed on the placement surface 110A.
  • the sheet 8A is discharged to the upper area in a posture inclined downward on the front side.
  • the rear side portion of the second and subsequent sheets 8A is less likely to come into contact with the sheet 8A placed on the placement surface 110A while being discharged to the upper region. Therefore, the sliding friction generated between the paper 8A discharged to the upper area and the paper 8A placed on the placement surface 110A is suppressed.
  • the two sheets 8A overlapping in the vertical direction are prevented from adhering due to static electricity due to sliding friction. Therefore, the positional deviation of the plurality of sheets 8A constituting the sheet bundle 8 is unlikely to occur on the placement surface 110A.
  • the right end 17 of the paper 8A falling on the placement surface 110A moves to the right from the third restriction position by contacting the right alignment plate 140 at the third facing position.
  • the left end portion 16 of the paper 8A on the placement surface 110A is urged from the left by the left alignment plate 130 that reciprocates between the second separation position and the second facing position.
  • the sheet 8A on the placement surface 110A is sandwiched between the left alignment plate 130 at the second facing position and the right alignment plate 140 at the third facing position.
  • the left end portion 16 and the right end portion 17 of the paper 8A are positioned at the second restriction position and the third restriction position, respectively.
  • the plurality of sheets 8A dropped on the placement surface 110A are accumulated on the table 110 in a state where the front end portion 15, the left end portion 16 and the right end portion 17 are positioned.
  • each of the plurality of sheets 8A on the placement surface 110A has the rear end portion 18 lifted above the front end portion 15. Bend. For this reason, even when the discharged paper 8A is curved with respect to the transport direction, the plurality of paper 8A stacked on the table 110 is corrected to a posture extending linearly along the transport direction.
  • the tapping motor 170 rotates the cam member 172 clockwise around the output shaft 171 when viewed from the right side. While the cam member 172 is rotating, the drive motor 162 stops the rotating shaft 164 at a predetermined position. Accordingly, the length of the wire 166 between the through hole 161C and the rotating shaft 164 is constant.
  • the cam member 172 rotates 90 degrees from the initial rotation position
  • the second peripheral surface 174 contacts the wire 166.
  • the wire 166 does not change from a posture extending in a straight line between the through-hole 161C and the rotating shaft 164.
  • the cam member 172 further rotates 90 degrees
  • the third peripheral surface 175 comes into contact with the wire 166 (see FIG. 30).
  • the third peripheral surface 175 urges the wire 166 to bend the wire 166 upward.
  • the second table 1120 in the second rotation position rotates to the third rotation position.
  • the third rotation position is a rotation position of the second table 1120 slightly moved counterclockwise from the second rotation position around the fixed shaft 160 in the right side view.
  • the cam member 172 When the cam member 172 further rotates 90 degrees, the fourth peripheral surface 176 contacts the wire 166.
  • the wire 166 bent upward returns to a posture extending linearly between the through-hole 161C and the rotating shaft 164. Accordingly, the second table 1120 returns from the third rotation position to the second rotation position.
  • the cam member 172 When the cam member 172 further rotates 90 degrees, the cam member 172 returns to the initial rotation position and is separated from the wire 166.
  • the second table 1120 By the continuous rotation of the cam member 172, the second table 1120 reciprocally swings between the second rotation position and the third rotation position. As a result, the second table 1120 vibrates.
  • the vibration motor 180 rotates the eccentric cam 182 around the output shaft 181.
  • the rotational speed per unit time of the eccentric cam 182 is twice the rotational speed per unit time of the cam member 172.
  • the tip end portion 183 reciprocates between the first position and the second position.
  • the center of gravity of the eccentric cam 182 reciprocates above and below the output shaft 181.
  • the second table 1120 vibrates.
  • the plurality of sheets 8A accumulated on the table 110 form a sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A.
  • the front end face, the left end face, and the right end face of the sheet bundle 8 are substantially flush with each other along the first restriction position, the second restriction position, and the second restriction position, respectively. Since the sheet 8A is slightly larger than the placement surface 110A, the sheet bundle 8 slightly protrudes in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction from the placement surface 110A in plan view.
  • the control unit 900 ends the paper stacking process after all the paper 8A printed by the first printer 3 is stacked on the table 110. Specifically, the controller 900 moves the front alignment plate 150, the left alignment plate 130, and the right alignment plate 140 to the first separation position, the second separation position, and the third separation position, respectively. The control unit 900 stops driving the tapping motor 170 and the vibration motor 180.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 has a simple structure and can stack a plurality of sheets 8A on the table 110 along the first restriction position.
  • the separation portion 1123 is above the proximity portion 1122.
  • the sheet 8 ⁇ / b> A supplied to the table 110 easily moves in the forward direction along the second placement surface 1121 to a position where it contacts the front aligning plate 150. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 has a simple structure and can stack a plurality of sheets 8A on the table 110 along the first restriction position.
  • the sheet 8A supplied to the table 110 moves in the transport direction (right direction) while dropping from the contact member 106.
  • the right end portion 17 of the paper 8A contacts the right alignment plate 140 and is positioned at the third restriction position.
  • the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A supplied to the table 110 is positioned at the second restriction position by the left alignment plate 130. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 has a simple structure and can stack a plurality of sheets 8A on the table 110 along the second restriction position and the third restriction position.
  • the tapping motor 170 and the vibration motor 180 vibrate the second table 1120 in the second rotation position. Due to the vibration of the second table 1120, the paper 8A on the placement surface 110A is likely to move forward. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately position the plurality of sheets 8A along the first restriction position.
  • the front-rear direction distance between the contact member 106 and the front alignment plate 150 is shorter than the front-rear direction length of the mounting surface 110A.
  • the paper 8A supplied to the table 110 is likely to come into contact with the contact member 106 and the front aligning plate 150 before being placed on the placement surface 110A. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately position the plurality of sheets 8A along the first restriction position.
  • the pair of guide wall portions 106B guide the rear end portion 18 and the support wall portion 106A contacts the rear end portion 18 from below. Since the sheet 8 ⁇ / b> A is restricted from moving backward, the sheet 8 ⁇ / b> A falling toward the table 110 is likely to come into contact with the front alignment plate 150. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately position the plurality of sheets 8A along the first restriction position.
  • the controller 900 executes the glue application process after the paper stacking process.
  • the glue application process is a process in which the glue 7 for applying the cover sheet 9 is applied to the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 by the glue application mechanism 300.
  • the glue applying process will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19 and FIGS. 31 to 36.
  • 32 to 36 schematically show the sheet bundle 8 and the glue application roller 350 in plan view. 32 to 35 show a specific virtual point on the peripheral surface 351A as a point P.
  • FIG. FIG. 36 schematically shows the sheet bundle 8 and the glue application roller 350 viewed from the upper right front side (the same applies to FIG. 60 described later).
  • the control unit 900 moves the holding plate 232 to the pressing position by moving the bundle operation unit 230 backward from the initial position and lowering it.
  • the pressing position is a position of the pressing plate 232 where the front end portion of the pressing plate 232 urges the front edge portion of the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A from the upper side.
  • the front edge portion of the sheet bundle 8 is sandwiched from above and below by the pressing plate 232 and the first placement surface 1111.
  • the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 is slightly in front of the pressing plate 232 and the first placement surface 1111.
  • the control unit 900 generates the liquid paste 7 by melting the paste pieces stored in the paste storing unit 342 by the heat generated by the heater 347.
  • the control unit 900 drives the transport motor 321 (see FIG. 3) to reciprocate the glue application unit 340 in the left-right direction, and drives the drive motor 319 to rotate the glue application roller 350.
  • the glue 7 is applied to the front end face 8B (see FIGS. 32 to 36) of the sheet bundle 8 as follows.
  • the control unit 900 causes the glue application mechanism 300 to perform any one of the first application operation to the fourth application operation according to the thickness of the sheet bundle 8, the type of the sheet 8A, the user's selection, and the like.
  • the first application operation of the glue application mechanism 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 32.
  • the movement speed of the glue application unit 340 in the first application operation is a predetermined reference speed regardless of whether the glue application part 340 moves in the left-right direction.
  • the glue application unit 340 moves from the first retracted position to the second retracted position with the glue applying roller 350 rotated forward.
  • the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is substantially equal to the reference speed. That is, the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is substantially equal to the moving speed of the glue applying unit 340 (that is, the moving speed of the glue applying roller 350 in the left-right direction).
  • the glue application roller 350 moves to the left through a position close to the front end face 8B.
  • the position close to the front end face 8B is a position where the peripheral face 351A faces the front end face 8B from the front side, and the peripheral face 351A approaches or contacts the front end face 8B to the extent that the paste 7 can be applied.
  • the position where the glue application roller 350 is close to the right end portion 8C of the front end face 8B is referred to as a first proximity position.
  • the position where the glue application roller 350 is close to the left end portion 8D of the front end face 8B is referred to as a second proximity position. While the glue application roller 350 passes through the second proximity position from the first proximity position, the glue application roller 350 rotates forward twice.
  • the glue application surface of the glue application roller 350 is exposed behind the main body 349 through the glue application port 346.
  • the glue 7 adhered to the glue application surface adheres to the front end face 8B by centrifugal force.
  • the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 from the right end 8C to the left end 8D of the front end face 8B.
  • the transport motor 321 see FIG. 3
  • the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
  • the glue applying unit 340 moves from the second retracted position to the first retracted position in a state where the glue applying roller 350 is reversed.
  • the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is substantially equal to the moving speed of the glue application roller 350.
  • the glue application roller 350 moves from the second proximity position to the first proximity position, the glue application roller 350 reverses twice. Thereby, the glue 7 is further applied to the front end face 8B.
  • the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
  • the glue application roller 350 ends the first reciprocating movement.
  • the glue application unit 340 moves from the first retracted position to the second retracted position with the glue applying roller 350 rotated forward.
  • the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is approximately twice the moving speed of the glue application roller 350.
  • the glue application roller 350 rotates forward four times.
  • the glue 7 is further applied to the front end face 8B.
  • the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
  • the glue application unit 340 moves from the second retracted position to the first retracted position with the glue applying roller 350 reversed.
  • the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is approximately twice the moving speed of the glue application roller 350.
  • the glue application roller 350 moves from the second proximity position to the first proximity position, the glue application roller 350 reverses four times.
  • the glue 7 is further applied to the front end face 8B.
  • the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
  • the glue application roller 350 ends the second reciprocating movement.
  • the glue application roller 350 performs the third reciprocation similarly to the first reciprocation.
  • the paste 7 is further applied to the front end face 8B, and the first application operation is completed.
  • the first application operation has the following effects.
  • the moving speed of the glue applying roller 350 and the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A are substantially equal.
  • the frictional resistance generated between the paste 7 immediately after being applied to the front end surface 8B and the peripheral surface 351A in contact with the paste 7 is reduced. Since the load applied to the glue 7 attached to the front end face 8B is suppressed, the glue 7 attached to the front end face 8B is difficult to move and deform in the left-right direction. Therefore, the glue application roller 350 that performs the first reciprocating movement can apply the glue 7 evenly to the front end face 8B.
  • the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is larger than the moving speed of the glue application roller 350.
  • the glue 7 immediately after being applied to the front end face 8B comes into contact with the circumferential surface 351A from the upstream side in the rotational direction of the glue application roller 350 and is urged toward the front end face 8B.
  • the glue 7 applied during the second reciprocating movement easily enters between the plurality of sheets 8A forming the sheet bundle 8 together with the glue 7 applied during the first reciprocating movement. Accordingly, the glue application roller 350 that performs the second reciprocating movement can apply the glue 7 to the front end face 8B and simultaneously allow the glue 7 to enter between the plurality of sheets 8A.
  • the moving speed of the glue applying roller 350 and the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A are substantially equal.
  • the frictional resistance between the glue 7 and the peripheral surface 351A is reduced. Accordingly, the glue application roller 350 that performs the third reciprocating movement can apply the glue 7 evenly to the front end face 8B.
  • the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is different for each of the two consecutive reciprocating movements (for example, the first and second reciprocating movements). Accordingly, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply a sufficient amount of glue 7 to the front end face 8B and at the same time adjust the glue 7 to be attached to the front end face 8B to an appropriate amount.
  • the lateral movement of the glue application roller 350 is controlled independently of the rotation of the glue application roller 350.
  • the glue application roller 350 can rotate at an appropriate rotation speed in order to apply sufficient glue 7 to the front end face 8B. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply a sufficient amount of glue 7 to the front end face 8B according to the moving speed of the glue application roller 350.
  • the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 to the front end face 8B by the same operation as in the state X11 in FIG.
  • the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
  • the glue applying unit 340 moves at a reference speed from the second retracted position to the first retracted position with the rotation of the glue applying roller 350 stopped. Since the glue application roller 350 does not rotate during the movement of the glue application roller 350, the glue application roller 350 does not apply the glue 7 to the front end face 8B. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the first retracted position, the second application operation is terminated.
  • the second application operation has the following effects. For example, when the plurality of sheets 8A are thin sheets, or when the thickness of the sheet bundle 8 is small, it is desirable that the amount of glue 7 applied to the front end surface 8B is small. In this case, when the glue application roller 350 performs the second application operation, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can reduce the amount of the adhesive 7 applied to the front end surface 8B compared to the first application operation. The glue application operation is completed by one reciprocating movement of the glue application roller 350. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can speed up the glue application process while suppressing the amount of glue 7 used.
  • the glue application roller 340 moves from the first retracted position to the second retracted position in a state where the glue applying roller 350 is rotated forward.
  • the moving speed of the glue application roller 350 is approximately twice the reference speed.
  • the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is substantially equal to the reference speed.
  • the glue application roller 350 rotates forward once.
  • the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
  • the glue application roller 350 further applies glue 7 to the front end face 8B by the same operation as in state X12 in FIG.
  • the glue application unit 340 reaches the first retracted position, the third application operation is terminated.
  • the third application operation has the following effects.
  • the glue application roller 350 In the state X31 of FIG. 34, compared with the case where the circumferential surface 351A rotates forward twice or more while the glue application roller 350 moves from the first proximity position to the second proximity position, the glue application roller 350 has the front end face 8B. It is possible to reduce the amount of the glue 7 applied to the surface.
  • the moving speed of the glue application roller 350 that moves to the second proximity position is approximately twice the reference speed, and the glue application roller 350 ends the glue application operation in one reciprocating movement. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can speed up the glue application process while suppressing the amount of glue 7 used.
  • the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 to the front end face 8B by the same operation as in the state X11 in FIG.
  • the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
  • the glue application roller 340 moves at a reference speed from the second retracted position to the first retracted position with the glue applying roller 350 reversed.
  • the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is approximately twice the moving speed of the glue application roller 350.
  • the glue application roller 350 moves from the second proximity position to the first proximity position, the glue application roller 350 reverses four times.
  • the glue 7 is further applied to the front end face 8B.
  • the fourth application operation ends.
  • the fourth application operation has the following effects.
  • the glue application roller 350 moves to the first retracted position, the glue 7 is applied in the reverse direction four times.
  • the amount of glue 7 applied by the glue application roller 350 increases as compared with the case where the peripheral speed is substantially equal to the reference speed.
  • the glue application roller 350 completes the glue application operation with a single reciprocation. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply sufficient glue 7 to the front end face 8B while speeding up the glue application process.
  • the glue application mechanism 300 can appropriately change the moving speed of the glue application roller 350 and the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A by selectively executing the first to fourth application operations.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 can adjust the amount of the glue 7 applied to the front end face 8B as necessary by changing the peripheral speed of the peripheral face 351A.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 can adjust the time required for the glue application process as necessary by changing the moving speed of the glue application roller 350.
  • the movement speed and the number of movements of the glue application roller 350 and the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A are not limited to the above examples, and may be changed as appropriate.
  • the control unit 900 ends the glue application process after performing any one of the first to fourth application operations. Specifically, the control unit 900 stops driving the conveyance motor 321 and the drive motor 319. Incidentally, as described above, the vertical direction of the movable portion 301 is slightly inclined to the right with respect to the vertical direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1. (See FIG. 19).
  • the glue application roller 350 is arranged in such a posture that the axis is inclined to the right side in the upward direction. Accordingly, the glue application mechanism 300 applies the glue 7 to the sheet bundle 8 in the following manner when any one of the first to fourth application operations is performed.
  • the glue applying roller 350 rotates normally.
  • a portion of the rotating peripheral surface 351A that is closest to the front end surface 8B is referred to as a proximity portion of the glue application surface.
  • the proximity portion of the paste application surface moves toward the upstream side in the direction in which the peripheral surface 351A moves relative to the front end surface 8B.
  • the portion of the sheet bundle 8 that connects the front end surface 8B and the upper end surface 8F is the first corner 8H.
  • a portion of the peripheral surface 351 ⁇ / b> A having the same height as the first corner portion 8 ⁇ / b> H is referred to as a first facing portion. While the glue application roller 350 moves from the first proximity position to the second proximity position, the first facing portion rotates to rub the glue 7 against the first corner portion 8H. Accordingly, the paste 7 is applied to the front end face 8B and the first corner 8H.
  • the front edge portion 8E of the sheet bundle 8 is bent slightly downward by contacting the normally rotating glue application surface. Specifically, the proximity portion of the peripheral surface 351A moves toward the upstream side in the direction in which the glue application roller 350 moves relative to the front end surface 8B. Since the frictional resistance generated between the proximity portion and the front end face 8B is relatively small, the front edge portion 8E is easily bent downward smoothly. The front edge 8E is slightly bent downward, so that the plurality of sheets 8A are easily separated from each other. The glue 7 applied to the front end surface 8B easily enters between the plurality of sheets 8A.
  • the glue applying roller 350 reverses.
  • the proximity portion of the paste application surface moves toward the upstream side in the direction in which the peripheral surface 351A moves relative to the front end surface 8B.
  • a portion of the sheet bundle 8 that connects the front end surface 8B and the lower end surface 8G is a second corner portion 8I.
  • a portion of the peripheral surface 351A having substantially the same height as the second corner portion 8I is referred to as a second facing portion.
  • the front edge 8E of the sheet bundle 8 is bent slightly upward by contacting the reverse glue application surface. Specifically, the proximity portion of the peripheral surface 351A moves toward the upstream side in the direction in which the glue application roller 350 moves relative to the front end surface 8B. Since the frictional resistance generated between the proximity portion and the front end surface 8B is relatively small, the front edge portion 8E is easily bent upward smoothly. Since the front edge portion 8E is slightly bent upward, the plurality of sheets 8A are easily separated from each other. The glue 7 applied to the front end surface 8B easily enters between the plurality of sheets 8A.
  • the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 in the order of the first corner 8H and the second corner 8I below the first corner 8H. Therefore, the glue 7 applied to the front edge 8E is unlikely to sag from the front edge 8E.
  • the glue application roller 350 may reverse when moving from the first proximity position to the second proximity position, and may rotate normally when moving from the second proximity position to the first proximity position. In this case, the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 to the front end face 8B, and applies the glue 7 in the order of the second corner portion 8I and the first corner portion 8H.
  • the sheet bundle 8 is held in a stationary state by the paper alignment mechanism 100 and the bundle operation mechanism 200.
  • the glue application roller 350 moves in the left-right direction, the glue 7 is applied to the front end face 8B of the stationary sheet bundle 8.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply the glue 7 to the sheet bundle 8 without having to move the sheet bundle 8 after the plurality of sheets 8A are stacked. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can be downsized.
  • the glue application roller 350 is arranged in such a posture that its axis intersects the horizontal direction. In the present embodiment, the glue application roller 350 is disposed in such a posture that the axis is inclined to the right side in the upward direction. Therefore, even when the liquid level of the glue 7 falls in the glue reservoir 342, the state in which the glue 7 is supplied to the glue application roller 350 is easily maintained.
  • the glue application roller 350 easily comes into contact with the glue 7 stored in the glue storage unit 342. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply a sufficient amount of glue 7 to the sheet bundle 8 even when the diameter of the glue application roller 350 is small.
  • the front wall portion 349A is inclined downward toward the glue application roller 350 (see FIG. 17).
  • the glue 7 stored in the glue storage part 342 easily moves toward the glue application roller 350 along the front wall part 349A. Regardless of the amount of glue 7 stored in the glue storage unit 342 and the diameter of the peripheral surface 351 ⁇ / b> A, the glue application roller 350 easily comes into contact with the glue 7 stored in the glue storage unit 342. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply a sufficient amount of glue 7 to the sheet bundle 8 even when the diameter of the glue application roller 350 is small.
  • the surface area of the peripheral surface 351A is also small, so the contact area between the glue 7 attached to the peripheral surface 351A and the air is also small. Since the glue application surface of the glue application roller 350 is less than half of the circumferential direction of the peripheral surface 351A, the amount of the glue 7 exposed from the inside of the main body 349 is suppressed. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can suppress the smell of the glue 7 from diffusing outside the main body 349 even when the glue 7 attached to the glue application surface produces a smell.
  • the glue 7 that has entered the plurality of groove portions 351C the glue 7 that does not adhere to the front end surface 8B stays in the groove portions 351C, and thus hardly drops from the peripheral surface 351A (see FIG. 18).
  • the glue 7 staying in the groove part 351C returns to the glue storing part 342 again with the rotation of the peripheral surface 351A. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can suppress the spread of the odor of the paste 7 even when the odor generating paste 7 is used.
  • the glue receiving member 360 receives the glue 7 that has fallen without being applied to the sheet bundle 8 (see FIG. 16).
  • the glue 7 dropped on the glue receiving member 360 is less likely to generate odor when solidified. Since the heat generated by the heat generated by the heater 347 is blocked by the connecting plate 361 having heat insulating properties, it is difficult for the heat to be transmitted to the glue receiving installation portion 313.
  • the liquid paste 7 received by the paste receiving member 360 is easily solidified without being heated. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can suppress the spread of the odor of the paste 7 even when the odor generating paste 7 is used.
  • the front cover transporting step is a step of transporting the front cover 9 printed by the second printer 4 to the inside of the main body frame 2 by the front cover holding mechanism 400.
  • FIG. 39 schematically shows the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 in a right side view.
  • FIG. 42 shows the positional relationship between the sheet aligning mechanism 100 in which the table 110 is in the first transport position and the cover holding mechanism 400 in the sticking reference position in the left side view, and the left sheet aligning unit 103 and the right sheet aligning unit. 104, the contact member 106, and the like are omitted.
  • the control unit 900 moves the movable unit 401 upward from the lower end of the movable range and positions the movable unit 401 at the receiving position.
  • the receiving position is a vertical position of the movable portion 401 where the movable portion 401 protrudes above the main body frame 2 through the cover sheet supply port 22 (see FIG. 1).
  • the control unit 900 moves the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 to the upper end of each movable range and positions them directly below the cover sheet supply unit 6.
  • the control unit 900 controls the operation areas 430A and 440A to be in an open state (see FIG. 23).
  • the cover 9 printed by the second printer 4 is guided toward the cover supply port 22 by the cover supply unit 6.
  • the cover 9 discharged from the cover supply unit 6 passes between the pair of restriction pins 463 (see FIG. 21) and enters the operation region 430A of the upper clamp 430.
  • the cover sheet 9 passes between a pair of restriction pins 464 (see FIG. 21) and enters the operation region 440A of the lower clamp 440 positioned immediately below the upper clamp 430. Accordingly, in the operation areas 430A and 440A, the position of the cover 9 in the left-right direction is restricted by the pair of restriction pins 463 and 464.
  • the first holding force is a force that prevents the portion of the cover 9 that is disposed inside the operation region 440 ⁇ / b> A from moving up and down from the lower clamp 440.
  • the second holding force is a force that prevents a portion of the cover 9 that is disposed inside the operation region 430 ⁇ / b> A from moving up and down from the upper clamp 430.
  • the control unit 900 controls the operation of the cover holding mechanism 400 by starting either the first cover transport process or the second cover transport process.
  • the user can set in advance either the first cover sheet conveyance process or the second cover sheet conveyance process to the control unit 900 as an execution target.
  • the first cover transport process will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42.
  • FIG. 38 first, the number of sheets is acquired as a variable A (S1).
  • the number of sheets is the number of sheets 8A constituting the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 sets the number of sheets input by the user or the number of sheets printed by the first printer 3 in the variable A stored in the RAM (not shown) of the control unit 900.
  • the paper thickness is acquired as variable B (S3).
  • the paper thickness is the length in the vertical direction of the paper 8A constituting the paper bundle 8 on the table 110.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 sets the sheet thickness input by the user or a preset reference value of the sheet thickness in the variable B stored in the RAM of the control unit 900.
  • the cover size is acquired as variable C (S5).
  • the cover size is the vertical length of the cover 9 supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 sets a cover size input by the user or a reference value for a preset cover size in the variable C stored in the RAM of the control unit 900.
  • the thickness of the sheet bundle 8 is calculated as the variable D based on the variables A and B (S7).
  • the thickness of the sheet bundle 8 is the vertical length of the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110 (specifically, the vertical length of the front end face of the sheet bundle 8).
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 sets a value obtained by multiplying the variables A and B stored in the RAM as a variable D stored in the RAM. Steps S1 to S7 may be executed until the cover 9 is supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400. In step S7, the thickness of the sheet bundle 8 input by the user may be set in the variable D.
  • the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are closed (S9). That is, the operation areas 430A and 440A are both closed.
  • the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are moved downward by a predetermined amount (S11).
  • the predetermined amount may be at least the distance L or more.
  • the distance L is the upper end of the upper clamp 430 from the upper end of the pair of restriction pins 465 (see FIG. 21) when the upper clamp 430 is supported by the lower clamp 440 (state T1 in FIG. 39). Up and down direction distance.
  • step S11 When step S11 is executed, the positioning protrusion 456 of the upper clamp 430 supported by the lower clamp 440 is above the positioning plate 455 (see FIGS. 21 and 39).
  • the lower clamp 440 is movable in the vertical direction through the rear side of the positioning plate 455.
  • the positioning protrusion 456 contacts the positioning plate 455 the upper clamp 430 is restricted from moving downward.
  • the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are opened (S13).
  • the operation areas 430A and 440A are both open.
  • the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are moved upward by a predetermined amount (S15).
  • the upper clamp 430 supported by the lower clamp 440 also moves upward by a predetermined amount.
  • the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 return to the upper end of each movable range.
  • the lower clamp 440 is closed at the first bias value (S17). That is, the open state of the operation area 430A is maintained, while the operation area 440A is closed. At this time, the solenoids 443 and 445 are turned OFF, so that the front plate 442 is biased to the rear plate 441 by a first bias value by a winding spring not shown (see FIGS. 21 to 23). As a result, the first holding force is changed from substantially 0 to the first bias value.
  • the first urging value is strong enough to prevent the cover 9 sandwiched between the front plate 442 and the rear plate 441 from slipping out of the operation region 440A by its own weight or external force.
  • the movement of the lower clamp 440 is started (S19).
  • the elevating motor 450 moves the lower clamp 440 downward with a conveying force larger than a second urging value described later.
  • the lower clamp 440 moves downward from the upper end of the movable range.
  • the positioning projection 456 contacts the positioning plate 455, the upper clamp 430 is positioned at the upper reference position.
  • the cover sheet 9 supplied to the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 is sent toward the operation area 440A of the lower clamp 440 via the operation area 430A of the upper clamp 430.
  • the cover sheet 9 is appropriately conveyed as follows.
  • the cover holding mechanism 400 can position the lower end of the cover 9 with the pair of restriction pins 465 and can transport the cover 9 to an appropriate position.
  • the lower end portion of the cover sheet 9 supplied to the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 may not contact the pair of regulation pins 465. Also in this case, similarly to the above, the cover 9 is properly conveyed in a state where the lower end portion of the cover 9 is positioned by the pair of restriction pins 465.
  • the holding execution position is a position of the lower clamp 440 where the holding of the cover sheet 9 by the upper clamp 430 is started.
  • the holding execution position is preferably below the upper reference position and above the sticking reference position.
  • the holding execution position is a vertical position that is substantially the same as a pasting center position H1 described later. If the lower clamp 440 has not reached the holding execution position (S21: NO), the process returns to step S21.
  • the upper clamp 430 is closed at the second urging value (S23). That is, the operation areas 430A and 440A are both closed.
  • the solenoids 433 and 435 are turned OFF, the front plate 432 is biased to the rear plate 431 by the winding spring 439A at the second bias value (see FIGS. 21 to 23). As a result, the second holding force is changed from substantially 0 to the second urging value.
  • the second urging value is strong enough to prevent the cover 9 sandwiched between the front plate 432 and the rear plate 431 from slipping out of the operation area 430A due to its own weight.
  • the second urging value is a force smaller than the first urging value, in other words, the holding force of the cover 9 is smaller than the first urging value.
  • the biasing force of the winding spring 439A of the upper clamp 430 is smaller than the biasing force of the winding spring of the lower clamp 440.
  • the lower clamp 440 that holds the cover 9 moves downward from the holding execution position.
  • the first bias value at which the lower clamp 440 holds the cover sheet 9 is larger than the second bias value at which the upper clamp 430 holds the cover sheet 9.
  • the conveying force of the lower clamp 440 is larger than the second urging value. Therefore, in accordance with the movement of the lower clamp 440, the cover sheet 9 is pulled out from the operation area 430A while the lower side portion of the cover sheet 9 is held in the operation area 440A.
  • the cover 9 extends straight between the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 due to the tension applied by the upper clamp 430.
  • the cover center position M1 is the center position in the vertical direction of the cover 9 held by the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 (see FIG. 41).
  • the sticking center position H1 is the center position in the vertical direction of the abutting plate 460 (see FIG. 41).
  • the sticking center position H1 is synonymous with the vertical center position of the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 (specifically, the clamp bodies 472 and 482).
  • the position where the lower clamp 440 is positioned differs depending on the cover size.
  • the vertical position of the pair of restriction pins 465 included in the lower clamp 440 corresponds to the vertical position of the lower end portion of the cover sheet 9.
  • a position located upward from the pair of restriction pins 465 by a distance corresponding to half the cover size (that is, a value obtained by multiplying the RAM variable C by 1/2) is specified as the cover center position M1.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 controls the vertical position of the lower clamp 440 (that is, the pair of restriction pins 465) based on the rotation amount of the lifting motor 450 (that is, the conveyance amount of the lower clamp 440), thereby covering the cover.
  • the center position M1 can be adjusted in the vertical direction.
  • step S25 the CPU of the control unit 900 moves the lower clamp 440 holding the lower side portion of the cover 9 downward to a position where the cover center position M1 and the pasting center position H1 coincide with each other.
  • the cover sheet 9 is conveyed to the first adjustment position.
  • the first adjustment position in the first cover transport process is the vertical position of the cover 9 where the cover center position M1 and the pasting center position H1 coincide.
  • the movable part 401 is moved based on the variable D (S27). At this time, the movable portion 401 is positioned so that the pasting center position H1 substantially coincides with the thickness center position H2.
  • the thickness center position H2 is the center position in the vertical direction on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110 (see FIG. 42).
  • the position where the movable unit 401 is positioned differs depending on the thickness of the sheet bundle 8.
  • the first placement surface 1111 (see FIG. 12) of the placement surface 110A Upward from the first placement surface 1111 (see FIG. 12) of the placement surface 110A by a distance corresponding to half the thickness of the sheet bundle 8 (that is, a value obtained by multiplying the RAM variable D by 1/2).
  • a certain position is specified as the thickness center position H2.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 can adjust the sticking center position H1 in the vertical direction by controlling the vertical position of the movable unit 401 based on the rotation amount of the conveyance motor 422 (that is, the conveyance amount of the movable unit 401). .
  • step S27 the CPU of the control unit 900 moves the movable unit 401 holding the cover 9 downward until the pasting center position H1 coincides with the thickness center position H2.
  • the movable part 401 is transported to the second adjustment position as the reference reference position.
  • the second adjustment position in the first cover sheet conveyance process is the vertical position of the movable portion 401 where the pasting center position H1 and the thickness center position H2 coincide.
  • Step S27 may be executed during the execution of steps S9 to S25. That is, the operation of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 and the operation of the movable unit 401 may be executed in parallel. The processing after step S27 is executed in a cover sticking step described later.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 can reliably carry the cover sheet 9 with the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 by executing steps S9 to S19.
  • steps S13 and S17 to S25 the bookbinding apparatus 1 can transport the cover 9 with the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 while suppressing wrinkles and slack from occurring on the cover 9.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately position the cover 9 held by the cover holding mechanism 400 with respect to the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110 by executing steps S1 to S7 and S25 to S27. Specifically, the vertical center of the cover sheet 9 and the vertical center of the front end face of the sheet bundle 8 substantially coincide.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 can execute the second cover transport process when the second printer 4 executes the following image printing.
  • the second printer 4 prints an image within the print area 9A based on the print data.
  • the print area 9A is a rectangular area that is designated by the print data and has a size capable of printing an image.
  • the center position in the vertical direction of the print area 9A is referred to as a data center position M2.
  • the second printer 4 prints a pair of marks 9B on the area outside the print area 9A on the cover 9 and on the portion overlapping the data center position M2.
  • the pair of marks 9 ⁇ / b> B are images of a specific pattern indicating the data center position M ⁇ b> 2, and are printed on both ends in the left-right direction of the cover 9 in the present embodiment.
  • the number of sheets is acquired as a variable A as in step S1 (S41). Similar to step S3, the sheet thickness is acquired as a variable B (S43). Similar to step S7, the thickness of the sheet bundle 8 is calculated as a variable D based on the variables A and B (S45). Steps S41 to S45 may be executed until the cover 9 is supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400. Next, similarly to steps S9 to S23, operation control of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 is executed (S47 to S61).
  • step S61 it is determined whether the pair of marks 9B has been detected by the pair of mark sensors 499 (S63).
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 causes the left mark sensor 499 to emit light and irradiates the front left end of the cover 9 with light. To do.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 determines whether or not an image of a specific pattern has been detected based on the amount of light detected by the light receiving unit of the left mark sensor 499. When the image of the specific pattern is detected, the CPU of the control unit 900 determines that the left mark 9B has been detected. Similarly, the CPU of the controller 900 determines whether the right mark sensor 499 has detected the right mark 9B.
  • step S63 If the pair of marks 9B has not been detected (S63: NO), the process returns to step S63.
  • the pair of marks 9B is detected (S63: YES)
  • the movement of the lower clamp 440 is stopped based on the detected pair of marks 9B (S65).
  • the lower clamp 440 is positioned so that the data center position M2 substantially coincides with the pasting center position H1.
  • the position where the lower clamp 440 is positioned differs depending on the position and size of the printing area 9A.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 can adjust the data center position M2 in the vertical direction by controlling the vertical position of the lower clamp 440 based on the rotation amount of the lifting motor 450.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 specifies the vertical position of the pair of regulation pins 465 (that is, the vertical position of the lower end portion of the cover 9) when the pair of marks 9B is detected.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 specifies the vertical distance from the vertical position of the specified pair of restriction pins 465 to the position of the pair of mark sensors 499 (that is, the detection position of the pair of marks 9B).
  • a position located upward from the pair of regulating pins 465 by the specified vertical distance is specified as the data center position M2.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 moves the lower clamp 440 holding the lower side portion of the cover 9 downward to a position where the data center position M2 and the pasting center position H1 coincide. As shown in FIG. 44, the cover sheet 9 is conveyed to the first adjustment position.
  • the first adjustment position in the second cover sheet conveyance process is the vertical position of the cover sheet 9 where the data center position M2 and the pasting center position H1 coincide.
  • the movable portion 401 is moved based on the variable D so that the pasting center position H1 substantially coincides with the thickness center position H2 (S67). That is, the movable part 401 is conveyed to the second adjustment position as the sticking reference position.
  • the second adjustment position in the second cover sheet conveyance process is the vertical position of the movable portion 401 where the data center position M2 coincides with the thickness center position H2.
  • step S67 may be executed. That is, the operation of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 and the operation of the movable unit 401 may be executed in parallel. The processing after step S67 is executed in a cover sticking step described later.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 can reliably convey the cover sheet 9 with the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 while suppressing the occurrence of wrinkles and slack in the cover sheet 9 as in the first cover sheet conveyance process.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately position the cover 9 held by the cover holding mechanism 400 with respect to the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110 by executing steps S41 to S45 and S63 to S67.
  • the vertical center of the printing area 9 ⁇ / b> A substantially coincides with the vertical center of the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8.
  • the control unit 900 reciprocates the pair of arm portions 461C between the standby position and the biasing position a plurality of times.
  • the pair of arm portions 461C urge the cover 9 to the right when moving from the standby position to the urging position.
  • the cover 9 moves to the right inside the operation areas 430A and 440A up to a position where it comes into contact with the right regulation pins 463 and 464.
  • the right end portion of the cover sheet 9 is positioned at the restriction position P2 (see FIG. 23).
  • the control unit 900 stops the pair of arm portions 461C at the standby position, and ends the cover sheet transporting process.
  • the controller 900 executes a cover sheet attaching process after the cover sheet conveying process and the glue applying process.
  • the cover sticking step is a step of sticking the cover 9 held by the cover holding mechanism 400 to the sheet bundle 8 to which the glue 7 is applied.
  • the cover sticking step will be described with reference to FIGS. 38, 42, 43, and 45 to 50.
  • the controller 900 moves the table 110 forward from the first transport position while maintaining the state where the second table 1120 is in the first rotation position.
  • the control unit 900 moves the bundle operation unit 230 forward in synchronization with the movement of the table 110.
  • the sheet bundle 8 moves forward while being sandwiched between the presser plate 232 and the first placement surface 1111.
  • the table 110 is moved forward to the second transport position.
  • the second transport position is a position in the front-rear direction of the table 110 where the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 is pressed against the abutting plate 460.
  • the table 110 passes through the third transfer position while moving from the first transfer position to the second transfer position.
  • the third transport position is a front-rear direction position of the table 110 where the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 contacts the cover sheet 9 held by the cover sheet holding mechanism 400.
  • a position where the adhesive portion formed on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 and the cover sheet 9 contact each other is referred to as a contact position.
  • the upper clamp 430 holds the cover sheet 9 above the contact position.
  • the lower clamp 440 holds the cover sheet 9 below the contact position.
  • the control unit 900 executes step S27 and subsequent steps of the first cover transport process. As shown in FIG. 38, it is first determined whether or not the sheet bundle 8 has reached the contact position (S29). The control unit 900 specifies the current position of the table 110 based on the rotation amount of the conveyance motor 121 (that is, the conveyance amount of the table 110).
  • the process returns to step S29.
  • the current position of the table 110 is the third transport position, it is determined that the sheet bundle 8 has reached the contact position (S29: YES), and the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are released (S31). That is, the first holding force is changed from the first bias value to substantially zero, and the second holding force is changed from the second bias value to substantially zero.
  • the lower clamp 440 is retracted in a direction away from the cover 9 by moving to the lower end of the movable range (S33). Thereafter, the first cover sheet conveyance process is terminated.
  • the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 hold the cover sheet 9 with the contact position therebetween (see FIG. 42).
  • the cover 9 is held in a posture that extends in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.
  • the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110 comes into contact with the rear surface of the cover sheet 9 held by the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440.
  • the cover sheet 9 is attached to an adhesive portion formed on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8.
  • the operation areas 430A and 440A are opened when the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 contacts the cover sheet 9.
  • the table 110 moves from the third transport position to the second transport position, the upper side portion of the cover sheet 9 released from the upper clamp 430 falls out from the operation area 430A.
  • the lower side portion of the cover 9 released from the lower clamp 440 comes out upward from the operation area 440A. Further, since the lower clamp 440 is retracted in a direction away from the cover sheet 9, the cover sheet 9 is easily extracted from the operation area 440A.
  • step S67 when the second cover transport process is started in the cover transport process, the control unit 900 executes step S67 and subsequent steps of the second cover transport process.
  • steps S69 to S73 of the second cover sheet conveyance process are the same as steps S29 to S33, and thus description thereof is omitted.
  • a clamp body 472 (see FIG. 21) of the upper clamp 470 that moves downward biases the cover 9 against the front edge of the upper surface of the sheet bundle 8, and the upper portion of the cover 9 serves as the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8. Bend backward along.
  • a clamp body 482 (see FIG. 21) of the lower clamp 480 that moves upward biases the cover 9 against the front edge of the lower surface of the sheet bundle 8, and the lower portion of the cover 9 serves as the front end of the sheet bundle 8. Bend backward along the surface.
  • the clamp bodies 472 and 482 sandwich the front end portion of the booklet 10 from the upper and lower sides on the rear side of the abutting plate 460.
  • the cover sheet 9 is attached to the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 with the cover sheet 9 in the first adjustment position and the movable portion 401 in the second adjustment position. Specifically, when the first cover sheet conveyance process is executed, the cover sheet 9 is pasted on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 in a state where the center of the cover sheet 9 is aligned with the center of the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8. It is done. When the second cover sheet conveyance process is executed, the cover sheet 9 is attached to the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 with the vertical center of the printing area 9 ⁇ / b> A and the vertical center of the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 aligned. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can create a booklet 10 in which the positional deviation between the sheet bundle 8 and the cover sheet 9 is small.
  • the right aligning plate 140 positions the right end surface of the paper bundle 8 at the third restriction position (that is, the cutting reference position P1 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23).
  • the pair of arm portions 461C positions the right end portion of the cover sheet 9 at a restriction position P2 shown in FIG.
  • the cutting reference position P1 is on the right side of the regulation position P2. Accordingly, in the cover sheet attaching step, the cover sheet 9 is attached to the sheet bundle 8 with the right end portion of the cover sheet 9 shifted to the left side from the right end portion of the sheet bundle 8. In the created booklet 10, the right end portion of the sheet bundle 8 protrudes from the cover 9 to the right side.
  • the front end surface of the booklet 10 is bound by the cover 9.
  • the upper side and the lower side of the images printed on the cover 9 and the paper 8A included in the booklet 10 correspond to the left side and the right side of the bookbinding apparatus 1, respectively.
  • the back side, the fore edge side, the top side, and the ground side of the booklet 10 correspond to the front side, the rear side, the left side, and the right side of the bookbinding apparatus 1, respectively.
  • the control unit 900 moves the second table 1120 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (see FIG. 45).
  • the mounting surface 110A changes from a bent surface to a substantially horizontal plane.
  • the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A changes to a posture extending in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 is less likely to cause creases and wrinkles in the sheet bundle 8, and can suppress deterioration in the quality of the booklet 10 during the bookbinding operation.
  • control unit 900 moves the table 110 backward to the first transport position.
  • the control unit 900 moves the bundle operation unit 230 rearward together with the table 110, and moves the bundle operation unit 230 to the upper end of the movable range. 46, the front end portion of the booklet 10 is held between the clamp bodies 472 and 482, and the presser plate 232 and the table 110 are separated from the booklet 10.
  • the booklet 10 sandwiched between the clamp bodies 472 and 482 hangs downward and rearward due to its own weight.
  • the control unit 900 executes a booklet operation process.
  • the booklet operation process will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the movable portion 401 of the cover holding mechanism 400 starts to move upward from the reference reference position at the first speed (S81).
  • the first speed is preferably close to the maximum speed at which the transport motor 422 moves the movable portion 401.
  • S83 Based on the rotation amount of the transport motor 422, it is determined whether or not the movable portion 401 has reached the receiving position (S83).
  • the process returns to step S83.
  • the predetermined time is a length of time that the vibration of the booklet 10 conveyed in step S81 is subsided, and is, for example, 5 seconds.
  • the control unit 900 moves the table 110 from the first transport position to the second transport position. As shown in FIG. 48, the table 110 moves to the lower side of the booklet 10 held by the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480. Further, the control unit 900 drives the contact detection sensor 190.
  • the contact detection sensor 190 includes a light emitting unit 191 and a light receiving unit 192.
  • the light emitting unit 191 and the light receiving unit 192 are on both sides of the table 110 and on a substantially diagonal line of the table 110 with the table 110 in the second transport position.
  • the light emitting unit 191 emits laser light that passes slightly above the placement surface 110A toward the light receiving unit 192.
  • the light receiving unit 192 detects the laser light emitted from the light emitting unit 191.
  • step S85 the movable unit 401 starts to move downward from the receiving position at the second speed (S87).
  • the second speed is slower than the first speed.
  • vibration is unlikely to occur in the booklet 10 sandwiched between the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480. Since the booklet 10 is prevented from colliding with the placement surface 110A at a high speed, the booklet 10 is hardly damaged.
  • S89 it is determined whether or not an object is detected by the contact detection sensor 190 (S89). When laser light is detected by the light receiving unit 192, it is determined that no object is detected (S89: NO). In this case, the process returns to step S89.
  • the table 110 is moved a predetermined amount backward from the second transport position (S91). That is, when the lower end portion of the booklet 10 contacts the placement surface 110A, the table 110 slightly moves from the back side of the booklet 10 toward the fore edge side. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can prevent the cover 9 that contacts the placement surface 110A from being bent when the booklet 10 is placed on the placement surface 110A.
  • the movable portion 401 is positioned at the reference reference position, and the booklet 10 is placed on the placement surface 110A.
  • the control unit 900 moves the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 in a direction away from each other.
  • the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 release the booklet 10. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can appropriately place the booklet 10 sandwiched between the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 on the table 110.
  • the controller 900 executes the booklet transport process after the cover sheet attaching process.
  • the booklet transporting process is a process of transporting the booklet 10 on the table 110 to the cutting mechanism 500 by the booklet transporting mechanism 600.
  • the booklet transport process will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 24, and 51 to 54.
  • the control unit 900 moves the table 110 on which the booklet 10 is placed backward to a position where the rear end of the table 110 is close to the hand unit 640 in the initial position. .
  • the control unit 900 controls the movement of the bundle operation unit 230 and arranges the lower end portion of the presser plate 232 on the front side of the booklet 10.
  • the control unit 900 controls the movement of the bundle operation unit 230 and urges the front end surface of the booklet 10 backward on the rear surface of the presser plate 232.
  • the biased booklet 10 moves backward on the placement surface 110A.
  • the control unit 900 moves the bundle operation unit 230 in the backward direction until the rear end of the booklet 10 enters the clamp unit 660A.
  • the amount of movement of the bundle operation unit 230 required to cause the rear end portion of the booklet 10 to enter the clamp unit 660A differs depending on the length of the booklet 10 in the front-rear direction.
  • the control unit 900 adjusts the amount of movement of the bundle operation unit 230 according to, for example, the longitudinal length of the booklet 10 input by the user. Thereafter, the controller 900 moves the upper plate 641 (see FIG. 28) downward from the upper end of the movable range. In the clamp portion 660A, the rear end portion of the booklet 10 is sandwiched from above and below by the upper plate 641 and the lower plate 642 (see FIG. 28).
  • the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 rearward from the initial position in a state where the rear end portion of the booklet 10 is held by the clamp unit 660A.
  • the lower plate 642 moves backward within the opening region 590A (see FIG. 25).
  • the booklet 10 sandwiched between the clamp portions 660A is conveyed rearward along the upper sides of the pair of side plates 593 (see FIG. 25).
  • the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 backward to the drawing position.
  • the drawing position is a position where the booklet 10 held between the clamp portions 660A is drawn from the placement surface 110A.
  • the drawing position of the hand unit 640 changes in the front-rear direction according to the length of the booklet 10 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the control unit 900 adjusts the amount of movement of the hand unit 640 according to, for example, the longitudinal length of the booklet 10 input by the user. Similarly, the control unit 900 adjusts the amount of movement of the hand unit 640 according to the longitudinal length of the booklet 10.
  • control unit 900 moves the upper plate 641 to the upper end portion of the movable range, and releases the rear end portion of the booklet 10.
  • the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 backward by a predetermined amount until the rear end of the booklet 10 comes out of the clamp unit 660A. Further, the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 to the upper end of the movable range, and then moves the hand unit 640 to the front end of the movable range.
  • the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 downward to a position where the clamp unit 660B faces the booklet 10 from the front side. Further, the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 backward to the hand reference position.
  • the hand reference position is a position in the front-rear direction of the hand unit 640 that serves as a reference for positioning the booklet 10 at the first and second cutting positions.
  • the first cutting position is a front-rear direction position of the booklet 10 where the booklet 10 is positioned between the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520.
  • the second cutting position is a front-rear direction position of the booklet 10 at which the booklet 10 is located immediately below the cutting member 533.
  • the hand reference position is constant regardless of the longitudinal length of the booklet 10.
  • the control unit 900 moves the upper plate 641 downward from the upper end of the movable range.
  • the clamp portion 660B the front end portion of the booklet 10 is sandwiched between the upper plate 641 and the lower plate 642 from the vertical direction.
  • the front end portion of the booklet 10 is sandwiched between the clamp portions 660 ⁇ / b> B and positioned by the reference plate 643.
  • the control unit 900 can accurately position the booklet 10 to the cutting position by executing position control of the hand unit 640 based on the position of the reference plate 643.
  • the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 backward from the hand reference position.
  • the booklet 10 sandwiched between the clamp portions 660B is conveyed in the backward direction along the upper sides of the pair of side plates 593 (see FIG. 25).
  • the hand unit 640 Is moved.
  • the booklet 10 is conveyed to the second cutting position.
  • the rear portion of the booklet 10 is stacked on the placement surface 536A (see FIG. 25) and disposed below the cutting member 533.
  • the booklet transport process ends.
  • the controller 900 executes the cutting process after the booklet transport process.
  • the cutting step is a step of cutting the booklet 10 on the table 110 into a size specified in advance by the cutting mechanism 500. The cutting process will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • the control unit 900 moves the cutting member 533 downward from the upper end of its movable range.
  • the cutting edge 535A of the cutting blade 535 moves downward to a position where it reaches a cutting board (not shown).
  • the rear edge of the booklet 10 is cut off from the booklet 10 by the blade edge 535A.
  • the front-rear direction length of the booklet 10 after cutting is equal to the front-rear direction cut size specified in advance.
  • the control unit 900 performs the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520 until the horizontal distance between the placement surfaces 516A and 526A (see FIG. 26) is slightly smaller than the horizontal length of the booklet 10.
  • the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 in the forward direction.
  • the left end portion and the right end portion of the booklet 10 sandwiched between the clamp portions 660B are placed on placement surfaces 516A and 526A, respectively.
  • the booklet 10 is conveyed forward along the upper sides of the pair of side plates 593.
  • the hand unit 640 moves until the booklet 10 reaches the approximate center of the support rail 590 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the booklet 10 is conveyed to the first cutting position.
  • the control unit 900 moves the upper plate 641 (see FIG. 28) to the upper end portion of the movable range to release the front end portion of the booklet 10.
  • the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 to the initial position.
  • the control unit 900 moves the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520 in directions close to each other.
  • the cutting members 513 and 523 move in directions close to each other through the upper side of the booklet 10 placed on the placement surfaces 516A and 526A.
  • the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit until the horizontal distance between the cutting blades 515 and 525 becomes equal to a predetermined horizontal cutting size (in this embodiment, the vertical length of the booklet 10 after cutting). 520 is moved.
  • the control unit 900 executes a position adjustment process.
  • the position adjustment process will be described.
  • the counter plate is moved to the alignment preparation position (S101).
  • the counter plate is an alignment plate different from the reference plate among the alignment plates 518 and 528.
  • the reference plate is an alignment plate that positions the booklet 10 at the alignment execution position among the alignment plates 518 and 528.
  • the alignment execution position is a position away from the center position Z between the cutters to the reference plate side by a distance that is approximately half the length of the booklet 10 in the horizontal direction.
  • the center position Z between the cutters is the center position in the left-right direction of the blade edges 515A and 525A.
  • the alignment execution position is the same as the cutting reference position P1 described above.
  • the alignment preparation position is a position away from the center position Z between the cutters toward the counter plate by a distance less than half of the length of the booklet 10 in the left-right direction.
  • the right alignment plate 528 that faces the right end surface of the booklet 10 (in this embodiment, the ground of the booklet 10) is the reference plate.
  • the left alignment plate 518 facing the left end surface of the booklet 10 is a counter plate.
  • step S101 the alignment plate 518 is moved rightward from the initial position until the right surface of the alignment plate 518 reaches the alignment preparation position (see FIG. 57). At this time, the right surface of the alignment plate 518 comes into contact with the left end surface of the booklet 10 on the placement surface 516A, and biases the booklet 10 in the right direction.
  • the center of the booklet 10 in the left-right direction is on the right side of the center position Z between the cutters.
  • the counter plate is moved from the alignment preparation position to the initial position (S103).
  • the reference plate is moved from the initial position to the alignment execution position (S105).
  • the alignment plate 528 is moved leftward from the initial position until the left surface of the alignment plate 528 reaches the alignment execution position (see FIG. 57).
  • the left surface of the alignment plate 528 comes into contact with the right end surface of the booklet 10 on the placement surface 526A, and biases the booklet 10 leftward.
  • the center of the booklet 10 in the left-right direction substantially coincides with the center position Z between the cutters.
  • the control unit 900 moves the cutting members 513 and 523 downward from the upper end of the movable range.
  • the cutting edge 515A of the cutting blade 515 moves downward to a position where it contacts a cutting board (not shown).
  • the cutting edge 525A of the cutting blade 525 moves downward to a position where it contacts a cutting board (not shown).
  • the left edge portion and the right edge portion of the booklet 10 are separated from the booklet 10 by blade edges 515A and 525A, respectively.
  • the length in the left-right direction of the booklet 10 after cutting is equal to the cutting size in the left-right direction specified in advance.
  • control unit 900 ends the cutting process. Specifically, control unit 900 moves left cutting unit 510 to the left end of the movable range, and moves right cutting unit 520 to the right end of the movable range. The user collects the booklet 10 cut in the cutting process from the cutting mechanism 500.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 can match the center position Z between the cutters and the center in the left-right direction of the booklet 10 (in this embodiment, the center in the vertical direction of the booklet 10) by executing the position adjustment process.
  • the cutting position of the booklet 10 by the cutting blades 515 and 525 is adjusted based on the cutting reference position P1 (see FIG. 23). That is, the cutting position of the booklet 10 by the cutting blades 515 and 525 is positioned with reference to the cutting reference position P1 corresponding to the end of the booklet 10 on the ground side (that is, the ground of the booklet 10). Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately cut the booklet 10 without being affected by the attachment position of the cover 9. It is possible to suppress the image printed on the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A constituting the text of the booklet 10 from being largely deviated with respect to the ground of the booklet 10.
  • the cutting reference position P1 may be a position where the left alignment plate 130 (see FIG. 14) substantially coincides with the second restriction position where the left end surface of the sheet bundle 8 is positioned.
  • the left regulation pins 463 and 464 are reference pins
  • the right regulation pins 463 and 464 are opposite pins.
  • the cutting reference position P1 is on the left side of the regulation position P2 (that is, the right end portion of the left regulation pins 463 and 464).
  • the cover sheet 9 is attached to the sheet bundle 8 with the left end part of the cover sheet 9 shifted to the right side from the left end part of the sheet bundle 8. That is, in the booklet 10 created in the cover sticking step, the left end portion of the sheet bundle 8 protrudes from the cover 9 to the left side.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately cut the booklet 10 without being affected by the attachment position of the cover 9. It is possible to suppress the image printed on the paper 8 ⁇ / b> A constituting the text of the booklet 10 from being largely shifted with reference to the top end of the booklet 10.
  • Each mechanism included in the bookbinding apparatus 1 may be used alone or in combination with other devices.
  • the paper supply unit 5 may be used alone or in combination with other devices in order to transport paper printed by other image forming apparatuses.
  • the position of each mechanism included in the bookbinding apparatus 1 can be changed as long as the bookbinding operation described above can be realized.
  • the first printer 3 may be installed on the right side of the main body frame 2.
  • the paper supply unit 5 may supply the paper 8A from the right side of the main body frame 2 by conveying the paper 8A printed by the first printer 3 to the left side.
  • the second printer 4 may be installed below the main body frame 2.
  • the cover holding mechanism 400 may supply the cover 9 from the lower side of the main body frame 2 by conveying the cover 9 printed by the second printer 4 upward.
  • the positions of the mechanisms (for example, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the glue application mechanism 300, the cover holding mechanism 400, and the cutting mechanism 500) may be changed so that the relative positional relationship does not change with the paper alignment mechanism 100 as a reference. .
  • the paper alignment mechanism 100 may stack a plurality of sheets 8A so that the positions of the rear end, right end, and left end of the sheets 8A coincide.
  • the paper alignment mechanism 100 may not include the contact member 106.
  • the table 110 may be a non-rotating table having a mounting surface 110A that is a substantially horizontal plane.
  • the drive motor 162 may rotate the second table 1120 via a pair of levers 161 provided at the right end and the left end of the second table 1120.
  • the rotational speed per unit time of the eccentric cam 182 may be the same as the rotational speed per unit time of the cam member 172, or may be smaller than the rotational speed per unit time of the cam member 172.
  • the timing at which the vibration motor 180 applies vibration to the second table 1120 and the timing at which the tapping motor 170 applies vibration to the second table 1120 may be the same or different from each other.
  • the contact member 106 may be a wire extending in the left-right direction above the table 110.
  • the contact member 106 may extend substantially horizontally toward the right front above the table 110.
  • the contact member 106 may extend above the table 110 toward the lower right side.
  • the paper alignment mechanism 100 may vibrate the second table 1120 by means different from the tapping motor 170 and the vibration motor 180.
  • the paper alignment mechanism 100 may include any one of the tapping motor 170 and the vibration motor 180.
  • the hit motor 170 and the vibration motor 180 may vibrate at least one of the first table 1110 and the second table 1120.
  • the vibration motor 180 may be provided on the lower surface of the first table 1110 to vibrate the first table 1110.
  • the paste application mechanism 1300 includes a movable unit 1301 and a transport unit 302 (see FIG. 3).
  • the movable part 1301 includes a support part 1311, a nut (not shown), a glue application part 1340, a glue receiving member 1360, and a pump drive mechanism 1380.
  • the support portion 1311 is a rectangular plate-like body extending in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.
  • the nut of the movable portion 1301 is provided at the lower front end portion of the support portion 1311 and the screw shaft 322 (see FIG. 3) is inserted. Accordingly, the transport motor 321 (see FIG. 3) can move the movable portion 1301 in the left-right direction.
  • the paste application part 1340 includes a main body part 1349.
  • the main body 1349 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-like body that is long in the vertical direction.
  • a heater 347 (see 17) is provided inside the main body 1349.
  • the roller installation portion 1343 is provided on the rear side of the main body portion 1349.
  • the glue application roller 350 is rotatably held inside the main body 1349.
  • a part (glue application surface) of the peripheral surface 351 ⁇ / b> A of the adhesive application roller 350 is exposed rearward from the roller installation portion 1343.
  • the glue receiving member 1360 is a bottomed box-like body that is open on the upper side, and is provided at the lower end of the main body 1349.
  • the pump drive mechanism 1380 includes a tank 1383, a communication member 1381, a screw pump 1385, pulleys 1357 and 1358, a belt 1356, and a pipe 1387.
  • the tank 1383 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-like body that is long in the vertical direction.
  • the tank 1383 is provided on the left side of the main body 1349.
  • the tank 1383 extends from the left side of the lower end of the glue receiving member 1360 to the upper left side of the main body 1349.
  • the communication member 1381 is a box-like body that connects the lower end portion of the glue receiving member 1360 and the lower end portion of the tank 1383.
  • the inside of the glue receiving member 1360 and the inside of the tank 1383 communicate with each other via a communication member 1381.
  • the screw pump 1385 includes a shaft portion 1385A and a spiral portion 1358B.
  • the shaft portion 1385A is a cylindrical body that extends through the tank 1383 in the vertical direction.
  • the spiral portion 1358B is a plate-like body provided on the peripheral surface of the shaft portion 1385A and formed in a spiral shape along the axis of the shaft portion 1385A.
  • the pulley 1357 is provided on the shaft portion 1385A above the tank 1383.
  • a pump drive motor 1350 is provided on the front surface of the support portion 1311.
  • the pulley 1358 is provided on the drive shaft of the pump drive motor 1350.
  • the belt 1356 is bridged over pulleys 1357 and 1358 via a notch 1311A provided in the support portion 1311.
  • An adhesive supply port 341 is provided on the upper surface of the main body 1349.
  • the pipe 1387 is connected to the upper end of the tank 1383 and the glue supply port 341.
  • the inside of the tank 1383 and the inside of the glue storage part 342 communicate with each other via a pipe 1387 and a glue supply port 341.
  • the rotating glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 to the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 while the movable portion 1301 moves in the left-right direction.
  • the glue 7 dropped from the glue application surface enters the glue receiving member 1360 from above.
  • the glue 7 entering the inside of the glue receiving member 1360 flows out into the tank 1383 through the communication member 1381.
  • the pump drive motor 1350 rotates the screw pump 1385 around the shaft portion 1385A via the belt 1356 and the pulleys 1357 and 1358.
  • the spiral portion 1358 ⁇ / b> B moves the glue 7 in the tank 1383 upward.
  • the transferred glue 7 passes through the pipe 1387 and is sent to the glue storage unit 342.
  • the pump drive mechanism 1380 collects the liquid glue 7 falling on the glue receiving member 1360 and sends it to the glue reservoir 342.
  • the glue 7 dropped from the glue application surface is less likely to stay outside the main body 1349. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can suppress the spread of the odor of the paste 7 even when the odor generating paste 7 is used.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 may move the paper alignment mechanism 100 in the left-right direction in a state where the left-right direction position of the rotating glue application roller 350 is fixed during the glue application step.
  • the glue 7 is applied to the front end face of the sheet bundle 8 by moving the front end face of the sheet bundle 8 in the left-right direction along the glue application surface of the glue application roller 350.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 may apply the glue 7 to the front end face of the sheet bundle 8 by moving both the glue application roller 350 and the paper alignment mechanism 100 in the left-right direction.
  • the glue application roller 350 is not limited to the posture in which the axis is inclined to the right side in the upward direction.
  • the glue application roller 350 may be arranged with its axis substantially parallel to the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 60, the glue application roller 350 may be arranged in such a posture that its axis is inclined leftward in the upward direction.
  • the glue application mechanism 300 applies the glue 7 to the front end face 8B in the following manner when any of the first to fourth application operations is performed.
  • the glue applying roller 350 reverses.
  • the proximity portion of the paste application surface moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the peripheral surface 351A moves relative to the front end surface 8B.
  • the first facing portion rotates so as to rub the glue 7 against the first corner portion 8H. Accordingly, the paste 7 is applied to the front end face 8B and the first corner 8H.
  • the first corner 8H of the sheet bundle 8 bends downward by contacting the reverse glue application surface.
  • the proximity portion of the peripheral surface 351A moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the glue application roller 350 moves relative to the front end surface 8B. Since the frictional resistance generated between the proximity portion and the front end surface 8B is relatively large, the first corner portion 8H is easily bent downward. As the first corner portion 8H bends downward, the first facing portion can easily apply the paste 7 to the first corner portion 8H.
  • the glue applying roller 350 rotates normally.
  • the proximity portion of the paste application surface moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the peripheral surface 351A moves relative to the front end surface 8B.
  • the second facing portion rotates so as to rub the glue 7 against the second corner portion 8I. Accordingly, the paste 7 is applied to the front end face 8B and the second corner 8I.
  • the second corner portion 8I of the sheet bundle 8 is bent upward by coming into contact with the normally rotating glue application surface.
  • the proximity portion of the peripheral surface 351A moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the glue application roller 350 moves relative to the front end surface 8B. Since the frictional resistance generated between the proximity portion and the front end surface 8B is relatively large, the second corner portion 8I is easily bent upward. As the second corner portion 8I bends upward, the second facing portion can easily apply the glue 7 to the second corner portion 8I.
  • the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 in the order of the first corner 8H and the second corner 8I below the first corner 8H. Therefore, the glue 7 applied to the front edge 8E is unlikely to sag from the front edge 8E.
  • the upper clamp 430 may be provided with a sensor 498 that detects whether or not the cover 9 is present in the operation area 430A.
  • the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 may be closed (S9 and S47). .
  • the control unit 900 may execute the following basic conveyance process instead of the first and second cover sheet conveyance processes.
  • the basic conveyance process as shown in FIG. 37, when the lower side of the cover 9 enters the operation area 440A, the operation area 440A is closed.
  • the lower clamp 440 moves downward while gripping the lower side portion of the cover sheet 9.
  • the upper clamp 430 moves downward to the upper reference position by its own weight in a state where the cover sheet 9 is inserted into the operation area 430A.
  • the lower clamp 440 moves away from the upper clamp 430 to the lower reference position.
  • the operation area 430A is closed.
  • the cover sheet 9 is held by the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440.
  • the movable portion 401 that holds the cover 9 moves downward to the sticking reference position.
  • a part of the first and second cover transport processes may be selectively executed.
  • the cover holding mechanism 400 can reliably convey the cover 9.
  • steps S13 and S17 to S25 are executed, the cover holding mechanism 400 can transport the cover 9 while suppressing wrinkles and slack in the cover 9.
  • steps S1 to S7 and S25 to S27 are executed, the cover holding mechanism 400 can accurately position the cover 9 with respect to the sheet bundle 8.
  • the first and second cover transport processes can be modified as follows. A modification of the first cover transport process described below can also be applied to the second cover transport process.
  • step S17 at least one of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 may be controlled so that the first holding force is larger than the second holding force.
  • step S19 the conveying force of the lower clamp 440 may be controlled by the elevating motor 450 so that the force is greater than the second holding force in step S23.
  • the upper clamp 430 is controlled so that the second holding force after the lower clamp 440 reaches the holding execution position is larger than the second holding force before the lower clamp 440 reaches the holding execution position. It only has to be done.
  • the lower clamp 440 may be controlled so that the first holding force in step S31 is smaller than the first holding force in step S17.
  • the upper clamp 430 may be controlled so that the second holding force in step S31 is smaller than the second holding force in step S23.
  • the conveyance force of the table 110 that moves from the first conveyance position to the second conveyance position may be any force that is greater than the first holding force and the second holding force in step S31.
  • the holding force of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 may be weakened to such an extent that the cover 9 can be easily pulled out from the operation areas 430A and 440A.
  • At least one of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 may be a clip that can hold a part of the cover 9, a suction part, an adhesive part, a roller, or the like.
  • the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are mechanisms for holding the cover 9 by a pair of rollers
  • the upper clamp 430 is moved to the second at the same time as the movement of the lower clamp 440 (S19) without executing step S21. It may be clamped by the urging value (S23).
  • step S31 the force with which the pair of rollers urge the cover sheet 9 is weakened without separating the pair of rollers.
  • the magnitudes of the first holding force and the second holding force may be adjusted according to the magnitude of the force to adhere to the cover 9. Good.
  • the magnitudes of the first holding force and the second holding force are the magnitude of the frictional force on the cover sheet 9, respectively. May be adjusted.
  • the cover holding mechanism 400 may include a plurality of positioning pins (not shown) instead of the positioning plate 455 (see FIGS. 41 and 44).
  • the plurality of positioning pins are arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface of the support frame 414, and are movable in the front-rear direction.
  • a solenoid (not shown) selectively energizes one of the plurality of positioning pins and moves it to an advanced position that protrudes rearward from the support frame 414. Similar to the positioning plate 455, the positioning pin in the advanced position contacts the positioning protrusion 456 (see FIG. 39) of the upper clamp 430 and restricts the downward movement of the upper clamp 430.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 that executes step S25 reduces the cover size to half (that is, a value obtained by multiplying the RAM variable C by 1/2) according to the RAM variable C (that is, the cover size). For the corresponding distance, the positioning pin located upward from the sticking center position H1 is moved to the advance position by the solenoid.
  • the upper reference position is set at a position away from the pasting center position H1 by a distance corresponding to half of the cover size.
  • the upper clamp 430 can hold the cover 9 at a position adjusted according to the cover size.
  • the upper reference position may be changed according to the data center position M2.
  • the second cover transport process can be modified as follows.
  • the second printer 4 may print only one mark 9B on the cover 9.
  • the cover holding mechanism 400 may be provided with only one mark sensor 499 that can detect the mark 9B.
  • the CPU of the control unit 900 may determine that there is mark detection when one mark 9B is detected (S63: YES).
  • step S83 it may be determined whether or not the movable unit 401 has moved upward to a predetermined first specific position based on the number of rotations of the transport motor 422.
  • the first specific position is a vertical position of the movable portion 401 where the lower end portion of the booklet 10 sandwiched between the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 is disposed at least above the placement surface 110A.
  • step S89 based on the rotation speed of the transport motor 422, it may be determined whether the movable unit 401 has moved downward to a predetermined second specific position.
  • the second specific position is a position where the lower end portion of the booklet 10 held between the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 is in contact with the placement surface 110A or slightly above the placement surface 110A.
  • Directional position is a position where the lower end portion of the booklet 10 held between the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 is in contact with the placement surface 110A or slightly above the placement surface 110A.
  • the mounting surface 110A may be a surface inclined backward.
  • the booklet 10 can be appropriately placed on the placement surface 110A during the execution of steps S87 to S95.
  • a protrusion may be provided on the mounting surface 110A.
  • the booklet 10 can be appropriately placed on the placement surface 110 ⁇ / b> A because the protrusion is caught by the lower end portion of the booklet 10 during the execution of step S ⁇ b> 91.
  • the booklet 10 is transported upward from the placement surface 110A and then placed on the placement surface 110A again is exemplified.
  • the booklet 10 may be placed on a second surface different from the first surface.
  • the first surface may be an upward surface on which the sheet bundle 8 can be placed.
  • the second surface may be an upward surface on which the booklet 10 can be placed.
  • the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 have a structure that can move in the vertical direction while holding the booklet 10, the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp that hold the booklet 10 instead of moving the movable unit 401 in the vertical direction. You may move 480 up and down.
  • the table 110 may be moved in the vertical direction instead of moving the movable portion 401 in the vertical direction. Along with the vertical movement of the movable part 401, the vertical movement of the table 110 may be performed.
  • step S81 at least one of the operation of moving the table 110 downward and the operation of moving the movable unit 401 upward may be executed.
  • step S87 at least one of the operation of moving the table 110 upward and the operation of moving the movable unit 401 downward may be executed.
  • the booklet 10 can be placed on the placement surface 110A from above.
  • Step S85 may not be executed.
  • Steps S89 to S91 may not be executed.
  • the cover holding mechanism 400 may include only one clamp corresponding to the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440, or may include three or more.
  • another mechanism for example, a belt conveyor, a roller group, or the like
  • the lift motor 450 may move both the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440.
  • Two motors may move the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 independently.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 may position the upper clamp 430 by a mechanism for moving the upper clamp 430 or the positioning protrusion 456 in the vertical direction, for example, according to the cover size or the data center position M2.
  • the lower clamp 440 only needs to hold a part (first part) of the cover 9.
  • the upper clamp 430 only needs to hold a part (second part) different from the first part of the cover sheet 9.
  • the vertical position (in other words, the upper reference position) of the upper clamp 430 may be fixed.
  • the alignment plate 528 facing the right end surface of the booklet 10 may be a counter plate, and the alignment plate 518 facing the left end surface of the booklet 10 may be a reference plate.
  • the cutting reference position P1 may be a position different from the alignment execution position in the left-right direction.
  • the bookbinding apparatus 1 can match the center of the booklet 10 in the left-right direction and the center position Z between the cutters by the position adjustment process (see FIG. 58).
  • the cutting members 513 and 523 can cut the booklet 10 at an accurate position even if the position adjustment process is not executed.
  • the cutting mechanism 500 may not cut the trailing edge of the booklet 10.
  • the booklet transport mechanism 600 may transport the booklet 10 as follows. In the same manner as described above, after the rear end portion of the booklet 10 is inserted into the clamp portion 660A by the bundle operation unit 230, the rear end portion of the booklet 10 is clamped by the clamp portion 660A (see FIG. 51). Next, the hand unit 640 is moved backward from the initial position (see FIG. 52). At this time, the hand unit 640 passes through the drawing position and moves backward to convey the booklet 10 to the first cutting position. The left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520 cut the booklet 10 as in the above embodiment. Thus, when only the left edge part and the right edge part of the booklet 10 are cut, it is not necessary to change the booklet 10 from the clamp part 660A to the clamp part 660B.
  • the cutting mechanism 500 may cut the trailing edge of the booklet 10 after cutting both left and right edges of the booklet 10.
  • the cutting mechanism 500 may cut at least one of the left edge, the right edge, and the rear edge of the booklet 10.
  • the cutting mechanism 500 may cut the left edge and the right edge of the booklet 10 simultaneously, or may cut either the left edge or the right edge of the booklet 10 first.
  • a plurality of sheets can be moved in the third direction (upward) while being movable in the first direction (forward direction) and the second direction (rearward direction) and at a predetermined position (first transport position).
  • the first direction and the second direction are opposite to each other, and the third direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction.
  • An adhesive part can be formed on a specific end surface (front end surface) of a sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) in a state where the stacking unit is at the predetermined position, and the sheet bundle is the plurality of sheets stacked by the stacking unit.
  • the specific end face is an end face on the first direction side of the sheet bundle, and an adhesive portion forming means (glue application mechanism 300);
  • the cover (cover 9) can be held and the stacking means moves in the first direction from the predetermined position, the cover is moved through the adhesive portion formed on the specific end surface.
  • a cover attachment means (cover holding mechanism 400) that can be attached to a sheet bundle;
  • the stacking unit moves in the second direction from the predetermined position, the second direction side edge, the fourth direction side (left side) of the booklet that is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached
  • the fourth direction is a direction perpendicular to the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction.
  • a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a cutting means (cutting mechanism 500) in which the fifth direction is opposite to the fourth direction.
  • the adhesive portion forming means can form an adhesive portion on a specific end surface of the sheet bundle while the stacking means is in a predetermined position.
  • the cover sheet attaching means can create a booklet by attaching the cover sheet to the sheet bundle via the adhesive portion when the stacking means moves in the first direction.
  • the cutting means can cut at least a part of the edge at a position different from the specific end face in the booklet when the stacking means moves in the second direction.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can execute the stacking of a plurality of sheets and the formation of the adhesive portion without moving the stacking unit from the predetermined position.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can create and cut a booklet by moving the stacking means from a predetermined position in the first direction and the second direction. That is, the bookbinding apparatus can execute a series of steps necessary for the bookbinding operation only by linearly moving the stacking means. Since the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the length of the movement distance of the stacking means during the bookbinding operation, it can suppress at least one of the complexity and size increase of the apparatus structure.
  • the bookbinding apparatus may include a housing (main body frame 2) provided with the stacking means, the adhesive portion forming means, the cover attaching means, and the cutting means.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can make the entire apparatus compact by holding the stacking means, the bonding portion forming means, the cover attachment means, and the cutting means in the casing.
  • the bookbinding apparatus is configured to supply sheet supply means (sheets) that can supply the plurality of sheets located on the fourth direction side of the casing toward the inside of the casing in the fifth direction side.
  • the supply unit 5) and the cover on the third direction side of the casing can be supplied to the sixth direction side (lower side) toward the inside of the casing, and the sixth direction is
  • a cover sheet supply unit (cover sheet holding mechanism 400) that is opposite to the third direction, wherein the stacking unit is movable within the housing and is supplied by the sheet supply unit. May be accumulated at the predetermined position, and the cover attachment means may hold the cover supplied by the paper supply means inside the housing. In this case, the plurality of sheets and the cover are supplied into the housing from different directions.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can arrange the adhesive portion forming means, the cover attachment means, the cutting means, the paper supply means, and the cover supply means in different directions with the stacking means as the center. Since the bookbinding apparatus can arrange a plurality of components necessary for bookbinding operation in a space-saving manner, it can suppress at least one of complication and enlargement of the apparatus structure.
  • the cover attachment means and the cover supply means are one movable mechanism (cover cover holding mechanism 400) that can move between a reception position and an attachment position. Outside the housing, it is a position where the cover on the third direction side of the housing can be received, and the mounting position is the inside of the housing and the movable mechanism receiving the cover.
  • the cover sheet received at the position may be a position where it can be attached to the sheet bundle.
  • the position where the paper edge is guided by the regulation table is likely to vary, and it is difficult to match the positions of the accumulated paper edges.
  • the edge of the sheet is made closer to the reference line by the roller, there is a possibility that the sheet conveyance path becomes long and the apparatus becomes large.
  • the second disclosure has the following configuration.
  • a paper stacking unit (table 110) having a mounting surface (mounting surface 110A) that is a plane on which the supplied paper (paper 8A) is stacked;
  • Transport means paper supply section 5 capable of transporting the paper substantially horizontally toward the paper stacking section and discharging the transported paper above the placement surface;
  • a member that is provided above the placement surface and contacts a first end portion (rear end portion 18) of the paper that is discharged by the conveying means and falls toward the placement surface from below;
  • One end portion is a contact member (contact member 106) that is an end portion in a first direction (rear direction) that is orthogonal to the sheet conveyance direction (right direction) and is substantially horizontal.
  • the sheet extends in a substantially vertical direction along the first restriction position and comes into contact with the second end portion (front end portion 15) of the sheet falling toward the placement surface, and the sheet is positioned at a position higher than the first restriction position. It is a member that restricts movement in two directions (forward direction), the second direction is a direction opposite to the first direction, the second end is an end in the second direction, A sheet conveying device (a sheet supply unit 5 and a sheet aligning mechanism 100) including a first restricting member (a front aligning plate 150) that is an appropriate position of the second end portion determined in advance.
  • the sheet conveyed by the conveying unit is discharged so that the first end portion is in contact with the contact member, and falls toward the placement surface.
  • the first restricting member contacts the second end of the sheet falling on the placement surface, and positions the second end at the first restricting position.
  • the plurality of sheets are stacked on the sheet stacking unit so that the positions of the respective second end portions coincide with each other. Therefore, the sheet conveying apparatus can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked without including a roller as in the prior art. Since the paper transport device can suppress the length of the paper transport path, it can suppress at least one of complication and enlargement of the device structure.
  • the sheet conveying device extends in a substantially vertical direction along the second restriction position, and is disposed at a downstream end (right end 17) in the conveying direction of the sheet falling toward the placement surface.
  • a member that contacts and restricts the sheet from moving to the downstream side in the transport direction from the second restriction position, and the second restriction position is an appropriate position at the predetermined downstream end.
  • a certain 2nd regulation member (right alignment board 140) may be provided.
  • the sheet discharged by the transport unit moves to the downstream side in the transport direction due to inertia.
  • the second restricting member contacts the downstream end of the sheet falling on the placement surface, and positions the downstream end at the second restricting position.
  • the plurality of sheets are stacked on the sheet stacking unit so that the positions of the respective downstream end portions coincide with each other. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
  • the distance between the contact member and the first regulating member in the first direction or the second direction may be shorter than the length of the mounting surface in the first direction or the second direction. Good. In this case, the paper falling toward the paper stacking unit is likely to contact the contact member and the first regulating member. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
  • the contact member has a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the transport direction and extending substantially in the vertical direction, and guides the first end portion of the paper discharged by the transport means.
  • a wall portion (guide wall portion 106B), a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the transport direction and extending from the first wall portion in the second direction, and the sheet of the paper guided by the first wall portion;
  • You may provide the 2nd wall part (support wall part 106A) which contacts a 1st end part from the downward direction.
  • the first wall portion guides the paper discharged by the conveying means, and the second wall portion contacts the first end portion of the paper guided by the first wall portion from below.
  • the second end of the sheet falling toward the placement surface is likely to come into contact with the first regulating member. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
  • the contact member may extend substantially parallel to the transport direction, and a length of the contact member in the transport direction may be half or more of a length of the paper in the transport direction. In this case, the contact member can more reliably guide the sheet along the transport direction until the upstream end of the sheet is discharged above the placement surface.
  • Binding means capable of binding the end face on the second end side of the sheet transport apparatus and the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) which is a plurality of sheets stacked on the mounting surface.
  • a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) including the glue application mechanism 300 and the cover holding mechanism 400) may be used. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can align the end faces of the sheet bundle bound by the binding means substantially flush with each other.
  • the binding means may include application means (glue application mechanism 300) capable of applying an adhesive (glue 7) to the end face.
  • application means glue application mechanism 300
  • the bookbinding apparatus can align the end faces of the sheet bundle to which the adhesive is applied by the applying means.
  • the binding means includes a cover attaching means (cover holding mechanism 400) capable of attaching a cover (cover cover 9) that wraps the bundle of sheets to the end face to which the adhesive is applied by the applying means. But you can. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can create a booklet by attaching a cover to the end face of the sheet bundle.
  • the third disclosure has the following configuration.
  • first stacking member (first table 1110) having a first surface (first placement surface 1111) that is a substantially horizontal surface on which a first portion of the paper (paper 8A) can be placed;
  • first placement surface 1111 that is a substantially horizontal surface on which a first portion of the paper (paper 8A) can be placed;
  • second surface (second mounting surface 1121) that is provided side by side with the first stacking member and on which the second portion of the paper can be mounted, and the separating portion (separating portion 1123) is in proximity.
  • the second portion is a portion different from the first portion of the paper, and the proximity portion is located on the first surface side of the second surface.
  • a second integrated member (second table 1120) that is an end portion, and the separation portion is an end portion of the second surface opposite to the first surface; Paper supply means (paper supply unit 5) capable of supplying the paper so that the paper is placed on both the first surface and the second surface; A first end portion of the paper that is provided on the opposite side of the second stacking member across the first stacking member and extends in a substantially vertical direction along the first restricting position and is supplied to the paper supply means The first end is a member that contacts the (front end 15) and positions the first end at the first restricting position, and the first end is a first direction from the second surface toward the first surface (front And a first positioning member (pre-alignment plate 150) that is an appropriate position of the predetermined first end, and a sheet conveying device (sheet supply unit 5). And the paper alignment mechanism 100).
  • the paper supplied by the paper supply means is placed on the first surface and the second surface. Since the separation portion is above the proximity portion, the paper placed on the first surface and the second surface moves in the first direction.
  • the first positioning member contacts the first end of the sheet moving in the first direction, and positions the first end at the first restriction position.
  • the plurality of sheets are stacked on the first stacking member and the second stacking member so that the positions of the respective first end portions coincide with each other. Therefore, the sheet conveying apparatus can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked without including a roller as in the prior art. Since the paper transport device can suppress the length of the paper transport path, it can suppress at least one of complication and enlargement of the device structure.
  • the sheet conveying device may include a vibration unit (a tapping motor 170, a vibration motor 180) capable of vibrating at least one of the first stacking member and the second stacking member.
  • a vibration unit a tapping motor 170, a vibration motor 180
  • the sheets placed on the first surface and the second surface are easily moved in the first direction by vibration of at least one of the first stacking member and the second stacking member.
  • the first end of the paper is easy to contact the first positioning member. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
  • the sheet conveying device is configured to be in a second direction side (right side) that is substantially horizontal with respect to at least one of the first stacking member and the second stacking member. ) And extends in a substantially vertical direction along the second restricting position, contacts the second end (right end 17) of the paper supplied to the paper supply means, and the second end is
  • the second positioning portion is a member positioned at the second restriction position, the second end portion is an end portion in the second direction, and the second restriction position is a second appropriate position of the second end portion.
  • a positioning member (right alignment plate 140) may be provided.
  • the second end portion of the paper supplied by the paper supply means is positioned at the second restriction position by the second positioning member.
  • the plurality of sheets are stacked on the first stacking member and the second stacking member so that the positions of the respective second end portions coincide with each other. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
  • the sheet conveying device is provided on the third direction side (left side) opposite to the second direction with respect to at least one of the first stacking member and the second stacking member. And extending in a substantially vertical direction along the third restriction position, contacting the third end portion (left end portion 16) of the paper supplied to the paper supply means, and making the third end portion the third restriction portion.
  • An alignment plate 130 may be provided.
  • the third end portion of the paper supplied by the paper supply means is positioned at the third restriction position by the third positioning member.
  • the plurality of sheets are stacked on the first stacking member and the second stacking member so that the positions of the third end portions thereof coincide with each other. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
  • the second stacking member has a first rotational position in which the separation portion is located above the proximity portion about a substantially horizontal axis (fixed shaft 160) orthogonal to the first direction.
  • the movable portion is rotatable between a second rotation position where the separation portion and the proximity portion are substantially equal to each other in a vertical direction, and the second surface has the movable body at the second rotation position. In some cases, it may be a substantially horizontal plane at a position in the vertical direction substantially equal to the first surface. In this case, as the second stacking member moves from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the plurality of stacked sheets change from a bending position to a position extending in a substantially horizontal direction. Therefore, the sheet conveying device can suppress the generation of folds and wrinkles on the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
  • the binding means may include application means (glue application mechanism 300) capable of applying an adhesive (glue 7) to the end face. In this case, the same effect as (2-7) is obtained.
  • the binding means includes a cover sticking means (cover holding mechanism 400) capable of sticking a cover (cover cover 9) that wraps the bundle of sheets to the end surface to which the adhesive is applied by the applying means. But you can. In this case, the same effect as (2-8) is obtained.
  • a bookbinding apparatus having a mechanism for conveying paper.
  • an on-line apparatus described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 8-85276 is integrally provided with a reading paper feeding apparatus, an image forming apparatus, and a bookbinding apparatus.
  • the reading paper feeding apparatus the sheets stacked on the paper feeding deck are conveyed to the image forming apparatus along the first conveyance path.
  • the image forming apparatus after the toner image is formed on the sheet, the sheet is supplied to the bookbinding apparatus along the second conveyance path.
  • the bind tape is bonded to the sheet bundle.
  • the fourth disclosure has the following configuration.
  • the sheet After an image is formed on the first side of the sheet (sheet 8A), the sheet is conveyed by the first conveyance amount and discharged from the discharge port (sheet discharge port 3A).
  • a mechanism paper feeding that takes in from the discharge port and forms an image on a second surface of the sheet opposite to the first surface, and then conveys the sheet by a second conveyance amount and discharges the sheet from the discharge port.
  • An image forming apparatus (first printer 3) including a roller 32, a process unit 35, and a paper discharge roller 37), wherein the first transport amount is a transport of the paper for discharging only a part of the paper from the discharge port.
  • the second transport amount is a transport amount of the sheet that discharges the entire sheet from the discharge port, and a sheet transport for transporting the sheet discharged from the discharge port of the image forming apparatus Device (paper supply unit 5),
  • a plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of the discharge port, and a guide surface that is a surface on which the paper discharged from the discharge port can be placed and a surface that extends in a guide direction that is a direction away from the discharge port.
  • a transport plate (route plate 51) having, The paper is provided along the guide surface downstream of the first position in the guiding direction and upstream of the second position in the guiding direction.
  • a rotating body that is rotatable, and the first position is a position on the guide surface on which a downstream end portion of the paper transported by the first transport amount in the guide direction is placed;
  • the position includes a first transport roller (a plurality of transport rollers 56A) that is a position on the guide surface on which a downstream end portion in the guide direction of the sheet transported by the second transport amount is placed. Paper transport device.
  • the discharged paper is not conveyed by the first conveying roller, but is taken from the discharge port and an image is formed on the second surface.
  • the entire sheet is discharged from the discharge port.
  • the discharged paper is transported downstream in the guide direction by the first transport roller.
  • the paper transport device can appropriately transport the paper discharged from a known image forming apparatus capable of duplex printing. For example, when the user replaces the image forming apparatus, the distance from the discharge port of the replaced image forming apparatus to the first transport roller is adjusted according to the first transport amount and the second transport amount of the image forming apparatus after replacement. To do. As a result, the paper transport device can appropriately transport the paper on which the image is formed without having to significantly change the structure of the paper transport device.
  • the paper transport device rotatably supports the first transport roller, and the first transport roller is disposed along at least one of the upstream side and the downstream side in the guide direction along the guide surface.
  • a plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of the discharge port (paper discharge port 3A) of the image forming apparatus (first printer 3) capable of printing an image on paper (paper 8A).
  • a transport plate (path plate 51) having a guide surface which is a surface on which the discharged paper can be placed and extends in a guide direction which is a direction away from the discharge port;
  • a first transport roller (a plurality of transport rollers 56A) which is a rotating body provided along the guide surface and which is rotatable in a direction of transporting the paper downstream in the guide direction;
  • a support that is a member that can rotatably support the first transport roller and that can change the position of the first transport roller along at least one of the upstream side and the downstream side in the guide direction along the guide surface.
  • a sheet conveying apparatus (sheet supply section 5) comprising a member (support section 82).
  • the paper discharged from the discharge port of the image forming apparatus can be placed on the guide surface of the transport plate, and the paper placed on the guide surface is downstream in the guide direction by the first transport roller. Can be conveyed.
  • the user when exchanging the image forming apparatus, the user can freely and easily adjust the distance from the discharge port of the image forming apparatus after replacement to the first conveying roller by changing the position of the first conveying roller by the support member.
  • the paper transport device can appropriately transport the paper on which the image is formed without having to significantly change the structure of the paper transport device.
  • the support member can change the position of the first transport roller to any one of a plurality of predetermined reference positions, and the plurality of reference positions have different sizes of the paper. May correspond. In this case, the user can easily and accurately change the position of the first transport roller according to the size of the paper.
  • the transport plate includes a plate-shaped first plate portion (path plate 51A) and a second plate portion (path plate 51B) provided side by side in the guide direction, and the first plate portion is
  • the transport plate is a member provided at an upstream end in the guide direction and rotatable about a substantially horizontal axis perpendicular to the guide direction, and the second plate portion is the first plate portion.
  • the user can freely change the position and shape of the upstream portion in the guide direction of the transport plate according to, for example, the position and shape of the discharge port by changing the rotation position of the first plate portion with respect to the second plate portion. Can change.
  • the paper transport device is provided along the guide surface downstream of the first transport roller in the guide direction, in a direction of transporting the paper downstream of the guide direction.
  • a second transport roller (a plurality of transport rollers 56B) that is a rotatable rotating body is provided, and the distance in the guide direction between the first transport roller and the second transport roller is the length of the sheet in the guide direction. It may be smaller than this.
  • the sheet conveying apparatus can convey the sheet conveyed by the first conveying roller further downstream in the guiding direction by the second conveying roller.
  • a bookbinding apparatus including the sheet transporting device and binding means (the glue application mechanism 300 and the cover holding mechanism 400) capable of binding the plurality of sheets transported by the paper transporting device.
  • the device 1) may be used.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can create a booklet by binding a plurality of sheets conveyed by the sheet conveying apparatus.
  • the user adjusts the distance from the discharge port of the image forming apparatus after replacement to the first transport roller.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can appropriately convey the paper on which the image is formed without having to significantly change the structure of the bookbinding apparatus.
  • a bookbinding apparatus that includes an application device that forms an adhesive portion to which a cover sheet can be attached by applying an adhesive to the adhesive surface of a sheet bundle.
  • a coating apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 4515116 includes a drum and a clamper. The drum rotates around an axis extending in the horizontal direction in a state where the drum is immersed in the molten glue as an adhesive. The clamper holds the sheet bundle with the adhesive surface facing the drum from above, and moves horizontally along a direction orthogonal to the axial direction of the drum. The drum applies an adhesive to the bonding surface.
  • the fifth disclosure has the following configuration.
  • (5-1) holding means capable of holding a plurality of supplied sheets (sheet 8A) in a state of being stacked in a first direction (up and down direction); Out of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) that is the plurality of sheets held by the holding means, the sheet bundle end face (front end face 8B) that is the end face in the second direction (front direction) orthogonal to the first direction.
  • a paper aligning means capable of aligning substantially the same along the first direction;
  • a peripheral surface peripheral surface (peripheral surface 351A) that can rotate around an axis that intersects the first direction and the third direction (left-right direction) and is orthogonal to the second direction, to which an adhesive (glue 7) can be attached.
  • An application roller (glue application roller 350) in which the third direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction;
  • Supply means (main body 349) capable of supplying the adhesive to the peripheral surface;
  • a moving means (conveyance motor 321) for moving the application roller relative to the end face of the sheet bundle along a position approaching from the second direction side
  • a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a rotation means (drive motor 319) that rotates the application roller when the moving means relatively moves the application roller.
  • the adhesive adhering to the peripheral surface moves to the end face of the sheet bundle by centrifugal force.
  • the axis of the application roller intersects the first direction and the third direction and is orthogonal to the second direction. Therefore, the rotating peripheral surface rotates so as to rub the adhesive against the corner of the sheet bundle.
  • the corner of the sheet bundle is a portion that connects the end face of the sheet bundle and the first direction end of the sheet bundle. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply the adhesive to the sheet bundle end face and corners of the sheet bundle with a simple mechanism including the above-described application roller.
  • the rotating means rotates the coating roller in a rotational direction in which the portion of the peripheral surface closest to the end face of the sheet bundle is directed upstream in the direction in which the coating roller relatively moves. Also good.
  • the proximity portion is a portion of the rotating peripheral surface that is closest to the sheet bundle end surface. The proximity portion rotates and moves toward the upstream side in the direction in which the application roller moves relative to the end face of the sheet bundle. Since the frictional resistance generated between the adjacent portion and the sheet bundle end face is relatively small, the sheet bundle end face is easily bent smoothly. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can more reliably allow the adhesive to enter between the plurality of sheets forming the sheet bundle.
  • the rotating means rotates the application roller in a rotation direction in which the portion of the peripheral surface closest to the end face of the sheet bundle moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the application roller relatively moves. Also good.
  • the corner of the sheet bundle comes into contact with the proximity portion and bends.
  • the proximity portion rotates and moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the application roller moves relative to the end face of the sheet bundle. Since the frictional resistance generated between the adjacent portion and the end face of the sheet bundle is relatively large, the corner portion of the sheet bundle is more easily bent. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply a sufficient adhesive to the corners of the sheet bundle.
  • the first direction is a vertical direction
  • the supply means is a box-like shape capable of storing the adhesive therein, and a member that rotatably holds the application roller in the inside
  • a storage tank main body portion 349) having an opening (roller installation portion 343) that exposes a part of the peripheral surface in a direction opposite to the second direction (rearward direction)
  • the moving means includes:
  • the storage tank may be relatively moved together with the application roller. In this case, when the moving means moves the storage tank relative to the sheet bundle end surface together with the application roller, the rotation means rotates the application roller. Part of the peripheral surface exposed from the opening applies the adhesive stored in the storage tank to the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can appropriately apply the adhesive even if the diameter of the application roller is small.
  • the sheet bundle connects the first end face (upper end face 8F) and the second end face (lower end face 8G), which are both end faces in the first direction, and the sheet bundle end face and the first end face.
  • the three directions include a fourth direction (left direction) and a fifth direction (right direction) that are opposite directions, and the moving means reciprocally moves at least one of the holding means and the application roller, After the application roller is relatively moved in the fourth direction, the application roller is relatively moved in the fifth direction, the rotating means is configured to move the application roller relatively moved in the fourth direction, Rotate in the direction of rotation toward the fifth direction and move relative to the fifth direction
  • the application roller is rotated in a rotation direction in which the proximity portion is directed toward the fourth direction side, the proximity portion is a portion of the peripheral surface that is closest to the end face of the sheet bundle, and the application roller is By rotating while relatively moving in four directions, the adhesive is applied to the sheet bundle end surface and the first corner, and by rotating while relatively moving in the fifth direction, the sheet bundle end surface and The adhesive may be applied to the second corner.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can apply sufficient adhesive to the sheet bundle end face, the first corner, and the second corner by the reciprocating movement of the application roller.
  • the first end surface is an upper end surface of the sheet bundle
  • the second end surface is a lower end surface of the sheet bundle
  • the application roller has the axis line directed upward. You may arrange
  • the application roller may include a plurality of recesses (groove portions 351C) in which a part of the peripheral surface is recessed toward the axis.
  • the adhesive supplied to the peripheral surface by the supply means tends to enter the plurality of recesses. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can attach more adhesive to the peripheral surface of the application roller.
  • the moving means may move the application roller among the holding means and the application roller.
  • the application roller applies the adhesive to the sheet bundle while moving in the third direction while the holding means for holding the sheet bundle is stationary. No space is required for the holding means to move in the third direction. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can be reduced in size.
  • the supply means may include a heat generating element (heater 347) capable of generating heat, and may supply a thermoplastic adhesive that dissolves when the heat generating element generates heat to the peripheral surface.
  • the bookbinding apparatus melts and liquefies the adhesive by heating the heating element when applying the adhesive to the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus does not cause the heating element to generate heat when no adhesive is applied to the sheet bundle.
  • the adhesive is changed to a solidified state in which odor is hardly generated. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the spread of the odor of the adhesive even when the adhesive that generates the odor is used.
  • a bookbinding apparatus provided with an application device that forms an adhesive part to which a cover sheet can be attached by applying an adhesive to the adhesive surface of a sheet bundle.
  • a coating apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 4515116 includes a melt tank and a drum.
  • the melt tank has a substantially box shape whose upper side is open, and can store molten glue as an adhesive inside.
  • the drum is rotatable around an axis extending in the horizontal direction while being immersed in the molten paste.
  • the sheet bundle moves horizontally with the adhesive surface facing the rotating drum from above.
  • the drum applies the molten paste stored in the melt tank to the bonding surface.
  • the sixth disclosure has the following configuration.
  • (6-1) holding means paper aligning mechanism 100 capable of holding a plurality of supplied sheets (sheet 8A) in a state where they are stacked in the vertical direction;
  • a sheet bundle end face (front end face 8B) that is an end face in a first direction (front direction) orthogonal to the up-down direction.
  • Paper aligning means capable of aligning substantially flush along the vertical direction;
  • a storage part (glue storage part 342) capable of storing the adhesive (glue 7) and a second direction side (rear side) opposite to the first direction side with respect to the storage part;
  • a box-shaped storage tank (main body part 349) having an opening (roller installation part 343) through which the adhesive can flow out of the storage part;
  • a moving means for moving in a third direction (left-right direction) orthogonal to the first direction;
  • a part of the peripheral surface (circumferential surface 351A) is held at a position exposed to the second direction side from the opening, and intersects the third direction and is an axis orthogonal to the first direction.
  • An applicator roller (glue applicator roller 350) that can rotate around A plurality of groove portions (groove portions 351C) provided along the circumferential direction on the peripheral surface, and each of the plurality of groove portions extends along the axis and is a portion into which the adhesive can enter.
  • a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a rotation means (drive motor 319) that rotates the application roller when the moving means moves the storage section.
  • the application roller may substantially close the opening in the third direction.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the odor of the adhesive from leaking to the outside of the storage tank through the opening even when the odor-causing adhesive is used.
  • the storage tank may accommodate at least half of the circumferential surface in the circumferential direction inside. In this case, the area of the peripheral surface exposed from the opening is less than half of the area of the peripheral surface. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the spread of the odor of the adhesive even when the adhesive that generates the odor is used.
  • the storage tank also includes a supply path (glue supply path 341A) capable of supplying the adhesive to the storage section, and a closing means (lid member 348) capable of closing the supply port. Good.
  • the closing means can close the supply path. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress leakage of the odor of the adhesive to the outside of the storage tank even when using the odor-causing adhesive.
  • the bookbinding apparatus is provided in the storage tank and receives a heating element (heater 347) capable of heating the storage section and the adhesive dropped from the peripheral surface below the application roller.
  • An adhesive receiving portion (glue receiving installation portion 313) on which a first receiving member (glue receiving member 360) can be installed, and a support member provided in the storage tank and supporting the adhesive receiving portion and having heat insulation ( Connecting plate 361), and the reservoir may be able to store a thermoplastic adhesive.
  • the application roller applies the adhesive dissolved in the storage tank heated by the heating element to the end face of the sheet bundle.
  • the adhesive dropped from the rotating application roller is collected by the first receiving member.
  • the support member Since the support member has a heat insulating property, the heat generated by the heating element is not easily transmitted to the first receiving member.
  • the liquid adhesive collected in the first receiving member is likely to transition to a solidified state where odor is hardly generated. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the spread of the odor of the adhesive even when the adhesive that generates the odor is used.
  • the bookbinding apparatus is provided in the storage tank, receives a second dropping member (glue receiving member 1360) below the coating roller, and receives the adhesive dropped from the peripheral surface, and the storage tank. And a delivery means (pump drive mechanism 1380) that collects the adhesive falling on the second receiving member and delivers it to the storage section.
  • the adhesive dropped on the second receiving member is sent to the storage part by the sending means and stored again in the storage part.
  • the adhesive is difficult to stay outside the storage tank. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the spread of the odor of the adhesive even when the adhesive that generates the odor is used.
  • the storage tank may include a wall portion (front wall portion 349A) that surrounds the storage portion from the first direction side and is inclined downward toward the application roller.
  • a wall portion front wall portion 349A
  • the adhesive easily moves toward the application roller along the wall part. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can appropriately apply the adhesive even if the diameter of the application roller is small.
  • the third disclosure has the following configuration.
  • holding means capable of holding a plurality of supplied sheets (8A) in a state of being stacked in the first direction (up and down direction); Out of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) that is the plurality of sheets held by the holding means, the sheet bundle end face (front end face 8B) that is the end face in the second direction (front direction) orthogonal to the first direction.
  • a paper aligning means capable of aligning substantially the same along the first direction; A plurality of grooves that intersect a third direction (left-right direction) orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction and that can rotate around an axis that is orthogonal to the second direction and extend along the axis.
  • An application roller (glue application roller 350) in which (groove portion 351C) is provided on the peripheral surface (circumferential surface 351A) along the circumferential direction;
  • Supply means (main body 349) capable of supplying an adhesive to the plurality of grooves;
  • the paper aligning means aligns the end face of the sheet bundle substantially flush with the end face of the sheet bundle, the application roller is moved along the position close to the end face of the sheet bundle from the second direction side.
  • Moving means for moving in the direction (conveyance motor 321);
  • a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a rotating means (drive motor 319) capable of rotating the application roller independently of movement of the application roller by the moving means and changing a rotation speed of the application roller. ).
  • the application roller is rotated while moving in the third direction, whereby the adhesive supplied to the plurality of grooves by the supply unit is applied to the end face of the sheet bundle.
  • the rotating means can rotate the application roller independently of the movement of the application roller, and can change the rotation speed of the application roller. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply an appropriate amount of adhesive to the end face of the sheet bundle by rotating the application roller at an appropriate rotation speed according to, for example, the number and type of sheets forming the sheet bundle.
  • the first direction is a vertical direction
  • the supply means has a box shape in which the adhesive can be stored inside, holds the application roller rotatably inside the inside, and A storage tank (main body portion 349) having an opening (roller installation portion 343) that exposes a part of the peripheral surface from the inside in a direction opposite to the second direction (rearward direction).
  • the application roller may be moved together with the storage tank. In this case, when the storage tank moves in the third direction, a part of the peripheral surface exposed from the opening by the rotation of the application roller applies the adhesive stored in the storage tank to the sheet bundle end surface.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can appropriately apply the adhesive even if the diameter of the application roller is small.
  • the third direction includes a fourth direction and a fifth direction which are opposite directions, and the moving means moves the application roller at least once in both the fourth direction and the fifth direction.
  • the rotating means may move and rotate at least one of the application roller moving in the fourth direction and the application roller moving in the fifth direction.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can adjust the amount of adhesive applied to the end face of the sheet bundle by adjusting the rotation of the application roller in accordance with the moving direction of the application roller.
  • the rotating means rotates the application roller moving in the fourth direction and the application roller moving in the fifth direction, respectively, and the moving means varies the moving speed of the application roller.
  • the movement speed of the application roller that moves in the fourth direction may be different from the movement speed of the application roller that moves in the fifth direction.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can adjust the amount of the adhesive applied to the end face of the sheet bundle by adjusting the moving speed of the applying roller according to the moving direction of the applying roller.
  • the moving means moves the application roller between a first end (right end 8C) and a second end (left end 8D) that are both ends in the third direction on the end face of the sheet bundle.
  • the rotating means moves at a peripheral speed substantially the same as the moving speed of the coating roller.
  • the application roller that has rotated the peripheral surface and moved the first number of times moves a second number of times (two times) between the one end and the other end, the periphery is faster than the moving speed of the application roller.
  • the peripheral surface may be rotated at a speed.
  • the application roller moves the first time, the frictional resistance generated between the adhesive immediately after being applied to the end face of the sheet bundle and the peripheral surface to which the adhesive is applied is relatively small. Since the adhesive easily adheres to the end face of the sheet bundle, the application roller can apply the adhesive evenly to the end face of the sheet bundle. Further, when the application roller moves a second number of times, the adhesive immediately after being applied to the end face of the sheet bundle is urged toward the end face of the sheet bundle. The adhesive applied to the end face of the sheet bundle easily enters between a plurality of sheets forming the sheet bundle. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply the adhesive to the end face of the sheet bundle and simultaneously allow the adhesive to enter between a plurality of sheets forming the sheet bundle.
  • the rotation means determines the moving speed of the application roller.
  • the peripheral surface may be rotated at substantially the same peripheral speed. In this case, when the application roller moves a third number of times, the moving speed and the peripheral speed are substantially the same, so that the adhesive is evenly applied to the end face of the sheet bundle. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply the adhesive to the end face of the sheet bundle and simultaneously allow the adhesive to enter between a plurality of sheets forming the sheet bundle.
  • the rotating means rotates the peripheral surface at different peripheral speeds when the application roller moves in the fourth direction and when the application roller moves in the fifth direction. May be.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can adjust the amount of adhesive applied to the end face of the sheet bundle by adjusting the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface according to the moving direction of the application roller.
  • a bookbinding apparatus that performs packet binding is known.
  • the intermediate sheets stacked by the stacking mechanism are transported in the horizontal direction toward the vertical transport path.
  • Two covers are supplied from the cover supply mechanism to the vertical conveyance path.
  • One end side of the supplied two cover sheets is attached to the end side of the middle paper with a binding tape.
  • a cover that covers the two covers is supplied from the cover supply mechanism to the vertical conveyance path.
  • the inner paper with the two cover sheets attached is wrapped in the cover by being conveyed in the horizontal direction toward the supplied cover.
  • the eighth disclosure has the following configuration.
  • a first portion which is provided on the fourth direction side (front side) with respect to the sheet holding means and which is a part of a cover (cover 9) supplied to a predetermined position (cover cover supply port 22) is formed in the fourth and fifth directions.
  • the fourth direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction
  • the fifth direction is a direction opposite to the fourth direction
  • the first direction is the first direction.
  • Holding force is a first clamping means (lower clamp 440) that is a force that prevents the first portion from moving in the first direction;
  • the second portion of the cover that is disposed opposite to the first clamping means in the third direction and supplied to the predetermined position can be clamped from the fourth direction and the fifth direction with a second holding force.
  • the second part is a part of the cover that is closer to the third direction than the first part, and the second holding force is a force that prevents the second part from moving in the first direction.
  • Certain second clamping means (upper clamp 430);
  • the first clamping means can be transported from the predetermined position to a target position substantially parallel to the second direction, and the target position is the target end face of the cover sheet held by the first clamping means and the second clamping means.
  • First driving means (a front end face of the sheet bundle 8) facing from the fourth direction side, and the target end face is an end face in the fourth direction of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding means ( Elevating motor 450);
  • the first holding means holds the first portion with the first holding force of a first value (first bias value), and the second holding means holds the second portion with a second value (substantially 0).
  • the first driving means is caused to convey the first holding means by the first conveying force
  • the first holding force of the first value is First control means (S13, S17 to S25 or S51, which is a force larger than the second holding force of the second value, and the first conveying force is a force larger than the second holding force of the second value).
  • Control unit 900 for executing S55 to S65; With the first clamping means being at the target position, the cover sheet clamped by the first clamping means and the second clamping means is attached to the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding means
  • a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) provided with possible cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100 and glue application mechanism 300).
  • the cover supplied to a predetermined position is sandwiched by the first sandwiching means with the first holding force having the first value, and is sandwiched by the second sandwiching means with the second holding force having the second value.
  • the first clamping means is transported from the predetermined position to the target position with a transport force larger than the second value of the second holding force.
  • the cover sheet sandwiched by the first sandwiching means and the second sandwiching means is attached to the target end face in a state of facing the target end face of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding means. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can execute bookbinding with a simple structure in which the first clamping means is moved linearly and paper jamming is suppressed.
  • the cover sheet is held in a posture extending in parallel to the target end surface of the sheet bundle due to the tension, so that the cover sheet can be accurately attached to the sheet bundle.
  • the first direction is substantially parallel to the vertical direction
  • the second direction is substantially parallel to the downward direction
  • the third direction is substantially parallel to the upward direction
  • the fourth direction and the The fifth direction may be substantially parallel to the horizontal direction.
  • the cover sheet is attached in a posture that extends in the vertical direction with respect to the sheet bundle in which a plurality of sheets are stacked in the vertical direction. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately attach the cover to the sheet bundle.
  • the cover attachment means can form an adhesive part on the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means, and the adhesive part is a part to which the cover can be attached With the forming means (glue application mechanism 300) and the first clamping means in the target position, the paper holding means can be conveyed in the fourth direction to the contact position, and the contact position is the formation of the adhesive portion.
  • Second drive means (conveyance motor 121) that is a position where the adhesive portion formed by the means and the cover sheet sandwiched by the first sandwiching means and the second sandwiching means are in contact with each other; and the second drive means
  • the sheet holding means is conveyed with a second conveying force, and when the sheet holding means reaches the contact position, the first portion is placed in the first clamping means with a third value (substantially 0).
  • the second holding means holds the second portion with the second holding force having a fourth value (substantially 0), and the first holding force having the third value is the first holding force having the first value.
  • the second holding force of the fourth value is a force smaller than the second holding force of the second value
  • the second conveying force is the first holding force of the third value and the second holding force.
  • the first holding force and the second holding force are smaller than the conveying force of the sheet holding unit. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can release the cover from the first sandwiching means and the second sandwiching means when the adhesive portion of the sheet bundle contacts the cover.
  • the first clamping means and the second clamping means are configured such that the cover extends in the first direction across the contact position. You may hold a cover.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can attach the cover to the sheet bundle while suppressing wrinkles and slack from occurring on the cover.
  • the second holding force of the second value is the second holding force of the fifth value (substantially 0) and the second holding force of the sixth value (second bias value).
  • the second holding force of the sixth value is larger than the second holding force of the fifth value, and the first control means is configured such that the first holding means is in the middle position from the predetermined position (holding execution).
  • the second portion is held by the second holding force of the fifth value while the first holding portion is transferred from the midway position to the target position.
  • the second portion may be held by the second holding means with the second holding force of the sixth value, and the intermediate position may be a position provided between the predetermined position and the target position.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can prevent the cover sheet being conveyed from being released from the second clamping unit due to, for example, its own weight and vibration.
  • At least one of the first clamping means and the second clamping means is a pair of plate portions (rear plates) that are disposed opposite to each other in the fourth direction and that can be displaced between the clamping position and the release position.
  • 431, 441 and front plates 432, 442), and the holding position is a position where the pair of plate portions are moved in a direction approaching each other, and a position where the cover sheet is held by the pair of plate portions
  • the release position is a position where the pair of plate portions are moved away from each other, and a position where the cover is movable within a predetermined area (operation areas 430A, 440A), and the predetermined area is the pair of plates.
  • a space formed between the portions and a space where the cover sheet supplied to the predetermined position enters from the third direction side may be used.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can execute the bookbinding in which the paper jam is suppressed while transporting the cover with a simple structure in which the pair of plate portions are moved close to or apart from each other.
  • a sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) that is a plurality of sheets (sheet 8A) stacked in a first direction (vertical direction) can be held, and the first direction is a direction opposite to each other.
  • a first clamping means (lower clamp 440), which is a direction orthogonal to one direction, and the target end is an end in the second direction of the cover;
  • the first clamping means can be transported between the supply position (cover cover supply port 22) and the target position substantially parallel to the first direction, and the supply position is closer to the third direction than the paper holding means.
  • the first clamping means is a position where the cover is supplied from the third direction side to the first clamping means, and the target position is provided on the second direction side from the supply position.
  • the front cover is a position facing the target end face (front end face of the sheet bundle 8) from the fourth direction side, and the target end face is the fourth direction of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means.
  • First driving means (elevating motor 450) which is an end face of Cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100 and glue application mechanism 300) capable of attaching the cover sandwiched by the first sandwiching means at the target position to the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the sheet retaining means.
  • the first clamping means is A pair of plate-like members disposed opposite to each other in the fourth direction and a pair of first plate portions (rear plate 441 and front plate 442) that are displaceable between a first clamping position and a first release position;
  • the first clamping position is a position where the pair of first plate portions are moved in a direction close to each other, and the cover sheet in the first region (in the operation region 440A) is clamped by the pair of first plate portions.
  • the first release position is a position where the pair of first plate portions are moved away from each other, and a position where the cover is movable in the first area. Is a space formed between the pair of first plate portions, and the pair of firsts which are spaces where the cover sheet supplied to the first clamping means at the supply position enters from the third direction side.
  • a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) having a pair of regulating pins 465).
  • the sheet bundle is held by the sheet holding unit.
  • the cover sheet supplied to the predetermined position is transported to a position facing the target end face of the sheet bundle by the first clamping means, and attached to the target end face by the cover attaching means.
  • the first clamping means has a pair of first plate portions that can be displaced between a first clamping position and a first release position. When the pair of first plate portions is in the first release position, the cover can enter the first region. The target end portion of the cover that has entered the first region comes into contact with a restriction portion included in the first clamping means, and movement in the second direction is restricted. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can execute bookbinding with a simple structure in which the first clamping means is moved linearly and paper jamming is suppressed. Since the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the cover with respect to the first clamping means for conveying the cover, the cover can be accurately positioned with respect to the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus is arranged to face the first direction and can fold the cover along the target end surface by sandwiching the booklet held by the paper holding means in the first direction.
  • the booklet includes a pair of clamping portions (upper clamp 470 and lower clamp 480) that are the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached, and the first driving means includes the first clamping means.
  • the regulation unit transports the first clamping means in the second direction to a position that is a predetermined distance away from the reference position in the second direction, and the reference position is The center position of the first direction in the clamping portion may be used. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the cover with respect to the center position between the pair of sandwiching portions that bend the cover.
  • the predetermined distance is approximately half of the length of the cover in the first direction (cover page size), or the center position in the first direction (data center position M2) in the image formed on the cover. Or the distance from the target end.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the approximate center position in the first direction on the cover or the approximate center position in the first direction on the cover image with respect to the center position between the pair of sandwiching portions.
  • the first direction is substantially parallel to the vertical direction
  • the second direction is substantially parallel to the downward direction
  • the third direction is substantially parallel to the upward direction
  • the fourth direction is horizontal. It may be substantially parallel to the direction.
  • the cover sheet is attached in a posture that extends in the vertical direction with respect to the sheet bundle in which a plurality of sheets are stacked in the vertical direction. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately attach the cover to the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus includes a cover sheet supply unit (cover sheet supply unit 6) that supplies the cover sheet from the third direction toward the first region in a state where the first clamping unit is in the supply position. ) And first control means (control for executing the operation shown in FIG. 37) for executing control to displace the pair of first plate portions to the first release position while the cover is supplied by the cover supply means. Part 900) and the control of the first control means, the first driving means is moved to the first driving means in a state where the pair of first plate parts are displaced to the first clamping position.
  • the pair of first controls With the plate portion displaced to the first release position, the first Control is performed by third control means (control unit 900 that executes S13 to S15 or S51 to S53) that controls the drive means to convey the first clamping means in the third direction and the third control means. Then, with the pair of first plate portions displaced to the first clamping position, the first driving means performs control to convey the first clamping means to the target position in the second direction.
  • Fourth control means control unit 900 for executing S17 to S19, S25 or S55 to S57, S65). In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can reliably contact the target end portion of the cover sheet supplied by the cover sheet supply unit with the control unit by each control of the first to fourth control units.
  • the bookbinding apparatus includes a pair of second plate portions (a rear plate 431 and a front plate 432) disposed to face the first clamping means in the third direction, and
  • the two plate portions are a pair of plate-like members arranged opposite to each other in the fourth direction and can be displaced between a second holding position and a second release position, and the second holding position is the pair of second members A position where the plate portions are moved in a direction approaching each other, and a position where the cover is sandwiched between the pair of second plate portions, and the second release position is a direction separating the pair of second plate portions from each other.
  • the cover is a position where the cover can move in the second area (in the operation area 430A), and the second area is a space formed between the pair of second plate portions.
  • Two clamping means (upper clamp 430), and when the first clamping means is in the supply position The second clamping means is in contact with the first clamping means from the third direction side, and the first area and the second area communicate with each other in the first direction.
  • the cover With the one clamping means in the supply position, the cover is supplied to the first area through the second area, and the first control means is supplied with the cover by the cover supply means.
  • the pair of second plate portions may be displaced to the second release position. In this case, the cover supplied by the cover supply means enters the first area via the second area. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can stably hold the cover sheet by both the first holding means and the second holding means.
  • the bookbinding apparatus includes second driving means (elevating motor 450 for moving the upper clamp 430 up and down via the lower clamp 440) capable of conveying the second clamping means substantially parallel to the first direction.
  • the second control means is configured to synchronize the second clamping means with the first clamping means in a state where the pair of second plate portions are displaced to the second clamping position.
  • the second control unit is moved in the second direction, and the third control unit displaces the second clamping unit in the second driving unit in a state where the pair of second plate portions are displaced to the second release position. You may move to the said 3rd direction synchronizing with a clamping means.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can securely clamp the cover sheet supplied by the cover sheet supplying unit with both the first clamping unit and the second clamping unit.
  • the cover cover attaching unit can form an adhesive part on the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding unit, and the adhesive part is a part to which the cover sheet can be attached
  • the forming means glue application mechanism 300
  • the paper holding means can be transported to the contact position in the fourth direction.
  • You may have the 3rd drive means paper alignment mechanism 100 which is a position where the said cover which the said object edge part was clamped by the means contacts.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can paste the cover sheet on the sheet bundle while suppressing the posture of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding unit from changing.
  • a bookbinding apparatus that performs packet binding is known.
  • a pair of clampers sandwich a booklet bundle, and the booklet bundle is conveyed in the order of a milling processing unit, a gluing processing unit, and a cover attaching processing unit.
  • the milling cutter cuts the back surface of the booklet bundle conveyed to the milling processing unit.
  • the glue roller applies glue to the back of the booklet bundle conveyed to the glue processing unit.
  • the pair of nip plates affix a cover on the back of the booklet bundle conveyed to the cover attachment processing unit.
  • the dimensions of the booklet bundle and the cover are measured between the stator and the measuring element.
  • the position of a clamping unit for example, a pair of clampers and a pair of nip plates that is a member that clamps a booklet bundle or a cover is controlled.
  • the position of the clamping unit that directly clamps the booklet bundle or the cover is controlled. Therefore, when the positioning accuracy of the clamping unit is poor, an accurate bookbinding operation may not be performed. For example, when the positioning accuracy of the pair of clampers is poor, the booklet bundle may fall from the pair of clampers. Therefore, in order to accurately position the cover with respect to the booklet bundle, high-precision and complicated control is necessary.
  • the tenth disclosure has the following configuration.
  • a sheet holding means capable of holding a sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) which is a plurality of sheets (sheet 8A) stacked in the first direction (vertical direction); Provided on the second direction side (front side) of the sheet holding means, can hold the cover (cover 9) supplied to a predetermined position (cover cover opening 22), and moves substantially parallel to the first direction.
  • a cover holding means (movable part 401) in which the second direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction; The cover sheet is provided in the cover sheet holding unit and can convey the cover sheet held by the cover sheet holding unit in a predetermined state substantially parallel to the first direction.
  • the cover sheet is a target end surface (the front end of the sheet bundle 8 A cover sheet conveying means (upper clamp 430 and lower clamp 440), wherein the target end surface is an end surface in the second direction of the sheet bundle;
  • the thickness of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding means can be acquired, and the thickness is the thickness acquisition means (the control unit that executes S7 or S45) that is the length of the sheet bundle in the first direction.
  • the cover can be transported to the cover transport means to a first adjustment position, and the first adjustment position is a specific position of the cover (cover center position M1 or data center position M2) and a reference position of the cover cover holding means (attachment)
  • the specific position is a position in the first direction predetermined on the cover, and the reference position is the first direction predetermined in the cover holding means.
  • First control means control unit 900 that executes S25 or S65
  • the cover holding means can be moved to a second adjustment position according to the thickness acquired by the thickness acquisition means, and the second adjustment position is the width of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means.
  • a center position coincides with the reference position, and the width center position is a center position of the sheet bundle in the first direction (control to execute S27 or S67).
  • Part 900) While the cover is in the first adjustment position and the cover holding means is in the second adjustment position, the cover is held by the cover holding means on the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means.
  • a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100 and glue application mechanism 300) capable of attaching the cover.
  • the sheet bundle is held by the sheet holding unit.
  • the cover supplied to the predetermined position is held by the cover holding means.
  • the cover held by the cover holding means is conveyed to the first adjustment position by the cover conveying means.
  • the cover sheet holding means is moved to the second adjustment position according to the thickness of the sheet bundle.
  • the center position of the width of the sheet bundle and the reference position of the cover holding means substantially coincide.
  • the cover sheet held by the cover sheet holding unit is attached to the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding unit in a state where the specific position of the cover sheet and the width center position of the sheet bundle substantially coincide. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the cover with respect to the booklet bundle with simple control, and can accurately create the booklet with the cover attached to the sheet bundle.
  • the first direction includes a third direction (downward direction) and a fourth direction (upward direction) that are opposite directions
  • the cover sheet transporting means includes a target end (lower end) of the cover sheet.
  • a restriction portion (a pair of restriction pins 465) that can be contacted from the third direction side, and can hold the target end portion that contacts the restriction portion, and the target end portion is the third portion of the cover.
  • End holding means (lower clamp 440) that is an end in the direction, and first drive means (elevating motor 450) capable of transporting the end holding means from the predetermined position substantially parallel to the third direction.
  • the specific position is a position that is a predetermined distance away from the target end in the fourth direction on the cover in the predetermined state, and the first control means connects the target end to the end holding means.
  • the restricting portion is moved away from the reference position.
  • Serial until said predetermined distance away position in the third direction may be transported to the end supporting means to the first drive means.
  • the conveyance control of the edge holding means is executed with reference to the restriction portion where the target edge of the cover is positioned. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the cover held on the cover transport means.
  • the predetermined distance is approximately half the length of the cover in the first state in the predetermined state, and the specific position is the first direction in the cover in the predetermined state.
  • a substantially center position (cover center position M1) may be used.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the substantially center position in the first direction on the cover with respect to the width center position of the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can detect a mark (mark 9B) indicating an image center position (data center position M2) from the cover sheet supplied to or held by the cover sheet holding unit, and the image center position Comprises a detection means (mark sensor 499) which is the center position in the first direction in the image formed on the cover, and the first control means is the image center position indicated by the mark detected by the detection means.
  • the cover sheet may be transported by the cover sheet transport means to a position where the reference position substantially coincides with the reference position. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the approximate center position in the first direction in the image formed on the cover with respect to the width center position of the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus is arranged to face the cover in the first direction in the cover holding means, and holds the book in the first direction by holding the booklet held in the paper holding means in the first direction.
  • the booklet includes a pair of clamping portions (upper clamp 470 and lower clamp 480) that are the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached, and the reference position is the pair of members. It may be the center position in the first direction in the clamping portion. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the cover with respect to the center position between the pair of sandwiching portions that bend the cover.
  • the thickness acquisition unit includes the number of sheets (the number of sheets) constituting the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding unit and the length of the sheets in the first direction (sheet thickness). ) And the thickness may be acquired. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can easily and accurately obtain the thickness of the sheet bundle.
  • the cover cover attaching means can form an adhesive portion on the target end face of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means, and the adhesive portion is a portion to which the cover can be attached
  • the forming means (glue application mechanism 300) and the paper holding means can be conveyed to the contact position in the second direction, and the contact position is in contact with the adhesive portion formed by the adhesive portion forming means and the cover sheet holding means.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can paste the cover sheet on the sheet bundle while suppressing the posture of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding unit from changing.
  • First loading means (table 110), wherein the first direction is substantially perpendicular to the first surface and is upward from the horizontal direction;
  • a cover (cover sheet 9) capable of covering the sheet bundle can be attached to a target end surface (front end surface) of the sheet bundle placed on the first surface, and the target end surface is in the second direction of the sheet bundle.
  • the second direction is a direction substantially perpendicular to the first surface
  • cover attachment means paper alignment mechanism 100, glue application mechanism 300, and cover holding mechanism 400
  • the booklet (booklet 10) placed on the first surface can be sandwiched from the first direction and the third direction (downward direction), and the booklet is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached by the cover attachment means.
  • the clamping means (upper clamp 470 and lower clamp 480) in which the third direction is opposite to the first direction; By performing at least one of an operation of moving the first placement unit in the third direction and an operation of moving the clamping unit in the first direction in a state where the booklet is clamped by the clamping unit.
  • the first loading means and the clamping means can be moved relative to each other in a direction away from each other, and the booklet held by the clamping means can be moved to a retracted position (receiving position).
  • a first drive means control unit 900 for executing the transport motor 422 and S81 to S83
  • the booklet has a second surface (mounting surface 110A) that is a substantially flat surface on which the booklet can be placed, and the second surface is provided at a position separated from the booklet at the retracted position in the third direction.
  • Two mounting means (table 110); After the booklet is moved to the retracted position by the first driving means, at least one of an action of moving the clamping means in the third direction and an action of moving the second placement means in the first direction
  • the second placing means and the sandwiching means are relatively moved in a direction approaching each other, and the booklet sandwiched by the sandwiching means is moved to the placement position (paste reference position).
  • the above-described placement position is a second driving means (the transport motor 422 and the control unit 900 that executes steps S85 to S95) that is a position where the booklet is placed on the second surface from the first direction side.
  • a bookbinding apparatus bookbinding apparatus 1).
  • a booklet is created by attaching a cover to the target end surface of the sheet bundle placed on the first surface.
  • the first placing unit and the sandwiching unit are relatively moved in the direction away from each other, the booklet sandwiched by the sandwiching unit is separated from the first surface.
  • the second placing unit and the sandwiching unit are relatively moved in a direction approaching each other, the booklet sandwiched by the sandwiching unit is placed on the second surface. Therefore, the booklet sandwiched by one sandwiching means is conveyed from the first surface to the second surface through a state separated from the first surface and the second surface.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can wrap a booklet bundle with a cover without complicating the apparatus structure.
  • the first direction may be substantially parallel to the upward direction
  • the third direction may be substantially parallel to the downward direction
  • the second direction may be substantially parallel to the horizontal direction.
  • a cover is attached to a sheet bundle in which a plurality of sheets are stacked in the vertical direction. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately attach the cover to the sheet bundle in a stable posture.
  • the cover attachment means is an application means capable of forming an adhesive portion to which the cover can be attached by applying an adhesive to the target end face of the sheet bundle placed on the first surface.
  • Glue application mechanism 300 and application means (paper alignment mechanism 100 and cover holding mechanism 400) capable of attaching the cover to the adhesive part by bringing the cover into contact with the adhesive part formed by the application means You may have.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can affix the cover to the sheet bundle while suppressing the posture of the sheet bundle placed on the first surface from changing.
  • the coating means is rotatable around an axis orthogonal to the second direction and intersecting the fourth direction (left-right direction), and a peripheral surface (peripheral surface) to which the adhesive is supplied 351A), and the fourth direction is a direction perpendicular to the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction, and the cover attachment means is Third drive means (conveyance motor 321) capable of moving at least one of the first placement means and the application means in the fourth direction along a position where the peripheral surface and the target end face are close to each other. You may have.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can form an adhesive portion on the target end surface of the sheet bundle by simple control that relatively moves the first placement unit and the coating unit.
  • the sticking means includes a cover holding means (cover cover holding mechanism 400) capable of holding the cover at a position facing the adhesive portion formed by the applying means from the second direction side; There is provided a fourth driving means (paper alignment mechanism 100) capable of bringing the cover held by the cover holding means into contact with the adhesive portion by moving the first placing means in the second direction. May be.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can attach the cover to the sheet bundle with a simple control for moving the first placement unit in the second direction.
  • the sandwiching means sandwiches the cover attached to the adhesive portion along the target end surface by sandwiching the target end (front end) of the booklet placed on the first surface.
  • the target end portion may be an end portion in the second direction of the booklet.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can execute both the conveyance of the booklet and the folding of the cover by one clamping means.
  • the first mounting means and the second mounting means are fixed in positions in the first direction and the third direction, and the first driving means is configured to hold the clamping means in the first direction.
  • the second driving means may be moved in one direction, and the clamping means may be moved in the third direction.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can convey the booklet from the first surface to the second surface only by moving the holding means.
  • the first mounting means and the second mounting means may be one member having the first surface and the second surface which are the same surface.
  • the bookbinding apparatus does not need to separately provide the first placing means and the second placing means, and therefore the apparatus structure can be simplified.
  • the second placing means is movable so as to move in a direction opposite to the second direction (backward direction) when the booklet moved by the second driving means contacts the second surface. It may be the body. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress bending of the end portion of the booklet placed on the second surface.
  • the first driving means relatively moves the first mounting means and the clamping means at a first speed
  • the second driving means is configured to move the second mounting means and the clamping means.
  • the means may be moved relatively at a second speed that is slower than the first speed.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the time required for transporting the booklet from the first surface to the second surface, and can prevent the booklet placed on the second surface from being damaged.
  • the second driving means relatively moves the second placing means and the clamping means after a predetermined time has elapsed since the booklet was moved to the retracted position by the first driving means. It may be moved.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can place the booklet on the second surface after the vibration generated in the booklet moved to the retracted position has subsided.
  • the first placement unit may be a movable body that moves in a direction opposite to the second direction while the booklet is moved to the retracted position by the first driving unit.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can smoothly separate the booklet held by the holding means from the first surface.
  • a cutting device for cutting a sheet bundle is known.
  • the chuck mechanism sandwiches the bookbinding product and passes between the top cutting unit and the ground cutting unit, and then the bookbinding product is separated from the top cutting unit and the ground cutting unit. Transport to unit. The top and bottom cutting unit and the ground cutting unit cut both sides of the bound book at the same time. Further, the chuck mechanism conveys the bookbinding product to the fore edge cutting unit. The small edge cutting unit cuts the small edge side of the bound book.
  • the twelfth disclosure has the following configuration.
  • a first cutter (blade edge 525A) which is a plurality of stacked sheets (sheet 8A);
  • a second cutter (cutting edge 515A) which is a direction orthogonal to the first direction;
  • the first alignment surface (the left surface of the alignment plate 528), which is a surface extending in the substantially vertical direction and the first direction, has a first alignment position (alignment execution position) and a first standby position (initial stage).
  • the first alignment position is a position separated in the third direction (right direction) from the reference center position (inter-cutter center position Z) by a distance approximately half the paper size.
  • the third direction is a direction opposite to the second direction
  • the paper size is the length of the paper in the second direction or the third direction
  • the reference center position is the first cutter and the first direction.
  • a cutting device comprising a first alignment means (alignment portion 527) that is a central position between two cutters, and wherein the first standby position is a position away from the first alignment position in the third direction.
  • Mechanism 500 ).
  • the first alignment surface when the first alignment surface is moved from the first standby position to the first alignment position in a state where the sheet bundle is disposed between the first cutter and the second cutter, the first alignment surface is contacted.
  • the end surface of the sheet bundle is positioned at the first alignment position.
  • the center position in the second direction or the third direction of the sheet bundle coincides with the center position between the first cutter and the second cutter. Therefore, the cutting device can cut the sheet bundle at an appropriate position.
  • the cutting device has a second alignment surface (a right surface of the alignment plate 518) which is a surface extending in parallel with the first alignment surface, and the second alignment surface is set to a second alignment position (alignment preparation). Position) and a second standby position (initial position), and the second alignment position is a position separated from the reference center position in the second direction by a distance less than half of the paper size.
  • the second standby position may include second alignment means (alignment portion 517) that is a position away from the second alignment position in the second direction.
  • the cutting device can arrange the center position of the sheet bundle in the second direction or the third direction on the third direction side with respect to the center position between the first cutter and the second cutter.
  • the second alignment means moves the second alignment surface in the third direction from the second standby position to the second alignment position (S101), and further moves the second alignment surface to the second alignment surface.
  • the second alignment position is moved from the second alignment position to the second standby position in the second direction (S103), and the first alignment means moves at least the second alignment surface from the second alignment position toward the second standby position.
  • the first alignment surface is moved in the second direction from the first standby position to the first alignment position (S105), and the first alignment surface is moved from the first alignment position to the first standby position.
  • the distance in the second direction or the third direction between the first standby position and the second standby position may be larger than the paper size.
  • the cutting device can arrange paper bundles of various paper sizes between the first alignment surface and the second alignment surface.
  • the second alignment surface may be provided at a position facing the first alignment surface from the second direction.
  • the cutting device can adjust the position of the sheet bundle by the first alignment surface and the second alignment surface while preventing the posture of the sheet bundle from changing.
  • the cutting size is a movement control means (a control unit 900 that executes the operation shown in FIGS. 55 and 56) that is a predetermined length of the sheet bundle after cutting in the second direction or the third direction.
  • Bookbinding equipped (Bookbinding apparatus 1) may be used.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can relatively position the first cutter and the sheet bundle according to the cutting size by controlling to move at least one of the first cutter and the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can relatively position the second cutter and the sheet bundle in accordance with the cutting size by controlling to move at least one of the second cutter and the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus includes first drive means (right cutting part 520 and drive part 540) for moving the first cutter in the second direction or the third direction, and the movement control means includes: As the first control, the first cutter may be positioned with respect to the sheet bundle by moving the first cutter to the first driving unit. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can position the first cutter without changing the position of the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus includes a second drive unit (left cutting unit 510 and drive unit 540) that moves the second cutter in the second direction or the third direction, and the movement control unit includes: As the second control, the second cutter may be positioned with respect to the sheet bundle by moving the second cutter to the second driving unit. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can position the second cutter without changing the position of the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus moves the first cutter and the second cutter simultaneously in directions close to each other and simultaneously moves the first cutter and the second cutter in directions away from each other.
  • Means left cutting unit 510, right cutting unit 520, and drive unit 540
  • the movement control unit includes the first cutter and the second cutter as the first control and the second control.
  • the first cutter and the second cutter may be simultaneously positioned with respect to the sheet bundle by moving the two simultaneously. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can simultaneously position the first cutter and the second cutter without changing the position of the sheet bundle.
  • the sheet bundle is a booklet in which the back side of the sheet bundle is bound, and the first alignment surface may be provided at a position facing an end surface (right end surface) on the ground side of the booklet. Good.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can position the cutting positions by the first cutter and the second cutter with reference to the end face of the booklet on the ground side, so that the quality of the booklet after bookbinding can be improved.
  • the thirteenth disclosure has the following configuration.
  • a placing surface (mounting) that is a substantially horizontal plane on which the supplied sheet (sheet 8A) can be placed and on which the plurality of placed sheets are stacked in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction).
  • a paper stacking means (table 110) having a placement surface 110A); It extends in a substantially vertical direction along a predetermined reference position (cutting reference position P1), is provided at a position facing the first end face (right end face) of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8), and contacts the first end face.
  • the first end surface can be positioned at the reference position and the first end surface can be aligned along a substantially vertical direction, and the sheet bundle is the plurality of sheets placed on the placing surface.
  • the first end surface is a first facing means (right alignment plate 140) that is an end surface of the sheet bundle in a substantially horizontal first direction (right direction);
  • a cover sheet (cover sheet 9) that can cover the sheet bundle can be transported to a position where the cover sheet faces a second end face (front end face) of the sheet bundle, and the second end face is in a second direction of the sheet bundle.
  • a cover sheet conveying means (cover sheet holding mechanism 400), Provided at a position facing the first end (right end) of the cover conveyed by the cover conveying means and at a position shifted in the third direction (left direction) from the reference position; It is possible to regulate movement of the cover in the first direction by contact, the first end is an end of the cover in the first direction, and the third direction is opposite to the first direction.
  • a second opposing means (right-side regulating pins 463, 464) which is a direction;
  • a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100 and glue application mechanism 300) capable of attaching the cover conveyed by the cover conveyance means to the second end surface.
  • the first end surface of the sheet bundle on the placement surface is positioned at the reference position by the first facing means and is aligned along the substantially vertical direction.
  • the movement of the cover sheet conveyed by the cover sheet conveying means in the first direction is restricted by the second facing means provided at a position shifted in the third direction from the reference position.
  • the cover sheet is attached to the sheet bundle in a state where the first end portion of the cover sheet is displaced in the third direction from the first end surface of the sheet bundle. Accordingly, the bookbinding apparatus has a simple structure and can shift the cover sheet in the third direction (that is, the sheet width direction) with respect to the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus is provided at a position facing a second end (left end) of the cover conveyed by the cover conveying means, and is brought into contact with the second end so that the cover
  • the movement in the third direction can be restricted, and the second end portion may include third facing means (left restriction pins 463 and 464) which are the end portions in the third direction of the cover.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the cover sheet transported by the cover sheet transport unit from being excessively displaced in the third direction.
  • the booklet (booklet 10), which is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached by the cover attachment means, is arranged in a substantially horizontal direction (front-rear direction) orthogonal to the third direction.
  • a cutting unit (a left cutting unit 510 and a right cutting unit 520) for cutting in a substantially vertical direction at a position away from the reference position by a predetermined distance in the third direction may be provided.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can accurately cut the booklet without being affected by the position of the cover attached to the booklet.
  • the bookbinding apparatus further includes movement control means (drive unit 540) that moves at least one of the cutting means and the booklet in at least one of the first direction and the third direction. Good.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can relatively position the cutting means and the booklet in accordance with the cutting size by controlling to move at least one of the cutting means and the booklet.
  • the cutting unit includes a first cutting unit (right cutting unit 520) capable of cutting the booklet at a position that is a first distance away from the reference position in the third direction;
  • the booklet may be cut at a position separated by a second distance in the third direction, and the second distance may include second cutting means (left cutting unit 510) that is larger than the first distance.
  • the bookbinding apparatus can cut the booklet at two different distances from the reference position by the two cutting means.
  • the bookbinding apparatus urges the cover sheet conveyed by the cover sheet conveying unit in the first direction so that the urging member brings the first end portion close to the second opposing unit ( An urging portion 461) may be provided. In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can reliably position the first end portion of the cover by the second facing means.
  • a mounting surface which is a substantially horizontal plane on which the supplied sheet (sheet 8A) can be placed and on which the plurality of placed sheets are stacked in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction).
  • a paper stacking means (table 110) having a placement surface 110A);
  • a cover sheet (cover sheet 9) can be attached to the target end face (front end face) of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8), and the sheet bundle is a plurality of sheets stacked on the mounting surface, and the target end face is
  • a cover attachment means paper alignment mechanism 100, glue application mechanism 300, and cover holding mechanism 400
  • a booklet (booklet 10) can be sandwiched from the second direction side (rear side), the booklet is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached, and the second direction is a direction opposite to the first direction.
  • One clamping means (clamp portion 660A)
  • the booklet When the cover is attached to the sheet bundle by the cover attachment means, the booklet can be sandwiched by the first sandwiching means, and the first sandwiching means can be conveyed to a withdrawal position, and the withdrawal position Is a first drive means (booklet transport mechanism 600 and control unit 900) that is a position where the booklet held by the first holding means is pulled out from the placement surface, Second clamping means (clamp portion 660B) capable of clamping the booklet from the first direction side;
  • the booklet transported to the drawing position can be sandwiched by the second sandwiching means, and the second sandwiching means can be transported to a first cutting position and a second cutting position, and the first cutting position is
  • the second driving means (the booklet transport mechanism 600 and the control unit 900) is located in the second direction relative to the pull-out position, and the second cutting position is located in the second direction relative to the first cutting position.
  • Bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a second cutting means (post-cutting unit 530).
  • a cover is attached to a sheet bundle on the placement surface, and a booklet is created.
  • the created booklet is sandwiched from the second direction side by the first driving means and pulled out from the placement surface.
  • the pulled out booklet is sandwiched from the first direction side by the second driving means, and conveyed to the first cutting position and the second cutting position.
  • At least one of the third direction portion of the booklet and the fourth direction portion of the booklet is separated from the booklet conveyed to the first cutting position.
  • the booklet conveyed to the second cutting position is cut off in the second direction of the booklet. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can convey and cut the booklet while suppressing the posture of the booklet from changing after the cover is attached to the sheet bundle.
  • the bookbinding apparatus is a member provided in the second clamping means and extending in a substantially vertical direction, and an end portion (front end portion) of the booklet held by the second clamping means in the first direction. ), And the second driving means positions the second clamping means at the first cutting position and the second cutting position based on the position of the reference plate. May be. In this case, the end portion in the first direction of the booklet held by the second holding means is positioned by the reference plate. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the booklet to the first and second cutting positions by executing the position control of the second clamping means based on the position of the reference plate.
  • the bookbinding apparatus integrally includes the first clamping means and the second clamping means arranged on the first direction side of the first clamping means, and the first direction and the A hand part (hand part 640) movable in the second direction is provided, and the first driving means and the second driving means move the hand part to move the first clamping means and the second clamping means. May be conveyed. In this case, since it is not necessary to provide the bookbinding apparatus separately for the first clamping means and the second clamping means, it is possible to prevent the apparatus structure from becoming complicated.
  • a placement surface (mounting) that is a substantially horizontal plane on which the supplied sheet (sheet 8A) can be placed and on which the plurality of placed sheets are stacked in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction).
  • a paper stacking means (table 110) having a placement surface 110A);
  • a cover sheet (cover sheet 9) can be attached to the target end face (front end face) of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8), and the sheet bundle is a plurality of sheets stacked on the mounting surface, and the target end face is
  • a cover attachment means paper alignment mechanism 100, glue application mechanism 300, and cover holding mechanism 400
  • a booklet (booklet 10) can be sandwiched from the second direction side (rear side), the booklet is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached, and the second direction is a direction opposite to the first direction.
  • a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising a cutting means (left cutting unit 510 and right cutting unit 520).
  • a cover is attached to a sheet bundle on the placement surface, and a booklet is created.
  • the created booklet is clamped from the second direction side by the driving means, pulled out from the placement surface, and conveyed to the cutting position.
  • the cutting position In the booklet conveyed to the cutting position, at least one of the third direction portion of the booklet and the fourth direction portion of the booklet is cut off. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can convey and cut the booklet while suppressing the posture of the booklet from changing after the cover is attached to the sheet bundle.
  • the first disclosure to the fourteenth disclosure can be modified in various ways, and the disclosures may be combined as appropriate.
  • the direction indicated in each disclosure is not limited to the direction in the above embodiment, and can be changed according to the definition of each disclosure.
  • the moving means, conveying means, and driving means shown in each disclosure are not limited to motors, and may be solenoids, engines, belt conveyors, and the like.
  • the cover attachment means shown in each disclosure may be a mechanism for attaching a cover with a string or a wire, for example, as long as the cover can be attached to the end face of the sheet bundle.
  • the application means shown in each disclosure only needs to be able to apply an adhesive to the end face of the sheet bundle, and may be a mechanism that applies the adhesive with, for example, a spray or a brush.

Abstract

A bookbinding device (1) is provided with a piling means, a bonding portion forming means (300), a binding attachment means (400), and a cutting means (500). The piling means is movable in a first direction and a second direction, and is able to pile up a plurality of sheets of paper approximately parallel to a third direction in a state of being in a predetermined position. The bonding portion forming means is able to form a bonding portion at a specified end surface of a stack of paper in the state where the piling means is in the predetermined position. The binding attachment means is able to hold a binding, and is able to attach the binding to the stack of paper via the bonding portion formed on the specified end surface when the piling means has moved in the first direction beyond the predetermined position. The cutting means is able to cut at least one of an end edge in the third direction, an end edge in a fourth direction, and an end edge in a fifth direction of a booklet when the piling means has moved in the second direction beyond the predetermined position.

Description

製本装置、用紙搬送装置、及び裁断装置Bookbinding device, paper transport device, and cutting device
 本発明は、製本装置、用紙搬送装置、及び裁断装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a bookbinding apparatus, a sheet conveying apparatus, and a cutting apparatus.
 従来、製本装置、用紙搬送装置、及び裁断装置が知られている。例えば、特許文献1に開示の製本装置では、集積機構で集積された中紙が、縦搬送路に向けて水平方向に搬送される。二枚の表紙が、表紙供給機構から縦搬送路に供給される。供給された二枚の表紙の一端辺が、中紙の端辺に製本テープで貼付けられる。二枚の表紙を覆うカバーが、カバー供給機構から縦搬送路に供給される。二枚の表紙が貼りつけられた中紙は、供給されたカバーに向けて水平方向に搬送されることで、カバーで包まれる。特許文献2に開示の製本装置では、冊子の三方(所謂、天側、地側、小口側)の端縁が、回転テーブル上で裁断される。 Conventionally, a bookbinding device, a paper transport device, and a cutting device are known. For example, in the bookbinding apparatus disclosed in Patent Document 1, the intermediate sheets stacked by the stacking mechanism are transported in the horizontal direction toward the vertical transport path. Two covers are supplied from the cover supply mechanism to the vertical conveyance path. One end side of the supplied two cover sheets is attached to the end side of the middle paper with a binding tape. A cover that covers the two covers is supplied from the cover supply mechanism to the vertical conveyance path. The inner paper with the two cover sheets attached is wrapped in the cover by being conveyed in the horizontal direction toward the supplied cover. In the bookbinding apparatus disclosed in Patent Document 2, the three edges (the so-called top side, ground side, and fore edge side) of the booklet are cut on the rotary table.
特開2003-25755号公報JP 2003-25755 A 特開2003-72258号公報Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-72258
 従来の製本装置は、装置構造が複雑且つ大型であるため、設置スペース及び製造コストが大きくなる可能性があった。本発明の目的は、装置構造の複雑化及び大型化の少なくとも一つを抑制可能な製本装置、用紙搬送装置、及び裁断装置を提供することである。 Since the conventional bookbinding apparatus has a complicated and large apparatus structure, the installation space and the manufacturing cost may increase. An object of the present invention is to provide a bookbinding apparatus, a sheet conveying apparatus, and a cutting apparatus that can suppress at least one of complicated and large-sized apparatus structure.
 本発明の第一態様に係る製本装置は、第一方向及び第二方向に移動可能であり、且つ、所定位置にある状態で複数の用紙を第三方向と略平行に集積可能であり、前記第一方向及び前記第二方向は互いに反対方向であり、前記第三方向は前記第一方向及び前記第二方向と直交する方向である集積手段と、前記集積手段が前記所定位置にある状態で、用紙束の特定端面に接着部を形成可能であり、前記用紙束は前記集積手段によって集積された前記複数の用紙であり、前記特定端面は前記用紙束の前記第一方向側の端面である接着部形成手段と、表紙を保持可能であり、且つ、前記集積手段が前記所定位置よりも前記第一方向に移動した場合に、前記特定端面に形成された前記接着部を介して、前記表紙を前記用紙束に取付け可能である表紙取付手段と、前記集積手段が前記所定位置よりも前記第二方向に移動した場合に、前記表紙が取付けられた前記用紙束である冊子のうち、前記第二方向側の端縁、第四方向側の端縁、及び第五方向側の端縁の少なくとも一つを裁断可能であり、前記第四方向は前記第一方向、前記第二方向、及び前記第三方向と直交する方向であり、前記第五方向は前記第四方向の反対方向である裁断手段とを備える。 The bookbinding apparatus according to the first aspect of the present invention is movable in the first direction and the second direction, and can stack a plurality of sheets substantially in parallel with the third direction in a predetermined position, The first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, the third direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction, and the stacking means is in the predetermined position. The adhesive portion can be formed on a specific end surface of the sheet bundle, the sheet bundle is the plurality of sheets stacked by the stacking unit, and the specific end surface is an end surface of the sheet bundle on the first direction side. When the cover is capable of holding the adhesive portion forming means and the cover, and the stacking means is moved in the first direction from the predetermined position, the cover is formed via the adhesive portion formed on the specific end surface. A cover remover that can be attached to the paper bundle. And the second direction side edge of the booklet that is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached when the stacking means is moved in the second direction from the predetermined position, and the fourth direction side. And the fourth direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction, and The fifth direction includes cutting means that is opposite to the fourth direction.
 本発明の第二態様に係る用紙搬送装置は、供給された用紙が積み重ねられる平面である載置面を有する用紙集積部と、前記用紙集積部に向けて前記用紙を略水平に搬送し、搬送した前記用紙を前記載置面の上方に排出することが可能な搬送手段と、前記載置面よりも上方に設けられ、前記搬送手段によって排出され前記載置面に向けて落下する前記用紙の第一端部に下方から接触する部材であり、前記第一端部は、前記用紙の搬送方向と直交し且つ略水平な方向である第一方向の端部である接触部材と、第一規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延び、前記載置面に向けて落下する前記用紙の第二端部に接触して、前記用紙が前記第一規制位置よりも第二方向に移動することを規制する部材であり、前記第二方向は前記第一方向とは反対方向であり、前記第二端部は前記第二方向の端部であり、前記第一規制位置は予め定められた前記第二端部の適正位置である第一規制部材とを備える。 A sheet conveying apparatus according to a second aspect of the present invention includes a sheet stacking unit having a placement surface that is a plane on which supplied sheets are stacked, and transports the sheet substantially horizontally toward the sheet stacking unit. A conveying means capable of discharging the sheet above the placement surface, and a sheet provided above the placement surface and discharged toward the placement surface by the conveyance means. A member that comes into contact with the first end portion from below, and the first end portion is a contact member that is an end portion in a first direction that is orthogonal to the transport direction of the paper and that is substantially horizontal; Restricting movement of the sheet in the second direction from the first restriction position by contacting the second end of the sheet that extends in a substantially vertical direction along the position and falls toward the placement surface. The second direction is opposite to the first direction. The second end portion is an end portion of the second direction, the first stop position and a first stop member is a proper position of said predetermined second end.
 本発明の第三態様に係る用紙搬送装置は、用紙の第一面に画像を形成した後、前記用紙を第一搬送量で搬送して排出口から排出し、更に排出した前記用紙を前記排出口から取り込んで、前記用紙における前記第一面の反対面である第二面に画像を形成した後、前記用紙を第二搬送量で搬送して前記排出口から排出する機構を備えた画像形成装置であり、前記第一搬送量は前記用紙の一部のみを前記排出口から排出する前記用紙の搬送量であり、前記第二搬送量は前記用紙の全体を前記排出口から排出する前記用紙の搬送量であり、前記画像形成装置の前記排出口から排出された前記用紙を搬送するための用紙搬送装置であり、前記排出口の近傍に配置可能な板状部材であり、前記排出口から排出された前記用紙を載置可能な面、且つ前記排出口から離れる方向である案内方向に延びる面である案内面を有する搬送板と、第一位置よりも前記案内方向の下流側、且つ第二位置よりも前記案内方向の上流側において、前記案内面に沿って設けられた、前記用紙を前記案内方向の下流側に搬送する方向に回転可能な回転体であり、前記第一位置は前記第一搬送量で搬送された前記用紙の前記案内方向の下流側端部が載置される前記案内面上の位置であり、前記第二位置は前記第二搬送量で搬送された前記用紙の前記案内方向の下流側端部が載置される前記案内面上の位置である第一搬送ローラとを備える。 The paper transport device according to the third aspect of the present invention, after forming an image on the first surface of the paper, transports the paper by a first transport amount, discharges the paper from a discharge port, and further discharges the paper. Image formation including a mechanism that takes in from an outlet, forms an image on a second surface of the sheet opposite to the first surface, and then conveys the sheet by a second conveyance amount and discharges the sheet from the discharge port. The first transport amount is a transport amount of the paper that discharges only a part of the paper from the discharge port, and the second transport amount is the paper that discharges the entire paper from the discharge port. A sheet conveying device for conveying the sheet discharged from the discharge port of the image forming apparatus, and a plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of the discharge port. The surface on which the discharged paper can be placed, and the discharge A conveying plate having a guide surface that is a surface extending in a guide direction, which is a direction away from the mouth, and the guide surface downstream of the guide position in the guide direction and upstream of the second position in the guide direction. A rotating body that is rotatable along a direction in which the sheet is conveyed downstream in the guiding direction, and the first position of the sheet conveyed in the first conveying amount is in the guiding direction. The downstream end is a position on the guide surface on which the sheet is placed, and the second position is the guide on which the downstream end in the guide direction of the sheet transported by the second transport amount is placed. And a first conveying roller that is a position on the surface.
 本発明の第四態様に係る用紙搬送装置は、用紙に画像を印刷可能な画像形成装置の排出口の近傍に配置可能な板状部材であり、前記排出口から排出された前記用紙を載置可能な面、且つ前記排出口から離れる方向である案内方向に延びる面である案内面を有する搬送板と、前記案内面に沿って設けられた、前記用紙を前記案内方向の下流側に搬送する方向に回転可能な回転体である第一搬送ローラと、前記第一搬送ローラを回転自在に支持し、且つ、前記案内面に沿って前記案内方向の上流側及び下流側の少なくとも一つに、前記第一搬送ローラの位置を変更可能な部材である支持部材とを備える。 A paper transport device according to a fourth aspect of the present invention is a plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of a discharge port of an image forming apparatus capable of printing an image on a paper, and places the paper discharged from the discharge port A conveyance plate having a guide surface that is a surface that extends in a guide direction that is a possible surface and a direction away from the discharge port; and the sheet that is provided along the guide surface is transported downstream in the guide direction. A first conveying roller that is a rotating body that is rotatable in a direction, and the first conveying roller is rotatably supported, and at least one of the upstream side and the downstream side in the guiding direction along the guiding surface, And a support member that is a member capable of changing the position of the first transport roller.
 本発明の第五態様に係る製本装置は、供給される複数の用紙を第一方向に重ねた状態で保持可能な保持手段と、前記保持手段によって保持される前記複数の用紙である用紙束のうちで、前記第一方向と直交する第二方向の端面である用紙束端面を、前記第一方向に沿って略面一に揃えることが可能な紙揃え手段と、前記第一方向及び第三方向に交差し且つ前記第二方向と直交する軸線を中心に回転可能であり、接着剤が付着可能な周面を有し、前記第三方向は前記第一方向と前記第二方向とに直交する方向である塗布ローラと、前記周面に前記接着剤を供給可能な供給手段と、前記紙揃え手段が前記用紙束端面を略面一に揃えた場合に、前記保持手段及び前記塗布ローラの少なくとも一つを前記第三方向に移動させることで、前記塗布ローラが前記用紙束端面に対して前記第二方向側から近接する位置に沿って、前記塗布ローラを前記用紙束端面に対して相対移動させる移動手段と、前記移動手段が前記塗布ローラを相対移動させる場合に、前記塗布ローラを回転させる回転手段とを備える。 A bookbinding apparatus according to a fifth aspect of the present invention includes a holding unit capable of holding a plurality of supplied sheets stacked in a first direction, and a sheet bundle that is the plurality of sheets held by the holding unit. Among them, a paper aligning means capable of aligning a sheet bundle end surface, which is an end surface in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction, substantially flush along the first direction, and the first direction and the third direction. A peripheral surface that can be rotated about an axis that intersects the direction and is orthogonal to the second direction, and to which an adhesive can be attached; the third direction is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction An application roller that is in a direction to be fed, a supply unit that is capable of supplying the adhesive to the peripheral surface, and the paper aligning unit that aligns the end face of the sheet bundle substantially flush with the holding unit and the application roller. By moving at least one in the third direction, Moving means for moving the application roller relative to the end face of the sheet bundle along a position close to the end face of the sheet bundle from the second direction side, and the moving means moves the application roller relative to each other. A rotation means for rotating the application roller.
 本発明の第六態様に係る製本装置は、第一方向に積み重ねられた複数の用紙である用紙束を保持可能であり、前記第一方向は互いに反対方向である第二方向及び第三方向を含む用紙保持手段と、前記用紙保持手段よりも第四方向側に設けられ、所定位置に供給された表紙の一部である第一部分を、前記第四方向及び第五方向から第一保持力で挟持可能であり、前記第四方向は前記第一方向と直交する方向であり、前記第五方向は前記第四方向の反対方向であり、前記第一保持力は前記第一部分が前記第一方向に移動する運動を妨げる力である第一挟持手段と、前記第一挟持手段に対して前記第三方向に対向配置され、前記所定位置に供給された前記表紙の第二部分を、前記第四方向及び前記第五方向から第二保持力で挟持可能であり、前記第二部分は前記第一部分よりも前記第三方向側にある前記表紙の一部であり、前記第二保持力は前記第二部分が前記第一方向に移動する運動を妨げる力である第二挟持手段と、前記第一挟持手段を前記所定位置から目標位置まで前記第二方向と略平行に搬送可能であり、前記目標位置は前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段によって挟持された前記表紙が対象端面に前記第四方向側から対向する位置であり、前記対象端面は前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記第四方向の端面である第一駆動手段と、前記第一挟持手段に前記第一部分を第一値の前記第一保持力で挟持させ、且つ前記第二挟持手段に前記第二部分を第二値の前記第二保持力で挟持させた状態で、前記第一駆動手段に前記第一挟持手段を第一搬送力で搬送させ、前記第一値の第一保持力は前記第二値の第二保持力よりも大きい力であり、前記第一搬送力は前記第二値の第二保持力よりも大きい力である第一制御手段と、前記第一挟持手段が前記目標位置にある状態で、前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記対象端面に、前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段によって挟持された前記表紙を取付け可能な表紙取付手段とを備える。 The bookbinding apparatus according to the sixth aspect of the present invention is capable of holding a sheet bundle that is a plurality of sheets stacked in the first direction, wherein the first direction is opposite to the second direction and the third direction. A sheet holding means including a first portion which is provided on a fourth direction side of the sheet holding means and is a part of a cover sheet supplied to a predetermined position with a first holding force from the fourth direction and the fifth direction. The fourth direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction, the fifth direction is a direction opposite to the fourth direction, and the first holding force is determined by the first portion in the first direction. A first clamping means that is a force that hinders the movement to move to the first clamping means, and a second portion of the cover sheet that is disposed to face the first clamping means in the third direction and is supplied to the predetermined position. Can be clamped with a second holding force from the direction and the fifth direction, The second portion is a part of the cover located on the third direction side with respect to the first portion, and the second holding force is a second clamping force that prevents the movement of the second portion in the first direction. And the first sandwiching means can be transported substantially parallel to the second direction from the predetermined position to the target position, and the target position is sandwiched by the first sandwiching means and the second sandwiching means. Is a position facing the target end surface from the fourth direction side, and the target end surface is a first driving means that is an end face in the fourth direction of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means, and the first clamping The first portion is clamped with the first holding force of the first value in the means, and the second portion is clamped with the second holding force of the second value in the second clamping means. The drive means conveys the first clamping means with the first conveyance force, and the front The first control means in which the first holding force of the first value is larger than the second holding force of the second value, and the first transport force is larger than the second holding force of the second value. And the cover sheet sandwiched by the first sandwiching means and the second sandwiching means on the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the sheet retaining means in a state where the first sandwiching means is at the target position. And a cover attachment means capable of attaching the cover.
 本発明の第七態様に係る裁断装置は、略水平な第一方向に延び、且つ用紙束を略鉛直方向に裁断するための刃であり、前記用紙束は略鉛直方向に積み重ねられた複数の用紙である第一カッタと、前記第一カッタと平行に延び且つ前記第一カッタに第二方向から対向する位置に設けられ、前記用紙束を略鉛直方向に裁断するための刃であり、前記第二方向は前記第一方向と直交する方向である第二カッタと、略鉛直方向且つ前記第一方向に延びる面である第一整合面を有し、前記第一整合面を第一整合位置と第一待機位置との間で移動させる第一整合手段であり、前記第一整合位置は用紙サイズの略半分の距離分、基準中心位置から第三方向に離れた位置であり、前記第三方向は前記第二方向の反対方向であり、前記用紙サイズは前記用紙の前記第二方向又は前記第三方向の長さであり、前記基準中心位置は前記第一カッタと前記第二カッタとの間の中心位置であり、前記第一待機位置は前記第一整合位置から前記第三方向に離れた位置である前記第一整合手段とを備える。 The cutting device according to a seventh aspect of the present invention is a blade that extends in a substantially horizontal first direction and cuts a sheet bundle in a substantially vertical direction, and the sheet bundle is stacked in a substantially vertical direction. A first cutter that is paper, a blade that extends in parallel with the first cutter and is opposed to the first cutter from a second direction, and is a blade for cutting the paper bundle in a substantially vertical direction, The second direction has a second cutter which is a direction orthogonal to the first direction, and a first alignment surface which is a surface extending substantially in the vertical direction and the first direction, and the first alignment surface is a first alignment position. And a first standby position, wherein the first alignment position is a position separated in the third direction from the reference center position by a distance approximately half of the paper size, and the third alignment position. The direction is opposite to the second direction, and the paper size is the size of the paper. The length in the second direction or the third direction, the reference center position is a center position between the first cutter and the second cutter, and the first standby position is from the first alignment position. And the first aligning means that are spaced apart in the third direction.
 上記第一~第七態様によれば、装置構造の複雑化及び大型化の少なくとも一つを抑制可能な製本装置、用紙搬送装置、及び裁断装置の何れかを提供できる。 According to the first to seventh aspects, it is possible to provide any one of a bookbinding apparatus, a sheet conveying apparatus, and a cutting apparatus that can suppress at least one of complicated and large-sized apparatus structure.
製本装置1の斜視図である。1 is a perspective view of a bookbinding apparatus 1. FIG. 製本装置1の正面図である。1 is a front view of a bookbinding apparatus 1. FIG. 初期状態にある紙揃え機構100、束操作機構200、束操作機構200、及び糊塗布機構300の斜視図である。FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a paper alignment mechanism 100, a bundle operation mechanism 200, a bundle operation mechanism 200, and a glue application mechanism 300 in an initial state. 用紙集積工程における製本装置1の左側面図である。FIG. 3 is a left side view of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in a paper stacking process. 冊子搬送工程におけるテーブル110、束操作機構200、裁断機構500、及び冊子搬送機構600の右側面図である。It is a right side view of the table 110, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in the booklet transport process. 第一プリンタ3及び用紙供給部5の正面図である。2 is a front view of a first printer 3 and a paper supply unit 5. FIG. 経路板51Aが規制位置にある、用紙供給部5の斜視図である。FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the paper supply unit 5 with a path plate 51A in a restriction position. ローラ駆動部80の左側面図である。4 is a left side view of the roller driving unit 80. FIG. ローラ駆動部80の取付位置が変更された、用紙供給部5の斜視図である。FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the sheet supply unit 5 in which the mounting position of the roller driving unit 80 is changed. 経路板51Aが回転された、用紙供給部5の斜視図である。FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the sheet supply unit 5 in which a path plate 51A is rotated. 用紙集積工程における紙揃え機構100及び束操作機構200の左側面図である。FIG. 6 is a left side view of the paper alignment mechanism 100 and the bundle operation mechanism 200 in the paper stacking process. 用紙集積工程における紙揃え機構100の斜視図である。FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a paper alignment mechanism 100 in a paper stacking process. 初期状態にある紙揃え機構100の右側面図である。It is a right side view of the paper alignment mechanism 100 in the initial state. 用紙供給部5及び紙揃え機構100の正面図である。FIG. 3 is a front view of a paper supply unit 5 and a paper alignment mechanism 100. 右側紙揃え部104の斜視図である。FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a right paper alignment unit 104. 可動部301の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the movable part 301. FIG. 可動部301の縦断面図である。It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the movable part 301. FIG. 糊塗布部340の横断面図である。It is a cross-sectional view of the paste application part 340. 糊塗布機構300、テーブル110、及び用紙束8の背面図である。4 is a rear view of the glue application mechanism 300, the table 110, and the sheet bundle 8. FIG. 初期状態にある第二プリンタ4、表紙供給部6、及び表紙保持機構400の左側面図である。FIG. 6 is a left side view of the second printer 4, the cover sheet supply unit 6, and the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 in an initial state. 初期状態にある可動部401の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the movable part 401 in an initial state. 可動部401の平面図である。3 is a plan view of a movable unit 401. FIG. 上クランプ430の部分拡大平面図である。4 is a partially enlarged plan view of an upper clamp 430. FIG. 冊子搬送工程における裁断機構500及びテーブル110の平面図である。It is a top view of the cutting mechanism 500 and the table 110 in a booklet conveyance process. 裁断機構500の斜視図である。3 is a perspective view of a cutting mechanism 500. FIG. 裁断機構500の正面図である。3 is a front view of a cutting mechanism 500. FIG. 冊子搬送機構600の右側面図である。6 is a right side view of the booklet transport mechanism 600. FIG. ハンド部640の斜視図である。5 is a perspective view of a hand unit 640. FIG. 用紙8Aがテーブル110に供給される過程を示す説明図である。FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a process in which a sheet of paper 8A is supplied to the table 110. 用紙集積工程における紙揃え機構100の右側面図である。FIG. 6 is a right side view of the paper alignment mechanism 100 in a paper stacking process. 糊塗布工程における製本装置1の左側面図である。It is a left view of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in a paste application | coating process. 第一塗布動作の説明図である。It is explanatory drawing of a 1st application | coating operation | movement. 第二塗布動作の説明図である。It is explanatory drawing of 2nd application | coating operation | movement. 第三塗布動作の説明図である。It is explanatory drawing of a 3rd application | coating operation | movement. 第四塗布動作の説明図である。It is explanatory drawing of a 4th application | coating operation | movement. 糊塗布ローラ350が用紙束8に糊7を塗布する態様の説明図である。FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a mode in which a glue application roller 350 applies glue 7 to a sheet bundle 8. 表紙搬送工程における第二プリンタ4、表紙供給部6、及び表紙保持機構400の左側面図である。FIG. 6 is a left side view of the second printer 4, the cover sheet supply unit 6, and the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 in the cover sheet transport process. 第一表紙搬送処理のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of a 1st cover conveyance process. 上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の動作の流れを示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of operation | movement of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440. FIG. 図37に続き、表紙搬送工程における第二プリンタ4、表紙供給部6、及び表紙保持機構400の左側面図である。FIG. 38 is a left side view of the second printer 4, the cover sheet supply unit 6, and the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 in the cover sheet transport process following FIG. 37. 表紙9を保持する表紙保持機構400の斜視図である。FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a cover holding mechanism 400 that holds a cover 9. 表紙搬送工程におけるテーブル110及び表紙保持機構400の左側面図である。FIG. 6 is a left side view of the table 110 and a cover holding mechanism 400 in a cover sheet transport process. 第二表紙搬送処理のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of a 2nd cover conveyance process. 表紙9を保持する表紙保持機構400の斜視図である。FIG. 6 is a perspective view of a cover holding mechanism 400 that holds a cover 9. 表紙貼付工程における製本装置1の左側面図である。It is a left view of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in a cover sheet sticking process. 図45に続き、表紙貼付工程における製本装置1の左側面図である。FIG. 46 is a left side view of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in the cover sticking step following FIG. 45. 冊子操作処理のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of a booklet operation process. 図46に続き、表紙貼付工程における製本装置1の左側面図である。FIG. 47 is a left side view of the bookbinding device 1 in the cover sticking step following FIG. 46. 図48に続き、表紙貼付工程における製本装置1の左側面図である。FIG. 49 is a left side view of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in the cover sticking step following FIG. 48. 図49に続き、表紙貼付工程における製本装置1の左側面図である。FIG. 50 is a left side view of the bookbinding device 1 in the cover sticking step following FIG. 49. 図5に続き、冊子搬送工程におけるテーブル110、束操作機構200、裁断機構500、及び冊子搬送機構600の右側面図である。FIG. 6 is a right side view of the table 110, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in the booklet transport process following FIG. 図51に続き、冊子搬送工程におけるテーブル110、束操作機構200、裁断機構500、及び冊子搬送機構600の右側面図である。FIG. 52 is a right side view of the table 110, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in the booklet transport process following FIG. 図52に続き、冊子搬送工程におけるテーブル110、束操作機構200、裁断機構500、及び冊子搬送機構600の右側面図である。FIG. 53 is a right side view of the table 110, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in the booklet transport process following FIG. 図53に続き、冊子搬送工程及び裁断工程における裁断機構500及びテーブル110の平面図である。FIG. 54 is a plan view of the cutting mechanism 500 and the table 110 in the booklet transport process and the cutting process following FIG. 53. 図54に続き、裁断工程における裁断機構500及びテーブル110の平面図である。FIG. 55 is a plan view of the cutting mechanism 500 and the table 110 in the cutting process following FIG. 図55に続き、裁断工程における裁断機構500及びテーブル110の平面図である。FIG. 56 is a plan view of the cutting mechanism 500 and the table 110 in the cutting process following FIG. 裁断工程における裁断機構500の正面図である。It is a front view of the cutting mechanism 500 in a cutting process. 位置調整処理のフローチャートである。It is a flowchart of a position adjustment process. 変形例における、糊塗布機構1300の斜視図であるIt is a perspective view of glue application mechanism 1300 in a modification. 変形例における、糊塗布ローラ350が用紙束8に糊7を塗布する態様の説明図である。FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of a mode in which a glue application roller 350 applies glue 7 to a sheet bundle 8 in a modified example.
 本発明を具体化した実施形態について、図面を参照して説明する。参照する図面は、本発明が採用しうる技術的特徴を説明するために用いられるものであり、記載される装置の構成及び処理などは、それのみに限定する趣旨ではなく、単なる説明例である。 Embodiments embodying the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The drawings to be referred to are used for explaining the technical features that can be adopted by the present invention, and the configuration and processing of the apparatus described are not intended to limit the present invention, but are merely illustrative examples. .
<1.製本装置1の概略構造>
 図1~図5を参照し、製本装置1の概略構造を説明する。以下の説明では、図1の左下側、右上側、左上側、右下側、上側、下側を、それぞれ、製本装置1の前側、後側、左側、右側、上側、下側とする。本実施形態では、製本装置1の上下方向は、鉛直方向と略平行である。製本装置1の前後左右方向は、鉛直方向と直交する水平方向と略平行である。製本装置1の前後方向及び左右方向は、互いに略直交する方向である。
<1. Schematic structure of bookbinding apparatus 1>
The schematic structure of the bookbinding apparatus 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, the lower left side, the upper right side, the upper left side, the lower right side, the upper side, and the lower side in FIG. 1 are defined as the front side, the rear side, the left side, the right side, the upper side, and the lower side of the bookbinding apparatus 1, respectively. In the present embodiment, the vertical direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1 is substantially parallel to the vertical direction. The front / rear and left / right directions of the bookbinding apparatus 1 are substantially parallel to the horizontal direction orthogonal to the vertical direction. The front-rear direction and the left-right direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1 are directions substantially orthogonal to each other.
 図4は、製本装置1の構成部材の一部を省略して、左側面視で製本装置1の動作過程を示す(後述の図31、図45、図46、図48~図50も同様)。図5は、右側面視で、テーブル110、束操作機構200、裁断機構500、及び冊子搬送機構600の位置関係を示し、且つ右裁断部520及び搬送部602を省略する(後述の図51~図53も同様)。 FIG. 4 shows an operation process of the bookbinding apparatus 1 in a left side view with some components omitted from the bookbinding apparatus 1 (the same applies to FIGS. 31, 45, 46, and 48 to 50 described later). . FIG. 5 shows a positional relationship among the table 110, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in the right side view, and the right cutting unit 520 and the transport unit 602 are omitted (described later with reference to FIGS. The same applies to FIG. 53).
 製本装置1は、本体枠2、第一プリンタ3、第二プリンタ4、用紙供給部5、表紙供給部6、紙揃え機構100、束操作機構200、糊塗布機構300、表紙保持機構400、裁断機構500、制御部900を含む。本体枠2は、直方体状のフレーム構造を有する。 The bookbinding apparatus 1 includes a main body frame 2, a first printer 3, a second printer 4, a paper supply unit 5, a cover supply unit 6, a paper alignment mechanism 100, a bundle operation mechanism 200, a glue application mechanism 300, a cover holding mechanism 400, a cutting A mechanism 500 and a control unit 900 are included. The main body frame 2 has a rectangular parallelepiped frame structure.
 設置台25は、本体枠2の左下枠から左方向に延びる板状体である。第一プリンタ3は、設置台25に載置される。つまり、第一プリンタ3は、本体枠2の左側に配置される。天板21は、本体枠2の上面を覆う板状体である。第二プリンタ4は、天板21に載置される。つまり、第二プリンタ4は、本体枠2の上側に配置される。 The installation base 25 is a plate-like body extending leftward from the lower left frame of the main body frame 2. The first printer 3 is placed on the installation table 25. That is, the first printer 3 is arranged on the left side of the main body frame 2. The top plate 21 is a plate-like body that covers the upper surface of the main body frame 2. The second printer 4 is placed on the top plate 21. That is, the second printer 4 is disposed above the main body frame 2.
 第一プリンタ3は、製本装置1で作成される冊子の中身(又は本文)を構成する複数の用紙8A(図6参照)に画像を印刷するプリンタである。第一プリンタ3は、印刷済みの用紙が排出される開口である用紙排出口3Aを有する。本実施形態では、第一プリンタ3は、冊子の中身に適した薄手且つ標準サイズの用紙(例えば、A4サイズの普通紙)に、画像を高速で印刷可能なレーザプリンタである。用紙排出口3Aは、第一プリンタ3の上面に設けられ、印刷済みの用紙8Aを右上方向に排出する。 The first printer 3 is a printer that prints images on a plurality of sheets 8A (see FIG. 6) constituting the contents (or text) of the booklet created by the bookbinding apparatus 1. The first printer 3 has a paper discharge port 3A that is an opening through which printed paper is discharged. In the present embodiment, the first printer 3 is a laser printer capable of printing an image at high speed on thin and standard size paper suitable for the contents of the booklet (for example, A4 size plain paper). The paper discharge port 3A is provided on the upper surface of the first printer 3, and discharges the printed paper 8A in the upper right direction.
 第二プリンタ4は、製本装置1で作成される冊子の表紙9(図37参照)に画像を印刷するプリンタである。表紙9は、後述の用紙束8(図4参照)を被覆可能な大きさ及び形状を有する。第二プリンタ4は、印刷済みの表紙9が排出される開口である表紙排出口4Aを有する。本実施形態では、第二プリンタ4は、表紙に適した厚手且つ大判サイズの用紙(例えば、A3サイズの特殊紙)に、画像を高画質で印刷可能なインクジェットプリンタである。表紙排出口4Aは、第二プリンタ4の前面に設けられ、印刷済みの表紙9を前方向に排出する。用紙供給部5は、用紙排出口3Aから排出された用紙8Aを、本体枠2の左側から紙揃え機構100に搬送する。 The second printer 4 is a printer that prints an image on a cover 9 (see FIG. 37) of a booklet created by the bookbinding apparatus 1. The cover sheet 9 has a size and a shape that can cover a sheet bundle 8 (see FIG. 4) described later. The second printer 4 has a cover discharge port 4A which is an opening through which a printed cover 9 is discharged. In the present embodiment, the second printer 4 is an inkjet printer capable of printing an image with high image quality on a thick and large size paper suitable for a cover (for example, A3 size special paper). The cover discharge port 4A is provided on the front surface of the second printer 4 and discharges the printed cover 9 in the forward direction. The paper supply unit 5 conveys the paper 8A discharged from the paper discharge port 3A to the paper alignment mechanism 100 from the left side of the main body frame 2.
 表紙供給口22は、天板21の前縁部に設けられる。表紙供給口22は、天板21を上下方向に貫通し、且つ左右方向に延びる矩形状の開口である。表紙供給口22は、第二プリンタ4よりも前側に位置する。表紙供給部6は、天板21上に設けられ、且つ、表紙供給口22と第二プリンタ4との間にある。表紙供給部6は、上下方向に対向配置された一対の案内板62,63を含む。表紙排出口4Aから排出された印刷済みの表紙9は、一対の案内板62,63の間に挿入される。一対の案内板62,63は、印刷済みの表紙9を表紙供給口22に向けて案内する。 The front cover supply port 22 is provided at the front edge of the top plate 21. The cover sheet supply port 22 is a rectangular opening that penetrates the top plate 21 in the vertical direction and extends in the horizontal direction. The cover sheet supply port 22 is located in front of the second printer 4. The cover sheet supply unit 6 is provided on the top plate 21 and is located between the cover sheet supply port 22 and the second printer 4. The cover sheet supply unit 6 includes a pair of guide plates 62 and 63 disposed to face each other in the vertical direction. The printed cover sheet 9 discharged from the cover sheet discharge port 4 </ b> A is inserted between the pair of guide plates 62 and 63. The pair of guide plates 62 and 63 guide the printed cover 9 toward the cover supply port 22.
 紙揃え機構100、束操作機構200、糊塗布機構300、表紙保持機構400、裁断機構500、制御部900は、本体枠2の内側に配置される。概略的には、各機構は紙揃え機構100を基準として、 次のような位置関係にある。束操作機構200は、紙揃え機構100の上側にある(図3~図5参照)。表紙保持機構400は、紙揃え機構100の前側にある(図1、図4参照)。裁断機構500は、紙揃え機構100の後側にある(図1、図5参照)。糊塗布機構300は、後述の第一搬送位置にあるテーブル110と、表紙保持機構400との間にある(図1、図3参照)。ただし、裁断機構500の一部は、本体枠2の後側に突出する。表紙保持機構400の一部は、後述するように表紙供給口22を介して本体枠2の上側に進出可能である。 The paper alignment mechanism 100, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the glue application mechanism 300, the cover holding mechanism 400, the cutting mechanism 500, and the control unit 900 are arranged inside the main body frame 2. Schematically, each mechanism has the following positional relationship with the paper alignment mechanism 100 as a reference. The bundle operation mechanism 200 is on the upper side of the paper alignment mechanism 100 (see FIGS. 3 to 5). The cover holding mechanism 400 is on the front side of the paper alignment mechanism 100 (see FIGS. 1 and 4). The cutting mechanism 500 is on the rear side of the paper alignment mechanism 100 (see FIGS. 1 and 5). The glue application mechanism 300 is located between a table 110 at a first transport position, which will be described later, and a cover holding mechanism 400 (see FIGS. 1 and 3). However, a part of the cutting mechanism 500 protrudes to the rear side of the main body frame 2. A part of the cover holding mechanism 400 can advance to the upper side of the main body frame 2 through the cover supply port 22 as described later.
 紙揃え機構100は、用紙束8の保持及び紙揃えを実行する機構である。用紙束8は、所定の積載方向(本実施形態では、上下方向)に重ねられた複数の用紙8Aである。用紙束8の紙揃えは、用紙束端面を積載方向に沿って略面一に揃える動作である。用紙束端面は、用紙束8のうちで、積載方向と直交する方向(本実施形態では、前後方向及び左右方向)の端面である。 The paper alignment mechanism 100 is a mechanism for holding the paper bundle 8 and performing paper alignment. The sheet bundle 8 is a plurality of sheets 8A stacked in a predetermined stacking direction (in the present embodiment, the up-down direction). The alignment of the sheet bundle 8 is an operation of aligning the end face of the sheet bundle substantially flush along the stacking direction. The sheet bundle end surface is an end surface of the sheet bundle 8 in a direction orthogonal to the stacking direction (in the present embodiment, the front-rear direction and the left-right direction).
 束操作機構200は、紙揃え機構100で保持される用紙束8に対して、各種操作(例えば、押え、搬送など)を実行する機構である。糊塗布機構300は、用紙束8の前端面に、表紙9を貼付け可能な接着部を形成する機構である。用紙束8の前端面は、前側の用紙束端面である。表紙保持機構400は、表紙供給部6から供給された表紙9を保持し、且つ保持した表紙9を用紙束8の前端面に貼付ける機構である。裁断機構500は、表紙9が貼付けられた用紙束8である冊子10(図5参照)を、規定のサイズに合わせて裁断する機構である。 The bundle operation mechanism 200 is a mechanism that performs various operations (for example, presser, conveyance, etc.) on the sheet bundle 8 held by the paper alignment mechanism 100. The glue application mechanism 300 is a mechanism that forms an adhesive portion on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 to which the cover sheet 9 can be attached. The front end face of the sheet bundle 8 is the front sheet bundle end face. The cover holding mechanism 400 is a mechanism for holding the cover 9 supplied from the cover supply unit 6 and sticking the held cover 9 to the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8. The cutting mechanism 500 is a mechanism for cutting a booklet 10 (see FIG. 5), which is a sheet bundle 8 to which a cover 9 is attached, according to a specified size.
 制御部900は、図示外のCPU、ROM、RAM等を含むコントローラである。CPUはROMに記憶されたプログラムに基づいて、製本装置1の製本動作を制御する。制御部900は、本開示に係る制御を実行可能なコンピュータ(例えば、パソコン、マイコン、ASIC)であればよい。 The control unit 900 is a controller including a CPU, ROM, RAM, and the like not shown. The CPU controls the bookbinding operation of the bookbinding apparatus 1 based on a program stored in the ROM. The control unit 900 may be a computer (for example, a personal computer, a microcomputer, or an ASIC) that can execute control according to the present disclosure.
 以上のように、第一プリンタ3、第二プリンタ4、用紙供給部5、表紙供給部6、紙揃え機構100、束操作機構200、糊塗布機構300、表紙保持機構400、裁断機構500、制御部900は、何れも本体枠2によって支持される。ユーザは、本体枠2の下面の四隅に設けられた複数のキャスター29を介して、製本装置1を一体的に移動できる。 As described above, the first printer 3, the second printer 4, the sheet supply unit 5, the cover sheet supply unit 6, the sheet alignment mechanism 100, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the glue application mechanism 300, the cover sheet holding mechanism 400, the cutting mechanism 500, and the control All the parts 900 are supported by the main body frame 2. The user can move the bookbinding apparatus 1 integrally through a plurality of casters 29 provided at the four corners of the lower surface of the main body frame 2.
<2.製本装置1の詳細構造>
 以下、製本装置1における各部の詳細構造を説明する。
<2. Detailed structure of bookbinding apparatus 1>
Hereinafter, the detailed structure of each part in the bookbinding apparatus 1 will be described.
<2-1.第一プリンタ3及び用紙供給部5の構造>
 図6~図10を参照して、第一プリンタ3及び用紙供給部5の構造を説明する。図6は第一プリンタ3の内部構造を模式的に示す。図10は、後述する一対のガイド部59及び一対の連結板57A~57Cを省略する。
<2-1. Structure of first printer 3 and paper supply unit 5>
The structures of the first printer 3 and the paper supply unit 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 schematically shows the internal structure of the first printer 3. In FIG. 10, a pair of guide portions 59 and a pair of connecting plates 57A to 57C described later are omitted.
 図6に示すように、第一プリンタ3は、給紙カセット31、給紙ローラ32、プロセス部35、排紙ローラ37を含む。給紙カセット31は、印刷前の用紙8Aを収容する。プロセス部35は、周知の電子写真方式によってトナー像を形成する。給紙ローラ32は、給紙カセット31に収容された用紙8Aをプロセス部35に搬送する。排紙ローラ37は、印刷済みの用紙8Aを用紙排出口3Aから右上方向に排出する。第一プリンタ3の上面且つ用紙排出口3Aの右側に、用紙排出口3Aから排出された用紙8Aを受ける排紙トレイ3Bが設けられる。 As shown in FIG. 6, the first printer 3 includes a paper feed cassette 31, a paper feed roller 32, a process unit 35, and a paper discharge roller 37. The paper feed cassette 31 accommodates the paper 8A before printing. The process unit 35 forms a toner image by a known electrophotographic method. The paper feed roller 32 conveys the paper 8 </ b> A stored in the paper feed cassette 31 to the process unit 35. The paper discharge roller 37 discharges the printed paper 8A from the paper discharge port 3A in the upper right direction. A paper discharge tray 3B that receives the paper 8A discharged from the paper discharge port 3A is provided on the upper surface of the first printer 3 and on the right side of the paper discharge port 3A.
 第一プリンタ3の内部に、用紙8Aが搬送される経路33,34が設けられる。経路33は、用紙8Aの画像を印刷するための経路である。経路33は、給紙カセット31から給紙ローラ32、プロセス部35、排紙ローラ37の順に経由して、用紙排出口3Aまで延びる。経路34は、印刷済みの用紙8Aを反転してプロセス部35に再搬送するための経路である。経路34の上流側端部は、プロセス部35と排紙ローラ37との間に設けられた分岐点36で、経路33から分岐する。経路34の下流側端部は、給紙ローラ32とプロセス部35との間で、経路33に合流する。 In the first printer 3, paths 33 and 34 for conveying the paper 8A are provided. The path 33 is a path for printing the image of the paper 8A. The path 33 extends from the paper feed cassette 31 to the paper discharge port 3A through the paper supply roller 32, the process unit 35, and the paper discharge roller 37 in this order. The path 34 is a path for inverting the printed paper 8 </ b> A and re-transporting it to the process unit 35. An upstream end of the path 34 branches from the path 33 at a branch point 36 provided between the process unit 35 and the paper discharge roller 37. The downstream end of the path 34 joins the path 33 between the paper feed roller 32 and the process unit 35.
 第一プリンタ3の片面印刷時には、給紙カセット31に収容された用紙8Aが、以下のように経路33上を搬送される。用紙8Aが給紙ローラ32によって、給紙カセット31からプロセス部35に搬送される。プロセス部35で形成されたトナー像が、用紙8Aの第一面に転写される。トナー像が転写された用紙8Aは、プロセス部35内の定着装置に搬送されて、用紙8Aの第一面にトナー像が熱定着される。その後、用紙8Aの全体が排紙ローラ37によって用紙排出口3Aから排出される。 When the first printer 3 performs single-sided printing, the paper 8A accommodated in the paper feed cassette 31 is conveyed on the path 33 as follows. The paper 8 </ b> A is conveyed from the paper feed cassette 31 to the process unit 35 by the paper feed roller 32. The toner image formed by the process unit 35 is transferred to the first surface of the paper 8A. The sheet 8A to which the toner image has been transferred is conveyed to a fixing device in the process unit 35, and the toner image is thermally fixed on the first surface of the sheet 8A. Thereafter, the entire sheet 8A is discharged from the sheet discharge port 3A by the sheet discharge roller 37.
 第一プリンタ3の両面印刷時には、まず上記の片面印刷時と同様に、用紙8Aが経路33上を搬送されて、用紙8Aの第一面に画像が印刷される。排紙ローラ37によって搬送される用紙8Aの後端が分岐点36を通過すると、排紙ローラ37の回転が停止される。このとき、用紙8Aの一部が用紙排出口3Aから排出された状態で、用紙8Aの搬送が一時停止される。 When double-sided printing is performed by the first printer 3, first, the paper 8A is transported on the path 33 and an image is printed on the first surface of the paper 8A as in the case of single-sided printing. When the rear end of the paper 8A conveyed by the paper discharge roller 37 passes the branch point 36, the rotation of the paper discharge roller 37 is stopped. At this time, the conveyance of the paper 8A is temporarily stopped in a state where a part of the paper 8A is discharged from the paper discharge port 3A.
 次に、排紙ローラ37の回転方向が切り換えられて、排紙ローラ37の回転が再開される。用紙8Aの搬送方向が反転して、用紙8Aが分岐点36から経路34に進入する。用紙8Aは経路34上を搬送された後、給紙ローラ32とプロセス部35との間で経路33に戻る。これにより用紙8Aが反転されて、プロセス部35で用紙8Aの第二面に画像が印刷される。第二面は、第一面とは反対側の面である。その後、用紙8Aの全体が排紙ローラ37によって用紙排出口3Aから排出される。 Next, the rotation direction of the paper discharge roller 37 is switched, and the rotation of the paper discharge roller 37 is resumed. The conveyance direction of the sheet 8A is reversed, and the sheet 8A enters the path 34 from the branch point 36. After the sheet 8A is conveyed on the path 34, the sheet 8A returns to the path 33 between the sheet feed roller 32 and the process unit 35. As a result, the paper 8A is reversed and an image is printed on the second surface of the paper 8A by the process unit 35. The second surface is a surface opposite to the first surface. Thereafter, the entire sheet 8A is discharged from the sheet discharge port 3A by the sheet discharge roller 37.
 つまり第一プリンタ3が備える用紙8Aの排出機構は、用紙8Aの第一面に画像を形成した後、用紙8Aを第一搬送量で搬送して用紙排出口3Aから排出し、更に排出した用紙8Aを用紙排出口3Aから取り込んで、用紙8Aの第二面に画像を形成した後、用紙8Aを第二搬送量で搬送して用紙排出口3Aから排出する。 That is, the paper 8A discharge mechanism provided in the first printer 3 forms an image on the first surface of the paper 8A, then transports the paper 8A by the first transport amount, discharges it from the paper discharge port 3A, and further discharges the paper. 8A is taken in from the paper discharge port 3A, an image is formed on the second surface of the paper 8A, and then the paper 8A is transported by the second transport amount and discharged from the paper discharge port 3A.
 第一搬送量は、用紙8Aの一部のみを用紙排出口3Aから排出する用紙8Aの搬送量である。換言すると第一搬送量は、用紙8Aの搬送方向長さよりも小さい。第二搬送量は、用紙8Aの全体を用紙排出口3Aから排出する用紙8Aの搬送量である。換言すると第二搬送量は、用紙8Aの搬送方向長さよりも大きい。搬送方向長さは、排紙ローラ37によって搬送される用紙8Aにおける、搬送方向の下流側端部から上流側端部までの長さである。 The first transport amount is the transport amount of the paper 8A that discharges only a part of the paper 8A from the paper discharge port 3A. In other words, the first transport amount is smaller than the length in the transport direction of the paper 8A. The second transport amount is the transport amount of the paper 8A that discharges the entire paper 8A from the paper discharge port 3A. In other words, the second transport amount is larger than the length in the transport direction of the paper 8A. The transport direction length is the length from the downstream end in the transport direction to the upstream end of the paper 8 </ b> A transported by the paper discharge roller 37.
 図6及び図7に示すように、用紙供給部5は、経路板51(図2参照)、複数の搬送ローラ56A,複数の搬送ローラ56B、固定板58、一対のガイド部59、及びローラ駆動部80,90を含む。 As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the paper supply unit 5 includes a path plate 51 (see FIG. 2), a plurality of transport rollers 56A, a plurality of transport rollers 56B, a fixed plate 58, a pair of guide portions 59, and a roller drive. Parts 80 and 90.
 経路板51は、第一プリンタ3の用紙排出口3Aの近傍に配置可能な板状部材であり、略左右方向に連続する三つの経路板51A,51B,51Cを含む。経路板51A~51Cは、それぞれ前後方向及び略左右方向に延びる矩形状の板状部材である。経路板51A~51Cの前後方向長さは、用紙8Aの前後方向長さよりも大きい。経路板51Cの右端部は、固定板58に固定される。固定板58は、用紙供給部5を本体枠2(図1参照)に連結する板状部材である。経路板51Bは、経路板51Cの左端部から左下方向に延びる。経路板51Aは、経路板51Bの左端部から左下方向に延びる。経路板51A~51Cの上面は、経路板51の案内面を形成する。 The path plate 51 is a plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of the paper discharge port 3A of the first printer 3, and includes three path plates 51A, 51B, and 51C that are substantially continuous in the left-right direction. The route plates 51A to 51C are rectangular plate-like members that extend in the front-rear direction and the substantially left-right direction, respectively. The length in the front-rear direction of the path plates 51A to 51C is larger than the length in the front-rear direction of the paper 8A. The right end portion of the path plate 51C is fixed to the fixed plate 58. The fixed plate 58 is a plate-like member that connects the paper supply unit 5 to the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 1). The route plate 51B extends in the lower left direction from the left end portion of the route plate 51C. The route plate 51A extends in the lower left direction from the left end portion of the route plate 51B. The upper surfaces of the route plates 51A to 51C form the guide surface of the route plate 51.
 経路板51は第一プリンタ3の上側に配置される。経路板51Aの下端部が排紙トレイ3B内に配置され、且つ経路板51Aが用紙排出口3Aと対向する位置に配置される。経路板51は、排紙トレイ3Bから本体枠2の内側まで延びる(図2参照)。経路板51の案内面は、用紙排出口3Aから排出された用紙8Aが載置される面であり、且つ案内方向に延びる面である。案内方向は、用紙排出口3Aから離れる方向であり、本実施形態では用紙排出口3Aから右側に延びる方向である。 The route plate 51 is disposed on the upper side of the first printer 3. The lower end portion of the path plate 51A is disposed in the paper discharge tray 3B, and the path plate 51A is disposed at a position facing the paper discharge port 3A. The path plate 51 extends from the paper discharge tray 3B to the inside of the main body frame 2 (see FIG. 2). The guide surface of the path plate 51 is a surface on which the paper 8A discharged from the paper discharge port 3A is placed and extends in the guide direction. The guide direction is a direction away from the paper discharge port 3A, and in this embodiment, is a direction extending rightward from the paper discharge port 3A.
 経路板51A~51Cの上面に、それぞれ案内カバー52A~52Cが設けられる。案内カバー52A~52Cは、それぞれ経路板51A~51Cの上面を、前後方向に亘って覆う板状部材である。経路板51A及び案内カバー52Aの間に、用紙8Aが案内方向に通過可能な隙間が形成される。同様に、経路板51B及び案内カバー52Bの間と、経路板51C及び案内カバー52Cの間とに、用紙8Aが案内方向に通過可能な隙間が形成される。 Guide covers 52A to 52C are provided on the upper surfaces of the route plates 51A to 51C, respectively. The guide covers 52A to 52C are plate-like members that cover the upper surfaces of the path plates 51A to 51C, respectively, in the front-rear direction. A gap is formed between the path plate 51A and the guide cover 52A so that the paper 8A can pass in the guide direction. Similarly, a gap is formed between the path plate 51B and the guide cover 52B and between the path plate 51C and the guide cover 52C so that the paper 8A can pass in the guide direction.
 ローラ駆動部80,90は、経路板51の案内面に載置された用紙8Aを案内方向の下流側に搬送する機構である。ローラ駆動部80は、経路板51Bの右端部に設けられる。ローラ駆動部90は、経路板51Cの右端部に設けられる。つまりローラ駆動部90は、ローラ駆動部80よりも案内方向の下流側にある。 The roller driving units 80 and 90 are mechanisms for conveying the paper 8A placed on the guide surface of the path plate 51 to the downstream side in the guide direction. The roller driving unit 80 is provided at the right end of the path plate 51B. The roller driving unit 90 is provided at the right end of the path plate 51C. That is, the roller driving unit 90 is located downstream of the roller driving unit 80 in the guide direction.
 一対のガイド部59は、案内カバー52B,52Cよりも上側で、前後方向に並んで配置された柱状部材である。一対のガイド部59は、固定板58の上端面と案内カバー52Bの上側との間を左右方向に延びる。一対のガイド部59における互いの対向面に、前後方向に延びるネジ溝59Aがそれぞれ形成される。ネジ溝59Aは、後述の連結板57A~57Cを固定するネジを螺合可能な溝部である。一対のガイド部59の右端部は、それぞれネジ溝59Aにネジ止めされた一対の連結板57Cによって、固定板58の上端面に固定される。 The pair of guide portions 59 are columnar members arranged side by side in the front-rear direction above the guide covers 52B and 52C. The pair of guide portions 59 extends in the left-right direction between the upper end surface of the fixed plate 58 and the upper side of the guide cover 52B. Screw grooves 59A extending in the front-rear direction are formed on the opposing surfaces of the pair of guide portions 59, respectively. The screw groove 59A is a groove portion into which a screw for fixing connection plates 57A to 57C described later can be screwed. The right end portions of the pair of guide portions 59 are fixed to the upper end surface of the fixing plate 58 by a pair of connecting plates 57C that are respectively screwed into the screw grooves 59A.
 図7及び図8に示すように、ローラ駆動部80は、複数の搬送ローラ56A、駆動モータ81、支持部82、第一軸83、第二軸84、複数の従動ローラ85を含む。支持部82は、経路板51Bよりも前後方向に延び、且つ左右方向に開口する枠状部材である。支持部82は、それぞれネジ溝59Aにネジ止めされた一対の連結板57Aによって、一対のガイド部59の下側に固定される。経路板51Bは、一対のガイド部59に固定された支持部82の内側を貫通して左右方向に延びる。 7 and 8, the roller driving unit 80 includes a plurality of conveying rollers 56A, a driving motor 81, a support unit 82, a first shaft 83, a second shaft 84, and a plurality of driven rollers 85. The support portion 82 is a frame-like member that extends in the front-rear direction than the path plate 51B and opens in the left-right direction. The support portion 82 is fixed to the lower side of the pair of guide portions 59 by a pair of connecting plates 57A screwed to the screw grooves 59A. The path plate 51 </ b> B extends in the left-right direction through the inside of the support portion 82 fixed to the pair of guide portions 59.
 第一軸83は、支持部82の内側に設けられた、前後方向に延びる軸である。駆動モータ81は、支持部82の前端部に設けられ、第一軸83を軸心まわりに回転させる。複数の搬送ローラ56Aは、第一軸83に設けられ、且つ前後方向に均等間隔で配置された回転体である。第二軸84は、支持部82の内側且つ第一軸83の直下に設けられた、前後方向に延びる軸である。複数の従動ローラ85は、前後方向に均等間隔で配置された、第二軸84を中心に回転可能な回転体である。複数の搬送ローラ56Aと複数の従動ローラ85とは、互いに上下方向に対向し、且つ経路板51の案内面において接触する。 The first shaft 83 is a shaft provided inside the support portion 82 and extending in the front-rear direction. The drive motor 81 is provided at the front end portion of the support portion 82 and rotates the first shaft 83 around the axis. The plurality of transport rollers 56 </ b> A are rotating bodies that are provided on the first shaft 83 and arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction. The second shaft 84 is an shaft that extends in the front-rear direction and is provided inside the support portion 82 and directly below the first shaft 83. The plurality of driven rollers 85 are rotating bodies that are arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction and are rotatable about the second shaft 84. The plurality of transport rollers 56 </ b> A and the plurality of driven rollers 85 are opposed to each other in the vertical direction and are in contact with each other on the guide surface of the path plate 51.
 案内カバー52Bは、複数のスリット55Aを有する。複数のスリット55Aは、前後方向に並んで設けられた、案内カバー52Bの右端部から左方向に切り欠かれた部位である。第一軸83は、案内カバー52Bの上側に配置される。複数の搬送ローラ56Aの下側部分は、それぞれ対応するスリット55A内に配置される。図示しないが、経路板51Bは、経路板51Bを上下方向に貫通する複数の開口部を有する。複数の開口部は、複数のスリット55Aと略同一の形状及び大きさであり、且つ複数のスリット55Aと上下方向に対向する。第二軸84は、経路板51Bの下側に配置される。複数の従動ローラ85の上側部分は、それぞれ対応する経路板51Bの開口部内に配置される。 The guide cover 52B has a plurality of slits 55A. The plurality of slits 55 </ b> A are portions that are provided side by side in the front-rear direction and are notched leftward from the right end portion of the guide cover 52 </ b> B. The first shaft 83 is disposed on the upper side of the guide cover 52B. Lower portions of the plurality of transport rollers 56A are disposed in the corresponding slits 55A. Although not shown, the path plate 51B has a plurality of openings that penetrate the path plate 51B in the vertical direction. The plurality of openings have substantially the same shape and size as the plurality of slits 55A, and face the plurality of slits 55A in the vertical direction. The second shaft 84 is disposed below the path plate 51B. The upper portions of the plurality of driven rollers 85 are disposed in the openings of the corresponding path plates 51B.
 ローラ駆動部90は、ローラ駆動部80と同様の構造である。ローラ駆動部90は、複数の搬送ローラ56B、駆動モータ91、支持部92、図示外の第一軸、第二軸、複数の従動ローラ95(図10参照)を含む。支持部92は、それぞれネジ溝59Aにネジ止めされた一対の連結板57Bによって、一対のガイド部59の下側に固定される。経路板51Cは、一対のガイド部59に固定された支持部92の内側を貫通して左右方向に延びる。 The roller driving unit 90 has the same structure as the roller driving unit 80. The roller drive unit 90 includes a plurality of transport rollers 56B, a drive motor 91, a support unit 92, a first shaft and a second shaft (not shown), and a plurality of driven rollers 95 (see FIG. 10). The support portion 92 is fixed to the lower side of the pair of guide portions 59 by a pair of connecting plates 57B screwed to the screw grooves 59A. The path plate 51 </ b> C extends in the left-right direction through the inside of the support portion 92 fixed to the pair of guide portions 59.
 駆動モータ91は、複数の搬送ローラ56Bが設けられた第一軸を、軸心まわりに回転させる。複数の従動ローラ95は、ローラ駆動部90の第二軸を中心に回転可能である。複数の搬送ローラ56Bと複数の従動ローラ95とは、互いに上下方向に対向し、且つ経路板51の案内面において接触する。複数の搬送ローラ56Bの下側部分は、それぞれ対応する案内カバー52Cのスリット55B内に配置される。複数の従動ローラ95の上側部分は、それぞれ対応する経路板51Cの開口部(図示外)内に配置される。 The drive motor 91 rotates the first shaft provided with the plurality of transport rollers 56B around the axis. The plurality of driven rollers 95 can rotate around the second shaft of the roller driving unit 90. The plurality of transport rollers 56 </ b> B and the plurality of driven rollers 95 oppose each other in the vertical direction and contact with each other on the guide surface of the path plate 51. Lower portions of the plurality of transport rollers 56B are disposed in the slits 55B of the corresponding guide covers 52C. The upper portions of the plurality of driven rollers 95 are disposed in openings (not shown) of the corresponding path plates 51C.
 図7及び図9に示すように、ローラ駆動部80は所定範囲で左右方向にスライド移動可能である。所定範囲は、複数の搬送ローラ56Aがそれぞれ対応するスリット55A内で左右方向に移動できる範囲、且つ複数の従動ローラ85がそれぞれ対応する経路板51Bの開口部内で左右方向に移動できる範囲である。図7及び図9はそれぞれ、ローラ駆動部80が所定範囲内の右端位置及び左端位置に移動した状態を示す。ユーザはローラ駆動部80を所定範囲内でスライドさせた後に、一対の連結板57Aをネジ溝59Aに固定することで、ローラ駆動部80の左右方向位置(つまり、複数の搬送ローラ56Aの案内方向位置)を調整できる。 7 and 9, the roller drive unit 80 is slidable in the left-right direction within a predetermined range. The predetermined range is a range in which the plurality of transport rollers 56A can move in the left-right direction in the corresponding slits 55A, and the range in which the plurality of driven rollers 85 can move in the left-right direction in the openings of the corresponding path plates 51B. 7 and 9 show a state where the roller driving unit 80 has moved to the right end position and the left end position within a predetermined range, respectively. The user slides the roller drive unit 80 within a predetermined range, and then fixes the pair of connecting plates 57A to the screw grooves 59A, thereby causing the left and right positions of the roller drive unit 80 (that is, the guide direction of the plurality of transport rollers 56A). Position) can be adjusted.
 図6に示すように、ローラ駆動部80は、第一位置F1よりも案内方向の下流側、且つ第二位置F2よりも案内方向の上流側に設置される。第一位置F1は、第一プリンタ3から第一搬送量で搬送された用紙8Aの案内方向の下流側端部(本実施形態では、用紙8Aの右端部)が載置される、経路板51の案内面上の位置である。第二位置F2は、第一プリンタ3から第二搬送量で搬送された用紙8Aの案内方向の下流側端部が載置される、経路板51の案内面上の位置である。換言すると、第一位置F1は、排紙ローラ37から排出方向に第一搬送量離れた位置である。第二位置F2は、排紙ローラ37から排出方向に第二搬送量離れた位置である。排出方向は、用紙8Aが用紙排出口3Aから排出される方向であり、本実施形態では右上方向である。 As shown in FIG. 6, the roller driving unit 80 is installed downstream of the first position F1 in the guiding direction and upstream of the second position F2 in the guiding direction. The first position F1 is a path plate 51 on which a downstream end portion in the guide direction of the paper 8A conveyed by the first conveyance amount from the first printer 3 (in this embodiment, the right end portion of the paper 8A) is placed. The position on the guide surface. The second position F2 is a position on the guide surface of the path plate 51 on which the downstream end portion in the guide direction of the paper 8A transported by the second transport amount from the first printer 3 is placed. In other words, the first position F1 is a position away from the paper discharge roller 37 in the discharge direction by the first transport amount. The second position F2 is a position away from the paper discharge roller 37 in the discharge direction by the second transport amount. The discharge direction is a direction in which the paper 8A is discharged from the paper discharge port 3A, and is the upper right direction in the present embodiment.
 同様に、ユーザはローラ駆動部90をスライドさせた後に、一対の連結板57Bをネジ溝59Aに固定することで、ローラ駆動部90の左右方向位置(つまり、複数の搬送ローラ56Bの案内方向位置)を調整できる。本実施形態のローラ駆動部90は、ローラ駆動部80,90間の案内方向の距離が用紙8Aの案内方向の長さよりも小さくなる位置に設置される。 Similarly, after the user slides the roller driving unit 90, the pair of connecting plates 57B are fixed to the screw grooves 59A, so that the left and right positions of the roller driving unit 90 (that is, the guide direction positions of the plurality of transport rollers 56B) are fixed. ) Can be adjusted. The roller driving unit 90 of this embodiment is installed at a position where the distance in the guiding direction between the roller driving units 80 and 90 is smaller than the length of the paper 8A in the guiding direction.
 例えば第一プリンタ3を他の画像形成装置に交換した場合、交換後の画像形成装置から排出される用紙の搬送量は、第一プリンタ3から排出される用紙8Aの搬送量と異なる場合がある。第一プリンタ3で印刷される用紙8Aのサイズに応じて、第一プリンタ3から排出される用紙8Aの搬送量が変化する場合がある。従って用紙供給部5は、ユーザが画像形成装置又は用紙サイズに応じてローラ駆動部80,90の位置調整を行うことで、印刷済みの用紙を適切に搬送できる。なお、ユーザは用紙供給部5の位置を変更することで、ローラ駆動部80,90の位置調整を行ってもよい。 For example, when the first printer 3 is replaced with another image forming apparatus, the transport amount of the paper discharged from the replaced image forming apparatus may be different from the transport amount of the paper 8A discharged from the first printer 3. . Depending on the size of the paper 8A printed by the first printer 3, the transport amount of the paper 8A discharged from the first printer 3 may change. Therefore, the paper supply unit 5 can appropriately convey the printed paper by the user adjusting the position of the roller driving units 80 and 90 according to the image forming apparatus or the paper size. Note that the user may adjust the positions of the roller driving units 80 and 90 by changing the position of the paper supply unit 5.
 本実施形態では、ユーザがローラ駆動部80の左右方向位置を、予め定められた複数の基準位置の何れかに変更可能である。複数の基準位置は、それぞれ異なる用紙8Aのサイズに対応する。例えば一対のガイド部59の少なくとも一つには、複数の基準位置を示す目盛り(図示外)が、ネジ溝59Aに沿って表記される。第一プリンタ3で印刷する用紙8Aのサイズに対応する目盛りの位置で、ユーザはローラ駆動部80を一対の連結板57Aで固定する。従って用紙供給部5は、ローラ駆動部80の位置調整によって、サイズの異なる用紙8Aを用紙供給部5で適切に搬送できる。第一プリンタ3でサイズの異なる用紙8Aが印刷される場合、ユーザは用紙供給部5の全体位置を変更する必要がない。 In this embodiment, the user can change the left-right direction position of the roller drive unit 80 to any of a plurality of predetermined reference positions. The plurality of reference positions correspond to different sizes of the paper 8A. For example, at least one of the pair of guide portions 59 is marked with a scale (not shown) indicating a plurality of reference positions along the screw groove 59A. At the position of the scale corresponding to the size of the paper 8A to be printed by the first printer 3, the user fixes the roller driving unit 80 with a pair of connecting plates 57A. Accordingly, the paper supply unit 5 can appropriately convey the paper 8A having different sizes by the paper supply unit 5 by adjusting the position of the roller driving unit 80. When the first printer 3 prints paper 8A having different sizes, the user does not need to change the overall position of the paper supply unit 5.
 図10に示すように、経路板51Bは、一対の軸ピン98及び複数の支持片99を有する。一対の軸ピン98は、経路板51Bの左端部から前後両側に突出する小径の軸体である。一対の軸ピン98は、経路板51Aの右前端部及び右後端部に設けられた穴に挿入された状態で、経路板51Aを回転可能に支持する。複数の支持片99は、経路板51Bの左下端部から突出する複数の板状片である。経路板51A及び案内カバー52Aは、前後方向に延びる一対の軸ピン98を中心に回転可能である。経路板51Aは、正面視で反時計周り方向に規定位置(図7参照)まで回転すると、複数の支持片99に接触して反時計周り方向への回転が規制される。規定位置は、経路板51A,51Bの上面が略面一となる経路板51Aの回転位置である。 As shown in Fig. 10, the path plate 51B has a pair of shaft pins 98 and a plurality of support pieces 99. The pair of shaft pins 98 are small-diameter shafts that protrude from the left end of the path plate 51B to both the front and rear sides. The pair of shaft pins 98 rotatably supports the path plate 51A while being inserted into holes provided at the right front end and the right rear end of the path plate 51A. The plurality of support pieces 99 are a plurality of plate-like pieces protruding from the lower left end portion of the path plate 51B. The route plate 51A and the guide cover 52A are rotatable around a pair of shaft pins 98 extending in the front-rear direction. When the path plate 51 </ b> A rotates counterclockwise to a specified position (see FIG. 7) when viewed from the front, the path plate 51 </ b> A comes into contact with the plurality of support pieces 99 and is restricted from rotating counterclockwise. The specified position is a rotational position of the route plate 51A where the upper surfaces of the route plates 51A and 51B are substantially flush.
 ユーザは経路板51Bに対する経路板51Aの回転位置を変更できるため、各種作業の効率が向上する。例えばユーザは、経路板51Aを第一プリンタ3の排紙トレイ3B内に設置したり、経路板51Aを排紙トレイ3B内から取り出したりすることが容易である。更にユーザは、画像形成装置の排出口の位置及び形状に応じて、排出口と対向するように経路板51Aを配置することが容易である。 Since the user can change the rotational position of the route plate 51A relative to the route plate 51B, the efficiency of various operations is improved. For example, the user can easily install the route plate 51A in the paper discharge tray 3B of the first printer 3 and take out the route plate 51A from the paper discharge tray 3B. Further, the user can easily arrange the path plate 51A so as to face the discharge port according to the position and shape of the discharge port of the image forming apparatus.
 なお、案内方向は、用紙排出口3Aから離れる方向であれば、水平方向か、鉛直方向又は水平方向に対して傾斜した方向かの何れでもよい。支持部82は、ユーザが手作業でローラ駆動部80の位置調整を行う態様に限定されない。支持部82は、ユーザが指定した基準位置又は用紙サイズに応じて、例えばローラ駆動部80の案内方向の上流側及び下流側に移動させる駆動部(例えば、モータ)で、ローラ駆動部80の位置調整を行ってもよい。 Note that the guide direction may be either the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, or the direction inclined with respect to the horizontal direction as long as it is a direction away from the paper discharge port 3A. The support part 82 is not limited to a mode in which the user manually adjusts the position of the roller driving part 80. The support unit 82 is a drive unit (for example, a motor) that moves to the upstream side and the downstream side in the guide direction of the roller drive unit 80 according to the reference position or paper size specified by the user. Adjustments may be made.
<2-2.紙揃え機構100の構造>
 図3、図11~図15を参照して、紙揃え機構100を説明する。図11は、左側面視で紙揃え機構100及び束操作機構200の位置関係を示し、且つ左側紙揃え部103、右側紙揃え部104、接触部材106等を省略する。図12及び図13は、搬送部102、左側紙揃え部103、右側紙揃え部104、支持台111、可動部153、搬送部154等を省略する(後述の図30も同様)。図13は、接触部材106を模式的に図示する。図14は、用紙供給部5及び紙揃え機構100を模式的に図示する。
<2-2. Structure of paper alignment mechanism 100>
The paper alignment mechanism 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 11 to 15. FIG. 11 shows the positional relationship between the paper alignment mechanism 100 and the bundle operation mechanism 200 in the left side view, and the left paper alignment unit 103, the right paper alignment unit 104, the contact member 106, and the like are omitted. 12 and 13 omit the conveyance unit 102, the left paper alignment unit 103, the right paper alignment unit 104, the support base 111, the movable unit 153, the conveyance unit 154, and the like (the same applies to FIG. 30 described later). FIG. 13 schematically illustrates the contact member 106. FIG. 14 schematically illustrates the paper supply unit 5 and the paper alignment mechanism 100.
 図3に示すように、紙揃え機構100は、可動部101、搬送部102、左側紙揃え部103、右側紙揃え部104、前側紙揃え部105、接触部材106を含む。可動部101は、本体枠2の内側で前後方向に移動可能である。搬送部102は、可動部101を前後方向に移動させる。左側紙揃え部103は、用紙束8の左端面に対して紙揃えを行う。用紙束8の左端面は、左側の用紙束端面である。右側紙揃え部104は、用紙束8の右端面に対して紙揃えを行う。用紙束8の右端面は、右側の用紙束端面である。前側紙揃え部105は、用紙束8の前端面に対して紙揃えを行う。接触部材106は、用紙供給部5によって本体枠2の内部に搬送される用紙8Aを、テーブル110上に案内する。 As shown in FIG. 3, the paper alignment mechanism 100 includes a movable unit 101, a conveyance unit 102, a left side paper alignment unit 103, a right side paper alignment unit 104, a front side paper alignment unit 105, and a contact member 106. The movable part 101 is movable in the front-rear direction inside the main body frame 2. The conveyance unit 102 moves the movable unit 101 in the front-rear direction. The left side paper aligning unit 103 performs paper alignment on the left end surface of the sheet bundle 8. The left end face of the sheet bundle 8 is the left sheet bundle end face. The right side paper aligning unit 104 performs paper alignment on the right end surface of the sheet bundle 8. The right end face of the sheet bundle 8 is the right sheet bundle end face. The front-side paper aligning unit 105 performs paper alignment on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8. The contact member 106 guides the paper 8 </ b> A conveyed to the inside of the main body frame 2 by the paper supply unit 5 on the table 110.
 搬送部102は、搬送モータ121、ネジ軸122、ガイドレール123,124を含む。ネジ軸122は、本体枠2の内側で前後方向に延びる。搬送モータ121は、ネジ軸122を軸心まわりに回転可能である。ガイドレール123,124は、それぞれネジ軸122の左側及び右側に設けられ、且つネジ軸122と並んで前後方向に延びる。 The transport unit 102 includes a transport motor 121, a screw shaft 122, and guide rails 123 and 124. The screw shaft 122 extends in the front-rear direction inside the main body frame 2. The conveyance motor 121 can rotate the screw shaft 122 around the axis. The guide rails 123 and 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the screw shaft 122, respectively, and extend in the front-rear direction along with the screw shaft 122.
 図11及び図12に示すように、可動部101は、テーブル110、支持台111、ナット114、回転機構116、叩きモータ170、振動モータ180を含む。テーブル110は、支持台111の上端部に設けられた、平面視で略矩形状の板状体である。テーブル110は、本体枠2の内部に搬送された用紙8Aが積み重ねられる平面である載置面110Aを有する。載置面110Aは、第一プリンタ3で印刷される用紙8Aよりも一回り小さい。載置面110Aは、後述の第一載置面1111及び第二載置面1121を含む。載置面110Aから上方に延びる空間を、上方領域という。後述の接触部材106の少なくとも一部は、上方領域に含まれる。 11 and 12, the movable part 101 includes a table 110, a support base 111, a nut 114, a rotation mechanism 116, a tapping motor 170, and a vibration motor 180. The table 110 is a substantially rectangular plate-like body provided in the upper end portion of the support base 111 in plan view. The table 110 has a placement surface 110 </ b> A that is a plane on which the sheets 8 </ b> A conveyed inside the main body frame 2 are stacked. The placement surface 110 </ b> A is slightly smaller than the paper 8 </ b> A printed by the first printer 3. The mounting surface 110A includes a first mounting surface 1111 and a second mounting surface 1121 described later. A space extending upward from the mounting surface 110A is referred to as an upper region. At least a part of a contact member 106 to be described later is included in the upper region.
 支持台111は、内部に空間が形成された直方体状である。支持台111は、ガイドレール123,124に沿って移動可能である。ナット114は、支持台111に設けられ、且つ内部にネジ軸122が挿通される。ナット114及びネジ軸122は、公知のボールネジである(後述する他のナット及びネジ軸も同様)。搬送モータ121がネジ軸122を回転すると、ナット114を備えた支持台111がガイドレール123,124に沿って移動する。つまり支持台111の上に支持されたテーブル110は、本体枠2の内部を前後方向に直線移動する。 The support base 111 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a space formed therein. The support base 111 is movable along the guide rails 123 and 124. The nut 114 is provided on the support base 111, and the screw shaft 122 is inserted therein. The nut 114 and the screw shaft 122 are known ball screws (the same applies to other nuts and screw shafts described later). When the transport motor 121 rotates the screw shaft 122, the support base 111 including the nut 114 moves along the guide rails 123 and 124. That is, the table 110 supported on the support base 111 moves linearly in the front-rear direction within the main body frame 2.
 テーブル110の可動範囲は、第一搬送位置を含む。テーブル110の可動範囲は、前後方向に移動するテーブル110が通過可能な領域である。第一搬送位置(図3、図4、図11、図13参照)は、用紙供給部5によって供給された用紙8Aが載置面110A上に排出される、テーブル110の前後方向位置である。本体枠2の内部に供給される用紙8Aの長辺及び短辺は、それぞれ左右方向及び前後方向と平行である。本体枠2の内部に搬送される用紙8Aの左端部16(図29参照)は、用紙8Aの搬送方向(本実施形態では、右方向)の上流側端部である。本体枠2の内部に搬送される用紙8Aの右端部17(図29参照)は、用紙8Aの搬送方向の下流側端部である。 The movable range of the table 110 includes the first transport position. The movable range of the table 110 is an area through which the table 110 moving in the front-rear direction can pass. The first transport position (see FIGS. 3, 4, 11, and 13) is a front-rear direction position of the table 110 from which the paper 8 </ b> A supplied by the paper supply unit 5 is discharged onto the placement surface 110 </ b> A. The long side and the short side of the paper 8A supplied to the inside of the main body frame 2 are parallel to the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, respectively. The left end portion 16 (see FIG. 29) of the paper 8A conveyed inside the main body frame 2 is an upstream end portion in the conveyance direction (right direction in the present embodiment) of the paper 8A. The right end 17 (see FIG. 29) of the sheet 8A conveyed into the main body frame 2 is a downstream end in the conveyance direction of the sheet 8A.
 図12及び図13に示すように、テーブル110は、第一テーブル1110及び第二テーブル1120を含む。第一テーブル1110は、前後方向及び左右方向に延びる板状体である。第一テーブル1110の上面は、第一載置面1111及び支持面1112を含む。第一載置面1111は、第一テーブル1110の前縁部に沿って左右方向に延びる矩形状の平面である。第一載置面1111は、テーブル110に供給された用紙8Aの前側部分を載置可能な略水平面である。支持面1112は、第一載置面1111よりも若干下側に設けられた、第一載置面1111の後側にある平面である。 As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the table 110 includes a first table 1110 and a second table 1120. The first table 1110 is a plate-like body that extends in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. The upper surface of the first table 1110 includes a first placement surface 1111 and a support surface 1112. The first placement surface 1111 is a rectangular plane extending in the left-right direction along the front edge of the first table 1110. The first placement surface 1111 is a substantially horizontal surface on which the front portion of the paper 8A supplied to the table 110 can be placed. The support surface 1112 is a plane on the rear side of the first placement surface 1111 provided slightly below the first placement surface 1111.
 固定軸160は、第一テーブル1110に設けられる。固定軸160は、支持面1112の前端部よりも若干下側に設けられた、第一テーブル1110の右面から右側に突出する軸である。固定軸160は、後述のレバー161を回転可能に支持する。 The fixed shaft 160 is provided on the first table 1110. The fixed shaft 160 is a shaft that is provided slightly below the front end portion of the support surface 1112 and projects rightward from the right surface of the first table 1110. The fixed shaft 160 rotatably supports a lever 161 described later.
 第二テーブル1120は、平面視で左右方向に長い略矩形状の板状体である。
第二テーブル1120の上面は、第二載置面1121を含む。第二載置面1121は、テーブル110に供給された用紙8Aのうち、第一載置面1111に載置された部分よりも後側の部分を載置可能な平面である。第二載置面1121は、第一載置面1111と前後方向に並んでいる。第二載置面1121の左右方向長さは、第一載置面1111の左右方向長さと略等しい。第二載置面1121における第一載置面1111側(前側)の端部を、近接部1122という。第二載置面1121における第一載置面1111とは反対側(後側)の端部を、離隔部1123という。
The second table 1120 is a substantially rectangular plate-like body that is long in the left-right direction in plan view.
The upper surface of the second table 1120 includes a second placement surface 1121. The second placement surface 1121 is a plane on which a portion of the paper 8 </ b> A supplied to the table 110 can be placed on the rear side of the portion placed on the first placement surface 1111. The second placement surface 1121 is aligned with the first placement surface 1111 in the front-rear direction. The length of the second placement surface 1121 in the left-right direction is substantially equal to the length of the first placement surface 1111 in the left-right direction. The end portion on the first placement surface 1111 side (front side) of the second placement surface 1121 is referred to as a proximity portion 1122. An end of the second placement surface 1121 opposite to the first placement surface 1111 (rear side) is referred to as a separation portion 1123.
 レバー161は、左側面視で逆L字状の板状体である。レバー161は、第一板部161A、第二板部161B、貫通孔161Cを含む。第一板部161Aは、第二テーブル1120の下面における右前端部に固定され、且つ固定軸160によって下側から支持される板状体である。第二板部161Bは、第一板部161Aの前端部から、固定軸160の前側を経由して下側に延びる板状体である。貫通孔161Cは、第二板部161Bの下端部を左右方向に貫通する孔である。 The lever 161 is an inverted L-shaped plate in the left side view. The lever 161 includes a first plate portion 161A, a second plate portion 161B, and a through hole 161C. The first plate portion 161 </ b> A is a plate-like body that is fixed to the right front end portion on the lower surface of the second table 1120 and is supported from below by the fixed shaft 160. The second plate portion 161B is a plate-like body that extends downward from the front end portion of the first plate portion 161A via the front side of the fixed shaft 160. The through hole 161C is a hole that penetrates the lower end portion of the second plate portion 161B in the left-right direction.
 第二テーブル1120はレバー161を介して、固定軸160を中心に回転可能である。第二テーブル1120は、第一回転位置と第二回転位置との間で回転可能である。第一回転位置(図12参照)は、第二テーブル1120が支持面1112から上側に離隔する、第二テーブル1120の回転位置である。第二テーブル1120が第一回転位置にある場合、離隔部1123が近接部1122よりも上側にある。載置面110Aは、第一載置面1111と第二載置面1121との間で屈曲する。 The second table 1120 can rotate around the fixed shaft 160 via the lever 161. The second table 1120 is rotatable between the first rotation position and the second rotation position. The first rotation position (see FIG. 12) is the rotation position of the second table 1120 where the second table 1120 is separated upward from the support surface 1112. When the second table 1120 is in the first rotation position, the separation portion 1123 is above the proximity portion 1122. The mounting surface 110A is bent between the first mounting surface 1111 and the second mounting surface 1121.
 第二回転位置(図13参照)は、第二テーブル1120が支持面1112に載置される、第二テーブル1120の回転位置である。第二テーブル1120が第二回転位置にある場合、離隔部1123が近接部1122と略等しい上下方向位置にある。載置面110Aは、第一載置面1111と第二載置面1121とが略面一となるため、全体として一つの略水平な平面となる。 The second rotation position (see FIG. 13) is the rotation position of the second table 1120 on which the second table 1120 is placed on the support surface 1112. When the second table 1120 is in the second rotation position, the separation portion 1123 is in the vertical position substantially equal to the proximity portion 1122. Since the first mounting surface 1111 and the second mounting surface 1121 are substantially flush with each other, the mounting surface 110A has one substantially horizontal plane as a whole.
 図12に示すように、回転機構116は、第二テーブル1120を回転させる機構である。回転機構116は、固定軸160、レバー161、駆動モータ162、回転軸164、ワイヤー166を含む。駆動モータ162は、第二テーブル1120の後端部の下側に設けられる。駆動モータ162の駆動ギア(図示外)は、駆動モータ162の出力軸(図示外)に固定される。 As shown in FIG. 12, the rotation mechanism 116 is a mechanism that rotates the second table 1120. The rotation mechanism 116 includes a fixed shaft 160, a lever 161, a drive motor 162, a rotation shaft 164, and a wire 166. The drive motor 162 is provided below the rear end portion of the second table 1120. A drive gear (not shown) of the drive motor 162 is fixed to an output shaft (not shown) of the drive motor 162.
 回転軸164は、駆動モータ162の出力軸の後側、且つ第二テーブル1120の後端部の下側において、左右方向に延びる。回転軸164に設けられたギア165は、駆動モータ162の駆動ギアと噛み合う。駆動モータ162の回転運動は、回転軸164の回転運動に変換される。円柱状の巻回部材167は、回転軸164の右端部に固定される。ワイヤー166の一端部は、巻回部材167の周面に巻回される。ワイヤー166の他端部は、貫通孔161Cに挿通された状態で、第二板部161Bに固定される。つまりワイヤー166は、回転軸164とレバー161とを連結する。 The rotary shaft 164 extends in the left-right direction on the rear side of the output shaft of the drive motor 162 and on the lower side of the rear end portion of the second table 1120. A gear 165 provided on the rotation shaft 164 meshes with a drive gear of the drive motor 162. The rotational motion of the drive motor 162 is converted into the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 164. The cylindrical winding member 167 is fixed to the right end portion of the rotation shaft 164. One end of the wire 166 is wound around the circumferential surface of the winding member 167. The other end portion of the wire 166 is fixed to the second plate portion 161B while being inserted through the through hole 161C. That is, the wire 166 connects the rotating shaft 164 and the lever 161.
 第二テーブル1120が第一回転位置にある状態で駆動モータ162が駆動すると、ワイヤー166が巻回部材167から引き出される。これにより、第二テーブル1120は第一回転位置から第二回転位置まで回転する。第二テーブル1120が第二回転位置にある状態で駆動モータ162が駆動すると、ワイヤー166が巻回部材167に巻き取られる。これにより、第二テーブル1120は第二回転位置から第一回転位置まで回転する。 When the drive motor 162 is driven while the second table 1120 is in the first rotation position, the wire 166 is pulled out from the winding member 167. As a result, the second table 1120 rotates from the first rotation position to the second rotation position. When the drive motor 162 is driven while the second table 1120 is at the second rotation position, the wire 166 is wound around the winding member 167. As a result, the second table 1120 rotates from the second rotation position to the first rotation position.
 図12及び図13に示すように、叩きモータ170は、第一テーブル1110の下面に固定される。叩きモータ170は、左右方向に延びる出力軸171を含む。カム部材172は、出力軸171の先端部に設けられる。カム部材172は、右側面視で略斜方形の板状体であり、ワイヤー166の下側にある。カム部材172の周面は、第一周面173、第二周面174、第三周面175、第四周面176を含む。第一周面173~第四周面176は、それぞれ右側面視で、カム部材172の略中心部から離隔する方向に突出し且つ円弧状に湾曲する。 As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the tapping motor 170 is fixed to the lower surface of the first table 1110. The tapping motor 170 includes an output shaft 171 extending in the left-right direction. The cam member 172 is provided at the distal end portion of the output shaft 171. The cam member 172 is a substantially rhombic plate-like body when viewed from the right side, and is below the wire 166. The peripheral surface of the cam member 172 includes a first peripheral surface 173, a second peripheral surface 174, a third peripheral surface 175, and a fourth peripheral surface 176. The first peripheral surface 173 to the fourth peripheral surface 176 each protrude in a direction away from the substantially central portion of the cam member 172 and are curved in an arc shape when viewed from the right side.
 第一周面173は、カム部材172の周面のうち、出力軸171に最も近い位置にある。第三周面175は、カム部材172の周面のうち、出力軸171から最も遠い位置にある。第三周面175は、出力軸171を挟んで第一周面173とは反対側にある。第二周面174は、カム部材172の周面のうち、右側面視で出力軸171を中心として第一周面173から反時計回り方向に略90度分回転した位置にある。第四周面176は、カム部材172の周面のうち、右側面視で出力軸171を中心として第一周面173から時計回り方向に略90度分回転した位置にある。出力軸171から第二周面174までの距離と、出力軸171から第四周面176までの距離とは、互いに略等しい。 The first peripheral surface 173 is at a position closest to the output shaft 171 in the peripheral surface of the cam member 172. The third peripheral surface 175 is at a position farthest from the output shaft 171 in the peripheral surface of the cam member 172. The third peripheral surface 175 is on the opposite side of the first peripheral surface 173 across the output shaft 171. The second peripheral surface 174 is located at a position rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the first peripheral surface 173 about the output shaft 171 as viewed from the right side of the peripheral surface of the cam member 172. The fourth circumferential surface 176 is located at a position rotated about 90 degrees in the clockwise direction from the first circumferential surface 173 around the output shaft 171 as viewed from the right side of the circumferential surface of the cam member 172. The distance from the output shaft 171 to the second peripheral surface 174 and the distance from the output shaft 171 to the fourth peripheral surface 176 are substantially equal to each other.
 カム部材172が初期回転位置(図12、図13参照)にある場合、ワイヤー166は貫通孔161Cと回転軸164との間で一直線状に延びる。初期回転位置は、カム部材172の周面のうち第一周面173が最も上方となる、カム部材172の回転位置である。 When the cam member 172 is in the initial rotation position (see FIGS. 12 and 13), the wire 166 extends in a straight line between the through hole 161C and the rotation shaft 164. The initial rotation position is the rotation position of the cam member 172 where the first peripheral surface 173 is the uppermost of the peripheral surfaces of the cam member 172.
 図12に示すように、振動モータ180は、第二テーブル1120の下面における左右方向略中央、且つ固定軸160よりも後方に固定される。振動モータ180は、前方に延びる出力軸181(図30参照)を含む。偏心カム182は出力軸181に固定される。出力軸181は、偏心カム182の重心位置とは異なる位置を貫通する。偏心カム182のうち、出力軸181から径方向に最も離隔する部分を、先端部183(図30参照)という。偏心カム182の重心位置は、出力軸181と先端部183との間にある。 As shown in FIG. 12, the vibration motor 180 is fixed at a substantially horizontal center on the lower surface of the second table 1120 and behind the fixed shaft 160. The vibration motor 180 includes an output shaft 181 (see FIG. 30) extending forward. The eccentric cam 182 is fixed to the output shaft 181. The output shaft 181 passes through a position different from the position of the center of gravity of the eccentric cam 182. A portion of the eccentric cam 182 that is most distant from the output shaft 181 in the radial direction is referred to as a tip portion 183 (see FIG. 30). The position of the center of gravity of the eccentric cam 182 is between the output shaft 181 and the tip 183.
 振動モータ180が偏心カム182を回転させることで、先端部183は第一位置(図30参照)と第二位置(図示外)との間を往復移動する。第一位置にある先端部183は、出力軸181を挟んで第二テーブル1120とは反対側に配置される。第二位置にある先端部183は、出力軸181と第二テーブル1120との間に配置される。 When the vibration motor 180 rotates the eccentric cam 182, the tip 183 reciprocates between a first position (see FIG. 30) and a second position (not shown). The tip 183 at the first position is disposed on the opposite side of the second table 1120 with the output shaft 181 interposed therebetween. The tip portion 183 in the second position is disposed between the output shaft 181 and the second table 1120.
 図3、図13及び図14に示すように、接触部材106は、第二テーブル1120の上方にて用紙8Aの搬送方向と略平行に延びる、左側面視で略L字状のレール部材である。接触部材106は、用紙供給部5から用紙8Aが排出される位置よりも右斜め下方、且つ第二載置面1121の上方に固定される。接触部材106は、支持壁部106A及び二つの案内壁部106Bを含む。 As shown in FIGS. 3, 13, and 14, the contact member 106 is a rail member that is substantially L-shaped when viewed from the left side and extends substantially parallel to the conveyance direction of the paper 8 </ b> A above the second table 1120. . The contact member 106 is fixed to the lower right side of the position where the paper 8 </ b> A is discharged from the paper supply unit 5 and above the second placement surface 1121. The contact member 106 includes a support wall portion 106A and two guide wall portions 106B.
 支持壁部106Aは、平面視で左右方向に長い板状体である。つまり支持壁部106Aは、用紙8Aの搬送方向と略平行に延びる。支持壁部106Aの左右方向長さは、用紙8Aの左右方向長さの半分以上である。つまり接触部材106の搬送方向長さは、用紙8Aの搬送方向長さの半分以上である。支持壁部106Aの前端部は、用紙供給部5から排出される用紙8Aの後端部よりも前方にある。二つの案内壁部106Bは、支持壁部106Aの後端部から上方に向けて延びる、正面視で左右方向に長い板状体である。つまり二つの案内壁部106Bは、何れも搬送方向と略平行に延び、且つ略鉛直方向に延びる。二つの案内壁部106Bは、左右方向に並んで設けられる。 The support wall 106A is a plate-like body that is long in the left-right direction in plan view. That is, the support wall portion 106A extends substantially parallel to the conveyance direction of the paper 8A. The length in the left-right direction of the support wall 106A is at least half of the length in the left-right direction of the paper 8A. That is, the conveyance direction length of the contact member 106 is at least half of the conveyance direction length of the paper 8A. The front end portion of the support wall portion 106 </ b> A is in front of the rear end portion of the paper 8 </ b> A discharged from the paper supply unit 5. The two guide wall portions 106B are plate-like bodies that extend upward from the rear end portion of the support wall portion 106A and are long in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. That is, the two guide wall portions 106B both extend substantially parallel to the transport direction and extend in the substantially vertical direction. The two guide wall portions 106B are provided side by side in the left-right direction.
 図11~図13に示すように、前側紙揃え部105は、前揃え板150、支持部151、可動部152,153、搬送部154を含む。支持部151は、テーブル110の可動領域の下方で上下方向に延びる柱状体である。可動部152は公知のボールネジによって、支持部151の前側に連結される。支持部151は、図示外のモータの駆動に伴って、可動部152を上下方向に移動可能である。可動部153は、支持部151の後面に固定された、右側面視でL字状の板状体である。可動部153は、公知のボールネジによって、搬送部154に連結される。搬送部154は、テーブル110の可動領域の下方で前後方向に延びる駆動機構である。搬送部154は、図示外のモータの駆動に伴って、可動部153を前後方向に移動可能である。 As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the front paper aligning unit 105 includes a front aligning plate 150, a support unit 151, movable units 152 and 153, and a transport unit 154. The support portion 151 is a columnar body that extends in the vertical direction below the movable region of the table 110. The movable part 152 is connected to the front side of the support part 151 by a known ball screw. The support unit 151 can move the movable unit 152 in the vertical direction in accordance with driving of a motor (not shown). The movable portion 153 is an L-shaped plate-like body fixed to the rear surface of the support portion 151 as viewed from the right side. The movable part 153 is connected to the transport part 154 by a known ball screw. The transport unit 154 is a drive mechanism that extends in the front-rear direction below the movable region of the table 110. The transport unit 154 can move the movable unit 153 in the front-rear direction in accordance with driving of a motor (not shown).
 前揃え板150は、可動部152の上端部に設けられた、上下方向及び左右方向に延びる略矩形状の板状体である。前揃え板150は、可動部152の上下動に伴って、上昇位置(図12参照)と下降位置(図13参照)との間を移動可能である。前揃え板150は、可動部153の前後移動に伴って、前進位置(図12、図13参照)と後退位置(図示外)との間を移動可能である。 The front alignment plate 150 is a substantially rectangular plate-like body that is provided at the upper end of the movable portion 152 and extends in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The front aligning plate 150 is movable between an ascending position (see FIG. 12) and a descending position (see FIG. 13) as the movable portion 152 moves up and down. The front aligning plate 150 is movable between a forward position (see FIGS. 12 and 13) and a reverse position (not shown) as the movable portion 153 moves back and forth.
 図12に示すように、前揃え板150が上昇位置且つ前進位置にある場合、前揃え板150は第一対向位置にある。第一対向位置は、前揃え板150がテーブル110の可動領域内に配置され、且つ前揃え板150がテーブル110に対して前方から対向する位置である。前揃え板150が第一対向位置にあり、且つテーブル110が第一搬送位置にある場合、前揃え板150と二つの案内壁部106Bとの前後方向距離は、載置面110Aの前後方向長さよりも短い。 As shown in FIG. 12, when the front alignment plate 150 is in the raised position and the forward movement position, the front alignment plate 150 is in the first facing position. The first facing position is a position where the front aligning plate 150 is disposed in the movable region of the table 110 and the front aligning plate 150 faces the table 110 from the front. When the front alignment plate 150 is in the first facing position and the table 110 is in the first transport position, the front-rear direction distance between the front alignment plate 150 and the two guide wall portions 106B is the length in the front-rear direction of the placement surface 110A. Shorter than that.
 第一対向位置にある前揃え板150は、載置面110Aに向けて落下する用紙8Aの前端部15(図29参照)に前側から接触し、前端部15を第一規制位置に位置決め可能である。第一規制位置は、テーブル110に集積される用紙8Aの前端部15の予め定められた適正位置である。第一規制位置は、平面視で左右方向に延びる仮想直線上の位置である。つまり、第一対向位置にある前揃え板150の後面は、第一規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延びる。第一規制位置は、後述の糊塗布領域に含まれる。 The front alignment plate 150 in the first facing position can contact the front end portion 15 (see FIG. 29) of the paper 8A falling toward the placement surface 110A from the front side, and the front end portion 15 can be positioned at the first restriction position. is there. The first restricting position is a predetermined appropriate position of the front end portion 15 of the paper 8A accumulated on the table 110. The first restriction position is a position on an imaginary straight line extending in the left-right direction in plan view. That is, the rear surface of the front alignment plate 150 at the first facing position extends in the substantially vertical direction along the first restriction position. The first restricting position is included in a glue application region described later.
 図示しないが、前揃え板150が下降位置且つ後退位置にある場合、前揃え板150は第一離隔位置にある。第一離隔位置は、前揃え板150がテーブル110の可動領域の下側において、テーブル110の前端部よりも後側に配置される位置である。本実施形態では、第一離隔位置にある前揃え板150は、支持台111の内部に配置される。 Although not shown, when the front alignment plate 150 is in the lowered position and the retracted position, the front alignment plate 150 is in the first separation position. The first separation position is a position where the front aligning plate 150 is disposed on the lower side of the movable area of the table 110 and on the rear side of the front end portion of the table 110. In the present embodiment, the front alignment plate 150 at the first separation position is disposed inside the support base 111.
 図14及び図15に示すように、右側紙揃え部104は、駆動モータ141、カム部材141A、アーム部材142、右揃え板140を含む。駆動モータ141は、テーブル110の可動領域の右側下方に設けられる。駆動モータ141は、上下方向に延びる出力軸(図示外)を回転可能である。カム部材141Aは、駆動モータ141の出力軸に設けられる。ピン145は、カム部材141Aから上側に突出し、アーム部材142の右端部を回転可能に支持する。アーム部材142の左端部は、右揃え板140の右面に連結される。ピン146は、右揃え板140の右側に設けられ、且つ上下方向に延びる。ピン146は、アーム部材142の左端部を回転可能に支持する。 As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the right side paper alignment unit 104 includes a drive motor 141, a cam member 141 </ b> A, an arm member 142, and a right alignment plate 140. The drive motor 141 is provided on the lower right side of the movable area of the table 110. The drive motor 141 can rotate an output shaft (not shown) extending in the vertical direction. The cam member 141 </ b> A is provided on the output shaft of the drive motor 141. The pin 145 protrudes upward from the cam member 141A and rotatably supports the right end portion of the arm member 142. The left end portion of the arm member 142 is connected to the right surface of the right alignment plate 140. The pin 146 is provided on the right side of the right alignment plate 140 and extends in the vertical direction. The pin 146 rotatably supports the left end portion of the arm member 142.
 右揃え板140は、第一搬送位置にあるテーブル110の右側に設けられた、上下方向及び前後方向に延びる矩形状の板状体である。右揃え板140は、テーブル110が第一搬送位置にある場合に、載置面110A上にある用紙束8の右端面に対して右側から対向する。 The right alignment plate 140 is a rectangular plate-like body that is provided on the right side of the table 110 at the first transport position and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. The right alignment plate 140 faces the right end surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A from the right side when the table 110 is in the first transport position.
 図14に示すように、左側紙揃え部103は、右側紙揃え部104と略左右対称である。左側紙揃え部103は、右側紙揃え部104と同様の構造であり、駆動モータ131、カム部材131A、アーム部材132、左揃え板130を含む。左揃え板130は、第一搬送位置にあるテーブル110の左側に設けられた、上下方向及び前後方向に延びる矩形状の板状体である。左揃え板130は、テーブル110が第一搬送位置にある場合に、載置面110A上にある用紙束8の左端面に対して左側から対向する。 As shown in FIG. 14, the left paper alignment unit 103 is substantially bilaterally symmetric with the right paper alignment unit 104. The left paper alignment unit 103 has the same structure as the right paper alignment unit 104 and includes a drive motor 131, a cam member 131A, an arm member 132, and a left alignment plate 130. The left alignment plate 130 is a rectangular plate-like body that is provided on the left side of the table 110 at the first transport position and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. The left aligning plate 130 faces the left end surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A from the left side when the table 110 is in the first transport position.
 左揃え板130は駆動モータ131の駆動に伴って、第二対向位置と第二離隔位置との間を左右方向に移動可能である。第二対向位置は、第一搬送位置にあるテーブル110に対して、左揃え板130が左側から近接する位置である。第二離隔位置は、第一搬送位置にあるテーブル110に対して、左揃え板130が第二対向位置よりも左側に離隔する位置である。図14では、第二離隔位置にある左揃え板130を実線で図示し、第二対向位置にある左揃え板130を仮想線で図示する。 The left alignment plate 130 is movable in the left-right direction between the second facing position and the second separation position as the drive motor 131 is driven. The second facing position is a position where the left alignment plate 130 approaches from the left side with respect to the table 110 at the first transport position. The second separation position is a position where the left alignment plate 130 is separated to the left of the second opposing position with respect to the table 110 at the first transport position. In FIG. 14, the left alignment plate 130 at the second separation position is illustrated by a solid line, and the left alignment plate 130 at the second facing position is illustrated by a virtual line.
 第二対向位置にある左揃え板130は、テーブル110が第一搬送位置にあり、且つ用紙供給部5によって用紙8Aが排出された場合に、載置面110Aに向けて落下する用紙8Aの左端部16(図29参照)に左側から接触し、左端部16を第二規制位置に位置決め可能である。第二規制位置は、テーブル110に集積される用紙8Aの左端部16(搬送方向の上流側端部)の予め定められた適正位置である。第二規制位置は、平面視でテーブル110の左側で前後方向に延びる仮想直線上の位置である。つまり、第二対向位置にある左揃え板130の右面は、第二規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延びる。 The left alignment plate 130 in the second facing position is the left end of the paper 8A that falls toward the placement surface 110A when the table 110 is in the first transport position and the paper 8A is discharged by the paper supply unit 5. The left end portion 16 can be positioned at the second restriction position by contacting the portion 16 (see FIG. 29) from the left side. The second restricting position is a predetermined appropriate position of the left end portion 16 (upstream end portion in the transport direction) of the paper 8A stacked on the table 110. The second restriction position is a position on a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction on the left side of the table 110 in plan view. That is, the right surface of the left alignment plate 130 at the second facing position extends in a substantially vertical direction along the second restriction position.
 右揃え板140は駆動モータ141の駆動に伴って、第三対向位置と第三離隔位置との間を左右方向に移動可能である。第三対向位置は、第一搬送位置にあるテーブル110に対して、右揃え板140が右側から近接する位置である。第三離隔位置は、第一搬送位置にあるテーブル110に対して、右揃え板140が第三対向位置よりも右側に離隔する位置である。図14では、第三離隔位置にある右揃え板140を実線で図示し、第三対向位置にある右揃え板140を仮想線で図示する。 The right alignment plate 140 is movable in the left-right direction between the third facing position and the third separation position as the drive motor 141 is driven. The third facing position is a position where the right alignment plate 140 is close to the table 110 at the first transport position from the right side. The third separation position is a position where the right alignment plate 140 is separated to the right side of the third facing position with respect to the table 110 at the first transport position. In FIG. 14, the right alignment plate 140 at the third separation position is illustrated by a solid line, and the right alignment plate 140 at the third facing position is illustrated by a virtual line.
 第三対向位置にある右揃え板140は、テーブル110が第一搬送位置にあり、且つ用紙供給部5によって用紙8Aが排出された場合に、載置面110Aに向けて落下する用紙8Aの右端部17(図29参照)に右側から接触し、右端部17を第三規制位置に位置決め可能である。第三規制位置は、テーブル110に集積される用紙8Aの右端部17(搬送方向の下流側端部)の予め定められた適正位置である。第三規制位置は、平面視でテーブル110の右側で前後方向に延びる仮想直線上の位置である。つまり、第三対向位置にある右揃え板140の左面は、第三規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延びる。 The right alignment plate 140 at the third facing position is the right edge of the paper 8A that falls toward the placement surface 110A when the table 110 is at the first transport position and the paper 8A is discharged by the paper supply unit 5. The portion 17 (see FIG. 29) can be contacted from the right side, and the right end portion 17 can be positioned at the third restriction position. The third restriction position is a predetermined appropriate position of the right end portion 17 (downstream end portion in the transport direction) of the paper 8 </ b> A stacked on the table 110. The third restriction position is a position on a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction on the right side of the table 110 in plan view. That is, the left surface of the right alignment plate 140 at the third facing position extends in a substantially vertical direction along the third restriction position.
<2-3.束操作機構200の構造>
 図3及び図11を参照して、束操作機構200の構造を説明する。図11は、図4に示す製本装置1のうち、紙揃え機構100及び束操作機構200を拡大して図示する。束操作機構200は、可動部201及び搬送部202を含む。可動部201は、本体枠2の内側且つ紙揃え機構100よりも上側で、前後方向に移動可能である。搬送部202は、可動部201を前後方向に移動させる。
<2-3. Structure of bundle operation mechanism 200>
The structure of the bundle operation mechanism 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is an enlarged view of the paper aligning mechanism 100 and the bundle operating mechanism 200 in the bookbinding apparatus 1 shown in FIG. The bundle operation mechanism 200 includes a movable unit 201 and a transport unit 202. The movable portion 201 is movable in the front-rear direction inside the main body frame 2 and above the paper alignment mechanism 100. The conveyance unit 202 moves the movable unit 201 in the front-rear direction.
 可動部201は、支持板211、可動体212、連結板213、図示外のネジ軸、一対のガイドレール215、ベルト216、プーリ217,218、昇降モータ219、束操作部230を含む。可動体212は、左右方向に延びる柱状部材であり、公知のボールネジによって搬送部202に連結される。搬送部202は、テーブル110の可動領域の上方で前後方向に延びる駆動機構である。搬送部202は、搬送モータ221の駆動に伴って、可動体212を前後方向に移動可能である。 The movable unit 201 includes a support plate 211, a movable body 212, a connecting plate 213, a screw shaft (not shown), a pair of guide rails 215, a belt 216, pulleys 217 and 218, a lifting motor 219, and a bundle operation unit 230. The movable body 212 is a columnar member extending in the left-right direction, and is connected to the transport unit 202 by a known ball screw. The transport unit 202 is a drive mechanism that extends in the front-rear direction above the movable region of the table 110. The transport unit 202 can move the movable body 212 in the front-rear direction as the transport motor 221 is driven.
 支持板211は、可動体212の下側に支持された板状体である。連結板213は、支持板211から下方向に延びる板状体である。昇降モータ219は、連結板213の後側に設けられる。プーリ218は、昇降モータ219から上方向に延びる軸に設けられる。連結板213の前面に設けられたネジ軸(図示外)は、上下方向に延びる。プーリ217は、連結板213のネジ軸の上端部に設けられる。ベルト216は、プーリ217,218に架け渡される。 The support plate 211 is a plate-like body supported on the lower side of the movable body 212. The connection plate 213 is a plate-like body that extends downward from the support plate 211. The elevating motor 219 is provided on the rear side of the connecting plate 213. The pulley 218 is provided on a shaft extending upward from the lifting motor 219. A screw shaft (not shown) provided on the front surface of the connecting plate 213 extends in the vertical direction. The pulley 217 is provided at the upper end of the screw shaft of the connecting plate 213. The belt 216 is stretched around pulleys 217 and 218.
 束操作部230は、連結板213の前側に設けられる。束操作部230は、連結板231、押え板232を含む。連結板231は、上下方向及び左右方向に延びる矩形状の板状体であり、連結板213のネジ軸が挿通されたナット(図示外)を有する。押え板232は、連結板231の下端部から前側下方に延びる板状体である。押え板232の先端部は、載置面110A上にある用紙束8の上面に対して左右方向に亘って接触可能である。 The bundle operation unit 230 is provided on the front side of the connecting plate 213. The bundle operation unit 230 includes a connecting plate 231 and a presser plate 232. The connecting plate 231 is a rectangular plate-like body that extends in the up-down direction and the left-right direction, and has a nut (not shown) through which the screw shaft of the connecting plate 213 is inserted. The presser plate 232 is a plate-like body that extends downward from the lower end of the connecting plate 231 to the front side. The front end portion of the pressing plate 232 can contact the upper surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A in the left-right direction.
 搬送モータ221が駆動すると、可動体212の移動に伴って、束操作部230が紙揃え機構100の上側で前後方向に移動する。昇降モータ219が駆動すると、ベルト216及びプーリ217,218を介して、連結板213のネジ軸が回転する。これにより束操作部230が、一対のガイドレール215に沿って上下方向に移動する。 When the transport motor 221 is driven, the bundle operation unit 230 moves in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the paper alignment mechanism 100 as the movable body 212 moves. When the lifting motor 219 is driven, the screw shaft of the connecting plate 213 rotates via the belt 216 and the pulleys 217 and 218. As a result, the bundle operation unit 230 moves in the vertical direction along the pair of guide rails 215.
<2-4.糊塗布機構300の構造>
 図3及び図16~図19を参照して、糊塗布機構300の構造を説明する。図17は、可動部301の左右方向略中心を通る断面を左側から見た縦断面図である。図18は、糊塗布部340の上下方向略中心を通る断面を上側から見た横断面図であり、且つ本体部349、糊7、用紙束8を模式的に図示する。図19は、背面視で、糊塗布機構300と第一搬送位置にあるテーブル110との位置関係を示す。
<2-4. Structure of glue application mechanism 300>
The structure of the glue application mechanism 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 16 to 19. FIG. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cross section passing through the approximate center in the left-right direction of the movable portion 301 as viewed from the left side. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the cross section passing through the approximate vertical center of the glue application unit 340 as viewed from above, and schematically shows the main body 349, the glue 7, and the sheet bundle 8. FIG. 19 shows the positional relationship between the glue application mechanism 300 and the table 110 at the first transport position in the rear view.
 図3に示すように、糊塗布機構300は、第一搬送位置のテーブル110よりも前側に配置される。糊塗布機構300は、可動部301及び搬送部302を含む。可動部301は、本体枠2の内側且つ第一搬送位置のテーブル110の前側で、左右方向に移動可能である。搬送部302は、可動部301を左右方向に移動させる。搬送部302は、搬送モータ321及びネジ軸322を含む。ネジ軸322は、ネジ軸122の上側において左右方向に延びる。搬送モータ321はネジ軸322を軸心まわりに回転可能である。 As shown in FIG. 3, the glue application mechanism 300 is arranged in front of the table 110 at the first transport position. The glue application mechanism 300 includes a movable part 301 and a transport part 302. The movable portion 301 is movable in the left-right direction inside the main body frame 2 and on the front side of the table 110 at the first transport position. The conveyance unit 302 moves the movable unit 301 in the left-right direction. The conveyance unit 302 includes a conveyance motor 321 and a screw shaft 322. The screw shaft 322 extends in the left-right direction on the upper side of the screw shaft 122. The conveyance motor 321 can rotate the screw shaft 322 around the axis.
 図16に示すように、可動部301は、支持部311、図示外のナット、糊受設置部313、断熱板314、チェーン316、プーリ317,318、駆動モータ319、糊塗布部340を含む。支持部311は、上下方向及び左右方向に延びる矩形状の板状体である。可動部301のナットは、支持部311の前面下端部に設けられ、且つネジ軸322が挿通される。駆動モータ319は、支持部311の前面且つ可動部301のナットの上側に設けられる。プーリ318は、駆動モータ319から上方向に延びる軸319Aに設けられる。 As shown in FIG. 16, the movable portion 301 includes a support portion 311, a nut (not shown), an adhesive receiving installation portion 313, a heat insulating plate 314, a chain 316, pulleys 317 and 318, a drive motor 319, and an adhesive application portion 340. The support portion 311 is a rectangular plate-like body that extends in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The nut of the movable portion 301 is provided at the lower front end portion of the support portion 311 and the screw shaft 322 is inserted therethrough. The drive motor 319 is provided on the front surface of the support portion 311 and above the nut of the movable portion 301. The pulley 318 is provided on a shaft 319 </ b> A that extends upward from the drive motor 319.
 断熱板314は、支持部311の後面に設けられる。糊塗布部340は、断熱板314の後面に設けられる。糊塗布部340は、少なくとも用紙束8の左右方向の長さに亘って、左右方向に移動しながら後述の糊塗布領域の範囲内で糊7を塗布する可動体である。本実施形態の糊7は、熱可塑性の接着剤である。糊塗布部340は、本体部349及び糊塗布ローラ350を含む。糊塗布ローラ350は、上下方向に延びる略円柱状であり、液状の糊7を対象物に塗布可能である。糊塗布ローラ350は、糊7が付着可能な周面351Aを有し、且つ上下方向に延びる軸353を中心に回転可能な円柱体である。 The heat insulating plate 314 is provided on the rear surface of the support portion 311. The glue application unit 340 is provided on the rear surface of the heat insulating plate 314. The glue application unit 340 is a movable body that applies the glue 7 within the range of the glue application area described later while moving in the left-right direction over at least the length of the sheet bundle 8 in the left-right direction. The glue 7 of this embodiment is a thermoplastic adhesive. The glue application unit 340 includes a main body part 349 and a glue application roller 350. The glue application roller 350 has a substantially cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction, and can apply the liquid glue 7 to an object. The glue application roller 350 is a cylindrical body that has a peripheral surface 351A to which the glue 7 can be attached and is rotatable around a shaft 353 extending in the vertical direction.
 図16及び図17に示すように、本体部349は、上下方向が長手方向の略直方体状の箱状体であり、且つ、内部に糊塗布ローラ350及び糊7を収容可能である。本体部349は、糊供給口341、糊貯留部342、ローラ設置部343、軸受部344,345、糊塗布口346、及びヒータ347を含む。糊供給口341は、本体部349の上面に設けられた、糊片(図示外)を供給するための開口である。糊片は、凝固した糊であり、本実施形態では略直方体状である。 16 and 17, the main body 349 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-like body whose vertical direction is the longitudinal direction, and can accommodate the paste application roller 350 and the paste 7 therein. The main body 349 includes an adhesive supply port 341, an adhesive storage unit 342, a roller installation unit 343, bearing units 344 and 345, an adhesive application port 346, and a heater 347. The glue supply port 341 is an opening provided on the upper surface of the main body 349 for supplying glue pieces (not shown). The paste piece is a solidified paste and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape in the present embodiment.
 糊貯留部342は、本体部349の内部に設けられた、糊供給口341から下側に延びる略有底箱状の空間である。糊貯留部342は、糊供給口341を介して供給される糊片を貯留可能である。糊貯留部342の前側は、本体部349の前壁部349Aによって囲まれる。前壁部349Aは、糊供給口341の前端部から後側下方に傾斜する傾斜面である。 The glue storage part 342 is a substantially bottomed box-like space provided inside the main body part 349 and extending downward from the glue supply port 341. The glue storage unit 342 can store glue pieces supplied via the glue supply port 341. The front side of the glue storage part 342 is surrounded by the front wall part 349 </ b> A of the main body part 349. The front wall portion 349 </ b> A is an inclined surface that inclines downward from the front end portion of the glue supply port 341.
 ローラ設置部343は、本体部349の内部に設けられた空間であり、糊貯留部342の後側、且つ、糊塗布口346の前側に形成される。ローラ設置部343は、糊貯留部342及び糊塗布口346と前後方向に連通する。軸受部344は、ローラ設置部343の下端部中央から下側に延びる凹部である。軸受部345は、本体部349の上面且つ糊供給口341の後側に設けられた、ローラ設置部343と上下方向に連通する開口である。 The roller installation part 343 is a space provided inside the main body part 349 and is formed on the rear side of the glue storage part 342 and on the front side of the glue application port 346. The roller installation part 343 communicates with the glue storage part 342 and the glue application port 346 in the front-rear direction. The bearing portion 344 is a concave portion extending downward from the center of the lower end portion of the roller installation portion 343. The bearing portion 345 is an opening that is provided on the upper surface of the main body portion 349 and on the rear side of the glue supply port 341 and communicates with the roller installation portion 343 in the vertical direction.
 糊塗布ローラ350は、軸353の両端部が軸受部344,345に収容された状態で、ローラ設置部343に配置される。つまり糊塗布ローラ350は、軸受部344,345によって、軸353を中心に回転可能に保持される。糊塗布ローラ350の回転中心を、糊塗布ローラ350の軸線という。 The glue application roller 350 is disposed on the roller installation portion 343 in a state where both ends of the shaft 353 are accommodated in the bearing portions 344 and 345. That is, the glue application roller 350 is held by the bearing portions 344 and 345 so as to be rotatable about the shaft 353. The rotation center of the glue application roller 350 is referred to as the axis of the glue application roller 350.
 糊塗布口346は、本体部349の後面から前方に切り欠かれた開口である。糊塗布口346は、ローラ設置部343にある糊塗布ローラ350の周面351Aの一部を、本体部349の内部から後方向に露出させる。周面351Aのうちで糊塗布口346から露出する部分を、糊塗布ローラ350の糊塗布面という。糊塗布面は、先述の第一規制位置と略同一の前後方向位置にある。糊塗布面は、載置面110A上にある用紙束8よりも上下方向に延びる。 The glue application port 346 is an opening cut out from the rear surface of the main body 349 to the front. The glue application port 346 exposes a part of the peripheral surface 351A of the glue application roller 350 in the roller installation part 343 from the inside of the main body part 349 in the backward direction. A portion of the peripheral surface 351 </ b> A that is exposed from the glue application port 346 is referred to as a glue application surface of the glue application roller 350. The glue application surface is at a position in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the first restriction position described above. The glue application surface extends in the vertical direction from the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A.
 図17及び図18に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350は、ローラ設置部343を上下方向及び左右方向に亘って略閉塞する。周面351Aの半分以上は、ローラ設置部343に収容される。従って、糊塗布面の面積は、周面351Aの面積の半分未満となる。周面351Aには、上下方向に沿って直線状に延びる複数の山部及び谷部が、周方向に沿って連続して交互に形成される。複数の谷部は、周面351Aの一部が軸線に向けて凹む複数の溝部351Cである。複数の溝部351Cは、それぞれ糊塗布ローラ350の軸線と平行に上下方向に延びる。 As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the glue application roller 350 substantially closes the roller installation portion 343 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. More than half of the peripheral surface 351 </ b> A is accommodated in the roller installation portion 343. Therefore, the area of the glue application surface is less than half the area of the peripheral surface 351A. A plurality of crests and troughs extending linearly along the up-down direction are alternately and continuously formed along the circumferential direction on the circumferential surface 351A. The plurality of valley portions are a plurality of groove portions 351C in which a part of the peripheral surface 351A is recessed toward the axis. The plurality of groove portions 351C extend in the vertical direction in parallel with the axis of the glue application roller 350, respectively.
 複数の溝部351Cは、糊塗布ローラ350の軸線に沿って延びればよく、例えば糊塗布ローラ350の軸線に対して傾斜してもよい。この場合、複数の溝部351Cは、周面351Aにおいて螺旋状に形成される。周面351Aは、複数の溝部351Cに代えて、各種形状(例えば、略円形状、略半円形状、多角形状等)の凹部を複数備えてもよいし、周方向に連続する波状に湾曲してもよいし、滑らかな円周面でもよい。 The plurality of groove portions 351 </ b> C may extend along the axis of the glue application roller 350, and may be inclined with respect to the axis of the glue application roller 350, for example. In this case, the plurality of groove portions 351C are formed in a spiral shape on the peripheral surface 351A. The peripheral surface 351A may be provided with a plurality of concave portions having various shapes (for example, a substantially circular shape, a substantially semicircular shape, a polygonal shape, etc.) instead of the plurality of groove portions 351C, and is curved in a wave shape continuous in the circumferential direction. It may be a smooth circumferential surface.
 ヒータ347は、前壁部349Aの前面に設けられた発熱体である。糊貯留部342が貯留する複数の糊片は、ヒータ347の発熱によって溶解し、液状の糊7へ変化する。糊貯留部342に貯留された糊7は、周面351Aに付着可能である。糊7は複数の溝部351Cに進入するため、周面351Aはより多くの糊7を保持可能である。なお、ヒータ347は、前壁部349Aの後面に設けられていてもよいし、本体部349の右壁部、左壁部、上壁部、又は下壁部に設けられてもよい。 The heater 347 is a heating element provided on the front surface of the front wall portion 349A. The plurality of paste pieces stored in the paste storage unit 342 are dissolved by the heat generated by the heater 347 and changed into liquid paste 7. The glue 7 stored in the glue storage part 342 can adhere to the peripheral surface 351A. Since the paste 7 enters the plurality of groove portions 351C, the peripheral surface 351A can hold more paste 7. The heater 347 may be provided on the rear surface of the front wall portion 349A, or may be provided on the right wall portion, the left wall portion, the upper wall portion, or the lower wall portion of the main body portion 349.
 図16に示すように、糊塗布口346の左下端部から下方に凹む部位は、糊案内部346Aである。糊案内部346Aは、周面351Aから垂れ落ちる糊7を、後述の糊受け部材360に向けて案内する。プーリ317は、軸353の上端部に設けられる。チェーン316は、支持部311に形成された貫通穴311Aを介して、プーリ317,318に架け渡される。 As shown in FIG. 16, the portion recessed downward from the lower left end of the glue application port 346 is a glue guide 346A. The glue guide portion 346A guides the glue 7 that hangs down from the peripheral surface 351A toward the glue receiving member 360 described later. The pulley 317 is provided at the upper end of the shaft 353. The chain 316 is bridged over pulleys 317 and 318 through a through hole 311A formed in the support portion 311.
 糊受設置部313は、連結板361によって本体部349の下側に連結固定される。糊受設置部313は、液体を貯留可能な糊受け部材360を載置可能である。例えば糊受け部材360は、液体を貯留可能な上方に開口するカップである。連結板361は断熱性を有するので、ヒータ347の発熱は糊受設置部313に伝導しにくい。 The glue receiving installation portion 313 is connected and fixed to the lower side of the main body portion 349 by the connecting plate 361. The glue receiving installation portion 313 can place a glue receiving member 360 capable of storing liquid. For example, the glue receiving member 360 is a cup that opens upward so that liquid can be stored. Since the connecting plate 361 has a heat insulating property, the heat generated by the heater 347 is difficult to be transmitted to the glue receiving portion 313.
 蓋部材348は、本体部349の上面に設けられた板状体である。蓋部材348は、本体部349の上面の右後角部から上方に突出するピン348Aを中心に回動可能である。蓋部材348は、糊供給口341を開放する位置である開放位置と、糊供給口341を閉塞する位置である閉塞位置との間を移動可能である。 The lid member 348 is a plate-like body provided on the upper surface of the main body 349. The lid member 348 is rotatable around a pin 348A that protrudes upward from the right rear corner of the upper surface of the main body 349. The lid member 348 can move between an open position where the glue supply port 341 is opened and a closed position where the glue supply port 341 is closed.
 例えば、ユーザは糊片を糊供給口341に供給する場合、蓋部材348を開放位置に移動させる。ユーザは糊片を糊貯留部342に供給した後、蓋部材348を閉塞位置に移動させる。閉塞位置にある蓋部材348は、糊貯留部342に貯留された糊7が臭いを生じる場合でも、糊7の臭いが本体部349の外部に漏れるのを抑制する。なお、糊供給口341と糊貯留部342との連通を遮断可能な弁部材が、糊供給路341Aに設けられてもよい。この場合、蓋部材348が設けられなくてもよい。 For example, when the user supplies glue pieces to the glue supply port 341, the user moves the lid member 348 to the open position. The user moves the lid member 348 to the closed position after supplying the paste pieces to the paste storage unit 342. The lid member 348 in the closed position suppresses the smell of the glue 7 from leaking to the outside of the main body 349 even when the glue 7 stored in the glue storage part 342 generates a smell. In addition, a valve member capable of blocking communication between the paste supply port 341 and the paste storage unit 342 may be provided in the paste supply path 341A. In this case, the lid member 348 may not be provided.
 図19に示すように、本実施形態の可動部301は、糊塗布ローラ350の軸線が製本装置1の上下方向から傾斜する姿勢で配置される。糊塗布ローラ350の軸線は、左右方向及び上下方向と交差し、且つ前後方向と直交する。具体的には、可動部301の上下方向は、製本装置1の上下方向に対して若干右側に傾斜する。可動部301の前後方向は、製本装置1の前後方向と略一致する。可動部301は、傾斜した姿勢を維持した状態で、搬送部302によって左右方向に移動可能である。 As shown in FIG. 19, the movable portion 301 of this embodiment is arranged in such a posture that the axis of the glue application roller 350 is inclined from the vertical direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1. The axis of the glue application roller 350 intersects the left-right direction and the up-down direction, and is orthogonal to the front-rear direction. Specifically, the vertical direction of the movable portion 301 is slightly inclined to the right with respect to the vertical direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1. The front-rear direction of the movable unit 301 substantially coincides with the front-rear direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1. The movable unit 301 can be moved in the left-right direction by the transport unit 302 while maintaining an inclined posture.
 図3及び図19に示すように、搬送モータ321がネジ軸322を回転すると、支持部311は左右方向に移動する。支持部311の後側で支持された糊塗布部340は、第一搬送位置にあるテーブル110よりも前側で左右方向に移動する。搬送モータ321は、糊塗布部340の移動速さを調整可能である。 3 and 19, when the transport motor 321 rotates the screw shaft 322, the support portion 311 moves in the left-right direction. The glue application unit 340 supported on the rear side of the support unit 311 moves in the left-right direction on the front side of the table 110 at the first transport position. The conveyance motor 321 can adjust the moving speed of the glue application unit 340.
 糊塗布部340の可動範囲の右端部及び左端部は、それぞれ第一退避位置及び第二退避位置である。糊塗布部340が第一退避位置にある場合、糊塗布部340はテーブル110の可動範囲から右方向に離隔する。糊塗布部340が第二退避位置にある場合、糊塗布部340はテーブル110の可動範囲から左方向に離隔する。つまり糊塗布部340は、テーブル110の可動範囲を左右方向に亘って移動可能である。糊塗布部340の移動に伴って糊塗布ローラ350の糊塗布面が移動する軌跡を、糊塗布部340の糊塗布領域という。糊塗布領域は、テーブル110の可動範囲を跨って左右方向に延びる。 The right end portion and the left end portion of the movable range of the glue application unit 340 are a first retracted position and a second retracted position, respectively. When the glue application unit 340 is in the first retracted position, the glue application unit 340 is separated from the movable range of the table 110 in the right direction. When the glue application part 340 is in the second retracted position, the glue application part 340 is separated from the movable range of the table 110 in the left direction. That is, the glue application unit 340 can move in the left-right direction within the movable range of the table 110. A locus along which the glue application surface of the glue application roller 350 moves in accordance with the movement of the glue application unit 340 is referred to as a glue application region of the glue application unit 340. The glue application area extends in the left-right direction across the movable range of the table 110.
 駆動モータ319が軸319Aを回転すると、チェーン316及びプーリ317,318を介して、糊塗布ローラ350が軸353を中心に回転する。このとき、周面351Aに供給された糊7が糊塗布口346に移動することで、糊塗布面に接触又は近接する対象物に糊7が塗布される。対象物に塗布されずに周面351Aで垂れ落ちた糊7は、糊案内部346Aを介して下方に排出され、糊受け部材360に落下及び貯留される。 When the drive motor 319 rotates the shaft 319A, the glue application roller 350 rotates around the shaft 353 via the chain 316 and the pulleys 317 and 318. At this time, the glue 7 supplied to the peripheral surface 351 </ b> A moves to the glue application port 346, whereby the glue 7 is applied to an object in contact with or close to the glue application surface. The glue 7 that is not applied to the object and hangs down on the peripheral surface 351A is discharged downward through the glue guide portion 346A, and is dropped and stored in the glue receiving member 360.
 駆動モータ319は、糊塗布ローラ350の回転速さを調整可能であり、且つ糊塗布ローラ350の回転を正転及び逆転に調整可能である。正転は、平面視で軸353を中心とした、糊塗布ローラ350の時計回り方向の回転である。逆転は、正転とは反対方向への糊塗布ローラ350の回転である。 The drive motor 319 can adjust the rotation speed of the glue application roller 350, and can adjust the rotation of the glue application roller 350 to normal rotation and reverse rotation. Normal rotation is the clockwise rotation of the glue application roller 350 about the shaft 353 in plan view. The reverse rotation is the rotation of the glue application roller 350 in the direction opposite to the normal rotation.
<2-5.表紙保持機構400の構造>
 図4、図20~図23、図31、図41及び図44を参照して、表紙保持機構400を説明する。図20は、左側面視で、第二プリンタ4、表紙供給部6、及び表紙保持機構400の位置関係を示す(後述の図37も同様)。図21は、後述の付勢部461及び一対のマークセンサ499を省略する。図22は、昇降モータ490、昇降モータ450、付勢部461等を省略する。図23は、図22の仮想線で囲まれた範囲を拡大する。図41及び図44は、右側のマークセンサ499を省略する。
<2-5. Structure of cover holding mechanism 400>
The cover holding mechanism 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4, 20 to 23, 31, 41 and 44. FIG. 20 shows the positional relationship among the second printer 4, the cover sheet supply unit 6, and the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 in the left side view (the same applies to FIG. 37 described later). In FIG. 21, an urging portion 461 and a pair of mark sensors 499, which will be described later, are omitted. In FIG. 22, the lifting motor 490, the lifting motor 450, the urging unit 461, and the like are omitted. FIG. 23 enlarges the range surrounded by the phantom line in FIG. 41 and 44, the right mark sensor 499 is omitted.
 図4及び図31に示すように、表紙保持機構400は、テーブル110及び糊塗布機構300よりも前側に配置される。表紙保持機構400は、可動部401及び搬送部402を含む。可動部401は、本体枠2の内側且つ糊塗布部340よりも前側で、上下方向に移動可能である。搬送部402は、可動部401を上下方向に移動させる。 4 and 31, the cover holding mechanism 400 is disposed on the front side of the table 110 and the glue application mechanism 300. The cover holding mechanism 400 includes a movable part 401 and a conveying part 402. The movable portion 401 is movable in the vertical direction inside the main body frame 2 and in front of the glue applying portion 340. The transport unit 402 moves the movable unit 401 in the vertical direction.
 図20、図21及び図31に示すように、可動部401は、糊塗布機構300の前側、且つ、平面視で表紙供給口22(図1参照)の範囲内に配置される。可動部401は、支持板411、支持枠413,414、後レール415,416、前レール417,418を含む。支持板411は、正面視で略正方形状の板状体であり、公知のボールネジによって搬送部402に連結される。搬送部402は、可動部401の前側で上下方向に延びる駆動機構である。搬送部402は、搬送モータ422の駆動に伴って、可動部401を一対のガイドレール423に沿って上下方向に移動可能である。 As shown in FIGS. 20, 21, and 31, the movable portion 401 is disposed on the front side of the glue application mechanism 300 and within the range of the cover sheet supply port 22 (see FIG. 1) in a plan view. The movable portion 401 includes a support plate 411, support frames 413 and 414, rear rails 415 and 416, and front rails 417 and 418. The support plate 411 is a substantially square plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is connected to the transport unit 402 by a known ball screw. The transport unit 402 is a drive mechanism that extends in the vertical direction on the front side of the movable unit 401. The transport unit 402 can move the movable unit 401 in the vertical direction along the pair of guide rails 423 as the transport motor 422 is driven.
 可動部401がその可動範囲の下端部にある場合、可動部401の全体が本体枠2の内部に収容される(図4及び図20参照)。可動部401は、可動部401が表紙供給口22を介して本体枠2の上側に突出する位置まで、上方向に移動可能である(図37参照)。可動部401の可動範囲は、貼付基準位置を含む。貼付基準位置は、正面視で後述の突当て板460が載置面110A上にある用紙束8の全体を覆う、可動部401の上下方向位置である。 When the movable part 401 is at the lower end of the movable range, the entire movable part 401 is accommodated inside the main body frame 2 (see FIGS. 4 and 20). The movable part 401 is movable upward to a position where the movable part 401 protrudes above the main body frame 2 through the cover sheet supply port 22 (see FIG. 37). The movable range of the movable part 401 includes the reference position for pasting. The sticking reference position is a vertical direction position of the movable portion 401 where a butting plate 460 described later covers the entire sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A in front view.
 支持枠413,414は、それぞれ、支持板411の後面における左端部及び右端部に設けられる。支持枠413,414は、左右方向に並んで配置された、上下方向に延びる柱状体である。後レール415,416は、それぞれ支持枠413,414の後面に設けられ、且つ、後述の接触位置を通って上下方向に並行して延びる。後レール415,416の上下方向の長さは、何れも表紙9の上下方向の長さ以上である。前レール417,418は、支持板411の後面において、支持枠413,414の間に設けられる。前レール417,418は、それぞれ、支持枠413の右側及び支持枠414の左側に配置され、且つ上下方向に並行して延びる。 The support frames 413 and 414 are provided at the left end and the right end on the rear surface of the support plate 411, respectively. The support frames 413 and 414 are columnar bodies that are arranged side by side in the left-right direction and extend in the up-down direction. The rear rails 415 and 416 are provided on the rear surfaces of the support frames 413 and 414, respectively, and extend in parallel in the vertical direction through contact positions described later. The lengths of the rear rails 415 and 416 in the vertical direction are each equal to or longer than the length of the cover sheet 9 in the vertical direction. The front rails 417 and 418 are provided between the support frames 413 and 414 on the rear surface of the support plate 411. The front rails 417 and 418 are disposed on the right side of the support frame 413 and the left side of the support frame 414, respectively, and extend in parallel in the vertical direction.
 図21に示すように、可動部401は、表紙保持機構400に供給される表紙9を前後方向から挟持可能な第一クランプ403を含む。第一クランプ403は、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440を含む。上クランプ430及び下クランプ440は、上下方向に並んで配置され、各々異なる上下方向位置で表紙9を選択的に挟持及び解放する。 As shown in FIG. 21, the movable portion 401 includes a first clamp 403 that can clamp the cover 9 supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400 from the front-rear direction. The first clamp 403 includes an upper clamp 430 and a lower clamp 440. The upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and selectively hold and release the cover sheet 9 at different vertical positions.
 上クランプ430は、後レール415,416に沿って移動可能であり、後板431、前板432、一対のソレノイド433,435を含む。後板431及び前板432は、互いに前後方向に対向配置された、上下方向及び左右方向に延びる矩形状の板状体である。前後方向に対向する後板431と前板432との隙間が、操作領域430Aである。一対のソレノイド433,435は、それぞれ開閉リンク434,436を介して、後板431及び前板432を互いに近接又は離隔する方向に移動させる。 The upper clamp 430 is movable along the rear rails 415 and 416, and includes a rear plate 431, a front plate 432, and a pair of solenoids 433 and 435. The rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 are rectangular plate-like bodies that are opposed to each other in the front-rear direction and extend in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. A gap between the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 facing each other in the front-rear direction is an operation region 430A. The pair of solenoids 433 and 435 move the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 in directions toward or away from each other via the opening and closing links 434 and 436, respectively.
 下クランプ440は、上クランプ430と同様の構造である。下クランプ440は、後レール415,416に沿って移動可能であり、後板441、前板442、一対のソレノイド443,445を含む。前後方向に対向する後板441と前板442との隙間が、操作領域440Aである。一対のソレノイド443,445は、それぞれ開閉リンク444,446を介して、後板441及び前板442を互いに近接又は離隔する方向に移動させる。 The lower clamp 440 has the same structure as the upper clamp 430. The lower clamp 440 is movable along the rear rails 415 and 416, and includes a rear plate 441, a front plate 442, and a pair of solenoids 443 and 445. A gap between the rear plate 441 and the front plate 442 facing each other in the front-rear direction is an operation region 440A. The pair of solenoids 443 and 445 move the rear plate 441 and the front plate 442 in directions toward or away from each other via the opening and closing links 444 and 446, respectively.
 操作領域430A,440Aは、表紙保持機構400に供給される表紙9が通過可能な、左右方向に延びる空間である。操作領域430A,440Aは、互いに上下方向に対向し、且つ平面視で同一形状である。操作領域430A,440Aの左右方向長さは、表紙9の左右方向長さよりも大きい。操作領域430A,440Aの左右方向の中心位置は、表紙供給部6から供給される表紙9の左右方向の中心位置と略一致し、且つ、テーブル110の左右方向の中心位置と略一致する。 The operation areas 430A and 440A are spaces extending in the left-right direction through which the cover 9 supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400 can pass. The operation areas 430A and 440A oppose each other in the vertical direction and have the same shape in plan view. The left and right lengths of the operation areas 430A and 440A are larger than the left and right length of the cover 9. The center positions in the left-right direction of the operation areas 430A and 440A substantially coincide with the center position in the left-right direction of the cover 9 supplied from the cover sheet supply unit 6, and substantially coincide with the center position in the left-right direction of the table 110.
 図21に示すように、可動部401は、昇降モータ450、プーリ451,452、ベルト453、連結部454、位置決め板455を含む。昇降モータ450は、支持枠413の上端部の右側に設けられる。昇降モータ450から支持枠413を貫通して左方向に延びる軸(図示外)に、プーリ451が設けられる。プーリ452は、支持枠413の下端部の左側に設けられる。ベルト453は、プーリ451,452に架け渡される。 As shown in FIG. 21, the movable portion 401 includes an elevating motor 450, pulleys 451 and 452, a belt 453, a connecting portion 454, and a positioning plate 455. The elevating motor 450 is provided on the right side of the upper end portion of the support frame 413. A pulley 451 is provided on a shaft (not shown) extending from the elevating motor 450 through the support frame 413 to the left. The pulley 452 is provided on the left side of the lower end portion of the support frame 413. The belt 453 is stretched over pulleys 451 and 452.
 連結部454は、後板441の左端部とベルト453とを連結する部材である。位置決め板455は、支持枠414の右側面に設けられた、前後方向に延びる板状体である。位置決め板455は、後板431の前面に設けられた位置決め突起456(図39参照)を下方から支持可能である。位置決め突起456は、後板431の前面の右端部近傍から、前板432の右側を通って前方向に突出する板状体である。 The connecting portion 454 is a member that connects the left end portion of the rear plate 441 and the belt 453. The positioning plate 455 is a plate-like body that is provided on the right side surface of the support frame 414 and extends in the front-rear direction. The positioning plate 455 can support a positioning protrusion 456 (see FIG. 39) provided on the front surface of the rear plate 431 from below. The positioning protrusion 456 is a plate-like body that protrudes forward from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface of the rear plate 431 through the right side of the front plate 432.
 可動部401は、突当て板460、昇降モータ490、ネジ軸491、第二クランプ404を含む。ネジ軸491は、前レール417,418の間を上下方向に延びる。昇降モータ490は、ネジ軸491を軸心まわりに回転可能である。突当て板460は、支持板411の後面側に設けられた、上下方向及び左右方向に延びる矩形状の板状体である。突当て板460は、前レール417,418の前側、且つ前レール417,418及びネジ軸491の後側に設けられる。突当て板460の上下方向長さは、載置面110A上にある用紙束8の前端面の上下方向長さよりも大きい。 The movable part 401 includes a butting plate 460, a lifting motor 490, a screw shaft 491, and a second clamp 404. The screw shaft 491 extends between the front rails 417 and 418 in the vertical direction. The elevating motor 490 can rotate the screw shaft 491 about the axis. The abutting plate 460 is a rectangular plate-like body that is provided on the rear surface side of the support plate 411 and extends in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The abutting plate 460 is provided on the front side of the front rails 417 and 418 and on the rear side of the front rails 417 and 418 and the screw shaft 491. The vertical length of the abutting plate 460 is larger than the vertical length of the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A.
 第二クランプ404は、裁断前の冊子10を上下方向から挟持可能である(図46参照)。第二クランプ404は、上クランプ470及び下クランプ480を含む。上クランプ470及び下クランプ480は、突当て板460を挟んで上下両側に配置され、各々の昇降によって冊子10を選択的に挟持及び解放する。 The second clamp 404 can hold the booklet 10 before cutting from above and below (see FIG. 46). The second clamp 404 includes an upper clamp 470 and a lower clamp 480. The upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 are arranged on both upper and lower sides with the abutting plate 460 interposed therebetween, and selectively hold and release the booklet 10 by each raising and lowering.
 上クランプ470は、可動体471及びクランプ体472を含む。可動体471は、前レール417の後側から前レール418の後側まで左右方向に延び、且つ前レール417,418に沿って移動可能な部材である。可動体471は、ネジ軸491が挿通された図示外のナットを有する。クランプ体472は、可動体471の後面に設けられ、且つ可動体471の下側に突出する板状体である。クランプ体472は、上下方向及び左右方向に延びる矩形状の板状体である。 The upper clamp 470 includes a movable body 471 and a clamp body 472. The movable body 471 is a member that extends in the left-right direction from the rear side of the front rail 417 to the rear side of the front rail 418 and is movable along the front rails 417 and 418. The movable body 471 has a nut (not shown) through which the screw shaft 491 is inserted. The clamp body 472 is a plate-like body that is provided on the rear surface of the movable body 471 and protrudes below the movable body 471. The clamp body 472 is a rectangular plate-like body extending in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.
 下クランプ480は、上クランプ470と同様の構造であり、且つ上クランプ470と略上下対称である。下クランプ480は、可動体481及びクランプ体482を含む。ただし、ネジ軸491が一方向に回転した場合に、可動体471のナットがネジ軸491の回転運動を変換する直線運動の方向と、可動体481のナットがネジ軸491の回転運動を変換する直線運動の方向とは、互いに反対の方向である。クランプ体482は、可動体481の後面に設けられ、且つ可動体481の上側に突出する板状体である。突当て板460及びクランプ体472,482は、表紙供給部6から供給される表紙9を左右方向に含む範囲に亘って、左右方向に延びる。 The lower clamp 480 has the same structure as the upper clamp 470 and is substantially vertically symmetrical with the upper clamp 470. The lower clamp 480 includes a movable body 481 and a clamp body 482. However, when the screw shaft 491 rotates in one direction, the nut of the movable body 471 converts the linear motion direction in which the rotational motion of the screw shaft 491 is converted, and the nut of the movable body 481 converts the rotational motion of the screw shaft 491. The direction of linear motion is opposite to each other. The clamp body 482 is a plate-like body that is provided on the rear surface of the movable body 481 and protrudes above the movable body 481. The abutting plate 460 and the clamp bodies 472 and 482 extend in the left-right direction over a range including the cover 9 supplied from the cover-sheet supply unit 6 in the left-right direction.
 図21を参照して、第一クランプ403の昇降動作を説明する。昇降モータ450が駆動すると、プーリ451,452及びベルト453を介して、連結部454が後レール415,416に沿って移動する。つまり連結部454に連結された下クランプ440が、上下方向に移動する。下クランプ440が上クランプ430に接触していない場合、上クランプ430は上基準位置に保持される。上基準位置(図20、図21参照)は、位置決め突起456が位置決め板455によって支持される、上クランプ430の上下方向位置である。つまり位置決め板455は、後述の接触位置よりも上側に設けられ、上クランプ430の下側への移動を制限する。 With reference to FIG. 21, the raising / lowering operation | movement of the 1st clamp 403 is demonstrated. When the lifting motor 450 is driven, the connecting portion 454 moves along the rear rails 415 and 416 via the pulleys 451 and 452 and the belt 453. That is, the lower clamp 440 connected to the connecting portion 454 moves in the vertical direction. When the lower clamp 440 is not in contact with the upper clamp 430, the upper clamp 430 is held at the upper reference position. The upper reference position (see FIGS. 20 and 21) is the vertical position of the upper clamp 430 where the positioning protrusion 456 is supported by the positioning plate 455. That is, the positioning plate 455 is provided above the contact position described later, and restricts the downward movement of the upper clamp 430.
 上方向に移動する下クランプ440は、上基準位置の上クランプ430に下側から接触して、上クランプ430を支持した状態で上方向に移動する。つまり上クランプ430は、上方向に移動する下クランプ440に押圧されることによって、上基準位置から上方向に移動可能である。上クランプ430及び下クランプ440は上下方向に並んだ状態で、各々の可動範囲の上端部まで移動する。 The lower clamp 440 that moves upward contacts the upper clamp 430 at the upper reference position from below, and moves upward while supporting the upper clamp 430. That is, the upper clamp 430 can move upward from the upper reference position by being pressed by the lower clamp 440 that moves upward. The upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 move to the upper end of each movable range in a state where they are aligned in the vertical direction.
 下クランプ440がその可動範囲の上端部から下方向に移動する場合、下クランプ440によって支持される上クランプ430は、自重によって上基準位置まで下方向に移動する。上基準位置に到達した上クランプ430は位置決め板455によって下方向への移動が規制されるので、下クランプ440は上クランプ430から離隔して下方向に移動する。下方向に移動する下クランプ440は、下基準位置を経由して、その可動範囲の下端部まで移動可能である。 When the lower clamp 440 moves downward from the upper end of its movable range, the upper clamp 430 supported by the lower clamp 440 moves downward to the upper reference position by its own weight. Since the upper clamp 430 that has reached the upper reference position is restricted from moving downward by the positioning plate 455, the lower clamp 440 moves away from the upper clamp 430. The lower clamp 440 moving downward is movable to the lower end of the movable range via the lower reference position.
 下基準位置(図20、図21参照)は、突当て板460を挟んで上基準位置と上下方向に対称となる、下クランプ440の上下方向位置である。つまり、突当て板460から上基準位置までの距離と、突当て板460から下基準位置までの距離とは、略同じである。なお、上基準位置から下基準位置までの距離は、表紙保持機構400に供給される表紙9の上下方向長さよりも若干小さい。 The lower reference position (see FIGS. 20 and 21) is the vertical position of the lower clamp 440 that is symmetrical with the upper reference position in the vertical direction with the abutting plate 460 interposed therebetween. That is, the distance from the butting plate 460 to the upper reference position and the distance from the butting plate 460 to the lower reference position are substantially the same. The distance from the upper reference position to the lower reference position is slightly smaller than the vertical length of the cover 9 supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400.
 一対のソレノイド433,435が後板431及び前板432を互いに近接する方向に移動させると、操作領域430Aが閉鎖状態になる。一対のソレノイド433,435は、それぞれ開閉リンク434,436を介して、後板431及び前板432を互いに離隔する方向に移動させると、操作領域430Aが開放状態になる。同様に操作領域440Aは、一対のソレノイド443,445によって開放状態又は閉鎖状態に変化可能である。 When the pair of solenoids 433 and 435 move the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 in directions close to each other, the operation region 430A is closed. When the pair of solenoids 433 and 435 move the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 away from each other via the opening and closing links 434 and 436, respectively, the operation region 430A is opened. Similarly, the operation region 440A can be changed to an open state or a closed state by a pair of solenoids 443 and 445.
 表紙9が進入した操作領域430Aが閉鎖されると、表紙9は後板431と前板432との間で挟持される。つまり、操作領域430Aに進入した表紙9は、上クランプ430によって挟持される。表紙9が進入した操作領域440Aが閉鎖されると、表紙9は後板441と前板442との間で挟持される。つまり、操作領域440Aに進入した表紙9は、下クランプ440によって挟持される。 When the operation area 430A into which the cover 9 has entered is closed, the cover 9 is sandwiched between the rear plate 431 and the front plate 432. That is, the cover sheet 9 that has entered the operation area 430 </ b> A is sandwiched by the upper clamp 430. When the operation area 440 </ b> A into which the cover 9 has entered is closed, the cover 9 is sandwiched between the rear plate 441 and the front plate 442. That is, the cover sheet 9 that has entered the operation area 440A is sandwiched by the lower clamp 440.
 図21を参照して、第二クランプ404の昇降動作を説明する。昇降モータ490がネジ軸491を回転すると、ナットが設けられた可動体471は前レール417,418に沿って移動する。同時に、ナットが設けられた可動体481は前レール417,418に沿って可動体471とは反対方向に移動する。つまりクランプ体472,482は、突当て板460を挟んで上下対称に、互いに近接又は離隔する方向に移動する。 With reference to FIG. 21, the raising / lowering operation | movement of the 2nd clamp 404 is demonstrated. When the elevating motor 490 rotates the screw shaft 491, the movable body 471 provided with the nut moves along the front rails 417 and 418. At the same time, the movable body 481 provided with the nut moves in the direction opposite to the movable body 471 along the front rails 417 and 418. In other words, the clamp bodies 472 and 482 move vertically and symmetrically with respect to the abutting plate 460 so as to approach or separate from each other.
 可動体471は、突当て板460の上端部に接触する位置まで、下方向に移動可能である。可動体481は、突当て板460の下端部に接触する位置まで、上方向に移動可能である。可動体471がその可動範囲の下端部に移動し、且つ、可動体481がその可動範囲の上端部に移動したとき、クランプ体472,482の上下方向距離(つまり、クランプ体472,482の隙間)が最も小さくなる。このとき、クランプ体472,482の上下方向距離は、冊子10の上下方向長さよりも小さい。 The movable body 471 can move downward to a position where it comes into contact with the upper end of the abutting plate 460. The movable body 481 can move upward to a position where it comes into contact with the lower end portion of the abutting plate 460. When the movable body 471 moves to the lower end of the movable range and the movable body 481 moves to the upper end of the movable range, the vertical distance between the clamp bodies 472 and 482 (that is, the gap between the clamp bodies 472 and 482). ) Is the smallest. At this time, the vertical distance between the clamp bodies 472 and 482 is smaller than the vertical length of the booklet 10.
 上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の詳細構造を説明する。図21及び図22に示すように、上クランプ430は、先述の後板431、前板432、ソレノイド433,435、及び開閉リンク434,436に加えて、摺動部437,438、及び一対の連結軸439を含む。摺動部437,438は、それぞれ、後板431の前面における左端部及び右端部に設けられる。摺動部437は、後レール415に沿って移動することで、上クランプ430を上下方向に案内する。摺動部438は、後レール416に沿って移動することで、下クランプ440を上下方向に案内する。 The detailed structure of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the upper clamp 430 includes sliding portions 437 and 438, and a pair of the above-described rear plate 431, front plate 432, solenoids 433 and 435, and opening and closing links 434 and 436. A connecting shaft 439 is included. The sliding portions 437 and 438 are provided at the left end portion and the right end portion on the front surface of the rear plate 431, respectively. The sliding part 437 guides the upper clamp 430 in the vertical direction by moving along the rear rail 415. The sliding portion 438 guides the lower clamp 440 in the vertical direction by moving along the rear rail 416.
 後板431は、摺動部437の右側に形成された貫通穴431Aと、摺動部438の左側に形成された貫通穴431Bとを有する。貫通穴431A,431Bは、後板431を前後方向に貫通する。ソレノイド433は、後板431の後面且つ貫通穴431Aの右側に設けられる。ソレノイド435は、後板431の後面且つ貫通穴431Bの左側に設けられる。開閉リンク434,436は、それぞれ貫通穴431A,431Bに配置された、平面視で略L字型の板状体である。 The rear plate 431 has a through hole 431A formed on the right side of the sliding portion 437 and a through hole 431B formed on the left side of the sliding portion 438. The through holes 431A and 431B penetrate the rear plate 431 in the front-rear direction. The solenoid 433 is provided on the rear surface of the rear plate 431 and on the right side of the through hole 431A. The solenoid 435 is provided on the rear surface of the rear plate 431 and on the left side of the through hole 431B. The open / close links 434 and 436 are substantially L-shaped plate-like bodies arranged in the through holes 431A and 431B, respectively, in plan view.
 前板432の左端部及び右端部は、それぞれ貫通穴431A,431Bと前後方向に対向する。一対の連結軸439は、それぞれ貫通穴431Aの右側及び貫通穴431Bの左側に配置され、且つ後板431の前面から前方に突出する軸である。一対の連結軸439は、前板432を前後方向に貫通し、且つ前板432を前後方向に移動可能に支持する。 The left end and the right end of the front plate 432 face the through holes 431A and 431B in the front-rear direction, respectively. The pair of connecting shafts 439 are shafts that are arranged on the right side of the through hole 431A and the left side of the through hole 431B, respectively, and project forward from the front surface of the rear plate 431. The pair of connecting shafts 439 penetrates the front plate 432 in the front-rear direction and supports the front plate 432 so as to be movable in the front-rear direction.
 後板431及び前板432は、それぞれ誘導面430B,430Cを有する。誘導面430Bは、操作領域430Aと対向する左右方向の範囲に亘って、後板431の上面から前側下方に傾斜する面である。誘導面430Cは、操作領域430Aと対向する左右方向の範囲に亘って、前板432の上面から後側下方に傾斜する面である。つまり、誘導面430B,430Cが形成された操作領域430Aの上端部は、操作領域430Aのうちで最も前後方向の開口幅が大きい。 The rear plate 431 and the front plate 432 have guide surfaces 430B and 430C, respectively. The guide surface 430B is a surface that is inclined downward from the upper surface of the rear plate 431 to the front side over a range in the left-right direction facing the operation region 430A. The guide surface 430C is a surface that inclines from the upper surface of the front plate 432 downward to the rear side over a range in the left-right direction that faces the operation region 430A. That is, the upper end of the operation area 430A where the guide surfaces 430B and 430C are formed has the largest opening width in the front-rear direction in the operation area 430A.
 図23に示すように、ソレノイド435は、右方向に延びる軸435Aを有する。ソレノイド435は、ONである場合に軸435Aが退入し、OFFである場合に軸435Aが進出する。開閉リンク436は、上下方向に延びる軸436Aを介して、貫通穴431B(図21参照)内で支持される。開閉リンク436は、貫通穴431Bの内側において、軸436Aを中心に揺動可能である。円柱状の連結軸436Dは、開閉リンク436の後端部436Bから上方向に延びる。連結軸436Dは、軸435Aに連結される。開閉リンク436の前端部436Cは、前板432の後面の右端部に接する。各連結軸439は、前板432を後方に付勢する巻きバネ439Aを有する。 23, the solenoid 435 has a shaft 435A extending in the right direction. When the solenoid 435 is ON, the shaft 435A retracts, and when it is OFF, the shaft 435A advances. The open / close link 436 is supported in the through hole 431B (see FIG. 21) via a shaft 436A extending in the vertical direction. The open / close link 436 can swing around the shaft 436A inside the through hole 431B. The columnar connecting shaft 436D extends upward from the rear end 436B of the opening / closing link 436. The connecting shaft 436D is connected to the shaft 435A. A front end 436 </ b> C of the opening / closing link 436 is in contact with the right end of the rear surface of the front plate 432. Each connecting shaft 439 has a winding spring 439A that urges the front plate 432 backward.
 図示しないが、ソレノイド433は、ソレノイド435と同様に、左方向に延びる軸を有する。開閉リンク434は、開閉リンク436と同様に、貫通穴431Aの内側で揺動可能に支持される。開閉リンク434の後端部は、ソレノイド433の軸と連結される。開閉リンク434の前端部は、前板432の後面の左端部に接する。 Although not shown, the solenoid 433 has a shaft extending in the left direction, like the solenoid 435. Similarly to the opening / closing link 436, the opening / closing link 434 is swingably supported inside the through hole 431A. The rear end of the opening / closing link 434 is connected to the shaft of the solenoid 433. The front end portion of the opening / closing link 434 is in contact with the left end portion of the rear surface of the front plate 432.
 図21に示すように、下クランプ440は、上クランプ430と同様の構造である。下クランプ440は、先述の後板441、前板442、ソレノイド443,445、開閉リンク444,446に加えて、一対の摺動部(図示外)及び一対の連結軸(図示外)を含む。開閉リンク444,446は、それぞれ後板441に形成された貫通穴441A,441Bに配置される。後板441及び前板442は、それぞれ誘導面430B,430Cと同様の誘導面を有する。開閉リンク444は、ソレノイド443の軸と連結され、且つ、前板442の後面の左端部に接する。開閉リンク446は、ソレノイド445の軸と連結され、且つ、前板442の後面の右端部に接する。 As shown in FIG. 21, the lower clamp 440 has the same structure as the upper clamp 430. The lower clamp 440 includes a pair of sliding portions (not shown) and a pair of connecting shafts (not shown) in addition to the above-described rear plate 441, front plate 442, solenoids 443 and 445, and opening / closing links 444 and 446. The opening / closing links 444 and 446 are disposed in through holes 441A and 441B formed in the rear plate 441, respectively. The rear plate 441 and the front plate 442 have guide surfaces similar to the guide surfaces 430B and 430C, respectively. The opening / closing link 444 is connected to the shaft of the solenoid 443 and is in contact with the left end portion of the rear surface of the front plate 442. The open / close link 446 is connected to the shaft of the solenoid 445 and is in contact with the right end portion of the rear surface of the front plate 442.
 図23の開放状態に示すように、ソレノイド435が軸435Aを退入させた場合、後端部436Bは連結軸436Dを介して左方向に移動される。このとき、開閉リンク436が軸436Aを中心に揺動するのに伴って、前端部436Cは前方向に移動して前板432を前側に付勢する。同様に、ソレノイド433が軸を退入させた場合、開閉リンク434は前板432を前側に付勢する。従って、ソレノイド433,435が何れもONである場合、前板432は巻きバネ439Aの付勢力に抗って、連結軸439に沿って前方向に移動する。前板432は後板431から離隔するため、操作領域430Aが開放される。 23, when the solenoid 435 retracts the shaft 435A, the rear end 436B is moved to the left via the connecting shaft 436D. At this time, as the opening / closing link 436 swings about the shaft 436A, the front end 436C moves in the forward direction and biases the front plate 432 forward. Similarly, when the solenoid 433 retracts the shaft, the open / close link 434 biases the front plate 432 forward. Therefore, when both the solenoids 433 and 435 are ON, the front plate 432 moves forward along the connecting shaft 439 against the urging force of the winding spring 439A. Since the front plate 432 is separated from the rear plate 431, the operation region 430A is opened.
 図23の閉鎖状態に示すように、ソレノイド435が軸435Aを進出させた場合、後端部436Bは連結軸436Dを介して右方向に移動される。このとき、開閉リンク436が軸436Aを中心に揺動するのに伴って、前端部436Cは後方向に移動する。前板432は、巻きバネ439Aの付勢力によって、連結軸439に沿って後方向に移動する。同様に、ソレノイド433が軸を進出させた場合、前板432は後方向に移動する。従って、ソレノイド433,435が何れもOFFである場合、前板432は巻きバネ439Aの付勢力によって後板431に近接し、操作領域430Aが閉鎖される。 23, when the solenoid 435 advances the shaft 435A, the rear end 436B is moved rightward via the connecting shaft 436D. At this time, as the opening / closing link 436 swings about the shaft 436A, the front end 436C moves backward. The front plate 432 moves rearward along the connecting shaft 439 by the biasing force of the winding spring 439A. Similarly, when the solenoid 433 advances the shaft, the front plate 432 moves backward. Therefore, when both the solenoids 433 and 435 are OFF, the front plate 432 approaches the rear plate 431 by the urging force of the winding spring 439A, and the operation region 430A is closed.
 下クランプ440のクランプ動作は、上クランプ430のクランプ動作と同様である。ソレノイド443,445が何れもONである場合、操作領域440Aが開放される。ソレノイド443,445が何れもOFFである場合、操作領域440Aが閉鎖される。 The clamping operation of the lower clamp 440 is the same as the clamping operation of the upper clamp 430. When the solenoids 443 and 445 are both ON, the operation area 440A is opened. When both the solenoids 443 and 445 are OFF, the operation area 440A is closed.
 図21~図23を参照して、複数の規制ピン463,464,465を説明する。上クランプ430は、一対の規制ピン463を有する。一対の規制ピン463は、上クランプ430に供給された表紙9の左右方向位置を規制する部材である。一対の規制ピン463は、操作領域430Aの左右方向略中心を挟んで、左右対称に設けられる。一対の規制ピン463は、一対の連結軸439と同様に、後板431から前方に突出して前板432を貫通する軸である。一対の規制ピン463の間の左右方向距離は、表紙9の左右方向長さよりも若干大きい。 The plurality of regulating pins 463, 464, 465 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper clamp 430 has a pair of restriction pins 463. The pair of regulating pins 463 are members that regulate the position in the left-right direction of the cover sheet 9 supplied to the upper clamp 430. The pair of restriction pins 463 are provided symmetrically with respect to the approximate center of the operation region 430A in the left-right direction. The pair of restriction pins 463 are shafts that protrude forward from the rear plate 431 and penetrate the front plate 432, similarly to the pair of connecting shafts 439. The distance in the left-right direction between the pair of regulating pins 463 is slightly larger than the length in the left-right direction of the cover 9.
 下クランプ440は、一対の規制ピン464及び一対の規制ピン465を有する。一対の規制ピン464は、下クランプ440に供給された表紙9の左右方向位置を規制する部材である。一対の規制ピン464は、操作領域440Aの左右方向略中心を挟んで、左右対称に設けられる。一対の規制ピン464は、後板441から前方に突出して前板442を貫通する軸である。一対の規制ピン463と一対の規制ピン464とは、略同一の左右方向位置にある。つまり一対の規制ピン464の間の左右方向距離は、表紙9の左右方向長さよりも若干大きい。 The lower clamp 440 has a pair of restriction pins 464 and a pair of restriction pins 465. The pair of regulating pins 464 are members that regulate the position in the left-right direction of the cover sheet 9 supplied to the lower clamp 440. The pair of restriction pins 464 are provided symmetrically with respect to the approximate center of the operation region 440A in the left-right direction. The pair of regulating pins 464 are shafts that protrude forward from the rear plate 441 and penetrate the front plate 442. The pair of restriction pins 463 and the pair of restriction pins 464 are at substantially the same left-right position. That is, the distance in the left-right direction between the pair of restricting pins 464 is slightly larger than the length in the left-right direction of the cover 9.
 一対の規制ピン465は、下クランプ440に供給された表紙9の下端位置を規制する部材である。一対の規制ピン465は、一対の規制ピン464と同様に、操作領域440Aの左右方向略中心を挟んで左右対称に設けられた、後板441から前方に突出して前板442を貫通する軸である。一対の規制ピン465は、一対の規制ピン464よりも下側に設けられ、且つ一対の規制ピン464よりも狭い間隔で配置される。一対の規制ピン465の間の左右方向距離は、表紙9の左右方向長さよりも小さい。 The pair of regulation pins 465 are members that regulate the lower end position of the cover 9 supplied to the lower clamp 440. The pair of restriction pins 465 are, like the pair of restriction pins 464, shafts that are provided symmetrically with respect to the approximate center in the left-right direction of the operation region 440A and project forward from the rear plate 441 and penetrate the front plate 442. is there. The pair of restriction pins 465 are provided below the pair of restriction pins 464 and are arranged at a narrower interval than the pair of restriction pins 464. The distance in the left-right direction between the pair of restriction pins 465 is smaller than the length in the left-right direction of the cover 9.
 一対の規制ピン463は、基準ピンと反対ピンとを含む。基準ピンは、表紙9の左右方向位置を規制する際の基準となる規制ピン463である。基準ピンから反対ピンに向かう方向を、規制方向という。冊子10の端面のうちで、冊子10の裁断位置を特定する際の基準となる基準端面の左右方向位置を、裁断基準位置P1(図22、図23参照)という。 The pair of restriction pins 463 includes a reference pin and an opposite pin. The reference pin is a restriction pin 463 that serves as a reference when restricting the position of the cover sheet 9 in the left-right direction. The direction from the reference pin toward the opposite pin is referred to as the regulation direction. Of the end faces of the booklet 10, the left-right position of the reference end face serving as a reference when specifying the cutting position of the booklet 10 is referred to as a cutting reference position P1 (see FIGS. 22 and 23).
 基準ピンにおける規制方向端部の左右方向位置を、規制位置P2(図23参照)という。規制位置P2は、裁断基準位置P1から規制方向にずれた左右方向位置に設けられる。規制位置P2と裁断基準位置P1との距離は、より小さいことが望ましい。一対の規制ピン464も、一対の規制ピン463と同様の位置関係を有する。 The position in the left-right direction of the end portion of the reference pin in the restriction direction is referred to as restriction position P2 (see FIG. 23). The restriction position P2 is provided at a left-right position that is shifted in the restriction direction from the cutting reference position P1. It is desirable that the distance between the regulation position P2 and the cutting reference position P1 is smaller. The pair of restriction pins 464 also have the same positional relationship as the pair of restriction pins 463.
 本実施形態では、裁断基準位置P1は先述の第三規制位置と略一致する(図56参照)。つまり冊子10の右端面が基準端面である(図56参照)。右側の規制ピン463,464が基準ピンであり、左側の規制ピン463,464が反対ピンである。右側の規制ピン463,464(より詳細には、右側の規制ピン463,464の左端部)は、裁断基準位置P1から左方向にずれた左右方向位置に設けられる。 In the present embodiment, the cutting reference position P1 substantially coincides with the above-described third restriction position (see FIG. 56). That is, the right end surface of the booklet 10 is the reference end surface (see FIG. 56). The right restriction pins 463 and 464 are reference pins, and the left restriction pins 463 and 464 are opposite pins. The right restriction pins 463 and 464 (more specifically, the left end portions of the right restriction pins 463 and 464) are provided at left and right positions shifted from the cutting reference position P1 in the left direction.
 図41及び図44に示すように、可動部401は付勢部461及び一対のマークセンサ499を含む。付勢部461は、突当て板460の左端部に設けられており、駆動モータ461A、軸部461B、及び一対の腕部461Cを含む。軸部461Bは、左側の規制ピン463,464よりも左側に設けられ、且つ突当て板460の前側で上下方向に延びる。一対の腕部461Cは、それぞれ軸部461Bの上端部及び下端部から平行に延びる柱状体である。一対の腕部461Cは、突当て板460の上下両側から、突当て板460よりも後方に延びる。一対の腕部461Cの突出端は、操作領域430A,440Aよりも後方にある。 41 and 44, the movable portion 401 includes an urging portion 461 and a pair of mark sensors 499. The urging portion 461 is provided at the left end portion of the abutting plate 460, and includes a drive motor 461A, a shaft portion 461B, and a pair of arm portions 461C. The shaft portion 461B is provided on the left side of the left regulation pins 463 and 464, and extends in the vertical direction on the front side of the abutting plate 460. The pair of arm portions 461C are columnar bodies extending in parallel from the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the shaft portion 461B, respectively. The pair of arm portions 461 </ b> C extend rearward from the abutting plate 460 from both the upper and lower sides of the abutting plate 460. The protruding ends of the pair of arm portions 461C are behind the operation areas 430A and 440A.
 駆動モータ461Aは、軸部461Bを軸心まわりに回転可能である。駆動モータ461Aが軸部461Bを回転させると、一対の腕部461Cが軸部461Bを中心に左右方向に揺動する。駆動モータ461Aは、一対の腕部461Cを待機位置と付勢位置とに揺動させる。一対の腕部461Cが待機位置にある場合、一対の腕部461Cが軸部461Bから後方に延び、且つ各腕部461Cの突出端が左側の規制ピン463,464よりも若干左側にある。一対の腕部461Cが付勢位置にある場合、一対の腕部461Cが軸部461Bから右後方に延び、且つ各腕部461Cの突出端が左側の規制ピン463,464よりも若干右側にある。つまり一対の腕部461Cは、前述の反対ピンの左右方向位置を挟んで左右方向に揺動可能である。 The drive motor 461A can rotate the shaft portion 461B around the axis. When the drive motor 461A rotates the shaft portion 461B, the pair of arm portions 461C swings in the left-right direction around the shaft portion 461B. The drive motor 461A swings the pair of arm portions 461C between a standby position and an urging position. When the pair of arm portions 461C are in the standby position, the pair of arm portions 461C extend rearward from the shaft portion 461B, and the protruding ends of the arm portions 461C are slightly on the left side of the left regulation pins 463 and 464. When the pair of arm portions 461C are in the urging position, the pair of arm portions 461C extend rightward and rearward from the shaft portion 461B, and the protruding ends of the arm portions 461C are slightly on the right side of the left regulation pins 463 and 464. . That is, the pair of arm portions 461C can swing in the left-right direction across the position of the opposite pin in the left-right direction.
 一対のマークセンサ499は、可動部401において、それぞれ支持枠413の右側及び支持枠414の左側に設けられる。一対のマークセンサ499は、何れも上基準位置にある上クランプ430よりも若干下側、且つ操作領域430A,440Aよりも若干前側にある。一対のマークセンサ499は、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440に保持される表紙9の前面に対向して、一対のマーク9B(図44参照)を光学的に検出するための反射型センサである。 The pair of mark sensors 499 are provided on the right side of the support frame 413 and the left side of the support frame 414 in the movable portion 401, respectively. The pair of mark sensors 499 are slightly below the upper clamp 430 at the upper reference position and slightly forward from the operation areas 430A and 440A. The pair of mark sensors 499 are reflective sensors for optically detecting the pair of marks 9B (see FIG. 44) facing the front surface of the cover 9 held by the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440.
<2-6.裁断機構500の構造>
 図24~図26を参照して、裁断機構500を説明する。図24は、平面視で紙揃え機構100、裁断機構500、及び冊子搬送機構600の位置関係を示す(後述の図54~図56も同様)。図26は、後裁断部530を省略する(後述する図57も同様)。
<2-6. Structure of cutting mechanism 500>
The cutting mechanism 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 shows the positional relationship of the paper alignment mechanism 100, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 in plan view (the same applies to FIGS. 54 to 56 described later). In FIG. 26, the post-cutting unit 530 is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 57 described later).
 図24及び図25に示すように、裁断機構500は、左裁断部510、右裁断部520、後裁断部530、駆動部540、支持レール590を含む。左裁断部510は、冊子10の左縁部を裁断可能である。右裁断部520は、冊子10の右縁部を裁断可能である。後裁断部530は、冊子10の後縁部を裁断可能である。冊子10の縁部を裁断することは、冊子10の縁部を冊子10から切り離すことである。駆動部540は、左裁断部510及び右裁断部520を左右対称に移動させる。支持レール590は、裁断機構500に搬送された冊子10を下側から支持する。 24 and 25, the cutting mechanism 500 includes a left cutting unit 510, a right cutting unit 520, a rear cutting unit 530, a driving unit 540, and a support rail 590. The left cutting unit 510 can cut the left edge of the booklet 10. The right cutting unit 520 can cut the right edge of the booklet 10. The post-cutting unit 530 can cut the trailing edge of the booklet 10. Cutting the edge of the booklet 10 means cutting the edge of the booklet 10 from the booklet 10. The drive unit 540 moves the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520 symmetrically. The support rail 590 supports the booklet 10 conveyed to the cutting mechanism 500 from below.
 駆動部540は、基部541、搬送モータ542、一対のレール543,545、ネジ軸544を含む。基部541は、本体枠2の後側部分に配置された、正面視で略正方形状の板状体である。レール543は、基部541の上面における前縁部に設けられ、且つ左右方向に延びる。レール545は、基部541の上面における後縁部に設けられ、且つ左右方向に延びる。ネジ軸544は、基部541の上面においてレール543,545の間に設けられ、且つ後述の支持レール590を貫通して左右方向に延びる。搬送モータ542は、ネジ軸544を軸心まわりに回転可能である。 The drive unit 540 includes a base 541, a transport motor 542, a pair of rails 543 and 545, and a screw shaft 544. The base 541 is a substantially square plate-like body arranged in the rear part of the main body frame 2 when viewed from the front. The rail 543 is provided at the front edge portion on the upper surface of the base portion 541 and extends in the left-right direction. The rail 545 is provided at the rear edge portion on the upper surface of the base portion 541 and extends in the left-right direction. The screw shaft 544 is provided between the rails 543 and 545 on the upper surface of the base portion 541 and extends in the left-right direction through a support rail 590 described later. The conveyance motor 542 can rotate the screw shaft 544 around the axis.
 左裁断部510は、駆動モータ511、動力変換部512、裁断部材513、支持部516、後述の整合部517を含む。支持部516は、左裁断部510が備える各部材を一体に保持する部材であり、一対のレール543,545に沿って移動可能である。支持部516は、ネジ軸544が挿通された図示外のナットを有する。駆動モータ511から延びる軸は、動力変換部512に接続する。動力変換部512から延びる軸は、裁断部材513に接続する。 The left cutting unit 510 includes a drive motor 511, a power conversion unit 512, a cutting member 513, a support unit 516, and a matching unit 517 described later. The support portion 516 is a member that integrally holds the members included in the left cutting portion 510 and is movable along the pair of rails 543 and 545. The support portion 516 has a nut (not shown) through which the screw shaft 544 is inserted. A shaft extending from the drive motor 511 is connected to the power conversion unit 512. The shaft extending from the power conversion unit 512 is connected to the cutting member 513.
 裁断部材513は、支持部516が有する平面である載置面516Aの上側で支持される。裁断部材513は、押え部材514及び裁断刃515を含む。裁断刃515は、冊子10を上下方向に裁断可能な、前後方向に延びる刃である。裁断刃515の下端部は、前後方向に延びる刃先515A(図26参照)である。押え部材514は、冊子10を裁断刃515に沿って上方から付勢する部材である。押え部材514及び裁断刃515の前後方向長さは、冊子10の前後方向長さよりも大きい。押え部材514が冊子10を付勢していない状態では、押え部材514の下端部は刃先515Aよりも下方に位置する。 The cutting member 513 is supported on the upper side of the mounting surface 516 </ b> A that is a plane of the support portion 516. The cutting member 513 includes a pressing member 514 and a cutting blade 515. The cutting blade 515 is a blade extending in the front-rear direction capable of cutting the booklet 10 in the vertical direction. The lower end portion of the cutting blade 515 is a blade edge 515A (see FIG. 26) extending in the front-rear direction. The pressing member 514 is a member that urges the booklet 10 along the cutting blade 515 from above. The longitudinal lengths of the pressing member 514 and the cutting blade 515 are larger than the longitudinal lengths of the booklet 10. In a state where the presser member 514 is not biasing the booklet 10, the lower end portion of the presser member 514 is positioned below the blade edge 515 </ b> A.
 右裁断部520は、左裁断部510と同様の構造であり、且つ左裁断部510と略左右対称である。右裁断部520は、駆動モータ521、動力変換部522、裁断部材523、支持部526、後述の整合部527を含む。裁断部材523は、支持部526が有する平面である載置面526Aの上側で支持される。裁断部材523は、押え部材524及び裁断刃525を含む。裁断刃525の下端部は、前後方向に延びる刃先525A(図26参照)である。押え部材524が冊子10を付勢していない状態では、押え部材524の下端部は刃先525Aよりも下方に位置する。 The right cutting part 520 has the same structure as the left cutting part 510 and is substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the left cutting part 510. The right cutting unit 520 includes a drive motor 521, a power conversion unit 522, a cutting member 523, a support unit 526, and a matching unit 527 described later. The cutting member 523 is supported on the upper side of the mounting surface 526A which is a flat surface of the support portion 526. The cutting member 523 includes a pressing member 524 and a cutting blade 525. The lower end portion of the cutting blade 525 is a blade edge 525A (see FIG. 26) extending in the front-rear direction. In a state where the pressing member 524 does not urge the booklet 10, the lower end portion of the pressing member 524 is positioned below the blade edge 525 </ b> A.
 支持部526は、右裁断部520が備える各部材を一体に保持する部材であり、一対のレール543,545に沿って移動可能である。支持部526は、ネジ軸544が挿通された図示外のナットを有する。ただし、ネジ軸544が一方向に回転した場合に、支持部516のナットがネジ軸544の回転運動を変換する直線運動の方向と、支持部526のナットがネジ軸544の回転運動を変換する直線運動の方向とは、互いに反対の方向である。 The support portion 526 is a member that integrally holds the members included in the right cutting portion 520 and is movable along the pair of rails 543 and 545. The support portion 526 has a nut (not shown) through which the screw shaft 544 is inserted. However, when the screw shaft 544 rotates in one direction, the nut of the support portion 516 converts the linear motion direction that converts the rotational motion of the screw shaft 544, and the nut of the support portion 526 converts the rotational motion of the screw shaft 544. The direction of linear motion is opposite to each other.
 後裁断部530は、駆動モータ531、動力変換部532、裁断部材533、支持部536を含む。支持部536は、後裁断部530が備える各部材を一体に保持する部材である。駆動モータ531から延びる軸は、動力変換部532に接続する。動力変換部532から延びる軸は、裁断部材533に接続する。裁断部材533は、支持部536が有する平面である載置面536Aの上側で支持される。 The post-cutting part 530 includes a drive motor 531, a power conversion part 532, a cutting member 533, and a support part 536. The support portion 536 is a member that integrally holds the members included in the post-cutting portion 530. A shaft extending from the drive motor 531 is connected to the power converter 532. The shaft extending from the power conversion unit 532 is connected to the cutting member 533. The cutting member 533 is supported on the upper side of the placement surface 536A which is a plane of the support portion 536.
 裁断部材533は、押え部材534及び裁断刃535を含む。裁断刃535は、冊子10を上下方向に裁断可能な、左右方向に延びる刃である。裁断刃535の下端部は、左右方向に延びる刃先535A(図5参照)である。押え部材534は、冊子10を裁断刃535に沿って上方から付勢する部材である。押え部材534及び裁断刃535の左右方向長さは、冊子10の左右方向長さよりも大きい。押え部材534が冊子10を付勢していない状態では、押え部材534の下端部は刃先535Aよりも下方に位置する。 The cutting member 533 includes a pressing member 534 and a cutting blade 535. The cutting blade 535 is a blade extending in the left-right direction that can cut the booklet 10 in the vertical direction. The lower end portion of the cutting blade 535 is a blade edge 535A (see FIG. 5) extending in the left-right direction. The pressing member 534 is a member that urges the booklet 10 along the cutting blade 535 from above. The lateral lengths of the pressing member 534 and the cutting blade 535 are larger than the lateral length of the booklet 10. In a state where the presser member 534 is not urging the booklet 10, the lower end portion of the presser member 534 is positioned below the blade edge 535 </ b> A.
 なお、載置面516Aにおける刃先515Aの直下に、冊子10の裁断時に刃先515Aを受ける図示外のまな板が設けられる。載置面526Aにおける刃先525Aの直下に、冊子10の裁断時に刃先525Aを受ける図示外のまな板が設けられる。載置面536Aにおける刃先535Aの直下に、冊子10の裁断時に刃先535Aを受ける図示外のまな板が設けられる。 A cutting board (not shown) that receives the blade edge 515A when the booklet 10 is cut is provided immediately below the blade edge 515A on the placement surface 516A. A cutting board (not shown) that receives the blade edge 525A when the booklet 10 is cut is provided immediately below the blade edge 525A on the placement surface 526A. A cutting board (not shown) that receives the cutting edge 535A when the booklet 10 is cut is provided immediately below the cutting edge 535A on the placement surface 536A.
 図25及び図26に示すように、支持レール590は、基部541の上面における左右方向略中央に設けられ、且つ基部541の前後方向全体に亘って延びる。支持レール590は、支持台591、底板592、一対の側板593を含む。支持台591は、底板592を下方から支持する。底板592は、支持台591の上面に沿って前後方向に延びる矩形板である。一対の側板593は、それぞれ底板592の左辺及び右辺に沿って上側に延びる矩形板である。一対の側板593の上辺の上下方向位置は、何れも後述の載置面516A,526A,536Aの上下方向位置と略等しい。支持レール590は、底板592及び一対の側板593によって囲まれた、上方に開口する開口領域590Aを有する。開口領域590Aは、後述の下板642が前後方向に移動可能な空間である。 As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the support rail 590 is provided substantially at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the base 541 and extends over the entire front-rear direction of the base 541. The support rail 590 includes a support base 591, a bottom plate 592, and a pair of side plates 593. The support base 591 supports the bottom plate 592 from below. The bottom plate 592 is a rectangular plate extending in the front-rear direction along the upper surface of the support base 591. The pair of side plates 593 are rectangular plates that extend upward along the left and right sides of the bottom plate 592, respectively. The vertical positions of the upper sides of the pair of side plates 593 are substantially equal to the vertical positions of mounting surfaces 516A, 526A, and 536A described later. The support rail 590 has an opening region 590 </ b> A that is surrounded by a bottom plate 592 and a pair of side plates 593 and opens upward. The opening region 590A is a space in which a below-described lower plate 642 can move in the front-rear direction.
 搬送モータ542がネジ軸544を回転すると、支持部516は一対のレール543,545に沿って移動する。同時に支持部526は、一対のレール543,545に沿って支持部516とは反対方向に移動する。つまり左裁断部510及び右裁断部520は、支持レール590を挟んで左右対称に、互いに近接又は離隔する方向に移動する。左裁断部510がその可動範囲の左端部にあり、且つ、右裁断部520がその可動範囲の右端部にあるとき、左裁断部510及び右裁断部520の左右方向距離が最も大きくなる(図24~図26参照)。このとき、左裁断部510及び右裁断部520の左右方向距離は、冊子10の左右方向長さよりも大きい。 When the transport motor 542 rotates the screw shaft 544, the support portion 516 moves along the pair of rails 543 and 545. At the same time, the support portion 526 moves in the opposite direction to the support portion 516 along the pair of rails 543 and 545. That is, the left cutting part 510 and the right cutting part 520 move in the direction of approaching or separating from each other symmetrically with respect to the support rail 590. When the left cutting portion 510 is at the left end of the movable range and the right cutting portion 520 is at the right end of the movable range, the left-right distance between the left cutting portion 510 and the right cutting portion 520 is the largest (see FIG. 24 to FIG. 26). At this time, the left-right direction distance between the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520 is larger than the left-right direction length of the booklet 10.
 駆動モータ511が駆動すると、前後方向を中心とする駆動モータ511の回転運動が、動力変換部512によって左右方向を中心とする回転運動に変換される。動力変換部512は、変換した回転運動を裁断部材513に供給することで、裁断部材513を上下方向に移動させる。同様に、駆動モータ521が駆動すると、動力変換部522を介して供給される駆動モータ521の回転運動によって、裁断部材523が上下方向に移動する。駆動モータ531が駆動すると、動力変換部532を介して供給される駆動モータ531の回転運動によって、裁断部材533が上下方向に移動する。 When the drive motor 511 is driven, the rotational motion of the drive motor 511 centering on the front-rear direction is converted into the rotational motion centered on the left-right direction by the power conversion unit 512. The power conversion unit 512 moves the cutting member 513 in the vertical direction by supplying the converted rotational motion to the cutting member 513. Similarly, when the drive motor 521 is driven, the cutting member 523 is moved in the vertical direction by the rotational motion of the drive motor 521 supplied via the power converter 522. When the drive motor 531 is driven, the cutting member 533 is moved in the vertical direction by the rotational movement of the drive motor 531 supplied via the power converter 532.
 裁断部材513がその可動範囲の上端部にある場合、押え部材514の下端部と載置面516Aとの上下方向距離は、冊子10の上下方向長さよりも大きい(図25、図26参照)。裁断部材523がその可動範囲の上端部にある場合、押え部材524の下端部と載置面526Aとの上下方向距離は、冊子10の上下方向長さよりも大きい(図25、図26参照)。裁断部材533がその可動範囲の上端部にある場合、押え部材534の下端部と載置面536Aとの上下方向距離は、冊子10の上下方向長さよりも大きい(図25参照)。 When the cutting member 513 is at the upper end of the movable range, the vertical distance between the lower end of the pressing member 514 and the placement surface 516A is larger than the vertical length of the booklet 10 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). When the cutting member 523 is at the upper end of the movable range, the vertical distance between the lower end of the pressing member 524 and the placement surface 526A is larger than the vertical length of the booklet 10 (see FIGS. 25 and 26). When the cutting member 533 is at the upper end of the movable range, the vertical distance between the lower end of the pressing member 534 and the placement surface 536A is larger than the vertical length of the booklet 10 (see FIG. 25).
 図25及び図26を参照して、整合部517,527を説明する。整合部517,527は、裁断機構500に配置された冊子10を左右方向に位置決めする機構である。整合部517は、整合板518及び駆動モータ519を含む。整合板518は、刃先515Aよりも左側に設けられた矩形状の板状体である。整合板518の右面は、上下方向及び前後方向に延び、且つ載置面516Aと刃先515Aとの隙間に左側から対向する。駆動モータ519は、整合板518の左側に配置される。駆動モータ519から右方向に延びる軸は、整合板518に連結される。駆動モータ519は軸を進退させることによって、整合板518を載置面516Aに沿って左右方向に移動させる(図57参照)。 The matching units 517 and 527 will be described with reference to FIGS. The alignment units 517 and 527 are mechanisms for positioning the booklet 10 disposed in the cutting mechanism 500 in the left-right direction. The alignment unit 517 includes an alignment plate 518 and a drive motor 519. The alignment plate 518 is a rectangular plate-like body provided on the left side of the cutting edge 515A. The right surface of the alignment plate 518 extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and faces the gap between the placement surface 516A and the blade edge 515A from the left side. The drive motor 519 is disposed on the left side of the alignment plate 518. A shaft extending rightward from the drive motor 519 is connected to the alignment plate 518. The drive motor 519 moves the alignment plate 518 in the left-right direction along the placement surface 516A by moving the shaft back and forth (see FIG. 57).
 整合部527は、整合板528及び駆動モータ529を含む。整合板528は、刃先525Aよりも右側に設けられた矩形状の板状体である。整合板528の左面は、上下方向及び前後方向に延び、且つ載置面526Aと刃先525Aとの隙間に右側から対向する。つまり、整合板518の右面及び整合板528の左面は、互いに平行に延びる面であり、且つ左右方向に対向する。駆動モータ529は、整合板528の右側に配置される。駆動モータ529は軸を進退させることによって、整合板528を載置面526Aに沿って左右方向に移動させる(図57参照)。 The alignment unit 527 includes an alignment plate 528 and a drive motor 529. The alignment plate 528 is a rectangular plate-like body provided on the right side of the blade edge 525A. The left surface of the alignment plate 528 extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and faces the gap between the placement surface 526A and the blade edge 525A from the right side. That is, the right surface of the alignment plate 518 and the left surface of the alignment plate 528 are surfaces that extend in parallel to each other and face in the left-right direction. The drive motor 529 is disposed on the right side of the alignment plate 528. The drive motor 529 moves the alignment plate 528 in the left-right direction along the placement surface 526A by moving the shaft back and forth (see FIG. 57).
<2-7.冊子搬送機構600の構造>
 図5、図27及び図28を参照して、冊子搬送機構600の構造を説明する。図28は、搬送部602を省略する。図5及び図27に示すように、冊子搬送機構600は、可動部601及び搬送部602を含む。可動部601は、基部541の上側で前後方向に移動可能である。搬送部602は、可動部601を前後方向に移動させる。
<2-7. Structure of booklet transport mechanism 600>
The structure of the booklet transport mechanism 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIG. 28, the conveyance unit 602 is omitted. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 27, the booklet transport mechanism 600 includes a movable part 601 and a transport part 602. The movable part 601 is movable in the front-rear direction above the base part 541. The conveyance unit 602 moves the movable unit 601 in the front-rear direction.
 搬送部602は、搬送モータ621、プーリ622,623、ネジ軸624、ガイドレール625、ベルト626を含む。ネジ軸624は、基部541の上側において前後方向に延びる。ガイドレール625は、ネジ軸624の上側に設けられ、且つネジ軸624と並んで前後方向に延びる。プーリ623は、ネジ軸624の後端部に設けられる。プーリ622は、プーリ623の上側に配置されており、且つ搬送モータ621から後方に延びる軸に設けられる。ベルト626はプーリ622,623に架け渡される。 The conveyance unit 602 includes a conveyance motor 621, pulleys 622 and 623, a screw shaft 624, a guide rail 625, and a belt 626. The screw shaft 624 extends in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the base portion 541. The guide rail 625 is provided above the screw shaft 624 and extends in the front-rear direction along with the screw shaft 624. The pulley 623 is provided at the rear end portion of the screw shaft 624. The pulley 622 is disposed on the upper side of the pulley 623 and is provided on a shaft extending rearward from the transport motor 621. The belt 626 is stretched over pulleys 622 and 623.
 図27及び図28に示すように、可動部601は、支持部610、ナット611、摺動部612、昇降モータ630、ピニオン631、ラック632、ガイドレール633、ハンド部640を含む。支持部610は、可動部601に設けられた各部材を支持する。ナット611は、支持部610の上端部近傍に設けられ、且つネジ軸624が挿通される。摺動部612は、支持部610の上端部に設けられ、且つガイドレール625に連結される。昇降モータ630は、支持部610の下端部近傍に設けられる。ピニオン631は、昇降モータ630から右方向に延びる軸に設けられる。ラック632は、ピニオン631と噛み合った状態で上下方向に延びる。ガイドレール633は、支持部610の下端部から下方向に延び、且つラック632に左側から対向する。 27 and 28, the movable part 601 includes a support part 610, a nut 611, a sliding part 612, a lifting motor 630, a pinion 631, a rack 632, a guide rail 633, and a hand part 640. The support part 610 supports each member provided in the movable part 601. The nut 611 is provided in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the support portion 610, and the screw shaft 624 is inserted therethrough. The sliding portion 612 is provided at the upper end portion of the support portion 610 and is connected to the guide rail 625. The elevating motor 630 is provided in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the support portion 610. The pinion 631 is provided on a shaft extending in the right direction from the lifting motor 630. The rack 632 extends in the up-down direction while meshing with the pinion 631. The guide rail 633 extends downward from the lower end portion of the support portion 610 and faces the rack 632 from the left side.
 ハンド部640は、上板641、下板642、一対の基準板643、支持部644、クランプモータ650、ギア651A,651B、ネジ軸652A,652B、ナット653A,653Bを含む。支持部644は、可動部601に設けられた各部材を支持する板状体であり、ラック632とガイドレール633との間に配置される。ラック632の下端部は、支持部644の右面側に固定される。支持部644の左面側に、ガイドレール633の周面の一部が嵌め込まれる溝部が形成される。 The hand portion 640 includes an upper plate 641, a lower plate 642, a pair of reference plates 643, a support portion 644, a clamp motor 650, gears 651A and 651B, screw shafts 652A and 652B, and nuts 653A and 653B. The support portion 644 is a plate-like body that supports each member provided in the movable portion 601, and is disposed between the rack 632 and the guide rail 633. The lower end portion of the rack 632 is fixed to the right surface side of the support portion 644. A groove portion into which a part of the circumferential surface of the guide rail 633 is fitted is formed on the left surface side of the support portion 644.
 クランプモータ650は、支持部644の上面に設けられる。ネジ軸652Aは、支持部644の前側で回転支持され、且つ上下方向に延びる。ネジ軸652Bは、支持部644の後側で回転支持され、且つ上下方向に延びる。クランプモータ650から下方に延びる軸(図示外)は、前後方向に並んで配置されたギア651A,651Bと噛み合う。前側のギア651Aは、ネジ軸652Aの上端部に設けられる。後側のギア651Bは、ネジ軸652Bの上端部に設けられる。 The clamp motor 650 is provided on the upper surface of the support portion 644. The screw shaft 652A is rotatably supported on the front side of the support portion 644 and extends in the vertical direction. The screw shaft 652B is rotatably supported on the rear side of the support portion 644 and extends in the vertical direction. A shaft (not shown) extending downward from the clamp motor 650 meshes with gears 651A and 651B arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. The front gear 651A is provided at the upper end of the screw shaft 652A. The rear gear 651B is provided at the upper end of the screw shaft 652B.
 下板642は、支持部644の下端部に設けられた、左右方向及び前後方向に延びる矩形状の板状体である。上板641は、下板642の上側で支持部644によって支持された、左右方向及び前後方向に延びる矩形状の板状体である。下板642及び上板641は、何れも前後方向を長手とする略同一の形状及び大きさであり、且つ互いに上下方向に対向する。ネジ軸652A,652Bは、それぞれ上板641に設けられたナット653A,653Bに挿通される。ネジ軸652A,652Bの下端部は、それぞれ下板642に連結する。 The lower plate 642 is a rectangular plate-like body provided in the lower end portion of the support portion 644 and extending in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. The upper plate 641 is a rectangular plate-like body extending in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, supported by the support portion 644 on the upper side of the lower plate 642. The lower plate 642 and the upper plate 641 have substantially the same shape and size with the longitudinal direction as the longitudinal direction, and face each other in the vertical direction. The screw shafts 652A and 652B are inserted through nuts 653A and 653B provided on the upper plate 641, respectively. The lower ends of the screw shafts 652A and 652B are connected to the lower plate 642, respectively.
 上板641の前端部及び下板642の前端部が、クランプ部660Aである。上板641の後端部及び下板642の後端部が、クランプ部660Bである。一対の基準板643は、下板642の後端部よりも若干前側に設けられた、下板642から上方に突出する板状部材である。一対の基準板643は、それぞれ下板642の左端部及び右端部に設けられる。一対の基準板643におけるクランプ部660Bを向く面(つまり、一対の基準板643の後面)は、互いに同一の前後方向位置で上下方向に延びる。 The front end portion of the upper plate 641 and the front end portion of the lower plate 642 are clamp portions 660A. The rear end portion of the upper plate 641 and the rear end portion of the lower plate 642 are the clamp portions 660B. The pair of reference plates 643 are plate-like members that are provided slightly in front of the rear end portion of the lower plate 642 and project upward from the lower plate 642. The pair of reference plates 643 are provided at the left end and the right end of the lower plate 642, respectively. The surfaces of the pair of reference plates 643 facing the clamp portion 660B (that is, the rear surfaces of the pair of reference plates 643) extend in the vertical direction at the same longitudinal position.
 搬送モータ621が駆動すると、プーリ622,623及びベルト626を介してネジ軸624が回転し、ナット611を備えた支持部610がガイドレール625に沿って移動する。つまり支持部610の下方で支持されたハンド部640は、支持レール590の上側で前後方向に移動する。昇降モータ630が駆動すると、ピニオン631を介してラック632が移動し、支持部644がガイドレール633に沿って移動する。つまりハンド部640は、支持レール590よりも上側で上下方向に移動する。 When the transport motor 621 is driven, the screw shaft 624 rotates via the pulleys 622 and 623 and the belt 626, and the support portion 610 including the nut 611 moves along the guide rail 625. That is, the hand unit 640 supported below the support unit 610 moves in the front-rear direction above the support rail 590. When the elevating motor 630 is driven, the rack 632 moves via the pinion 631, and the support portion 644 moves along the guide rail 633. That is, the hand unit 640 moves in the vertical direction above the support rail 590.
 クランプモータ650が駆動すると、ギア651A,651Bを介してネジ軸652A,652Bが回転し、ナット653A,653Bを備えた上板641が上下方向に移動する。上板641が上方向に移動するのに伴って、クランプ部660A,660Bの開口幅はそれぞれ大きくなる。上板641がその可動範囲の上端部まで移動した場合、クランプ部660A,660Bの開口幅は、何れも冊子10の上下方向長さよりも大きい。上板641が下方向に移動するのに伴って、クランプ部660A,660Bの開口幅はそれぞれ小さくなる。 When the clamp motor 650 is driven, the screw shafts 652A and 652B are rotated via the gears 651A and 651B, and the upper plate 641 provided with the nuts 653A and 653B is moved in the vertical direction. As the upper plate 641 moves upward, the opening widths of the clamp portions 660A and 660B are increased. When the upper plate 641 moves to the upper end of its movable range, the opening widths of the clamp portions 660A and 660B are both larger than the vertical length of the booklet 10. As the upper plate 641 moves downward, the opening widths of the clamp portions 660A and 660B become smaller.
<3.製本装置1の製本動作>
 以下、製本装置1の製本動作を工程毎に説明する。ユーザが制御部900(図1参照)に製本動作の開始指示を入力すると、制御部900の制御によって以下の製本動作が実行される。
<3. Bookbinding Operation of Bookbinding Device 1>
Hereinafter, the bookbinding operation of the bookbinding apparatus 1 will be described for each process. When the user inputs a bookbinding operation start instruction to the control unit 900 (see FIG. 1), the following bookbinding operation is executed under the control of the control unit 900.
<3-1.初期化工程>
 まず制御部900は、製本装置1を初期状態に復帰させる初期化工程を実行する。初期化工程によって、紙揃え機構100、束操作機構200、糊塗布機構300、表紙保持機構400、裁断機構500、冊子搬送機構600が、それぞれ初期状態に制御される。
<3-1. Initialization process>
First, the control unit 900 executes an initialization process for returning the bookbinding apparatus 1 to an initial state. Through the initialization process, the paper alignment mechanism 100, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the glue application mechanism 300, the cover holding mechanism 400, the cutting mechanism 500, and the booklet transport mechanism 600 are each controlled to the initial state.
 図3、図4、図11及び図12に示すように、紙揃え機構100が初期状態に制御された場合、テーブル110は第一搬送位置にある。左揃え板130及び右揃え板140は、それぞれ第二離隔位置及び第三離隔位置にある。前揃え板150は、第一対向位置にある。第二テーブル1120は第一回転位置にある。カム部材172は初期回転位置にある。偏心カム182は、先端部183(図30参照)が第一位置に配置される回転位置にある。 3, 4, 11, and 12, when the paper alignment mechanism 100 is controlled to the initial state, the table 110 is in the first transport position. The left alignment plate 130 and the right alignment plate 140 are in the second separation position and the third separation position, respectively. The front alignment plate 150 is in the first facing position. The second table 1120 is in the first rotation position. The cam member 172 is in the initial rotation position. The eccentric cam 182 is in a rotational position where the tip 183 (see FIG. 30) is disposed at the first position.
 図4及び図11に示すように、束操作機構200が初期状態に制御された場合、束操作部230は初期位置にある。具体的には、束操作部230は、第一搬送位置にあるテーブル110の若干前側、且つ第一対向位置にある前揃え板150の若干上側にある。図3に示すように、糊塗布機構300が初期状態に制御された場合、糊塗布部340は第一退避位置にあり、糊塗布ローラ350の回転は停止する。 As shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, when the bundle operation mechanism 200 is controlled to the initial state, the bundle operation unit 230 is in the initial position. Specifically, the bundle operation unit 230 is slightly on the front side of the table 110 at the first transport position and slightly above the front alignment plate 150 at the first opposing position. As shown in FIG. 3, when the glue application mechanism 300 is controlled to the initial state, the glue application part 340 is in the first retracted position, and the rotation of the glue application roller 350 stops.
 図4及び図20~図22に示すように、表紙保持機構400が初期状態に制御された場合、可動部401がその可動範囲の下端部にある。第一クランプ403では、上クランプ430が上基準位置にあり、且つ下クランプ440が下基準位置にある。操作領域430A,440Aは、何れも閉鎖状態にある。第二クランプ404では、上クランプ470がその可動範囲の上端部にあり、且つ下クランプ480がその可動範囲の下端部にある。 As shown in FIGS. 4 and 20 to 22, when the cover holding mechanism 400 is controlled to the initial state, the movable portion 401 is at the lower end of the movable range. In the first clamp 403, the upper clamp 430 is at the upper reference position and the lower clamp 440 is at the lower reference position. The operation areas 430A and 440A are both in a closed state. In the second clamp 404, the upper clamp 470 is at the upper end of the movable range, and the lower clamp 480 is at the lower end of the movable range.
 図5、図25及び図26に示すように、裁断機構500が初期状態に制御された場合、左裁断部510がその可動範囲の左端部にあり、且つ右裁断部520がその可動範囲の右端部にある。裁断部材513,523,533は、各々の可動範囲の上端部にある。整合板518,528は、それぞれ初期位置にある。整合板518の初期位置は、その可動範囲の左端部である。整合板528の初期位置は、その可動範囲の右端部にある。 As shown in FIGS. 5, 25 and 26, when the cutting mechanism 500 is controlled to the initial state, the left cutting portion 510 is at the left end of the movable range, and the right cutting portion 520 is the right end of the movable range. In the department. The cutting members 513, 523, 533 are at the upper end of each movable range. The alignment plates 518 and 528 are in their initial positions. The initial position of the alignment plate 518 is the left end of the movable range. The initial position of the alignment plate 528 is at the right end of the movable range.
 図5、図24及び図27に示すように、冊子搬送機構600が初期状態に制御された場合、ハンド部640は初期位置にある。この場合、ハンド部640は支持レール590の前端部近傍にある。クランプ部660Aは、開口領域590A(図26参照)よりも前側にある。下板642の上面の上下方向位置は、第一載置面1111(図13参照)の上下方向位置と略等しい。上板641はその可動範囲の上端部にある。 As shown in FIGS. 5, 24 and 27, when the booklet transport mechanism 600 is controlled to the initial state, the hand unit 640 is in the initial position. In this case, the hand portion 640 is in the vicinity of the front end portion of the support rail 590. The clamp portion 660A is on the front side of the opening region 590A (see FIG. 26). The vertical position of the upper surface of the lower plate 642 is substantially equal to the vertical position of the first placement surface 1111 (see FIG. 13). The upper plate 641 is at the upper end of the movable range.
<3-2.用紙搬送工程>
 初期化工程の実行後、制御部900からの印刷指示又はユーザによる印刷指示に応じて、第一プリンタ3(図1参照)は冊子の中身に表す画像を複数の用紙8Aに順次印刷する。制御部900は、第一プリンタ3の印刷動作と並行して用紙集積工程を実行する。用紙搬送工程は、第一プリンタ3で印刷された用紙8Aを、用紙供給部5によって本体枠2の内部に搬送する工程である。
<3-2. Paper transport process>
After the initialization process is executed, the first printer 3 (see FIG. 1) sequentially prints the images shown in the booklet on the plurality of sheets 8A in accordance with a print instruction from the control unit 900 or a print instruction by the user. The controller 900 executes a paper stacking process in parallel with the printing operation of the first printer 3. The paper transporting process is a process of transporting the paper 8 </ b> A printed by the first printer 3 into the main body frame 2 by the paper supply unit 5.
 図6及び図7を参照して、用紙搬送工程を説明する。制御部900は、駆動モータ81を駆動して、複数の搬送ローラ56Aを正面視で反時計回り方向に回転させる。これに伴って、複数の搬送ローラ56Aと接触する複数の従動ローラ85が、正面視で時計回り方向に回転する。同様に、制御部900は駆動モータ91を駆動して、複数の搬送ローラ56B及び複数の従動ローラ95を回転させる。 Referring to FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, the paper transport process will be described. The controller 900 drives the drive motor 81 to rotate the plurality of transport rollers 56A counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Accordingly, the plurality of driven rollers 85 that come into contact with the plurality of transport rollers 56A rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Similarly, the controller 900 drives the drive motor 91 to rotate the plurality of transport rollers 56B and the plurality of driven rollers 95.
 第一プリンタ3では、用紙8Aの第一面に画像が形成された後、用紙8Aが第一搬送量で搬送されて、用紙8Aの一部が用紙排出口3Aから排出される。排出された用紙8Aは、経路板51の案内面に沿って第一位置F1まで移動する。用紙8Aはローラ駆動部80に到達しないため、複数の搬送ローラ56Aによって搬送されることなく、用紙排出口3Aから第一プリンタ3内に取り込まれる。 In the first printer 3, after an image is formed on the first surface of the paper 8A, the paper 8A is transported by the first transport amount, and a part of the paper 8A is discharged from the paper discharge port 3A. The discharged paper 8A moves to the first position F1 along the guide surface of the path plate 51. Since the paper 8A does not reach the roller driving unit 80, the paper 8A is taken into the first printer 3 from the paper discharge port 3A without being transported by the plurality of transport rollers 56A.
 次に第一プリンタ3では、用紙8Aの第二面に画像が形成された後、用紙8Aが第二搬送量で搬送されて、用紙8Aの全部が用紙排出口3Aから排出される。排出された用紙8Aは、経路板51の案内面に沿って第二位置F2まで移動する。このとき用紙8Aは、ローラ駆動部80に到達するため、複数の搬送ローラ56Aと複数の従動ローラ85とに挟まれて案内方向の下流側に搬送される。更にローラ駆動部90に到達した用紙8Aは、複数の搬送ローラ56Bと複数の従動ローラ95とに挟まれて、案内方向の下流側に搬送される。用紙8Aは、固定板58を経由して本体枠2の内部に搬送され、紙揃え機構100に向けて排出される。 Next, in the first printer 3, after an image is formed on the second surface of the paper 8A, the paper 8A is transported by the second transport amount, and the entire paper 8A is discharged from the paper discharge port 3A. The discharged paper 8A moves to the second position F2 along the guide surface of the path plate 51. At this time, since the paper 8A reaches the roller driving unit 80, the paper 8A is sandwiched between the plurality of transport rollers 56A and the plurality of driven rollers 85 and transported downstream in the guide direction. Further, the paper 8A that has reached the roller driving unit 90 is sandwiched between the plurality of transport rollers 56B and the plurality of driven rollers 95, and is transported downstream in the guide direction. The paper 8 </ b> A is conveyed into the main body frame 2 via the fixed plate 58 and is discharged toward the paper aligning mechanism 100.
 制御部900は、第一プリンタ3で印刷された全ての用紙8Aの搬送が完了した後、用紙搬送工程を終了する。具体的には、制御部900は駆動モータ81,91の駆動を停止する。 The control unit 900 ends the paper conveyance process after the conveyance of all the paper 8A printed by the first printer 3 is completed. Specifically, the control unit 900 stops driving the drive motors 81 and 91.
<3-3.用紙集積工程>
 制御部900は用紙搬送工程と並行して、用紙集積工程を実行する。用紙集積工程は、本体枠2の内部に搬送された用紙8Aを、紙揃え機構100によって集積する工程である。図4、図11~図15、図29、図30を参照して、用紙集積工程を説明する。図29は、紙揃え機構100のうち、テーブル110、接触部材106、右揃え板140、前揃え板150を示す。
<3-3. Paper accumulation process>
The control unit 900 executes a paper stacking process in parallel with the paper transporting process. The paper stacking process is a process of stacking the paper 8A transported into the main body frame 2 by the paper aligning mechanism 100. The paper stacking process will be described with reference to FIGS. 4, 11 to 15, 29, and 30. FIG. FIG. 29 shows the table 110, the contact member 106, the right alignment plate 140, and the front alignment plate 150 in the paper alignment mechanism 100.
 図12及び図13に示すように、制御部900は叩きモータ170及び振動モータ180を駆動して、後述するようにテーブル110を振動させる。図14及び図15に示すように、制御部900は駆動モータ131を駆動して、左揃え板130を第二離隔位置と第二対向位置との間で往復移動させる。制御部900は駆動モータ141を駆動して、右揃え板140を第三対向位置に移動させる。これにより、以下のようにテーブル110上に用紙8Aが集積される。 As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the control unit 900 drives the tapping motor 170 and the vibration motor 180 to vibrate the table 110 as will be described later. As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the controller 900 drives the drive motor 131 to reciprocate the left alignment plate 130 between the second separation position and the second facing position. The controller 900 drives the drive motor 141 to move the right alignment plate 140 to the third facing position. As a result, the sheets 8A are stacked on the table 110 as follows.
 図4、図11及び図14に示すように、用紙搬送工程で搬送される用紙8Aは、初期位置にある束操作部230の後側及び接触部材106の前側を経由して、載置面110Aの上方領域に排出される。このとき、図29に示すように、用紙8Aの右端部17は、用紙8Aの排出方向(右方向)の下流側にある。 As shown in FIGS. 4, 11, and 14, the sheet 8 </ b> A conveyed in the sheet conveying step is placed on the placement surface 110 </ b> A via the rear side of the bundle operation unit 230 and the front side of the contact member 106 at the initial position. It is discharged to the upper area of. At this time, as shown in FIG. 29, the right end portion 17 of the sheet 8A is on the downstream side in the discharge direction (right direction) of the sheet 8A.
 排出された用紙8Aは、上方領域内を慣性で右方向に移動しながら、載置面110Aに向けて自重で落下する。落下する用紙8Aの後端部18は、接触部材106の支持壁部106Aに接触し、支持壁部106Aによって下側から支持される。このとき一対の案内壁部106Bは、後端部18の後側への移動を規制し、且つ後端部18を右方向に案内する。排出された用紙8Aの前端部15は、支持壁部106A上にある後端部18よりも低い位置まで落下する。 The discharged paper 8A falls by its own weight toward the mounting surface 110A while moving rightward in the upper area by inertia. The trailing end 18 of the falling paper 8A contacts the support wall 106A of the contact member 106 and is supported from below by the support wall 106A. At this time, the pair of guide wall portions 106B regulates the rearward movement of the rear end portion 18 and guides the rear end portion 18 in the right direction. The front end portion 15 of the discharged paper 8A falls to a position lower than the rear end portion 18 on the support wall portion 106A.
 従って、後端部18が下側から支持された用紙8Aは、用紙8Aに作用する右方向の慣性力と下方向の重力とによって、右前方向に移動しながら落下する。用紙8Aの右前方向の移動に伴って、後端部18は支持壁部106Aから前側に離隔する。離隔した後端部18は、支持壁部106Aの下側にある載置面110Aに向けて自重で落下する。 Therefore, the paper 8A with the rear end portion 18 supported from below falls while moving in the right front direction by the rightward inertial force acting on the paper 8A and the downward gravity. As the paper 8A moves in the front right direction, the rear end portion 18 is separated from the support wall portion 106A to the front side. The separated rear end portion 18 falls by its own weight toward the placement surface 110A on the lower side of the support wall portion 106A.
 このように、載置面110Aの上方領域に排出された用紙8Aは、前側下方に傾斜した姿勢で載置面110A上に落下する。つまり接触部材106は、用紙8Aが前側に付勢されるように、用紙8Aを載置面110Aに供給できる。従って、載置面110Aに落下する用紙8Aの前端部15は、第一対向位置にある前揃え板150に確実に接触して、第一規制位置に位置決めされる。 Thus, the paper 8A discharged to the upper area of the placement surface 110A falls on the placement surface 110A in a posture inclined downward in the front side. That is, the contact member 106 can supply the paper 8A to the placement surface 110A so that the paper 8A is urged forward. Therefore, the front end portion 15 of the paper 8A falling on the placement surface 110A is reliably in contact with the front alignment plate 150 at the first facing position and positioned at the first restriction position.
 一枚目の用紙8Aは、上方領域に排出され、載置面110A上に直接落下する。二枚目以降の用紙8Aは、先に載置面110Aに載置された用紙8A上に重なる。用紙8Aは、前側下方に傾斜した姿勢で上方領域に排出される。二枚目以降の用紙8Aの後側部は、上方領域に排出されている間、載置面110Aに載置された用紙8Aと接触しにくい。従って、上方領域に排出される用紙8Aと、載置面110Aに載置された用紙8Aとの間で生じる摺動摩擦が抑制される。上下方向に重なる二つの用紙8Aが、摺動摩擦に起因する静電気によって付着することが抑制される。従って、載置面110A上で用紙束8を構成する複数の用紙8Aの位置ずれが生じにくい。 The first sheet 8A is discharged to the upper area and falls directly onto the placement surface 110A. The second and subsequent sheets 8A overlap on the sheet 8A previously placed on the placement surface 110A. The sheet 8A is discharged to the upper area in a posture inclined downward on the front side. The rear side portion of the second and subsequent sheets 8A is less likely to come into contact with the sheet 8A placed on the placement surface 110A while being discharged to the upper region. Therefore, the sliding friction generated between the paper 8A discharged to the upper area and the paper 8A placed on the placement surface 110A is suppressed. The two sheets 8A overlapping in the vertical direction are prevented from adhering due to static electricity due to sliding friction. Therefore, the positional deviation of the plurality of sheets 8A constituting the sheet bundle 8 is unlikely to occur on the placement surface 110A.
 図14及び図29に示すように、載置面110Aに落下する用紙8Aの右端部17は、第三対向位置にある右揃え板140に接触することで、第三規制位置よりも右側に移動することが規制される。載置面110A上にある用紙8Aの左端部16は、第二離隔位置と第二対向位置との間を往復移動する左揃え板130によって左側から付勢される。載置面110A上にある用紙8Aは、第二対向位置の左揃え板130と第三対向位置の右揃え板140とに挟まれる。用紙8Aの左端部16及び右端部17は、それぞれ第二規制位置及び第三規制位置に位置決めされる。 As shown in FIGS. 14 and 29, the right end 17 of the paper 8A falling on the placement surface 110A moves to the right from the third restriction position by contacting the right alignment plate 140 at the third facing position. To be regulated. The left end portion 16 of the paper 8A on the placement surface 110A is urged from the left by the left alignment plate 130 that reciprocates between the second separation position and the second facing position. The sheet 8A on the placement surface 110A is sandwiched between the left alignment plate 130 at the second facing position and the right alignment plate 140 at the third facing position. The left end portion 16 and the right end portion 17 of the paper 8A are positioned at the second restriction position and the third restriction position, respectively.
 このように、載置面110Aに落下した複数の用紙8Aは、各々の前端部15、左端部16及び右端部17が位置決めされた状態で、テーブル110に集積される。本実施形態では、第二テーブル1120が第一回転位置にあるので、載置面110A上にある複数の用紙8Aは、各々の後端部18が各々の前端部15よりも上方に持ち上がるように屈曲する。このため、排出される用紙8Aが搬送方向に対して湾曲する場合でも、テーブル110に集積された複数の用紙8Aは搬送方向に沿って直線状に延びる姿勢に矯正される。 As described above, the plurality of sheets 8A dropped on the placement surface 110A are accumulated on the table 110 in a state where the front end portion 15, the left end portion 16 and the right end portion 17 are positioned. In the present embodiment, since the second table 1120 is at the first rotation position, each of the plurality of sheets 8A on the placement surface 110A has the rear end portion 18 lifted above the front end portion 15. Bend. For this reason, even when the discharged paper 8A is curved with respect to the transport direction, the plurality of paper 8A stacked on the table 110 is corrected to a posture extending linearly along the transport direction.
 図12、図13及び図30に示すように、叩きモータ170はカム部材172を、右側面視で出力軸171を中心に時計回り方向に回転させる。カム部材172の回転中は、駆動モータ162は回転軸164を所定位置で停止させる。従って、貫通孔161Cと回転軸164との間にあるワイヤー166の長さは一定である。 12, 13 and 30, the tapping motor 170 rotates the cam member 172 clockwise around the output shaft 171 when viewed from the right side. While the cam member 172 is rotating, the drive motor 162 stops the rotating shaft 164 at a predetermined position. Accordingly, the length of the wire 166 between the through hole 161C and the rotating shaft 164 is constant.
 カム部材172が初期回転位置から90度回転すると、第二周面174がワイヤー166に接触する。ワイヤー166は、貫通孔161Cと回転軸164との間で一直線状に延びる姿勢から変わらない。カム部材172が更に90度回転すると、第三周面175がワイヤー166と接触する(図30参照)。このとき、第三周面175はワイヤー166を付勢して、ワイヤー166を上方に屈曲させる。ワイヤー166の屈曲に伴って、第二回転位置にある第二テーブル1120は、第三回転位置まで回転する。第三回転位置は、右側面視で固定軸160を中心として、第二回転位置から反時計回り方向に僅かに移動した、第二テーブル1120の回転位置である。 When the cam member 172 rotates 90 degrees from the initial rotation position, the second peripheral surface 174 contacts the wire 166. The wire 166 does not change from a posture extending in a straight line between the through-hole 161C and the rotating shaft 164. When the cam member 172 further rotates 90 degrees, the third peripheral surface 175 comes into contact with the wire 166 (see FIG. 30). At this time, the third peripheral surface 175 urges the wire 166 to bend the wire 166 upward. As the wire 166 is bent, the second table 1120 in the second rotation position rotates to the third rotation position. The third rotation position is a rotation position of the second table 1120 slightly moved counterclockwise from the second rotation position around the fixed shaft 160 in the right side view.
 カム部材172が更に90度回転すると、第四周面176がワイヤー166と接触する。上方に屈曲していたワイヤー166は、貫通孔161Cと回転軸164との間で一直線状に延びる姿勢に戻る。これに伴って、第二テーブル1120は第三回転位置から第二回転位置に戻る。カム部材172が更に90度回転すると、カム部材172は初期回転位置に戻ってワイヤー166から離隔する。カム部材172の連続回転により、第二テーブル1120は第二回転位置と第三回転位置との間を往復揺動する。その結果、第二テーブル1120は振動する。 When the cam member 172 further rotates 90 degrees, the fourth peripheral surface 176 contacts the wire 166. The wire 166 bent upward returns to a posture extending linearly between the through-hole 161C and the rotating shaft 164. Accordingly, the second table 1120 returns from the third rotation position to the second rotation position. When the cam member 172 further rotates 90 degrees, the cam member 172 returns to the initial rotation position and is separated from the wire 166. By the continuous rotation of the cam member 172, the second table 1120 reciprocally swings between the second rotation position and the third rotation position. As a result, the second table 1120 vibrates.
 図13及び図30に示すように、振動モータ180は偏心カム182を、出力軸181を中心に回転させる。例えば偏心カム182の単位時間当たりの回転数は、カム部材172の単位時間当たりの回転数の二倍である。偏心カム182の連続回転により、先端部183は第一位置と第二位置との間を往復移動する。偏心カム182の重心は、出力軸181の上方及び下方に往復移動する。偏心カム182の重心位置の変化に伴って、第二テーブル1120は振動する。 13 and 30, the vibration motor 180 rotates the eccentric cam 182 around the output shaft 181. For example, the rotational speed per unit time of the eccentric cam 182 is twice the rotational speed per unit time of the cam member 172. By the continuous rotation of the eccentric cam 182, the tip end portion 183 reciprocates between the first position and the second position. The center of gravity of the eccentric cam 182 reciprocates above and below the output shaft 181. As the position of the center of gravity of the eccentric cam 182 changes, the second table 1120 vibrates.
 テーブル110に集積された複数の用紙8Aは、載置面110A上で用紙束8を形成する。用紙束8の前端面、左端面、及び右端面は、それぞれ第一規制位置、第二規制位置、及び第二規制位置に沿って略面一に揃えられる。用紙8Aは載置面110Aよりも一回り大きいため、用紙束8は平面視で載置面110Aから前後方向及び左右方向に若干突出する。 The plurality of sheets 8A accumulated on the table 110 form a sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A. The front end face, the left end face, and the right end face of the sheet bundle 8 are substantially flush with each other along the first restriction position, the second restriction position, and the second restriction position, respectively. Since the sheet 8A is slightly larger than the placement surface 110A, the sheet bundle 8 slightly protrudes in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction from the placement surface 110A in plan view.
 制御部900は、第一プリンタ3で印刷された全ての用紙8Aがテーブル110に集積された後、用紙集積工程を終了する。具体的には、制御部900は前揃え板150、左揃え板130、及び右揃え板140を、それぞれ第一離隔位置、第二離隔位置、及び第三離隔位置まで移動させる。制御部900は、叩きモータ170及び振動モータ180の駆動を停止する。 The control unit 900 ends the paper stacking process after all the paper 8A printed by the first printer 3 is stacked on the table 110. Specifically, the controller 900 moves the front alignment plate 150, the left alignment plate 130, and the right alignment plate 140 to the first separation position, the second separation position, and the third separation position, respectively. The control unit 900 stops driving the tapping motor 170 and the vibration motor 180.
 以上説明した用紙集積工程では、用紙8Aがテーブル110に供給(排出)される場合、用紙8Aは接触部材106に接触することで右前方向に移動する。用紙8Aは接触部材106によって前側に付勢されるため、前端部15は前揃え板150に対して確実に接触する。用紙8Aは前揃え板150によって第一規制位置に位置決めされた状態で、テーブル110に集積される。従って、製本装置1は簡易な構造で、複数の用紙8Aを第一規制位置に沿ってテーブル110上に集積できる。 In the paper stacking process described above, when the paper 8A is supplied (discharged) to the table 110, the paper 8A moves to the front right by contacting the contact member 106. Since the sheet 8 </ b> A is urged to the front side by the contact member 106, the front end portion 15 reliably contacts the front alignment plate 150. The paper 8 </ b> A is accumulated on the table 110 in a state where the paper 8 </ b> A is positioned at the first restriction position by the front alignment plate 150. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 has a simple structure and can stack a plurality of sheets 8A on the table 110 along the first restriction position.
 第二テーブル1120では、離隔部1123が近接部1122よりも上方にある。テーブル110に供給される用紙8Aは、第二載置面1121に沿って、前揃え板150に接触する位置まで前方向に移動し易い。従って、製本装置1は簡易な構造で、複数の用紙8Aを第一規制位置に沿ってテーブル110上に集積できる。 In the second table 1120, the separation portion 1123 is above the proximity portion 1122. The sheet 8 </ b> A supplied to the table 110 easily moves in the forward direction along the second placement surface 1121 to a position where it contacts the front aligning plate 150. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 has a simple structure and can stack a plurality of sheets 8A on the table 110 along the first restriction position.
 テーブル110に供給される用紙8Aは、接触部材106から落下しながら搬送方向(右方向)に移動する。用紙8Aの右端部17は、右揃え板140に接触して第三規制位置に位置決めされる。テーブル110に供給される用紙8Aは、左揃え板130によって第二規制位置に位置決めされる。従って、製本装置1は簡易な構造で、複数の用紙8Aを第二規制位置及び第三規制位置に沿ってテーブル110上に集積できる。 The sheet 8A supplied to the table 110 moves in the transport direction (right direction) while dropping from the contact member 106. The right end portion 17 of the paper 8A contacts the right alignment plate 140 and is positioned at the third restriction position. The paper 8 </ b> A supplied to the table 110 is positioned at the second restriction position by the left alignment plate 130. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 has a simple structure and can stack a plurality of sheets 8A on the table 110 along the second restriction position and the third restriction position.
 叩きモータ170及び振動モータ180は、第二回転位置にある第二テーブル1120を振動させる。第二テーブル1120の振動によって、載置面110A上にある用紙8Aは前方向へ移動し易い。従って、製本装置1は複数の用紙8Aを、第一規制位置に沿って正確に位置決めできる。 The tapping motor 170 and the vibration motor 180 vibrate the second table 1120 in the second rotation position. Due to the vibration of the second table 1120, the paper 8A on the placement surface 110A is likely to move forward. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately position the plurality of sheets 8A along the first restriction position.
 接触部材106及び前揃え板150との前後方向距離は、載置面110Aの前後方向長さよりも短い。テーブル110に供給される用紙8Aは、載置面110Aに載置される前に、接触部材106及び前揃え板150に接触し易い。従って、製本装置1は複数の用紙8Aを、第一規制位置に沿って正確に位置決めできる。 The front-rear direction distance between the contact member 106 and the front alignment plate 150 is shorter than the front-rear direction length of the mounting surface 110A. The paper 8A supplied to the table 110 is likely to come into contact with the contact member 106 and the front aligning plate 150 before being placed on the placement surface 110A. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately position the plurality of sheets 8A along the first restriction position.
 テーブル110に用紙8Aが供給される場合、一対の案内壁部106Bが後端部18を案内しつつ、支持壁部106Aが後端部18に下方から接触する。用紙8Aは後方向へ移動することが規制されるので、テーブル110に向けて落下する用紙8Aは前揃え板150と接触し易い。従って、製本装置1は複数の用紙8Aを、第一規制位置に沿って正確に位置決めできる。 When the sheet 8A is supplied to the table 110, the pair of guide wall portions 106B guide the rear end portion 18 and the support wall portion 106A contacts the rear end portion 18 from below. Since the sheet 8 </ b> A is restricted from moving backward, the sheet 8 </ b> A falling toward the table 110 is likely to come into contact with the front alignment plate 150. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately position the plurality of sheets 8A along the first restriction position.
 接触部材106の搬送方向長さは、用紙8Aの搬送方向長さの半分以上である。接触部材106は、用紙8Aの左端部16(搬送方向の上流側端部)がテーブル110の上方に排出されるまで、後端部18を搬送方向に沿って案内できる。従って、製本装置1は複数の用紙8Aを、より適正な位置で集積できる。 The conveyance direction length of the contact member 106 is at least half of the conveyance direction length of the paper 8A. The contact member 106 can guide the rear end portion 18 along the transport direction until the left end portion 16 (upstream end portion in the transport direction) of the paper 8 </ b> A is discharged above the table 110. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can stack a plurality of sheets 8A at a more appropriate position.
<3-4.糊塗布工程>
 制御部900は用紙集積工程の実行後、糊塗布工程を実行する。糊塗布工程は、糊塗布機構300によって表紙9を貼付けるための糊7を、用紙束8の前端面に塗布する工程である。図16~図19、図31~図36を参照して、糊塗布工程を説明する。以下の説明では、用紙束8の前端面8B(図32~図36参照)の左右方向長さは、周面351Aの周長の二倍とする。図32~図36は、用紙束8及び糊塗布ローラ350を平面視で模式的に示す。図32~図35は、周面351A上の特定の仮想点を点Pで示す。図36は、右前側上方から見た用紙束8及び糊塗布ローラ350を模式的に示す(後述の図60も同様)。
<3-4. Paste application process>
The controller 900 executes the glue application process after the paper stacking process. The glue application process is a process in which the glue 7 for applying the cover sheet 9 is applied to the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 by the glue application mechanism 300. The glue applying process will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19 and FIGS. 31 to 36. FIG. In the following description, the length in the left-right direction of the front end surface 8B (see FIGS. 32 to 36) of the sheet bundle 8 is twice the circumferential length of the circumferential surface 351A. 32 to 36 schematically show the sheet bundle 8 and the glue application roller 350 in plan view. 32 to 35 show a specific virtual point on the peripheral surface 351A as a point P. FIG. FIG. 36 schematically shows the sheet bundle 8 and the glue application roller 350 viewed from the upper right front side (the same applies to FIG. 60 described later).
 図31に示すように、まず制御部900は、束操作部230を初期位置から後方に移動させ且つ下降させることで、押え板232を押圧位置まで移動させる。押圧位置は、押え板232の先端部が載置面110A上にある用紙束8の前縁部を上側から付勢する、押え板232の位置である。押え板232が押圧位置にある場合、押え板232と第一載置面1111とによって、用紙束8の前縁部が上下方向から挟持される。このとき、用紙束8の前端面は、押え板232及び第一載置面1111よりも若干前方にある。 As shown in FIG. 31, first, the control unit 900 moves the holding plate 232 to the pressing position by moving the bundle operation unit 230 backward from the initial position and lowering it. The pressing position is a position of the pressing plate 232 where the front end portion of the pressing plate 232 urges the front edge portion of the sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A from the upper side. When the pressing plate 232 is in the pressing position, the front edge portion of the sheet bundle 8 is sandwiched from above and below by the pressing plate 232 and the first placement surface 1111. At this time, the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 is slightly in front of the pressing plate 232 and the first placement surface 1111.
 図16及び図17に示すように、制御部900は、ヒータ347の発熱によって、糊貯留部342に貯留された糊片を溶解し、液状の糊7を生成する。制御部900は、搬送モータ321(図3参照)を駆動して糊塗布部340を左右方向に往復移動させ、且つ駆動モータ319を駆動して糊塗布ローラ350を回転させる。これにより、以下のように用紙束8の前端面8B(図32~図36参照)に糊7が塗布される。 As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the control unit 900 generates the liquid paste 7 by melting the paste pieces stored in the paste storing unit 342 by the heat generated by the heater 347. The control unit 900 drives the transport motor 321 (see FIG. 3) to reciprocate the glue application unit 340 in the left-right direction, and drives the drive motor 319 to rotate the glue application roller 350. As a result, the glue 7 is applied to the front end face 8B (see FIGS. 32 to 36) of the sheet bundle 8 as follows.
 制御部900は、例えば用紙束8の厚さ、用紙8Aの種類、ユーザの選択等に応じて、糊塗布機構300に第一塗布動作~第四塗布動作の何れかを実行させる。図19及び図32を参照し、糊塗布機構300の第一塗布動作を説明する。第一塗布動作における糊塗布部340の移動速さは、糊塗布部340が左右方向の何れに移動する場合も、所定の基準速さである。 The control unit 900 causes the glue application mechanism 300 to perform any one of the first application operation to the fourth application operation according to the thickness of the sheet bundle 8, the type of the sheet 8A, the user's selection, and the like. The first application operation of the glue application mechanism 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 32. The movement speed of the glue application unit 340 in the first application operation is a predetermined reference speed regardless of whether the glue application part 340 moves in the left-right direction.
 第一塗布動作では、図32の状態X11に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350が正転した状態で、糊塗布部340が第一退避位置から第二退避位置まで移動する。このとき周面351Aの周速は、基準速さと略等しい。つまり周面351Aの周速は、糊塗布部340の移動速さ(つまり、糊塗布ローラ350の左右方向の移動速さ)と略等しい。 In the first application operation, as shown in state X11 in FIG. 32, the glue application unit 340 moves from the first retracted position to the second retracted position with the glue applying roller 350 rotated forward. At this time, the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is substantially equal to the reference speed. That is, the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is substantially equal to the moving speed of the glue applying unit 340 (that is, the moving speed of the glue applying roller 350 in the left-right direction).
 糊塗布ローラ350は、前端面8Bに近接する位置を通って左方向に移動する。前端面8Bに近接する位置は、周面351Aが前端面8Bに前側から対向し、且つ、周面351Aが糊7を塗布可能な程度に前端面8Bに近接又は接触する位置である。糊塗布ローラ350が前端面8Bの右端部8Cに近接する位置を、第一近接位置という。糊塗布ローラ350が前端面8Bの左端部8Dに近接する位置を、第二近接位置という。糊塗布ローラ350が第一近接位置から第二近接位置を経由する間に、糊塗布ローラ350は二回正転する。 The glue application roller 350 moves to the left through a position close to the front end face 8B. The position close to the front end face 8B is a position where the peripheral face 351A faces the front end face 8B from the front side, and the peripheral face 351A approaches or contacts the front end face 8B to the extent that the paste 7 can be applied. The position where the glue application roller 350 is close to the right end portion 8C of the front end face 8B is referred to as a first proximity position. The position where the glue application roller 350 is close to the left end portion 8D of the front end face 8B is referred to as a second proximity position. While the glue application roller 350 passes through the second proximity position from the first proximity position, the glue application roller 350 rotates forward twice.
 図18に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350の回転に伴って、糊塗布ローラ350の糊塗布面が糊塗布口346を介して本体部349の後方に露出する。糊塗布面に付着した糊7は、遠心力によって前端面8Bに付着する。これにより、糊塗布ローラ350は、前端面8Bの右端部8Cから左端部8Dに亘って糊7を塗布する。糊塗布部340が第二退避位置に到達した場合、搬送モータ321(図3参照)及び駆動モータ319はそれぞれ駆動を一旦停止する。 18, as the glue application roller 350 rotates, the glue application surface of the glue application roller 350 is exposed behind the main body 349 through the glue application port 346. The glue 7 adhered to the glue application surface adheres to the front end face 8B by centrifugal force. As a result, the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 from the right end 8C to the left end 8D of the front end face 8B. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the second retracted position, the transport motor 321 (see FIG. 3) and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
 次に図32の状態X12に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350が逆転した状態で、糊塗布部340が第二退避位置から第一退避位置まで移動する。このとき周面351Aの周速は、糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さと略等しい。糊塗布ローラ350が第二近接位置から第一近接位置まで移動する間に、糊塗布ローラ350が二回逆転する。これにより、糊7が前端面8Bに更に塗布される。糊塗布部340が第一退避位置に到達した場合、搬送モータ321及び駆動モータ319はそれぞれ駆動を一旦停止する。糊塗布ローラ350は一回目の往復移動を終了する。 Next, as shown in state X12 in FIG. 32, the glue applying unit 340 moves from the second retracted position to the first retracted position in a state where the glue applying roller 350 is reversed. At this time, the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is substantially equal to the moving speed of the glue application roller 350. While the glue application roller 350 moves from the second proximity position to the first proximity position, the glue application roller 350 reverses twice. Thereby, the glue 7 is further applied to the front end face 8B. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the first retracted position, the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving. The glue application roller 350 ends the first reciprocating movement.
 次に図32の状態X13に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350が正転した状態で、糊塗布部340が第一退避位置から第二退避位置まで移動する。このとき周面351Aの周速は、糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さの略二倍である。糊塗布ローラ350が第一近接位置から第二近接位置まで移動する間に、糊塗布ローラ350は四回正転する。糊7が前端面8Bに更に塗布される。糊塗布部340が第二退避位置に到達した場合、搬送モータ321及び駆動モータ319はそれぞれ駆動を一旦停止する。 Next, as shown in state X13 in FIG. 32, the glue application unit 340 moves from the first retracted position to the second retracted position with the glue applying roller 350 rotated forward. At this time, the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is approximately twice the moving speed of the glue application roller 350. While the glue application roller 350 moves from the first proximity position to the second proximity position, the glue application roller 350 rotates forward four times. The glue 7 is further applied to the front end face 8B. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the second retracted position, the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
 次に図32の状態X14に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350が逆転した状態で、糊塗布部340が第二退避位置から第一退避位置まで移動する。このとき周面351Aの周速は、糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さの略二倍である。糊塗布ローラ350が第二近接位置から第一近接位置まで移動する間に、糊塗布ローラ350が四回逆転する。糊7が前端面8Bに更に塗布される。糊塗布部340が第一退避位置に到達した場合、搬送モータ321及び駆動モータ319はそれぞれ駆動を一旦停止する。糊塗布ローラ350は二回目の往復移動を終了する。 Next, as shown in state X14 in FIG. 32, the glue application unit 340 moves from the second retracted position to the first retracted position with the glue applying roller 350 reversed. At this time, the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is approximately twice the moving speed of the glue application roller 350. While the glue application roller 350 moves from the second proximity position to the first proximity position, the glue application roller 350 reverses four times. The glue 7 is further applied to the front end face 8B. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the first retracted position, the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving. The glue application roller 350 ends the second reciprocating movement.
 次に図32の状態X15,X16に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350は一回目の往復移動と同様に三回目の往復移動をする。糊7が前端面8Bに更に塗布されて、第一塗布動作が終了する。 Next, as shown in the states X15 and X16 in FIG. 32, the glue application roller 350 performs the third reciprocation similarly to the first reciprocation. The paste 7 is further applied to the front end face 8B, and the first application operation is completed.
 第一塗布動作は、以下のような作用を奏する。一回目の往復移動では、糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さと周面351Aの周速とが略等しい。この場合、前端面8Bに塗布された直後の糊7と、その糊7と接触する周面351Aとの間で発生する摩擦抵抗は低減される。前端面8Bに付着した糊7にかかる負荷が抑制されるため、前端面8Bに付着した糊7は左右方向に移動及び変形しにくい。従って、一回目の往復移動を行う糊塗布ローラ350は、前端面8Bに均等に糊7を塗布できる。 The first application operation has the following effects. In the first reciprocating movement, the moving speed of the glue applying roller 350 and the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A are substantially equal. In this case, the frictional resistance generated between the paste 7 immediately after being applied to the front end surface 8B and the peripheral surface 351A in contact with the paste 7 is reduced. Since the load applied to the glue 7 attached to the front end face 8B is suppressed, the glue 7 attached to the front end face 8B is difficult to move and deform in the left-right direction. Therefore, the glue application roller 350 that performs the first reciprocating movement can apply the glue 7 evenly to the front end face 8B.
 二回目の往復移動では、周面351Aの周速が糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さよりも大きい。前端面8Bに塗布された直後の糊7は、糊塗布ローラ350の回転方向上流側から周面351Aと接触し、前端面8Bに向けて付勢される。二回目の往復移動時に塗布される糊7は、一回目の往復移動時に塗布された糊7と共に、用紙束8を形成する複数の用紙8Aの間に進入し易い。従って、二回目の往復移動を行う糊塗布ローラ350は、前端面8Bに糊7を塗布すると同時に、複数の用紙8Aの間に糊7を進入させることができる。 In the second reciprocating movement, the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is larger than the moving speed of the glue application roller 350. The glue 7 immediately after being applied to the front end face 8B comes into contact with the circumferential surface 351A from the upstream side in the rotational direction of the glue application roller 350 and is urged toward the front end face 8B. The glue 7 applied during the second reciprocating movement easily enters between the plurality of sheets 8A forming the sheet bundle 8 together with the glue 7 applied during the first reciprocating movement. Accordingly, the glue application roller 350 that performs the second reciprocating movement can apply the glue 7 to the front end face 8B and simultaneously allow the glue 7 to enter between the plurality of sheets 8A.
 三回目の往復移動では、糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さと周面351Aの周速とが略等しい。この場合、一回目の往復移動と同様に、糊7と周面351Aとの摩擦抵抗は低減される。従って、三回目の往復移動を行う糊塗布ローラ350は、糊7を前端面8Bに均等に塗布できる。 In the third reciprocating movement, the moving speed of the glue applying roller 350 and the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A are substantially equal. In this case, as in the first reciprocation, the frictional resistance between the glue 7 and the peripheral surface 351A is reduced. Accordingly, the glue application roller 350 that performs the third reciprocating movement can apply the glue 7 evenly to the front end face 8B.
 第一塗布動作では、連続する二回の往復移動(例えば、一回目と二回目の往復移動)の各々で、周面351Aの周速が異なる。従って製本装置1は、前端面8Bに十分な糊7を塗布すると同時に、前端面8Bに付着させる糊7を適量に調整できる。 In the first application operation, the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is different for each of the two consecutive reciprocating movements (for example, the first and second reciprocating movements). Accordingly, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply a sufficient amount of glue 7 to the front end face 8B and at the same time adjust the glue 7 to be attached to the front end face 8B to an appropriate amount.
 糊塗布ローラ350の左右方向の移動は、糊塗布ローラ350の回転とは独立して制御される。糊塗布ローラ350は、前端面8Bに十分な糊7を塗布するために、適切な回転速さで回転できる。従って製本装置1は、糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さに応じて十分な糊7を前端面8Bに塗布できる。 The lateral movement of the glue application roller 350 is controlled independently of the rotation of the glue application roller 350. The glue application roller 350 can rotate at an appropriate rotation speed in order to apply sufficient glue 7 to the front end face 8B. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply a sufficient amount of glue 7 to the front end face 8B according to the moving speed of the glue application roller 350.
 図33を参照し、糊塗布機構300の第二塗布動作を説明する。まず図33の状態X21に示すように、図32の状態X11と同様の動作によって、糊塗布ローラ350が前端面8Bに糊7を塗布する。糊塗布部340が第二退避位置に到達した場合、搬送モータ321及び駆動モータ319はそれぞれ駆動を一旦停止する。 The second application operation of the glue application mechanism 300 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in a state X21 in FIG. 33, the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 to the front end face 8B by the same operation as in the state X11 in FIG. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the second retracted position, the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
 次に図32の状態X22に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350の回転を停止した状態で、糊塗布部340が第二退避位置から第一退避位置まで基準速さで移動する。糊塗布ローラ350の移動中に糊塗布ローラ350は回転しないので、糊塗布ローラ350は糊7を前端面8Bに塗布しない。糊塗布部340が第一退避位置に到達すると、第二塗布動作は終了する。 Next, as shown in a state X22 in FIG. 32, the glue applying unit 340 moves at a reference speed from the second retracted position to the first retracted position with the rotation of the glue applying roller 350 stopped. Since the glue application roller 350 does not rotate during the movement of the glue application roller 350, the glue application roller 350 does not apply the glue 7 to the front end face 8B. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the first retracted position, the second application operation is terminated.
 第二塗布動作は、以下のような作用を奏する。例えば複数の用紙8Aが薄紙である場合及び用紙束8の厚みが小さい場合等には、前端面8Bに塗布する糊7の量は少ないほうが望ましい。この場合、糊塗布ローラ350が第二塗布動作を実行することで、製本装置1は前端面8Bに塗布する糊7の量を第一塗布動作に比べて低減できる。糊塗布ローラ350の一回の往復移動で糊塗布動作を終了する。従って製本装置1は、糊7の使用量を抑制しつつ糊塗布工程を高速化できる。 The second application operation has the following effects. For example, when the plurality of sheets 8A are thin sheets, or when the thickness of the sheet bundle 8 is small, it is desirable that the amount of glue 7 applied to the front end surface 8B is small. In this case, when the glue application roller 350 performs the second application operation, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can reduce the amount of the adhesive 7 applied to the front end surface 8B compared to the first application operation. The glue application operation is completed by one reciprocating movement of the glue application roller 350. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can speed up the glue application process while suppressing the amount of glue 7 used.
 図34を参照し、糊塗布機構300の第三塗布動作を説明する。まず図34の状態X31に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350が正転した状態で、糊塗布部340が第一退避位置から第二退避位置まで移動する。このとき、糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さは、基準速さの略二倍である。周面351Aの周速は、基準速さと略等しい。糊塗布ローラ350が第一近接位置から第二近接位置まで移動する間に、糊塗布ローラ350が一回正転する。糊塗布部340が第二退避位置に到達した場合、搬送モータ321及び駆動モータ319はそれぞれ駆動を一旦停止する。 34, the third application operation of the glue application mechanism 300 will be described. First, as shown in a state X31 in FIG. 34, the glue application roller 340 moves from the first retracted position to the second retracted position in a state where the glue applying roller 350 is rotated forward. At this time, the moving speed of the glue application roller 350 is approximately twice the reference speed. The peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is substantially equal to the reference speed. While the glue application roller 350 moves from the first proximity position to the second proximity position, the glue application roller 350 rotates forward once. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the second retracted position, the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
 次に図34の状態X32に示すように、図32の状態X12と同様の動作によって、糊塗布ローラ350が糊7を前端面8Bに更に塗布する。糊塗布部340が第一退避位置に到達すると、第三塗布動作は終了する。 Next, as shown in state X32 in FIG. 34, the glue application roller 350 further applies glue 7 to the front end face 8B by the same operation as in state X12 in FIG. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the first retracted position, the third application operation is terminated.
 第三塗布動作は、以下のような作用を奏する。図34の状態X31では、糊塗布ローラ350が第一近接位置から第二近接位置まで移動する間に周面351Aが二回以上正転する場合と比較して、糊塗布ローラ350が前端面8Bに塗布する糊7の量を低減できる。第二近接位置まで移動する糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さは基準速さの略二倍であり、且つ糊塗布ローラ350は一回の往復移動で糊塗布動作を終了する。従って製本装置1は、糊7の使用量を抑制しつつ、糊塗布工程を高速化できる。 The third application operation has the following effects. In the state X31 of FIG. 34, compared with the case where the circumferential surface 351A rotates forward twice or more while the glue application roller 350 moves from the first proximity position to the second proximity position, the glue application roller 350 has the front end face 8B. It is possible to reduce the amount of the glue 7 applied to the surface. The moving speed of the glue application roller 350 that moves to the second proximity position is approximately twice the reference speed, and the glue application roller 350 ends the glue application operation in one reciprocating movement. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can speed up the glue application process while suppressing the amount of glue 7 used.
 図35を参照し、糊塗布機構300の第四塗布動作を説明する。まず図35の状態X41に示すように、図32の状態X11と同様の動作によって、糊塗布ローラ350が前端面8Bに糊7を塗布する。糊塗布部340が第二退避位置に到達した場合、搬送モータ321及び駆動モータ319はそれぞれ駆動を一旦停止する。 Referring to FIG. 35, the fourth application operation of the glue application mechanism 300 will be described. First, as shown in a state X41 in FIG. 35, the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 to the front end face 8B by the same operation as in the state X11 in FIG. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the second retracted position, the transport motor 321 and the drive motor 319 each temporarily stop driving.
 次に図35の状態X42に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350が逆転した状態で、糊塗布部340が第二退避位置から第一退避位置まで基準速さで移動する。このとき周面351Aの周速は、糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さの略二倍である。糊塗布ローラ350が第二近接位置から第一近接位置まで移動する間に、糊塗布ローラ350は四回逆転する。糊7が前端面8Bに更に塗布される。糊塗布部340が第一退避位置に到達した場合、第四塗布動作は終了する。 Next, as shown in a state X42 in FIG. 35, the glue application roller 340 moves at a reference speed from the second retracted position to the first retracted position with the glue applying roller 350 reversed. At this time, the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A is approximately twice the moving speed of the glue application roller 350. While the glue application roller 350 moves from the second proximity position to the first proximity position, the glue application roller 350 reverses four times. The glue 7 is further applied to the front end face 8B. When the glue application unit 340 reaches the first retracted position, the fourth application operation ends.
 第四塗布動作は、以下のような作用を奏する。第四塗布動作では、糊塗布ローラ350が、第一退避位置まで移動する間、四回逆転して糊7を塗布する。糊塗布ローラ350が塗布する糊7の量は、周速が基準速さと略等しい場合と比較して増える。糊塗布ローラ350は一回の往復移動で糊塗布動作を終了する。従って製本装置1は、糊塗布工程を高速化しつつ十分な糊7を前端面8Bに塗布できる。 The fourth application operation has the following effects. In the fourth application operation, while the glue application roller 350 moves to the first retracted position, the glue 7 is applied in the reverse direction four times. The amount of glue 7 applied by the glue application roller 350 increases as compared with the case where the peripheral speed is substantially equal to the reference speed. The glue application roller 350 completes the glue application operation with a single reciprocation. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply sufficient glue 7 to the front end face 8B while speeding up the glue application process.
 糊塗布機構300は、第一~第四塗布動作を選択的に実行することで、糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さ及び周面351Aの周速を適宜変更できる。製本装置1は周面351Aの周速を変更することで、前端面8Bに塗布する糊7の量を必要に応じて調整できる。製本装置1は糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さを変更することで、糊塗布工程の所要時間を必要に応じて調整できる。なお、第一~第四塗布動作において、糊塗布ローラ350の移動速さ及び移動回数と周面351Aの周速とは、上記の例示に限定されず適宜変更してもよい。 The glue application mechanism 300 can appropriately change the moving speed of the glue application roller 350 and the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A by selectively executing the first to fourth application operations. The bookbinding apparatus 1 can adjust the amount of the glue 7 applied to the front end face 8B as necessary by changing the peripheral speed of the peripheral face 351A. The bookbinding apparatus 1 can adjust the time required for the glue application process as necessary by changing the moving speed of the glue application roller 350. In the first to fourth application operations, the movement speed and the number of movements of the glue application roller 350 and the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface 351A are not limited to the above examples, and may be changed as appropriate.
 制御部900は、第一~第四塗布動作の何れかの実行後、糊塗布工程を終了する。具体的には、制御部900は、搬送モータ321及び駆動モータ319の駆動を停止する。ところで、先述したように可動部301の上下方向は、製本装置1の上下方向に対して若干右側に傾斜する。(図19参照)。糊塗布ローラ350は、軸線が上方向に向けて右側に傾斜する姿勢で配置される。従って糊塗布機構300は、第一~第四塗布動作の何れかの実行時に、以下の態様で糊7を用紙束8に塗布する。 The control unit 900 ends the glue application process after performing any one of the first to fourth application operations. Specifically, the control unit 900 stops driving the conveyance motor 321 and the drive motor 319. Incidentally, as described above, the vertical direction of the movable portion 301 is slightly inclined to the right with respect to the vertical direction of the bookbinding apparatus 1. (See FIG. 19). The glue application roller 350 is arranged in such a posture that the axis is inclined to the right side in the upward direction. Accordingly, the glue application mechanism 300 applies the glue 7 to the sheet bundle 8 in the following manner when any one of the first to fourth application operations is performed.
 図19及び図36に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350が第一近接位置と第二近接位置との間を経由するとき、糊塗布面に付着した糊7は、遠心力によって用紙束8の前縁部8Eへ向けて移動する。このとき、糊塗布面のうちで前端面8Bと略同じ高さ位置に付着した糊7は、前端面8Bに付着する。 As shown in FIGS. 19 and 36, when the glue application roller 350 passes between the first proximity position and the second proximity position, the glue 7 attached to the glue application surface is moved in front of the sheet bundle 8 by centrifugal force. Move toward the edge 8E. At this time, the glue 7 that has adhered to the front end face 8B in the same height position as the front end face 8B adheres to the front end face 8B.
 図36の状態Y11に示すように、糊塗布部340が第一退避位置から第二退避位置まで移動する場合、糊塗布ローラ350は正転する。回転する周面351Aのうち前端面8Bに最も近接する部分を、糊塗布面の近接部という。糊塗布面の近接部は、周面351Aが前端面8Bに対して相対移動する方向の上流側へ向かって移動する。 36, when the glue application unit 340 moves from the first retracted position to the second retracted position, the glue applying roller 350 rotates normally. A portion of the rotating peripheral surface 351A that is closest to the front end surface 8B is referred to as a proximity portion of the glue application surface. The proximity portion of the paste application surface moves toward the upstream side in the direction in which the peripheral surface 351A moves relative to the front end surface 8B.
 用紙束8のうち前端面8Bと上端面8Fとを接続する部分は、第一角部8Hである。周面351Aのうち第一角部8Hと略同じ高さの部分を、第一対向部という。糊塗布ローラ350が第一近接位置から第二近接位置まで移動する間に、第一対向部は第一角部8Hに対して糊7をこすりつけるように回転する。従って、前端面8B及び第一角部8Hに糊7が塗布される。 The portion of the sheet bundle 8 that connects the front end surface 8B and the upper end surface 8F is the first corner 8H. A portion of the peripheral surface 351 </ b> A having the same height as the first corner portion 8 </ b> H is referred to as a first facing portion. While the glue application roller 350 moves from the first proximity position to the second proximity position, the first facing portion rotates to rub the glue 7 against the first corner portion 8H. Accordingly, the paste 7 is applied to the front end face 8B and the first corner 8H.
 糊塗布ローラ350が第一近接位置から第二近接位置まで移動する間に、用紙束8の前縁部8Eは正転する糊塗布面に接触することで若干下側に撓む。詳細には、周面351Aの近接部は、糊塗布ローラ350が前端面8Bに対して相対移動する方向の上流側に向かって移動する。近接部と前端面8Bとの間に発生する摩擦抵抗が相対的に小さいため、前縁部8Eは滑らかに下方向に撓み易い。前縁部8Eが若干下側に撓むことで、複数の用紙8Aが互いに離隔し易い。前端面8Bに塗布される糊7は、複数の用紙8Aの間に進入し易い。 While the glue application roller 350 moves from the first proximity position to the second proximity position, the front edge portion 8E of the sheet bundle 8 is bent slightly downward by contacting the normally rotating glue application surface. Specifically, the proximity portion of the peripheral surface 351A moves toward the upstream side in the direction in which the glue application roller 350 moves relative to the front end surface 8B. Since the frictional resistance generated between the proximity portion and the front end face 8B is relatively small, the front edge portion 8E is easily bent downward smoothly. The front edge 8E is slightly bent downward, so that the plurality of sheets 8A are easily separated from each other. The glue 7 applied to the front end surface 8B easily enters between the plurality of sheets 8A.
 図36の状態Y12に示すように、糊塗布部340が第二退避位置から第一退避位置まで移動する場合、糊塗布ローラ350は逆転する。糊塗布面の近接部は、周面351Aが前端面8Bに対して相対移動する方向の上流側へ向かって移動する。用紙束8のうち前端面8Bと下端面8Gとを接続する部分は、第二角部8Iである。周面351Aのうち第二角部8Iと略同じ高さの部分を、第二対向部という。糊塗布ローラ350が第二近接位置から第一近接位置まで移動する間に、第二対向部は第二角部8Iに対して糊7をこすりつけるように回転する。従って、前端面8B及び第二角部8Iに糊7が塗布される。 36, when the glue application unit 340 moves from the second retracted position to the first retracted position, the glue applying roller 350 reverses. The proximity portion of the paste application surface moves toward the upstream side in the direction in which the peripheral surface 351A moves relative to the front end surface 8B. A portion of the sheet bundle 8 that connects the front end surface 8B and the lower end surface 8G is a second corner portion 8I. A portion of the peripheral surface 351A having substantially the same height as the second corner portion 8I is referred to as a second facing portion. While the glue application roller 350 moves from the second proximity position to the first proximity position, the second facing portion rotates to rub the glue 7 against the second corner portion 8I. Accordingly, the paste 7 is applied to the front end face 8B and the second corner 8I.
 糊塗布ローラ350が第二近接位置から第一近接位置まで移動する間に、用紙束8の前縁部8Eは逆転する糊塗布面に接触することで若干上側に撓む。詳細には、周面351Aの近接部は、糊塗布ローラ350が前端面8Bに対して相対移動する方向の上流側に向かって移動する。近接部と前端面8Bとの間に発生する摩擦抵抗が相対的に小さいため、前縁部8Eは滑らかに上方向に撓み易い。前縁部8Eが若干上側に撓むことで、複数の用紙8Aが互いに離隔し易い。前端面8Bに塗布される糊7は、複数の用紙8Aの間に進入し易い。 While the glue application roller 350 moves from the second proximity position to the first proximity position, the front edge 8E of the sheet bundle 8 is bent slightly upward by contacting the reverse glue application surface. Specifically, the proximity portion of the peripheral surface 351A moves toward the upstream side in the direction in which the glue application roller 350 moves relative to the front end surface 8B. Since the frictional resistance generated between the proximity portion and the front end surface 8B is relatively small, the front edge portion 8E is easily bent upward smoothly. Since the front edge portion 8E is slightly bent upward, the plurality of sheets 8A are easily separated from each other. The glue 7 applied to the front end surface 8B easily enters between the plurality of sheets 8A.
 このように糊塗布ローラ350は、第一角部8H、及び第一角部8Hの下方にある第二角部8Iの順に、糊7を塗布する。従って、前縁部8Eに塗布した糊7は、前縁部8Eから垂れにくい。なお、糊塗布ローラ350は、第一近接位置から第二近接位置まで移動する場合に逆転し、第二近接位置から第一近接位置まで移動する場合に正転してもよい。この場合、糊塗布ローラ350は、前端面8Bに糊7を塗布すると共に、第二角部8I及び第一角部8Hの順に糊7を塗布する。 Thus, the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 in the order of the first corner 8H and the second corner 8I below the first corner 8H. Therefore, the glue 7 applied to the front edge 8E is unlikely to sag from the front edge 8E. Note that the glue application roller 350 may reverse when moving from the first proximity position to the second proximity position, and may rotate normally when moving from the second proximity position to the first proximity position. In this case, the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 to the front end face 8B, and applies the glue 7 in the order of the second corner portion 8I and the first corner portion 8H.
 以上説明したように、糊塗布工程では、紙揃え機構100及び束操作機構200によって、用紙束8が静止した状態で保持される。糊塗布ローラ350が左右方向に移動することで、静止した用紙束8の前端面8Bに対して糊7が塗布される。製本装置1は、複数の用紙8Aが集積された後に、用紙束8を移動させる必要なく、用紙束8に糊7を塗布できる。従って、製本装置1の小型化を実現できる。 As described above, in the glue application process, the sheet bundle 8 is held in a stationary state by the paper alignment mechanism 100 and the bundle operation mechanism 200. As the glue application roller 350 moves in the left-right direction, the glue 7 is applied to the front end face 8B of the stationary sheet bundle 8. The bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply the glue 7 to the sheet bundle 8 without having to move the sheet bundle 8 after the plurality of sheets 8A are stacked. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can be downsized.
 糊塗布機構300が糊7を塗布するのに伴って、糊貯留部342に貯留される糊7は減少し、糊7の上端面である液面は降下する(図17参照)。糊塗布ローラ350はその軸線が水平方向と交差する姿勢で配置される。本実施形態では、糊塗布ローラ350は、軸線が上方向に向けて右側に傾斜する姿勢で配置される。従って、糊貯留部342内で糊7の液面が下降した場合でも、糊塗布ローラ350に糊7が供給される状態が維持されやすい。つまり、糊貯留部342に貯留された糊7の量、及び周面351Aの直径に関わらず、糊塗布ローラ350は糊貯留部342に貯留された糊7と接触し易い。従って製本装置1は、糊塗布ローラ350の直径が小さくても、用紙束8に十分な糊7を塗布できる。 As the glue application mechanism 300 applies the glue 7, the glue 7 stored in the glue storage section 342 decreases, and the liquid level that is the upper end surface of the glue 7 falls (see FIG. 17). The glue application roller 350 is arranged in such a posture that its axis intersects the horizontal direction. In the present embodiment, the glue application roller 350 is disposed in such a posture that the axis is inclined to the right side in the upward direction. Therefore, even when the liquid level of the glue 7 falls in the glue reservoir 342, the state in which the glue 7 is supplied to the glue application roller 350 is easily maintained. That is, regardless of the amount of the glue 7 stored in the glue storage unit 342 and the diameter of the peripheral surface 351 </ b> A, the glue application roller 350 easily comes into contact with the glue 7 stored in the glue storage unit 342. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply a sufficient amount of glue 7 to the sheet bundle 8 even when the diameter of the glue application roller 350 is small.
 前壁部349Aは糊塗布ローラ350に向けて下側に傾斜する(図17参照)。糊貯留部342に貯留された糊7は、前壁部349Aに沿って糊塗布ローラ350へ向けて移動し易い。糊貯留部342に貯留された糊7の量、及び周面351Aの直径に関わらず、糊塗布ローラ350は糊貯留部342に貯留された糊7と接触し易い。従って製本装置1は、糊塗布ローラ350の直径が小さくても、用紙束8に十分な糊7を塗布できる。 The front wall portion 349A is inclined downward toward the glue application roller 350 (see FIG. 17). The glue 7 stored in the glue storage part 342 easily moves toward the glue application roller 350 along the front wall part 349A. Regardless of the amount of glue 7 stored in the glue storage unit 342 and the diameter of the peripheral surface 351 </ b> A, the glue application roller 350 easily comes into contact with the glue 7 stored in the glue storage unit 342. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can apply a sufficient amount of glue 7 to the sheet bundle 8 even when the diameter of the glue application roller 350 is small.
 糊塗布ローラ350の直径が小さい場合、周面351Aの表面積も小さいので、周面351Aに付着した糊7と空気との接触面積も小さい。糊塗布ローラ350の糊塗布面が周面351Aの周方向の半分未満であるため、本体部349の内部から露出する糊7の量が抑制される。従って製本装置1は、糊塗布面に付着する糊7が臭いを生じる場合でも、本体部349の外部に糊7の臭いが拡散することを抑制できる。 When the diameter of the glue application roller 350 is small, the surface area of the peripheral surface 351A is also small, so the contact area between the glue 7 attached to the peripheral surface 351A and the air is also small. Since the glue application surface of the glue application roller 350 is less than half of the circumferential direction of the peripheral surface 351A, the amount of the glue 7 exposed from the inside of the main body 349 is suppressed. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can suppress the smell of the glue 7 from diffusing outside the main body 349 even when the glue 7 attached to the glue application surface produces a smell.
 複数の溝部351Cに進入した糊7のうち、前端面8Bに付着しなかった糊7は、溝部351Cに滞留するため周面351Aから垂れにくい(図18参照)。溝部351Cに滞留する糊7は、周面351Aの回転に伴って糊貯留部342に再び戻る。従って製本装置1は、臭いを生じる糊7を使用する場合でも、糊7の臭いの拡散を抑制できる。 Among the glues 7 that have entered the plurality of groove portions 351C, the glue 7 that does not adhere to the front end surface 8B stays in the groove portions 351C, and thus hardly drops from the peripheral surface 351A (see FIG. 18). The glue 7 staying in the groove part 351C returns to the glue storing part 342 again with the rotation of the peripheral surface 351A. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can suppress the spread of the odor of the paste 7 even when the odor generating paste 7 is used.
 糊受け部材360は、用紙束8に塗布されずに落下した糊7を受ける(図16参照)。糊受け部材360に落下した糊7は、固化すると臭いが発生しにくい。ヒータ347の発熱によって生じた熱は、断熱性を有する連結板361によって遮断されるので、糊受設置部313に伝わりにくい。糊受け部材360が受ける液状の糊7は、加熱されずに固化し易い。従って製本装置1は、臭いを生じる糊7を使用する場合でも、糊7の臭いの拡散を抑制できる。 The glue receiving member 360 receives the glue 7 that has fallen without being applied to the sheet bundle 8 (see FIG. 16). The glue 7 dropped on the glue receiving member 360 is less likely to generate odor when solidified. Since the heat generated by the heat generated by the heater 347 is blocked by the connecting plate 361 having heat insulating properties, it is difficult for the heat to be transmitted to the glue receiving installation portion 313. The liquid paste 7 received by the paste receiving member 360 is easily solidified without being heated. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can suppress the spread of the odor of the paste 7 even when the odor generating paste 7 is used.
<3-5.表紙搬送工程>
 初期化工程の実行後、制御部900からの印刷指示又はユーザによる印刷指示に応じて、第二プリンタ4(図1参照)は冊子の表紙に表す画像を表紙9に印刷する。制御部900は第二プリンタ4の印刷動作と並行して、表紙搬送工程を実行する。表紙搬送工程は、第二プリンタ4で印刷された表紙9を、表紙保持機構400によって本体枠2の内部に搬送する工程である。
<3-5. Cover transport process>
After execution of the initialization process, the second printer 4 (see FIG. 1) prints an image represented on the cover of the booklet on the cover 9 according to a print instruction from the control unit 900 or a print instruction by the user. In parallel with the printing operation of the second printer 4, the control unit 900 executes a cover sheet transporting process. The front cover transporting step is a step of transporting the front cover 9 printed by the second printer 4 to the inside of the main body frame 2 by the front cover holding mechanism 400.
 図20~図23、図37~図44を参照して、表紙搬送工程を説明する。図39は、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440を右側面視で模式的に示す。図42は、左側面視で、テーブル110が第一搬送位置にある紙揃え機構100と、貼付基準位置にある表紙保持機構400の位置関係を示し、且つ左側紙揃え部103、右側紙揃え部104、接触部材106等を省略する。 The cover transporting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23 and FIGS. 37 to 44. FIG. 39 schematically shows the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 in a right side view. FIG. 42 shows the positional relationship between the sheet aligning mechanism 100 in which the table 110 is in the first transport position and the cover holding mechanism 400 in the sticking reference position in the left side view, and the left sheet aligning unit 103 and the right sheet aligning unit. 104, the contact member 106, and the like are omitted.
 図37に示すように、まず制御部900は、可動部401をその可動範囲の下端部から上方向に移動して、受取位置に位置決めする。受取位置は、可動部401が表紙供給口22(図1参照)を介して本体枠2の上側に突出する、可動部401の上下方向位置である。制御部900は、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440を、各々の可動範囲の上端部まで移動して、表紙供給部6の直下に位置決めする。制御部900は、操作領域430A,440Aを開放状態に制御する(図23参照)。 As shown in FIG. 37, first, the control unit 900 moves the movable unit 401 upward from the lower end of the movable range and positions the movable unit 401 at the receiving position. The receiving position is a vertical position of the movable portion 401 where the movable portion 401 protrudes above the main body frame 2 through the cover sheet supply port 22 (see FIG. 1). The control unit 900 moves the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 to the upper end of each movable range and positions them directly below the cover sheet supply unit 6. The control unit 900 controls the operation areas 430A and 440A to be in an open state (see FIG. 23).
 第二プリンタ4で印刷された表紙9は、表紙供給部6によって表紙供給口22に向けて案内される。表紙供給部6から排出された表紙9は、一対の規制ピン463(図21参照)の間を通って、上クランプ430の操作領域430Aに進入する。更に表紙9は、一対の規制ピン464(図21参照)の間を通って、上クランプ430の直下に位置する下クランプ440の操作領域440Aに進入する。従って、操作領域430A,440Aでは、表紙9の左右方向位置が一対の規制ピン463,464によって規制される。 The cover 9 printed by the second printer 4 is guided toward the cover supply port 22 by the cover supply unit 6. The cover 9 discharged from the cover supply unit 6 passes between the pair of restriction pins 463 (see FIG. 21) and enters the operation region 430A of the upper clamp 430. Further, the cover sheet 9 passes between a pair of restriction pins 464 (see FIG. 21) and enters the operation region 440A of the lower clamp 440 positioned immediately below the upper clamp 430. Accordingly, in the operation areas 430A and 440A, the position of the cover 9 in the left-right direction is restricted by the pair of restriction pins 463 and 464.
 このとき、操作領域430A,440Aは何れも開放状態であるため、第一保持力及び第二保持力は何れも実質的に0である。第一保持力は、表紙9のうちで操作領域440Aの内部に配置された部分が、下クランプ440から上下方向に移動する運動を妨げる力である。第二保持力は、表紙9のうちで操作領域430Aの内部に配置された部分が、上クランプ430から上下方向に移動する運動を妨げる力である。 At this time, since the operation areas 430A and 440A are both open, the first holding force and the second holding force are both substantially zero. The first holding force is a force that prevents the portion of the cover 9 that is disposed inside the operation region 440 </ b> A from moving up and down from the lower clamp 440. The second holding force is a force that prevents a portion of the cover 9 that is disposed inside the operation region 430 </ b> A from moving up and down from the upper clamp 430.
 制御部900は、第一表紙搬送処理及び第二表紙搬送処理の何れかを開始して、表紙保持機構400の動作を制御する。ユーザは制御部900に対して、第一表紙搬送処理及び第二表紙搬送処理の何れを実行対象として予め設定できる。 The control unit 900 controls the operation of the cover holding mechanism 400 by starting either the first cover transport process or the second cover transport process. The user can set in advance either the first cover sheet conveyance process or the second cover sheet conveyance process to the control unit 900 as an execution target.
 図38~図42を参照して、第一表紙搬送処理を説明する。図38に示すように、まず用紙枚数が変数Aとして取得される(S1)。用紙枚数は、テーブル110上にある用紙束8を構成する用紙8Aの数量である。例えば制御部900のCPUは、ユーザが入力した用紙枚数、又は第一プリンタ3が印刷した用紙枚数を、制御部900のRAM(図示外)に記憶された変数Aに設定する。 The first cover transport process will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 42. FIG. As shown in FIG. 38, first, the number of sheets is acquired as a variable A (S1). The number of sheets is the number of sheets 8A constituting the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110. For example, the CPU of the control unit 900 sets the number of sheets input by the user or the number of sheets printed by the first printer 3 in the variable A stored in the RAM (not shown) of the control unit 900.
 用紙厚さが変数Bとして取得される(S3)。用紙厚さは、テーブル110上にある用紙束8を構成する用紙8Aの上下方向長さである。例えば制御部900のCPUは、ユーザが入力した用紙厚さ、又は予め設定された用紙厚さの基準値を、制御部900のRAMに記憶された変数Bに設定する。 The paper thickness is acquired as variable B (S3). The paper thickness is the length in the vertical direction of the paper 8A constituting the paper bundle 8 on the table 110. For example, the CPU of the control unit 900 sets the sheet thickness input by the user or a preset reference value of the sheet thickness in the variable B stored in the RAM of the control unit 900.
 表紙サイズが変数Cとして取得される(S5)。表紙サイズは、表紙保持機構400に供給される表紙9の上下方向長さである。例えば制御部900のCPUは、ユーザが入力した表紙サイズ、又は予め設定された表紙サイズの基準値を、制御部900のRAMに記憶された変数Cに設定する。 The cover size is acquired as variable C (S5). The cover size is the vertical length of the cover 9 supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400. For example, the CPU of the control unit 900 sets a cover size input by the user or a reference value for a preset cover size in the variable C stored in the RAM of the control unit 900.
 変数A,Bに基づいて用紙束8の厚さが変数Dとして算出される(S7)。用紙束8の厚さは、テーブル110上にある用紙束8の上下方向長さ(詳細には、用紙束8の前端面の上下方向長さ)である。制御部900のCPUは、RAMに記憶された変数A,変数Bを乗算した値を、RAMに記憶された変数Dに設定する。ステップS1~S7は、表紙保持機構400に表紙9が供給されるまでに実行されればよい。ステップS7では、ユーザが入力した用紙束8の厚さが、変数Dに設定されてもよい。 The thickness of the sheet bundle 8 is calculated as the variable D based on the variables A and B (S7). The thickness of the sheet bundle 8 is the vertical length of the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110 (specifically, the vertical length of the front end face of the sheet bundle 8). The CPU of the control unit 900 sets a value obtained by multiplying the variables A and B stored in the RAM as a variable D stored in the RAM. Steps S1 to S7 may be executed until the cover 9 is supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400. In step S7, the thickness of the sheet bundle 8 input by the user may be set in the variable D.
 次に上クランプ430及び下クランプ440が閉鎖される(S9)。つまり、操作領域430A,440Aは何れも閉鎖状態になる。次に上クランプ430及び下クランプ440が下方向に所定量移動される(S11)。本実施形態では、下クランプ440を下方向に所定量移動させることで、下クランプ440によって支持された上クランプ430も下方向に所定量移動する。所定量は、少なくとも距離L以上であればよい。距離L(図39参照)は、上クランプ430が下クランプ440に支持された状態(図39の状態T1)における、一対の規制ピン465(図21参照)の上端部から上クランプ430の上端部までの上下方向距離である。 Next, the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are closed (S9). That is, the operation areas 430A and 440A are both closed. Next, the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are moved downward by a predetermined amount (S11). In the present embodiment, by moving the lower clamp 440 downward by a predetermined amount, the upper clamp 430 supported by the lower clamp 440 also moves downward by a predetermined amount. The predetermined amount may be at least the distance L or more. The distance L (see FIG. 39) is the upper end of the upper clamp 430 from the upper end of the pair of restriction pins 465 (see FIG. 21) when the upper clamp 430 is supported by the lower clamp 440 (state T1 in FIG. 39). Up and down direction distance.
 ステップS11が実行された場合、下クランプ440に支持された上クランプ430の位置決め突起456は、位置決め板455(図21、図39参照)よりも上方向にある。下クランプ440は、位置決め板455の後側を通って上下方向に移動可能である。一方、上クランプ430は、位置決め突起456が位置決め板455に接触すると、下方向への移動が規制される。 When step S11 is executed, the positioning protrusion 456 of the upper clamp 430 supported by the lower clamp 440 is above the positioning plate 455 (see FIGS. 21 and 39). The lower clamp 440 is movable in the vertical direction through the rear side of the positioning plate 455. On the other hand, when the positioning protrusion 456 contacts the positioning plate 455, the upper clamp 430 is restricted from moving downward.
 次に、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440が開放される(S13)。操作領域430A,440Aは何れも開放状態になる。上クランプ430及び下クランプ440が上方向に所定量移動される(S15)。本実施形態では、下クランプ440を上方向に所定量移動させることで、下クランプ440に支持された上クランプ430も上方向に所定量移動する。上クランプ430及び下クランプ440は、各々の可動範囲の上端部に戻る。 Next, the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are opened (S13). The operation areas 430A and 440A are both open. The upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are moved upward by a predetermined amount (S15). In the present embodiment, by moving the lower clamp 440 upward by a predetermined amount, the upper clamp 430 supported by the lower clamp 440 also moves upward by a predetermined amount. The upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 return to the upper end of each movable range.
 次に、下クランプ440が第一付勢値で閉鎖される(S17)。つまり、操作領域430Aの開放状態が維持される一方、操作領域440Aが閉鎖状態になる。このときソレノイド443,445がOFFになることで、前板442は図示外の巻きバネによって後板441に対して第一付勢値で付勢される(図21~図23参照)。これにより第一保持力は、実質的な0から第一付勢値に変更される。第一付勢値は、前板442と後板441とに挟まれた表紙9が自重又は外力によって操作領域440Aから抜け出すことを抑制するのに十分な強さである。 Next, the lower clamp 440 is closed at the first bias value (S17). That is, the open state of the operation area 430A is maintained, while the operation area 440A is closed. At this time, the solenoids 443 and 445 are turned OFF, so that the front plate 442 is biased to the rear plate 441 by a first bias value by a winding spring not shown (see FIGS. 21 to 23). As a result, the first holding force is changed from substantially 0 to the first bias value. The first urging value is strong enough to prevent the cover 9 sandwiched between the front plate 442 and the rear plate 441 from slipping out of the operation region 440A by its own weight or external force.
 次に、下クランプ440の移動が開始される(S19)。このとき昇降モータ450は、後述の第二付勢値よりも大きい搬送力で、下クランプ440を下方向に移動させる。先述したように、下クランプ440がその可動範囲の上端部から下方向に移動する。位置決め突起456が位置決め板455に接触することで、上クランプ430は上基準位置に位置決めされる。 Next, the movement of the lower clamp 440 is started (S19). At this time, the elevating motor 450 moves the lower clamp 440 downward with a conveying force larger than a second urging value described later. As described above, the lower clamp 440 moves downward from the upper end of the movable range. When the positioning projection 456 contacts the positioning plate 455, the upper clamp 430 is positioned at the upper reference position.
 図39を参照して、ステップS9~S19で実行される、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の動作例を説明する。先述したように、表紙保持機構400に供給された表紙9は、上クランプ430の操作領域430Aを経由して、下クランプ440の操作領域440Aに向けて送られる。このとき、図39の状態T1に示すように、表紙9の下端部が操作領域440Aに進入しない可能性がある。この場合、以下のように表紙9は適切に搬送される。 39, an operation example of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 executed in steps S9 to S19 will be described. As described above, the cover sheet 9 supplied to the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 is sent toward the operation area 440A of the lower clamp 440 via the operation area 430A of the upper clamp 430. At this time, as shown in a state T1 in FIG. 39, the lower end portion of the cover sheet 9 may not enter the operation area 440A. In this case, the cover sheet 9 is appropriately conveyed as follows.
 まず状態T2に示すように、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440が閉鎖されると、操作領域430Aにある表紙9の下辺部が上クランプ430に挟持される(S9)。状態T3に示すように、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の下移動に伴って、上クランプ430に挟持された表紙9は少なくとも距離L以上、下方向に引き出される(S11)。状態T4に示すように、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440が開放されると、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440から表紙9が解放される(S13)。 First, as shown in the state T2, when the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are closed, the lower side portion of the cover sheet 9 in the operation area 430A is sandwiched between the upper clamps 430 (S9). As shown in the state T3, as the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 move downward, the cover 9 sandwiched between the upper clamps 430 is pulled downward by at least a distance L (S11). As shown in state T4, when the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are released, the cover sheet 9 is released from the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 (S13).
 状態T5に示すように、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の上移動に伴って、表紙9の下端部は操作領域430Aから操作領域440Aに進入し、一対の規制ピン465に接触する(S15)。このとき一対の規制ピン465は、表紙9の下端部が左右方向に延びるように支持しながら、表紙9を上方向に押し戻す。 As shown in state T5, as the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 move upward, the lower end portion of the cover 9 enters the operation region 440A from the operation region 430A and contacts the pair of restriction pins 465 (S15). At this time, the pair of regulating pins 465 pushes back the cover 9 upward while supporting the lower end of the cover 9 so as to extend in the left-right direction.
 状態T6に示すように、下クランプ440が閉鎖されると、操作領域440Aにある表紙9の下辺部が下クランプ440に挟持される(S17)。状態T7に示すように、下クランプ440は位置決め板455の後側を通って下方向に移動する一方、上クランプ430は上基準位置まで下方向に移動する(S19)。このとき下クランプ440に挟持された表紙9は、開放状態の操作領域430Aを経由して下方向に引き出される。 As shown in state T6, when the lower clamp 440 is closed, the lower side portion of the cover 9 in the operation area 440A is sandwiched between the lower clamps 440 (S17). As shown in state T7, the lower clamp 440 moves downward through the rear side of the positioning plate 455, while the upper clamp 430 moves downward to the upper reference position (S19). At this time, the cover sheet 9 sandwiched between the lower clamps 440 is drawn downward through the open operation region 430A.
 従って表紙保持機構400は、供給された表紙9の下端部が操作領域440Aに進入しない場合でも、表紙9の下端部を一対の規制ピン465によって位置決めし、且つ表紙9を適正位置に搬送できる。別例として、表紙保持機構400に供給された表紙9の下端部が、一対の規制ピン465に接触しない可能性がある。この場合も上記と同様に、表紙9の下端部が一対の規制ピン465によって位置決めされた状態で、表紙9は適正に搬送される。 Therefore, even when the lower end of the supplied cover 9 does not enter the operation area 440A, the cover holding mechanism 400 can position the lower end of the cover 9 with the pair of restriction pins 465 and can transport the cover 9 to an appropriate position. As another example, the lower end portion of the cover sheet 9 supplied to the cover sheet holding mechanism 400 may not contact the pair of regulation pins 465. Also in this case, similarly to the above, the cover 9 is properly conveyed in a state where the lower end portion of the cover 9 is positioned by the pair of restriction pins 465.
 図38に示すように、ステップS19の実行後、昇降モータ450の回転量に基づいて、下クランプ440が保持実行位置に到達したか否かが判断される(S21)。保持実行位置は、上クランプ430による表紙9の保持が開始される、下クランプ440の位置である。保持実行位置は、上基準位置よりも下側、且つ貼付基準位置よりも上側にあることが好適である。本実施形態では、保持実行位置は後述の貼付中心位置H1と略同じ上下方向位置である。下クランプ440が保持実行位置に到達していない場合(S21:NO)、処理はステップS21に戻る。 38, after the execution of step S19, it is determined whether or not the lower clamp 440 has reached the holding execution position based on the rotation amount of the elevating motor 450 (S21). The holding execution position is a position of the lower clamp 440 where the holding of the cover sheet 9 by the upper clamp 430 is started. The holding execution position is preferably below the upper reference position and above the sticking reference position. In the present embodiment, the holding execution position is a vertical position that is substantially the same as a pasting center position H1 described later. If the lower clamp 440 has not reached the holding execution position (S21: NO), the process returns to step S21.
 下クランプ440が保持実行位置に到達した場合(S21:YES)、上クランプ430が第二付勢値で閉鎖される(S23)。つまり、操作領域430A,440Aが何れも閉鎖状態になる。このときソレノイド433,435がOFFになることで、前板432は巻きバネ439Aによって後板431に対して第二付勢値で付勢される(図21~図23参照)。これにより第二保持力は、実質的な0から第二付勢値に変更される。 When the lower clamp 440 reaches the holding execution position (S21: YES), the upper clamp 430 is closed at the second urging value (S23). That is, the operation areas 430A and 440A are both closed. At this time, when the solenoids 433 and 435 are turned OFF, the front plate 432 is biased to the rear plate 431 by the winding spring 439A at the second bias value (see FIGS. 21 to 23). As a result, the second holding force is changed from substantially 0 to the second urging value.
 第二付勢値は、前板432と後板431とに挟まれた表紙9が自重によって操作領域430Aから抜け出すことを抑制するのに十分な強さである。第二付勢値は、第一付勢値よりも小さい力であり、換言すると第一付勢値よりも表紙9の保持力が小さい。本実施形態では、上クランプ430の巻きバネ439Aの付勢力が、下クランプ440の巻きバネの付勢力よりも小さい。 The second urging value is strong enough to prevent the cover 9 sandwiched between the front plate 432 and the rear plate 431 from slipping out of the operation area 430A due to its own weight. The second urging value is a force smaller than the first urging value, in other words, the holding force of the cover 9 is smaller than the first urging value. In this embodiment, the biasing force of the winding spring 439A of the upper clamp 430 is smaller than the biasing force of the winding spring of the lower clamp 440.
 その後、表紙9を保持する下クランプ440が、保持実行位置から下方向に移動する。下クランプ440が表紙9を保持する第一付勢値は、上クランプ430が表紙9を保持する第二付勢値よりも大きい。下クランプ440の搬送力は、第二付勢値よりも大きい。そのため、下クランプ440の移動に伴って、操作領域440Aで表紙9の下辺部が保持された状態で、操作領域430Aから表紙9が引き出される。上クランプ430によって付与される張力によって、表紙9は上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の間で真っ直ぐに延びる。 Thereafter, the lower clamp 440 that holds the cover 9 moves downward from the holding execution position. The first bias value at which the lower clamp 440 holds the cover sheet 9 is larger than the second bias value at which the upper clamp 430 holds the cover sheet 9. The conveying force of the lower clamp 440 is larger than the second urging value. Therefore, in accordance with the movement of the lower clamp 440, the cover sheet 9 is pulled out from the operation area 430A while the lower side portion of the cover sheet 9 is held in the operation area 440A. The cover 9 extends straight between the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 due to the tension applied by the upper clamp 430.
 次に、変数Cに基づいて、下クランプ440の移動が停止される(S25)。このとき、表紙中心位置M1が貼付中心位置H1と略一致するように、下クランプ440が位置決めされる。表紙中心位置M1は、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440に保持された表紙9の上下方向の中心位置である(図41参照)。貼付中心位置H1は、突当て板460の上下方向の中心位置である(図41参照)。貼付中心位置H1は、上クランプ470及び下クランプ480(詳細には、クランプ体472,482)における上下方向の中心位置と同義である。 Next, the movement of the lower clamp 440 is stopped based on the variable C (S25). At this time, the lower clamp 440 is positioned so that the cover center position M1 substantially coincides with the sticking center position H1. The cover center position M1 is the center position in the vertical direction of the cover 9 held by the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 (see FIG. 41). The sticking center position H1 is the center position in the vertical direction of the abutting plate 460 (see FIG. 41). The sticking center position H1 is synonymous with the vertical center position of the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 (specifically, the clamp bodies 472 and 482).
 本実施形態では、下クランプ440がその可動範囲の上端部から下方向に移動する場合、表紙サイズに応じて下クランプ440の位置決めされる位置が異なる。下クランプ440が有する一対の規制ピン465の上下方向位置は、表紙9の下端部の上下方向位置に対応する。表紙サイズの半分(つまり、RAMの変数Cに1/2を乗算した値)に相当する距離分、一対の規制ピン465から上方向にある位置が、表紙中心位置M1として特定される。制御部900のCPUは、昇降モータ450の回転量(つまり、下クランプ440の搬送量)に基づいて、下クランプ440(つまり、一対の規制ピン465)の上下方向位置を制御することで、表紙中心位置M1を上下方向に調整できる。 In the present embodiment, when the lower clamp 440 moves downward from the upper end of the movable range, the position where the lower clamp 440 is positioned differs depending on the cover size. The vertical position of the pair of restriction pins 465 included in the lower clamp 440 corresponds to the vertical position of the lower end portion of the cover sheet 9. A position located upward from the pair of restriction pins 465 by a distance corresponding to half the cover size (that is, a value obtained by multiplying the RAM variable C by 1/2) is specified as the cover center position M1. The CPU of the control unit 900 controls the vertical position of the lower clamp 440 (that is, the pair of restriction pins 465) based on the rotation amount of the lifting motor 450 (that is, the conveyance amount of the lower clamp 440), thereby covering the cover. The center position M1 can be adjusted in the vertical direction.
 ステップS25において、制御部900のCPUは、表紙中心位置M1と貼付中心位置H1とが一致する位置まで、表紙9の下辺部を保持する下クランプ440を下方向に移動させる。図41に示すように、表紙9は第一調整位置まで搬送される。第一表紙搬送処理における第一調整位置は、表紙中心位置M1と貼付中心位置H1とが一致する表紙9の上下方向位置である。 In step S25, the CPU of the control unit 900 moves the lower clamp 440 holding the lower side portion of the cover 9 downward to a position where the cover center position M1 and the pasting center position H1 coincide with each other. As shown in FIG. 41, the cover sheet 9 is conveyed to the first adjustment position. The first adjustment position in the first cover transport process is the vertical position of the cover 9 where the cover center position M1 and the pasting center position H1 coincide.
 図38に示すように、ステップS25の実行後、変数Dに基づいて可動部401が移動される(S27)。このとき、貼付中心位置H1が厚み中心位置H2と略一致するように、可動部401が位置決めされる。厚み中心位置H2は、テーブル110上にある用紙束8の前端面における上下方向の中心位置である(図42参照)。 38, after the execution of step S25, the movable part 401 is moved based on the variable D (S27). At this time, the movable portion 401 is positioned so that the pasting center position H1 substantially coincides with the thickness center position H2. The thickness center position H2 is the center position in the vertical direction on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110 (see FIG. 42).
 本実施形態では、可動部401が受取位置から下方向に移動する場合、用紙束8の厚さに応じて可動部401の位置決めされる位置が異なる。用紙束8の厚さの半分(つまり、RAMの変数Dに1/2を乗算した値)に相当する距離分、載置面110Aの第一載置面1111(図12参照)から上方向にある位置が、厚み中心位置H2として特定される。制御部900のCPUは、搬送モータ422の回転量(つまり、可動部401の搬送量)に基づいて、可動部401の上下方向位置を制御することで、貼付中心位置H1を上下方向に調整できる。 In this embodiment, when the movable unit 401 moves downward from the receiving position, the position where the movable unit 401 is positioned differs depending on the thickness of the sheet bundle 8. Upward from the first placement surface 1111 (see FIG. 12) of the placement surface 110A by a distance corresponding to half the thickness of the sheet bundle 8 (that is, a value obtained by multiplying the RAM variable D by 1/2). A certain position is specified as the thickness center position H2. The CPU of the control unit 900 can adjust the sticking center position H1 in the vertical direction by controlling the vertical position of the movable unit 401 based on the rotation amount of the conveyance motor 422 (that is, the conveyance amount of the movable unit 401). .
 ステップS27において、制御部900のCPUは、貼付中心位置H1が厚み中心位置H2と一致するまで、表紙9を保持する可動部401を下方向に移動する。図42に示すように、可動部401は貼付基準位置として第二調整位置まで搬送される。第一表紙搬送処理における第二調整位置は、貼付中心位置H1と厚み中心位置H2とが一致する可動部401の上下方向位置である。 In step S27, the CPU of the control unit 900 moves the movable unit 401 holding the cover 9 downward until the pasting center position H1 coincides with the thickness center position H2. As shown in FIG. 42, the movable part 401 is transported to the second adjustment position as the reference reference position. The second adjustment position in the first cover sheet conveyance process is the vertical position of the movable portion 401 where the pasting center position H1 and the thickness center position H2 coincide.
 ステップS9~S25の実行中に、ステップS27が実行されてもよい。つまり、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の動作と、可動部401の動作とが並行して実行されてもよい。ステップS27以降の処理は、後述の表紙貼付工程で実行される。 Step S27 may be executed during the execution of steps S9 to S25. That is, the operation of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 and the operation of the movable unit 401 may be executed in parallel. The processing after step S27 is executed in a cover sticking step described later.
 このように、製本装置1はステップS9~S19を実行することで、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440で表紙9を確実に搬送できる。製本装置1はステップS13,S17~S25を実行することで、表紙9に皺及び弛みが生じることを抑制しつつ、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440で表紙9を搬送できる。製本装置1はステップS1~S7、S25~S27を実行することで、表紙保持機構400で保持された表紙9を、テーブル110上の用紙束8に対して正確に位置決めできる。詳細には、表紙9の上下方向中心と、用紙束8の前端面における上下方向中心とが略一致する。 In this way, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can reliably carry the cover sheet 9 with the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 by executing steps S9 to S19. By performing steps S13 and S17 to S25, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can transport the cover 9 with the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 while suppressing wrinkles and slack from occurring on the cover 9. The bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately position the cover 9 held by the cover holding mechanism 400 with respect to the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110 by executing steps S1 to S7 and S25 to S27. Specifically, the vertical center of the cover sheet 9 and the vertical center of the front end face of the sheet bundle 8 substantially coincide.
 図43及び図44を参照して、第二表紙搬送処理を説明する。以下では、第二表紙搬送処理のうち、第一表紙搬送処理と異なる点を中心に説明する。制御部900のCPUは、第二プリンタ4が以下の画像印刷を実行する場合に、第二表紙搬送処理を実行可能である。 Referring to FIGS. 43 and 44, the second cover sheet conveyance process will be described. Below, it demonstrates centering on a different point from the 1st cover conveyance process among the 2nd cover sheet conveyance processes. The CPU of the control unit 900 can execute the second cover transport process when the second printer 4 executes the following image printing.
 図44に示すように、第二プリンタ4は印刷データに基づいて、印刷領域9Aの範囲内に画像を印刷する。印刷領域9Aは、印刷データによって指定される、画像を印刷可能な大きさを有する矩形状の領域である。印刷領域9Aの上下方向の中心位置を、データ中心位置M2という。更に第二プリンタ4は、表紙9における印刷領域9Aの外側の領域、且つデータ中心位置M2と重なる部分に、一対のマーク9Bを印刷する。一対のマーク9Bは、データ中心位置M2を示す特定パターンの画像であり、本実施形態では表紙9の左右方向の両端部に印刷される。 As shown in FIG. 44, the second printer 4 prints an image within the print area 9A based on the print data. The print area 9A is a rectangular area that is designated by the print data and has a size capable of printing an image. The center position in the vertical direction of the print area 9A is referred to as a data center position M2. Further, the second printer 4 prints a pair of marks 9B on the area outside the print area 9A on the cover 9 and on the portion overlapping the data center position M2. The pair of marks 9 </ b> B are images of a specific pattern indicating the data center position M <b> 2, and are printed on both ends in the left-right direction of the cover 9 in the present embodiment.
 図43に示すように、第二表紙搬送処理では、ステップS1と同様に、用紙枚数が変数Aとして取得される(S41)。ステップS3と同様に、用紙厚さが変数Bとして取得される(S43)。ステップS7と同様に、変数A,Bに基づいて用紙束8の厚さが変数Dとして算出される(S45)。ステップS41~S45は、表紙保持機構400に表紙9が供給されるまでに実行されればよい。次に、ステップS9~S23と同様に、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の動作制御が実行される(S47~S61)。 As shown in FIG. 43, in the second cover transport process, the number of sheets is acquired as a variable A as in step S1 (S41). Similar to step S3, the sheet thickness is acquired as a variable B (S43). Similar to step S7, the thickness of the sheet bundle 8 is calculated as a variable D based on the variables A and B (S45). Steps S41 to S45 may be executed until the cover 9 is supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400. Next, similarly to steps S9 to S23, operation control of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 is executed (S47 to S61).
 ステップS61の実行後、一対のマークセンサ499によって一対のマーク9Bが検出されたか否かが判断される(S63)。図44に示すように、制御部900のCPUは、表紙9が表紙保持機構400に供給される時に、左側のマークセンサ499の発光部を発光させて、表紙9の前面左端部に光を照射する。制御部900のCPUは、左側のマークセンサ499の受光部で検出される光量に基づいて、特定パターンの画像を検出したか否かを判断する。制御部900のCPUは、特定パターンの画像が検出された場合、左側のマーク9Bを検出したと判断する。同様に、制御部900のCPUは、右側のマークセンサ499によって右側のマーク9Bを検出したか否かを判断する。 After step S61, it is determined whether the pair of marks 9B has been detected by the pair of mark sensors 499 (S63). As shown in FIG. 44, when the cover 9 is supplied to the cover holding mechanism 400, the CPU of the control unit 900 causes the left mark sensor 499 to emit light and irradiates the front left end of the cover 9 with light. To do. The CPU of the control unit 900 determines whether or not an image of a specific pattern has been detected based on the amount of light detected by the light receiving unit of the left mark sensor 499. When the image of the specific pattern is detected, the CPU of the control unit 900 determines that the left mark 9B has been detected. Similarly, the CPU of the controller 900 determines whether the right mark sensor 499 has detected the right mark 9B.
 一対のマーク9Bが検出されていない場合(S63:NO)、処理はステップS63に戻る。一対のマーク9Bが検出された場合(S63:YES)、検出された一対のマーク9Bに基づいて、下クランプ440の移動が停止される(S65)。このとき、データ中心位置M2が貼付中心位置H1と略一致するように、下クランプ440が位置決めされる。 If the pair of marks 9B has not been detected (S63: NO), the process returns to step S63. When the pair of marks 9B is detected (S63: YES), the movement of the lower clamp 440 is stopped based on the detected pair of marks 9B (S65). At this time, the lower clamp 440 is positioned so that the data center position M2 substantially coincides with the pasting center position H1.
 本実施形態では、下クランプ440がその可動範囲の上端部から下方向に移動する場合、印刷領域9Aの位置及びサイズに応じて下クランプ440の位置決めされる位置が異なる。制御部900のCPUは、昇降モータ450の回転量に基づいて、下クランプ440の上下方向位置を制御することで、データ中心位置M2を上下方向に調整できる。 In the present embodiment, when the lower clamp 440 moves downward from the upper end of the movable range, the position where the lower clamp 440 is positioned differs depending on the position and size of the printing area 9A. The CPU of the control unit 900 can adjust the data center position M2 in the vertical direction by controlling the vertical position of the lower clamp 440 based on the rotation amount of the lifting motor 450.
 制御部900のCPUは、一対のマーク9Bが検出された時点における、一対の規制ピン465の上下方向位置(つまり、表紙9の下端部の上下方向位置)を特定する。制御部900のCPUは、特定した一対の規制ピン465の上下方向位置から、一対のマークセンサ499の位置(つまり、一対のマーク9Bの検出位置)までの上下方向距離を特定する。特定した上下方向距離分、一対の規制ピン465から上方向にある位置が、データ中心位置M2として特定される。 The CPU of the control unit 900 specifies the vertical position of the pair of regulation pins 465 (that is, the vertical position of the lower end portion of the cover 9) when the pair of marks 9B is detected. The CPU of the control unit 900 specifies the vertical distance from the vertical position of the specified pair of restriction pins 465 to the position of the pair of mark sensors 499 (that is, the detection position of the pair of marks 9B). A position located upward from the pair of regulating pins 465 by the specified vertical distance is specified as the data center position M2.
 制御部900のCPUは、データ中心位置M2と貼付中心位置H1とが一致する位置まで、表紙9の下辺部を保持する下クランプ440を下方向に移動させる。図44に示すように、表紙9は第一調整位置まで搬送される。第二表紙搬送処理における第一調整位置は、データ中心位置M2と貼付中心位置H1とが一致する表紙9の上下方向位置である。 The CPU of the control unit 900 moves the lower clamp 440 holding the lower side portion of the cover 9 downward to a position where the data center position M2 and the pasting center position H1 coincide. As shown in FIG. 44, the cover sheet 9 is conveyed to the first adjustment position. The first adjustment position in the second cover sheet conveyance process is the vertical position of the cover sheet 9 where the data center position M2 and the pasting center position H1 coincide.
 次に、ステップS27と同様に、貼付中心位置H1が厚み中心位置H2と略一致するように、変数Dに基づいて可動部401が移動される(S67)。つまり可動部401は、貼付基準位置として第二調整位置まで搬送される。第二表紙搬送処理における第二調整位置は、データ中心位置M2が厚み中心位置H2と一致する可動部401の上下方向位置である。 Next, similarly to step S27, the movable portion 401 is moved based on the variable D so that the pasting center position H1 substantially coincides with the thickness center position H2 (S67). That is, the movable part 401 is conveyed to the second adjustment position as the sticking reference position. The second adjustment position in the second cover sheet conveyance process is the vertical position of the movable portion 401 where the data center position M2 coincides with the thickness center position H2.
 ステップS47~S65の実行中に、ステップS67が実行されてもよい。つまり、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の動作と、可動部401の動作とが並行して実行されてもよい。ステップS67以降の処理は、後述の表紙貼付工程で実行される。 During step S47 to S65, step S67 may be executed. That is, the operation of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 and the operation of the movable unit 401 may be executed in parallel. The processing after step S67 is executed in a cover sticking step described later.
 このように、製本装置1は第一表紙搬送処理と同様に、表紙9に皺及び弛みが生じることを抑制しつつ、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440で表紙9を確実に搬送できる。製本装置1はステップS41~S45、S63~S67を実行することで、表紙保持機構400で保持された表紙9を、テーブル110上の用紙束8に対して正確に位置決めできる。詳細には、印刷領域9Aの上下方向中心と、用紙束8の前端面における上下方向中心とが略一致する。 As described above, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can reliably convey the cover sheet 9 with the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 while suppressing the occurrence of wrinkles and slack in the cover sheet 9 as in the first cover sheet conveyance process. The bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately position the cover 9 held by the cover holding mechanism 400 with respect to the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110 by executing steps S41 to S45 and S63 to S67. Specifically, the vertical center of the printing area 9 </ b> A substantially coincides with the vertical center of the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8.
 図41及び図44に示すように、表紙9が第一調整位置まで搬送された後、制御部900は一対の腕部461Cを待機位置と付勢位置との間で複数回往復移動させる。一対の腕部461Cは、待機位置から付勢位置に移動するときに、表紙9を右方向に付勢する。表紙9は右側の規制ピン463,464に接触する位置まで、操作領域430A,440Aの内部で右方向に移動する。表紙9の右端部は、規制位置P2(図23参照)に位置決めされる。その後、制御部900は、一対の腕部461Cを待機位置で停止させて、表紙搬送工程を終了する。 41 and 44, after the cover sheet 9 is conveyed to the first adjustment position, the control unit 900 reciprocates the pair of arm portions 461C between the standby position and the biasing position a plurality of times. The pair of arm portions 461C urge the cover 9 to the right when moving from the standby position to the urging position. The cover 9 moves to the right inside the operation areas 430A and 440A up to a position where it comes into contact with the right regulation pins 463 and 464. The right end portion of the cover sheet 9 is positioned at the restriction position P2 (see FIG. 23). Thereafter, the control unit 900 stops the pair of arm portions 461C at the standby position, and ends the cover sheet transporting process.
<3-6.表紙貼付工程>
 制御部900は表紙搬送工程及び糊塗布工程の実行後、表紙貼付工程を実行する。表紙貼付工程は、表紙保持機構400に保持された表紙9を、糊7が塗布された用紙束8に貼付ける工程である。図38、図42、図43、図45~図50を参照して、表紙貼付工程を説明する。
<3-6. Covering process>
The controller 900 executes a cover sheet attaching process after the cover sheet conveying process and the glue applying process. The cover sticking step is a step of sticking the cover 9 held by the cover holding mechanism 400 to the sheet bundle 8 to which the glue 7 is applied. The cover sticking step will be described with reference to FIGS. 38, 42, 43, and 45 to 50. FIG.
 図42に示すように、制御部900は、第二テーブル1120が第一回転位置にある状態を維持しながら、テーブル110を第一搬送位置から前方に移動させる。制御部900は、テーブル110の移動と同期して、束操作部230を前方に移動させる。用紙束8は、押え板232と第一載置面1111とに挟持された状態で前方に移動する。テーブル110は、第二搬送位置まで前方に移動される。第二搬送位置は、用紙束8の前端面が突当て板460に押圧される、テーブル110の前後方向位置である。 42, the controller 900 moves the table 110 forward from the first transport position while maintaining the state where the second table 1120 is in the first rotation position. The control unit 900 moves the bundle operation unit 230 forward in synchronization with the movement of the table 110. The sheet bundle 8 moves forward while being sandwiched between the presser plate 232 and the first placement surface 1111. The table 110 is moved forward to the second transport position. The second transport position is a position in the front-rear direction of the table 110 where the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 is pressed against the abutting plate 460.
 テーブル110は、第一搬送位置から第二搬送位置に移動する途中で、第三搬送位置を経由する。第三搬送位置は、用紙束8の前端面が表紙保持機構400に保持された表紙9に接触する、テーブル110の前後方向位置である。用紙束8の前端面に形成された接着部と表紙9とが接触する位置を、接触位置という。上クランプ430は、表紙9を接触位置よりも上側で保持する。下クランプ440は、表紙9を接触位置よりも下側で保持する。 The table 110 passes through the third transfer position while moving from the first transfer position to the second transfer position. The third transport position is a front-rear direction position of the table 110 where the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 contacts the cover sheet 9 held by the cover sheet holding mechanism 400. A position where the adhesive portion formed on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 and the cover sheet 9 contact each other is referred to as a contact position. The upper clamp 430 holds the cover sheet 9 above the contact position. The lower clamp 440 holds the cover sheet 9 below the contact position.
 制御部900は、表紙搬送工程で第一表紙搬送処理が開始された場合、第一表紙搬送処理のステップS27以降を実行する。図38に示すように、まず用紙束8が接触位置に到達したか否かが判断される(S29)。制御部900は、搬送モータ121の回転量(つまり、テーブル110の搬送量)に基づいて、テーブル110の現在位置を特定する。 When the first cover transport process is started in the cover transport process, the control unit 900 executes step S27 and subsequent steps of the first cover transport process. As shown in FIG. 38, it is first determined whether or not the sheet bundle 8 has reached the contact position (S29). The control unit 900 specifies the current position of the table 110 based on the rotation amount of the conveyance motor 121 (that is, the conveyance amount of the table 110).
 テーブル110の現在位置が第三搬送位置でない場合、用紙束8が接触位置に到達していないと判断されて(S29:NO)、処理はステップS29に戻る。テーブル110の現在位置が第三搬送位置である場合、用紙束8が接触位置に到達したと判断されて(S29:YES)、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440が開放される(S31)。つまり、第一保持力が第一付勢値から実質的な0に変更され、且つ第二保持力が第二付勢値から実質的な0に変更される。下クランプ440は、その可動範囲の下端部まで移動することで、表紙9から離れる方向に退避される(S33)。その後、第一表紙搬送処理は終了される。 If the current position of the table 110 is not the third transport position, it is determined that the sheet bundle 8 has not reached the contact position (S29: NO), and the process returns to step S29. When the current position of the table 110 is the third transport position, it is determined that the sheet bundle 8 has reached the contact position (S29: YES), and the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are released (S31). That is, the first holding force is changed from the first bias value to substantially zero, and the second holding force is changed from the second bias value to substantially zero. The lower clamp 440 is retracted in a direction away from the cover 9 by moving to the lower end of the movable range (S33). Thereafter, the first cover sheet conveyance process is terminated.
 このように、テーブル110が第一搬送位置から第二搬送位置に移動するとき、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440は接触位置を挟んで表紙9を保持する(図42参照)。表紙9は上下方向及び左右方向に延びる姿勢で保持される。テーブル110が第三搬送位置に到達すると、テーブル110上にある用紙束8の前端面が、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440によって保持された表紙9の後面に接触する。表紙9は、用紙束8の前端面に形成された接着部に貼付けられる。 Thus, when the table 110 moves from the first transport position to the second transport position, the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 hold the cover sheet 9 with the contact position therebetween (see FIG. 42). The cover 9 is held in a posture that extends in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. When the table 110 reaches the third transport position, the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 on the table 110 comes into contact with the rear surface of the cover sheet 9 held by the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440. The cover sheet 9 is attached to an adhesive portion formed on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8.
 製本装置1がステップS29~S33を実行することで、用紙束8の前端面が表紙9に接触する際に、操作領域430A,440Aが開放される。テーブル110が第三搬送位置から第二搬送位置に移動するのに伴って、上クランプ430から解放された表紙9の上辺部が、操作領域430Aから下方に抜け出す。同時に、下クランプ440から解放された表紙9の下辺部が、操作領域440Aから上方に抜け出す。更に下クランプ440が表紙9から離れる方向に退避されるので、表紙9は操作領域440Aから抜き出やすい。 When the bookbinding apparatus 1 executes steps S29 to S33, the operation areas 430A and 440A are opened when the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 contacts the cover sheet 9. As the table 110 moves from the third transport position to the second transport position, the upper side portion of the cover sheet 9 released from the upper clamp 430 falls out from the operation area 430A. At the same time, the lower side portion of the cover 9 released from the lower clamp 440 comes out upward from the operation area 440A. Further, since the lower clamp 440 is retracted in a direction away from the cover sheet 9, the cover sheet 9 is easily extracted from the operation area 440A.
 なお、制御部900は、表紙搬送工程で第二表紙搬送処理が開始された場合、第二表紙搬送処理のステップS67以降を実行する。図43に示すように、第二表紙搬送処理のステップS69~S73は、ステップS29~S33と同様であるため、説明は省略する。 Note that, when the second cover transport process is started in the cover transport process, the control unit 900 executes step S67 and subsequent steps of the second cover transport process. As shown in FIG. 43, steps S69 to S73 of the second cover sheet conveyance process are the same as steps S29 to S33, and thus description thereof is omitted.
 図45に示すように、テーブル110が第二搬送位置に到達すると、押え板232によって押圧された用紙束8の前端面は、表紙9を介して突当て板460に押圧される。制御部900は、テーブル110が第二搬送位置に到達した場合、上クランプ470及び下クランプ480を互いに近接する方向に移動させる。 45, when the table 110 reaches the second transport position, the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 pressed by the pressing plate 232 is pressed against the abutting plate 460 through the cover sheet 9. When the table 110 reaches the second transport position, the control unit 900 moves the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 in directions close to each other.
 下方向に移動する上クランプ470のクランプ体472(図21参照)が、用紙束8の上面における前縁部に対して表紙9を付勢し、表紙9の上側部分を用紙束8の前端面に沿って後方に折り曲げる。上方向に移動する下クランプ480のクランプ体482(図21参照)が、用紙束8の下面における前縁部に対して表紙9を付勢し、表紙9の下側部分を用紙束8の前端面に沿って後方に折り曲げる。これにより、表紙9で包まれた用紙束8である冊子10が作成される。クランプ体472,482は、突当て板460の後側で、冊子10の前端部を上下両側から挟持する。 A clamp body 472 (see FIG. 21) of the upper clamp 470 that moves downward biases the cover 9 against the front edge of the upper surface of the sheet bundle 8, and the upper portion of the cover 9 serves as the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8. Bend backward along. A clamp body 482 (see FIG. 21) of the lower clamp 480 that moves upward biases the cover 9 against the front edge of the lower surface of the sheet bundle 8, and the lower portion of the cover 9 serves as the front end of the sheet bundle 8. Bend backward along the surface. Thereby, the booklet 10 which is the sheet bundle 8 wrapped with the cover 9 is created. The clamp bodies 472 and 482 sandwich the front end portion of the booklet 10 from the upper and lower sides on the rear side of the abutting plate 460.
 本実施形態では、表紙9が第一調整位置にあり且つ可動部401が第二調整位置にある状態で、用紙束8の前端面に表紙9が貼付けられる。詳細には、第一表紙搬送処理が実行された場合、表紙9の上下方向中心と用紙束8の前端面の上下方向中心とが一致した状態で、用紙束8の前端面に表紙9が貼付けられる。第二表紙搬送処理が実行された場合、印刷領域9Aの上下方向中心と用紙束8の前端面の上下方向中心とが一致した状態で、用紙束8の前端面に表紙9が貼付けられる。従って製本装置1は、用紙束8と表紙9との位置ずれが小さい冊子10を作成できる。 In this embodiment, the cover sheet 9 is attached to the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 with the cover sheet 9 in the first adjustment position and the movable portion 401 in the second adjustment position. Specifically, when the first cover sheet conveyance process is executed, the cover sheet 9 is pasted on the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 in a state where the center of the cover sheet 9 is aligned with the center of the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8. It is done. When the second cover sheet conveyance process is executed, the cover sheet 9 is attached to the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 with the vertical center of the printing area 9 </ b> A and the vertical center of the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 aligned. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can create a booklet 10 in which the positional deviation between the sheet bundle 8 and the cover sheet 9 is small.
 なお、先述の用紙集積工程において、右揃え板140は用紙束8の右端面を、第三規制位置(つまり、図22、図23に示す裁断基準位置P1)に位置決めする。一対の腕部461Cは表紙9の右端部を、図23に示す規制位置P2に位置決めする。裁断基準位置P1は規制位置P2よりも右側にある。従って、表紙貼付工程では、表紙9の右端部が用紙束8の右端部から左側にずれた状態で、表紙9が用紙束8に貼付けられる。作成された冊子10では、用紙束8の右端部が表紙9から右側にはみ出る。 In the paper stacking process described above, the right aligning plate 140 positions the right end surface of the paper bundle 8 at the third restriction position (that is, the cutting reference position P1 shown in FIGS. 22 and 23). The pair of arm portions 461C positions the right end portion of the cover sheet 9 at a restriction position P2 shown in FIG. The cutting reference position P1 is on the right side of the regulation position P2. Accordingly, in the cover sheet attaching step, the cover sheet 9 is attached to the sheet bundle 8 with the right end portion of the cover sheet 9 shifted to the left side from the right end portion of the sheet bundle 8. In the created booklet 10, the right end portion of the sheet bundle 8 protrudes from the cover 9 to the right side.
 本実施形態では、冊子10の前端面が表紙9によって綴じられる。冊子10に含まれる表紙9及び用紙8Aに印刷された画像の上側及び下側は、それぞれ製本装置1の左側及び右側に対応する。従って、冊子10の背側、小口側、天側、地側は、それぞれ製本装置1の前側、後側、左側、右側に相当する。 In the present embodiment, the front end surface of the booklet 10 is bound by the cover 9. The upper side and the lower side of the images printed on the cover 9 and the paper 8A included in the booklet 10 correspond to the left side and the right side of the bookbinding apparatus 1, respectively. Accordingly, the back side, the fore edge side, the top side, and the ground side of the booklet 10 correspond to the front side, the rear side, the left side, and the right side of the bookbinding apparatus 1, respectively.
 その後、制御部900は、第二テーブル1120を第一回転位置から第二回転位置に移動させる(図45参照)。載置面110Aは、屈曲面から略水平な平面に変化する。載置面110A上にある用紙束8は、水平方向に延びる姿勢に変化する。従って製本装置1は、用紙束8に折り目及び皺が生じにくいため、製本動作時における冊子10の品質劣化を抑制できる。 Thereafter, the control unit 900 moves the second table 1120 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (see FIG. 45). The mounting surface 110A changes from a bent surface to a substantially horizontal plane. The sheet bundle 8 on the placement surface 110A changes to a posture extending in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 is less likely to cause creases and wrinkles in the sheet bundle 8, and can suppress deterioration in the quality of the booklet 10 during the bookbinding operation.
 更に制御部900は、テーブル110を第一搬送位置まで後方に移動させる。制御部900は、束操作部230をテーブル110と共に後方に移動させ、且つ束操作部230をその可動範囲の上端部まで移動させる。これにより、図46に示すように、冊子10の前端部がクランプ体472,482で挟持され、且つ押え板232及びテーブル110が冊子10から離隔する。クランプ体472,482に挟持された冊子10は、自重により下側後方に垂下する。 Further, the control unit 900 moves the table 110 backward to the first transport position. The control unit 900 moves the bundle operation unit 230 rearward together with the table 110, and moves the bundle operation unit 230 to the upper end of the movable range. 46, the front end portion of the booklet 10 is held between the clamp bodies 472 and 482, and the presser plate 232 and the table 110 are separated from the booklet 10. The booklet 10 sandwiched between the clamp bodies 472 and 482 hangs downward and rearward due to its own weight.
 次に制御部900は、冊子操作処理を実行する。図47~図50を参照して、冊子操作処理を説明する。図47に示すように冊子操作処理では、まず表紙保持機構400の可動部401が、第一速さで貼付基準位置から上方向に移動開始される(S81)。第一速さは、搬送モータ422が可動部401を移動させる最高速さに近いことが好適である。搬送モータ422の回転量に基づいて、可動部401が受取位置に到達したか否かが判断される(S83)。可動部401が受取位置に到達していない場合(S83:NO)、処理はステップS83に戻る。 Next, the control unit 900 executes a booklet operation process. The booklet operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 47, in the booklet operation process, first, the movable portion 401 of the cover holding mechanism 400 starts to move upward from the reference reference position at the first speed (S81). The first speed is preferably close to the maximum speed at which the transport motor 422 moves the movable portion 401. Based on the rotation amount of the transport motor 422, it is determined whether or not the movable portion 401 has reached the receiving position (S83). When the movable part 401 has not reached the receiving position (S83: NO), the process returns to step S83.
 可動部401が受取位置に到達した場合(S83:YES)、可動部401が所定時間停止される(S85)。所定時間は、ステップS81で搬送された冊子10の振動が治まる程度の時間長さであり、例えば5秒である。可動部401が所定時間停止する間に、制御部900はテーブル110を第一搬送位置から第二搬送位置に移動させる。図48に示すように、テーブル110は、上クランプ470及び下クランプ480が挟持する冊子10の下側に移動する。更に制御部900は、接触検出センサ190を駆動する。 When the movable part 401 reaches the receiving position (S83: YES), the movable part 401 is stopped for a predetermined time (S85). The predetermined time is a length of time that the vibration of the booklet 10 conveyed in step S81 is subsided, and is, for example, 5 seconds. While the movable unit 401 stops for a predetermined time, the control unit 900 moves the table 110 from the first transport position to the second transport position. As shown in FIG. 48, the table 110 moves to the lower side of the booklet 10 held by the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480. Further, the control unit 900 drives the contact detection sensor 190.
 図49に示すように、接触検出センサ190は発光部191及び受光部192を有する。発光部191及び受光部192は、テーブル110が第二搬送位置にある状態で、テーブル110を挟んだ両側且つテーブル110の略対角線上にある。発光部191は、テーブル110が第二搬送位置にある場合に、載置面110Aの若干上側を通るレーザ光を受光部192に向けて射出する。受光部192は、発光部191から射出されたレーザ光を検出する。 As shown in FIG. 49, the contact detection sensor 190 includes a light emitting unit 191 and a light receiving unit 192. The light emitting unit 191 and the light receiving unit 192 are on both sides of the table 110 and on a substantially diagonal line of the table 110 with the table 110 in the second transport position. When the table 110 is at the second transport position, the light emitting unit 191 emits laser light that passes slightly above the placement surface 110A toward the light receiving unit 192. The light receiving unit 192 detects the laser light emitted from the light emitting unit 191.
 ステップS85の実行後、可動部401が第二速さで受取位置から下方向に移動開始される(S87)。第二速さは、第一速さよりも遅い速さである。可動部401を相対的に遅い速さで下方向に移動させることで、上クランプ470及び下クランプ480が挟持する冊子10に振動が生じにくい。冊子10が載置面110Aに高速で衝突することが抑制されるため、冊子10に破損が生じにくい。その後、接触検出センサ190による物体検出ありか否かが判断される(S89)。受光部192によってレーザ光が検出された場合、物体検出なしと判断される(S89:NO)。この場合、処理はステップS89に戻る。 After execution of step S85, the movable unit 401 starts to move downward from the receiving position at the second speed (S87). The second speed is slower than the first speed. By moving the movable portion 401 downward at a relatively low speed, vibration is unlikely to occur in the booklet 10 sandwiched between the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480. Since the booklet 10 is prevented from colliding with the placement surface 110A at a high speed, the booklet 10 is hardly damaged. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not an object is detected by the contact detection sensor 190 (S89). When laser light is detected by the light receiving unit 192, it is determined that no object is detected (S89: NO). In this case, the process returns to step S89.
 図49に示すように、可動部401が下方向に移動する過程で、上クランプ470及び下クランプ480から垂下する冊子10の下端部に、発光部191のレーザ光が照射される。このとき、受光部192によるレーザ光の検出が妨げられるため、物体検出ありと判断される(S89:YES)。この場合、テーブル110が第二搬送位置から後方向に所定量移動される(S91)。つまり、冊子10の下端部が載置面110Aに接触する際に、テーブル110が冊子10の背側から小口側に向かって若干移動する。従って製本装置1は、冊子10が載置面110Aに載置される際に、載置面110Aに接触する表紙9が折れ曲がることを抑制できる。 As shown in FIG. 49, in the process in which the movable unit 401 moves downward, the lower end portion of the booklet 10 hanging from the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 is irradiated with the laser light of the light emitting unit 191. At this time, since the detection of the laser beam by the light receiving unit 192 is hindered, it is determined that the object is detected (S89: YES). In this case, the table 110 is moved a predetermined amount backward from the second transport position (S91). That is, when the lower end portion of the booklet 10 contacts the placement surface 110A, the table 110 slightly moves from the back side of the booklet 10 toward the fore edge side. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can prevent the cover 9 that contacts the placement surface 110A from being bent when the booklet 10 is placed on the placement surface 110A.
 次に搬送モータ422の回転量に基づいて、可動部401が貼付基準位置に到達したか否かが判断される(S93)。可動部401が貼付基準位置に到達していない場合(S93:NO)、処理はステップS93に戻る。可動部401が貼付基準位置に到達した場合(S93:YES)、可動部401の移動が停止される(S95)。その後、冊子操作処理は終了される。 Next, based on the amount of rotation of the transport motor 422, it is determined whether or not the movable part 401 has reached the sticking reference position (S93). When the movable part 401 has not reached the sticking reference position (S93: NO), the process returns to step S93. When the movable part 401 reaches the sticking reference position (S93: YES), the movement of the movable part 401 is stopped (S95). Thereafter, the booklet operation process is terminated.
 これにより、図50に示すように、可動部401が貼付基準位置に位置決めされ、且つ冊子10が載置面110Aに載置される。更に制御部900は、上クランプ470及び下クランプ480を互いに離隔する方向に移動させる。上クランプ470及び下クランプ480は、冊子10の挟持を解除する。従って製本装置1は、上クランプ470及び下クランプ480が挟持する冊子10を、テーブル110上に適切に載置できる。 50. As a result, as shown in FIG. 50, the movable portion 401 is positioned at the reference reference position, and the booklet 10 is placed on the placement surface 110A. Further, the control unit 900 moves the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 in a direction away from each other. The upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 release the booklet 10. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can appropriately place the booklet 10 sandwiched between the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 on the table 110.
<3-7.冊子搬送工程>
 制御部900は表紙貼付工程の実行後、冊子搬送工程を実行する。冊子搬送工程は、テーブル110上にある冊子10を、冊子搬送機構600によって裁断機構500まで搬送する工程である。図5、図24、図51~図54を参照して、冊子搬送工程を説明する。
<3-7. Booklet transport process>
The controller 900 executes the booklet transport process after the cover sheet attaching process. The booklet transporting process is a process of transporting the booklet 10 on the table 110 to the cutting mechanism 500 by the booklet transporting mechanism 600. The booklet transport process will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 24, and 51 to 54.
 図5及び図24に示すように、制御部900は、テーブル110の後端部が初期位置にあるハンド部640に近接する位置まで、冊子10が載置されたテーブル110を後方向に移動させる。制御部900は、束操作部230を移動制御して、押え板232の下端部を冊子10の前側に配置する。図51に示すように、制御部900は、束操作部230を移動制御して、押え板232の後面で冊子10の前端面を後方に付勢する。付勢された冊子10は、載置面110A上で後方に移動する。制御部900は、冊子10の後端部がクランプ部660Aに進入するまで、束操作部230を後方向に移動させる。 As shown in FIGS. 5 and 24, the control unit 900 moves the table 110 on which the booklet 10 is placed backward to a position where the rear end of the table 110 is close to the hand unit 640 in the initial position. . The control unit 900 controls the movement of the bundle operation unit 230 and arranges the lower end portion of the presser plate 232 on the front side of the booklet 10. As shown in FIG. 51, the control unit 900 controls the movement of the bundle operation unit 230 and urges the front end surface of the booklet 10 backward on the rear surface of the presser plate 232. The biased booklet 10 moves backward on the placement surface 110A. The control unit 900 moves the bundle operation unit 230 in the backward direction until the rear end of the booklet 10 enters the clamp unit 660A.
 なお、冊子10の前後方向長さに応じて、冊子10の後端部をクランプ部660Aに進入させるために必要な束操作部230の移動量は異なる。制御部900は、例えばユーザが入力した冊子10の前後方向長さに応じて、束操作部230の移動量を調整する。その後、制御部900は、上板641(図28参照)をその可動範囲の上端部から下方向に移動させる。クランプ部660Aでは、冊子10の後端部が上板641及び下板642(図28参照)によって上下方向から挟持される。 It should be noted that the amount of movement of the bundle operation unit 230 required to cause the rear end portion of the booklet 10 to enter the clamp unit 660A differs depending on the length of the booklet 10 in the front-rear direction. The control unit 900 adjusts the amount of movement of the bundle operation unit 230 according to, for example, the longitudinal length of the booklet 10 input by the user. Thereafter, the controller 900 moves the upper plate 641 (see FIG. 28) downward from the upper end of the movable range. In the clamp portion 660A, the rear end portion of the booklet 10 is sandwiched from above and below by the upper plate 641 and the lower plate 642 (see FIG. 28).
 図52に示すように、制御部900は、冊子10の後端部がクランプ部660Aに挟持された状態で、ハンド部640を初期位置から後方向に移動させる。このとき、下板642は開口領域590A(図25参照)の内部で後方向に移動する。クランプ部660Aに挟持された冊子10は、一対の側板593(図25参照)の上辺に沿って後方に搬送される。 As shown in FIG. 52, the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 rearward from the initial position in a state where the rear end portion of the booklet 10 is held by the clamp unit 660A. At this time, the lower plate 642 moves backward within the opening region 590A (see FIG. 25). The booklet 10 sandwiched between the clamp portions 660A is conveyed rearward along the upper sides of the pair of side plates 593 (see FIG. 25).
 制御部900は、ハンド部640を引出位置まで後方向に移動させる。引出位置は、クランプ部660Aに挟持された冊子10が載置面110Aから引き出される位置である。ハンド部640が引出位置にある場合、冊子10の前後方向の全体が支持レール590上に載置され、且つ冊子10の前端部が後述のハンド基準位置よりも前側に配置される。ハンド部640の引出位置は、冊子10の前後方向長さに応じて前後方向に変化する。従って制御部900は、例えばユーザが入力した冊子10の前後方向長さに応じて、ハンド部640の移動量を調整する。以下同様に、制御部900は冊子10の前後方向長さに応じて、ハンド部640の移動量を調整する。 The control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 backward to the drawing position. The drawing position is a position where the booklet 10 held between the clamp portions 660A is drawn from the placement surface 110A. When the hand unit 640 is in the pull-out position, the entire booklet 10 in the front-rear direction is placed on the support rail 590, and the front end of the booklet 10 is arranged in front of the hand reference position described later. The drawing position of the hand unit 640 changes in the front-rear direction according to the length of the booklet 10 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the control unit 900 adjusts the amount of movement of the hand unit 640 according to, for example, the longitudinal length of the booklet 10 input by the user. Similarly, the control unit 900 adjusts the amount of movement of the hand unit 640 according to the longitudinal length of the booklet 10.
 次に制御部900は、上板641をその可動範囲の上端部まで移動させて、冊子10の後端部の挟持を解除する。制御部900は、冊子10の後端部がクランプ部660Aから抜け出す位置まで、ハンド部640を後方向に所定量移動させる。更に制御部900は、ハンド部640をその可動範囲の上端部まで移動させた後、ハンド部640をその可動範囲の前端部まで移動させる。 Next, the control unit 900 moves the upper plate 641 to the upper end portion of the movable range, and releases the rear end portion of the booklet 10. The control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 backward by a predetermined amount until the rear end of the booklet 10 comes out of the clamp unit 660A. Further, the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 to the upper end of the movable range, and then moves the hand unit 640 to the front end of the movable range.
 図53に示すように、制御部900は、クランプ部660Bが冊子10に前側から対向する位置まで、ハンド部640を下方向に移動させる。更に制御部900は、ハンド部640をハンド基準位置まで後方向に移動させる。ハンド基準位置は、冊子10を第一、第二裁断位置に位置決めするための基準となる、ハンド部640の前後方向位置である。第一裁断位置は、冊子10が左裁断部510及び右裁断部520との間に位置する、冊子10の前後方向位置である。第二裁断位置は、冊子10が裁断部材533の直下に位置する、冊子10の前後方向位置である。ハンド基準位置は、冊子10の前後方向長さに関係なく一定である。 As shown in FIG. 53, the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 downward to a position where the clamp unit 660B faces the booklet 10 from the front side. Further, the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 backward to the hand reference position. The hand reference position is a position in the front-rear direction of the hand unit 640 that serves as a reference for positioning the booklet 10 at the first and second cutting positions. The first cutting position is a front-rear direction position of the booklet 10 where the booklet 10 is positioned between the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520. The second cutting position is a front-rear direction position of the booklet 10 at which the booklet 10 is located immediately below the cutting member 533. The hand reference position is constant regardless of the longitudinal length of the booklet 10.
 ハンド部640がハンド基準位置に向けて移動するとき、冊子10の前端部がクランプ部660Bに進入して、冊子10の前端面が基準板643の後面に接触する。ハンド部640の移動に伴って、基準板643が冊子10を後方向に付勢する。制御部900は、ハンド部640がハンド基準位置に到達すると、上板641をその可動範囲の上端部から下方向に移動させる。クランプ部660Bでは、冊子10の前端部が上板641及び下板642によって上下方向から挟持される。これにより、冊子10の前端部が、クランプ部660Bに挟持され、且つ基準板643によって位置決めされる。制御部900は、基準板643の位置に基づいてハンド部640の位置制御を実行することで、冊子10を裁断位置へ正確に位置決めできる。 When the hand unit 640 moves toward the hand reference position, the front end portion of the booklet 10 enters the clamp unit 660B, and the front end surface of the booklet 10 contacts the rear surface of the reference plate 643. As the hand unit 640 moves, the reference plate 643 urges the booklet 10 backward. When the hand unit 640 reaches the hand reference position, the control unit 900 moves the upper plate 641 downward from the upper end of the movable range. In the clamp portion 660B, the front end portion of the booklet 10 is sandwiched between the upper plate 641 and the lower plate 642 from the vertical direction. As a result, the front end portion of the booklet 10 is sandwiched between the clamp portions 660 </ b> B and positioned by the reference plate 643. The control unit 900 can accurately position the booklet 10 to the cutting position by executing position control of the hand unit 640 based on the position of the reference plate 643.
 図54に示すように、制御部900は、ハンド部640をハンド基準位置から後方向に移動させる。クランプ部660Bに挟持された冊子10は、一対の側板593(図25参照)の上辺に沿って後方向に搬送される。基準板643の後面と裁断刃535との前後方向距離が、予め指定された前後方向の切断サイズ(本実施形態では、裁断後の冊子10の小口方向長さ)と等しくなるまで、ハンド部640は移動される。これにより、冊子10は第二裁断位置に搬送される。冊子10の後側部分は、載置面536A(図25参照)に積載され、且つ裁断部材533の下側に配置される。以上により、冊子搬送工程は終了する。 As shown in FIG. 54, the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 backward from the hand reference position. The booklet 10 sandwiched between the clamp portions 660B is conveyed in the backward direction along the upper sides of the pair of side plates 593 (see FIG. 25). Until the distance in the front-rear direction between the rear surface of the reference plate 643 and the cutting blade 535 becomes equal to a pre-specified front-rear direction cutting size (in this embodiment, the length in the edge direction of the booklet 10 after cutting), the hand unit 640 Is moved. Thereby, the booklet 10 is conveyed to the second cutting position. The rear portion of the booklet 10 is stacked on the placement surface 536A (see FIG. 25) and disposed below the cutting member 533. Thus, the booklet transport process ends.
<3-8.裁断工程>
 制御部900は冊子搬送工程の実行後、裁断工程を実行する。裁断工程は、テーブル110上にある冊子10を、裁断機構500によって予め指定されたサイズに裁断する工程である。図54~図58を参照して、裁断工程を説明する。
<3-8. Cutting process>
The controller 900 executes the cutting process after the booklet transport process. The cutting step is a step of cutting the booklet 10 on the table 110 into a size specified in advance by the cutting mechanism 500. The cutting process will be described with reference to FIGS.
 図54に示すように、制御部900は、裁断部材533をその可動範囲の上端部から下方に移動させる。冊子10を押圧する押え部材534に沿って、裁断刃535の刃先535Aがまな板(図示外)に到達する位置まで下方に移動する。冊子10の後縁部が、刃先535Aによって冊子10から切り離される。裁断後の冊子10の前後方向長さは、予め指定された前後方向の切断サイズと等しい。 As shown in FIG. 54, the control unit 900 moves the cutting member 533 downward from the upper end of its movable range. Along the pressing member 534 that presses the booklet 10, the cutting edge 535A of the cutting blade 535 moves downward to a position where it reaches a cutting board (not shown). The rear edge of the booklet 10 is cut off from the booklet 10 by the blade edge 535A. The front-rear direction length of the booklet 10 after cutting is equal to the front-rear direction cut size specified in advance.
 図55に示すように、制御部900は、載置面516A,526A(図26参照)の左右方向距離が冊子10の左右方向長さよりも若干小さくなるまで、左裁断部510及び右裁断部520を互いに近接する方向に移動させる。制御部900は、ハンド部640を前方向に移動させる。クランプ部660Bに挟持された冊子10の左端部及び右端部は、それぞれ載置面516A,526Aに載置される。冊子10は、一対の側板593の上辺に沿って前方向に搬送される。ハンド部640は、冊子10が支持レール590の前後方向略中央に到達するまで移動する。これにより、冊子10は第一裁断位置に搬送される。その後、制御部900は、上板641(図28参照)をその可動範囲の上端部まで移動させて、冊子10の前端部の挟持を解除する。更に制御部900は、ハンド部640を初期位置まで移動させる。 As shown in FIG. 55, the control unit 900 performs the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520 until the horizontal distance between the placement surfaces 516A and 526A (see FIG. 26) is slightly smaller than the horizontal length of the booklet 10. Are moved in directions close to each other. The control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 in the forward direction. The left end portion and the right end portion of the booklet 10 sandwiched between the clamp portions 660B are placed on placement surfaces 516A and 526A, respectively. The booklet 10 is conveyed forward along the upper sides of the pair of side plates 593. The hand unit 640 moves until the booklet 10 reaches the approximate center of the support rail 590 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the booklet 10 is conveyed to the first cutting position. Thereafter, the control unit 900 moves the upper plate 641 (see FIG. 28) to the upper end portion of the movable range to release the front end portion of the booklet 10. Furthermore, the control unit 900 moves the hand unit 640 to the initial position.
 図56及び図57に示すように、制御部900は、左裁断部510及び右裁断部520を互いに近接する方向に移動させる。裁断部材513,523は、載置面516A,526Aに載置された冊子10の上側を通って、互いに近接する方向に移動する。裁断刃515,525の左右方向距離が、予め指定された左右方向の切断サイズ(本実施形態では、裁断後の冊子10の天地方向長さ)と等しくなるまで、左裁断部510及び右裁断部520は移動される。 As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the control unit 900 moves the left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520 in directions close to each other. The cutting members 513 and 523 move in directions close to each other through the upper side of the booklet 10 placed on the placement surfaces 516A and 526A. The left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit until the horizontal distance between the cutting blades 515 and 525 becomes equal to a predetermined horizontal cutting size (in this embodiment, the vertical length of the booklet 10 after cutting). 520 is moved.
 次に制御部900は、位置調整処理を実行する。図57及び図58を参照して、位置調整処理を説明する。図58に示すように、まず対向板が整合準備位置まで移動される(S101)。対向板は、整合板518,528のうちで基準板とは異なる整合板である。基準板は、整合板518,528のうちで、冊子10を整合実行位置に位置決めする整合板である。 Next, the control unit 900 executes a position adjustment process. With reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, the position adjustment process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, first, the counter plate is moved to the alignment preparation position (S101). The counter plate is an alignment plate different from the reference plate among the alignment plates 518 and 528. The reference plate is an alignment plate that positions the booklet 10 at the alignment execution position among the alignment plates 518 and 528.
 整合実行位置は、冊子10の左右方向長さの略半分の距離分、カッタ間中心位置Zから基準板側に離れた位置である。カッタ間中心位置Zは、刃先515A,525Aの左右方向の中心位置である。本実施形態では、整合実行位置は先述の裁断基準位置P1と同一である。整合準備位置は、冊子10の左右方向長さの半分未満の距離分、カッタ間中心位置Zから対向板側に離れた位置である。本実施形態では、冊子10の右端面(本実施形態では、冊子10の地面)と対向する右側の整合板528が、基準板である。冊子10の左端面(本実施形態では、冊子10の天面)と対向する左側の整合板518が、対向板である。 The alignment execution position is a position away from the center position Z between the cutters to the reference plate side by a distance that is approximately half the length of the booklet 10 in the horizontal direction. The center position Z between the cutters is the center position in the left-right direction of the blade edges 515A and 525A. In this embodiment, the alignment execution position is the same as the cutting reference position P1 described above. The alignment preparation position is a position away from the center position Z between the cutters toward the counter plate by a distance less than half of the length of the booklet 10 in the left-right direction. In the present embodiment, the right alignment plate 528 that faces the right end surface of the booklet 10 (in this embodiment, the ground of the booklet 10) is the reference plate. The left alignment plate 518 facing the left end surface of the booklet 10 (in this embodiment, the top surface of the booklet 10) is a counter plate.
 ステップS101では、整合板518の右面が整合準備位置に到達するまで、整合板518が初期位置から右方向に移動される(図57参照)。このとき、整合板518の右面が、載置面516A上にある冊子10の左端面に接触して、冊子10を右方向に付勢する。整合板518の右面が整合準備位置に到達した場合、冊子10の左右方向中心はカッタ間中心位置Zよりも右側にある。 In step S101, the alignment plate 518 is moved rightward from the initial position until the right surface of the alignment plate 518 reaches the alignment preparation position (see FIG. 57). At this time, the right surface of the alignment plate 518 comes into contact with the left end surface of the booklet 10 on the placement surface 516A, and biases the booklet 10 in the right direction. When the right surface of the alignment plate 518 reaches the alignment preparation position, the center of the booklet 10 in the left-right direction is on the right side of the center position Z between the cutters.
 次に、対向板が整合準備位置から初期位置まで移動される(S103)。対向板が整合準備位置から初期位置に向けて移動開始した後、基準板が初期位置から整合実行位置まで移動される(S105)。ステップS105では、整合板528の左面が整合実行位置に到達するまで、整合板528が初期位置から左方向に移動される(図57参照)。整合板528の左面が、載置面526A上にある冊子10の右端面に接触して、冊子10を左方向に付勢する。整合板528の左面が整合実行位置に到達した場合、冊子10の左右方向中心はカッタ間中心位置Zと略一致する。 Next, the counter plate is moved from the alignment preparation position to the initial position (S103). After the opposing plate starts moving from the alignment preparation position toward the initial position, the reference plate is moved from the initial position to the alignment execution position (S105). In step S105, the alignment plate 528 is moved leftward from the initial position until the left surface of the alignment plate 528 reaches the alignment execution position (see FIG. 57). The left surface of the alignment plate 528 comes into contact with the right end surface of the booklet 10 on the placement surface 526A, and biases the booklet 10 leftward. When the left surface of the alignment plate 528 reaches the alignment execution position, the center of the booklet 10 in the left-right direction substantially coincides with the center position Z between the cutters.
 次に、基準板が整合実行位置から初期位置まで移動される(S107)。その後、位置調整処理は終了される。制御部900は裁断部材513,523をそれぞれ可動範囲の上端部から下方に移動させる。冊子10を押圧する押え部材514に沿って、裁断刃515の刃先515Aがまな板(図示外)に接触する位置まで下方に移動する。同様に、冊子10を押圧する押え部材524に沿って、裁断刃525の刃先525Aがまな板(図示外)に接触する位置まで下方に移動する。冊子10の左縁部及び右縁部が、それぞれ刃先515A,525Aによって冊子10から切り離される。裁断後の冊子10の左右方向長さは、予め指定された左右方向の切断サイズと等しい。 Next, the reference plate is moved from the alignment execution position to the initial position (S107). Thereafter, the position adjustment process is terminated. The control unit 900 moves the cutting members 513 and 523 downward from the upper end of the movable range. Along the pressing member 514 that presses the booklet 10, the cutting edge 515A of the cutting blade 515 moves downward to a position where it contacts a cutting board (not shown). Similarly, along the pressing member 524 that presses the booklet 10, the cutting edge 525A of the cutting blade 525 moves downward to a position where it contacts a cutting board (not shown). The left edge portion and the right edge portion of the booklet 10 are separated from the booklet 10 by blade edges 515A and 525A, respectively. The length in the left-right direction of the booklet 10 after cutting is equal to the cutting size in the left-right direction specified in advance.
 これにより、冊子10のうちで表紙9が貼られた前端面とは異なる端面側の縁部が裁断されて、所望のサイズの冊子10が作成される。制御部900は、裁断工程を終了する。具体的には、制御部900は、左裁断部510をその可動範囲の左端部まで移動させ、且つ右裁断部520をその可動範囲の右端部まで移動させる。ユーザは、裁断工程で裁断された冊子10を、裁断機構500から回収する。 Thereby, the edge part on the end face side different from the front end face on which the cover 9 is pasted is cut out in the booklet 10, and the booklet 10 having a desired size is created. The controller 900 ends the cutting process. Specifically, control unit 900 moves left cutting unit 510 to the left end of the movable range, and moves right cutting unit 520 to the right end of the movable range. The user collects the booklet 10 cut in the cutting process from the cutting mechanism 500.
 このように、製本装置1は位置調整処理を実行することで、カッタ間中心位置Zと冊子10の左右方向中心(本実施形態では、冊子10の天地方向中心)とを一致させることができる。本実施形態では、裁断基準位置P1(図23参照)を基準として、裁断刃515,525による冊子10の切断位置が調整される。つまり、冊子10の地側の端部(つまり、冊子10の地面)に対応する裁断基準位置P1を基準として、裁断刃515,525による冊子10の裁断位置が位置決めされる。従って製本装置1は、表紙9の貼付け位置に影響を受けることなく、冊子10を正確に裁断できる。冊子10の本文を構成する用紙8Aに印刷された画像が、冊子10の地面を基準として大きくずれることを抑制できる。 Thus, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can match the center position Z between the cutters and the center in the left-right direction of the booklet 10 (in this embodiment, the center in the vertical direction of the booklet 10) by executing the position adjustment process. In the present embodiment, the cutting position of the booklet 10 by the cutting blades 515 and 525 is adjusted based on the cutting reference position P1 (see FIG. 23). That is, the cutting position of the booklet 10 by the cutting blades 515 and 525 is positioned with reference to the cutting reference position P1 corresponding to the end of the booklet 10 on the ground side (that is, the ground of the booklet 10). Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately cut the booklet 10 without being affected by the attachment position of the cover 9. It is possible to suppress the image printed on the paper 8 </ b> A constituting the text of the booklet 10 from being largely deviated with respect to the ground of the booklet 10.
 なお、裁断基準位置P1(図23参照)は、左揃え板130(図14参照)が用紙束8の左端面を位置決めする第二規制位置と略一致する位置でもよい。この場合、左側の規制ピン463,464(図41参照)が基準ピンであり、右側の規制ピン463,464(図41参照)が反対ピンである。裁断基準位置P1は、規制位置P2(つまり、左側の規制ピン463,464の右端部)よりも左側にある。表紙9の左端部が用紙束8の左端部から右側にずれた状態で、表紙9が用紙束8に貼付けられる。つまり、表紙貼付工程で作成される冊子10では、用紙束8の左端部が表紙9から左側にはみ出る。 Note that the cutting reference position P1 (see FIG. 23) may be a position where the left alignment plate 130 (see FIG. 14) substantially coincides with the second restriction position where the left end surface of the sheet bundle 8 is positioned. In this case, the left regulation pins 463 and 464 (see FIG. 41) are reference pins, and the right regulation pins 463 and 464 (see FIG. 41) are opposite pins. The cutting reference position P1 is on the left side of the regulation position P2 (that is, the right end portion of the left regulation pins 463 and 464). The cover sheet 9 is attached to the sheet bundle 8 with the left end part of the cover sheet 9 shifted to the right side from the left end part of the sheet bundle 8. That is, in the booklet 10 created in the cover sticking step, the left end portion of the sheet bundle 8 protrudes from the cover 9 to the left side.
 位置調整処理(図58参照)では、冊子10の天側の端部に対応する裁断基準位置P1を基準として、裁断刃515,525による冊子10の裁断位置が位置決めされる。従って製本装置1は、表紙9の貼付け位置に影響を受けることなく、冊子10を正確に裁断できる。冊子10の本文を構成する用紙8Aに印刷された画像が、冊子10の天側の端部を基準として大きくずれることを抑制できる。 In the position adjustment process (see FIG. 58), the cutting position of the booklet 10 by the cutting blades 515 and 525 is positioned with reference to the cutting reference position P1 corresponding to the top end of the booklet 10. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can accurately cut the booklet 10 without being affected by the attachment position of the cover 9. It is possible to suppress the image printed on the paper 8 </ b> A constituting the text of the booklet 10 from being largely shifted with reference to the top end of the booklet 10.
<4.変形例の例示>
 本発明は上記開示に限定されるものではなく、以下に例示するように種々の変更が可能である。
<4. Example of modification>
The present invention is not limited to the above disclosure, and various modifications are possible as exemplified below.
(1)製本装置1の全体構造に関する変形例
 製本装置1に含まれる各機構(例えば、用紙供給部5、紙揃え機構100、束操作機構200、糊塗布機構300、表紙保持機構400、裁断機構500、冊子搬送機構600)は、単独で又は他の装置と組み合わせて使用されてもよい。例えば、用紙供給部5は、他の画像形成装置で印刷された用紙を搬送するために、単独で又は他の装置と組み合わせて使用されてもよい。
(1) Modification regarding the entire structure of the bookbinding apparatus 1 Each mechanism included in the bookbinding apparatus 1 (for example, the paper supply unit 5, the paper alignment mechanism 100, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the glue application mechanism 300, the cover holding mechanism 400, and the cutting mechanism) 500, booklet transport mechanism 600) may be used alone or in combination with other devices. For example, the paper supply unit 5 may be used alone or in combination with other devices in order to transport paper printed by other image forming apparatuses.
 製本装置1に含まれる各機構の位置は、上記の製本動作を実現できる範囲で変更可能である。例えば、本体枠2の右側に第一プリンタ3を設置してもよい。この場合、用紙供給部5は、第一プリンタ3で印刷された用紙8Aを左側に搬送することで、用紙8Aを本体枠2の右側から供給してもよい。第二プリンタ4を、本体枠2の下側に設置してもよい。この場合、表紙保持機構400は、第二プリンタ4で印刷された表紙9を上側に搬送することで、表紙9を本体枠2の下側から供給してもよい。各機構(例えば、束操作機構200、糊塗布機構300、表紙保持機構400、裁断機構500)の位置は、紙揃え機構100を基準として相対的な位置関係が変化しないように変更されてもよい。 The position of each mechanism included in the bookbinding apparatus 1 can be changed as long as the bookbinding operation described above can be realized. For example, the first printer 3 may be installed on the right side of the main body frame 2. In this case, the paper supply unit 5 may supply the paper 8A from the right side of the main body frame 2 by conveying the paper 8A printed by the first printer 3 to the left side. The second printer 4 may be installed below the main body frame 2. In this case, the cover holding mechanism 400 may supply the cover 9 from the lower side of the main body frame 2 by conveying the cover 9 printed by the second printer 4 upward. The positions of the mechanisms (for example, the bundle operation mechanism 200, the glue application mechanism 300, the cover holding mechanism 400, and the cutting mechanism 500) may be changed so that the relative positional relationship does not change with the paper alignment mechanism 100 as a reference. .
(2)紙揃え機構100に関する変形例
 紙揃え機構100は、用紙8Aの後端部、右端部、及び左端部の位置が一致するように、複数の用紙8Aを集積してもよい。紙揃え機構100は、接触部材106を備えなくてもよい。テーブル110は、略水平な平面である載置面110Aを有する、非回転式のテーブルでもよい。駆動モータ162は、第二テーブル1120の右端部及び左端部に設けられた一対のレバー161を介して、第二テーブル1120を回転させてもよい。
(2) Modified Example Regarding Paper Alignment Mechanism 100 The paper alignment mechanism 100 may stack a plurality of sheets 8A so that the positions of the rear end, right end, and left end of the sheets 8A coincide. The paper alignment mechanism 100 may not include the contact member 106. The table 110 may be a non-rotating table having a mounting surface 110A that is a substantially horizontal plane. The drive motor 162 may rotate the second table 1120 via a pair of levers 161 provided at the right end and the left end of the second table 1120.
 偏心カム182の単位時間当たりの回転数は、カム部材172の単位時間当たりの回転数と同じでもよいし、カム部材172の単位時間当たりの回転数よりも小さくてもよい。振動モータ180が第二テーブル1120に振動を付与するタイミングと、叩きモータ170が第二テーブル1120に振動を付与するタイミングとは、互いに同じでもよいし異なってもよい。 The rotational speed per unit time of the eccentric cam 182 may be the same as the rotational speed per unit time of the cam member 172, or may be smaller than the rotational speed per unit time of the cam member 172. The timing at which the vibration motor 180 applies vibration to the second table 1120 and the timing at which the tapping motor 170 applies vibration to the second table 1120 may be the same or different from each other.
 接触部材106は、テーブル110の上方で左右方向に延びるワイヤーでもよい。接触部材106は、テーブル110の上方で、右側前方に向けて略水平に延びてもよい。接触部材106は、テーブル110の上方で、右側下方に向けて延びてもよい。 The contact member 106 may be a wire extending in the left-right direction above the table 110. The contact member 106 may extend substantially horizontally toward the right front above the table 110. The contact member 106 may extend above the table 110 toward the lower right side.
 紙揃え機構100は、叩きモータ170及び振動モータ180とは異なる手段で、第二テーブル1120を振動させてもよい。紙揃え機構100は、叩きモータ170及び振動モータ180の何れか一つを備えてもよい。叩きモータ170及び振動モータ180は、第一テーブル1110及び第二テーブル1120の少なくとも一つを振動させればよい。例えば振動モータ180は、第一テーブル1110を振動させるために、第一テーブル1110の下面に設けられてもよい。 The paper alignment mechanism 100 may vibrate the second table 1120 by means different from the tapping motor 170 and the vibration motor 180. The paper alignment mechanism 100 may include any one of the tapping motor 170 and the vibration motor 180. The hit motor 170 and the vibration motor 180 may vibrate at least one of the first table 1110 and the second table 1120. For example, the vibration motor 180 may be provided on the lower surface of the first table 1110 to vibrate the first table 1110.
(3)糊塗布機構300に関する変形例
 図59を参照して、糊塗布機構300の変形例である糊塗布機構1300を説明する。以下の説明では、糊塗布機構300と同一の構成については、同一符号を付して説明を省略し、糊塗布機構300と異なる点のみを説明する。図59は搬送部302を省略する。
(3) Modification concerning glue application mechanism 300 With reference to FIG. 59, a glue application mechanism 1300 which is a modification of the glue application mechanism 300 will be described. In the following description, the same components as those of the glue application mechanism 300 are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and only differences from the glue application mechanism 300 will be described. In FIG. 59, the conveyance unit 302 is omitted.
 糊塗布機構1300は、可動部1301、搬送部302(図3参照)を含む。可動部1301は、支持部1311、図示外のナット、糊塗布部1340、糊受け部材1360、ポンプ駆動機構1380を含む。支持部1311は、上下方向及び左右方向に延びる矩形状の板状体である。可動部1301のナットは、支持部1311の前面下端部に設けられ、且つネジ軸322(図3参照)が挿通される。従って、搬送モータ321(図3参照)は、可動部1301を左右方向に移動可能である。 The paste application mechanism 1300 includes a movable unit 1301 and a transport unit 302 (see FIG. 3). The movable part 1301 includes a support part 1311, a nut (not shown), a glue application part 1340, a glue receiving member 1360, and a pump drive mechanism 1380. The support portion 1311 is a rectangular plate-like body extending in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The nut of the movable portion 1301 is provided at the lower front end portion of the support portion 1311 and the screw shaft 322 (see FIG. 3) is inserted. Accordingly, the transport motor 321 (see FIG. 3) can move the movable portion 1301 in the left-right direction.
 糊塗布部1340は、本体部1349を含む。本体部1349は、上下方向に長い略直方体状の箱状体である。本体部1349の内側に、ヒータ347(17参照)が設けられる。ローラ設置部1343は、本体部1349の後側に設けられる。糊塗布ローラ350は、本体部1349の内部で回転可能に保持される。糊塗布ローラ350の周面351Aの一部(糊塗布面)は、ローラ設置部1343から後方へ向けて露出する。糊受け部材1360は、上側が開口する有底の箱状体であり、本体部1349の下端部に設けられる。 The paste application part 1340 includes a main body part 1349. The main body 1349 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-like body that is long in the vertical direction. A heater 347 (see 17) is provided inside the main body 1349. The roller installation portion 1343 is provided on the rear side of the main body portion 1349. The glue application roller 350 is rotatably held inside the main body 1349. A part (glue application surface) of the peripheral surface 351 </ b> A of the adhesive application roller 350 is exposed rearward from the roller installation portion 1343. The glue receiving member 1360 is a bottomed box-like body that is open on the upper side, and is provided at the lower end of the main body 1349.
 ポンプ駆動機構1380は、タンク1383、連通部材1381、ネジポンプ1385、プーリ1357,1358、ベルト1356、配管1387を含む。タンク1383は、上下方向に長い略直方体状の箱状体である。タンク1383は、本体部1349の左側に設けられる。タンク1383は、糊受け部材1360の下端部左側から本体部1349の左側上方まで延びる。 The pump drive mechanism 1380 includes a tank 1383, a communication member 1381, a screw pump 1385, pulleys 1357 and 1358, a belt 1356, and a pipe 1387. The tank 1383 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-like body that is long in the vertical direction. The tank 1383 is provided on the left side of the main body 1349. The tank 1383 extends from the left side of the lower end of the glue receiving member 1360 to the upper left side of the main body 1349.
 連通部材1381は、糊受け部材1360の下端部とタンク1383の下端部とを接続する箱状体である。糊受け部材1360の内部とタンク1383の内部とは、連通部材1381を介して連通する。ネジポンプ1385は、軸部1385A及び螺旋部1358Bを含む。軸部1385Aは、タンク1383の内部を上下方向に貫通して延びる円柱体である。螺旋部1358Bは、軸部1385Aの周面に設けられ、軸部1385Aの軸線に沿って螺旋状に形成された板状体である。 The communication member 1381 is a box-like body that connects the lower end portion of the glue receiving member 1360 and the lower end portion of the tank 1383. The inside of the glue receiving member 1360 and the inside of the tank 1383 communicate with each other via a communication member 1381. The screw pump 1385 includes a shaft portion 1385A and a spiral portion 1358B. The shaft portion 1385A is a cylindrical body that extends through the tank 1383 in the vertical direction. The spiral portion 1358B is a plate-like body provided on the peripheral surface of the shaft portion 1385A and formed in a spiral shape along the axis of the shaft portion 1385A.
 プーリ1357は、タンク1383の上方にて、軸部1385Aに設けられる。支持部1311の前面に、ポンプ駆動モータ1350が設けられる。プーリ1358は、ポンプ駆動モータ1350の駆動軸に設けられる。ベルト1356は、支持部1311に設けられた切欠部1311Aを介して、プーリ1357,1358に架け渡される。本体部1349の上面に、糊供給口341(図17参照)が設けられる。配管1387は、タンク1383の上端部と糊供給口341とに接続する。タンク1383の内部と糊貯留部342(図17参照)の内部とは、配管1387及び糊供給口341を介して連通する。 The pulley 1357 is provided on the shaft portion 1385A above the tank 1383. A pump drive motor 1350 is provided on the front surface of the support portion 1311. The pulley 1358 is provided on the drive shaft of the pump drive motor 1350. The belt 1356 is bridged over pulleys 1357 and 1358 via a notch 1311A provided in the support portion 1311. An adhesive supply port 341 (see FIG. 17) is provided on the upper surface of the main body 1349. The pipe 1387 is connected to the upper end of the tank 1383 and the glue supply port 341. The inside of the tank 1383 and the inside of the glue storage part 342 (see FIG. 17) communicate with each other via a pipe 1387 and a glue supply port 341.
 上記の構造により、可動部1301が左右方向に移動しながら、回転する糊塗布ローラ350が用紙束8の前端面に糊7を塗布する。このとき、糊塗布面から落下した糊7は、糊受け部材1360の内部に上方から進入する。糊受け部材1360の内部に進入した糊7は、連通部材1381を介してタンク1383の内部に流出する。ポンプ駆動モータ1350は、ベルト1356,プーリ1357,1358を介して、軸部1385Aを中心にネジポンプ1385を回転させる。ネジポンプ1385の回転に伴って、螺旋部1358Bはタンク1383内にある糊7を上方へ移送する。移送された糊7は、配管1387を通過して糊貯留部342に送出される。 With the above structure, the rotating glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 to the front end surface of the sheet bundle 8 while the movable portion 1301 moves in the left-right direction. At this time, the glue 7 dropped from the glue application surface enters the glue receiving member 1360 from above. The glue 7 entering the inside of the glue receiving member 1360 flows out into the tank 1383 through the communication member 1381. The pump drive motor 1350 rotates the screw pump 1385 around the shaft portion 1385A via the belt 1356 and the pulleys 1357 and 1358. Along with the rotation of the screw pump 1385, the spiral portion 1358 </ b> B moves the glue 7 in the tank 1383 upward. The transferred glue 7 passes through the pipe 1387 and is sent to the glue storage unit 342.
 このようにポンプ駆動機構1380は、糊受け部材1360に落下する液状の糊7を回収し、糊貯留部342に送出する。糊塗布面から落下した糊7は、本体部1349の外部に滞留しにくい。従って製本装置1は、臭いを生じる糊7を使用する場合でも、糊7の臭いの拡散を抑制できる。 In this way, the pump drive mechanism 1380 collects the liquid glue 7 falling on the glue receiving member 1360 and sends it to the glue reservoir 342. The glue 7 dropped from the glue application surface is less likely to stay outside the main body 1349. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can suppress the spread of the odor of the paste 7 even when the odor generating paste 7 is used.
 製本装置1は糊塗布工程時に、回転する糊塗布ローラ350の左右方向位置を固定した状態で、紙揃え機構100を左右方向に移動させてもよい。この場合、用紙束8の前端面が糊塗布ローラ350の糊塗布面に沿って左右方向に移動することで、用紙束8の前端面に糊7が塗布される。製本装置1は、糊塗布ローラ350及び紙揃え機構100の両方を左右方向に移動させることで、用紙束8の前端面に糊7を塗布してもよい。 The bookbinding apparatus 1 may move the paper alignment mechanism 100 in the left-right direction in a state where the left-right direction position of the rotating glue application roller 350 is fixed during the glue application step. In this case, the glue 7 is applied to the front end face of the sheet bundle 8 by moving the front end face of the sheet bundle 8 in the left-right direction along the glue application surface of the glue application roller 350. The bookbinding apparatus 1 may apply the glue 7 to the front end face of the sheet bundle 8 by moving both the glue application roller 350 and the paper alignment mechanism 100 in the left-right direction.
 糊塗布ローラ350は、その軸線が上方向に向けて右側に傾斜する姿勢に限定されない。糊塗布ローラ350は、その軸線が上下方向と略平行な姿勢で配置されてもよい。図60に示すように、糊塗布ローラ350は、その軸線が上方向に向けて左側に傾斜する姿勢で配置されてもよい。この場合、糊塗布機構300は第一~第四塗布動作の何れかの実行時に、以下の態様で糊7を前端面8Bに塗布する。 The glue application roller 350 is not limited to the posture in which the axis is inclined to the right side in the upward direction. The glue application roller 350 may be arranged with its axis substantially parallel to the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 60, the glue application roller 350 may be arranged in such a posture that its axis is inclined leftward in the upward direction. In this case, the glue application mechanism 300 applies the glue 7 to the front end face 8B in the following manner when any of the first to fourth application operations is performed.
 図60の状態Y21に示すように、糊塗布部340が第一退避位置から第二退避位置まで移動する場合、糊塗布ローラ350は逆転する。糊塗布面の近接部は、周面351Aが前端面8Bに対して相対移動する方向の下流側へ向かって移動する。第一対向部は第一角部8Hに対して糊7をこすりつけるように回転する。従って、前端面8B及び第一角部8Hに糊7が塗布される。 60, when the glue application unit 340 moves from the first retracted position to the second retracted position, the glue applying roller 350 reverses. The proximity portion of the paste application surface moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the peripheral surface 351A moves relative to the front end surface 8B. The first facing portion rotates so as to rub the glue 7 against the first corner portion 8H. Accordingly, the paste 7 is applied to the front end face 8B and the first corner 8H.
 糊塗布ローラ350が第一近接位置から第二近接位置まで移動する間に、用紙束8の第一角部8Hは逆転する糊塗布面に接触することで下側に撓む。詳細には、周面351Aの近接部は、糊塗布ローラ350が前端面8Bに対して相対移動する方向の下流側に向かって移動する。近接部と前端面8Bとの間に発生する摩擦抵抗が相対的に大きいため、第一角部8Hは下方向に撓み易い。第一角部8Hが下側に撓むことで、第一対向部は第一角部8Hに対して糊7を塗布し易い。 While the glue application roller 350 moves from the first proximity position to the second proximity position, the first corner 8H of the sheet bundle 8 bends downward by contacting the reverse glue application surface. Specifically, the proximity portion of the peripheral surface 351A moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the glue application roller 350 moves relative to the front end surface 8B. Since the frictional resistance generated between the proximity portion and the front end surface 8B is relatively large, the first corner portion 8H is easily bent downward. As the first corner portion 8H bends downward, the first facing portion can easily apply the paste 7 to the first corner portion 8H.
 図60の状態Y22に示すように、糊塗布部340が第二退避位置から第一退避位置まで移動する場合、糊塗布ローラ350は正転する。糊塗布面の近接部は、周面351Aが前端面8Bに対して相対移動する方向の下流側へ向かって移動する。第二対向部は第二角部8Iに対して糊7をこすりつけるように回転する。従って、前端面8B及び第二角部8Iに糊7が塗布される。 60, when the glue application unit 340 moves from the second retracted position to the first retracted position, the glue applying roller 350 rotates normally. The proximity portion of the paste application surface moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the peripheral surface 351A moves relative to the front end surface 8B. The second facing portion rotates so as to rub the glue 7 against the second corner portion 8I. Accordingly, the paste 7 is applied to the front end face 8B and the second corner 8I.
 糊塗布ローラ350が第二近接位置から第一近接位置まで移動する間に、用紙束8の第二角部8Iは正転する糊塗布面に接触することで上側に撓む。詳細には、周面351Aの近接部は、糊塗布ローラ350が前端面8Bに対して相対移動する方向の下流側に向かって移動する。近接部と前端面8Bとの間に発生する摩擦抵抗が相対的に大きいため、第二角部8Iは上方向に撓み易い。第二角部8Iが上側に撓むことで、第二対向部は第二角部8Iに対して糊7を塗布し易い。 While the glue application roller 350 moves from the second proximity position to the first proximity position, the second corner portion 8I of the sheet bundle 8 is bent upward by coming into contact with the normally rotating glue application surface. Specifically, the proximity portion of the peripheral surface 351A moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the glue application roller 350 moves relative to the front end surface 8B. Since the frictional resistance generated between the proximity portion and the front end surface 8B is relatively large, the second corner portion 8I is easily bent upward. As the second corner portion 8I bends upward, the second facing portion can easily apply the glue 7 to the second corner portion 8I.
 このように糊塗布ローラ350は、第一角部8H、及び第一角部8Hの下方にある第二角部8Iの順に、糊7を塗布する。従って、前縁部8Eに塗布した糊7は、前縁部8Eから垂れにくい。 Thus, the glue application roller 350 applies the glue 7 in the order of the first corner 8H and the second corner 8I below the first corner 8H. Therefore, the glue 7 applied to the front edge 8E is unlikely to sag from the front edge 8E.
(4)表紙保持機構400に関する変形例
 図44に示すように、操作領域430Aに表紙9が存在するか否かを検出するセンサ498を、上クランプ430に設けてもよい。この場合、第一、第二表紙搬送処理(図38、図43)において、センサ498によって表紙9が検出された場合に、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440が閉鎖されればよい(S9及びS47)。これにより、操作領域430Aに表紙9が挿入されていない状態で、ステップS9以降の処理又はステップS47以降の処理が進行することを抑制できる。
(4) Modification Regarding Cover Cover Holding Mechanism 400 As shown in FIG. 44, the upper clamp 430 may be provided with a sensor 498 that detects whether or not the cover 9 is present in the operation area 430A. In this case, when the cover 9 is detected by the sensor 498 in the first and second cover transport processes (FIGS. 38 and 43), the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 may be closed (S9 and S47). . Thereby, it is possible to suppress the processing after step S9 or the processing after step S47 from proceeding in a state where the cover 9 is not inserted in the operation area 430A.
 制御部900は、第一、第二表紙搬送処理に代えて、以下の基本搬送処理を実行してもよい。基本搬送処理では、図37に示すように、表紙9の下辺部が操作領域440Aに進入すると、操作領域440Aが閉鎖される。下クランプ440は、表紙9の下辺部を把持した状態で下方向に移動する。下クランプ440の移動に伴って、操作領域430Aに表紙9が挿入された状態で、上クランプ430は自重によって上基準位置まで下方向に移動する。 The control unit 900 may execute the following basic conveyance process instead of the first and second cover sheet conveyance processes. In the basic conveyance process, as shown in FIG. 37, when the lower side of the cover 9 enters the operation area 440A, the operation area 440A is closed. The lower clamp 440 moves downward while gripping the lower side portion of the cover sheet 9. As the lower clamp 440 moves, the upper clamp 430 moves downward to the upper reference position by its own weight in a state where the cover sheet 9 is inserted into the operation area 430A.
 上クランプ430が上基準位置に達したのち、下クランプ440は上クランプ430から離隔して下基準位置まで下方向に移動する。下クランプ440が下基準位置に位置決めされると、操作領域430Aが閉鎖される。図40に示すように、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440によって、表紙9が保持される。図42に示すように、表紙9を保持する可動部401が、貼付基準位置まで下方向に移動する。 After the upper clamp 430 reaches the upper reference position, the lower clamp 440 moves away from the upper clamp 430 to the lower reference position. When the lower clamp 440 is positioned at the lower reference position, the operation area 430A is closed. As shown in FIG. 40, the cover sheet 9 is held by the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440. As shown in FIG. 42, the movable portion 401 that holds the cover 9 moves downward to the sticking reference position.
 上記の基本搬送処理において、第一、第二表紙搬送処理の一部が選択的に実行されてもよい。例えば、ステップS9~S19が実行される場合、表紙保持機構400は表紙9を確実に搬送できる。ステップS13,S17~S25が実行される場合、表紙保持機構400は、表紙9に皺及び弛みが生じることを抑制しつつ、表紙9を搬送できる。ステップS1~S7、S25~S27が実行される場合、表紙保持機構400は表紙9を用紙束8に対して正確に位置決めできる。 In the basic transport process described above, a part of the first and second cover transport processes may be selectively executed. For example, when steps S9 to S19 are executed, the cover holding mechanism 400 can reliably convey the cover 9. When steps S13 and S17 to S25 are executed, the cover holding mechanism 400 can transport the cover 9 while suppressing wrinkles and slack in the cover 9. When steps S1 to S7 and S25 to S27 are executed, the cover holding mechanism 400 can accurately position the cover 9 with respect to the sheet bundle 8.
 第一、第二表紙搬送処理は、以下のような変形が可能である。以下説明する第一表紙搬送処理の変形例は、第二表紙搬送処理にも適用できる。ステップS17では、第一保持力が第二保持力よりも大きくなるように、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の少なくとも一つが制御されればよい。ステップS19では、ステップS23における第二保持力よりも大きい力になるように、昇降モータ450によって下クランプ440の搬送力が制御されればよい。ステップS23では、下クランプ440が保持実行位置に到達した後の第二保持力が、下クランプ440が保持実行位置に到達する前の第二保持力よりも大きくなるように、上クランプ430が制御されればよい。 The first and second cover transport processes can be modified as follows. A modification of the first cover transport process described below can also be applied to the second cover transport process. In step S17, at least one of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 may be controlled so that the first holding force is larger than the second holding force. In step S19, the conveying force of the lower clamp 440 may be controlled by the elevating motor 450 so that the force is greater than the second holding force in step S23. In step S23, the upper clamp 430 is controlled so that the second holding force after the lower clamp 440 reaches the holding execution position is larger than the second holding force before the lower clamp 440 reaches the holding execution position. It only has to be done.
 ステップS17における第一保持力よりも、ステップS31における第一保持力が小さくなるように、下クランプ440が制御されればよい。同様に、ステップS23における第二保持力よりも、ステップS31における第二保持力が小さくなるように、上クランプ430が制御されればよい。第一搬送位置から第二搬送位置に移動するテーブル110の搬送力は、ステップS31における第一保持力及び第二保持力よりも大きな力であればよい。換言すると、ステップS31では、表紙9が操作領域430A,440Aから容易に抜け出せる程度に、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の保持力が弱まればよい。 The lower clamp 440 may be controlled so that the first holding force in step S31 is smaller than the first holding force in step S17. Similarly, the upper clamp 430 may be controlled so that the second holding force in step S31 is smaller than the second holding force in step S23. The conveyance force of the table 110 that moves from the first conveyance position to the second conveyance position may be any force that is greater than the first holding force and the second holding force in step S31. In other words, in step S31, the holding force of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 may be weakened to such an extent that the cover 9 can be easily pulled out from the operation areas 430A and 440A.
 上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の少なくとも一つは、表紙9の一部を保持可能なクリップ、吸引部、接着部、ローラ等でもよい。例えば上クランプ430及び下クランプ440がそれぞれ一対のローラによって表紙9を挟持する機構である場合、ステップS21を実行することなく、下クランプ440の移動開始(S19)と同時に、上クランプ430を第二付勢値で挟持してもよい(S23)。ステップS31では、一対のローラを離隔させることなく、一対のローラが表紙9を付勢する力が弱められればよい。 At least one of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 may be a clip that can hold a part of the cover 9, a suction part, an adhesive part, a roller, or the like. For example, when the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are mechanisms for holding the cover 9 by a pair of rollers, the upper clamp 430 is moved to the second at the same time as the movement of the lower clamp 440 (S19) without executing step S21. It may be clamped by the urging value (S23). In step S31, the force with which the pair of rollers urge the cover sheet 9 is weakened without separating the pair of rollers.
 上クランプ430及び下クランプ440がそれぞれ接着部によって表紙9を挟持する機構である場合、第一保持力及び第二保持力の大きさは、表紙9に接着する力の大きさによって調整されてもよい。上クランプ430及び下クランプ440がそれぞれ粗面加工された一対の板で表紙9を挟持する機構である場合、第一保持力及び第二保持力の大きさは、表紙9に対する摩擦力の大きさによって調整されてもよい。 In the case where the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are mechanisms for holding the cover 9 by the bonding portions, the magnitudes of the first holding force and the second holding force may be adjusted according to the magnitude of the force to adhere to the cover 9. Good. In the case where the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 are mechanisms that sandwich the cover sheet 9 with a pair of roughened plates, the magnitudes of the first holding force and the second holding force are the magnitude of the frictional force on the cover sheet 9, respectively. May be adjusted.
 表紙保持機構400は、位置決め板455(図41、図44参照)に代えて、複数の位置決めピン(図示外)を備えてもよい。複数の位置決めピンは、支持枠414の右側面に上下方向に並んで配置されており、それぞれ前後方向に移動可能である。図示外のソレノイドは、複数の位置決めピンの一つを選択的に付勢して、支持枠414よりも後側に突出する進出位置に移動させる。進出位置にある位置決めピンは、位置決め板455と同様に、上クランプ430の位置決め突起456(図39参照)と接触して、上クランプ430の下移動を規制する。 The cover holding mechanism 400 may include a plurality of positioning pins (not shown) instead of the positioning plate 455 (see FIGS. 41 and 44). The plurality of positioning pins are arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface of the support frame 414, and are movable in the front-rear direction. A solenoid (not shown) selectively energizes one of the plurality of positioning pins and moves it to an advanced position that protrudes rearward from the support frame 414. Similar to the positioning plate 455, the positioning pin in the advanced position contacts the positioning protrusion 456 (see FIG. 39) of the upper clamp 430 and restricts the downward movement of the upper clamp 430.
 この場合、ステップS25を実行する制御部900のCPUは、RAMの変数C(つまり、表紙サイズ)に応じて、表紙サイズの半分(つまり、RAMの変数Cに1/2を乗算した値)に相当する距離分、貼付中心位置H1から上方向にある位置決めピンを、ソレノイドによって進出位置に移動させる。これにより、表紙サイズの半分に相当する距離分、貼付中心位置H1から離れた位置に上基準位置が設定される。上クランプ430は、表紙サイズに応じて調整された位置で、表紙9を保持できる。同様にステップS65では、上基準位置がデータ中心位置M2に応じて変更されてもよい。 In this case, the CPU of the control unit 900 that executes step S25 reduces the cover size to half (that is, a value obtained by multiplying the RAM variable C by 1/2) according to the RAM variable C (that is, the cover size). For the corresponding distance, the positioning pin located upward from the sticking center position H1 is moved to the advance position by the solenoid. Thus, the upper reference position is set at a position away from the pasting center position H1 by a distance corresponding to half of the cover size. The upper clamp 430 can hold the cover 9 at a position adjusted according to the cover size. Similarly, in step S65, the upper reference position may be changed according to the data center position M2.
 第二表紙搬送処理は、以下のような変形が可能である。第二プリンタ4は、表紙9にマーク9Bを一つだけ印刷してもよい。この場合、表紙保持機構400は、マーク9Bを検出可能なマークセンサ499を一つだけ設けてもよい。制御部900のCPUは、一つのマーク9Bが検出された場合、マーク検出ありと判断すればよい(S63:YES) The second cover transport process can be modified as follows. The second printer 4 may print only one mark 9B on the cover 9. In this case, the cover holding mechanism 400 may be provided with only one mark sensor 499 that can detect the mark 9B. The CPU of the control unit 900 may determine that there is mark detection when one mark 9B is detected (S63: YES).
 冊子操作処理(図47参照)は、以下のような変形が可能である。ステップS83では、搬送モータ422の回転数に基づいて、可動部401が予め定められた第一特定位置まで上方向に移動したか否かを判断してもよい。第一特定位置は、上クランプ470及び下クランプ480に挟持された冊子10の下端部が、少なくとも載置面110Aよりも上側に配置される、可動部401の上下方向位置である。 The booklet operation process (see FIG. 47) can be modified as follows. In step S83, it may be determined whether or not the movable unit 401 has moved upward to a predetermined first specific position based on the number of rotations of the transport motor 422. The first specific position is a vertical position of the movable portion 401 where the lower end portion of the booklet 10 sandwiched between the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 is disposed at least above the placement surface 110A.
 ステップS89では、搬送モータ422の回転数に基づいて、可動部401が予め定められた第二特定位置まで下方向に移動したか否かを判断してもよい。第二特定位置は、上クランプ470及び下クランプ480に挟持された冊子10の下端部が、載置面110Aと接触する位置又は載置面110Aの若干上側に配置される、可動部401の上下方向位置である。 In step S89, based on the rotation speed of the transport motor 422, it may be determined whether the movable unit 401 has moved downward to a predetermined second specific position. The second specific position is a position where the lower end portion of the booklet 10 held between the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 is in contact with the placement surface 110A or slightly above the placement surface 110A. Directional position.
 載置面110Aは後方向に傾斜する面でもよい。この場合、ステップS87~S95の実行時に、冊子10を載置面110Aにより適切に載置できる。載置面110A上に突起部を設けてもよい。この場合、ステップS91の実行時に、突起部が冊子10の下端部に引っかかることで、冊子10を載置面110Aにより適切に載置できる。 The mounting surface 110A may be a surface inclined backward. In this case, the booklet 10 can be appropriately placed on the placement surface 110A during the execution of steps S87 to S95. A protrusion may be provided on the mounting surface 110A. In this case, the booklet 10 can be appropriately placed on the placement surface 110 </ b> A because the protrusion is caught by the lower end portion of the booklet 10 during the execution of step S <b> 91.
 上記実施形態では、冊子10が載置面110Aから上方に搬送された後、載置面110Aに再び載置される場合を例示した。これに代えて、冊子10が第一面から上方に搬送された後、冊子10が第一面とは異なる第二面に載置されてもよい。第一面は、用紙束8を載置可能な上向きの面であればよい。第二面は、冊子10を載置可能な上向きの面であればよい。 In the above embodiment, the case where the booklet 10 is transported upward from the placement surface 110A and then placed on the placement surface 110A again is exemplified. Instead, after the booklet 10 is conveyed upward from the first surface, the booklet 10 may be placed on a second surface different from the first surface. The first surface may be an upward surface on which the sheet bundle 8 can be placed. The second surface may be an upward surface on which the booklet 10 can be placed.
 上クランプ470及び下クランプ480が冊子10を挟持しながら上下方向に移動可能な構造である場合、可動部401を上下方向に移動させるのに代えて、冊子10を挟持する上クランプ470及び下クランプ480を上下方向に移動させてもよい。テーブル110が上下方向に移動可能な構造である場合、可動部401を上下方向に移動させるのに代えて、テーブル110を上下方向に移動させてもよい。可動部401の上下動と併せて、テーブル110の上下動が行われてもよい。 When the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 have a structure that can move in the vertical direction while holding the booklet 10, the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp that hold the booklet 10 instead of moving the movable unit 401 in the vertical direction. You may move 480 up and down. When the table 110 has a structure that can move in the vertical direction, the table 110 may be moved in the vertical direction instead of moving the movable portion 401 in the vertical direction. Along with the vertical movement of the movable part 401, the vertical movement of the table 110 may be performed.
 例えばステップS81では、テーブル110を下方向に移動させる動作と、可動部401を上方向に移動させる動作の少なくとも一つが実行されればよい。これにより、テーブル110と上クランプ470及び下クランプ480とが互いに離隔する方向に相対移動するため、冊子10を載置面110Aから上方向に離隔できる。ステップS87では、テーブル110を上方向に移動させる動作と、可動部401を下方向に移動させる動作の少なくとも一つが実行されればよい。これにより、テーブル110と上クランプ470及び下クランプ480とが互いに近接する方向に相対移動するため、冊子10を載置面110Aに上側から載置できる。 For example, in step S81, at least one of the operation of moving the table 110 downward and the operation of moving the movable unit 401 upward may be executed. Thereby, since the table 110 and the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 move relative to each other, the booklet 10 can be separated upward from the placement surface 110A. In step S87, at least one of the operation of moving the table 110 upward and the operation of moving the movable unit 401 downward may be executed. Thereby, since the table 110 and the upper clamp 470 and the lower clamp 480 move relative to each other, the booklet 10 can be placed on the placement surface 110A from above.
 ステップS81,S87における可動部401の移動速さは同じでもよい。ステップS85は、実行されなくてもよい。ステップS89~S91は、実行されなくてもよい。 The moving speed of the movable part 401 in steps S81 and S87 may be the same. Step S85 may not be executed. Steps S89 to S91 may not be executed.
 表紙保持機構400は、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440に相当するクランプを、一つだけ備えてもよいし、三つ以上備えてもよい。上クランプ430及び下クランプ440に代えて、可動部401において表紙9を搬送する他の機構(例えば、ベルトコンベア、ローラ群等)を設けてもよい。昇降モータ450は、上クランプ430及び下クランプ440の両方を移動させてもよい。二つのモータが、それぞれ上クランプ430及び下クランプ440を独立して移動させてもよい。 The cover holding mechanism 400 may include only one clamp corresponding to the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440, or may include three or more. Instead of the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440, another mechanism (for example, a belt conveyor, a roller group, or the like) that conveys the cover sheet 9 in the movable portion 401 may be provided. The lift motor 450 may move both the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440. Two motors may move the upper clamp 430 and the lower clamp 440 independently.
 製本装置1は、上クランプ430又は位置決め突起456を上下方向に移動させる機構によって、例えば表紙サイズ又はデータ中心位置M2に応じて、上クランプ430を位置決めしてもよい。下クランプ440は、表紙9の一部(第一部分)を保持できればよい。上クランプ430は表紙9の第一部分とは異なる一部(第二部分)を保持できればよい。上クランプ430の上下方向位置(換言すると、上基準位置)は、固定されてもよい。 The bookbinding apparatus 1 may position the upper clamp 430 by a mechanism for moving the upper clamp 430 or the positioning protrusion 456 in the vertical direction, for example, according to the cover size or the data center position M2. The lower clamp 440 only needs to hold a part (first part) of the cover 9. The upper clamp 430 only needs to hold a part (second part) different from the first part of the cover sheet 9. The vertical position (in other words, the upper reference position) of the upper clamp 430 may be fixed.
(5)裁断機構500に関する変形例
 裁断機構500では、冊子10の右端面と対向する整合板528が対向板、且つ、冊子10の左端面と対向する整合板518が基準板でもよい。裁断基準位置P1は、整合実行位置と左右方向に異なる位置でもよい。これらの場合も、製本装置1は、位置調整処理(図58参照)によって、冊子10の左右方向中心とカッタ間中心位置Zとを一致させることができる。
(5) Modification regarding Cutting Mechanism 500 In the cutting mechanism 500, the alignment plate 528 facing the right end surface of the booklet 10 may be a counter plate, and the alignment plate 518 facing the left end surface of the booklet 10 may be a reference plate. The cutting reference position P1 may be a position different from the alignment execution position in the left-right direction. Also in these cases, the bookbinding apparatus 1 can match the center of the booklet 10 in the left-right direction and the center position Z between the cutters by the position adjustment process (see FIG. 58).
 整合実行位置と裁断基準位置P1とが一致する場合、ハンド部640によって搬送される冊子10の姿勢が変化しなければ、冊子10の左右方向の中心位置とカッタ間中心位置Zとが一致する。従って、裁断部材513,523は、位置調整処理が実行されなくても、冊子10を正確な位置で裁断できる。 When the alignment execution position matches the cutting reference position P1, the center position in the left-right direction of the booklet 10 and the center position Z between the cutters match if the orientation of the booklet 10 conveyed by the hand unit 640 does not change. Therefore, the cutting members 513 and 523 can cut the booklet 10 at an accurate position even if the position adjustment process is not executed.
 裁断機構500は、冊子10の後縁部を裁断しなくてもよい。この場合、冊子搬送機構600では以下のように冊子10が搬送されればよい。先述と同様に、束操作部230によって冊子10の後端部がクランプ部660Aに挿入された後、クランプ部660Aで冊子10の後端部が挟持される(図51参照)。次いで、ハンド部640が初期位置から後方向に移動される(図52参照)。このとき、ハンド部640は引出位置を通過して後方向に移動することで、冊子10を第一裁断位置まで搬送する。左裁断部510及び右裁断部520は、上記実施形態と同様に冊子10を裁断する。このように冊子10の左縁部及び右縁部のみを裁断する場合、冊子10をクランプ部660Aからクランプ部660Bに持ち替える必要がない。 The cutting mechanism 500 may not cut the trailing edge of the booklet 10. In this case, the booklet transport mechanism 600 may transport the booklet 10 as follows. In the same manner as described above, after the rear end portion of the booklet 10 is inserted into the clamp portion 660A by the bundle operation unit 230, the rear end portion of the booklet 10 is clamped by the clamp portion 660A (see FIG. 51). Next, the hand unit 640 is moved backward from the initial position (see FIG. 52). At this time, the hand unit 640 passes through the drawing position and moves backward to convey the booklet 10 to the first cutting position. The left cutting unit 510 and the right cutting unit 520 cut the booklet 10 as in the above embodiment. Thus, when only the left edge part and the right edge part of the booklet 10 are cut, it is not necessary to change the booklet 10 from the clamp part 660A to the clamp part 660B.
 裁断機構500は、冊子10の左右方向の両縁部を裁断した後に、冊子10の後縁部を裁断してもよい。裁断機構500は、冊子10の左縁部、右縁部、後縁部のうち、少なくとも一つを裁断してもよい。裁断機構500は、冊子10の左縁部及び右縁部を同時に裁断してもよいし、冊子10の左縁部及び右縁部の何れかを先に裁断してもよい。 The cutting mechanism 500 may cut the trailing edge of the booklet 10 after cutting both left and right edges of the booklet 10. The cutting mechanism 500 may cut at least one of the left edge, the right edge, and the rear edge of the booklet 10. The cutting mechanism 500 may cut the left edge and the right edge of the booklet 10 simultaneously, or may cut either the left edge or the right edge of the booklet 10 first.
<5.本開示の作用効果の例示>
 以下、本開示の作用効果を例示する。下記の構成に注記したカッコ書きは、上記実施形態において各構成に対応するものを例示する。
<5. Examples of effects of the present disclosure>
Hereinafter, the effects of the present disclosure will be exemplified. The parentheses noted in the following configuration exemplify what corresponds to each configuration in the above embodiment.
(1)第一の開示の作用効果
 従来、特開2003-25755号公報及び特開2003-72258号公報に例示するように、製本装置が知られている。従来の製本装置は、装置構造が複雑且つ大型であるため、設置スペース及び製造コストが大きくなる可能性があった。このような課題を鑑みて、第一の開示は以下の構成を有する。
(1) Effects of First Disclosure Conventionally, a bookbinding apparatus is known as exemplified in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 2003-25755 and 2003-72258. Since the conventional bookbinding apparatus has a complicated and large apparatus structure, the installation space and the manufacturing cost may increase. In view of such a problem, the first disclosure has the following configuration.
(1-1)第一方向(前方向)及び第二方向(後方向)に移動可能であり、且つ、所定位置(第一搬送位置)にある状態で複数の用紙を第三方向(上方向)と略平行に集積可能であり、前記第一方向及び前記第二方向は互いに反対方向であり、前記第三方向は前記第一方向及び前記第二方向と直交する方向である集積手段(テーブル110)と、
 前記集積手段が前記所定位置にある状態で、用紙束(用紙束8)の特定端面(前端面)に接着部を形成可能であり、前記用紙束は前記集積手段によって集積された前記複数の用紙であり、前記特定端面は前記用紙束の前記第一方向側の端面である接着部形成手段(糊塗布機構300)と、
 表紙(表紙9)を保持可能であり、且つ、前記集積手段が前記所定位置よりも前記第一方向に移動した場合に、前記特定端面に形成された前記接着部を介して、前記表紙を前記用紙束に取付け可能である表紙取付手段(表紙保持機構400)と、
 前記集積手段が前記所定位置よりも前記第二方向に移動した場合に、前記表紙が取付けられた前記用紙束である冊子のうち、前記第二方向側の端縁、第四方向側(左側)の端縁、及び第五方向側(右側)の端縁の少なくとも一つを裁断可能であり、前記第四方向は前記第一方向、前記第二方向、及び前記第三方向と直交する方向であり、前記第五方向は前記第四方向の反対方向である裁断手段(裁断機構500)と
 を備えた製本装置(製本装置1)。
(1-1) A plurality of sheets can be moved in the third direction (upward) while being movable in the first direction (forward direction) and the second direction (rearward direction) and at a predetermined position (first transport position). , The first direction and the second direction are opposite to each other, and the third direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. 110)
An adhesive part can be formed on a specific end surface (front end surface) of a sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) in a state where the stacking unit is at the predetermined position, and the sheet bundle is the plurality of sheets stacked by the stacking unit. The specific end face is an end face on the first direction side of the sheet bundle, and an adhesive portion forming means (glue application mechanism 300);
When the cover (cover 9) can be held and the stacking means moves in the first direction from the predetermined position, the cover is moved through the adhesive portion formed on the specific end surface. A cover attachment means (cover holding mechanism 400) that can be attached to a sheet bundle;
When the stacking unit moves in the second direction from the predetermined position, the second direction side edge, the fourth direction side (left side) of the booklet that is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached And the fourth direction is a direction perpendicular to the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction. A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a cutting means (cutting mechanism 500) in which the fifth direction is opposite to the fourth direction.
 本開示によれば、集積手段は所定位置にある状態で、複数の用紙を集積して用紙束を形成可能である。接着部形成手段は、集積手段は所定位置にある状態で、用紙束の特定端面に接着部を形成可能である。表紙取付手段は、集積手段が第一方向に移動した場合に、接着部を介して表紙を用紙束に取付けて、冊子を作成可能である。裁断手段は、集積手段が第二方向に移動した場合に、冊子のうちで特定端面とは異なる位置にある端縁の少なくとも一部を裁断可能である。 According to the present disclosure, it is possible to stack a plurality of sheets and form a bundle of sheets while the stacking unit is in a predetermined position. The adhesive portion forming means can form an adhesive portion on a specific end surface of the sheet bundle while the stacking means is in a predetermined position. The cover sheet attaching means can create a booklet by attaching the cover sheet to the sheet bundle via the adhesive portion when the stacking means moves in the first direction. The cutting means can cut at least a part of the edge at a position different from the specific end face in the booklet when the stacking means moves in the second direction.
 従って製本装置は、集積手段を所定位置から移動させることなく、複数の用紙の集積と接着部の形成とを実行できる。製本装置は、集積手段を所定位置から第一方向及び第二方向に移動させることで、冊子の作成及び裁断を実行できる。つまり製本装置は、集積手段を直線移動させるだけで、製本動作に必要な一連の工程を実行できる。製本装置は、製本動作時における集積手段の移動距離の長さを抑制できるため、装置構造の複雑化及び大型化の少なくとも一つを抑制できる。 Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can execute the stacking of a plurality of sheets and the formation of the adhesive portion without moving the stacking unit from the predetermined position. The bookbinding apparatus can create and cut a booklet by moving the stacking means from a predetermined position in the first direction and the second direction. That is, the bookbinding apparatus can execute a series of steps necessary for the bookbinding operation only by linearly moving the stacking means. Since the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the length of the movement distance of the stacking means during the bookbinding operation, it can suppress at least one of the complexity and size increase of the apparatus structure.
(1-2)前記製本装置は、前記集積手段、前記接着部形成手段、前記表紙取付手段、及び前記裁断手段が設けられた筐体(本体枠2)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、集積手段、接着部形成手段、表紙取付手段、及び裁断手段を筐体に保持することで、装置全体をコンパクトにできる。
(1-2) The bookbinding apparatus may include a housing (main body frame 2) provided with the stacking means, the adhesive portion forming means, the cover attaching means, and the cutting means.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can make the entire apparatus compact by holding the stacking means, the bonding portion forming means, the cover attachment means, and the cutting means in the casing.
(1-3)前記製本装置は、前記筐体よりも前記第四方向側にある前記複数の用紙を、前記筐体の内部に向けて前記第五方向側に供給可能な用紙供給手段(用紙供給部5)と、前記筐体よりも前記第三方向側にある前記表紙を、前記筐体の内部に向けて第六方向側(下側)に供給可能であり、前記第六方向は前記第三方向の反対方向である表紙供給手段(表紙保持機構400)とを備え、前記集積手段は、前記筐体の内部で移動可能であり、且つ前記用紙供給手段によって供給された前記複数の用紙を前記所定位置で集積し、前記表紙取付手段は、前記用紙供給手段によって供給された前記表紙を前記筐体の内部で保持してもよい。
 この場合、複数の用紙及び表紙は、それぞれ異なる方向から筐体の内部に供給される。複数の用紙及び表紙は、集積手段の移動方向とは異なる方向から筐体の内部に供給される。従って製本装置は、集積手段を中心として、接着部形成手段、表紙取付手段、裁断手段、用紙供給手段、及び表紙供給手段を各々異なる方向に配置できる。製本装置は、製本動作に必要な複数の構成要素を省スペースで配置できるため、装置構造の複雑化及び大型化の少なくとも一つを抑制できる。
(1-3) The bookbinding apparatus is configured to supply sheet supply means (sheets) that can supply the plurality of sheets located on the fourth direction side of the casing toward the inside of the casing in the fifth direction side. The supply unit 5) and the cover on the third direction side of the casing can be supplied to the sixth direction side (lower side) toward the inside of the casing, and the sixth direction is A cover sheet supply unit (cover sheet holding mechanism 400) that is opposite to the third direction, wherein the stacking unit is movable within the housing and is supplied by the sheet supply unit. May be accumulated at the predetermined position, and the cover attachment means may hold the cover supplied by the paper supply means inside the housing.
In this case, the plurality of sheets and the cover are supplied into the housing from different directions. The plurality of sheets and the cover sheet are supplied into the housing from a direction different from the moving direction of the stacking unit. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can arrange the adhesive portion forming means, the cover attachment means, the cutting means, the paper supply means, and the cover supply means in different directions with the stacking means as the center. Since the bookbinding apparatus can arrange a plurality of components necessary for bookbinding operation in a space-saving manner, it can suppress at least one of complication and enlargement of the apparatus structure.
(1-4)前記表紙取付手段及び表紙供給手段は、受取位置と取付位置との間で移動可能な一つの可動機構(表紙保持機構400)であり、前記受取位置は、前記可動機構が前記筐体の外部において、前記筐体よりも前記第三方向側にある前記表紙を受取り可能な位置であり、前記取付位置は、前記可動機構が前記筐体の内部において、前記可動機構が前記受取位置で受取った前記表紙を、前記用紙束に取付け可能な位置でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は表紙取付手段及び表紙供給手段を一つの可動機構で実現できるため、装置構造の複雑化及び大型化の少なくとも一つを抑制できる。
(1-4) The cover attachment means and the cover supply means are one movable mechanism (cover cover holding mechanism 400) that can move between a reception position and an attachment position. Outside the housing, it is a position where the cover on the third direction side of the housing can be received, and the mounting position is the inside of the housing and the movable mechanism receiving the cover. The cover sheet received at the position may be a position where it can be attached to the sheet bundle.
In this case, since the bookbinding apparatus can realize the cover attachment means and the cover supply means with a single movable mechanism, it is possible to suppress at least one of complication and enlargement of the apparatus structure.
(2)第二の開示の作用効果
 従来、用紙を搬送する装置が知られている。例えば特開昭59-114248号公報に記載のシート整合装置では、用紙端部が規制台によって案内されることで、用紙が基準ラインの内側に集積される。集積された用紙はローラによって、用紙端部が基準ライン上に幅寄せされるように複写機本体に搬送される。
(2) Effects of Second Disclosure Conventionally, an apparatus for conveying paper is known. For example, in the sheet aligning apparatus described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 59-114248, the paper is accumulated inside the reference line by guiding the paper edge by the regulation table. The accumulated paper is conveyed by a roller to the copying machine main body so that the edge of the paper is aligned on the reference line.
 上記の従来技術では、規制台によって用紙端部が案内される位置にばらつきが生じやすく、集積された用紙端部の位置を一致させることが困難であった。ローラによって用紙端部を基準ライン上に幅寄せする場合、用紙の搬送経路が長くなり、装置が大型化する可能性があった。このような課題を鑑みて、第二の開示は以下の構成を有する。 In the above-described prior art, the position where the paper edge is guided by the regulation table is likely to vary, and it is difficult to match the positions of the accumulated paper edges. When the edge of the sheet is made closer to the reference line by the roller, there is a possibility that the sheet conveyance path becomes long and the apparatus becomes large. In view of such a problem, the second disclosure has the following configuration.
(2-1)供給された用紙(用紙8A)が積み重ねられる平面である載置面(載置面110A)を有する用紙集積部(テーブル110)と、
 前記用紙集積部に向けて前記用紙を略水平に搬送し、搬送した前記用紙を前記載置面の上方に排出することが可能な搬送手段(用紙供給部5)と、
 前記載置面よりも上方に設けられ、前記搬送手段によって排出され前記載置面に向けて落下する前記用紙の第一端部(後端部18)に下方から接触する部材であり、前記第一端部は前記用紙の搬送方向(右方向)と直交し且つ略水平な方向である第一方向(後方向)の端部である接触部材(接触部材106)と、
 第一規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延び、前記載置面に向けて落下する前記用紙の第二端部(前端部15)に接触して、前記用紙が前記第一規制位置よりも第二方向(前方向)に移動することを規制する部材であり、前記第二方向は前記第一方向とは反対方向であり、前記第二端部は前記第二方向の端部であり、前記第一規制位置は予め定められた前記第二端部の適正位置である第一規制部材(前揃え板150)と
 を備えた用紙搬送装置(用紙供給部5及び紙揃え機構100)。
(2-1) a paper stacking unit (table 110) having a mounting surface (mounting surface 110A) that is a plane on which the supplied paper (paper 8A) is stacked;
Transport means (paper supply section 5) capable of transporting the paper substantially horizontally toward the paper stacking section and discharging the transported paper above the placement surface;
A member that is provided above the placement surface and contacts a first end portion (rear end portion 18) of the paper that is discharged by the conveying means and falls toward the placement surface from below; One end portion is a contact member (contact member 106) that is an end portion in a first direction (rear direction) that is orthogonal to the sheet conveyance direction (right direction) and is substantially horizontal.
The sheet extends in a substantially vertical direction along the first restriction position and comes into contact with the second end portion (front end portion 15) of the sheet falling toward the placement surface, and the sheet is positioned at a position higher than the first restriction position. It is a member that restricts movement in two directions (forward direction), the second direction is a direction opposite to the first direction, the second end is an end in the second direction, A sheet conveying device (a sheet supply unit 5 and a sheet aligning mechanism 100) including a first restricting member (a front aligning plate 150) that is an appropriate position of the second end portion determined in advance.
 本開示によれば、搬送手段によって搬送される用紙は、第一端部が接触部材と接触するように排出され、載置面に向けて落下する。第一端部が接触部材から離隔するのに伴って、落下する用紙は第二方向に移動する。第一規制部材は、載置面に落下する用紙の第二端部に接触して、第二端部を第一規制位置に位置決めする。複数の用紙は、各々の第二端部の位置が一致するように、用紙集積部に集積される。従って用紙搬送装置は、従来技術のようにローラを備えなくても、集積される複数の用紙の位置を精度良く一致させることができる。用紙搬送装置は、用紙の搬送経路の長さを抑制できるため、装置構造の複雑化及び大型化の少なくとも一つを抑制できる。 According to the present disclosure, the sheet conveyed by the conveying unit is discharged so that the first end portion is in contact with the contact member, and falls toward the placement surface. As the first end portion moves away from the contact member, the falling paper moves in the second direction. The first restricting member contacts the second end of the sheet falling on the placement surface, and positions the second end at the first restricting position. The plurality of sheets are stacked on the sheet stacking unit so that the positions of the respective second end portions coincide with each other. Therefore, the sheet conveying apparatus can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked without including a roller as in the prior art. Since the paper transport device can suppress the length of the paper transport path, it can suppress at least one of complication and enlargement of the device structure.
(2-2)前記用紙搬送装置は、第二規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延び、前記載置面に向けて落下する前記用紙の前記搬送方向の下流側端部(右端部17)に接触して、前記用紙が前記第二規制位置よりも前記搬送方向の下流側に移動することを規制する部材であり、前記第二規制位置は予め定められた前記下流側端部の適正位置である第二規制部材(右揃え板140)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、搬送手段によって排出される用紙は、慣性によって搬送方向の下流側に移動する。第二規制部材は、載置面に落下する用紙の下流側端部に接触して、下流側端部を第二規制位置に位置決めする。複数の用紙は、各々の下流側端部の位置が一致するように、用紙集積部に集積される。従って用紙搬送装置は、集積される複数の用紙の位置を精度良く一致させることができる。
(2-2) The sheet conveying device extends in a substantially vertical direction along the second restriction position, and is disposed at a downstream end (right end 17) in the conveying direction of the sheet falling toward the placement surface. A member that contacts and restricts the sheet from moving to the downstream side in the transport direction from the second restriction position, and the second restriction position is an appropriate position at the predetermined downstream end. A certain 2nd regulation member (right alignment board 140) may be provided.
In this case, the sheet discharged by the transport unit moves to the downstream side in the transport direction due to inertia. The second restricting member contacts the downstream end of the sheet falling on the placement surface, and positions the downstream end at the second restricting position. The plurality of sheets are stacked on the sheet stacking unit so that the positions of the respective downstream end portions coincide with each other. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
(2-3)前記接触部材と前記第一規制部材との前記第一方向又は前記第二方向の距離は、前記載置面の前記第一方向又は前記第二方向の長さよりも短くてもよい。
 この場合、用紙集積部に向けて落下する用紙は、接触部材及び第一規制部材に接触し易い。従って用紙搬送装置は、集積される複数の用紙の位置を精度良く一致させることができる。
(2-3) The distance between the contact member and the first regulating member in the first direction or the second direction may be shorter than the length of the mounting surface in the first direction or the second direction. Good.
In this case, the paper falling toward the paper stacking unit is likely to contact the contact member and the first regulating member. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
(2-4)前記接触部材は、前記搬送方向と略平行に延び、且つ略鉛直方向に延びる板状であり、前記搬送手段によって排出される前記用紙の前記第一端部を案内する第一壁部(案内壁部106B)と、前記搬送方向と略平行に延び、且つ前記第一壁部から前記第二方向に延びる板状であり、前記第一壁部によって案内される前記用紙の前記第一端部に下方から接触する第二壁部(支持壁部106A)とを備えてもよい。
 この場合、第一壁部は搬送手段によって排出される用紙を案内し、第二壁部は第一壁部によって案内される用紙の第一端部に下方から接触する。載置面に向けて落下する用紙の第二端部は、第一規制部材と接触し易い。従って用紙搬送装置は、集積される複数の用紙の位置を精度良く一致させることができる。
(2-4) The contact member has a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the transport direction and extending substantially in the vertical direction, and guides the first end portion of the paper discharged by the transport means. A wall portion (guide wall portion 106B), a plate shape extending substantially parallel to the transport direction and extending from the first wall portion in the second direction, and the sheet of the paper guided by the first wall portion; You may provide the 2nd wall part (support wall part 106A) which contacts a 1st end part from the downward direction.
In this case, the first wall portion guides the paper discharged by the conveying means, and the second wall portion contacts the first end portion of the paper guided by the first wall portion from below. The second end of the sheet falling toward the placement surface is likely to come into contact with the first regulating member. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
(2-5)前記接触部材は、前記搬送方向と略平行に延び、前記接触部材の前記搬送方向の長さは、前記用紙の前記搬送方向の長さの半分以上でもよい。
 この場合、接触部材は、用紙の上流側端部が載置面の上方に排出されるまで、より確実に用紙を搬送方向に沿って案内できる。
(2-5) The contact member may extend substantially parallel to the transport direction, and a length of the contact member in the transport direction may be half or more of a length of the paper in the transport direction.
In this case, the contact member can more reliably guide the sheet along the transport direction until the upstream end of the sheet is discharged above the placement surface.
(2-6)前記用紙搬送装置と、前記載置面に積み重ねられた複数の前記用紙である用紙束(用紙束8)における前記第二端部側の端面を綴じることが可能な綴じ手段(糊塗布機構300及び表紙保持機構400)とを備えた製本装置(製本装置1)でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、綴じ手段によって綴じられる用紙束の端面を、略面一に揃えることができる。
(2-6) Binding means capable of binding the end face on the second end side of the sheet transport apparatus and the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) which is a plurality of sheets stacked on the mounting surface. A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) including the glue application mechanism 300 and the cover holding mechanism 400) may be used.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can align the end faces of the sheet bundle bound by the binding means substantially flush with each other.
(2-7)前記綴じ手段は、前記端面に接着剤(糊7)を塗布可能な塗布手段(糊塗布機構300)を含んでもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、塗布手段によって接着剤が塗布される用紙束の端面を、略面一に揃えることができる。
(2-7) The binding means may include application means (glue application mechanism 300) capable of applying an adhesive (glue 7) to the end face.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can align the end faces of the sheet bundle to which the adhesive is applied by the applying means.
(2-8)前記綴じ手段は、前記塗布手段によって前記接着剤が塗布された前記端面に、前記用紙束を包む表紙(表紙9)を貼付け可能な表紙貼付手段(表紙保持機構400)を含んでもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、用紙束の端面に表紙を貼付けて、冊子を作成できる。
(2-8) The binding means includes a cover attaching means (cover holding mechanism 400) capable of attaching a cover (cover cover 9) that wraps the bundle of sheets to the end face to which the adhesive is applied by the applying means. But you can.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can create a booklet by attaching a cover to the end face of the sheet bundle.
(3)第三の開示の作用効果
 第二の開示と同様の課題を鑑みて、第三の開示は以下の構成を有する。
(3) Effects of Third Disclosure In view of the same problems as those of the second disclosure, the third disclosure has the following configuration.
(3-1)用紙(用紙8A)の第一部分を載置可能な略水平面である第一面(第一載置面1111)を有する第一集積部材(第一テーブル1110)と、
 前記第一集積部材と並んで設けられ、前記用紙の第二部分を載置可能な平面である第二面(第二載置面1121)を有し、且つ離隔部(離隔部1123)が近接部(近接部1122)よりも上方にある部材であり、前記第二部分は前記用紙のうちで前記第一部分とは異なる部分であり、前記近接部は前記第二面における前記第一面側の端部であり、前記離隔部は前記第二面における前記第一面とは反対側の端部である第二集積部材(第二テーブル1120)と、
 前記用紙が前記第一面及び前記第二面の両方に載置されるように、前記用紙を供給可能な用紙供給手段(用紙供給部5)と、
 前記第一集積部材を挟んで前記第二集積部材とは反対側に設けられ、且つ第一規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延び、前記用紙供給手段に供給された前記用紙の第一端部(前端部15)に接触して、前記第一端部を前記第一規制位置に位置決めする部材であり、前記第一端部は前記第二面から前記第一面に向かう第一方向(前方向)の端部であり、前記第一規制位置は予め定められた前記第一端部の適正位置である第一位置決め部材(前揃え板150)と
 を備えた用紙搬送装置(用紙供給部5及び紙揃え機構100)。
(3-1) a first stacking member (first table 1110) having a first surface (first placement surface 1111) that is a substantially horizontal surface on which a first portion of the paper (paper 8A) can be placed;
A second surface (second mounting surface 1121) that is provided side by side with the first stacking member and on which the second portion of the paper can be mounted, and the separating portion (separating portion 1123) is in proximity. The second portion is a portion different from the first portion of the paper, and the proximity portion is located on the first surface side of the second surface. A second integrated member (second table 1120) that is an end portion, and the separation portion is an end portion of the second surface opposite to the first surface;
Paper supply means (paper supply unit 5) capable of supplying the paper so that the paper is placed on both the first surface and the second surface;
A first end portion of the paper that is provided on the opposite side of the second stacking member across the first stacking member and extends in a substantially vertical direction along the first restricting position and is supplied to the paper supply means The first end is a member that contacts the (front end 15) and positions the first end at the first restricting position, and the first end is a first direction from the second surface toward the first surface (front And a first positioning member (pre-alignment plate 150) that is an appropriate position of the predetermined first end, and a sheet conveying device (sheet supply unit 5). And the paper alignment mechanism 100).
 本開示によれば、用紙供給手段によって供給される用紙は、第一面及び第二面に載置される。離隔部が近接部よりも上方にあるため、第一面及び第二面に載置される用紙は第一方向へ移動する。第一位置決め部材は、第一方向へ移動する用紙の第一端部に接触して、第一端部を第一規制位置に位置決めする。複数の用紙は、各々の第一端部の位置が一致するように、第一集積部材及び第二集積部材に集積される。従って用紙搬送装置は、従来技術のようにローラを備えなくても、集積される複数の用紙の位置を精度良く一致させることができる。用紙搬送装置は、用紙の搬送経路の長さを抑制できるため、装置構造の複雑化及び大型化の少なくとも一つを抑制できる。 According to the present disclosure, the paper supplied by the paper supply means is placed on the first surface and the second surface. Since the separation portion is above the proximity portion, the paper placed on the first surface and the second surface moves in the first direction. The first positioning member contacts the first end of the sheet moving in the first direction, and positions the first end at the first restriction position. The plurality of sheets are stacked on the first stacking member and the second stacking member so that the positions of the respective first end portions coincide with each other. Therefore, the sheet conveying apparatus can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked without including a roller as in the prior art. Since the paper transport device can suppress the length of the paper transport path, it can suppress at least one of complication and enlargement of the device structure.
(3-2)前記用紙搬送装置は、前記第一集積部材及び前記第二集積部材の少なくとも一つを振動可能な振動手段(叩きモータ170、振動モータ180)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、第一面及び第二面に載置される用紙は、第一集積部材及び第二集積部材の少なくとも一つの振動によって、第一方向に移動し易い。用紙の第一端部は、第一位置決め部材に接触し易い。従って用紙搬送装置は、集積される複数の用紙の位置を精度良く一致させることができる。
(3-2) The sheet conveying device may include a vibration unit (a tapping motor 170, a vibration motor 180) capable of vibrating at least one of the first stacking member and the second stacking member.
In this case, the sheets placed on the first surface and the second surface are easily moved in the first direction by vibration of at least one of the first stacking member and the second stacking member. The first end of the paper is easy to contact the first positioning member. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
(3-3)前記用紙搬送装置は、前記第一集積部材及び前記第二集積部材の少なくとも一つに対して、前記第一方向と直交し且つ略水平な方向である第二方向側(右側)に設けられ、且つ第二規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延び、前記用紙供給手段に供給された前記用紙の第二端部(右端部17)に接触して、前記第二端部を前記第二規制位置に位置決めする部材であり、前記第二端部は前記第二方向の端部であり、前記第二規制位置は予め定められた前記第二端部の適正位置である第二位置決め部材(右揃え板140)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、用紙供給手段によって供給される用紙の第二端部は、第二位置決め部材によって第二規制位置に位置決めされる。複数の用紙は、各々の第二端部の位置が一致するように、第一集積部材及び第二集積部材に集積される。従って用紙搬送装置は、集積される複数の用紙の位置を精度良く一致させることができる。
(3-3) The sheet conveying device is configured to be in a second direction side (right side) that is substantially horizontal with respect to at least one of the first stacking member and the second stacking member. ) And extends in a substantially vertical direction along the second restricting position, contacts the second end (right end 17) of the paper supplied to the paper supply means, and the second end is The second positioning portion is a member positioned at the second restriction position, the second end portion is an end portion in the second direction, and the second restriction position is a second appropriate position of the second end portion. A positioning member (right alignment plate 140) may be provided.
In this case, the second end portion of the paper supplied by the paper supply means is positioned at the second restriction position by the second positioning member. The plurality of sheets are stacked on the first stacking member and the second stacking member so that the positions of the respective second end portions coincide with each other. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
(3-4)前記用紙搬送装置は、前記第一集積部材及び前記第二集積部材の少なくとも一つに対して、前記第二方向とは反対方向である第三方向側(左側)に設けられ、且つ第三規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延び、前記用紙供給手段に供給された前記用紙の第三端部(左端部16)に接触して、前記第三端部を前記第三規制位置に位置決めする部材であり、前記第三端部は前記第三方向の端部であり、前記第三規制位置は予め定められた前記第三端部の適正位置である第三位置決め部材(左揃え板130)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、用紙供給手段によって供給される用紙の第三端部は、第三位置決め部材によって第三規制位置に位置決めされる。複数の用紙は、各々の第三端部の位置が一致するように、第一集積部材及び第二集積部材に集積される。従って用紙搬送装置は、集積される複数の用紙の位置を精度良く一致させることができる。
(3-4) The sheet conveying device is provided on the third direction side (left side) opposite to the second direction with respect to at least one of the first stacking member and the second stacking member. And extending in a substantially vertical direction along the third restriction position, contacting the third end portion (left end portion 16) of the paper supplied to the paper supply means, and making the third end portion the third restriction portion. A third positioning member (left), wherein the third end is an end in the third direction, and the third restricting position is a predetermined appropriate position of the third end. An alignment plate 130) may be provided.
In this case, the third end portion of the paper supplied by the paper supply means is positioned at the third restriction position by the third positioning member. The plurality of sheets are stacked on the first stacking member and the second stacking member so that the positions of the third end portions thereof coincide with each other. Accordingly, the sheet transport device can accurately match the positions of the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
(3-5)前記第二集積部材は、前記第一方向と直交し且つ略水平な軸(固定軸160)を中心に、前記離隔部が前記近接部よりも上方にある第一回転位置と、前記離隔部と前記近接部とが略等しい鉛直方向の位置にある第二回転位置との間で回転可能な可動体であり、前記第二面は、前記可動体が前記第二回転位置にある場合、前記第一面と略等しい鉛直方向の位置にある略水平面でもよい。
 この場合、集積された複数の用紙は、第二集積部材が第一回転位置から第二回転位置まで移動するのに伴って、それぞれ屈曲する姿勢から略水平方向に延びる姿勢に変化する。従って用紙搬送装置は、集積される複数の用紙に折り目及び皺が生じることを抑制できる。
(3-5) The second stacking member has a first rotational position in which the separation portion is located above the proximity portion about a substantially horizontal axis (fixed shaft 160) orthogonal to the first direction. The movable portion is rotatable between a second rotation position where the separation portion and the proximity portion are substantially equal to each other in a vertical direction, and the second surface has the movable body at the second rotation position. In some cases, it may be a substantially horizontal plane at a position in the vertical direction substantially equal to the first surface.
In this case, as the second stacking member moves from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, the plurality of stacked sheets change from a bending position to a position extending in a substantially horizontal direction. Therefore, the sheet conveying device can suppress the generation of folds and wrinkles on the plurality of sheets to be stacked.
(3-6)前記用紙搬送装置と、前記第一面及び前記第二面に載置された複数の前記用紙である用紙束(用紙束8)における前記第一端部側の端面を綴じることが可能な綴じ手段(糊塗布機構300及び表紙保持機構400)とを備えた製本装置(製本装置1)でもよい。
 この場合、(2-6)と同様の作用効果を奏する。
(3-6) Binding the end surface on the first end portion side of the sheet transport device and a sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) which is a plurality of sheets placed on the first surface and the second surface. Bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) provided with binding means (glue application mechanism 300 and cover sheet holding mechanism 400) capable of printing.
In this case, the same effect as (2-6) is obtained.
(3-7)前記綴じ手段は、前記端面に接着剤(糊7)を塗布可能な塗布手段(糊塗布機構300)を含んでもよい。
 この場合、(2-7)と同様の作用効果を奏する。
(3-7) The binding means may include application means (glue application mechanism 300) capable of applying an adhesive (glue 7) to the end face.
In this case, the same effect as (2-7) is obtained.
(3-8)前記綴じ手段は、前記塗布手段によって前記接着剤が塗布された前記端面に、前記用紙束を包む表紙(表紙9)を貼付け可能な表紙貼付手段(表紙保持機構400)を含んでもよい。
 この場合、(2-8)と同様の作用効果を奏する。
(3-8) The binding means includes a cover sticking means (cover holding mechanism 400) capable of sticking a cover (cover cover 9) that wraps the bundle of sheets to the end surface to which the adhesive is applied by the applying means. But you can.
In this case, the same effect as (2-8) is obtained.
(4)第四の開示の作用効果
 従来、用紙を搬送する機構を備えた製本装置が知られている。例えば特開平8-85276号公報に記載のオンライン装置は、読取給紙装置、画像形成装置、及び製本装置を一体に備える。読取給紙装置では、給紙デッキに積載されたシートが、第一の搬送経路に沿って画像形成装置に搬送される。画像形成装置では、シートにトナー像が画像形成された後、シートが第二の搬送経路に沿って製本装置に供給される。製本装置では、シートが整合された後、シート束にバインドテープが接着される。
(4) Effects of Fourth Disclosure Conventionally, a bookbinding apparatus having a mechanism for conveying paper is known. For example, an on-line apparatus described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 8-85276 is integrally provided with a reading paper feeding apparatus, an image forming apparatus, and a bookbinding apparatus. In the reading paper feeding apparatus, the sheets stacked on the paper feeding deck are conveyed to the image forming apparatus along the first conveyance path. In the image forming apparatus, after the toner image is formed on the sheet, the sheet is supplied to the bookbinding apparatus along the second conveyance path. In the bookbinding apparatus, after the sheets are aligned, the bind tape is bonded to the sheet bundle.
 上記のオンライン装置において、例えば画像形成装置の故障又は設計変更が発生した場合、予め一体に備えられた画像形成装置に代えて、他の画像形成装置を使用することが想定される。他の画像形成装置を使用する場合、オンライン装置に設けられたシートの搬送経路を、その画像形成装置の構造に応じて変更する必要があった。このような課題を鑑みて、第四の開示は以下の構成を有する。 In the above-described online device, for example, when a failure or a design change of the image forming apparatus occurs, it is assumed that another image forming apparatus is used instead of the image forming apparatus provided in advance. When using another image forming apparatus, it is necessary to change the sheet conveyance path provided in the online apparatus according to the structure of the image forming apparatus. In view of such a problem, the fourth disclosure has the following configuration.
(4-1)用紙(用紙8A)の第一面に画像を形成した後、前記用紙を第一搬送量で搬送して排出口(用紙排出口3A)から排出し、更に排出した前記用紙を前記排出口から取り込んで、前記用紙における前記第一面の反対面である第二面に画像を形成した後、前記用紙を第二搬送量で搬送して前記排出口から排出する機構(給紙ローラ32、プロセス部35、排紙ローラ37)を備えた画像形成装置(第一プリンタ3)であり、前記第一搬送量は前記用紙の一部のみを前記排出口から排出する前記用紙の搬送量であり、前記第二搬送量は前記用紙の全体を前記排出口から排出する前記用紙の搬送量であり、前記画像形成装置の前記排出口から排出された前記用紙を搬送するための用紙搬送装置(用紙供給部5)であり、
 前記排出口の近傍に配置可能な板状部材であり、前記排出口から排出された前記用紙を載置可能な面、且つ前記排出口から離れる方向である案内方向に延びる面である案内面を有する搬送板(経路板51)と、
 第一位置よりも前記案内方向の下流側、且つ第二位置よりも前記案内方向の上流側において、前記案内面に沿って設けられた、前記用紙を前記案内方向の下流側に搬送する方向に回転可能な回転体であり、前記第一位置は前記第一搬送量で搬送された前記用紙の前記案内方向の下流側端部が載置される前記案内面上の位置であり、前記第二位置は前記第二搬送量で搬送された前記用紙の前記案内方向の下流側端部が載置される前記案内面上の位置である第一搬送ローラ(複数の搬送ローラ56A)と
 を備えた用紙搬送装置。
(4-1) After an image is formed on the first side of the sheet (sheet 8A), the sheet is conveyed by the first conveyance amount and discharged from the discharge port (sheet discharge port 3A). A mechanism (paper feeding) that takes in from the discharge port and forms an image on a second surface of the sheet opposite to the first surface, and then conveys the sheet by a second conveyance amount and discharges the sheet from the discharge port. An image forming apparatus (first printer 3) including a roller 32, a process unit 35, and a paper discharge roller 37), wherein the first transport amount is a transport of the paper for discharging only a part of the paper from the discharge port. And the second transport amount is a transport amount of the sheet that discharges the entire sheet from the discharge port, and a sheet transport for transporting the sheet discharged from the discharge port of the image forming apparatus Device (paper supply unit 5),
A plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of the discharge port, and a guide surface that is a surface on which the paper discharged from the discharge port can be placed and a surface that extends in a guide direction that is a direction away from the discharge port. A transport plate (route plate 51) having,
The paper is provided along the guide surface downstream of the first position in the guiding direction and upstream of the second position in the guiding direction. A rotating body that is rotatable, and the first position is a position on the guide surface on which a downstream end portion of the paper transported by the first transport amount in the guide direction is placed; The position includes a first transport roller (a plurality of transport rollers 56A) that is a position on the guide surface on which a downstream end portion in the guide direction of the sheet transported by the second transport amount is placed. Paper transport device.
 本開示によれば、画像形成装置で用紙の第一面に画像が形成された場合、排出口から用紙の一部が排出される。この排出された用紙は第一搬送ローラによって搬送されることなく、排出口から取り込まれて第二面に画像が形成される。画像形成装置で用紙の第二面に画像が形成された場合、排出口から用紙の全部が排出される。この排出された用紙は、第一搬送ローラによって案内方向の下流側に搬送される。 According to the present disclosure, when an image is formed on the first surface of the sheet by the image forming apparatus, a part of the sheet is discharged from the discharge port. The discharged paper is not conveyed by the first conveying roller, but is taken from the discharge port and an image is formed on the second surface. When an image is formed on the second surface of the sheet by the image forming apparatus, the entire sheet is discharged from the discharge port. The discharged paper is transported downstream in the guide direction by the first transport roller.
 従って用紙搬送装置は、公知の両面印刷が可能な画像形成装置から排出された用紙を適切に搬送できる。例えばユーザは画像形成装置を交換する場合、交換後の画像形成装置の第一搬送量及び第二搬送量に応じて、交換後の画像形成装置の排出口から第一搬送ローラまでの距離を調整する。これにより、用紙搬送装置は、用紙搬送装置の構造を大幅に変更する必要なく、画像が形成された用紙を適切に搬送できる。 Therefore, the paper transport device can appropriately transport the paper discharged from a known image forming apparatus capable of duplex printing. For example, when the user replaces the image forming apparatus, the distance from the discharge port of the replaced image forming apparatus to the first transport roller is adjusted according to the first transport amount and the second transport amount of the image forming apparatus after replacement. To do. As a result, the paper transport device can appropriately transport the paper on which the image is formed without having to significantly change the structure of the paper transport device.
(4-2)前記用紙搬送装置は、前記第一搬送ローラを回転自在に支持し、且つ、前記案内面に沿って前記案内方向の上流側及び下流側の少なくとも一つに、前記第一搬送ローラの位置を変更可能な部材である支持部材(支持部82)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、ユーザは支持部材によって第一搬送ローラの位置を変更することで、排出口から第一搬送ローラまでの距離を自由且つ容易に調整できる。
(4-2) The paper transport device rotatably supports the first transport roller, and the first transport roller is disposed along at least one of the upstream side and the downstream side in the guide direction along the guide surface. You may provide the supporting member (support part 82) which is a member which can change the position of a roller.
In this case, the user can freely and easily adjust the distance from the discharge port to the first transport roller by changing the position of the first transport roller with the support member.
(4-3)用紙(用紙8A)に画像を印刷可能な画像形成装置(第一プリンタ3)の排出口(用紙排出口3A)の近傍に配置可能な板状部材であり、前記排出口から排出された前記用紙を載置可能な面、且つ前記排出口から離れる方向である案内方向に延びる面である案内面を有する搬送板(経路板51)と、
 前記案内面に沿って設けられた、前記用紙を前記案内方向の下流側に搬送する方向に回転可能な回転体である第一搬送ローラ(複数の搬送ローラ56A)と、
 前記第一搬送ローラを回転自在に支持し、且つ、前記案内面に沿って前記案内方向の上流側及び下流側の少なくとも一つに、前記第一搬送ローラの位置を変更可能な部材である支持部材(支持部82)と
 を備えた用紙搬送装置(用紙供給部5)。
(4-3) A plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of the discharge port (paper discharge port 3A) of the image forming apparatus (first printer 3) capable of printing an image on paper (paper 8A). A transport plate (path plate 51) having a guide surface which is a surface on which the discharged paper can be placed and extends in a guide direction which is a direction away from the discharge port;
A first transport roller (a plurality of transport rollers 56A) which is a rotating body provided along the guide surface and which is rotatable in a direction of transporting the paper downstream in the guide direction;
A support that is a member that can rotatably support the first transport roller and that can change the position of the first transport roller along at least one of the upstream side and the downstream side in the guide direction along the guide surface. A sheet conveying apparatus (sheet supply section 5) comprising a member (support section 82).
 本開示によれば、画像形成装置の排出口から排出された用紙を搬送板の案内面に載置可能であり、且つ案内面に載置された用紙を第一搬送ローラによって案内方向の下流側に搬送可能である。例えばユーザは画像形成装置を交換する場合、支持部材によって第一搬送ローラの位置を変更することで、交換後の画像形成装置の排出口から第一搬送ローラまでの距離を自由且つ容易に調整できる。用紙搬送装置は、用紙搬送装置の構造を大幅に変更する必要なく、画像が形成された用紙を適切に搬送できる。 According to the present disclosure, the paper discharged from the discharge port of the image forming apparatus can be placed on the guide surface of the transport plate, and the paper placed on the guide surface is downstream in the guide direction by the first transport roller. Can be conveyed. For example, when exchanging the image forming apparatus, the user can freely and easily adjust the distance from the discharge port of the image forming apparatus after replacement to the first conveying roller by changing the position of the first conveying roller by the support member. . The paper transport device can appropriately transport the paper on which the image is formed without having to significantly change the structure of the paper transport device.
(4-4)前記支持部材は、予め定められた複数の基準位置の何れかに、前記第一搬送ローラの位置を変更可能であり、前記複数の基準位置は、それぞれ異なる前記用紙のサイズに対応してもよい。
 この場合、ユーザが用紙のサイズに応じて、第一搬送ローラの位置を容易且つ正確に変更できる。
(4-4) The support member can change the position of the first transport roller to any one of a plurality of predetermined reference positions, and the plurality of reference positions have different sizes of the paper. May correspond.
In this case, the user can easily and accurately change the position of the first transport roller according to the size of the paper.
(4-5)前記搬送板は、前記案内方向に並んで設けられた板状の第一板部(経路板51A)及び第二板部(経路板51B)を含み、前記第一板部は、前記搬送板において前記案内方向の上流側端部に設けられ、且つ前記案内方向と直交する略水平な軸を中心に回転自在な部材であり、前記第二板部は、前記第一板部の前記案内方向の下流側に設けられ、且つ前記第一板部を回転自在に支持する部材でもよい。
 この場合、ユーザは第二板部に対する第一板部の回転位置を変更することで、搬送板の案内方向の上流側部分の位置及び形状を、例えば排出口の位置及び形状に応じて自由に変更できる。
(4-5) The transport plate includes a plate-shaped first plate portion (path plate 51A) and a second plate portion (path plate 51B) provided side by side in the guide direction, and the first plate portion is The transport plate is a member provided at an upstream end in the guide direction and rotatable about a substantially horizontal axis perpendicular to the guide direction, and the second plate portion is the first plate portion. A member that is provided on the downstream side in the guiding direction and that rotatably supports the first plate portion.
In this case, the user can freely change the position and shape of the upstream portion in the guide direction of the transport plate according to, for example, the position and shape of the discharge port by changing the rotation position of the first plate portion with respect to the second plate portion. Can change.
(4-6)前記用紙搬送装置は、前記第一搬送ローラよりも前記案内方向の下流側において、前記案内面に沿って設けられた、前記用紙を前記案内方向の下流側に搬送する方向に回転可能である回転体である第二搬送ローラ(複数の搬送ローラ56B)を備え、前記第一搬送ローラと前記第二搬送ローラとの前記案内方向の距離は、前記用紙の前記案内方向の長さよりも小さくてもよい。
 この場合、用紙搬送装置は、第一搬送ローラによって搬送された用紙を、第二搬送ローラによって更に案内方向の下流側に搬送できる。
(4-6) The paper transport device is provided along the guide surface downstream of the first transport roller in the guide direction, in a direction of transporting the paper downstream of the guide direction. A second transport roller (a plurality of transport rollers 56B) that is a rotatable rotating body is provided, and the distance in the guide direction between the first transport roller and the second transport roller is the length of the sheet in the guide direction. It may be smaller than this.
In this case, the sheet conveying apparatus can convey the sheet conveyed by the first conveying roller further downstream in the guiding direction by the second conveying roller.
(4-7)前記用紙搬送装置と、前記用紙搬送装置で搬送された複数の前記用紙を綴じることが可能な綴じ手段(糊塗布機構300及び表紙保持機構400)とを備えた製本装置(製本装置1)でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、用紙搬送装置によって搬送された複数の用紙を綴じることで、冊子を作成できる。例えばユーザは製本装置に用いられる画像形成装置を交換する場合、交換後の画像形成装置の排出口から第一搬送ローラまでの距離を調整する。これにより、製本装置は、製本装置の構造を大幅に変更する必要なく、画像が形成された用紙を適切に搬送できる。
(4-7) A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding) including the sheet transporting device and binding means (the glue application mechanism 300 and the cover holding mechanism 400) capable of binding the plurality of sheets transported by the paper transporting device. The device 1) may be used.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can create a booklet by binding a plurality of sheets conveyed by the sheet conveying apparatus. For example, when replacing the image forming apparatus used in the bookbinding apparatus, the user adjusts the distance from the discharge port of the image forming apparatus after replacement to the first transport roller. Thereby, the bookbinding apparatus can appropriately convey the paper on which the image is formed without having to significantly change the structure of the bookbinding apparatus.
(5)第五の開示の作用効果
 従来、用紙束の接着面に接着剤を塗布することで、表紙が付着可能な接着部を形成する塗布装置を備えた製本装置が知られている。例えば特許第4515116号公報に開示の塗布装置は、ドラム及びクランパを備える。ドラムは、接着剤である溶融糊に浸かった状態で、水平方向に延びる軸線を中心に回転する。クランパは、ドラムに対して接着面が上方から対向する状態で用紙束を保持し、且つドラムの軸線方向と直交する方向に沿って水平移動する。ドラムは、接着面に接着剤を塗布する。
(5) Effect of Fifth Disclosure Conventionally, a bookbinding apparatus is known that includes an application device that forms an adhesive portion to which a cover sheet can be attached by applying an adhesive to the adhesive surface of a sheet bundle. For example, a coating apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 4515116 includes a drum and a clamper. The drum rotates around an axis extending in the horizontal direction in a state where the drum is immersed in the molten glue as an adhesive. The clamper holds the sheet bundle with the adhesive surface facing the drum from above, and moves horizontally along a direction orthogonal to the axial direction of the drum. The drum applies an adhesive to the bonding surface.
 上記の従来技術では、用紙束のうちで接着面の角部に糊を付着させるために、上記ドラムとは異なる姿勢で配置されるドラムが必要である。従って製本装置の機構が複雑になる可能性があった。このような課題を鑑みて、第五の開示は以下の構成を有する。 In the above prior art, a drum arranged in a different posture from the above drum is required in order to attach glue to the corners of the adhesive surface of the sheet bundle. Therefore, the mechanism of the bookbinding apparatus may be complicated. In view of such a problem, the fifth disclosure has the following configuration.
(5-1)供給される複数の用紙(用紙8A)を第一方向(上下方向)に重ねた状態で保持可能な保持手段(紙揃え機構100)と、
 前記保持手段によって保持される前記複数の用紙である用紙束(用紙束8)のうちで、前記第一方向と直交する第二方向(前方向)の端面である用紙束端面(前端面8B)を、前記第一方向に沿って略面一に揃えることが可能な紙揃え手段(紙揃え機構100)と、
 前記第一方向及び第三方向(左右方向)に交差し且つ前記第二方向と直交する軸線を中心に回転可能であり、接着剤(糊7)が付着可能な周面(周面351A)を有し、前記第三方向は前記第一方向と前記第二方向とに直交する方向である塗布ローラ(糊塗布ローラ350)と、
 前記周面に前記接着剤を供給可能な供給手段(本体部349)と、
 前記紙揃え手段が前記用紙束端面を略面一に揃えた場合に、前記保持手段及び前記塗布ローラの少なくとも一つを前記第三方向に移動させることで、前記塗布ローラが前記用紙束端面に対して前記第二方向側から近接する位置に沿って、前記塗布ローラを前記用紙束端面に対して相対移動させる移動手段(搬送モータ321)と、
 前記移動手段が前記塗布ローラを相対移動させる場合に、前記塗布ローラを回転させる回転手段(駆動モータ319)と
 を備えた製本装置(製本装置1)。
(5-1) holding means (paper alignment mechanism 100) capable of holding a plurality of supplied sheets (sheet 8A) in a state of being stacked in a first direction (up and down direction);
Out of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) that is the plurality of sheets held by the holding means, the sheet bundle end face (front end face 8B) that is the end face in the second direction (front direction) orthogonal to the first direction. A paper aligning means (paper aligning mechanism 100) capable of aligning substantially the same along the first direction;
A peripheral surface (peripheral surface 351A) that can rotate around an axis that intersects the first direction and the third direction (left-right direction) and is orthogonal to the second direction, to which an adhesive (glue 7) can be attached. An application roller (glue application roller 350) in which the third direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction;
Supply means (main body 349) capable of supplying the adhesive to the peripheral surface;
When the paper aligning means aligns the end face of the sheet bundle substantially flush, the application roller moves to the end face of the sheet bundle by moving at least one of the holding means and the applying roller in the third direction. A moving means (conveyance motor 321) for moving the application roller relative to the end face of the sheet bundle along a position approaching from the second direction side,
A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a rotation means (drive motor 319) that rotates the application roller when the moving means relatively moves the application roller.
 本開示によれば、塗布ローラが用紙束端面に対して相対移動しながら回転することで、周面に付着した接着剤は遠心力によって用紙束端面に移動する。塗布ローラの軸線は、第一方向及び第三方向に交差し且つ第二方向と直交する。そのため回転する周面は、用紙束の角部に対して接着剤をこすりつけるように回転する。用紙束の角部は、用紙束端面と用紙束の第一方向端部とを接続する部分である。従って製本装置は、上記の塗布ローラを備えた簡易な機構で、用紙束の用紙束端面及び角部に接着剤を塗布できる。 According to the present disclosure, when the application roller rotates while moving relative to the end face of the sheet bundle, the adhesive adhering to the peripheral surface moves to the end face of the sheet bundle by centrifugal force. The axis of the application roller intersects the first direction and the third direction and is orthogonal to the second direction. Therefore, the rotating peripheral surface rotates so as to rub the adhesive against the corner of the sheet bundle. The corner of the sheet bundle is a portion that connects the end face of the sheet bundle and the first direction end of the sheet bundle. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply the adhesive to the sheet bundle end face and corners of the sheet bundle with a simple mechanism including the above-described application roller.
(5-2)前記回転手段は、前記周面のうち前記用紙束端面に最も近接する部分が、前記塗布ローラが相対移動する方向の上流側へ向かう回転方向に、前記塗布ローラを回転させてもよい。
 この場合、塗布ローラが用紙束端面に対して相対移動しながら回転する時に、用紙束端面は近接部に接触して撓む。近接部は、回転する周面のうち用紙束端面に最も近接する部分である。近接部は、塗布ローラが用紙束端面に対して相対移動する方向の上流側へ向けて回転移動する。近接部と用紙束端面との間に発生する摩擦抵抗は相対的に小さいため、用紙束端面は滑らかに撓み易い。従って製本装置は、用紙束を形成する複数の用紙の間に、接着剤をより確実に進入させることができる。
(5-2) The rotating means rotates the coating roller in a rotational direction in which the portion of the peripheral surface closest to the end face of the sheet bundle is directed upstream in the direction in which the coating roller relatively moves. Also good.
In this case, when the coating roller rotates while moving relative to the end face of the sheet bundle, the end face of the sheet bundle comes into contact with the proximity portion and bends. The proximity portion is a portion of the rotating peripheral surface that is closest to the sheet bundle end surface. The proximity portion rotates and moves toward the upstream side in the direction in which the application roller moves relative to the end face of the sheet bundle. Since the frictional resistance generated between the adjacent portion and the sheet bundle end face is relatively small, the sheet bundle end face is easily bent smoothly. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can more reliably allow the adhesive to enter between the plurality of sheets forming the sheet bundle.
(5-3)前記回転手段は、前記周面のうち前記用紙束端面に最も近接する部分が、前記塗布ローラが相対移動する方向の下流側へ向かう回転方向に、前記塗布ローラを回転させてもよい。
 この場合、塗布ローラが用紙束端面に対して相対移動しながら回転する時に、用紙束の角部は近接部に接触して撓む。近接部は、塗布ローラが用紙束端面に対して相対移動する方向の下流側へ向けて回転移動する。近接部と用紙束端面との間に発生する摩擦抵抗は相対的に大きいため、用紙束の角部はより確実に撓み易い。従って製本装置は、用紙束の角部に十分な接着剤を塗布できる。
(5-3) The rotating means rotates the application roller in a rotation direction in which the portion of the peripheral surface closest to the end face of the sheet bundle moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the application roller relatively moves. Also good.
In this case, when the application roller rotates while moving relative to the end face of the sheet bundle, the corner of the sheet bundle comes into contact with the proximity portion and bends. The proximity portion rotates and moves toward the downstream side in the direction in which the application roller moves relative to the end face of the sheet bundle. Since the frictional resistance generated between the adjacent portion and the end face of the sheet bundle is relatively large, the corner portion of the sheet bundle is more easily bent. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply a sufficient adhesive to the corners of the sheet bundle.
(5-4)前記第一方向は、上下方向であり、前記供給手段は、前記接着剤を内部に貯留可能な箱状であり、且つ前記内部にて前記塗布ローラを回転可能に保持する部材であり、前記周面の一部を前記第二方向とは反対方向(後方向)に露出させる開口部(ローラ設置部343)を有する貯留タンク(本体部349)を備え、前記移動手段は、前記貯留タンクを前記塗布ローラと共に相対移動させてもよい。
 この場合、移動手段が塗布ローラと共に貯留タンクを用紙束端面に対して相対移動させる場合に、回転手段は塗布ローラを回転させる。開口部から露出する周面の一部が、貯留タンクに貯留される接着剤を用紙束に塗布する。塗布ローラの軸線が水平方向と交差する方向に延びるため、貯留部に貯留される接着剤の量及び周面の直径に関わらず、塗布ローラは貯留部内の接着剤と接触し易い。従って製本装置は、塗布ローラの直径が小さくても、接着剤を適切に塗布できる。
(5-4) The first direction is a vertical direction, and the supply means is a box-like shape capable of storing the adhesive therein, and a member that rotatably holds the application roller in the inside And a storage tank (main body portion 349) having an opening (roller installation portion 343) that exposes a part of the peripheral surface in a direction opposite to the second direction (rearward direction), and the moving means includes: The storage tank may be relatively moved together with the application roller.
In this case, when the moving means moves the storage tank relative to the sheet bundle end surface together with the application roller, the rotation means rotates the application roller. Part of the peripheral surface exposed from the opening applies the adhesive stored in the storage tank to the sheet bundle. Since the axis of the application roller extends in a direction intersecting the horizontal direction, the application roller easily comes into contact with the adhesive in the storage portion regardless of the amount of adhesive stored in the storage portion and the diameter of the peripheral surface. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can appropriately apply the adhesive even if the diameter of the application roller is small.
(5-5)前記用紙束は、前記第一方向の両端面である第一端面(上端面8F)及び第二端面(下端面8G)と、前記用紙束端面と前記第一端面とを接続する部分である第一角部(第一角部8H)と、前記用紙束端面と前記第二端面とを接続する部分である第二角部(第二角部8I)とを含み、前記第三方向は、互いに反対方向である第四方向(左方向)及び第五方向(右方向)を含み、前記移動手段は、前記保持手段及び前記塗布ローラの少なくとも一つを往復移動させることで、前記塗布ローラを前記第四方向に相対移動させた後、前記塗布ローラを前記第五方向に相対移動させ、前記回転手段は、前記第四方向に相対移動する前記塗布ローラを、近接部が前記第五方向側へ向かう回転方向に回転させ、且つ、前記第五方向に相対移動する前記塗布ローラを、前記近接部が前記第四方向側へ向かう回転方向に回転させ、前記近接部は前記周面のうち前記用紙束端面に最も近接する部分であり、前記塗布ローラは、前記第四方向に相対移動しながら回転することで、前記用紙束端面及び前記第一角部に前記接着剤を塗布し、且つ前記第五方向に相対移動しながら回転することで、前記用紙束端面及び前記第二角部に前記接着剤を塗布してもよい。
 この場合、塗布ローラは第四方向に相対移動するときに、用紙束端面及び第一角部に接着剤を塗布する。塗布ローラは第五方向に相対移動するときに、用紙束端面及び第二角部に接着剤を塗布する。従って製本装置は、塗布ローラの往復移動によって、用紙束端面、第一角部及び第二角部に十分な接着剤を塗布できる。
(5-5) The sheet bundle connects the first end face (upper end face 8F) and the second end face (lower end face 8G), which are both end faces in the first direction, and the sheet bundle end face and the first end face. A first corner portion (first corner portion 8H) that is a portion to be connected, and a second corner portion (second corner portion 8I) that is a portion that connects the end face of the sheet bundle and the second end face. The three directions include a fourth direction (left direction) and a fifth direction (right direction) that are opposite directions, and the moving means reciprocally moves at least one of the holding means and the application roller, After the application roller is relatively moved in the fourth direction, the application roller is relatively moved in the fifth direction, the rotating means is configured to move the application roller relatively moved in the fourth direction, Rotate in the direction of rotation toward the fifth direction and move relative to the fifth direction The application roller is rotated in a rotation direction in which the proximity portion is directed toward the fourth direction side, the proximity portion is a portion of the peripheral surface that is closest to the end face of the sheet bundle, and the application roller is By rotating while relatively moving in four directions, the adhesive is applied to the sheet bundle end surface and the first corner, and by rotating while relatively moving in the fifth direction, the sheet bundle end surface and The adhesive may be applied to the second corner.
In this case, when the application roller relatively moves in the fourth direction, an adhesive is applied to the sheet bundle end face and the first corner. When the application roller relatively moves in the fifth direction, the application roller applies an adhesive to the end face and the second corner of the sheet bundle. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply sufficient adhesive to the sheet bundle end face, the first corner, and the second corner by the reciprocating movement of the application roller.
(5-6)前記第一端面は、前記用紙束の上端面であり、前記第二端面は、前記用紙束の下端面であり、前記塗布ローラは、前記軸線が上方向に向けて前記第五方向側に傾斜する姿勢で配置されてもよい。
 この場合、塗布ローラは第一角部に接着剤を塗布した後に、第一角部よりも下方にある第二角部に接着剤を塗布する。従って製本装置は、塗布した接着剤が用紙束から落下することを抑制できる。
(5-6) The first end surface is an upper end surface of the sheet bundle, the second end surface is a lower end surface of the sheet bundle, and the application roller has the axis line directed upward. You may arrange | position with the attitude | position which inclines to the five direction side.
In this case, the application roller applies the adhesive to the first corner, and then applies the adhesive to the second corner below the first corner. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the applied adhesive from dropping from the sheet bundle.
(5-7)前記塗布ローラは、前記周面の一部が前記軸線に向かって凹む複数の凹部(溝部351C)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、供給手段が周面に供給する接着剤は、複数の凹部に進入し易い。従って製本装置は、塗布ローラの周面により多くの接着剤を付着できる。
(5-7) The application roller may include a plurality of recesses (groove portions 351C) in which a part of the peripheral surface is recessed toward the axis.
In this case, the adhesive supplied to the peripheral surface by the supply means tends to enter the plurality of recesses. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can attach more adhesive to the peripheral surface of the application roller.
(5-8)前記移動手段は、前記保持手段及び前記塗布ローラのうち、前記塗布ローラを移動させてもよい。
 この場合、用紙束を保持する保持手段が静止した状態で、塗布ローラは第三方向に移動しながら接着剤を用紙束に塗布する。保持手段が第三方向に移動するためのスペースは必要ない。従って、製本装置は小型化できる。
(5-8) The moving means may move the application roller among the holding means and the application roller.
In this case, the application roller applies the adhesive to the sheet bundle while moving in the third direction while the holding means for holding the sheet bundle is stationary. No space is required for the holding means to move in the third direction. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can be reduced in size.
(5-9)前記供給手段は、発熱可能な発熱体(ヒータ347)を備え、前記発熱体が発熱することで溶解する熱可塑性の接着剤を前記周面に供給可能でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は用紙束に接着剤を塗布する場合、発熱体を発熱させることで接着剤を溶解し液状化させる。製本装置は用紙束に接着剤を塗布しない場合、発熱体を発熱させない。接着剤は、臭いを発生しにくい固化状態に変化にする。従って製本装置は、臭いを生じる接着剤を使用する場合でも、接着剤の臭いの拡散を抑制できる。
(5-9) The supply means may include a heat generating element (heater 347) capable of generating heat, and may supply a thermoplastic adhesive that dissolves when the heat generating element generates heat to the peripheral surface.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus melts and liquefies the adhesive by heating the heating element when applying the adhesive to the sheet bundle. The bookbinding apparatus does not cause the heating element to generate heat when no adhesive is applied to the sheet bundle. The adhesive is changed to a solidified state in which odor is hardly generated. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the spread of the odor of the adhesive even when the adhesive that generates the odor is used.
(6)第六の開示の作用効果
 従来、用紙束の接着面に接着剤を塗布することで、表紙が付着可能な接着部を形成する塗布装置を備えた製本装置が知られている。例えば特許第4515116号公報に開示の塗布装置は、メルトタンク及びドラムを備える。メルトタンクは、上側が開口する略箱状であり、且つ内部に接着剤である溶融糊を貯留可能である。ドラムは、溶融糊に浸かった状態で、水平方向に延びる軸線を中心に回転可能である。回転するドラムに対して上方から接着面が対向する状態で、用紙束が水平移動する。ドラムは、メルトタンクに貯留される溶融糊を接着面に塗布する。
(6) Advantageous Effects of Sixth Disclosure Conventionally, a bookbinding apparatus provided with an application device that forms an adhesive part to which a cover sheet can be attached by applying an adhesive to the adhesive surface of a sheet bundle is known. For example, a coating apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 4515116 includes a melt tank and a drum. The melt tank has a substantially box shape whose upper side is open, and can store molten glue as an adhesive inside. The drum is rotatable around an axis extending in the horizontal direction while being immersed in the molten paste. The sheet bundle moves horizontally with the adhesive surface facing the rotating drum from above. The drum applies the molten paste stored in the melt tank to the bonding surface.
 上記の従来技術では、溶融糊の液面が低下した場合でもドラムが溶融糊に浸かりやすくするために、直径の大きいドラムが必要である。このような課題に鑑みて、第六の開示は以下の構成を有する。 In the above prior art, a drum having a large diameter is necessary so that the drum can be easily immersed in the molten paste even when the liquid level of the molten paste is lowered. In view of such a problem, the sixth disclosure has the following configuration.
(6-1)供給される複数の用紙(用紙8A)を上下方向に重ねた状態で保持可能な保持手段(紙揃え機構100)と、
 前記保持手段によって保持される前記複数の用紙である用紙束(用紙束8)のうちで、前記上下方向と直交する第一方向(前方向)の端面である用紙束端面(前端面8B)を、前記上下方向に沿って略面一に揃えることが可能な紙揃え手段(紙揃え機構100)と、
 接着剤(糊7)を貯留可能な貯留部(糊貯留部342)と、前記貯留部に対して前記第一方向側とは反対側である第二方向側(後側)に設けられた、前記接着剤が前記貯留部から流出可能な開口部(ローラ設置部343)とを有する箱状の貯留タンク(本体部349)と、
 前記紙揃え手段が前記用紙束端面を略面一に揃えた場合に、前記貯留タンクが前記用紙束端面に対して前記第一方向側から近接する位置に沿って、前記貯留タンクを前記上下方向及び前記第一方向と直交する第三方向(左右方向)に移動させる移動手段(搬送モータ321)と、
 前記貯留タンクにおいて周面(周面351A)の一部が前記開口部から前記第二方向側へ露出する位置で保持され、且つ、前記第三方向に交差し且つ前記第一方向に直交する軸線を中心に回転可能な塗布ローラ(糊塗布ローラ350)と、
 前記周面において周方向に沿って複数設けられた溝部(溝部351C)であり、前記複数の溝部の各々は前記軸線に沿って延び且つ前記接着剤が進入可能な部位である、前記複数の溝部(溝部351C)と、
 前記移動手段が前記貯留部を移動させる場合に、前記塗布ローラを回転させる回転手段(駆動モータ319)と
 を備えた製本装置(製本装置1)。
(6-1) holding means (paper aligning mechanism 100) capable of holding a plurality of supplied sheets (sheet 8A) in a state where they are stacked in the vertical direction;
Of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) that is the plurality of sheets held by the holding means, a sheet bundle end face (front end face 8B) that is an end face in a first direction (front direction) orthogonal to the up-down direction. Paper aligning means (paper aligning mechanism 100) capable of aligning substantially flush along the vertical direction;
A storage part (glue storage part 342) capable of storing the adhesive (glue 7) and a second direction side (rear side) opposite to the first direction side with respect to the storage part; A box-shaped storage tank (main body part 349) having an opening (roller installation part 343) through which the adhesive can flow out of the storage part;
When the paper aligning means aligns the sheet bundle end surface substantially flush with the sheet bundle end surface, the storage tank is moved in the vertical direction along a position close to the sheet bundle end surface from the first direction side. And a moving means (conveyance motor 321) for moving in a third direction (left-right direction) orthogonal to the first direction;
In the storage tank, a part of the peripheral surface (circumferential surface 351A) is held at a position exposed to the second direction side from the opening, and intersects the third direction and is an axis orthogonal to the first direction. An applicator roller (glue applicator roller 350) that can rotate around
A plurality of groove portions (groove portions 351C) provided along the circumferential direction on the peripheral surface, and each of the plurality of groove portions extends along the axis and is a portion into which the adhesive can enter. (Groove 351C);
A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a rotation means (drive motor 319) that rotates the application roller when the moving means moves the storage section.
 本開示によれば、貯留タンクが第三方向に移動することで、開口部から露出する周面の一部は略面一に揃えられた用紙束端面に第一方向側から近接する。貯留部では、複数の溝部に接着剤が進入する。複数の溝部は、塗布ローラの回転によって開口部まで移動して、用紙束端面に接着剤を塗布する。塗布ローラの軸線が第三方向に交差し且つ第一方向に直交するため、貯留部に貯留される接着剤の量及び周面の直径に関わらず、塗布ローラは貯留部内の接着剤と接触し易い。従って製本装置は、塗布ローラの直径が小さくても、接着剤を適切に塗布できる。 According to the present disclosure, when the storage tank moves in the third direction, a part of the peripheral surface exposed from the opening portion approaches the sheet bundle end surface that is substantially flush with the first direction side. In the reservoir, the adhesive enters the plurality of grooves. The plurality of grooves move to the opening by the rotation of the application roller, and apply the adhesive to the end face of the sheet bundle. Since the axis of the application roller intersects the third direction and is orthogonal to the first direction, the application roller contacts the adhesive in the storage part regardless of the amount of adhesive stored in the storage part and the diameter of the peripheral surface. easy. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can appropriately apply the adhesive even if the diameter of the application roller is small.
(6-2)前記塗布ローラは、前記開口部を前記第三方向に略閉塞していてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、臭いを生じる接着剤を使用する場合でも、接着剤の臭いが開口部を介して貯留タンクの外部に漏れるのを抑制できる。
(6-2) The application roller may substantially close the opening in the third direction.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the odor of the adhesive from leaking to the outside of the storage tank through the opening even when the odor-causing adhesive is used.
(6-3)前記貯留タンクは、前記周面のうち、少なくとも前記周方向の半分を内側に収容していてもよい。
 この場合、開口部から露出する周面の面積は、周面の面積の半分未満になる。従って製本装置は、臭いを生じる接着剤を使用する場合でも、接着剤の臭いの拡散を抑制できる。
(6-3) The storage tank may accommodate at least half of the circumferential surface in the circumferential direction inside.
In this case, the area of the peripheral surface exposed from the opening is less than half of the area of the peripheral surface. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the spread of the odor of the adhesive even when the adhesive that generates the odor is used.
(6-4)前記貯留タンクは、前記接着剤を前記貯留部に供給可能な供給路(糊供給路341A)と、前記供給口を閉塞可能な閉塞手段(蓋部材348)とを備えてもよい。
 この場合、貯留部に接着剤が供給されない場合、閉塞手段は供給路を閉塞できる。従って製本装置は、臭いを生じる接着剤を使用する場合でも、接着剤の臭いが貯留タンクの外部に漏れるのを抑制できる。
(6-4) The storage tank also includes a supply path (glue supply path 341A) capable of supplying the adhesive to the storage section, and a closing means (lid member 348) capable of closing the supply port. Good.
In this case, when the adhesive is not supplied to the reservoir, the closing means can close the supply path. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress leakage of the odor of the adhesive to the outside of the storage tank even when using the odor-causing adhesive.
(6-5)前記製本装置は、前記貯留タンクに設けられ、前記貯留部を加熱可能な発熱体(ヒータ347)と、前記周面から落下した前記接着剤を前記塗布ローラの下方にて受ける第一受け部材(糊受け部材360)を設置可能な接着剤受部(糊受設置部313)と、前記貯留タンクに設けられ、前記接着剤受部を支持し且つ断熱性を有する支持部材(連結板361)とを備え、前記貯留部は、熱可塑性の接着剤を貯留可能でもよい。
 この場合、発熱体が加熱する貯留タンクの内部で溶解した接着剤を、塗布ローラは用紙束端面に塗布する。回転する塗布ローラから落下した接着剤は、第一受け部材に回収される。支持部材は断熱性を有するので、発熱体により発生した熱は第一受け部材に伝わりにくい。第一受け部材に回収された液状の接着剤は、臭いを発生しにくい固化状態に遷移し易い。従って製本装置は、臭いを生じる接着剤を使用する場合でも、接着剤の臭いの拡散を抑制できる。
(6-5) The bookbinding apparatus is provided in the storage tank and receives a heating element (heater 347) capable of heating the storage section and the adhesive dropped from the peripheral surface below the application roller. An adhesive receiving portion (glue receiving installation portion 313) on which a first receiving member (glue receiving member 360) can be installed, and a support member provided in the storage tank and supporting the adhesive receiving portion and having heat insulation ( Connecting plate 361), and the reservoir may be able to store a thermoplastic adhesive.
In this case, the application roller applies the adhesive dissolved in the storage tank heated by the heating element to the end face of the sheet bundle. The adhesive dropped from the rotating application roller is collected by the first receiving member. Since the support member has a heat insulating property, the heat generated by the heating element is not easily transmitted to the first receiving member. The liquid adhesive collected in the first receiving member is likely to transition to a solidified state where odor is hardly generated. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the spread of the odor of the adhesive even when the adhesive that generates the odor is used.
(6-6)前記製本装置は、前記貯留タンクに設けられ、前記周面から落下した前記接着剤を前記塗布ローラの下方にて受ける第二受け部材(糊受け部材1360)と、前記貯留タンクに設けられ、前記第二受け部材に落下する前記接着剤を回収し、前記貯留部に送出する送出手段(ポンプ駆動機構1380)とを備えてもよい。
 この場合、第二受け部材に落下した接着剤は、送出手段によって貯留部に送出され、再び貯留部に貯留される。接着剤は貯留タンクの外部に滞留しにくい。従って製本装置は、臭いを生じる接着剤を使用する場合でも、接着剤の臭いの拡散を抑制できる。
(6-6) The bookbinding apparatus is provided in the storage tank, receives a second dropping member (glue receiving member 1360) below the coating roller, and receives the adhesive dropped from the peripheral surface, and the storage tank. And a delivery means (pump drive mechanism 1380) that collects the adhesive falling on the second receiving member and delivers it to the storage section.
In this case, the adhesive dropped on the second receiving member is sent to the storage part by the sending means and stored again in the storage part. The adhesive is difficult to stay outside the storage tank. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the spread of the odor of the adhesive even when the adhesive that generates the odor is used.
(6-7)前記貯留タンクは、前記貯留部を前記第一方向側から囲み、且つ、前記塗布ローラに向けて下側に傾斜する壁部(前壁部349A)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、貯留部に貯留される接着剤が減少する場合でも、接着剤は壁部に沿って塗布ローラに向けて移動し易い。従って製本装置は、塗布ローラの直径が小さくても、接着剤を適切に塗布できる。
(6-7) The storage tank may include a wall portion (front wall portion 349A) that surrounds the storage portion from the first direction side and is inclined downward toward the application roller.
In this case, even when the adhesive stored in the storage part decreases, the adhesive easily moves toward the application roller along the wall part. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can appropriately apply the adhesive even if the diameter of the application roller is small.
(7)第七の開示の作用効果
 従来、塗布ローラで塗布対象物に接着剤を塗布する技術が知られている。例えば特開昭58-11061号公報に開示の装置では、塗布ローラが塗布対象物である骨組みの上面に上方から対向する状態で、左右方向に移動しながら回転する。このとき、塗布ローラの周面の周速は、塗布ローラの移動速さと略同じである。塗布ローラは、左右方向に沿って骨組みの上面に糊を塗布する。
(7) Effect of Seventh Disclosure Conventionally, a technique for applying an adhesive to an application target with an application roller is known. For example, in the apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 58-11061, the application roller rotates while moving in the left-right direction in a state where the application roller is opposed to the upper surface of the framework as the application object. At this time, the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface of the application roller is substantially the same as the moving speed of the application roller. The application roller applies glue to the upper surface of the framework along the left-right direction.
 上記の従来技術では、塗布ローラの回転速さが移動速さと略同じであるので、例えば塗布対象物の種類又は材質によっては、塗布対象物に適量の糊を塗布できない可能性がある。このような課題に鑑みて、第三の開示は以下の構成を有する。 In the above prior art, since the rotation speed of the application roller is substantially the same as the moving speed, there is a possibility that an appropriate amount of glue cannot be applied to the application object depending on, for example, the type or material of the application object. In view of such a problem, the third disclosure has the following configuration.
(7-1)供給される複数の用紙(8A)を第一方向(上下方向)に重ねた状態で保持可能な保持手段(紙揃え機構100)と、
 前記保持手段によって保持される前記複数の用紙である用紙束(用紙束8)のうちで、前記第一方向と直交する第二方向(前方向)の端面である用紙束端面(前端面8B)を、前記第一方向に沿って略面一に揃えることが可能な紙揃え手段(紙揃え機構100)と、
 前記第一方向と前記第二方向とに直交する第三方向(左右方向)に交差し、且つ前記第二方向と直交する軸線を中心に回転可能であり、前記軸線に沿って延びる複数の溝部(溝部351C)が周方向に沿って周面(周面351A)に設けられた塗布ローラ(糊塗布ローラ350)と、
 前記複数の溝部に接着剤を供給可能な供給手段(本体部349)と、
 前記紙揃え手段が前記用紙束端面を略面一に揃えた場合に、前記塗布ローラが前記用紙束端面に対して前記第二方向側から近接する位置に沿って、前記塗布ローラを前記第三方向に移動させる移動手段(搬送モータ321)と、
 前記移動手段による前記塗布ローラの移動とは独立して前記塗布ローラを回転させ、且つ前記塗布ローラの回転速さを可変可能な回転手段(駆動モータ319)と
 を備えた製本装置(製本装置1)。
(7-1) holding means (paper alignment mechanism 100) capable of holding a plurality of supplied sheets (8A) in a state of being stacked in the first direction (up and down direction);
Out of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) that is the plurality of sheets held by the holding means, the sheet bundle end face (front end face 8B) that is the end face in the second direction (front direction) orthogonal to the first direction. A paper aligning means (paper aligning mechanism 100) capable of aligning substantially the same along the first direction;
A plurality of grooves that intersect a third direction (left-right direction) orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction and that can rotate around an axis that is orthogonal to the second direction and extend along the axis. An application roller (glue application roller 350) in which (groove portion 351C) is provided on the peripheral surface (circumferential surface 351A) along the circumferential direction;
Supply means (main body 349) capable of supplying an adhesive to the plurality of grooves;
When the paper aligning means aligns the end face of the sheet bundle substantially flush with the end face of the sheet bundle, the application roller is moved along the position close to the end face of the sheet bundle from the second direction side. Moving means for moving in the direction (conveyance motor 321);
A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a rotating means (drive motor 319) capable of rotating the application roller independently of movement of the application roller by the moving means and changing a rotation speed of the application roller. ).
 本開示によれば、塗布ローラが第三方向に移動しながら回転することで、供給手段によって複数の溝部に供給された接着剤が、用紙束端面に塗布される。回転手段は、塗布ローラの移動とは独立して塗布ローラを回転させ、且つ塗布ローラの回転速さを可変可能である。従って製本装置は、例えば用紙束を形成する用紙の枚数及び種類等に応じた適切な回転速さで塗布ローラを回転させることで、適量の接着剤を用紙束端面に塗布できる。 According to the present disclosure, the application roller is rotated while moving in the third direction, whereby the adhesive supplied to the plurality of grooves by the supply unit is applied to the end face of the sheet bundle. The rotating means can rotate the application roller independently of the movement of the application roller, and can change the rotation speed of the application roller. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply an appropriate amount of adhesive to the end face of the sheet bundle by rotating the application roller at an appropriate rotation speed according to, for example, the number and type of sheets forming the sheet bundle.
(7-2)前記第一方向は、上下方向であり、前記供給手段は、前記接着剤を内部に貯留可能な箱状であり、前記内部にて前記塗布ローラを回転可能に保持し、且つ、前記周面の一部を前記内部から前記第二方向とは反対方向(後方向)に露出させる開口部(ローラ設置部343)を有する貯留タンク(本体部349)を備え、前記移動手段は、前記貯留タンクと共に前記塗布ローラを移動させてもよい。
 この場合、貯留タンクが第三方向に移動する場合、塗布ローラの回転によって開口部から露出する周面の一部が、貯留タンクに貯留される接着剤を用紙束端面に塗布する。塗布ローラの軸線が水平方向と交差する方向に延びるため、貯留タンクに貯留される接着剤の量及び周面の直径に関わらず、塗布ローラは貯留タンク内の接着剤と接触し易い。従って製本装置は、塗布ローラの直径が小さくても、接着剤を適切に塗布できる。
(7-2) The first direction is a vertical direction, and the supply means has a box shape in which the adhesive can be stored inside, holds the application roller rotatably inside the inside, and A storage tank (main body portion 349) having an opening (roller installation portion 343) that exposes a part of the peripheral surface from the inside in a direction opposite to the second direction (rearward direction). The application roller may be moved together with the storage tank.
In this case, when the storage tank moves in the third direction, a part of the peripheral surface exposed from the opening by the rotation of the application roller applies the adhesive stored in the storage tank to the sheet bundle end surface. Since the axis of the application roller extends in a direction intersecting the horizontal direction, the application roller easily comes into contact with the adhesive in the storage tank regardless of the amount of adhesive stored in the storage tank and the diameter of the peripheral surface. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can appropriately apply the adhesive even if the diameter of the application roller is small.
(7-3)前記第三方向は、互いに反対方向である第四方向及び第五方向を含み、前記移動手段は、前記塗布ローラを前記第四方向及び前記第五方向の両方に少なくとも一回移動させ、前記回転手段は、前記第四方向に移動する前記塗布ローラ及び前記第五方向に移動する前記塗布ローラの少なくとも一つを回転させてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、塗布ローラの移動方向に応じて塗布ローラの回転を調整することで、用紙束端面に塗布する接着剤の量を調整できる。
(7-3) The third direction includes a fourth direction and a fifth direction which are opposite directions, and the moving means moves the application roller at least once in both the fourth direction and the fifth direction. The rotating means may move and rotate at least one of the application roller moving in the fourth direction and the application roller moving in the fifth direction.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can adjust the amount of adhesive applied to the end face of the sheet bundle by adjusting the rotation of the application roller in accordance with the moving direction of the application roller.
(7-4)前記回転手段は、前記第四方向に移動する前記塗布ローラ及び前記第五方向に移動する前記塗布ローラをそれぞれ回転させ、前記移動手段は、前記塗布ローラの移動速さを可変可能であり、且つ、前記第四方向に移動する前記塗布ローラの移動速さと、前記第五方向に移動する前記塗布ローラの移動速さとを互いに異ならせてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、塗布ローラの移動方向に応じて塗布ローラの移動速さを調整することで、用紙束端面に塗布する接着剤の量を調整できる。
(7-4) The rotating means rotates the application roller moving in the fourth direction and the application roller moving in the fifth direction, respectively, and the moving means varies the moving speed of the application roller. The movement speed of the application roller that moves in the fourth direction may be different from the movement speed of the application roller that moves in the fifth direction.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can adjust the amount of the adhesive applied to the end face of the sheet bundle by adjusting the moving speed of the applying roller according to the moving direction of the applying roller.
(7-5)前記移動手段は、前記用紙束端面における前記第三方向の両端部である第一端部(右端部8C)及び第二端部(左端部8D)の間で前記塗布ローラを往復移動させ、前記回転手段は、前記塗布ローラが前記第一端部及び前記第二端部の間を第一回数(2回)移動する場合、前記塗布ローラの移動速さと略同じ周速で前記周面を回転させ、前記第一回数移動した前記塗布ローラが、前記一端部及び前記他端部の間を第二回数(2回)移動する場合、前記塗布ローラの移動速さよりも速い周速で前記周面を回転させてもよい。
 この場合、塗布ローラが第一回数移動する時、用紙束端面に塗布された直後の接着剤と、接着剤を塗布する周面との間で発生する摩擦抵抗は、相対的に小さい。接着剤は用紙束端面に付着し易いため、塗布ローラは接着剤を用紙束端面に均等に塗布できる。更に塗布ローラが第二回数移動する時、用紙束端面に塗布された直後の接着剤は、用紙束端面に向けて付勢される。用紙束端面に塗布された接着剤は、用紙束を形成する複数の用紙の間に進入し易い。従って製本装置は、用紙束端面に接着剤を塗布すると同時に、用紙束を形成する複数の用紙の間に接着剤を進入させることができる。
(7-5) The moving means moves the application roller between a first end (right end 8C) and a second end (left end 8D) that are both ends in the third direction on the end face of the sheet bundle. When the coating roller moves between the first end portion and the second end portion a first number of times (twice), the rotating means moves at a peripheral speed substantially the same as the moving speed of the coating roller. When the application roller that has rotated the peripheral surface and moved the first number of times moves a second number of times (two times) between the one end and the other end, the periphery is faster than the moving speed of the application roller. The peripheral surface may be rotated at a speed.
In this case, when the application roller moves the first time, the frictional resistance generated between the adhesive immediately after being applied to the end face of the sheet bundle and the peripheral surface to which the adhesive is applied is relatively small. Since the adhesive easily adheres to the end face of the sheet bundle, the application roller can apply the adhesive evenly to the end face of the sheet bundle. Further, when the application roller moves a second number of times, the adhesive immediately after being applied to the end face of the sheet bundle is urged toward the end face of the sheet bundle. The adhesive applied to the end face of the sheet bundle easily enters between a plurality of sheets forming the sheet bundle. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply the adhesive to the end face of the sheet bundle and simultaneously allow the adhesive to enter between a plurality of sheets forming the sheet bundle.
(7-6)前記回転手段は、前記第二回数移動した前記塗布ローラが、前記一端部及び前記他端部の間を第三回数(2回)移動する場合、前記塗布ローラの移動速さと略同じ周速で前記周面を回転させてもよい。
 この場合、塗布ローラが第三回数移動する場合、移動速さと周速とが略同じであるので、接着剤は用紙束端面に均等に塗布される。従って製本装置は、用紙束端面に接着剤を塗布すると同時に、用紙束を形成する複数の用紙の間に接着剤を進入させることができる。
(7-6) When the application roller that has moved the second number of times moves a third number of times (twice) between the one end portion and the other end portion, the rotation means determines the moving speed of the application roller. The peripheral surface may be rotated at substantially the same peripheral speed.
In this case, when the application roller moves a third number of times, the moving speed and the peripheral speed are substantially the same, so that the adhesive is evenly applied to the end face of the sheet bundle. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can apply the adhesive to the end face of the sheet bundle and simultaneously allow the adhesive to enter between a plurality of sheets forming the sheet bundle.
(7-7)前記回転手段は、前記塗布ローラが前記第四方向に移動する場合と、前記塗布ローラが前記第五方向に移動する場合とで、前記周面を互いに異なる周速で回転させてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、塗布ローラの移動方向に応じて周面の周速を調整することで、用紙束端面に塗布する接着剤の量を調整できる。
(7-7) The rotating means rotates the peripheral surface at different peripheral speeds when the application roller moves in the fourth direction and when the application roller moves in the fifth direction. May be.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can adjust the amount of adhesive applied to the end face of the sheet bundle by adjusting the peripheral speed of the peripheral surface according to the moving direction of the application roller.
(8)第八の開示の作用効果
 従来、包み製本を行う製本装置が知られている。例えば特開2003-25755号公報に記載の製本装置では、集積機構で集積された中紙が、縦搬送路に向けて水平方向に搬送される。二枚の表紙が、表紙供給機構から縦搬送路に供給される。供給された二枚の表紙の一端辺が、中紙の端辺に製本テープで貼付けられる。二枚の表紙を覆うカバーが、カバー供給機構から縦搬送路に供給される。二枚の表紙が貼りつけられた中紙は、供給されたカバーに向けて水平方向に搬送されることで、カバーで包まれる。
(8) Effect of Eighth Disclosure Conventionally, a bookbinding apparatus that performs packet binding is known. For example, in the bookbinding apparatus described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-25755, the intermediate sheets stacked by the stacking mechanism are transported in the horizontal direction toward the vertical transport path. Two covers are supplied from the cover supply mechanism to the vertical conveyance path. One end side of the supplied two cover sheets is attached to the end side of the middle paper with a binding tape. A cover that covers the two covers is supplied from the cover supply mechanism to the vertical conveyance path. The inner paper with the two cover sheets attached is wrapped in the cover by being conveyed in the horizontal direction toward the supplied cover.
 上記の従来技術では、表紙及びカバーが多数の固定式ローラで搬送されるため、何れかの固定式ローラで紙詰まりを生じる確率が高い。このような課題を鑑みて、第八の開示は以下の構成を有する。 In the above prior art, since the cover and the cover are conveyed by a large number of fixed rollers, there is a high probability that any of the fixed rollers will cause a paper jam. In view of such a problem, the eighth disclosure has the following configuration.
(8-1)第一方向(上下方向)に積み重ねられた複数の用紙(用紙8A)である用紙束(用紙束8)を保持可能であり、前記第一方向は互いに反対方向である第二方向(下方向)及び第三方向(上方向)を含む用紙保持手段(テーブル110)と、
 前記用紙保持手段よりも第四方向側(前側)に設けられ、所定位置(表紙供給口22)に供給された表紙(表紙9)の一部である第一部分を、前記第四方向及び第五方向(後方向)から第一保持力で挟持可能であり、前記第四方向は前記第一方向と直交する方向であり、前記第五方向は前記第四方向の反対方向であり、前記第一保持力は前記第一部分が前記第一方向に移動する運動を妨げる力である第一挟持手段(下クランプ440)と、
 前記第一挟持手段に対して前記第三方向に対向配置され、前記所定位置に供給された前記表紙の第二部分を、前記第四方向及び前記第五方向から第二保持力で挟持可能であり、前記第二部分は前記第一部分よりも前記第三方向側にある前記表紙の一部であり、前記第二保持力は前記第二部分が前記第一方向に移動する運動を妨げる力である第二挟持手段(上クランプ430)と、
 前記第一挟持手段を前記所定位置から目標位置まで前記第二方向と略平行に搬送可能であり、前記目標位置は前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段によって挟持された前記表紙が対象端面(用紙束8の前端面)に前記第四方向側から対向する位置であり、前記対象端面は前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記第四方向の端面である第一駆動手段(昇降モータ450)と、
 前記第一挟持手段に前記第一部分を第一値(第一付勢値)の前記第一保持力で挟持させ、且つ前記第二挟持手段に前記第二部分を第二値(実質的な0又は第二付勢値)の前記第二保持力で挟持させた状態で、前記第一駆動手段に前記第一挟持手段を第一搬送力で搬送させ、前記第一値の第一保持力は前記第二値の第二保持力よりも大きい力であり、前記第一搬送力は前記第二値の第二保持力よりも大きい力である第一制御手段(S13,S17~S25又はS51,S55~S65を実行する制御部900)と、
 前記第一挟持手段が前記目標位置にある状態で、前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記対象端面に、前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段によって挟持された前記表紙を取付け可能な表紙取付手段(紙揃え機構100及び糊塗布機構300)と
 を備えた製本装置(製本装置1)。
(8-1) A sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) which is a plurality of sheets (sheet 8A) stacked in a first direction (vertical direction) can be held, and the first direction is a direction opposite to each other. Paper holding means (table 110) including a direction (downward) and a third direction (upward);
A first portion which is provided on the fourth direction side (front side) with respect to the sheet holding means and which is a part of a cover (cover 9) supplied to a predetermined position (cover cover supply port 22) is formed in the fourth and fifth directions. The fourth direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction, the fifth direction is a direction opposite to the fourth direction, and the first direction is the first direction. Holding force is a first clamping means (lower clamp 440) that is a force that prevents the first portion from moving in the first direction;
The second portion of the cover that is disposed opposite to the first clamping means in the third direction and supplied to the predetermined position can be clamped from the fourth direction and the fifth direction with a second holding force. The second part is a part of the cover that is closer to the third direction than the first part, and the second holding force is a force that prevents the second part from moving in the first direction. Certain second clamping means (upper clamp 430);
The first clamping means can be transported from the predetermined position to a target position substantially parallel to the second direction, and the target position is the target end face of the cover sheet held by the first clamping means and the second clamping means. First driving means (a front end face of the sheet bundle 8) facing from the fourth direction side, and the target end face is an end face in the fourth direction of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding means ( Elevating motor 450);
The first holding means holds the first portion with the first holding force of a first value (first bias value), and the second holding means holds the second portion with a second value (substantially 0). (Or the second urging value) in the state of being held by the second holding force, the first driving means is caused to convey the first holding means by the first conveying force, and the first holding force of the first value is First control means (S13, S17 to S25 or S51, which is a force larger than the second holding force of the second value, and the first conveying force is a force larger than the second holding force of the second value). Control unit 900) for executing S55 to S65;
With the first clamping means being at the target position, the cover sheet clamped by the first clamping means and the second clamping means is attached to the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding means A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) provided with possible cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100 and glue application mechanism 300).
 本開示によれば、所定位置に供給された表紙が、第一挟持手段によって第一値の第一保持力で挟持され、且つ第二挟持手段によって第二値の第二保持力で挟持される。第一挟持手段が第二値の第二保持力よりも大きい搬送力で、所定位置から目標位置まで搬送される。第一挟持手段及び第二挟持手段によって挟持された表紙が、用紙保持手段に保持された用紙束の対象端面に対向した状態で、対象端面に取付けられる。従って製本装置は、第一挟持手段を直線状に移動させる簡易な構造で、紙詰まりが抑制された包み製本を実行できる。製本装置は、表紙が張力によって用紙束の対象端面に対して平行に延びる姿勢で保持されるため、表紙を用紙束に対して正確に取付けできる。 According to the present disclosure, the cover supplied to a predetermined position is sandwiched by the first sandwiching means with the first holding force having the first value, and is sandwiched by the second sandwiching means with the second holding force having the second value. . The first clamping means is transported from the predetermined position to the target position with a transport force larger than the second value of the second holding force. The cover sheet sandwiched by the first sandwiching means and the second sandwiching means is attached to the target end face in a state of facing the target end face of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding means. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can execute bookbinding with a simple structure in which the first clamping means is moved linearly and paper jamming is suppressed. In the bookbinding apparatus, the cover sheet is held in a posture extending in parallel to the target end surface of the sheet bundle due to the tension, so that the cover sheet can be accurately attached to the sheet bundle.
(8-2)前記第一方向は上下方向と略平行であり、前記第二方向は下方向と略平行であり、前記第三方向は上方向と略平行であり、前記第四方向及び前記第五方向は水平方向と略平行でもよい。
 この場合、複数の用紙が鉛直方向に積み重ねられた用紙束に対して、表紙が鉛直方向に延びる姿勢で取付けられる。従って製本装置は、用紙束に対して表紙を正確に取付けできる。
(8-2) The first direction is substantially parallel to the vertical direction, the second direction is substantially parallel to the downward direction, the third direction is substantially parallel to the upward direction, the fourth direction and the The fifth direction may be substantially parallel to the horizontal direction.
In this case, the cover sheet is attached in a posture that extends in the vertical direction with respect to the sheet bundle in which a plurality of sheets are stacked in the vertical direction. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately attach the cover to the sheet bundle.
(8-3)前記表紙取付手段は、前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記対象端面に接着部を形成可能であり、前記接着部は前記表紙を貼付け可能な部位である接着部形成手段(糊塗布機構300)と、前記第一挟持手段が前記目標位置にある状態で、前記用紙保持手段を接触位置まで前記第四方向に搬送可能であり、前記接触位置は前記接着部形成手段によって形成された前記接着部と、前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段によって挟持された前記表紙とが接触する位置である第二駆動手段(搬送モータ121)と、前記第二駆動手段に前記用紙保持手段を第二搬送力で搬送させ、且つ前記用紙保持手段が前記接触位置に到達する際に、前記第一挟持手段に前記第一部分を第三値(実質的な0)の前記第一保持力で挟持させ、且つ前記第二挟持手段に前記第二部分を第四値(実質的な0)の前記第二保持力で挟持させ、前記第三値の第一保持力は前記第一値の第一保持力よりも小さい力であり、前記第四値の第二保持力は前記第二値の第二保持力よりも小さい力であり、前記第二搬送力は前記第三値の第一保持力及び前記第四値の第二保持力よりも大きい力である第二制御手段(S31及び図45に示す動作、又はS71及び図45に示す動作を実行する制御部900)とを有してもよい。
 この場合、用紙束の接着部が表紙に接触する際に、第一保持力及び第二保持力が用紙保持手段の搬送力よりも小さくなる。従って製本装置は、用紙束の接着部が表紙に接触する場合に、表紙を第一挟持手段及び第二挟持手段から解放できる。
(8-3) The cover attachment means can form an adhesive part on the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means, and the adhesive part is a part to which the cover can be attached With the forming means (glue application mechanism 300) and the first clamping means in the target position, the paper holding means can be conveyed in the fourth direction to the contact position, and the contact position is the formation of the adhesive portion. Second drive means (conveyance motor 121) that is a position where the adhesive portion formed by the means and the cover sheet sandwiched by the first sandwiching means and the second sandwiching means are in contact with each other; and the second drive means The sheet holding means is conveyed with a second conveying force, and when the sheet holding means reaches the contact position, the first portion is placed in the first clamping means with a third value (substantially 0). With the first holding force, The second holding means holds the second portion with the second holding force having a fourth value (substantially 0), and the first holding force having the third value is the first holding force having the first value. The second holding force of the fourth value is a force smaller than the second holding force of the second value, and the second conveying force is the first holding force of the third value and the second holding force. You may have the 2nd control means (control part 900 which performs operation | movement shown in S31 and FIG. 45 or operation | movement shown in S71 and FIG. 45) which is force larger than the 2nd holding force of a 4th value.
In this case, when the adhesive portion of the sheet bundle comes into contact with the cover, the first holding force and the second holding force are smaller than the conveying force of the sheet holding unit. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can release the cover from the first sandwiching means and the second sandwiching means when the adhesive portion of the sheet bundle contacts the cover.
(8-4)前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段は、前記第一挟持手段が前記目標位置にある場合、前記表紙が前記接触位置を挟んで前記第一方向に延びる姿勢で、前記表紙を保持してもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、表紙に皺及び弛みが生じることを抑制しつつ、表紙を用紙束に貼付けできる。
(8-4) When the first clamping means is at the target position, the first clamping means and the second clamping means are configured such that the cover extends in the first direction across the contact position. You may hold a cover.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can attach the cover to the sheet bundle while suppressing wrinkles and slack from occurring on the cover.
(8-5)前記第二値の第二保持力は、第五値(実質的な0)の前記第二保持力と第六値(第二付勢値)の前記第二保持力とを含み、前記第六値の第二保持力は前記第五値の第二保持力よりも大きな力であり、前記第一制御手段は、前記第一挟持手段が前記所定位置から途中位置(保持実行位置)まで搬送される間、前記第二挟持手段に前記第二部分を前記第五値の第二保持力で挟持させる一方、前記第一挟持手段が前記途中位置から前記目標位置まで搬送される間、前記第二挟持手段に前記第二部分を前記第六値の第二保持力で挟持させ、前記途中位置は前記所定位置と前記目標位置との間に設けられた位置でもよい。
 この場合、第一挟持手段が所定位置から目標位置に搬送される途中で、第二保持力が大きくなる。従って製本装置は、例えば自重及び振動等によって、搬送中の表紙が第二挟持手段から解放されることを抑制できる。
(8-5) The second holding force of the second value is the second holding force of the fifth value (substantially 0) and the second holding force of the sixth value (second bias value). The second holding force of the sixth value is larger than the second holding force of the fifth value, and the first control means is configured such that the first holding means is in the middle position from the predetermined position (holding execution). The second portion is held by the second holding force of the fifth value while the first holding portion is transferred from the midway position to the target position. In the meantime, the second portion may be held by the second holding means with the second holding force of the sixth value, and the intermediate position may be a position provided between the predetermined position and the target position.
In this case, the second holding force is increased while the first clamping means is being conveyed from the predetermined position to the target position. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can prevent the cover sheet being conveyed from being released from the second clamping unit due to, for example, its own weight and vibration.
(8-6)前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段の少なくとも一つは、前記第四方向に対向配置され且つ挟持位置と解放位置との間で変位可能な一対の板部(後板431,441及び前板432,442)であり、前記挟持位置は前記一対の板部を互いに近接する方向に移動させた位置、且つ前記一対の板部によって前記表紙が挟持される位置であり、前記解放位置は前記一対の板部を互いに離隔する方向に移動させた位置、且つ前記表紙が所定領域(操作領域430A,440A)内を移動可能な位置であり、前記所定領域は前記一対の板部の間に形成された空間、且つ前記所定位置に供給された前記表紙が前記第三方向側から進入する空間でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、一対の板部を近接又は離隔させる簡易な構造で表紙を搬送しつつ、紙詰まりが抑制された包み製本を実行できる。
(8-6) At least one of the first clamping means and the second clamping means is a pair of plate portions (rear plates) that are disposed opposite to each other in the fourth direction and that can be displaced between the clamping position and the release position. 431, 441 and front plates 432, 442), and the holding position is a position where the pair of plate portions are moved in a direction approaching each other, and a position where the cover sheet is held by the pair of plate portions, The release position is a position where the pair of plate portions are moved away from each other, and a position where the cover is movable within a predetermined area ( operation areas 430A, 440A), and the predetermined area is the pair of plates. A space formed between the portions and a space where the cover sheet supplied to the predetermined position enters from the third direction side may be used.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can execute the bookbinding in which the paper jam is suppressed while transporting the cover with a simple structure in which the pair of plate portions are moved close to or apart from each other.
(9)第九の開示の作用効果
 上記第八の開示と同様の課題を鑑みて、第九の開示は以下の構成を有する。
(9) Effects of Ninth Disclosure In view of the same problems as the eighth disclosure, the ninth disclosure has the following configuration.
(9-1)第一方向(上下方向)に積み重ねられた複数の用紙(用紙8A)である用紙束(用紙束8)を保持可能であり、前記第一方向は互いに反対方向である第二方向(下方向)及び第三方向(上方向)を含む用紙保持手段(テーブル110)と、
 前記用紙保持手段よりも第四方向側(前側)に設けられ、前記用紙束を被覆可能な表紙(表紙9)の対象端部(下端部)を挟持可能であり、前記第四方向は前記第一方向と直交する方向であり、前記対象端部は前記表紙における前記第二方向の端部である第一挟持手段(下クランプ440)と、
 前記第一挟持手段を供給位置(表紙供給口22)と目標位置との間で前記第一方向と略平行に搬送可能であり、前記供給位置は前記用紙保持手段よりも前記第三方向側に設けられた、前記第一挟持手段に前記第三方向側から前記表紙が供給される位置であり、前記目標位置は前記供給位置よりも前記第二方向側に設けられた、前記第一挟持手段に挟持された前記表紙が対象端面(用紙束8の前端面)に前記第四方向側から対向する位置であり、前記対象端面は前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記第四方向の端面である第一駆動手段(昇降モータ450)と、
 前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記対象端面に、前記目標位置にある前記第一挟持手段に挟持された前記表紙を取付け可能な表紙取付手段(紙揃え機構100及び糊塗布機構300)とを備え、
 前記第一挟持手段は、
 前記第四方向に対向配置された一対の板状部材且つ第一挟持位置と第一解放位置との間で変位可能である一対の第一板部(後板441及び前板442)であり、前記第一挟持位置は前記一対の第一板部を互いに近接する方向に移動させた位置、且つ前記一対の第一板部によって第一領域内(操作領域440A内)にある前記表紙が挟持される位置であり、前記第一解放位置は前記一対の第一板部を互いに離隔する方向に移動させた位置、且つ前記表紙が前記第一領域内を移動可能な位置であり、前記第一領域は前記一対の第一板部の間に形成された空間、且つ前記供給位置にある前記第一挟持手段に供給された前記表紙が前記第三方向側から進入する空間である前記一対の第一板部と、
 前記第一領域に前記第三方向側から進入した前記表紙の前記対象端部に前記第二方向側から接触することで、前記対象端部の前記第二方向への移動を規制する規制部(一対の規制ピン465)とを有する
 製本装置(製本装置1)。
(9-1) A sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) that is a plurality of sheets (sheet 8A) stacked in a first direction (vertical direction) can be held, and the first direction is a direction opposite to each other. Paper holding means (table 110) including a direction (downward) and a third direction (upward);
It is provided on the fourth direction side (front side) with respect to the sheet holding means, and can sandwich the target end (lower end) of the cover (cover 9) that can cover the bundle of sheets. A first clamping means (lower clamp 440), which is a direction orthogonal to one direction, and the target end is an end in the second direction of the cover;
The first clamping means can be transported between the supply position (cover cover supply port 22) and the target position substantially parallel to the first direction, and the supply position is closer to the third direction than the paper holding means. The first clamping means is a position where the cover is supplied from the third direction side to the first clamping means, and the target position is provided on the second direction side from the supply position. The front cover is a position facing the target end face (front end face of the sheet bundle 8) from the fourth direction side, and the target end face is the fourth direction of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means. First driving means (elevating motor 450) which is an end face of
Cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100 and glue application mechanism 300) capable of attaching the cover sandwiched by the first sandwiching means at the target position to the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the sheet retaining means. )
The first clamping means is
A pair of plate-like members disposed opposite to each other in the fourth direction and a pair of first plate portions (rear plate 441 and front plate 442) that are displaceable between a first clamping position and a first release position; The first clamping position is a position where the pair of first plate portions are moved in a direction close to each other, and the cover sheet in the first region (in the operation region 440A) is clamped by the pair of first plate portions. The first release position is a position where the pair of first plate portions are moved away from each other, and a position where the cover is movable in the first area. Is a space formed between the pair of first plate portions, and the pair of firsts which are spaces where the cover sheet supplied to the first clamping means at the supply position enters from the third direction side. A plate part;
A regulating portion that regulates movement of the target end portion in the second direction by contacting the target end portion of the cover that has entered the first region from the third direction side from the second direction side. A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) having a pair of regulating pins 465).
 本開示によれば、用紙束が用紙保持手段によって保持される。所定位置に供給された表紙は、第一挟持手段によって用紙束の対象端面に対向する位置まで搬送されて、表紙取付手段によって対象端面に取付けられる。第一挟持手段は、第一挟持位置と第一解放位置との間で変位可能な一対の第一板部を有する。一対の第一板部が第一解放位置にある場合、表紙は第一領域に進入可能である。第一領域に進入した表紙の対象端部は、第一挟持手段が有する規制部に接触して、第二方向への移動が規制される。従って製本装置は、第一挟持手段を直線状に移動させる簡易な構造で、紙詰まりが抑制された包み製本を実行できる。製本装置は、表紙を搬送する第一挟持手段に対して表紙を正確に位置決めできるので、表紙を用紙束に対して正確に位置決めできる。 According to the present disclosure, the sheet bundle is held by the sheet holding unit. The cover sheet supplied to the predetermined position is transported to a position facing the target end face of the sheet bundle by the first clamping means, and attached to the target end face by the cover attaching means. The first clamping means has a pair of first plate portions that can be displaced between a first clamping position and a first release position. When the pair of first plate portions is in the first release position, the cover can enter the first region. The target end portion of the cover that has entered the first region comes into contact with a restriction portion included in the first clamping means, and movement in the second direction is restricted. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can execute bookbinding with a simple structure in which the first clamping means is moved linearly and paper jamming is suppressed. Since the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the cover with respect to the first clamping means for conveying the cover, the cover can be accurately positioned with respect to the sheet bundle.
(9-2)前記製本装置は、前記第一方向に対向配置され、前記用紙保持手段に保持された冊子を前記第一方向に挟持することで、前記表紙を前記対象端面に沿って折り曲げ可能な一対の部材であり、前記冊子は前記表紙が取付けられた前記用紙束である一対の挟持部(上クランプ470及び下クランプ480)を備え、前記第一駆動手段は、前記第一挟持手段を前記供給位置から前記目標位置に搬送する場合、前記規制部が基準位置から前記第二方向に所定距離離れる位置まで前記第一挟持手段を前記第二方向に搬送し、前記基準位置は、前記一対の挟持部における前記第一方向の中心位置でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、表紙を折り曲げる一対の挟持部間の中心位置に対して、表紙を正確に位置決めできる。
(9-2) The bookbinding apparatus is arranged to face the first direction and can fold the cover along the target end surface by sandwiching the booklet held by the paper holding means in the first direction. The booklet includes a pair of clamping portions (upper clamp 470 and lower clamp 480) that are the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached, and the first driving means includes the first clamping means. When transporting from the supply position to the target position, the regulation unit transports the first clamping means in the second direction to a position that is a predetermined distance away from the reference position in the second direction, and the reference position is The center position of the first direction in the clamping portion may be used.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the cover with respect to the center position between the pair of sandwiching portions that bend the cover.
(9-3)前記所定距離は、前記表紙の前記第一方向の長さ(表紙サイズ)の略半分、又は前記表紙に形成された画像における前記第一方向の中心位置(データ中心位置M2)から前記対象端部までの距離でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、表紙における第一方向の略中心位置、又は表紙の画像における第一方向の略中心位置を、一対の挟持部間の中心位置に対して正確に位置決めできる。
(9-3) The predetermined distance is approximately half of the length of the cover in the first direction (cover page size), or the center position in the first direction (data center position M2) in the image formed on the cover. Or the distance from the target end.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the approximate center position in the first direction on the cover or the approximate center position in the first direction on the cover image with respect to the center position between the pair of sandwiching portions.
(9-4)前記第一方向は上下方向と略平行であり、前記第二方向は下方向と略平行であり、前記第三方向は上方向と略平行であり、前記第四方向は水平方向と略平行でもよい。
 この場合、複数の用紙が鉛直方向に積み重ねられた用紙束に対して、表紙が鉛直方向に延びる姿勢で取付けられる。従って製本装置は、用紙束に対して表紙を正確に取付けできる。
(9-4) The first direction is substantially parallel to the vertical direction, the second direction is substantially parallel to the downward direction, the third direction is substantially parallel to the upward direction, and the fourth direction is horizontal. It may be substantially parallel to the direction.
In this case, the cover sheet is attached in a posture that extends in the vertical direction with respect to the sheet bundle in which a plurality of sheets are stacked in the vertical direction. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately attach the cover to the sheet bundle.
(9-5)前記製本装置は、前記第一挟持手段が前記供給位置にある状態で、前記第一領域に向けて前記第三方向側から前記表紙を供給する表紙供給手段(表紙供給部6)と、前記表紙供給手段によって前記表紙が供給される間、前記一対の第一板部を前記第一解放位置に変位させる制御を実行する第一制御手段(図37に示す動作を実行する制御部900)と、前記第一制御手段の制御が実行された後、前記一対の第一板部を前記第一挟持位置に変位させた状態で、前記第一駆動手段に前記第一挟持手段を前記第二方向に搬送させる制御を実行する第二制御手段(S9~S11又はS47~S49を実行する制御部900)と、前記第二制御手段の制御が実行された後、前記一対の第一板部を前記第一解放位置に変位させた状態で、前記第一駆動手段に前記第一挟持手段を前記第三方向に搬送させる制御を実行する第三制御手段(S13~S15又はS51~S53を実行する制御部900)と、前記第三制御手段の制御が実行された後、前記一対の第一板部を前記第一挟持位置に変位させた状態で、前記第一駆動手段に前記第一挟持手段を前記目標位置まで前記第二方向に搬送させる制御を実行する第四制御手段(S17~S19,S25又はS55~S57,S65を実行する制御部900)とを備えてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は第一~第四制御手段の各制御によって、表紙供給手段によって供給された表紙の対象端部を、規制部に対して確実に接触できる。
(9-5) The bookbinding apparatus includes a cover sheet supply unit (cover sheet supply unit 6) that supplies the cover sheet from the third direction toward the first region in a state where the first clamping unit is in the supply position. ) And first control means (control for executing the operation shown in FIG. 37) for executing control to displace the pair of first plate portions to the first release position while the cover is supplied by the cover supply means. Part 900) and the control of the first control means, the first driving means is moved to the first driving means in a state where the pair of first plate parts are displaced to the first clamping position. After the control of the second control means (the control unit 900 for executing S9 to S11 or S47 to S49) for executing the control for transporting in the second direction and the control of the second control means, the pair of first controls With the plate portion displaced to the first release position, the first Control is performed by third control means (control unit 900 that executes S13 to S15 or S51 to S53) that controls the drive means to convey the first clamping means in the third direction and the third control means. Then, with the pair of first plate portions displaced to the first clamping position, the first driving means performs control to convey the first clamping means to the target position in the second direction. Fourth control means (control unit 900 for executing S17 to S19, S25 or S55 to S57, S65).
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can reliably contact the target end portion of the cover sheet supplied by the cover sheet supply unit with the control unit by each control of the first to fourth control units.
(9-6)前記製本装置は、前記第一挟持手段に対して前記第三方向に対向配置された一対の第二板部(後板431及び前板432)を有し、前記一対の第二板部は前記第四方向に対向配置された一対の板状部材であり且つ第二挟持位置と第二解放位置との間で変位可能であり、前記第二挟持位置は前記一対の第二板部を互いに近接する方向に移動させた位置、且つ前記一対の第二板部によって前記表紙が挟持される位置であり、前記第二解放位置は前記一対の第二板部を互いに離隔する方向に移動させた位置、且つ前記表紙が第二領域内(操作領域430A内)を移動可能な位置であり、前記第二領域は前記一対の第二板部の間に形成された空間である第二挟持手段(上クランプ430)を備え、前記第一挟持手段が前記供給位置にある場合、前記第二挟持手段は前記第一挟持手段に前記第三方向側から接触し、且つ前記第一領域と前記第二領域とが前記第一方向に連通し、前記表紙供給手段は、前記第一挟持手段が前記供給位置にある状態で、前記第二領域を介して前記第一領域に向けて前記表紙を供給し、前記第一制御手段は、前記表紙供給手段によって前記表紙が供給される間、前記一対の第二板部を前記第二解放位置に変位させてもよい。
 この場合、表紙供給手段によって供給された表紙は、第二領域を経由して第一領域に進入する。従って製本装置は、第一挟持手段及び第二挟持手段の両方で表紙を安定的に挟持できる。
(9-6) The bookbinding apparatus includes a pair of second plate portions (a rear plate 431 and a front plate 432) disposed to face the first clamping means in the third direction, and The two plate portions are a pair of plate-like members arranged opposite to each other in the fourth direction and can be displaced between a second holding position and a second release position, and the second holding position is the pair of second members A position where the plate portions are moved in a direction approaching each other, and a position where the cover is sandwiched between the pair of second plate portions, and the second release position is a direction separating the pair of second plate portions from each other. And the cover is a position where the cover can move in the second area (in the operation area 430A), and the second area is a space formed between the pair of second plate portions. Two clamping means (upper clamp 430), and when the first clamping means is in the supply position The second clamping means is in contact with the first clamping means from the third direction side, and the first area and the second area communicate with each other in the first direction. With the one clamping means in the supply position, the cover is supplied to the first area through the second area, and the first control means is supplied with the cover by the cover supply means. Meanwhile, the pair of second plate portions may be displaced to the second release position.
In this case, the cover supplied by the cover supply means enters the first area via the second area. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can stably hold the cover sheet by both the first holding means and the second holding means.
(9-7)前記製本装置は、前記第二挟持手段を前記第一方向と略平行に搬送可能な第二駆動手段(下クランプ440を介して上クランプ430を上下動させる昇降モータ450)を備え、前記第二制御手段は、前記一対の第二板部を前記第二挟持位置に変位させた状態で、前記第二駆動手段に前記第二挟持手段を前記第一挟持手段と同期して前記第二方向に移動させ、前記第三制御手段は、前記一対の第二板部を前記第二解放位置に変位させた状態で、前記第二駆動手段に前記第二挟持手段を前記第一挟持手段と同期して前記第三方向に移動させてもよい。
 この場合、第一挟持手段の動作と同期して、第二挟持手段が移動及び開閉される。従って製本装置は、表紙供給手段によって供給された表紙を、第一挟持手段及び第二挟持手段の両方で確実に挟持できる。
(9-7) The bookbinding apparatus includes second driving means (elevating motor 450 for moving the upper clamp 430 up and down via the lower clamp 440) capable of conveying the second clamping means substantially parallel to the first direction. The second control means is configured to synchronize the second clamping means with the first clamping means in a state where the pair of second plate portions are displaced to the second clamping position. The second control unit is moved in the second direction, and the third control unit displaces the second clamping unit in the second driving unit in a state where the pair of second plate portions are displaced to the second release position. You may move to the said 3rd direction synchronizing with a clamping means.
In this case, the second clamping means is moved and opened / closed in synchronization with the operation of the first clamping means. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can securely clamp the cover sheet supplied by the cover sheet supplying unit with both the first clamping unit and the second clamping unit.
(9-8)前記表紙取付手段は、前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記対象端面に接着部を形成可能であり、前記接着部は前記表紙を貼付け可能な部位である接着部形成手段(糊塗布機構300)と、前記用紙保持手段を接触位置まで前記第四方向に搬送可能であり、前記接触位置は前記接着部形成手段によって形成された前記接着部と、前記第一挟持手段に前記対象端部が挟持された前記表紙とが接触する位置である第三駆動手段(紙揃え機構100)とを有してもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、用紙保持手段に保持された用紙束の姿勢が変化することを抑制しつつ、表紙を用紙束に貼付けできる。
(9-8) The cover cover attaching unit can form an adhesive part on the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding unit, and the adhesive part is a part to which the cover sheet can be attached The forming means (glue application mechanism 300) and the paper holding means can be transported to the contact position in the fourth direction. You may have the 3rd drive means (paper alignment mechanism 100) which is a position where the said cover which the said object edge part was clamped by the means contacts.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can paste the cover sheet on the sheet bundle while suppressing the posture of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding unit from changing.
(10)第十の開示の作用効果
 従来、包み製本を行う製本装置が知られている。例えば特開2001-80236号公報に開示の装置では、一対のクランパが冊子束を挟持して、冊子束をミーリング処理部、糊付け処理部、及び表紙付け処理部の順に搬送する。フライスカッタは、ミーリング処理部に搬送された冊子束の背面を切削加工する。糊付けローラは、糊付け処理部に搬送された冊子束の背面に糊を塗布する。一対のニップ板は、表紙付け処理部に搬送された冊子束の背面に表紙を貼付ける。上記の装置では、固定子と測定子との間で、冊子束及び表紙の寸法が測定される。測定された寸法に合わせて、冊子束又は表紙を挟持する部材である挟持部(例えば、一対のクランパ及び一対のニップ板)の位置が制御される。
(10) Advantageous Effects of Tenth Disclosure Conventionally, a bookbinding apparatus that performs packet binding is known. For example, in the apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-80236, a pair of clampers sandwich a booklet bundle, and the booklet bundle is conveyed in the order of a milling processing unit, a gluing processing unit, and a cover attaching processing unit. The milling cutter cuts the back surface of the booklet bundle conveyed to the milling processing unit. The glue roller applies glue to the back of the booklet bundle conveyed to the glue processing unit. The pair of nip plates affix a cover on the back of the booklet bundle conveyed to the cover attachment processing unit. In the above apparatus, the dimensions of the booklet bundle and the cover are measured between the stator and the measuring element. In accordance with the measured dimensions, the position of a clamping unit (for example, a pair of clampers and a pair of nip plates) that is a member that clamps a booklet bundle or a cover is controlled.
 上記の従来技術では、冊子束又は表紙を直接挟持する挟持部の位置が制御されるため、挟持部の位置決め精度が悪い場合、正確な製本動作を実行できない場合がある。例えば一対のクランパの位置決め精度が悪い場合、一対のクランパから冊子束が落下するおそれがあった。従って、表紙を冊子束に対して正確に位置決めするために、高精度の複雑な制御が必要であった。このような課題を鑑みて、第十の開示は以下の構成を有する。 In the above-described conventional technique, the position of the clamping unit that directly clamps the booklet bundle or the cover is controlled. Therefore, when the positioning accuracy of the clamping unit is poor, an accurate bookbinding operation may not be performed. For example, when the positioning accuracy of the pair of clampers is poor, the booklet bundle may fall from the pair of clampers. Therefore, in order to accurately position the cover with respect to the booklet bundle, high-precision and complicated control is necessary. In view of such a problem, the tenth disclosure has the following configuration.
(10-1)第一方向(上下方向)に積み重ねられた複数の用紙(用紙8A)である用紙束(用紙束8)を保持可能な用紙保持手段(テーブル110)と、
 前記用紙保持手段よりも第二方向側(前側)に設けられ、所定位置(表紙供給口22)に供給された表紙(表紙9)を保持可能であり、且つ前記第一方向と略平行に移動可能であり、前記第二方向は前記第一方向と直交する方向である表紙保持手段(可動部401)と、
 前記表紙保持手段に設けられ、前記表紙保持手段に保持された前記表紙を所定状態で前記第一方向と略平行に搬送可能であり、前記所定状態は前記表紙が対象端面(用紙束8の前端面)と略平行に延びる状態であり、前記対象端面は前記用紙束の前記第二方向の端面である表紙搬送手段(上クランプ430及び下クランプ440)と、
 前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の厚さを取得可能であり、前記厚さは前記用紙束の前記第一方向の長さである厚さ取得手段(S7又はS45を実行する制御部900)と、
 前記表紙搬送手段に前記表紙を第一調整位置まで搬送可能であり、前記第一調整位置は前記表紙の特定位置(表紙中心位置M1又はデータ中心位置M2)と前記表紙保持手段の基準位置(貼付中心位置H1)とが略一致する位置であり、前記特定位置は前記表紙において予め定められた前記第一方向の位置であり、前記基準位置は前記表紙保持手段において予め定められた前記第一方向の位置である第一制御手段(S25又はS65を実行する制御部900)と、
 前記厚さ取得手段によって取得された前記厚さに応じて、前記表紙保持手段を第二調整位置まで移動可能であり、前記第二調整位置は前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の幅中心位置(厚み中心位置H2)と前記基準位置とが一致する位置であり、前記幅中心位置は前記用紙束の前記第一方向の中心位置である第二制御手段(S27又はS67を実行する制御部900)と、
 前記表紙が前記第一調整位置にあり、且つ前記表紙保持手段が前記第二調整位置にある状態で、前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記対象端面に、前記表紙保持手段に保持された前記表紙を取付け可能な表紙取付手段(紙揃え機構100及び糊塗布機構300)と
 を備えた製本装置(製本装置1)。
(10-1) a sheet holding means (table 110) capable of holding a sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) which is a plurality of sheets (sheet 8A) stacked in the first direction (vertical direction);
Provided on the second direction side (front side) of the sheet holding means, can hold the cover (cover 9) supplied to a predetermined position (cover cover opening 22), and moves substantially parallel to the first direction. A cover holding means (movable part 401) in which the second direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction;
The cover sheet is provided in the cover sheet holding unit and can convey the cover sheet held by the cover sheet holding unit in a predetermined state substantially parallel to the first direction. In the predetermined state, the cover sheet is a target end surface (the front end of the sheet bundle 8 A cover sheet conveying means (upper clamp 430 and lower clamp 440), wherein the target end surface is an end surface in the second direction of the sheet bundle;
The thickness of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding means can be acquired, and the thickness is the thickness acquisition means (the control unit that executes S7 or S45) that is the length of the sheet bundle in the first direction. 900),
The cover can be transported to the cover transport means to a first adjustment position, and the first adjustment position is a specific position of the cover (cover center position M1 or data center position M2) and a reference position of the cover cover holding means (attachment) The specific position is a position in the first direction predetermined on the cover, and the reference position is the first direction predetermined in the cover holding means. First control means (control unit 900 that executes S25 or S65),
The cover holding means can be moved to a second adjustment position according to the thickness acquired by the thickness acquisition means, and the second adjustment position is the width of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means. A center position (thickness center position H2) coincides with the reference position, and the width center position is a center position of the sheet bundle in the first direction (control to execute S27 or S67). Part 900),
While the cover is in the first adjustment position and the cover holding means is in the second adjustment position, the cover is held by the cover holding means on the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means. A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100 and glue application mechanism 300) capable of attaching the cover.
 本開示によれば、用紙束が用紙保持手段によって保持される。所定位置に供給された表紙が、表紙保持手段によって保持される。表紙保持手段に保持された表紙が、表紙搬送手段によって第一調整位置まで搬送される。これにより、表紙の特定位置と表紙保持手段の基準位置とが略一致する。表紙保持手段は、用紙束の厚さに応じて第二調整位置まで移動される。これにより、用紙束の幅中心位置と表紙保持手段の基準位置とが略一致する。表紙保持手段によって保持された表紙が、表紙の特定位置と用紙束の幅中心位置とが略一致した状態で、用紙保持手段に保持された用紙束の対象端面に取付けられる。従って製本装置は、簡易な制御で表紙を冊子束に対して正確に位置決めでき、表紙が用紙束に取付けられた冊子を正確に作成できる。 According to the present disclosure, the sheet bundle is held by the sheet holding unit. The cover supplied to the predetermined position is held by the cover holding means. The cover held by the cover holding means is conveyed to the first adjustment position by the cover conveying means. Thereby, the specific position of the cover and the reference position of the cover holding means substantially coincide. The cover sheet holding means is moved to the second adjustment position according to the thickness of the sheet bundle. As a result, the center position of the width of the sheet bundle and the reference position of the cover holding means substantially coincide. The cover sheet held by the cover sheet holding unit is attached to the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding unit in a state where the specific position of the cover sheet and the width center position of the sheet bundle substantially coincide. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the cover with respect to the booklet bundle with simple control, and can accurately create the booklet with the cover attached to the sheet bundle.
(10-2)前記第一方向は、互いに反対方向である第三方向(下方向)及び第四方向(上方向)を含み、前記表紙搬送手段は、前記表紙の対象端部(下端部)に前記第三方向側から接触可能な規制部(一対の規制ピン465)を有し、前記規制部に接触する前記対象端部を保持可能であり、前記対象端部は前記表紙における前記第三方向の端部である端部保持手段(下クランプ440)と、前記端部保持手段を前記所定位置から前記第三方向と略平行に搬送可能な第一駆動手段(昇降モータ450)とを有し、前記特定位置は、前記所定状態にある前記表紙において、前記対象端部から前記第四方向に所定距離離れた位置であり、前記第一制御手段は、前記端部保持手段に前記対象端部が保持された状態で、前記規制部が前記基準位置から前記第三方向に前記所定距離離れる位置まで、前記第一駆動手段に前記端部保持手段を搬送させてもよい。
 この場合、表紙の対象端部が位置決めされた規制部を基準として、端部保持手段の搬送制御が実行される。従って製本装置は、表紙搬送手段に保持された表紙を正確に位置決めできる。
(10-2) The first direction includes a third direction (downward direction) and a fourth direction (upward direction) that are opposite directions, and the cover sheet transporting means includes a target end (lower end) of the cover sheet. A restriction portion (a pair of restriction pins 465) that can be contacted from the third direction side, and can hold the target end portion that contacts the restriction portion, and the target end portion is the third portion of the cover. End holding means (lower clamp 440) that is an end in the direction, and first drive means (elevating motor 450) capable of transporting the end holding means from the predetermined position substantially parallel to the third direction. The specific position is a position that is a predetermined distance away from the target end in the fourth direction on the cover in the predetermined state, and the first control means connects the target end to the end holding means. In a state where the portion is held, the restricting portion is moved away from the reference position. Serial until said predetermined distance away position in the third direction, may be transported to the end supporting means to the first drive means.
In this case, the conveyance control of the edge holding means is executed with reference to the restriction portion where the target edge of the cover is positioned. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the cover held on the cover transport means.
(10-3)前記所定距離は、前記所定状態にある前記表紙の前記第一方向の長さの略半分であり、前記特定位置は、前記所定状態にある前記表紙における、前記第一方向の略中心位置(表紙中心位置M1)でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、表紙における第一方向の略中心位置を、用紙束の幅中心位置に対して正確に位置決めできる。
(10-3) The predetermined distance is approximately half the length of the cover in the first state in the predetermined state, and the specific position is the first direction in the cover in the predetermined state. A substantially center position (cover center position M1) may be used.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the substantially center position in the first direction on the cover with respect to the width center position of the sheet bundle.
(10-4)前記製本装置は、前記表紙保持手段に供給又は保持された前記表紙から、画像中心位置(データ中心位置M2)を示すマーク(マーク9B)を検出可能であり、前記画像中心位置は前記表紙に形成された画像における前記第一方向の中心位置である検出手段(マークセンサ499)を備え、前記第一制御手段は、前記検出手段によって検出された前記マークが示す前記画像中心位置と前記基準位置とが略一致する位置まで、前記表紙搬送手段に前記表紙を搬送させてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、表紙に形成された画像における第一方向の略中心位置を、用紙束の幅中心位置に対して正確に位置決めできる。
(10-4) The bookbinding apparatus can detect a mark (mark 9B) indicating an image center position (data center position M2) from the cover sheet supplied to or held by the cover sheet holding unit, and the image center position Comprises a detection means (mark sensor 499) which is the center position in the first direction in the image formed on the cover, and the first control means is the image center position indicated by the mark detected by the detection means. The cover sheet may be transported by the cover sheet transport means to a position where the reference position substantially coincides with the reference position.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the approximate center position in the first direction in the image formed on the cover with respect to the width center position of the sheet bundle.
(10-5)前記製本装置は、前記表紙保持手段において前記第一方向に対向配置され、前記用紙保持手段に保持された冊子を前記第一方向に挟持することで、前記表紙を前記対象端面に沿って折り曲げ可能な一対の部材であり、前記冊子は前記表紙が取付けられた前記用紙束である一対の挟持部(上クランプ470及び下クランプ480)を備え、前記基準位置は、前記一対の挟持部における前記第一方向の中心位置でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、表紙を折り曲げる一対の挟持部間の中心位置に対して、表紙を正確に位置決めできる。
(10-5) The bookbinding apparatus is arranged to face the cover in the first direction in the cover holding means, and holds the book in the first direction by holding the booklet held in the paper holding means in the first direction. The booklet includes a pair of clamping portions (upper clamp 470 and lower clamp 480) that are the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached, and the reference position is the pair of members. It may be the center position in the first direction in the clamping portion.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the cover with respect to the center position between the pair of sandwiching portions that bend the cover.
(10-6)前記厚さ取得手段は、前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束を構成する前記用紙の枚数(用紙枚数)と、前記用紙の前記第一方向の長さ(用紙厚さ)とに基づいて、前記厚さを取得してもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、用紙束の厚さを簡易且つ正確に取得できる。
(10-6) The thickness acquisition unit includes the number of sheets (the number of sheets) constituting the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding unit and the length of the sheets in the first direction (sheet thickness). ) And the thickness may be acquired.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can easily and accurately obtain the thickness of the sheet bundle.
(10-7)前記表紙取付手段は、前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記対象端面に接着部を形成可能であり、前記接着部は前記表紙を貼付け可能な部位である接着部形成手段(糊塗布機構300)と、前記用紙保持手段を接触位置まで前記第二方向に搬送可能であり、前記接触位置は前記接着部形成手段によって形成された前記接着部と前記表紙保持手段に保持された前記表紙とが接触する位置である第二駆動手段(紙揃え機構100)とを有してもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、用紙保持手段に保持された用紙束の姿勢が変化することを抑制しつつ、表紙を用紙束に貼付けできる。
(10-7) The cover cover attaching means can form an adhesive portion on the target end face of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means, and the adhesive portion is a portion to which the cover can be attached The forming means (glue application mechanism 300) and the paper holding means can be conveyed to the contact position in the second direction, and the contact position is in contact with the adhesive portion formed by the adhesive portion forming means and the cover sheet holding means. You may have the 2nd drive means (paper alignment mechanism 100) which is a position which the said held | maintenance cover contacts.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can paste the cover sheet on the sheet bundle while suppressing the posture of the sheet bundle held by the sheet holding unit from changing.
(11)第十一の開示の作用効果
 従来、包み製本を行う製本装置が知られている。例えば、先述の特開2001-80236号公報に開示の装置では、貼付けられた表紙で冊子束を包むために、一対のクランパによる冊子束の保持を解除することで、一対のクランパは冊子束から離れる必要がある。この場合、保持が解除された冊子束を支持するために、一対のクランパとは異なる別のクランパが必要である。別のクランパを設けた場合、装置構造が複雑になるおそれがあった。このような課題を鑑みて、第十一の開示は以下の構成を有する。
(11) Advantageous Effects of Eleventh Disclosure Conventionally, a bookbinding apparatus that performs packet binding is known. For example, in the apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-80236, the pair of clampers separates from the booklet bundle by releasing the holding of the booklet bundle by the pair of clampers in order to wrap the booklet bundle with the attached cover. There is a need. In this case, another clamper different from the pair of clampers is required to support the booklet bundle that has been released. When another clamper is provided, the device structure may be complicated. In view of such a problem, the eleventh disclosure has the following configuration.
(11-1)用紙束(用紙束8)を載置可能な略平面である第一面(載置面110A)を有し、前記用紙束は第一方向(上方向)に積み重ねられた複数の用紙(用紙8A)であり、前記第一方向は前記第一面と略直交し且つ水平方向よりも上向きの方向である第一載置手段(テーブル110)と、
 前記第一面に載置された前記用紙束の対象端面(前端面)に、前記用紙束を被覆可能な表紙(表紙9)を取付け可能であり、前記対象端面は前記用紙束の第二方向(前方向)の端面であり、前記第二方向は前記第一面と略直交する方向である表紙取付手段(紙揃え機構100、糊塗布機構300、及び表紙保持機構400)と、
 前記第一面に載置された冊子(冊子10)を前記第一方向及び第三方向(下方向)から挟持可能であり、前記冊子は前記表紙取付手段によって前記表紙が取付けられた前記用紙束であり、前記第三方向は前記第一方向の反対方向である挟持手段(上クランプ470及び下クランプ480)と、
 前記挟持手段によって前記冊子が挟持された状態で、前記第一載置手段を前記第三方向に移動させる動作及び前記挟持手段を前記第一方向に移動させる動作の少なくとも一つを実行することで、前記第一載置手段及び前記挟持手段を互いに離隔する方向に相対移動させ、且つ前記挟持手段によって挟持された前記冊子を退避位置(受取位置)に移動させることが可能であり、前記退避位置は前記冊子が前記第一面から前記第一方向に離隔する位置である第一駆動手段(搬送モータ422及びS81~S83を実行する制御部900)と、
 前記冊子を載置可能な略平面である第二面(載置面110A)を有し、前記第二面は前記退避位置にある前記冊子から前記第三方向に離隔する位置に設けられた第二載置手段(テーブル110)と、
 前記第一駆動手段によって前記冊子が前記退避位置に移動された後、前記挟持手段を前記第三方向に移動させる動作及び前記第二載置手段を前記第一方向に移動させる動作の少なくとも一つを実行することで、前記第二載置手段及び前記挟持手段を互いに接近する方向に相対移動させ、且つ前記挟持手段によって挟持された前記冊子を載置位置(貼付基準位置)に移動させることが可能であり、前記載置位置は前記冊子が前記第二面に前記第一方向側から載置される位置である第二駆動手段(搬送モータ422及びステップS85~S95を実行する制御部900)と
 を備えた製本装置(製本装置1)。
(11-1) A plurality of sheets having a first surface (mounting surface 110A) which is a substantially flat surface on which a sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8) can be placed, and the sheet bundle is stacked in a first direction (upward direction). First loading means (table 110), wherein the first direction is substantially perpendicular to the first surface and is upward from the horizontal direction;
A cover (cover sheet 9) capable of covering the sheet bundle can be attached to a target end surface (front end surface) of the sheet bundle placed on the first surface, and the target end surface is in the second direction of the sheet bundle. (Front direction) end surface, and the second direction is a direction substantially perpendicular to the first surface, cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100, glue application mechanism 300, and cover holding mechanism 400),
The booklet (booklet 10) placed on the first surface can be sandwiched from the first direction and the third direction (downward direction), and the booklet is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached by the cover attachment means. The clamping means (upper clamp 470 and lower clamp 480) in which the third direction is opposite to the first direction;
By performing at least one of an operation of moving the first placement unit in the third direction and an operation of moving the clamping unit in the first direction in a state where the booklet is clamped by the clamping unit. The first loading means and the clamping means can be moved relative to each other in a direction away from each other, and the booklet held by the clamping means can be moved to a retracted position (receiving position). Is a first drive means (control unit 900 for executing the transport motor 422 and S81 to S83) that is a position where the booklet is separated from the first surface in the first direction;
The booklet has a second surface (mounting surface 110A) that is a substantially flat surface on which the booklet can be placed, and the second surface is provided at a position separated from the booklet at the retracted position in the third direction. Two mounting means (table 110);
After the booklet is moved to the retracted position by the first driving means, at least one of an action of moving the clamping means in the third direction and an action of moving the second placement means in the first direction By executing the above, the second placing means and the sandwiching means are relatively moved in a direction approaching each other, and the booklet sandwiched by the sandwiching means is moved to the placement position (paste reference position). The above-described placement position is a second driving means (the transport motor 422 and the control unit 900 that executes steps S85 to S95) that is a position where the booklet is placed on the second surface from the first direction side. And a bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1).
 本開示によれば、第一面に載置された用紙束の対象端面に、表紙が取付けられて、冊子が作成される。第一載置手段及び挟持手段が互いに離隔する方向に相対移動されると、挟持手段に挟持された冊子が第一面から離隔する。次いで、第二載置手段及び挟持手段が互いに接近する方向に相対移動されると、挟持手段に挟持された冊子が第二面に載置される。従って、一つの挟持手段に挟持された冊子は、第一面及び第二面から離隔した状態を経て、第一面から第二面まで搬送される。製本装置は、装置構造を複雑にすることなく冊子束を表紙で包むことができる。 According to the present disclosure, a booklet is created by attaching a cover to the target end surface of the sheet bundle placed on the first surface. When the first placing unit and the sandwiching unit are relatively moved in the direction away from each other, the booklet sandwiched by the sandwiching unit is separated from the first surface. Next, when the second placing unit and the sandwiching unit are relatively moved in a direction approaching each other, the booklet sandwiched by the sandwiching unit is placed on the second surface. Therefore, the booklet sandwiched by one sandwiching means is conveyed from the first surface to the second surface through a state separated from the first surface and the second surface. The bookbinding apparatus can wrap a booklet bundle with a cover without complicating the apparatus structure.
(11-2)前記第一方向は上方向と略平行であり、前記第三方向は下方向と略平行であり、前記第二方向は水平方向と略平行でもよい。
 この場合、複数の用紙が鉛直方向に積み重ねられた用紙束に対して、表紙が取付けられる。従って製本装置は、安定した姿勢の用紙束に対して、表紙を正確に取付けできる。
(11-2) The first direction may be substantially parallel to the upward direction, the third direction may be substantially parallel to the downward direction, and the second direction may be substantially parallel to the horizontal direction.
In this case, a cover is attached to a sheet bundle in which a plurality of sheets are stacked in the vertical direction. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately attach the cover to the sheet bundle in a stable posture.
(11-3)前記表紙取付手段は、前記第一面に載置された前記用紙束の前記対象端面に接着剤を塗布することで、前記表紙を貼付け可能な接着部を形成可能な塗布手段(糊塗布機構300)と、前記塗布手段によって形成された前記接着部に前記表紙を接触させることで、前記接着部に前記表紙を貼付け可能な貼付手段(紙揃え機構100及び表紙保持機構400)とを有してもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、第一面に載置された用紙束の姿勢が変化することを抑制しつつ、表紙を用紙束に貼付けできる。
(11-3) The cover attachment means is an application means capable of forming an adhesive portion to which the cover can be attached by applying an adhesive to the target end face of the sheet bundle placed on the first surface. (Glue application mechanism 300) and application means (paper alignment mechanism 100 and cover holding mechanism 400) capable of attaching the cover to the adhesive part by bringing the cover into contact with the adhesive part formed by the application means You may have.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can affix the cover to the sheet bundle while suppressing the posture of the sheet bundle placed on the first surface from changing.
(11-4)前記塗布手段は、前記第二方向と直交し且つ第四方向(左右方向)と交差する軸線を中心に回転可能であり、且つ前記接着剤が供給される周面(周面351A)を有する略円柱体(糊塗布ローラ350)であり、前記第四方向は、前記第一方向、前記第二方向、及び前記第三方向と直交する方向であり、前記表紙取付手段は、前記第一載置手段及び前記塗布手段の少なくとも一つを、前記周面と前記対象端面とが近接する位置に沿って前記第四方向に移動可能である第三駆動手段(搬送モータ321)を有してもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、第一載置手段と塗布手段とを相対移動させる簡易な制御で、用紙束の対象端面に接着部を形成できる。
(11-4) The coating means is rotatable around an axis orthogonal to the second direction and intersecting the fourth direction (left-right direction), and a peripheral surface (peripheral surface) to which the adhesive is supplied 351A), and the fourth direction is a direction perpendicular to the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction, and the cover attachment means is Third drive means (conveyance motor 321) capable of moving at least one of the first placement means and the application means in the fourth direction along a position where the peripheral surface and the target end face are close to each other. You may have.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can form an adhesive portion on the target end surface of the sheet bundle by simple control that relatively moves the first placement unit and the coating unit.
(11-5)前記貼付手段は、前記塗布手段によって形成された前記接着部に前記第二方向側から対向する位置で、前記表紙を保持可能な表紙保持手段(表紙保持機構400)と、前記第一載置手段を前記第二方向に移動させることで、前記表紙保持手段に保持された前記表紙を前記接着部に接触させることが可能な第四駆動手段(紙揃え機構100)とを有してもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、第一載置手段を第二方向に移動させる簡易な制御で、表紙を用紙束に貼付けできる。
(11-5) The sticking means includes a cover holding means (cover cover holding mechanism 400) capable of holding the cover at a position facing the adhesive portion formed by the applying means from the second direction side; There is provided a fourth driving means (paper alignment mechanism 100) capable of bringing the cover held by the cover holding means into contact with the adhesive portion by moving the first placing means in the second direction. May be.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can attach the cover to the sheet bundle with a simple control for moving the first placement unit in the second direction.
(11-6)前記挟持手段は、前記第一面に載置された前記冊子の対象端部(前端部)を挟持することで、前記接着部に貼付けられた前記表紙を前記対象端面に沿って折り曲げる部材であり、前記対象端部は前記冊子の前記第二方向の端部でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、一つの挟持手段によって、冊子の搬送と表紙の折り曲げとの両方を実行できる。
(11-6) The sandwiching means sandwiches the cover attached to the adhesive portion along the target end surface by sandwiching the target end (front end) of the booklet placed on the first surface. And the target end portion may be an end portion in the second direction of the booklet.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can execute both the conveyance of the booklet and the folding of the cover by one clamping means.
(11-7)前記第一載置手段及び前記第二載置手段は、前記第一方向及び前記第三方向の位置が固定されており、前記第一駆動手段は、前記挟持手段を前記第一方向に移動させ、前記第二駆動手段は、前記挟持手段を前記第三方向に移動させてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、挟持手段を移動させるだけで、冊子を第一面から第二面に搬送できる。
(11-7) The first mounting means and the second mounting means are fixed in positions in the first direction and the third direction, and the first driving means is configured to hold the clamping means in the first direction. The second driving means may be moved in one direction, and the clamping means may be moved in the third direction.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can convey the booklet from the first surface to the second surface only by moving the holding means.
(11-8)前記第一載置手段及び前記第二載置手段は、同一面である前記第一面及び前記第二面を有する一つの部材でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、第一載置手段及び第二載置手段を別々に設ける必要がないため、装置構造を簡素化できる。
(11-8) The first mounting means and the second mounting means may be one member having the first surface and the second surface which are the same surface.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus does not need to separately provide the first placing means and the second placing means, and therefore the apparatus structure can be simplified.
(11-9)前記第二載置手段は、前記第二駆動手段によって移動される前記冊子が前記第二面に接触する際に、前記第二方向の反対方向(後方向)に移動する可動体でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、第二面に載置される冊子の端部が折れ曲がることを抑制できる。
(11-9) The second placing means is movable so as to move in a direction opposite to the second direction (backward direction) when the booklet moved by the second driving means contacts the second surface. It may be the body.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress bending of the end portion of the booklet placed on the second surface.
(11-10)前記第一駆動手段は、前記第一載置手段及び前記挟持手段を第一速さで相対的に移動させ、前記第二駆動手段は、前記第二載置手段及び前記挟持手段を、前記第一速さよりも遅い第二速さで相対的に移動させてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、冊子を第一面から第二面に搬送する所要時間を抑制し、且つ第二面に載置される冊子が破損することを抑制できる。
(11-10) The first driving means relatively moves the first mounting means and the clamping means at a first speed, and the second driving means is configured to move the second mounting means and the clamping means. The means may be moved relatively at a second speed that is slower than the first speed.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the time required for transporting the booklet from the first surface to the second surface, and can prevent the booklet placed on the second surface from being damaged.
(11-11)前記第二駆動手段は、前記第一駆動手段によって前記冊子が前記退避位置に移動されてから所定時間が経過した後、前記第二載置手段及び前記挟持手段を相対的に移動させてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、退避位置に移動された冊子に生じた振動が治まってから、冊子を第二面に載置できる。
(11-11) The second driving means relatively moves the second placing means and the clamping means after a predetermined time has elapsed since the booklet was moved to the retracted position by the first driving means. It may be moved.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can place the booklet on the second surface after the vibration generated in the booklet moved to the retracted position has subsided.
(11-12)前記第一載置手段は、前記第一駆動手段によって前記冊子が前記退避位置に移動される間に、前記第二方向の反対方向に移動する可動体でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、挟持手段によって挟持された冊子を、第一面からスムーズに離隔できる。
(11-12) The first placement unit may be a movable body that moves in a direction opposite to the second direction while the booklet is moved to the retracted position by the first driving unit.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can smoothly separate the booklet held by the holding means from the first surface.
(12)第十二の開示の作用効果
 従来、用紙束を裁断する裁断装置が知られている。特開2001-252890号公報に記載の裁断装置では、チャック機構が製本物を挟持して、天用裁断ユニットと地用裁断ユニットの間を通って、製本物を天用裁断ユニット及び地用裁断ユニットに搬送する。天用裁断ユニット及び地用裁断ユニットは、製本物の天地両側を同時に裁断する。更にチャック機構は、製本物を小口用裁断ユニットに搬送する。小口用裁断ユニットは製本物の小口側を裁断する。
(12) Effects of the Twelfth Disclosure Conventionally, a cutting device for cutting a sheet bundle is known. In the cutting apparatus described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-252890, the chuck mechanism sandwiches the bookbinding product and passes between the top cutting unit and the ground cutting unit, and then the bookbinding product is separated from the top cutting unit and the ground cutting unit. Transport to unit. The top and bottom cutting unit and the ground cutting unit cut both sides of the bound book at the same time. Further, the chuck mechanism conveys the bookbinding product to the fore edge cutting unit. The small edge cutting unit cuts the small edge side of the bound book.
 上記の従来技術では、天用裁断ユニットと地用裁断ユニットとの間の中心位置が、製本物の天地方向の中心位置と一致しない場合、製本物の裁断位置が適正な位置から天地方向にずれている。この場合、裁断後の製本物では、用紙に印刷された画像が予定位置から上側又は下側にずれる可能性があった。このような課題を鑑みて、第十二の開示は以下の構成を有する。 In the above prior art, if the center position between the heaven cutting unit and the earth cutting unit does not match the center position of the bookbinding product in the vertical direction, the binding position of the bookbinding product is shifted from the proper position in the vertical direction. ing. In this case, in the bound product after cutting, there is a possibility that the image printed on the paper is shifted upward or downward from the planned position. In view of such a problem, the twelfth disclosure has the following configuration.
(12-1)略水平な第一方向(前後方向)に延び、且つ用紙束(冊子10)を略鉛直方向(上下方向)に裁断するための刃であり、前記用紙束は略鉛直方向に積み重ねられた複数の用紙(用紙8A)である第一カッタ(刃先525A)と、
 前記第一カッタと平行に延び且つ前記第一カッタに第二方向(左方向)から対向する位置に設けられ、前記用紙束を略鉛直方向に裁断するための刃であり、前記第二方向は前記第一方向と直交する方向である第二カッタ(刃先515A)と、
 略鉛直方向且つ前記第一方向に延びる面である第一整合面(整合板528の左面)を有し、前記第一整合面を第一整合位置(整合実行位置)と第一待機位置(初期位置)との間で移動可能であり、前記第一整合位置は用紙サイズの略半分の距離分、基準中心位置(カッタ間中心位置Z)から第三方向(右方向)に離れた位置であり、前記第三方向は前記第二方向の反対方向であり、前記用紙サイズは前記用紙の前記第二方向又は前記第三方向の長さであり、前記基準中心位置は前記第一カッタと前記第二カッタとの間の中心位置であり、前記第一待機位置は前記第一整合位置から前記第三方向に離れた位置である第一整合手段(整合部527)と
 を備えた裁断装置(裁断機構500)。
(12-1) A blade that extends in a substantially horizontal first direction (front-rear direction) and cuts the sheet bundle (booklet 10) in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction). A first cutter (blade edge 525A) which is a plurality of stacked sheets (sheet 8A);
A blade extending in parallel to the first cutter and facing the first cutter from a second direction (left direction), for cutting the sheet bundle in a substantially vertical direction, wherein the second direction is A second cutter (cutting edge 515A) which is a direction orthogonal to the first direction;
The first alignment surface (the left surface of the alignment plate 528), which is a surface extending in the substantially vertical direction and the first direction, has a first alignment position (alignment execution position) and a first standby position (initial stage). The first alignment position is a position separated in the third direction (right direction) from the reference center position (inter-cutter center position Z) by a distance approximately half the paper size. The third direction is a direction opposite to the second direction, the paper size is the length of the paper in the second direction or the third direction, and the reference center position is the first cutter and the first direction. A cutting device (cutting device) comprising a first alignment means (alignment portion 527) that is a central position between two cutters, and wherein the first standby position is a position away from the first alignment position in the third direction. Mechanism 500).
 本開示によれば、第一カッタと第二カッタとの間に用紙束が配置された状態で、第一整合面が第一待機位置から第一整合位置に移動すると、第一整合面に接触した用紙束の端面は第一整合位置に位置決めされる。用紙束の第二方向又は第三方向の中心位置が、第一カッタと第二カッタとの間の中心位置と一致する。従って裁断装置は、用紙束を適正な位置で裁断できる。 According to the present disclosure, when the first alignment surface is moved from the first standby position to the first alignment position in a state where the sheet bundle is disposed between the first cutter and the second cutter, the first alignment surface is contacted. The end surface of the sheet bundle is positioned at the first alignment position. The center position in the second direction or the third direction of the sheet bundle coincides with the center position between the first cutter and the second cutter. Therefore, the cutting device can cut the sheet bundle at an appropriate position.
(12-2)前記裁断装置は、前記第一整合面と平行に延びる面である第二整合面(整合板518の右面)を有し、前記第二整合面を第二整合位置(整合準備位置)と第二待機位置(初期位置)との間で移動可能であり、前記第二整合位置は前記用紙サイズの半分未満の距離分、前記基準中心位置から前記第二方向に離れた位置であり、前記第二待機位置は前記第二整合位置から前記第二方向に離れた位置である第二整合手段(整合部517)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、第一カッタと第二カッタとの間に用紙束が配置された状態で、第二整合面が第二待機位置から第二整合位置に移動すると、第二整合面に接触した用紙束の端面は第二整合位置に位置決めされる。従って裁断装置は、用紙束の第二方向又は第三方向の中心位置を、第一カッタと第二カッタとの間の中心位置よりも第三方向側に配置できる。
(12-2) The cutting device has a second alignment surface (a right surface of the alignment plate 518) which is a surface extending in parallel with the first alignment surface, and the second alignment surface is set to a second alignment position (alignment preparation). Position) and a second standby position (initial position), and the second alignment position is a position separated from the reference center position in the second direction by a distance less than half of the paper size. The second standby position may include second alignment means (alignment portion 517) that is a position away from the second alignment position in the second direction.
In this case, when the second aligning surface is moved from the second standby position to the second aligning position in a state where the sheet bundle is disposed between the first cutter and the second cutter, the sheet bundle contacting the second aligning surface. Is positioned at the second alignment position. Therefore, the cutting device can arrange the center position of the sheet bundle in the second direction or the third direction on the third direction side with respect to the center position between the first cutter and the second cutter.
(12-3)前記第二整合手段は、前記第二整合面を前記第二待機位置から前記第二整合位置まで前記第三方向に移動させ(S101)、更に前記第二整合面を前記第二整合位置から前記第二待機位置まで前記第二方向に移動させ(S103)、前記第一整合手段は、少なくとも前記第二整合面が前記第二整合位置から前記第二待機位置に向けて移動開始した後、前記第一整合面を前記第一待機位置から前記第一整合位置まで前記第二方向に移動させ(S105)、更に前記第一整合面を前記第一整合位置から前記第一待機位置まで前記第三方向に移動させてもよい(S107)。
 この場合、第一整合面が第一待機位置から第一整合位置に移動する前に、第二整合面が第二待機位置から第二整合位置に移動する。従って裁断装置は、第一整合面を用紙束の端面に対して確実に接触できる。
(12-3) The second alignment means moves the second alignment surface in the third direction from the second standby position to the second alignment position (S101), and further moves the second alignment surface to the second alignment surface. The second alignment position is moved from the second alignment position to the second standby position in the second direction (S103), and the first alignment means moves at least the second alignment surface from the second alignment position toward the second standby position. After the start, the first alignment surface is moved in the second direction from the first standby position to the first alignment position (S105), and the first alignment surface is moved from the first alignment position to the first standby position. You may move to the said 3rd direction to a position (S107).
In this case, before the first alignment surface moves from the first standby position to the first alignment position, the second alignment surface moves from the second standby position to the second alignment position. Therefore, the cutting device can reliably contact the first alignment surface with the end surface of the sheet bundle.
(12-4)前記第一待機位置と前記第二待機位置との前記第二方向又は前記第三方向の距離は、前記用紙サイズよりも大きくてもよい。
 この場合、裁断装置は、第一整合面と第二整合面との間に、様々な用紙サイズの用紙束を配置できる。
(12-4) The distance in the second direction or the third direction between the first standby position and the second standby position may be larger than the paper size.
In this case, the cutting device can arrange paper bundles of various paper sizes between the first alignment surface and the second alignment surface.
(12-5)前記第二整合面は、前記第一整合面に前記第二方向から対向する位置に設けられてもよい。
 この場合、裁断装置は、用紙束の姿勢が変化することを抑止しつつ、第一整合面及び第二整合面によって用紙束の位置を調整できる。
(12-5) The second alignment surface may be provided at a position facing the first alignment surface from the second direction.
In this case, the cutting device can adjust the position of the sheet bundle by the first alignment surface and the second alignment surface while preventing the posture of the sheet bundle from changing.
(12-6)前記裁断装置と、前記第一カッタによって前記用紙束が裁断される前に、前記第一カッタ及び前記用紙束の少なくとも一つを前記第二方向又は前記第三方向に移動させて、切断サイズに合わせて前記第一カッタ及び前記用紙束を相対的に位置決めする第一制御と、前記第二カッタによって前記用紙束が裁断される前に、前記第二カッタ及び前記用紙束の少なくとも一つを前記第二方向又は前記第三方向に移動させて、前記切断サイズに合わせて前記第二カッタ及び前記用紙束を相対的に位置決めする第二制御との少なくとも一つを実行し、前記切断サイズは予め定められた裁断後の前記用紙束の前記第二方向又は前記第三方向の長さである移動制御手段(図55及び図56に示す動作を実行する制御部900)とを備えた製本装置(製本装置1)でもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、第一カッタ及び用紙束の少なくとも一つを移動させる制御で、切断サイズに合わせて第一カッタ及び用紙束を相対的に位置決めできる。製本装置は、第二カッタ及び用紙束の少なくとも一つを移動させる制御で、切断サイズに合わせて第二カッタ及び用紙束を相対的に位置決めできる。
(12-6) Before the paper bundle is cut by the cutting device and the first cutter, at least one of the first cutter and the paper bundle is moved in the second direction or the third direction. First control for relatively positioning the first cutter and the sheet bundle according to a cutting size, and before the sheet bundle is cut by the second cutter, the second cutter and the sheet bundle Executing at least one of second control for relatively positioning the second cutter and the sheet bundle according to the cutting size by moving at least one in the second direction or the third direction; The cutting size is a movement control means (a control unit 900 that executes the operation shown in FIGS. 55 and 56) that is a predetermined length of the sheet bundle after cutting in the second direction or the third direction. Bookbinding equipped (Bookbinding apparatus 1) may be used.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can relatively position the first cutter and the sheet bundle according to the cutting size by controlling to move at least one of the first cutter and the sheet bundle. The bookbinding apparatus can relatively position the second cutter and the sheet bundle in accordance with the cutting size by controlling to move at least one of the second cutter and the sheet bundle.
(12-7)前記製本装置は、前記第一カッタを前記第二方向又は前記第三方向に移動させる第一駆動手段(右裁断部520及び駆動部540)を備え、前記移動制御手段は、前記第一制御として、前記第一駆動手段に前記第一カッタを移動させることで、前記用紙束に対して前記第一カッタを位置決めしてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、用紙束の位置を変化させることなく、第一カッタを位置決めできる。
(12-7) The bookbinding apparatus includes first drive means (right cutting part 520 and drive part 540) for moving the first cutter in the second direction or the third direction, and the movement control means includes: As the first control, the first cutter may be positioned with respect to the sheet bundle by moving the first cutter to the first driving unit.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can position the first cutter without changing the position of the sheet bundle.
(12-8)前記製本装置は、前記第二カッタを前記第二方向又は前記第三方向に移動させる第二駆動手段(左裁断部510及び駆動部540)を備え、前記移動制御手段は、前記第二制御として、前記第二駆動手段に前記第二カッタを移動させることで、前記用紙束に対して前記第二カッタを位置決めしてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、用紙束の位置を変化させることなく、第二カッタを位置決めできる。
(12-8) The bookbinding apparatus includes a second drive unit (left cutting unit 510 and drive unit 540) that moves the second cutter in the second direction or the third direction, and the movement control unit includes: As the second control, the second cutter may be positioned with respect to the sheet bundle by moving the second cutter to the second driving unit.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can position the second cutter without changing the position of the sheet bundle.
(12-9)前記製本装置は、前記第一カッタ及び前記第二カッタを互いに近接する方向に同時に移動させ、且つ前記第一カッタ及び前記第二カッタを互いに離隔する方向に同時に移動させるカッタ駆動手段(左裁断部510、右裁断部520及び駆動部540)を備え、前記移動制御手段は、前記第一制御及び前記第二制御として、前記カッタ駆動手段に前記第一カッタ及び前記第二カッタを同時に移動させることで、前記用紙束に対して前記第一カッタ及び前記第二カッタを同時に位置決めしてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、用紙束の位置を変化させることなく、第一カッタ及び第二カッタを同時に位置決めできる。
(12-9) The bookbinding apparatus moves the first cutter and the second cutter simultaneously in directions close to each other and simultaneously moves the first cutter and the second cutter in directions away from each other. Means (left cutting unit 510, right cutting unit 520, and drive unit 540), and the movement control unit includes the first cutter and the second cutter as the first control and the second control. The first cutter and the second cutter may be simultaneously positioned with respect to the sheet bundle by moving the two simultaneously.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can simultaneously position the first cutter and the second cutter without changing the position of the sheet bundle.
(12-10)前記用紙束は、前記用紙束の背側が綴じられた冊子であり、前記第一整合面は、前記冊子の地側の端面(右端面)と対向する位置に設けられてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、冊子の地側の端面を基準として、第一カッタ及び第二カッタによる裁断位置を位置決めできるため、製本後の冊子の品質を向上できる。
(12-10) The sheet bundle is a booklet in which the back side of the sheet bundle is bound, and the first alignment surface may be provided at a position facing an end surface (right end surface) on the ground side of the booklet. Good.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can position the cutting positions by the first cutter and the second cutter with reference to the end face of the booklet on the ground side, so that the quality of the booklet after bookbinding can be improved.
(13)第十三の開示の作用効果
 従来、表紙が貼付けられた用紙束の裁断位置の精度を向上させるための技術が知られている。例えば特開2005-254623に開示の装置では、表紙の搬送経路に設けたローラ対によって、センサが表紙を検出する位置まで、表紙が用紙幅方向に移動される。表紙は、用紙束に対して用紙幅方向に一定量ずれた位置まで移動する。表紙が用紙束の端面に貼付けられると、用紙束の一端が表紙の一端からはみ出る。この用紙束の一端が、表紙が貼付けられた用紙束の裁断する基準位置となる。
(13) Advantageous Effects of the 13th Disclosure Conventionally, a technique for improving the accuracy of the cutting position of a sheet bundle to which a cover is attached is known. For example, in the apparatus disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-254623, a cover is moved in the paper width direction to a position where the sensor detects the cover by a roller pair provided in the cover transport path. The cover sheet moves to a position shifted by a certain amount in the sheet width direction with respect to the sheet bundle. When the cover sheet is attached to the end face of the sheet bundle, one end of the sheet bundle protrudes from one end of the cover sheet. One end of the sheet bundle serves as a reference position for cutting the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached.
 上記の従来技術では、表紙を用紙束に対して用紙幅方向にずらすためにローラ対及びセンサを設けているため、装置構造が複雑となるおそれがあった。このような課題を鑑みて、第十三の開示は以下の構成を有する。 In the prior art described above, since the roller pair and the sensor are provided to shift the cover sheet in the paper width direction with respect to the sheet bundle, the structure of the apparatus may be complicated. In view of such a problem, the thirteenth disclosure has the following configuration.
(13-1)供給された用紙(用紙8A)を載置可能な略水平面であり、載置された複数の前記用紙が略鉛直方向(上下方向)に重ねられる面である載置面(載置面110A)を有する用紙集積手段(テーブル110)と、
 所定の基準位置(裁断基準位置P1)に沿って略鉛直方向に延び且つ用紙束(用紙束8)の第一端面(右端面)と対向する位置に設けられ、前記第一端面に接触することで前記第一端面を前記基準位置に位置決めし且つ前記第一端面を略鉛直方向に沿って揃えることが可能であり、前記用紙束は前記載置面に載置された前記複数の用紙であり、前記第一端面は前記用紙束の略水平な第一方向(右方向)の端面である第一対向手段(右揃え板140)と、
 前記用紙束を被覆可能な表紙(表紙9)を、前記表紙が前記用紙束の第二端面(前端面)と対向する位置に搬送可能であり、前記第二端面は前記用紙束の第二方向(前方向)の端面であり、前記第二方向は前記第一方向と直交する略水平な方向である表紙搬送手段(表紙保持機構400)と、
 前記表紙搬送手段によって搬送される前記表紙の第一端部(右端部)と対向する位置、且つ前記基準位置から第三方向(左方向)にずれた位置に設けられ、前記第一端部と接触することで前記表紙の前記第一方向への移動を規制可能であり、前記第一端部は前記表紙の前記第一方向の端部であり、前記第三方向は前記第一方向の反対方向である第二対向手段(右側の規制ピン463,464)と、
 前記表紙搬送手段によって搬送された前記表紙を、前記第二端面に取付け可能な表紙取付手段(紙揃え機構100及び糊塗布機構300)と
 を備えた製本装置(製本装置1)。
(13-1) A placing surface (mounting) that is a substantially horizontal plane on which the supplied sheet (sheet 8A) can be placed and on which the plurality of placed sheets are stacked in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction). A paper stacking means (table 110) having a placement surface 110A);
It extends in a substantially vertical direction along a predetermined reference position (cutting reference position P1), is provided at a position facing the first end face (right end face) of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8), and contacts the first end face. The first end surface can be positioned at the reference position and the first end surface can be aligned along a substantially vertical direction, and the sheet bundle is the plurality of sheets placed on the placing surface. The first end surface is a first facing means (right alignment plate 140) that is an end surface of the sheet bundle in a substantially horizontal first direction (right direction);
A cover sheet (cover sheet 9) that can cover the sheet bundle can be transported to a position where the cover sheet faces a second end face (front end face) of the sheet bundle, and the second end face is in a second direction of the sheet bundle. (Front direction) end face, and the second direction is a substantially horizontal direction orthogonal to the first direction, a cover sheet conveying means (cover sheet holding mechanism 400),
Provided at a position facing the first end (right end) of the cover conveyed by the cover conveying means and at a position shifted in the third direction (left direction) from the reference position; It is possible to regulate movement of the cover in the first direction by contact, the first end is an end of the cover in the first direction, and the third direction is opposite to the first direction. A second opposing means (right-side regulating pins 463, 464) which is a direction;
A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100 and glue application mechanism 300) capable of attaching the cover conveyed by the cover conveyance means to the second end surface.
 本開示によれば、載置面にある用紙束の第一端面は、第一対向手段によって基準位置に位置決めされ且つ略鉛直方向に沿って揃えられる。表紙搬送手段によって搬送される表紙は、基準位置から第三方向にずれた位置に設けられた第二対向手段によって、第一方向への移動が規制される。表紙の第一端部が用紙束の第一端面から第三方向にずれた状態で、表紙が用紙束に貼付けられる。従って、製本装置は簡易な構造で、表紙を用紙束に対して第三方向(つまり、用紙幅方向)にずらすことができる。 According to the present disclosure, the first end surface of the sheet bundle on the placement surface is positioned at the reference position by the first facing means and is aligned along the substantially vertical direction. The movement of the cover sheet conveyed by the cover sheet conveying means in the first direction is restricted by the second facing means provided at a position shifted in the third direction from the reference position. The cover sheet is attached to the sheet bundle in a state where the first end portion of the cover sheet is displaced in the third direction from the first end surface of the sheet bundle. Accordingly, the bookbinding apparatus has a simple structure and can shift the cover sheet in the third direction (that is, the sheet width direction) with respect to the sheet bundle.
(13-2)前記製本装置は、前記表紙搬送手段によって搬送される前記表紙の第二端部(左端部)と対向する位置に設けられ、前記第二端部と接触することで前記表紙の前記第三方向への移動を規制可能であり、前記第二端部は前記表紙の前記第三方向の端部である第三対向手段(左側の規制ピン463,464)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、表紙搬送手段によって搬送される表紙が過剰に第三方向にずれることを抑制できる。
(13-2) The bookbinding apparatus is provided at a position facing a second end (left end) of the cover conveyed by the cover conveying means, and is brought into contact with the second end so that the cover The movement in the third direction can be restricted, and the second end portion may include third facing means (left restriction pins 463 and 464) which are the end portions in the third direction of the cover.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can suppress the cover sheet transported by the cover sheet transport unit from being excessively displaced in the third direction.
(13-3)前記製本装置は、前記表紙取付手段によって前記表紙が取付けられた前記用紙束である冊子(冊子10)を、前記第三方向と直交する略水平な方向(前後方向)に亘って、前記基準位置から前記第三方向に所定距離離れた位置で略鉛直方向に裁断する裁断手段(左裁断部510及び右裁断部520)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、冊子に対する表紙の取付け位置に影響を受けることなく、冊子を正確に裁断できる。
(13-3) In the bookbinding apparatus, the booklet (booklet 10), which is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached by the cover attachment means, is arranged in a substantially horizontal direction (front-rear direction) orthogonal to the third direction. In addition, a cutting unit (a left cutting unit 510 and a right cutting unit 520) for cutting in a substantially vertical direction at a position away from the reference position by a predetermined distance in the third direction may be provided.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately cut the booklet without being affected by the position of the cover attached to the booklet.
(13-4)前記製本装置は、前記裁断手段及び前記冊子の少なくとも一つを、前記第一方向及び前記第三方向の少なくとも一つに移動させる移動制御手段(駆動部540)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、裁断手段及び冊子の少なくとも一つを移動させる制御で、切断サイズに合わせて裁断手段及び冊子を相対的に位置決めできる。
(13-4) The bookbinding apparatus further includes movement control means (drive unit 540) that moves at least one of the cutting means and the booklet in at least one of the first direction and the third direction. Good.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can relatively position the cutting means and the booklet in accordance with the cutting size by controlling to move at least one of the cutting means and the booklet.
(13-5)前記裁断手段は、前記基準位置から前記第三方向に第一距離離れた位置で前記冊子を裁断可能である第一裁断手段(右裁断部520)と、前記基準位置から前記第三方向に第二距離離れた位置で前記冊子を裁断可能であり、前記第二距離は前記第一距離よりも大きい第二裁断手段(左裁断部510)とを含んでもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、二つの裁断手段によって、冊子を基準位置からの距離が異なる二か所で裁断できる。
(13-5) The cutting unit includes a first cutting unit (right cutting unit 520) capable of cutting the booklet at a position that is a first distance away from the reference position in the third direction; The booklet may be cut at a position separated by a second distance in the third direction, and the second distance may include second cutting means (left cutting unit 510) that is larger than the first distance.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can cut the booklet at two different distances from the reference position by the two cutting means.
(13-6)前記製本装置は、前記表紙搬送手段によって搬送される前記表紙を前記第一方向に付勢することで、前記第一端部を前記第二対向手段に近接させる付勢部材(付勢部461)を備えてもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、表紙の第一端部を第二対向手段で確実に位置決めできる。
(13-6) The bookbinding apparatus urges the cover sheet conveyed by the cover sheet conveying unit in the first direction so that the urging member brings the first end portion close to the second opposing unit ( An urging portion 461) may be provided.
In this case, the bookbinding apparatus can reliably position the first end portion of the cover by the second facing means.
(14)第十四の開示の作用効果
 従来、用紙束を回転させることなく、用紙束の三辺を裁断するための技術が知られている。例えば、先述の特開2001-252890に開示の装置では、チャック機構は常に製本物の背側に配置される。製本物の背側に表紙を貼付ける場合、製本物をチャック機構に供給する前に、製本物の背側に表紙を貼付ける必要があった。この場合、表紙が貼付けられた製本物をチャック機構まで搬送する過程で製本物の姿勢が乱れてしまい、製本物を正確な位置で裁断できないおそれがあった。このような課題を鑑みて、第十四の開示は以下の構成を有する。
(14) Effect of 14th Disclosure Conventionally, a technique for cutting three sides of a sheet bundle without rotating the sheet bundle is known. For example, in the apparatus disclosed in the aforementioned Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-252890, the chuck mechanism is always arranged on the back side of the bookbinding product. When attaching a cover to the back side of the bookbinding product, it was necessary to attach the cover to the back side of the bookbinding product before supplying the bookbinding product to the chuck mechanism. In this case, the posture of the bookbinding product is disturbed in the process of transporting the bookbinding product with the cover attached to the chuck mechanism, and the bookbinding product may not be cut at an accurate position. In view of such a problem, the fourteenth disclosure has the following configuration.
(14-1)供給された用紙(用紙8A)を載置可能な略水平面であり、載置された複数の前記用紙が略鉛直方向(上下方向)に重ねられる面である載置面(載置面110A)を有する用紙集積手段(テーブル110)と、
 用紙束(用紙束8)の対象端面(前端面)に表紙(表紙9)を取付け可能であり、前記用紙束は前記載置面に積み重ねられている複数の前記用紙であり、前記対象端面は前記用紙束の略水平な第一方向(前方向)の端面である表紙取付手段(紙揃え機構100、糊塗布機構300、及び表紙保持機構400)と、
 冊子(冊子10)を第二方向側(後側)から挟持可能であり、前記冊子は前記表紙が取付けられた前記用紙束であり、前記第二方向は前記第一方向の反対方向である第一挟持手段(クランプ部660A)と、
 前記表紙取付手段によって前記用紙束に前記表紙が取付けられた場合、前記第一挟持手段に前記冊子を挟持させ、且つ前記第一挟持手段を引出位置に搬送することが可能であり、前記引出位置は前記第一挟持手段によって挟持された前記冊子が前記載置面から引き出される位置である第一駆動手段(冊子搬送機構600及び制御部900)と、
 前記冊子を前記第一方向側から挟持可能な第二挟持手段(クランプ部660B)と、
 前記引出位置に搬送された前記冊子を前記第二挟持手段に挟持させ、且つ前記第二挟持手段を第一裁断位置及び第二裁断位置に搬送することが可能であり、前記第一裁断位置は前記引出位置よりも前記第二方向にある位置であり、前記第二裁断位置は前記第一裁断位置よりも前記第二方向にある位置である第二駆動手段(冊子搬送機構600及び制御部900)と、
 前記第二挟持手段が前記第一裁断位置に搬送された場合に、前記第二挟持手段に挟持された前記冊子を略鉛直方向に裁断して、前記冊子の第三方向(右方向)の部分と、前記冊子の第四方向の部分(左方向)との少なくとも一つを切り離し可能であり、前記第三方向は前記第一方向又は前記第二方向と直交する略水平な方向であり、前記第四方向は前記第三方向の反対方向である第一裁断手段(左裁断部510及び右裁断部520)と、
 前記第二挟持手段が前記第二裁断位置に搬送された場合に、前記第二挟持手段に挟持された前記冊子を略鉛直方向に裁断して、前記冊子の前記第二方向の部分を切り離し可能な第二裁断手段(後裁断部530)と
 を備えた製本装置(製本装置1)。
(14-1) A mounting surface (mounting) which is a substantially horizontal plane on which the supplied sheet (sheet 8A) can be placed and on which the plurality of placed sheets are stacked in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction). A paper stacking means (table 110) having a placement surface 110A);
A cover sheet (cover sheet 9) can be attached to the target end face (front end face) of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8), and the sheet bundle is a plurality of sheets stacked on the mounting surface, and the target end face is A cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100, glue application mechanism 300, and cover holding mechanism 400) which is an end surface of the sheet bundle in a substantially horizontal first direction (front direction);
A booklet (booklet 10) can be sandwiched from the second direction side (rear side), the booklet is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached, and the second direction is a direction opposite to the first direction. One clamping means (clamp portion 660A),
When the cover is attached to the sheet bundle by the cover attachment means, the booklet can be sandwiched by the first sandwiching means, and the first sandwiching means can be conveyed to a withdrawal position, and the withdrawal position Is a first drive means (booklet transport mechanism 600 and control unit 900) that is a position where the booklet held by the first holding means is pulled out from the placement surface,
Second clamping means (clamp portion 660B) capable of clamping the booklet from the first direction side;
The booklet transported to the drawing position can be sandwiched by the second sandwiching means, and the second sandwiching means can be transported to a first cutting position and a second cutting position, and the first cutting position is The second driving means (the booklet transport mechanism 600 and the control unit 900) is located in the second direction relative to the pull-out position, and the second cutting position is located in the second direction relative to the first cutting position. )When,
When the second holding means is transported to the first cutting position, the booklet held by the second holding means is cut in a substantially vertical direction, and the third direction (right direction) portion of the booklet And at least one of the fourth direction part (left direction) of the booklet, the third direction is a substantially horizontal direction orthogonal to the first direction or the second direction, The fourth direction is the first cutting means (the left cutting part 510 and the right cutting part 520) which is the opposite direction of the third direction;
When the second clamping means is transported to the second cutting position, the booklet clamped by the second clamping means can be cut in a substantially vertical direction to separate the second direction portion of the booklet. Bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising: a second cutting means (post-cutting unit 530).
 本開示によれば、載置面にある用紙束に表紙が取付けられて、冊子が作成される。作成された冊子は、第一駆動手段によって第二方向側から挟持され、載置面から引き出される。引き出された冊子は、第二駆動手段によって第一方向側から挟持され、第一裁断位置及び第二裁断位置に搬送される。第一裁断位置に搬送された冊子は、冊子の第三方向の部分と、冊子の第四方向の部分との少なくとも一つが切り離される。第二裁断位置に搬送された冊子は、冊子の第二方向の部分が切り離される。従って製本装置は、表紙が用紙束に取付けられた後に、冊子の姿勢が変化することを抑制しつつ、冊子を搬送及び裁断できる。 According to the present disclosure, a cover is attached to a sheet bundle on the placement surface, and a booklet is created. The created booklet is sandwiched from the second direction side by the first driving means and pulled out from the placement surface. The pulled out booklet is sandwiched from the first direction side by the second driving means, and conveyed to the first cutting position and the second cutting position. At least one of the third direction portion of the booklet and the fourth direction portion of the booklet is separated from the booklet conveyed to the first cutting position. The booklet conveyed to the second cutting position is cut off in the second direction of the booklet. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can convey and cut the booklet while suppressing the posture of the booklet from changing after the cover is attached to the sheet bundle.
(14-2)前記製本装置は、前記第二挟持手段に設けられた略鉛直方向に延びる部材であり、前記第二挟持手段によって挟持される前記冊子の前記第一方向の端部(前端部)に接触する基準板(基準板643)を備え、前記第二駆動手段は、前記基準板の位置に基づいて、前記第二挟持手段を前記第一裁断位置及び前記第二裁断位置に位置決めしてもよい。
 この場合、第二挟持手段に挟持された冊子の第一方向の端部が、基準板によって位置決めされる。従って製本装置は、基準板の位置に基づいて第二挟持手段の位置制御を実行することで、冊子を第一、第二裁断位置へ正確に位置決めできる。
(14-2) The bookbinding apparatus is a member provided in the second clamping means and extending in a substantially vertical direction, and an end portion (front end portion) of the booklet held by the second clamping means in the first direction. ), And the second driving means positions the second clamping means at the first cutting position and the second cutting position based on the position of the reference plate. May be.
In this case, the end portion in the first direction of the booklet held by the second holding means is positioned by the reference plate. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can accurately position the booklet to the first and second cutting positions by executing the position control of the second clamping means based on the position of the reference plate.
(14-3)前記製本装置は、前記第一挟持手段と、前記第一挟持手段の前記第一方向側に配置した前記第二挟持手段とを一体に有して、前記第一方向及び前記第二方向に移動可能なハンド部(ハンド部640)を備え、前記第一駆動手段及び前記第二駆動手段は、前記ハンド部を移動させることで、前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段を搬送してもよい。
 この場合、製本装置は、第一挟持手段及び第二挟持手段に別々に設ける必要がないため、装置構造が複雑になることを抑制できる。
(14-3) The bookbinding apparatus integrally includes the first clamping means and the second clamping means arranged on the first direction side of the first clamping means, and the first direction and the A hand part (hand part 640) movable in the second direction is provided, and the first driving means and the second driving means move the hand part to move the first clamping means and the second clamping means. May be conveyed.
In this case, since it is not necessary to provide the bookbinding apparatus separately for the first clamping means and the second clamping means, it is possible to prevent the apparatus structure from becoming complicated.
(14-4)供給された用紙(用紙8A)を載置可能な略水平面であり、載置された複数の前記用紙が略鉛直方向(上下方向)に重ねられる面である載置面(載置面110A)を有する用紙集積手段(テーブル110)と、
 用紙束(用紙束8)の対象端面(前端面)に表紙(表紙9)を取付け可能であり、前記用紙束は前記載置面に積み重ねられている複数の前記用紙であり、前記対象端面は前記用紙束の略水平な第一方向(前方向)の端面である表紙取付手段(紙揃え機構100、糊塗布機構300、及び表紙保持機構400)と、
 冊子(冊子10)を第二方向側(後側)から挟持可能であり、前記冊子は前記表紙が取付けられた前記用紙束であり、前記第二方向は前記第一方向の反対方向である挟持手段(クランプ部660A)と、
 前記表紙取付手段によって前記用紙束に前記表紙が取付けられた場合、前記挟持手段に前記冊子を挟持させ、且つ前記挟持手段を裁断位置に搬送することが可能であり、前記裁断位置は前記載置面よりも前記第二方向にある位置である駆動手段(冊子搬送機構600及び制御部900)と、
 前記裁断位置に搬送された前記挟持手段に挟持された前記冊子を略鉛直方向に裁断して、前記冊子の第三方向(右方向)の部分と、前記冊子の第四方向の部分(左方向)との少なくとも一つを切り離し可能であり、前記第三方向は前記第一方向又は前記第二方向と直交する略水平な方向であり、前記第四方向は前記第三方向の反対方向である裁断手段(左裁断部510及び右裁断部520)と
 を備えた製本装置(製本装置1)。
(14-4) A placement surface (mounting) that is a substantially horizontal plane on which the supplied sheet (sheet 8A) can be placed and on which the plurality of placed sheets are stacked in a substantially vertical direction (vertical direction). A paper stacking means (table 110) having a placement surface 110A);
A cover sheet (cover sheet 9) can be attached to the target end face (front end face) of the sheet bundle (sheet bundle 8), and the sheet bundle is a plurality of sheets stacked on the mounting surface, and the target end face is A cover attachment means (paper alignment mechanism 100, glue application mechanism 300, and cover holding mechanism 400) which is an end surface of the sheet bundle in a substantially horizontal first direction (front direction);
A booklet (booklet 10) can be sandwiched from the second direction side (rear side), the booklet is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached, and the second direction is a direction opposite to the first direction. Means (clamp portion 660A);
When the cover is attached to the sheet bundle by the cover attachment means, the booklet can be held by the holding means and the holding means can be transported to a cutting position. Drive means (booklet transport mechanism 600 and control unit 900) that are in the second direction from the surface;
The booklet held by the holding means conveyed to the cutting position is cut in a substantially vertical direction, and a third direction portion (right direction) of the booklet and a fourth direction portion (left direction) of the booklet. The third direction is a substantially horizontal direction orthogonal to the first direction or the second direction, and the fourth direction is a direction opposite to the third direction. A bookbinding apparatus (bookbinding apparatus 1) comprising a cutting means (left cutting unit 510 and right cutting unit 520).
 本開示によれば、載置面にある用紙束に表紙が取付けられて、冊子が作成される。作成された冊子は、駆動手段によって第二方向側から挟持され、載置面から引き出されて裁断位置に搬送される。裁断位置に搬送された冊子は、冊子の第三方向の部分と、冊子の第四方向の部分との少なくとも一つが切り離される。従って製本装置は、表紙が用紙束に取付けられた後に、冊子の姿勢が変化することを抑制しつつ、冊子を搬送及び裁断できる。 According to the present disclosure, a cover is attached to a sheet bundle on the placement surface, and a booklet is created. The created booklet is clamped from the second direction side by the driving means, pulled out from the placement surface, and conveyed to the cutting position. In the booklet conveyed to the cutting position, at least one of the third direction portion of the booklet and the fourth direction portion of the booklet is cut off. Therefore, the bookbinding apparatus can convey and cut the booklet while suppressing the posture of the booklet from changing after the cover is attached to the sheet bundle.
(15)上記開示に関する備考
 第一開示~第十四開示は、それぞれ種々の変更が可能であり、且つ各開示を適宜組み合わせてもよい。例えば、各開示で示される方向は、上記実施形態における方向に限定されず、各開示の定義に応じて変更可能である。各開示で示される移動手段、搬送手段、及び駆動手段は、モータに限定されず、例えばソレノイド、エンジン、ベルトコンベア等でもよい。各開示で示される表紙取付手段は、用紙束の端面に表紙を取付け可能であればよく、例えば紐又は針金で表紙を取付ける機構でもよい。各開示で示される塗布手段は、用紙束の端面に接着剤を塗布できればよく、例えばスプレー又は刷毛で接着剤を塗布する機構でもよい。
(15) Remarks regarding the above disclosure The first disclosure to the fourteenth disclosure can be modified in various ways, and the disclosures may be combined as appropriate. For example, the direction indicated in each disclosure is not limited to the direction in the above embodiment, and can be changed according to the definition of each disclosure. The moving means, conveying means, and driving means shown in each disclosure are not limited to motors, and may be solenoids, engines, belt conveyors, and the like. The cover attachment means shown in each disclosure may be a mechanism for attaching a cover with a string or a wire, for example, as long as the cover can be attached to the end face of the sheet bundle. The application means shown in each disclosure only needs to be able to apply an adhesive to the end face of the sheet bundle, and may be a mechanism that applies the adhesive with, for example, a spray or a brush.
1  製本装置
5  用紙供給部
51  経路板
56A  搬送ローラ
56B  搬送ローラ
82  支持部
106  接触部材
106A  支持壁部
106B  案内壁部
110  テーブル
110A  載置面
121  搬送モータ
130  左揃え板
140  右揃え板
150  前揃え板
300  糊塗布機構
319  駆動モータ
321  搬送モータ
343  ローラ設置部
347  ヒータ
349  本体部
349A  前壁部
350  糊塗布ローラ
351A  周面
351C  溝部
400  表紙保持機構
430  上クランプ
440  下クランプ
450  昇降モータ
510  左裁断部
515A  刃先
517  整合部
518  整合板
520  右裁断部
525A  刃先
527  整合部
528  整合板
540  駆動部
900  制御部
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Bookbinding apparatus 5 Paper supply part 51 Path | route plate 56A Conveyance roller 56B Conveyance roller 82 Support part 106 Contact member 106A Support wall part 106B Guide wall part 110 Table 110A Loading surface 121 Conveyance motor 130 Left alignment board 140 Right alignment board 150 Front alignment Plate 300 Glue application mechanism 319 Drive motor 321 Transport motor 343 Roller installation part 347 Heater 349 Main body part 349A Front wall part 350 Glue application roller 351A Peripheral surface 351C Groove part 400 Cover sheet holding mechanism 430 Upper clamp 440 Lower clamp 450 Lifting motor 510 Left cutting part 515A Cutting edge 517 Alignment part 518 Alignment plate 520 Right cutting part 525A Cutting edge 527 Alignment part 528 Alignment plate 540 Drive part 900 Control part

Claims (38)

  1.  第一方向及び第二方向に移動可能であり、且つ、所定位置にある状態で複数の用紙を第三方向と略平行に集積可能であり、前記第一方向及び前記第二方向は互いに反対方向であり、前記第三方向は前記第一方向及び前記第二方向と直交する方向である集積手段と、
     前記集積手段が前記所定位置にある状態で、用紙束の特定端面に接着部を形成可能であり、前記用紙束は前記集積手段によって集積された前記複数の用紙であり、前記特定端面は前記用紙束の前記第一方向側の端面である接着部形成手段と、
     表紙を保持可能であり、且つ、前記集積手段が前記所定位置よりも前記第一方向に移動した場合に、前記特定端面に形成された前記接着部を介して、前記表紙を前記用紙束に取付け可能である表紙取付手段と、
     前記集積手段が前記所定位置よりも前記第二方向に移動した場合に、前記表紙が取付けられた前記用紙束である冊子のうち、前記第二方向側の端縁、第四方向側の端縁、及び第五方向側の端縁の少なくとも一つを裁断可能であり、前記第四方向は前記第一方向、前記第二方向、及び前記第三方向と直交する方向であり、前記第五方向は前記第四方向の反対方向である裁断手段と
     を備えた製本装置。
    It is movable in the first direction and the second direction, and a plurality of sheets can be stacked substantially in parallel with the third direction while being in a predetermined position. The first direction and the second direction are opposite to each other. The stacking means in which the third direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction;
    In the state where the stacking unit is in the predetermined position, an adhesive portion can be formed on a specific end surface of the sheet bundle, the sheet bundle is the plurality of sheets stacked by the stacking unit, and the specific end surface is the sheet. An adhesive portion forming means which is an end surface of the bundle on the first direction side;
    When the cover can be held and the stacking means moves in the first direction from the predetermined position, the cover is attached to the sheet bundle via the adhesive portion formed on the specific end surface. A cover attachment means that is possible;
    When the stacking unit moves in the second direction from the predetermined position, the second direction side edge and the fourth direction side edge of the booklet that is the sheet bundle to which the cover is attached , And at least one of the edges on the fifth direction side can be cut, and the fourth direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction, the second direction, and the third direction, and the fifth direction Is a bookbinding apparatus comprising cutting means that is opposite to the fourth direction.
  2.  供給された用紙が積み重ねられる平面である載置面を有する用紙集積部と、
     前記用紙集積部に向けて前記用紙を略水平に搬送し、搬送した前記用紙を前記載置面の上方に排出することが可能な搬送手段と、
     前記載置面よりも上方に設けられ、前記搬送手段によって排出され前記載置面に向けて落下する前記用紙の第一端部に下方から接触する部材であり、前記第一端部は、前記用紙の搬送方向と直交し且つ略水平な方向である第一方向の端部である接触部材と、
     第一規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延び、前記載置面に向けて落下する前記用紙の第二端部に接触して、前記用紙が前記第一規制位置よりも第二方向に移動することを規制する部材であり、前記第二方向は前記第一方向とは反対方向であり、前記第二端部は前記第二方向の端部であり、前記第一規制位置は予め定められた前記第二端部の適正位置である第一規制部材と
     を備えた用紙搬送装置。
    A paper stacking unit having a placement surface which is a flat surface on which the supplied papers are stacked;
    Transporting means capable of transporting the paper substantially horizontally toward the paper stacking unit and discharging the transported paper above the placement surface;
    The member is provided above the placement surface, and is a member that comes into contact with the first end portion of the paper that is discharged by the conveying means and falls toward the placement surface from below, and the first end portion is A contact member that is an end portion in a first direction that is orthogonal to the paper transport direction and is substantially horizontal;
    The sheet moves in the second direction from the first restriction position by contacting the second end of the sheet that extends in the substantially vertical direction along the first restriction position and falls toward the placement surface. The second direction is a direction opposite to the first direction, the second end is an end in the second direction, and the first restriction position is predetermined. And a first restricting member that is an appropriate position of the second end.
  3.  第二規制位置に沿って略鉛直方向に延び、前記載置面に向けて落下する前記用紙の前記搬送方向の下流側端部に接触して、前記用紙が前記第二規制位置よりも前記搬送方向の下流側に移動することを規制する部材であり、前記第二規制位置は予め定められた前記下流側端部の適正位置である第二規制部材を備えた請求項2に記載の用紙搬送装置。 The sheet extends in a substantially vertical direction along the second restriction position and contacts the downstream end in the conveyance direction of the sheet falling toward the placement surface, and the sheet is conveyed more than the second restriction position. The sheet conveyance according to claim 2, wherein the second conveyance position is a member that regulates movement toward the downstream side in the direction, and the second regulation position includes a second regulation member that is a predetermined appropriate position of the downstream end. apparatus.
  4.  前記接触部材と前記第一規制部材との前記第一方向又は前記第二方向の距離は、前記載置面の前記第一方向又は前記第二方向の長さよりも短い請求項2又は3に記載の用紙搬送装置。 The distance of the said 1st direction or said 2nd direction of the said contact member and said 1st control member is shorter than the length of the said 1st direction or the said 2nd direction of the said mounting surface. Paper transport device.
  5.  前記接触部材は、
     前記搬送方向と略平行に延び、且つ略鉛直方向に延びる板状であり、前記搬送手段によって排出される前記用紙の前記第一端部を案内する第一壁部と、
     前記搬送方向と略平行に延び、且つ前記第一壁部から前記第二方向に延びる板状であり、前記第一壁部によって案内される前記用紙の前記第一端部に下方から接触する第二壁部と
     を備えた請求項2から4の何れかに記載の用紙搬送装置。
    The contact member is
    A first wall portion that extends substantially parallel to the transport direction and extends in a substantially vertical direction and guides the first end portion of the paper discharged by the transport means;
    A plate that extends substantially parallel to the transport direction and extends from the first wall portion in the second direction and that contacts the first end portion of the paper guided by the first wall portion from below. The sheet conveying device according to any one of claims 2 to 4, further comprising two wall portions.
  6.  前記接触部材は、前記搬送方向と略平行に延び、
     前記接触部材の前記搬送方向の長さは、前記用紙の前記搬送方向の長さの半分以上である請求項2から5の何れかに記載の用紙搬送装置。
    The contact member extends substantially parallel to the transport direction;
    The sheet conveying apparatus according to claim 2, wherein a length of the contact member in the conveying direction is at least half of a length of the sheet in the conveying direction.
  7.  用紙の第一面に画像を形成した後、前記用紙を第一搬送量で搬送して排出口から排出し、更に排出した前記用紙を前記排出口から取り込んで、前記用紙における前記第一面の反対面である第二面に画像を形成した後、前記用紙を第二搬送量で搬送して前記排出口から排出する機構を備えた画像形成装置であり、前記第一搬送量は前記用紙の一部のみを前記排出口から排出する前記用紙の搬送量であり、前記第二搬送量は前記用紙の全体を前記排出口から排出する前記用紙の搬送量であり、前記画像形成装置の前記排出口から排出された前記用紙を搬送するための用紙搬送装置であり、
     前記排出口の近傍に配置可能な板状部材であり、前記排出口から排出された前記用紙を載置可能な面、且つ前記排出口から離れる方向である案内方向に延びる面である案内面を有する搬送板と、
     第一位置よりも前記案内方向の下流側、且つ第二位置よりも前記案内方向の上流側において、前記案内面に沿って設けられた、前記用紙を前記案内方向の下流側に搬送する方向に回転可能な回転体であり、前記第一位置は前記第一搬送量で搬送された前記用紙の前記案内方向の下流側端部が載置される前記案内面上の位置であり、前記第二位置は前記第二搬送量で搬送された前記用紙の前記案内方向の下流側端部が載置される前記案内面上の位置である第一搬送ローラと
     を備えた用紙搬送装置。
    After the image is formed on the first surface of the paper, the paper is transported by a first transport amount and discharged from the discharge port, and the discharged paper is taken in from the discharge port, and the first surface of the paper is An image forming apparatus including a mechanism that forms an image on a second surface, which is the opposite surface, and then transports the paper by a second transport amount and discharges the paper from the discharge port. The second conveyance amount is a conveyance amount of the sheet that discharges the whole of the sheet from the discharge port, and the second conveyance amount is the discharge amount of the image forming apparatus. A paper transport device for transporting the paper discharged from the outlet;
    A plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of the discharge port, and a guide surface that is a surface on which the paper discharged from the discharge port can be placed and a surface extending in a guide direction that is a direction away from the discharge port Having a transport plate;
    The paper is provided along the guide surface downstream of the first position in the guiding direction and upstream of the second position in the guiding direction. A rotating body that is rotatable, and the first position is a position on the guide surface on which a downstream end portion of the paper transported by the first transport amount in the guide direction is placed; And a first transport roller that is a position on the guide surface on which a downstream end in the guide direction of the sheet transported by the second transport amount is placed.
  8.  前記第一搬送ローラを回転自在に支持し、且つ、前記案内面に沿って前記案内方向の上流側及び下流側の少なくとも一つに、前記第一搬送ローラの位置を変更可能な部材である支持部材を備えた請求項7に記載の用紙搬送装置。 A support that is a member that can rotatably support the first transport roller and that can change the position of the first transport roller along at least one of the upstream side and the downstream side in the guide direction along the guide surface. The paper conveyance device according to claim 7 provided with a member.
  9.  用紙に画像を印刷可能な画像形成装置の排出口の近傍に配置可能な板状部材であり、前記排出口から排出された前記用紙を載置可能な面、且つ前記排出口から離れる方向である案内方向に延びる面である案内面を有する搬送板と、
     前記案内面に沿って設けられた、前記用紙を前記案内方向の下流側に搬送する方向に回転可能な回転体である第一搬送ローラと、
     前記第一搬送ローラを回転自在に支持し、且つ、前記案内面に沿って前記案内方向の上流側及び下流側の少なくとも一つに、前記第一搬送ローラの位置を変更可能な部材である支持部材と
     を備えた用紙搬送装置。
    A plate-like member that can be disposed in the vicinity of a discharge port of an image forming apparatus capable of printing an image on a sheet, a surface on which the sheet discharged from the discharge port can be placed, and a direction away from the discharge port A transport plate having a guide surface which is a surface extending in the guide direction;
    A first transport roller that is a rotating body that is provided along the guide surface and is rotatable in a direction of transporting the paper downstream in the guide direction;
    A support that is a member that can rotatably support the first transport roller and that can change the position of the first transport roller along at least one of the upstream side and the downstream side in the guide direction along the guide surface. And a sheet conveying device.
  10.  前記支持部材は、予め定められた複数の基準位置の何れかに、前記第一搬送ローラの位置を変更可能であり、前記複数の基準位置はそれぞれ異なる前記用紙のサイズに対応する請求項8又は9に記載の用紙搬送装置。 9. The support member can change the position of the first transport roller to any one of a plurality of predetermined reference positions, and the plurality of reference positions respectively correspond to different sizes of the paper. 9. The paper conveying device according to 9.
  11.  前記搬送板は、前記案内方向に並んで設けられた板状の第一板部及び第二板部を含み、
     前記第一板部は、前記搬送板において前記案内方向の上流側端部に設けられ、且つ前記案内方向と直交する略水平な軸を中心に回転自在な部材であり、
     前記第二板部は、前記第一板部の前記案内方向の下流側に設けられ、且つ前記第一板部を回転自在に支持する部材である請求項7から10の何れかに記載の用紙搬送装置。
    The transport plate includes a plate-like first plate portion and a second plate portion provided side by side in the guide direction,
    The first plate portion is a member that is provided at an upstream end portion of the guide direction in the transport plate and is rotatable around a substantially horizontal axis orthogonal to the guide direction,
    The paper according to any one of claims 7 to 10, wherein the second plate portion is a member that is provided on the downstream side of the first plate portion in the guide direction and rotatably supports the first plate portion. Conveying device.
  12.  前記第一搬送ローラよりも前記案内方向の下流側において、前記案内面に沿って設けられた、前記用紙を前記案内方向の下流側に搬送する方向に回転可能である回転体である第二搬送ローラを備え、
     前記第一搬送ローラと前記第二搬送ローラとの前記案内方向の距離は、前記用紙の前記案内方向の長さよりも小さい請求項7から11の何れかに記載の用紙搬送装置。
    A second transport which is a rotating body provided along the guide surface downstream of the first transport roller and capable of rotating in the direction of transporting the paper downstream of the guide direction. With rollers,
    The paper transport device according to claim 7, wherein a distance between the first transport roller and the second transport roller in the guide direction is smaller than a length of the paper in the guide direction.
  13.  請求項7から12の何れかに記載の用紙搬送装置と、
     前記用紙搬送装置で搬送された複数の前記用紙を綴じる綴じ手段と
     を備えた製本装置。
    A paper conveying device according to any one of claims 7 to 12,
    A bookbinding apparatus comprising: a binding unit that binds the plurality of sheets conveyed by the sheet conveying apparatus.
  14.  供給される複数の用紙を第一方向に重ねた状態で保持可能な保持手段と、
     前記保持手段によって保持される前記複数の用紙である用紙束のうちで、前記第一方向と直交する第二方向の端面である用紙束端面を、前記第一方向に沿って略面一に揃えることが可能な紙揃え手段と、
     前記第一方向及び第三方向に交差し且つ前記第二方向と直交する軸線を中心に回転可能であり、接着剤が付着可能な周面を有し、前記第三方向は前記第一方向と前記第二方向とに直交する方向である塗布ローラと、
     前記周面に前記接着剤を供給可能な供給手段と、
     前記紙揃え手段が前記用紙束端面を略面一に揃えた場合に、前記保持手段及び前記塗布ローラの少なくとも一つを前記第三方向に移動させることで、前記塗布ローラが前記用紙束端面に対して前記第二方向側から近接する位置に沿って、前記塗布ローラを前記用紙束端面に対して相対移動させる移動手段と、
     前記移動手段が前記塗布ローラを相対移動させる場合に、前記塗布ローラを回転させる回転手段と
     を備えた製本装置。
    Holding means capable of holding a plurality of supplied sheets in a state of being stacked in the first direction;
    Among the sheet bundles that are the plurality of sheets held by the holding unit, a sheet bundle end surface that is an end surface in a second direction orthogonal to the first direction is aligned substantially along the first direction. Paper alignment means capable of
    It has a peripheral surface that can rotate around an axis that intersects the first direction and the third direction and is orthogonal to the second direction, and the third direction is the first direction. An application roller that is in a direction perpendicular to the second direction;
    Supply means capable of supplying the adhesive to the peripheral surface;
    When the paper aligning means aligns the end face of the sheet bundle substantially flush, the application roller moves to the end face of the sheet bundle by moving at least one of the holding means and the applying roller in the third direction. A moving means for moving the application roller relative to the end face of the sheet bundle along a position approaching from the second direction side;
    A bookbinding apparatus comprising: a rotating unit that rotates the application roller when the moving unit relatively moves the application roller.
  15.  前記回転手段は、前記周面のうち前記用紙束端面に最も近接する部分が、前記塗布ローラが相対移動する方向の上流側へ向かう回転方向に、前記塗布ローラを回転させる請求項14に記載の製本装置。 15. The rotation unit according to claim 14, wherein the rotation unit rotates the application roller in a rotation direction in which a portion of the peripheral surface closest to the end face of the sheet bundle moves upstream in a direction in which the application roller relatively moves. Bookbinding equipment.
  16.  前記回転手段は、前記周面のうち前記用紙束端面に最も近接する部分が、前記塗布ローラが相対移動する方向の下流側へ向かう回転方向に、前記塗布ローラを回転させる請求項14に記載の製本装置。 15. The rotation unit according to claim 14, wherein the rotation unit rotates the application roller in a rotation direction in which a portion of the peripheral surface closest to the end face of the sheet bundle moves toward a downstream side in a direction in which the application roller relatively moves. Bookbinding equipment.
  17.  前記第一方向は、上下方向であり、
     前記供給手段は、前記接着剤を内部に貯留可能な箱状であり、且つ前記内部にて前記塗布ローラを回転可能に保持する、前記周面の一部を前記第二方向とは反対方向に露出させる開口部を有する貯留タンクを備え、
     前記移動手段は、前記貯留タンクを前記塗布ローラと共に相対移動させる請求項14から16の何れかに記載の製本装置。
    The first direction is a vertical direction,
    The supply means has a box shape in which the adhesive can be stored inside, and holds the application roller rotatably in the inside. A part of the peripheral surface is in a direction opposite to the second direction. A storage tank having an opening to be exposed;
    The bookbinding apparatus according to any one of claims 14 to 16, wherein the moving means relatively moves the storage tank together with the application roller.
  18.  前記用紙束は、前記第一方向の両端面である第一端面及び第二端面と、前記用紙束端面と前記第一端面とを接続する部分である第一角部と、前記用紙束端面と前記第二端面とを接続する部分である第二角部とを含み、
     前記第三方向は、互いに反対方向である第四方向及び第五方向を含み、
     前記移動手段は、前記保持手段及び前記塗布ローラの少なくとも一つを往復移動させることで、前記塗布ローラを前記第四方向に相対移動させた後、前記塗布ローラを前記第五方向に相対移動させ、
     前記回転手段は、前記第四方向に相対移動する前記塗布ローラを、近接部が前記第五方向側へ向かう回転方向に回転させ、且つ、前記第五方向に相対移動する前記塗布ローラを、前記近接部が前記第四方向側へ向かう回転方向に回転させ、前記近接部は前記周面のうち前記用紙束端面に最も近接する部分であり、
     前記塗布ローラは、前記第四方向に相対移動しながら回転することで、前記用紙束端面及び前記第一角部に前記接着剤を塗布し、且つ前記第五方向に相対移動しながら回転することで、前記用紙束端面及び前記第二角部に前記接着剤を塗布する請求項14から17の何れかに記載の製本装置。
    The sheet bundle includes a first end face and a second end face which are both end faces in the first direction, a first corner which is a portion connecting the sheet bundle end face and the first end face, and the sheet bundle end face. Including a second corner that is a portion connecting the second end face,
    The third direction includes a fourth direction and a fifth direction that are opposite to each other,
    The moving means reciprocally moves at least one of the holding means and the application roller to move the application roller in the fourth direction and then move the application roller in the fifth direction. ,
    The rotating means rotates the application roller that relatively moves in the fourth direction in a rotation direction in which a proximity portion moves toward the fifth direction side, and the application roller that relatively moves in the fifth direction, The proximity portion is rotated in the rotation direction toward the fourth direction side, and the proximity portion is a portion of the peripheral surface that is closest to the end face of the sheet bundle,
    The application roller rotates while relatively moving in the fourth direction, so that the adhesive is applied to the end face of the sheet bundle and the first corner, and is rotated while relatively moving in the fifth direction. The bookbinding apparatus according to claim 14, wherein the adhesive is applied to the end face of the sheet bundle and the second corner portion.
  19.  前記第一端面は、前記用紙束の上端面であり、
     前記第二端面は、前記用紙束の下端面であり、
     前記塗布ローラは、前記軸線が上方向に向けて前記第五方向側に傾斜する姿勢で配置される請求項18に記載の製本装置。
    The first end surface is an upper end surface of the sheet bundle,
    The second end surface is a lower end surface of the sheet bundle,
    The bookbinding apparatus according to claim 18, wherein the application roller is arranged in a posture in which the axis is inclined toward the fifth direction toward the upper direction.
  20.  前記塗布ローラは、前記周面の一部が前記軸線に向かって凹む複数の凹部を備えた請求項14から19の何れかに記載の製本装置。 The bookbinding apparatus according to any one of claims 14 to 19, wherein the coating roller includes a plurality of recesses in which a part of the peripheral surface is recessed toward the axis.
  21.  前記移動手段は、前記保持手段及び前記塗布ローラのうち、前記塗布ローラを移動させる請求項14から20の何れかに記載の製本装置。 The bookbinding apparatus according to any one of claims 14 to 20, wherein the moving means moves the application roller among the holding means and the application roller.
  22.  前記供給手段は、発熱可能な発熱体を備え、前記発熱体が発熱することで溶解する熱可塑性の接着剤を前記周面に供給可能である請求項14から21の何れかに記載の製本装置。 The bookbinding apparatus according to any one of claims 14 to 21, wherein the supply unit includes a heat generating element capable of generating heat, and is capable of supplying a thermoplastic adhesive that melts when the heat generating element generates heat to the peripheral surface. .
  23.  第一方向に積み重ねられた複数の用紙である用紙束を保持可能であり、前記第一方向は互いに反対方向である第二方向及び第三方向を含む用紙保持手段と、
     前記用紙保持手段よりも第四方向側に設けられ、所定位置に供給された表紙の一部である第一部分を、前記第四方向及び第五方向から第一保持力で挟持可能であり、前記第四方向は前記第一方向と直交する方向であり、前記第五方向は前記第四方向の反対方向であり、前記第一保持力は前記第一部分が前記第一方向に移動する運動を妨げる力である第一挟持手段と、
     前記第一挟持手段に対して前記第三方向に対向配置され、前記所定位置に供給された前記表紙の第二部分を、前記第四方向及び前記第五方向から第二保持力で挟持可能であり、前記第二部分は前記第一部分よりも前記第三方向側にある前記表紙の一部であり、前記第二保持力は前記第二部分が前記第一方向に移動する運動を妨げる力である第二挟持手段と、
     前記第一挟持手段を前記所定位置から目標位置まで前記第二方向と略平行に搬送可能であり、前記目標位置は前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段によって挟持された前記表紙が対象端面に前記第四方向側から対向する位置であり、前記対象端面は前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記第四方向の端面である第一駆動手段と、
     前記第一挟持手段に前記第一部分を第一値の前記第一保持力で挟持させ、且つ前記第二挟持手段に前記第二部分を第二値の前記第二保持力で挟持させた状態で、前記第一駆動手段に前記第一挟持手段を第一搬送力で搬送させ、前記第一値の第一保持力は前記第二値の第二保持力よりも大きい力であり、前記第一搬送力は前記第二値の第二保持力よりも大きい力である第一制御手段と、
     前記第一挟持手段が前記目標位置にある状態で、前記用紙保持手段に保持された前記用紙束の前記対象端面に、前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段によって挟持されている前記表紙を取付け可能な表紙取付手段と
     を備えた製本装置。
    A sheet holding means capable of holding a sheet bundle that is a plurality of sheets stacked in a first direction, wherein the first direction includes a second direction and a third direction opposite to each other;
    The first portion that is provided on the fourth direction side of the paper holding means and that is a part of the cover sheet supplied to a predetermined position can be clamped with a first holding force from the fourth direction and the fifth direction, The fourth direction is a direction orthogonal to the first direction, the fifth direction is a direction opposite to the fourth direction, and the first holding force prevents the movement of the first portion in the first direction. First clamping means that is force,
    The second portion of the cover that is disposed opposite to the first clamping means in the third direction and supplied to the predetermined position can be clamped from the fourth direction and the fifth direction with a second holding force. The second part is a part of the cover that is closer to the third direction than the first part, and the second holding force is a force that prevents the second part from moving in the first direction. A second clamping means;
    The first clamping means can be transported from the predetermined position to a target position substantially parallel to the second direction, and the target position is the target end face of the cover sheet held by the first clamping means and the second clamping means. A first driving unit that is an end surface in the fourth direction of the bundle of sheets held by the sheet holding unit;
    With the first holding means holding the first part with the first holding force of the first value, and with the second holding means holding the second part with the second holding force of the second value The first driving means is caused to convey the first clamping means with a first conveying force, and the first holding force of the first value is larger than the second holding force of the second value, A conveying force is a first control means that is a force larger than the second holding force of the second value;
    With the first clamping means in the target position, the cover sheet held by the first clamping means and the second clamping means on the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means. A bookbinding apparatus comprising a cover attachment means that can be attached.
  24.  前記第一方向は上下方向と略平行であり、
     前記第二方向は下方向と略平行であり、
     前記第三方向は上方向と略平行であり、
     前記第四方向及び前記第五方向は水平方向と略平行である請求項23に記載の製本装置。
    The first direction is substantially parallel to the vertical direction,
    The second direction is substantially parallel to the downward direction;
    The third direction is substantially parallel to the upward direction;
    The bookbinding apparatus according to claim 23, wherein the fourth direction and the fifth direction are substantially parallel to a horizontal direction.
  25.  前記表紙取付手段は、
     前記用紙保持手段に保持されている前記用紙束の前記対象端面に接着部を形成可能であり、前記接着部は前記表紙を貼付け可能な部位である接着部形成手段と、
     前記第一挟持手段が前記目標位置にある状態で、前記用紙保持手段を接触位置まで前記第四方向に搬送可能であり、前記接触位置は前記接着部形成手段によって形成された前記接着部と、前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段によって挟持されている前記表紙とが接触する位置である第二駆動手段と、
     前記第二駆動手段に前記用紙保持手段を第二搬送力で搬送させた後、前記用紙保持手段が前記接触位置に到達する際に、前記第一挟持手段に前記第一部分を第三値の前記第一保持力で挟持させ、且つ前記第二挟持手段に前記第二部分を第四値の前記第二保持力で挟持させ、前記第三値の第一保持力は前記第一値の第一保持力よりも小さい力であり、前記第四値の第二保持力は前記第二値の第二保持力よりも小さい力であり、前記第二搬送力は前記第三値の第一保持力及び前記第四値の第二保持力よりも大きい力である第二制御手段と
     を有する請求項23又は24に記載の製本装置。
    The cover attachment means is
    An adhesive portion can be formed on the target end surface of the sheet bundle held by the paper holding means, and the adhesive portion is a portion where the cover can be attached;
    In the state where the first clamping means is at the target position, the sheet holding means can be transported in the fourth direction to the contact position, and the contact position is formed by the adhesive portion formed by the adhesive portion forming means; Second driving means which is a position where the cover held by the first clamping means and the second clamping means comes into contact;
    After the paper holding means is transported to the second driving means by the second transport force, when the paper holding means reaches the contact position, the first portion is placed on the first clamping means with the third value. The second holding means holds the second portion with the second holding force of the fourth value, and the third holding force of the third value is the first value of the first value. The second holding force of the fourth value is a force smaller than the second holding force of the second value, and the second conveying force is the first holding force of the third value. The bookbinding apparatus according to claim 23, further comprising: a second control unit that is a force larger than the second holding force of the fourth value.
  26.  前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段は、前記第一挟持手段が前記目標位置にある場合、前記表紙が前記接触位置を挟んで前記第一方向に延びる姿勢で、前記表紙を保持する請求項25に記載の製本装置。 The first holding means and the second holding means hold the cover in a posture in which the cover extends in the first direction across the contact position when the first holding means is at the target position. Item 26. A bookbinding apparatus according to Item 25.
  27.  前記第二値の第二保持力は、第五値の前記第二保持力と第六値の前記第二保持力とを含み、前記第六値の第二保持力は前記第五値の第二保持力よりも大きな力であり、
     前記第一制御手段は、前記第一挟持手段が前記所定位置から途中位置まで搬送される間、前記第二挟持手段に前記第二部分を前記第五値の第二保持力で挟持させる一方、前記第一挟持手段が前記途中位置から前記目標位置まで搬送される間、前記第二挟持手段に前記第二部分を前記第六値の第二保持力で挟持させ、前記途中位置は前記所定位置と前記目標位置との間に設けられた位置である請求項23から26の何れかに記載の製本装置。
    The second holding force of the second value includes the second holding force of the fifth value and the second holding force of the sixth value, and the second holding force of the sixth value is the fifth value of the fifth holding force. A force greater than the two holding forces,
    The first control means causes the second holding means to hold the second portion with the second holding force of the fifth value while the first holding means is transported from the predetermined position to the middle position. While the first clamping means is transported from the midway position to the target position, the second clamping means is caused to clamp the second portion with the second holding force of the sixth value, and the midway position is the predetermined position. 27. The bookbinding apparatus according to any one of claims 23 to 26, wherein the bookbinding apparatus is a position provided between the position and the target position.
  28.  前記第一挟持手段及び前記第二挟持手段の少なくとも一つは、前記第四方向に対向配置され且つ挟持位置と解放位置との間で変位可能な一対の板部であり、前記挟持位置は前記一対の板部を互いに近接する方向に移動させた位置、且つ前記一対の板部によって前記表紙が挟持される位置であり、前記解放位置は前記一対の板部を互いに離隔する方向に移動させた位置、且つ前記表紙が所定領域内を移動可能な位置であり、前記所定領域は前記一対の板部の間に形成された空間、且つ前記所定位置に供給された前記表紙が前記第三方向側から進入する空間である請求項23から27の何れかに記載の製本装置。 At least one of the first clamping means and the second clamping means is a pair of plate portions that are opposed to each other in the fourth direction and can be displaced between a clamping position and a release position, and the clamping position is A position where the pair of plate portions are moved in a direction close to each other, and a position where the cover is sandwiched by the pair of plate portions, and the release position is moved in a direction separating the pair of plate portions from each other. A position where the cover is movable in a predetermined area, the predetermined area is a space formed between the pair of plate portions, and the cover supplied to the predetermined position is on the third direction side. The bookbinding apparatus according to any one of claims 23 to 27, wherein the bookbinding apparatus is a space that enters from the front.
  29.  略水平な第一方向に延び、且つ用紙束を略鉛直方向に裁断するための刃であり、前記用紙束は略鉛直方向に積み重ねられた複数の用紙である第一カッタと、
     前記第一カッタと平行に延び且つ前記第一カッタに第二方向から対向する位置に設けられ、前記用紙束を略鉛直方向に裁断するための刃であり、前記第二方向は前記第一方向と直交する方向である第二カッタと、
     略鉛直方向且つ前記第一方向に延びる面である第一整合面を有し、前記第一整合面を第一整合位置と第一待機位置との間で移動させる第一整合手段であり、前記第一整合位置は用紙サイズの略半分の距離分、基準中心位置から第三方向に離れた位置であり、前記第三方向は前記第二方向の反対方向であり、前記用紙サイズは前記用紙の前記第二方向又は前記第三方向の長さであり、前記基準中心位置は前記第一カッタと前記第二カッタとの間の中心位置であり、前記第一待機位置は前記第一整合位置から前記第三方向に離れた位置である前記第一整合手段と
     を備えた裁断装置。
    A blade extending in a substantially horizontal first direction and cutting a sheet bundle in a substantially vertical direction, wherein the sheet bundle is a plurality of sheets stacked in a substantially vertical direction;
    The blade extends in parallel with the first cutter and is opposed to the first cutter from the second direction, and is a blade for cutting the sheet bundle in a substantially vertical direction. The second direction is the first direction. A second cutter that is orthogonal to
    A first alignment means that has a first alignment surface that is a surface extending in a substantially vertical direction and in the first direction, and that moves the first alignment surface between a first alignment position and a first standby position; The first alignment position is a position away from the reference center position in the third direction by a distance approximately half the paper size, the third direction is the opposite direction of the second direction, and the paper size is The length in the second direction or the third direction, the reference center position is a center position between the first cutter and the second cutter, and the first standby position is from the first alignment position. A cutting apparatus comprising: the first aligning means which is located away from the third direction.
  30.  前記第一整合面と平行に延びる面である第二整合面を有し、前記第二整合面を第二整合位置と第二待機位置との間で移動させる第二整合手段であり、前記第二整合位置は前記用紙サイズの半分未満の距離分、前記基準中心位置から前記第二方向に離れた位置であり、前記第二待機位置は前記第二整合位置から前記第二方向に離れた位置である前記第二整合手段を備えた請求項29に記載の裁断装置。 A second alignment means that has a second alignment surface that extends parallel to the first alignment surface, and that moves the second alignment surface between a second alignment position and a second standby position; The second alignment position is a position away from the reference center position in the second direction by a distance less than half of the paper size, and the second standby position is a position away from the second alignment position in the second direction. 30. The cutting device according to claim 29, comprising the second alignment means.
  31.  前記第二整合手段は、前記第二整合面を前記第二待機位置から前記第二整合位置まで前記第三方向に移動させ、更に前記第二整合面を前記第二整合位置から前記第二待機位置まで前記第二方向に移動させ、
     前記第一整合手段は、少なくとも前記第二整合面が前記第二整合位置から前記第二待機位置に向けて移動開始した後、前記第一整合面を前記第一待機位置から前記第一整合位置まで前記第二方向に移動させ、更に前記第一整合面を前記第一整合位置から前記第一待機位置まで前記第三方向に移動させる請求項30に記載の裁断装置。
    The second alignment means moves the second alignment surface from the second standby position to the second alignment position in the third direction, and further moves the second alignment surface from the second alignment position to the second standby position. Move in the second direction to the position,
    The first alignment means moves the first alignment surface from the first standby position to the first alignment position after at least the second alignment surface starts moving from the second alignment position toward the second standby position. The cutting apparatus according to claim 30, wherein the cutting device is further moved in the second direction until the first alignment surface is further moved in the third direction from the first alignment position to the first standby position.
  32.  前記第一待機位置と前記第二待機位置との前記第二方向又は前記第三方向の距離は、前記用紙サイズよりも大きい請求項30又は31の何れかに記載の裁断装置。 32. The cutting device according to claim 30, wherein a distance between the first standby position and the second standby position in the second direction or the third direction is larger than the paper size.
  33.  前記第二整合面は、前記第一整合面に前記第二方向から対向する位置に設けられた請求項30から32の何れかに記載の裁断装置。 The cutting apparatus according to any one of claims 30 to 32, wherein the second alignment surface is provided at a position facing the first alignment surface from the second direction.
  34.  請求項29から33の何れかに記載の裁断装置と、
     前記第一カッタによって前記用紙束が裁断される前に、前記第一カッタ及び前記用紙束の少なくとも一つを前記第二方向又は前記第三方向に移動させて、切断サイズに合わせて前記第一カッタ及び前記用紙束を相対的に位置決めする第一制御と、前記第二カッタによって前記用紙束が裁断される前に、前記第二カッタ及び前記用紙束の少なくとも一つを前記第二方向又は前記第三方向に移動させて、前記切断サイズに合わせて前記第二カッタ及び前記用紙束を相対的に位置決めする第二制御との少なくとも一つを実行し、前記切断サイズは予め定められた裁断後の前記用紙束の前記第二方向又は前記第三方向の長さである移動制御手段と
     を備えた製本装置。
    A cutting device according to any of claims 29 to 33;
    Before the sheet bundle is cut by the first cutter, at least one of the first cutter and the sheet bundle is moved in the second direction or the third direction, and the first cutter is adjusted to the cutting size. A first control for relatively positioning the cutter and the sheet bundle; and before the sheet bundle is cut by the second cutter, at least one of the second cutter and the sheet bundle is moved in the second direction or the And moving in a third direction to execute at least one of second control for relatively positioning the second cutter and the sheet bundle according to the cutting size, and the cutting size is determined after predetermined cutting. A bookbinding apparatus comprising: a movement control unit that is a length in the second direction or the third direction of the sheet bundle.
  35.  前記第一カッタを前記第二方向又は前記第三方向に移動させる第一駆動手段を備え、
     前記移動制御手段は、前記第一制御として、前記第一駆動手段に前記第一カッタを移動させることで、前記用紙束に対して前記第一カッタを位置決めする請求項34に記載の製本装置。
    Comprising first driving means for moving the first cutter in the second direction or the third direction;
    The bookbinding apparatus according to claim 34, wherein the movement control unit positions the first cutter with respect to the sheet bundle by moving the first cutter to the first driving unit as the first control.
  36.  前記第二カッタを前記第二方向又は前記第三方向に移動させる第二駆動手段を備え、
     前記移動制御手段は、前記第二制御として、前記第二駆動手段に前記第二カッタを移動させることで、前記用紙束に対して前記第二カッタを位置決めする請求項34又は35に記載の製本装置。
    A second drive means for moving the second cutter in the second direction or the third direction;
    The bookbinding according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the movement control means positions the second cutter with respect to the sheet bundle by moving the second cutter to the second driving means as the second control. apparatus.
  37.  前記第一カッタ及び前記第二カッタを互いに近接する方向に同時に移動させ、且つ前記第一カッタ及び前記第二カッタを互いに離隔する方向に同時に移動させるカッタ駆動手段を備え、
     前記移動制御手段は、前記第一制御及び前記第二制御として、前記カッタ駆動手段に前記第一カッタ及び前記第二カッタを同時に移動させることで、前記用紙束に対して前記第一カッタ及び前記第二カッタを同時に位置決めする請求項34に記載の製本装置。
    A cutter driving means for simultaneously moving the first cutter and the second cutter in directions close to each other and simultaneously moving the first cutter and the second cutter in directions away from each other;
    The movement control means moves the first cutter and the second cutter simultaneously to the cutter driving means as the first control and the second control, so that the first cutter and the second cutter are moved with respect to the sheet bundle. The bookbinding apparatus according to claim 34, wherein the second cutter is positioned simultaneously.
  38.  前記用紙束は、前記用紙束の背側の端面が綴じられた冊子であり、
     前記第一整合面は、前記冊子の地側の端面と対向する位置に設けられた請求項34から37の何れかに記載の製本装置。
    The sheet bundle is a booklet in which the end face on the back side of the sheet bundle is bound,
    The bookbinding apparatus according to any one of claims 34 to 37, wherein the first alignment surface is provided at a position facing an end surface on a ground side of the booklet.
PCT/JP2014/076160 2014-09-30 2014-09-30 Bookbinding device, paper conveyance device, and cutting device WO2016051528A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2014/076160 WO2016051528A1 (en) 2014-09-30 2014-09-30 Bookbinding device, paper conveyance device, and cutting device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2014/076160 WO2016051528A1 (en) 2014-09-30 2014-09-30 Bookbinding device, paper conveyance device, and cutting device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016051528A1 true WO2016051528A1 (en) 2016-04-07

Family

ID=55629620

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2014/076160 WO2016051528A1 (en) 2014-09-30 2014-09-30 Bookbinding device, paper conveyance device, and cutting device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2016051528A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020177978A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 Neomedias Device for the robotic printing of individually-printed books, and associated method
FR3093467A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-11 Neomedias Device for robotic printing of individually produced books and associated process.
CN112320450A (en) * 2019-08-05 2021-02-05 京瓷办公信息系统株式会社 Sheet post-processing apparatus and image forming system provided with the same
CN114102684A (en) * 2021-11-12 2022-03-01 浙江百世技术有限公司 Storage device is disassembled to carton
CN117268220A (en) * 2023-11-21 2023-12-22 高平市林业综合保障中心 Measuring device for forestry planning

Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH03245996A (en) * 1990-02-26 1991-11-01 Hiroshi Kobayashi Three way cutting machine
JPH04279396A (en) * 1991-01-08 1992-10-05 Nippo Sogo Seihon Kk Binder application device and book binding using binder
JPH0789661A (en) * 1993-09-22 1995-04-04 Ninomiya Kogyo Kk Automatic stacking device for sheet-shaped object at prescribed position and device therefor
JPH0862736A (en) * 1994-08-25 1996-03-08 Canon Inc Image forming device
JPH11171396A (en) * 1997-12-12 1999-06-29 Mita Ind Co Ltd Paper sheet post-processing device of image forming machine
JP2000006087A (en) * 1998-06-18 2000-01-11 Kyodo Seihon Kk Cutter
JP2006347691A (en) * 2005-06-15 2006-12-28 Nisca Corp Sheet accumulation device and bookbinding device using the same
JP2007062202A (en) * 2005-08-31 2007-03-15 Canon Inc Bookbinding device and bookbinding system
JP2009292036A (en) * 2008-06-05 2009-12-17 Konica Minolta Business Technologies Inc Bookbinding apparatus and image formation system
JP2011148252A (en) * 2010-01-25 2011-08-04 Konica Minolta Business Technologies Inc Post-treatment apparatus and image forming system
JP2014198441A (en) * 2013-03-29 2014-10-23 ブラザー工業株式会社 Bookbinding device
JP2014198443A (en) * 2013-03-29 2014-10-23 ブラザー工業株式会社 Bookbinding device
JP2014198442A (en) * 2013-03-29 2014-10-23 ブラザー工業株式会社 Bookbinding device

Patent Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH03245996A (en) * 1990-02-26 1991-11-01 Hiroshi Kobayashi Three way cutting machine
JPH04279396A (en) * 1991-01-08 1992-10-05 Nippo Sogo Seihon Kk Binder application device and book binding using binder
JPH0789661A (en) * 1993-09-22 1995-04-04 Ninomiya Kogyo Kk Automatic stacking device for sheet-shaped object at prescribed position and device therefor
JPH0862736A (en) * 1994-08-25 1996-03-08 Canon Inc Image forming device
JPH11171396A (en) * 1997-12-12 1999-06-29 Mita Ind Co Ltd Paper sheet post-processing device of image forming machine
JP2000006087A (en) * 1998-06-18 2000-01-11 Kyodo Seihon Kk Cutter
JP2006347691A (en) * 2005-06-15 2006-12-28 Nisca Corp Sheet accumulation device and bookbinding device using the same
JP2007062202A (en) * 2005-08-31 2007-03-15 Canon Inc Bookbinding device and bookbinding system
JP2009292036A (en) * 2008-06-05 2009-12-17 Konica Minolta Business Technologies Inc Bookbinding apparatus and image formation system
JP2011148252A (en) * 2010-01-25 2011-08-04 Konica Minolta Business Technologies Inc Post-treatment apparatus and image forming system
JP2014198441A (en) * 2013-03-29 2014-10-23 ブラザー工業株式会社 Bookbinding device
JP2014198443A (en) * 2013-03-29 2014-10-23 ブラザー工業株式会社 Bookbinding device
JP2014198442A (en) * 2013-03-29 2014-10-23 ブラザー工業株式会社 Bookbinding device

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020177978A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-10 Neomedias Device for the robotic printing of individually-printed books, and associated method
FR3093467A1 (en) * 2019-03-06 2020-09-11 Neomedias Device for robotic printing of individually produced books and associated process.
US11878543B2 (en) 2019-03-06 2024-01-23 R&D Automation Device for the robotic printing of individually-printed books, and associated method
CN112320450A (en) * 2019-08-05 2021-02-05 京瓷办公信息系统株式会社 Sheet post-processing apparatus and image forming system provided with the same
CN114102684A (en) * 2021-11-12 2022-03-01 浙江百世技术有限公司 Storage device is disassembled to carton
CN117268220A (en) * 2023-11-21 2023-12-22 高平市林业综合保障中心 Measuring device for forestry planning
CN117268220B (en) * 2023-11-21 2024-01-26 高平市林业综合保障中心 Measuring device for forestry planning

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2016051528A1 (en) Bookbinding device, paper conveyance device, and cutting device
US8160488B2 (en) Image formation processing system applying adhesive to received sheets in a bundle form
JP2008213396A (en) Bookbinding apparatus and image forming system
JP4582643B2 (en) Bookbinding apparatus and bookbinding system
JP2015168142A (en) Sheet binding apparatus and sheet conveying apparatus
JP4255412B2 (en) Image forming system
JP2004305881A (en) Adhesive coating apparatus and image forming apparatus
JP4418703B2 (en) Bookbinding apparatus, bookbinding system, and bookbinding method
JP4968385B2 (en) Bookbinding apparatus and image forming system
JP4849600B2 (en) Bookbinding apparatus, bookbinding system, and bookbinding method
JP2006088290A (en) Paper cutter, paper post-processing device and image forming system
JP2014198443A (en) Bookbinding device
JP2007045620A (en) Sheet postprocessor and image forming device
JP2008162177A (en) Adhesive application device, bookbinding device equipped therewith and image forming system
JP4802729B2 (en) Bookbinding apparatus and image forming system
JP2009292036A (en) Bookbinding apparatus and image formation system
JP4533592B2 (en) Adhesive coating apparatus and image forming apparatus
JP2020132321A (en) Sheet processing device and image formation system having the same
JP2008030298A (en) Equipment, system and method for bookbinding
JP4631614B2 (en) Bookbinding apparatus and image forming system
JP2014198441A (en) Bookbinding device
JP2015196282A (en) Bookbinding device
JP2004305880A (en) Adhesive coating apparatus and image forming apparatus
JP4881466B2 (en) Image forming system
JP2006193265A (en) Sheet stacking device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14903306

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 14903306

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1